Konica 7155 - 7165 - 7255 - 7272-SM PDF

SERVICE MANUAL
Models
7155/7165/7255/7272
JANUARY 2004
CSM-7155/7165/7255/7272
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS U.S.A., INC.

7155/7165/7255/7272
SERVICE MANUAL
JANUARY 2004
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of the possible hazards to an inexperienced
person servicing this equipment, as well as the risk of
damage to the equipment, Konica Minolta Business
Solutions U.S.A., Inc. strongly recommends that all
servicing be performed by Konica Minolta-trained serv-
ice technicians only.
Changes may have been made to this equipment to

improve its performance after this service manual was
printed. Accordingly, Konica Minolta Business Solutions
U.S.A., Inc., makes no representations or warranties,
either expressed or implied, that the information con-
tained in this service manual is complete or accurate. It
is understood that the user of this manual must assume
all risks or personal injury and/or damage to the equip-
ment while servicing the equipment for which this serv-
ice manual is intended.
Corporate Publications Department
© 2004, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS U.S.A. , INC.

All rights reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS
1 OUTLINE
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING LIST OF DIFFERENCE for 7155/7165 and
. . . . .S-1 7255/7272.....................................................................1
ITEMS
IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 1. OUTLINE

OUTLINE OF SYSTEM .............................................1-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, 7155/7165/7255/7272 PRODUCT
EXPLANATION
WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . .S-1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................1-2
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
CENTRAL CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW ....................1-4
SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S-2 DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM ......................................1-5
[1] Fixing/Web Drive Section ...........................1-5
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S-10
[2] Drum Drive Section ....................................1-6
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . S-10 [3] Developing Drive Section ...........................1-6
2 UNIT
[4] Paper Feed/Vertical Conveyance/Tray Up
SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11 Drive Section ..............................................1-7
[5] Bypass Paper Feed/ADU Pre-registration
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . .S-13
Drive Section ..............................................1-8
[6] Charging and Transfer/Separation Wire
Cleaning Drive Section...............................1-9
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[7] ADU Conveyance Drive Section ..............1-10
[8] Paper Exit Drive Section ..........................1-11
[9] Toner Supply Drive Section......................1-11
[10] Optics Drive Section.................................1-12
2. UNIT EXPLANATION
EXTERNAL SECTION........................................... 2-A-1
[1] Composition ........................................... 2-A-1
DRIVE SECTION................................................... 2-B-1
[1] Composition ........................................... 2-B-1
[2] Mechanisms ........................................... 2-B-1
[3] M2 (Drum) Control.................................. 2-B-2
[4] M4 (Fixing) Control................................. 2-B-3
SCANNER SECTION ............................................2-C-1
[1] Composition ...........................................2-C-1
[2] Mechanisms ...........................................2-C-1
[3] M11 (Scanner) Control ...........................2-C-2
[4] Exposure control ....................................2-C-5
[5] Original Read Control.............................2-C-5
[6] APS Control............................................2-C-6
[7] AE Control ..............................................2-C-7
WRITE UNIT..........................................................2-D-1
[1] Composition ...........................................2-D-1
[2] Mechanisms ...........................................2-D-1
[3] M15 (Polygon) Control ...........................2-D-2
[4] Image Write Control ...............................2-D-3
DRUM UNIT........................................................... 2-E-1
[1] Composition ........................................... 2-E-1
[2] Mechanisms ........................................... 2-E-1
[3] Separation Claw Control ........................ 2-E-2
[4] Paper Guide Plate Control ..................... 2-E-2
CORONA UNIT SECTION..................................... 2-F-1
[1] Composition ........................................... 2-F-1
[2] Mechanisms ........................................... 2-F-1
[3] Charging Control .................................... 2-F-2
[4] Transfer/Separation Control ................... 2-F-3
[5] M14 (Charger Cleaning) Control ............ 2-F-4
MODEL MANUAL REVISED EDITION DATE PAGE METHOD

7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 - REPLACEMENT
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS
1 OUTLINE
[6] M10 (Transfer/Separation Cleaning) ADU.......................................................................2-N-1

Control.................................................... 2-F-5 [1] Composition ...........................................2-N-1
[7] PCL/TSL Control .................................... 2-F-6 [2] Mechanisms ...........................................2-N-2
DEVELOPING UNIT ............................................. 2-G-1 [3] Loop/Second Paper Feed Control..........2-N-7
[1] Composition........................................... 2-G-1 [4] Paper Conveyance Control ....................2-N-9
[2] Mechanisms .......................................... 2-G-1 [5] Paper Reverse and Exit Control...........2-N-10
EXPLANATION
[3] M3 (Developing) Control........................ 2-G-2 [6] ADU Paper Conveyance/Feed

3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[4] Developing Bias Control........................ 2-G-3 Control..................................................2-N-13

[5] Dmax Control......................................... 2-G-4 FIXING UNIT .........................................................2-O-1
[6] Gradation Correction Control................. 2-G-6 [1] Composition ...........................................2-O-1
[7] Dot Diameter Correction Control ........... 2-G-7 [2] Mechanisms ...........................................2-O-1
[8] Toner Density Control............................ 2-G-7 [3] M16 (Web Drive) Control .......................2-O-3
2 UNIT
[9] FM4 (Developing Suction) Control ........ 2-G-8 [4] Fixing Temperature Control ...................2-O-4
TONER SUPPLY UNIT..........................................2-H-1 OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL ............................. 2-P-1
[1] Composition............................................2-H-1 [1] Parts Energized when SW1
[2] Mechanisms ...........................................2-H-1 (Main Power) is OFF ............................. 2-P-1
[3] Toner Level Detection Control................2-H-2 [2] Parts that Operate when SW1 (Main
[4] M12 (Toner Supply) Control ...................2-H-3 Power)/SW2 (Sub Power) is ON ............ 2-P-2
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT .................... 2-I-1 [3] Cooling Fan Control ............................... 2-P-3
[1] Composition............................................. 2-I-1 [4] Operation Panel Control......................... 2-P-6
[2] Mechanisms ............................................ 2-I-1 [5] Counter Control...................................... 2-P-8
[3] TGR (Toner Guide Roller) Control........... 2-I-2 [6] Option Control ........................................ 2-P-9
[4] Other Control........................................... 2-I-2
TRAY 1/2 (7155, 7165), TRAY 3/4 (7255/7272) 3. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
PAPER FEED UNIT............................................... 2-J-1 EXTERNAL SECTION........................................... 3-A-1
[1] Composition............................................ 2-J-1 [1] Replacing the Ozone Filter..................... 3-A-1
[2] Mechanisms ........................................... 2-J-1 [2] Replacing the Developing Suction
[3] First Paper Feed Control ........................ 2-J-3 Filter .................................................... 3-A-1-1
[4] Paper Up Drive Control .......................... 2-J-5 [3] Removing and Reinstalling the External
[5] Paper Size Detection Control ................. 2-J-6 Covers.................................................... 3-A-2
[6] No paper detection control ..................... 2-J-7 [4] Changing the Operation Panel Attachment
TRAY 1/2 PAPER FEED UNIT (7255/7272).......... 2-J-8 Angle and Removing/Reinstalling .......... 3-A-4
[1] Composition............................................ 2-J-8 [5] Resetting the Circuit Breaker ................. 3-A-6
[2] Mechanisms ........................................... 2-J-8 DRIVE SECTION................................................... 3-B-1
[3] First Paper Feed Control ...................... 2-J-10 [1] Removing and Reinstalling the Drum
[4] Horizontal Conveyance Control (Tray 1) .... 2-J-12 Motor(M2)............................................... 3-B-1
[5] Paper Up Drive Control ........................ 2-J-14 [2] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing
[6] No paper detection control ................... 2-J-15 Input Gear .............................................. 3-B-2
TRAY 3 PAPER FEED UNIT (7155/7165).............2-K-1 SCANNER SECTION............................................3-C-1
[1] Composition............................................2-K-1 [1] Screws that Must not be Removed ........3-C-1
[2] Mechanisms ...........................................2-K-1 [2] Removing and Reinstalling the
[3] First Paper Feed Control ........................2-K-3 CCD Unit ................................................3-C-1
[4] Paper Up Drive Control ..........................2-K-5 [3] Replacing the Exposure Lamp ...............3-C-2
[5] Paper Size Detection Control .................2-K-6 [4] Removing and Reinstalling
[6] No paper detection control .....................2-K-7 the Exposure Unit...................................3-C-3
BY-PASS TRAY..................................................... 2-L-1 [5] Installing the Optics Wire ....................... 3-C-4
[1] Composition............................................ 2-L-1 [6] Cleaning the Slit Glass
[2] Mechanisms ........................................... 2-L-1 and Platen Glass....................................3-C-6
[3] First Paper Feed Control ........................ 2-L-2 [7] Replacing the Scanner Motor (M11) ......3-C-6
[4] Paper Up/Down Control.......................... 2-L-3 WRITE SECTION..................................................3-D-1
[5] Paper Size Detection Control ................. 2-L-4 [1] Removing and Reinstalling
[6] No paper detection control ..................... 2-L-5 the Write Unit .........................................3-D-1
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION ................. 2-M-1 [2] Cleaning the Dust-proof Glass ...............3-D-2
[1] Composition........................................... 2-M-1 DRUM UNIT .......................................................... 3-E-1
[2] Mechanisms .......................................... 2-M-1 [1] Removing and Reinstalling
[3] Vertical Conveyance Control................. 2-M-2 the Drum Unit ......................................... 3-E-1

3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS
1 OUTLINE
[2] Installing the Coupling ............................3-E-2 PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAYS 1 AND 2
[3] Removing, Cleaning, and Reinstalling (7255/7272) ............................................................3-J-7
the Drum.................................................3-E-3 [1] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
[4] Removing and Reinstalling the Separation Feed Unit.................................................3-J-7
Claws and Separation Claw Solenoid.....3-E-4 [2] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
[5] Removing and Reinstalling the Toner Feed Tray 1 .............................................3-J-7
EXPLANATION
Control Sensor Board .............................3-E-6 [3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper Feed
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
CORONA UNIT......................................................3-F-1 Tray 2 ......................................................3-J-8
[1] Screws that Must not be Removed.........3-F-1 [4] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
[2] Removing and Reinstalling the Charging Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber ......3-J-9
Corona Unit ............................................3-F-1 [5] Removing and Reinstalling the Double
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the Charge Feed Prevention Roller Rubber.............3-J-10
2 UNIT
Control Plate...........................................3-F-2 [6] Replacing the Pre-registration and
[4] Replacing the Charging Wires................3-F-2 Feed Clutches (MCs) ............................3-J-11
[5] Removing and Reinstalling the Charging [7] Replacing the Horizontal Conveyance MC/L
Wire Cleaning Unit.................................3-F-3 and/ R....................................................3-J-11
[6] Removing and Reinstalling the PCL.......3-F-3 [8] Replacing the Wires ..............................3-J-12
[7] Cleaning the Charging Corona PAPER FEED UNIT OF TRAY 3 (7155/7165)....... 3-K-1
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Unit/PCL .................................................3-F-4 [1] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
[8] Removing and Reinstalling the Transfer/ Feed Unit................................................ 3-K-1
Separation Corona Unit ..........................3-F-4 [2] Removing and Reinstalling
[9] Removing and Reinstalling the Plunger Paper Feed Tray 3 ................................. 3-K-1
Prevention Plate .....................................3-F-5 [3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
[10] Replacing the Transfer/Separation Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber .... 3-K-2
Wires and Transfer/Separation Wire [4] Removing and Reinstalling the Double
Cleaning Block........................................3-F-5 Feed Prevention Roller Rubber.............. 3-K-2
[11] Removing and Reinstalling the TSL [5] Replacing the Pre-registration and
Unit .........................................................3-F-7 Feed Clutches (MCs) ............................. 3-K-3
DEVELOPING UNIT ............................................. 3-G-1 [6] Replacing the Wires ............................... 3-K-4
[1] Screws that must not be Removed........ 3-G-1 PAPER FEED UNIT OF TRAY 3 AND 4
[2] Removing and Reinstalling the (7255/7272) ........................................................... 3-K-7
Developing Unit ..................................... 3-G-1 [1] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
[3] Replacing the Developer ....................... 3-G-2 Feed Unit................................................ 3-K-7
[4] Cleaning the Developing Unit [2] Removing and Reinstalling
Bias shaft............................................... 3-G-3 Paper Feed Tray 3and 4 ........................ 3-K-7
TONER SUPPLY UNIT......................................... 3-H-1 [3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
[1] Replacing and Cleaning Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber .... 3-K-8
the Toner Cartridge ............................... 3-H-1 [4] Removing and Reinstalling the Double
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT..................... 3-I-1 Feed Prevention Roller Rubber.............. 3-K-8
[1] Removing and Reinstalling [5] Replacing the Pre-registration and
the Cleaning Blade .................................. 3-I-1 Feed Clutches (MCs) ............................. 3-K-9
[2] Removing and Reinstalling the Toner [6] Replacing the Wires ............................... 3-K-9
Guide Roller (TGR).................................. 3-I-2 BY-PASS FEED TRAY.......................................... 3-L-1
PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAYS 1 AND 2 [1] Removing and Reinstalling the by-pass
(7155/7165)............................................................ 3-J-1 Feed Tray .............................................. 3-L-1
[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper [2] Replacing the Paper Feed Roller/Paper
Feed Unit ................................................ 3-J-1 Feed Roller Rubber ................................ 3-L-1
[2] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper [3] Replacing the Double Feed Prevention
Feed Trays 1 and 2 ................................ 3-J-1 Roller Rubber ......................................... 3-L-2
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION................. 3-M-1
Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber...... 3-J-2 [1] Removing and Reinstalling the Vertical
[4] Removing and Reinstalling the Double Conveyance Section ............................. 3-M-1
Feed Prevention Roller Rubber .............. 3-J-2 [2] Removing and Reinstalling the Vertical
[5] Replacing the Pre-registration and Conveyance MC (MC11, MC12) ........... 3-M-1
Feed Clutches (MCs).............................. 3-J-3
[6] Replacing the Wires................................ 3-J-4

3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS
1 OUTLINE
ADU UNIT..............................................................3-N-1 [12] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing

[1] Drawing out and Reinstalling Temperature Sensors 1 and 2 ...............3-O-9
the ADU Stand........................................3-N-1 [13] Removing and Reinstalling the
[2] Cleaning the Paper Dust Thermostat (TS1) .................................3-O-11
Removing Brush.....................................3-N-1 [14] Removing and Reinstalling the
[3] Cleaning the Paper Mis-centering PS Thermostat (TS2) .................................3-O-12
EXPLANATION
(PS70)/Leading Edge PS (PS43) ...........3-N-2

3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[4] Removing and Reinstalling the

Registration MC (MC1)...........................3-N-2
[5] Removing and Reinstalling the Second
Paper Feed Unit ................................ 3-N-3-1
[6] Cleaning the Registration PS (PS44) .....3-N-4
2 UNIT

Registration Roller..................................3-N-5
Pre-transfer Roller ..................................3-N-6
[9] Cleaning the ADU Paper Reverse
PS (PS45)/Reverse/Exit PS (PS46) .......3-N-7
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[10] Removing and Reinstalling the ADU

Reverse Roller........................................3-N-9
[11] Removing and Reinstalling
the ADU Stand......................................3-N-10
[12] Removing and Reinstalling the Pre-
registration Roller .................................3-N-11
Conveyance Roller 3 and 4 ..................3-N-12
Conveyanece Roller 1 and 2 ................3-N-15
[15] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
Reverse/Exit Roller...............................3-N-17
FIXING UNIT ........................................................ 3-O-1
the Fixing Unit........................................ 3-O-1
the Fixing Unit (Top).............................. 3-O-1
the Web Cover....................................... 3-O-2
the Cleaning Web.................................. 3-O-2
[5] Replacing the Fixing Heater
Lamps (L2, L3) ...................................... 3-O-3
[6] Replacing the Fixing Heater
Lamp(L4) ............................................... 3-O-4
[7] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing
Separation Claw (Upper) Unit and Fixing
Separation Claws (Upper) ..................... 3-O-5
Separation Claw (Lower) Unit and Fixing
Separation Claws (Lower) ..................... 3-O-6
Upper Roller and Fixing Drive Gear ...... 3-O-7
Lower Roller .......................................... 3-O-8
the Decurler........................................... 3-O-8

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing ser-
vice work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
4 Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to
the copier, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that
all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this service manual was printed.
Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this service
manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while ser-
vicing the copier for which this service manual is intended.
Therefore, this service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.
Keep this service manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND

CAUTION
4 In this service manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “ CAUTION” is defined
as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,
etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and
property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier. General precaution Electric hazard High temperature
:Prohibition when using the copier.

General prohibition Do not touch with wet hand Do not disassemble
:Direction when using the copier.

General instruction Unplug Ground

S-1
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 S-1 REPLACEMENT
SAFETY WARNINGS
4 [1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY

KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design
and a solid service network.
Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects
have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unau-
thorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore
strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.
DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS
4 • Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
4 • Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, sol-
der or similar object.
• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
4 • Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by KMBT
4 • Using parts not specified by KMBT

S-2
[2] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

4 Konica Minolta brand copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met,
in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily
use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability,
the CE must perform regular safety checks.
1.Power Supply
WARNING: Wall Outlet

• Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedi-
cated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consump-
tion.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. kw
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.
4 • Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged
power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
• When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure to
observe the following precautions:
a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket
on the rear panel of the copier.
Secure the cord with a fixture properly.
4 b. If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk
of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

S-3
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
WARNING: Wiring
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same out-
let.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.

Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long
extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may
result.
WARNING: Ground Lead

• Check whether the copier is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric
shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the
following points:
a. Ground terminal of wall outlet
b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done
S-4

• Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected.
Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed
below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock:
a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.)
b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.)
c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case
of lightning.)
d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)
2.Installation Requirements
WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place

• Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile
materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
WARNING: Nonoperational Handling
• When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity

• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heat
source such as a heater.
A risk of degradation in copier performance or deformation exists.
Do not place the copier in a place exposed to cool wind.
Recommended temperature and humidity are as follows:
Temperature: 10°C to 30°C
Humidity: 10% to 80% (no dew condensation)
Avoid other environments as much as possible.
CAUTION: Ventilation
• Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarette
smoke, or ammonia gas.
Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problems
and image faults.
S-5
• The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be
harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the
room.
a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple copiers at the same time
CAUTION: Vibration
• When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sure to
install the copier in a level and sturdy place.
Constant vibration will cause problems.
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.

In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a
injury.
CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing

4 • Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service
manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the
prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do
not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a
risk of injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from

the copier and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still pow-
ered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock
exists.
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

You may get burnt.
DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered

• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check
with the copier powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external
cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be
caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.

S-6
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the
copier.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• When disconnecting connectors, grasp the connector, not the cable.

(Specifically, connectors of the AC line and high-voltage parts)
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and elec-
trode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make

sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write
unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery speci-
fied in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
S-7
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the
interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the orig-
inal location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
DANGER: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not
to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with
eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.
When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

You may be burned due to dust explosion.
S-8
DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are
highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
• Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants
on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
[3] MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to
provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
4 2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried out quickly
and KMBT must be notified.
4 3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site checks, in
accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in “Serious Accident Report/
Follow-up Procedures”.
[4] CONCLUSION
1. Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration. Therefore,
safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer engineer.
2. When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must verify the
safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.

S-9
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products mar-
keted in the United States.
This copier is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S.

Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user opera-
tion.
S-10
SAFETY CIRCUITS
This machine is provided with the following safety circuits [2] Protection by L2, L3 and L4 (Fixing
to prevent machine faults from resulting in serious acci-
Heater Lamps) Overheating Preven-
dents.
tion Circuit
[1] Overall protection circuit
[2] L2 and L3 (fixing heater lamps) overheating TS2
DCPS
prevention circuit TS1
These safety circuits are described below to provide the RL1
service engineer with a renewed awareness of them in PRCB

order to prevent servicing errors that may impair their
RL1
functions.
TH2
Control
[1] Overall Protection Circuit section L2
AC driver
section L3
CBR1
TH1
L4
NF
1. Protection by software
The output voltage from TH1 (fixing temperature
CBR2
sensor 1) is read by the CPU. If this voltage is
abnormal, L2 (fixing heater lamp 1), L3 (fixing
heater lamp 2), L4 (fixing heater lamp 3) and RL1
1. Protection by CBR1 and CBR2 (circuit
(main relay) are turned OFF.
breakers)
CAUTION:
CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instanta- Do not change the gap between the roller
neously when an excessive current flows due to a and TH1. When replacing TH1, check the
short in the AC line. specified mounting dimensions. The RL1
CAUTION: function must not be deactivated under
The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not any circumstances.
be deactivated under any circumstances.
S-11
2. Protection by the hardware circuit
The output voltages from TH1 and TH2 (fixing
temperature sensors) are compared with the abnor-
mality judgment reference value in the comparator
circuit. If the output voltage from TH1 or TH2
exceeds the reference value, L2 (fixing heater lamp
1), L3 (fixing heater lamp 2), L4 (fixing heater
lamp 3) and RL1 (main relay) are turned OFF in
hardware means.
CAUTION:
Periodically check the TH2 face contact-
ing the roller, and replace TH2 if any
abnormality is detected.
Since TH1 (fixing temperature sensor)
face does not contact the roller, check the
distance from the roller and the sensor
orientation if any abnormality is detected.
The RL1 function must not be deactivated
under any circumstances.
3. Protection by TS1 (thermostat/U) and TS2
(thermostat/L)
When the temperature of the fixing roller (upper/
lower) exceeds the specified value, TSs are turned
OFF, thus interrupting the power to L2 (fixing
heater lamp/1), L3 (fixing heater lamp/2), and L4
(fixing heater lamp/3) directly.
CAUTION:
Do not use any other electrical conductor
in place of TS1 and TS2. Do not change
the distance between the roller and TS
(thermostat).
S-12
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric
shock.
CAUTION
DO NOT INSERT
your finger into the
two RADF hinge WARNING
portions; This area generates
otherwise you may high voltage. If touched,
be injured. electrical shock may
occur. DO NOT TOUCH.
CAUTION
ATTENTION
VORSICHT
CAUTION PRECAUCION
ATTENZIONE
ATTENTION
CAUTION VORSICHT
High temperature!
Do not touch. Use care PRECAUCION
when clearing paper.
ATTENZIONE
ATTENTION
Temp rature lev e!
Risque de br lure. Soyez
prudent en retirant la CAUTION
feuille coinc e.
VORSICHT CAUTION
Hei§e OberflŠche!
Brandverletzungsgefahr.
Bei Beseitigung von
Papierstaus vorsichtig
vorgehen.
The fixing unit is
very hot. To avoide The conveyance fixing
CAUTION
PRECAUCION
ÁTemperatura alta! getting burned, DO unit is heavy. Use care DO NOT put your hand between
No tocar. Tener cuidado al
remover el papel.
NOT TOUCH. and draw it out gently; the main body and developing
ATTENZIONE
Alta temperatura!
Non toccare. Agire con otherwise you may be fixing unit; otherwise you may
prudenza nel rimuovere la
carta.
injured. be injured.
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
S-13
In the case of the 7155/7165
CAUTION
self away from.

S-14
7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK Apr. 2003 S-14 REPLACEMENT
4 In the case of the 7255/7272
The shift tray moves to and fro while

printing. DO NOT put your hand in
between the tray and tray supporting part;
otherwise you may be injured.
Also, DO NOT put your hand in the paper
exit outlet while the tray is moving;
(SF-101 Shift tray)
DO NOT put your hand

between the main
body and tray;
otherwise you may be
injured.

between the main
body and tray;
injured.
(Main body tray 1 and 2)

7272sf006
CAUTION
self away from.

S-15
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 S-14-1 ADDITION
4
Use care after opening the

paper exit outlet.
DO NOT put your hand into
it; otherwise you may be
injured.
To avoid injury, DO
NOT put your hand
on top of the
printed sheets.
Be sure to hold
both sides of the
printed sheets
when removing
them, and DO NOT
leave your hand on
the printed sheets
while the primary
(main) tray goes up.
(FS-111 Finisher)
7272sf007
CAUTION
self away from.

S-16
SCANNER SECTION
7272sf004
WRITE UNIT
7272sf005
7272sf001

S-17
REAR COVER
CAUTION
self away from.
S-18
S-16
WARNING
<PZ Puncher with Z-folding>
CAUTION
self away from.

S-19
7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK Apr. 2003 S-17 ADDITION
Blank page

7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 S-18 ADDITION
7155/7165/7255/7272 LIST OF DIFFERENCE
4 LIST OF DIFFERENCE FOR 7155/7165 AND 7255/7272

Classification 7155 7165 7255 7272 Reason
Warm-up time 5.5 minutes 6.5 minutes 5 minutes 6 minutes Change of fixing
max.(at 68 ºF max.(at 68 ºF max.(at 68 ºF max.(at 68 ºF control tempera-
rated voltage) rated voltage) rated voltage) rated voltage) ture
First copy out time 3.4 seconds or 3.1 seconds or 3.4 seconds or 3.0 seconds or CPM change
Specification
(8.5x11) shorter shorter shorter shorter

Continuous copy 55 copies 65 copies 55 copies 72 copies CPM change
speed (8.5x11) (8.5x11) (8.5x11) (8.5x11) (8.5x11)
Developer
Consumables
Toner Common to 7155/7165/7255/7272

Drum
Liner speed ·280mm/s ·320mm/s ·280mm/s ·345mm/s CPM change

Fixing section External Section Paper Feed Section Write Section Drive Section
(standard) (standard) (standard) (standard)

·185mm/s ·185mm/s ·172.5mm/s ·172.5mm/s
(thick paper) (thick paper) (thick paper) (thick paper)
Polygon motor ·33,070rpm ·37,795rpm ·33,070rpm ·40,748rpm CPM change

revolutions (standard) (standard) (standard) (standard)
·21,850rpm ·21,850rpm ·40,748rpm ·40,748rpm
(thick paper) (thick paper) (thick paper) (thick paper)
Paper feed tray 500 copies x 2 500 copies x 2 1500 copies x 1 1500 copies x 1
1500 copies x 1 1500 copies x 1 1000 copies x 1 1000 copies x 1
550 copies x 2 550 copies x 2
Cooling for devel- Duct Duct Duct + develop- Duct + develop- Improvement in
oping section ing cooling fan ing cooling fan developing
suction
Fixing upper roller Common to Common to Common to Common to

Fixing heater 7155/7255 7165/7272 7155/7255 7165/7272
lamp /1
ADU drive board Exclusively for Exclusively for Common to Common to ADU linear
ADU Section
7155 7165 7255/7272 7255/7272 speed change

Transfer and Included Included Automation of
separation corona cleaning opera-
unit tion
Image control pro- Exclusively for Exclusively for Exclusively for Exclusively for CPM change
Control
gram 7155 7165 7255 7272

Printer control pro-
gram

7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 1 REPLACEMANT
Blank page
1
OUTLINE
1 OUTLINE
1 OUTLINE
Blank page
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
OUTLINE OF SYSTEM
4
PS3 option
Cover sheet feeder [PS-351]
[PI-110] Printer controller
[IP-511]
Expansion memory unit
[MU-404/405] Key counter
Hard disk
Punch kit Expansion memory unit [HD-105]
[PK-110/120] [MU-401/402]
Adapter for PZ
[PZ-108Akit] Finisher Paper
[FS-110] exit tray
Cover sheet feeder LCT
[PI-110] [LT-402]
Punch kit Puncher with

[PK-110/120] Z-folding function
[PZ-108/109] LCT
[LT-412]
Adapter for PZ
[PZ-108Akit] Finisher
[FS-210]
7165ma1001

1-1
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 1-1 REPLACEMENT
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
PS3 option
Cover sheet feeder
[PS-351Type-A]
[PI-110]
Printer controller
[IP-511Type-A]
Expansion memory unit Key counter
[MU-404/405]
Hard disk
Punch kit [HD-105]
Expansion memory unit
[PK-110/120]
[MU-401/402]
Adapter for PZ
[PZ-108A-kit] Finisher Paper exit
[FS-110] tray
Cover sheet feeder LCT
[PI-110] [LT-402]
Punch kit Puncher with

[PK-110/120] Z-folding function
[PZ-108/109] LCT
[LT-412]
Adapter for PZ
[PZ-108A-kit] Finisher
[FS-210]
Finisher
[FS-111]
Shift tray
[SF-101]
7272ma1001

1-2
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 1-1-1 ADDITION
1 OUTLINE
Blank page
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
7155/7165/7255/7272 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

[1] Type Special ratio magnifications:
Installation type: 3 modes
Console type (floor-mounted) Zoom magnifications:
Copying method: x0.25 to x4.00 (in 1% steps)
Indirect electrostatic method Vertical magnifications:
Document tray type: x0.25 to x4.00 (in 1% steps)
Fixed Horizontal magnifications:
Photosensitive material: x0.25 to x4.00 (in 1% steps)
OPC 4 Warm-up time:
Sensitizing method: 7155 5.5 minutes max. 68°F, rated
Laser writing
7165 6.5 minutes max. voltage
4 Paper feed trays:
7155/7165: 7255 5 minutes max.
Three stacked trays (two for 500 sheets of 80 7272 6 minutes max.
g/m2 or 20 lb paper, 1500 sheets of 80 g/m2 or
20 lb paper) 4 First copy out time (FCOT)
7255/7272: Mode A4/8.5x11
Four stacked trays (1500 sheets: 64g/m2 or 17 Manual 3.4 seconds or shorter (7155)
lb x 1, 1000 sheets: 64g/m2 or 17 lb x 1, 550 3.1 seconds or shorter (7165)
sheets: 64g/m2 x 2) 3.4 seconds or shorter (7255)
Common:
3.0 seconds or shorter (7272)
By-pass tray for various paper sizes (100
sheets of 80 g/m2 or 20 lb paper) *Straight paper ejection, platen mode, life size,
LT-402 (4000 sheets of 80 g/m2 or 20 lb non AE or AES, without finisher, paper feed
paper)*1, from tray 1
LT-412 (4000 sheets of 80/m2 or 20lbs
4 Continuous copy speed (life size, copies/
paper)*1 min)
*1: Optional Size cpm
[2] Functions A4/8.5x11 55 (7155)
Applicable document types: 65 (7165)
Sheets, book, solid object 55 (7255)
Document size:
A3/11x17 maximum 72 (7272)
Copy paper size:
Continuous copy count:
• Metric area
1 to 9999
A3 to A6R, 11x17 to 8.5x11, F4
Copy density selection:
• Inch area
AE or AES, manual (9 steps)
11x17 to 8.5x5.5, A3 to B5R, F4
Arbitrary density (2 modes)
4 Wide paper (7155/7165:314 mm x 459 mm max.)
4 E-RDH memory capacity:
(7255/7272:314 mm x 458 mm max.)
Standard 64 MB
Magnifications
Maximum 320 MB (7155/7165), 576 MB
Fixed magnifications:
(7255/7272)
• Metric area
x1.00, x2.00, x1.41, x1.22, x1.15, x0.86, 0.82,
x0.71, x0.50
• Inch area
x1.00, x2.00, x1.55, x1.29, x1.21, x0.93, 0.77,
x0.65, x0.50

1-4
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
[3] Applicable Copy Paper External dimensions:
Plain paper:
High-quality paper of 60 g/m2 or 17 lb to 90 g/
m2 or 24 lb
Special paper (bypass feed only):
1140
OHP film
Blueprint master paper
(both by-pass tray and stacked trays):
Tabs
Plain paper of 50 g/m2 or 13 lb to 59 g/m2 or
650 766
16lbs
Plain paper of 91 g/m2 or 24 lb to 200 g/m2 or
(mm)
45 lb
[4] Options 4 For 7272/7255 models, the shapes of the tray
LCT: LT-402, LT-412 are different.
Key counter
4 Expansion memory unit:
[6] Maintenance
Periodic maintenance: Every 250,000 copies
MU-401, MU-404 (64 MB)
MU-402, MU-405 (128 MB)
Paper exit tray 4 [7] Consumables
Hard disk: HD-105 Developer: Common to 7155/7165/7255/7272
4 Finisher: FS-110, FS-210, FS-111 Toner: Common to 7155/7165/7255/7272
4 Shift tray: SF-101 Drum: Common to 7155/7165/7255/7272
Cover sheet feeder: PI-110 (φ80)
Puncher: PK-110, PK-120 [8] Environmental Conditions
Puncher with Z-folding: PZ-108, PZ-109 Temperature: 50°F to 86°F
Adapter for PZ: PZ-108A-kit Humidity: 10% to 80% RH
4 Printer controller: IP-511, IP-511Type-A
4 Postscript 3: PS-351, PS-351Type-A Note: The information herein may be subject to
change for improvement without notice.
[5] Particulars of Machine
Power supply:
230 VAC -14% to 10.6% 50Hz/60Hz
120 VAC ±10% 60 Hz
Power consumption:
230 V Machine : 2300 W max. (full option)
120 V Machine : 1920 W max. (full option)
4 Weight:
Approximately 447 lb (7155/7165)
Approximately 475 lb (7255/7272)

1-5
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
CENTRAL CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW

Charging corona section

RADF(DF-316)
PCL
Image write section
Cleaning section
Image read section
Toner supply section
Fixing section Developing section

Second paper feed section
Paper exit section Bypass tray
Loop roller
Paper reverse exit section
Transfer corona section
Tray 1
TSL
Tray 2 Vertical conveyance section
Tray 3
ADU
Separation corona section
Paper conveyance section
1-6
1-4
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
Charging corona section RADF(DF-322)
PCL Image write section
Cleaning section
Image read section
Toner supply section
Fixing section Developing section
Second paper feed section

Paper exit section Bypass tray
Paper reverse exit section Loop roller
Transfer corona section
Horizontal conveyance section

Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 Vertical conveyance section
Tray 4
TSL ADU
Paper conveyance section Separation corona section

7272ma1002

1-7
1 OUTLINE
Blank page
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM
[1] Fixing/Web Drive Section
Cleaning web unwinding shaft
Web SD (SD2)
Ratchet
Cleaning web wind-up shaft
FRONT
Fixing input gear
Reverse/exit switching gate
Fixing upper roller

Fixing lower roller Fixing motor (M4)
Decurler roller
Reverse gate SD (SD7)
1-9
1-5
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
[2] Drum Drive Section

Separation claw swing cam
Separation claw SD
(SD1)
Drum
Drum motor (M2)

Separation claw section
Toner conveyance screw

Toner guide roller

Drum motor (M2)
[3] Developing Drive Section
Developing sleeve
Agitator screws
Developing motor (M3)
Agitator wheel
1-10
1-6
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
[4] Paper Feed/Vertical Conveyance/Tray Up Drive Sections
Paper feed roller

Paper feed MC (MC3/5/7) Pre-registration MC (MC4/6/8)
Feed roller
Pre-registration roller
Double feed prevention roller

Tray 1/2
Drive belt
Vertical conveyance MC/1 (MC11)

Vertical conveyance roller (upper)
Vertical conveyance roller (middle)
Paper feed motor (M1)
Up/down plate
Tray up drive motor/1 (M16)
1-11
1-7
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
Paper feed MC Paper feed roller

(MC3/5/7/9) Pre-registration MC
(MC4/6/8/10)
Feed roller

Tray 1/2/3/4
Horizontal conveyance roller/L Horizontal conveyance MC/L (MC15)
Drive belt Horizontal conveyance MC/R (MC16)
Horizontal conveyance roller/R
Drive belt
Vertical conveyance roller (lower)

Up/down plate
7272ma1003

1-12
1 OUTLINE
Blank page
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
[5] Bypass Paper Feed /ADU Pre-Registration Drive Section

Paper feed roller
Feed roller
Loop roller
ADU pre-registration roller
Loop roller motor (M6) Paper up/down
plate
Up/down motor/BP (M20)
1-14
1-8
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
[6] Charging and Transfer/Separation Wire Cleaning Drive Section
[Charging corona unit]
Charging cleaning motor (M14)
[Transfer and separation corona unit]

FRONT
Transfer/separation cleaning motor (M10)
1-15
1-9
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
[7] ADU Conveyance Drive Section

4
7255/7272
Conveyance
support roller
Pre-transfer roller
Registration roller
Registration MC (MC1)
Conveyance belt
ADU conveyance roller/4

ADU conveyance roller/3 Registration roller knob
ADU conveyance
roller/2
ADU Conveyance motor (M5)

conveyance roller/1
ADU deceleration MC (MC2)
ADU reverse roller ADU conveyance MC (MC13)

ADU reverse motor (M9)
Reverse/exit gate
Reverse/exit
motor (M8)
Reverse/exit roller
ADU gate
FRONT
Reverse/exit roller knob
7272ma1004

1-16
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
[8] Paper Exit Drive Section
Paper exit motor (M7)
Paper exit roller Exit conveyance roller
[9] Toner Supply Drive Section

Toner cartridge
Toner bottle
motor (M13)
Toner supply motor (M12)
Toner supply screws
Toner supply screw
[Rear view]
[Front view]
1-17
1-11
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
[10] Optics Drive Section
Scanner drive wire (rear)

Scanner motor (M11)
Exposure unit
FRONT
Scanner drive wire (front)
V-mirror unit
1-18
1-12
2
UNIT EXPLANATION
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Blank page
EXTERNAL SECTION
EXTERNAL SECTION
[1] Composition
Operation panel
Sub power switch (SW2) RADF
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Toner supply cover Right side cover (upper)
Front right cover

Developing suction filter cover
Front left cover
Tray 1
Bypass tray
Tray 2
Tray 3
Right side cover (lower rear)
Vertical conveyance door
Right side cover (lower middle)
Right side cover (lower front)
Main power switch (SW1)
Ozone filter cover
Paper exit tray

Optional cover
Rear cover
Left side cover
2-A-1
EXTERNAL SECTION
Operation panel
Sub power switch (SW2) RADF
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Toner supply cover Right side cover (upper)
Front right cover

Front left cover
Tray 1
Bypass tray
Tray 3
Right side cover (lower rear)
Tray 4
Tray 2 Right side cover (lower middle)
Horizontal conveyance section Right side cover (lower front)

Main power switch (SW1)
Ozone filter cover
Paper exit tray

Optional cover
Rear cover
Left side cover
7272ma2001

2-A-2
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 2-A-2 REPLACEMENT
DRIVE SECTION
DRIVE SECTION
[1] Composition
Scanner motor (M11)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Drum motor (M2)
Toner bottle motor (M13)
Developing motor (M3)
Fixing motor (M4)
Loop roller motor (M6)
7272ma2002
[2] Mechanisms *1 Independent drive mechanisms

Drive mechanisms of this machine are driven by
Mecha-
Driven Parts Method dedicated motors to ensure high-speed opera-
nism
tion and to improve serviceability of the drum unit
Drum Drum, Toner guide Gear drive (ded-
and developing performance.
drive*1 roller, Toner con- icated motor)
veyance screw, and Speeds of the drum motor (M2), fixing motor
Separation claw (M4), and loop roller motor (M6) are switched as
swing shown below according to the paper type
Develop- Developing sleeve Gear drive (ded- selected in the key operator mode, thus enhanc-
ing icated motor) ing reliability of copying on thick paper.
drive*1 4 Paper type Motor speed
Fixing Fixing roller (upper) Gear drive (ded- Thick paper 185 mm/s (7155/7165)
drive*1 icated motor)
172.5mm/s (7255/7272)
Paper Tray 1/2/3, Vertical Gear drive (ded-
feed conveyance roller icated motor) + Others 280 mm/s (7155/7255)
drive*1 (middle/lower) Belt 320 mm/s (7165)
By-pass/ By-pass feed roller Gear drive (ded- 345 mm/s (7272)
loop and ADU pre-regis- icated motor) +
drive*1 tration roller Belt
Scanner Exposure unit, V- Wire drive (dedi-
drive*1 mirror unit cated motor )+
Belt
Paper Paper exit roller Gear drive (ded-
exit icated motor)
drive*1

2-B-1
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 2-B-1 REPLACEMENT
DRIVE SECTION
[3] M2 (Drum) Control 2. Signals

a. Input signal
(1) DRUM_EM (M2 to PRCB)
M2 (drum) rotation abnormality detection signal
5V
P.GND
[H]: Rotation error (when motor speed changes
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
DRUM CONT
DRUM CLK by 6.5% more or less than the motor speed
CW/CCW
DRUM EM specified value)
PRCB M2
[L]: Normal rotation
b. Output signals
MS1 MS2
24V2 (1) DRUM_CONT (PRCB to M2)
P.GND M2 (drum) ON/OFF control signal
[L]: M2 ON
DCPS
[H]: M2 OFF
(2) CW/CCW (PRCB to M4)
M2 (drum) rotational direction switchover signal
M2 (drum) is controlled by PRCB (printer control [L]: CW rotation
board) and the motor drive power is supplied [H]: CCW rotation
from DCPS (DC power supply unit). (3) DRUM_CLK (PRCB to M2)
M2 (drum) rotational speed control clock signal
1. Operation
M2 (drum) is a motor driven by 24 VDC. It drives
the drum, toner guide roller, toner conveyance
screw, and separation claw swing. The flywheel
mechanism adopted for M2 ensures accurate
and steady rotation.
M2 starts rotating when the START button is
pressed and stops when the specified time
lapses after completion of second paper feeding
of the last copy.
When either one of the front-left and front-right
doors of this machine opens, MS1 (interlock MS/
R) or MS2 (interlock MS/L) actuates to stop sup-
plying the DC power to the motor, causing M2 to
stop.
2-B-2
DRIVE SECTION
[4] M4 (Fixing) Control 2. Signals

a. Input signal
(1) MAINM_EM (M4 to PRCB)
M4 (fixing) rotation error detection signal
5V
P.GND [H]: Rotation error (when motor speed changes
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
MAINM CONT
MAINM CLK by 6.5% more or less than the motor speed
MAINM F/R
MAINM EM specified value)
PRCB M4
[L]: Normal rotation
b. Output signals
MS1 MS2
24V2
(1) MAINM_CONT (PRCB to M4)
P.GND M4 (fixing) ON/OFF control signal
[L]: M4 ON
DCPS [H]: M4 OFF
(2) MAINM_F/R (PRCB to M4)
M4 (fixing) rotational direction switchover signal
M4 (fixing) is controlled by PRCB (printer control [L]:CW rotation
board) and the motor drive power is supplied [H]:CCW rotation
from DCPS (DC power supply unit). (3) MAINM_EM (M4 to PRCB)
M4 (fixing) rotational speed control clock signal
1. Operation
M4 (fixing) is a motor driven by 24 VDC. It drives
the fixing roller.
M4 starts rotating when the START button is
pressed and stops when the last copied paper
has been ejected.
During the warm-up operation, M4 rotates to
rotate the fixing roller.
2-B-3
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Blank page
SCANNER SECTION
SCANNER SECTION
[1] Composition
Scanner HP PS (PS61)
Exposure unit
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
APS sensor 3 (PS65)
V-mirror unit
APS sensor 1 (PS63)
Slit glass APS sensor 2 (PS64)
Optical rail (R)
Scanner
cooling fan (FM9)
Scanner drive wire
Exposure lamp
(L1)
L1 inverter (L1 INVB) A/D converter board (ADB)
CCD unit
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Light source Xenon lamp
Exposure Light source moving slit exposure,
static exposure
Scanning Platen original scanning: 1st, 2nd,
and 3rd mirrors are shifted.
RADF original scanning: Original
is moved with light source held sta-
tionary.
Lamp power Lamp cord
supply
Scanner Cooling fan
cooling
2-C-1
SCANNER SECTION
[3] M11 (Scanner) Control c. Exposure unit home position search

When SW2 (sub power switch) or the START
button is pressed, M11 (scanner) searches for
SCAN CLK U
SCAN FR V M11 the home position of the exposure unit. How-
SCAN MGN W
SCAN CUR1 ever, this operation is performed in different
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
SCAN CUR2
SCAN CUR3 S.GND ways depending on whether PS61 (scanner HP)
MODE1 SIG PS61 is ON or OFF.
MODE2 5V
MODE3 (1) When PS61 (scanner HP) is OFF
SCANHP PS
PRCB PS61 Platen APS

read position
5V2
S.GND
24V1
5V2
S.GND
P.GND
DCPS SCDB
(2) When PS61 (scanner HP) is ON
M11 (scanner) is driven by SCDB (scanner drive PS61 Platen APS

board) and is controlled by PRCB (printer control read position
board).
The related signal is PS61 (scanner HP).
1. Operation
a. Operation of M11 (scanner)
M11 (scanner) is a 3-phase stepping motor d. Read with shading correction
Shading correction is performed in different
driven by the 3-phase bipolar constant-current
ways depending on whether SW2 (sub power) is
drive method. The motor is turned ON/OFF by ON or the START button is ON. When shading
supplying/stopping clock pulses. correction starts, the exposure unit is at the
The rotational speed, direction, and amount of home position and PS61 (scanner HP) is OFF.
movement of M11 is determined by the incre- (1) When SW2 (sub power) is ON
ment of the driving step count. This count is reset L1 (exposure lamp) turns ON. Next, M11 (scan-
each time PS61 (scanner HP) is turned ON or ner) moves the exposure unit toward the paper
OFF by the exposure unit. exit side. After being driven by the specified num-
ber of steps, M11 stops, thus reading the light
b. Movement speed of the exposure unit
reflected by the white reference plate installed
Scanning speed underneath the glass stopper plate and perform-
4 Operation mode Movement speed ing the first white correction. Next, M11 moves
Scan (1:1) 320 mm/s (7155/7165) the exposure unit toward the paper exit side.
After being driven by the specified number of
357 mm/s (7255/7272) steps, M11 performs the second white correc-
Return 640 mm/s tion.
Then, L1 is turned OFF for black correction,
Home position search 247 mm/s
searching for the home position of the exposure
unit.
In each of the first and second shading correction
processes, the CCD 1 line data is read to com-
pare brightness levels between pixels. The
brighter data is used as white correction data.

2-C-2
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 2-C-2 REPLACEMENT
SCANNER SECTION
e. ADF copy operation

PS61 Platen APS After completion of the shading correction
read position
started by pressing the START button, M11
(scanner) moves the exposure unit toward the
First white correction paper exit side. After being driven by the speci-
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Second
fied number of steps from the position where
white correction PS61 (scanner HP) was turned ON, it stops. This
Black correction position is the exposure position for ADF copy
operation.
Then, ADF copy operation is performed. After
completion of the ADF copy operation, L1 (expo-
sure lamp) is turned OFF to start searching for
Home position search
the exposure unit home position.
(2) When the START button is ON

PS61
L1 (exposure lamp) turns ON. Next, M11 (scan-
Platen APS
ner) moves the exposure unit toward the paper
read position
exit side. After being driven by the specified num-
ber of steps, M11 (scanner) stops, thus reading
the light reflected by the white reference plate First white correction
installed underneath the glass stopper plate and
Second
performing the first white correction. Next, M11 white correction
moves the exposure unit toward the paper exit
side. After being driven by the specified number
of steps, M11 performs the second white correc-
tion.
Then, M11 proceeds to the ADF copy operation Original read position
or platen copy operation.
2-C-3
SCANNER SECTION
f. Platen copy operation 2. Signals

Platen copy operation is performed in different a. Input signals
ways depending on whether AE control is per- (1) SIG/SCANHP_PS (PS61 to SCDB to PRCB)
formed. Scanner home position detection signal
After completion of the shading correction The reference position of the home position of
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
started by pressing the START button, AE scan- the exposure unit is detected.
ning is performed in the paper feed direction if [L]: The exposure unit is detected.
the AE mode has been selected. [H]: The exposure unit is not detected.
4 EE scanning distance is different between 7155/ b. PRCB output signal
7165 and 7255/7272. (1) SCAN_CLK (PRCB to SCDB)
7155/7165: For the original paper size M11 (scanner) clock signal
7255/7272: 30mm from the leading edge of an (2) SCAN_F/R (PRCB to SCDB)
original paper M11 (scanner) rotational direction switchover
Then, exposure scanning is performed at the signal
speed corresponding to the specified magnifica- [L]: The exposure unit is moved toward the
tion by the distance corresponding to the original paper exit side.
size, thus searching for the home position. [H]: The exposure unit is moved toward the
paper feed side.
(1) Operation with AE (3) MODE1 to 3 (PRCB to SCDB)
M11 (scanner) energize switchover signals
PS61 Platen APS
(4) SCAN_CUR1 to 3 (PRCB to SCDB)
read position
M11 (scanner) energize current switchover sig-
nals
First white correction c. SCDB output signals
Second (1) U, V, W (SCDB to M11)
white correction
M11 (scanner) drive control signals
AE scanning These signals are used to control rotation of M11
(scanner). By supplying and stopping clock
pulses, the motor is turned ON/OFF and the rota-
Exposure scanning tional direction is switched.
(2) Operation without AE
PS61 Platen APS

read position
First white correction

Second
white correction
Exposure scanning

2-C-4
SCANNER SECTION
[4] Exposure Control [5] Original Read Control

EXP CONT
L1
12V2
12V2
24V GND
L1 INVB
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
CONT
LAMP.PG APR
ADRST
PDWN
GND
PRCB
TCK
/TCK
GND
5V2
S.GND RCK
/RCK
24V1
5V2 GND
S.GND LCLK1
P.GND /LCLK1
L.PG
GND
DCPS SCDB SCLK
/SEN
SDI CCD
SDO
TG ADB
L1 (exposure lamp) is driven by L1 INVB (L1 CLAMP
GND
inverter) and is controlled by PRCB (printer con- BCLAMP
GND
trol board) via SCDB (scanner drive board). D0
/D0
GND
1. Operation D1
/D1
L1 (exposure lamp) is a xenon lamp driven by the GND
D2
inverter circuit. The xenon lamp can emit a con- /D2
GND
stant light intensity and generates less heat than LCLK0
/LCLK0
other lamps, so it does not require the light inten- GND
5V2
sity control circuit that has been used in the exist- 5V2
GND
ing machines, requiring no thermal protector ICB
circuit. However, since L1 is held lit when the
exposure unit is stationary in the ADF mode,
FM9 (scanner cooling) is installed in the read
section.
2. Signals
a. Output signals
(1) EXP_CONT (PRCB to SCDB)
L1 (exposure lamp) ON/OFF control signal
[L]: L1 ON
[H]: L1 OFF
(2) CONT (SCDB to L1 INVB)
L1 (exposure lamp) ON/OFF control signal
[L]: L1 ON
[H]: L1 OFF
2-C-5
SCANNER SECTION
4 In the case of the 7255/7272 (2) ADF mode

After lapse of the specified interval since the orig-
GND inal's leading edge turned PS306 (original con-
TG
TG_OUT veyance) ON.
CLAMP
A_CLAMP
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
PRD_KEEP
GND
+LCLK
-LCLK
GND
-RCLK
+RCLK
GND
GND
+TCK
-TCK
GND
GND
SCLK
/SEN
SDI
SDO
GND
-AD_D0 CCD
+AD_D0
GND
-AD_D1 ADB
+AD_D1
GND
-AD_D2
+AD_D2
GND
-LVDSCLKO
+LVDSCLKO
GND
ADRST
APR
LVDS_PDWN
GND
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
GND
+12V
+12V
+12V
GND
ICB
7272ma2017
Original read control is performed by ADB (A/D

converter board) and CCD sensor installed in
ADB.
1. Operation
The light reflected by the exposed original is
input to the CCD sensor through the lens. The
analog voltage corresponding to the quantity of
the input light is A/D-converted in the ADB (A/D
converter board), being output to the ICB (image
control board).
a. Original read
The original read timing is as follows:
(1) Platen mode
After lapse of the specified interval since the
exposure unit turned PS61 (scanner HP) OFF.

2-C-6
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 2-C-5-1 ADDITION
Blank page
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
SCANNER SECTION
[6] APS Control Relationships between sensors and paper sizes

are as follows:
APC CONT S.GND Sensor
COVER SIG APS TIM
5V
PS51 PS65 PS63 PS64
APS.1 SIG
APS.2 SIG S.GND
Paper size
APS.3 SIG APS.1 PS63
APS 5V Min. size
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
ICB
S.GND
APS.2 PS64
APS TIMING
SIZE PS L
APS 5V
S.GND
B5R z
SIZE PS S APS.3 PS65
SIZE ANA APS 5V B5
PRCB S.GND
SIZE PS L
5V
PS309 B4 z z z
24V1 S.GND
5V2
S.GND
P.GND
SIZE PS S
5V
PS310 A4R z z
A.GND
SIZE ANA VR301 A4
3.3V
DCPS SCDB
A3 z z z
8.5 x 11R z
The APS method used in the platen mode is dif- 8.5 x 11
ferent from that used in the ADF mode. The sig-
nal read by the APS sensor or RADF's original
8.5 x 14 z z z
size detection sensor is processed by ICB 11x 17 z z z
(image control board) via SCDB (scanner drive
board). z ON
OFF
1. Operation b. APS detection timing
a. APS detection The APS detection timing differs between the
(1) ADF mode platen mode and DF mode.
The paper size is detected according to the com- (1) ADF mode
bination of ON/OFF states of PS309 (original When the RADF mode is selected or an original
size/2) and PS310 (original size/1) of the RADF's is set on the RADF original feed tray, APS detec-
original feed tray and the resistance value of tion takes place using PS309 (original size/2),
VR301 (original paper size). PS310 (original size/1), and VR301 (original
(2) Platen mode size).
The paper size is detected according to the com- (2) Platen mode
bination of ON/OFF states of PS63 (APS/1), When the RADF is closed and PS51 (APS tim-
PS64 (APS/2), and PS65 (APS/3) and the signal ing) turns ON, L1 (exposure lamp) turns ON and
read by the CCD sensor. PS63 to PS65 are used the CCD detects the reflected light to detect the
to detect the original size in the sub-scanning original size in the main scanning direction.
direction and the CCD sensor is used to detect Since RADF is still open at this time, the black
the original size in the main scanning direction. level of the sky shot (outside the original) and the
white level of the original (inside the original) are
Paper exit side detected according to whether an original is
present. At this time, the original size in the sub-
scanning direction is detected using PS63 to
PS65 (APS/1 to APS/3). When the RADF is
closed completely and PS311 (ADF open/close)
PS65 turns ON, CCD reads the white level of the platen
PS63 PS64 cover and the black level in the original. Among
the two original sizes detected as discussed
above, the larger size is determined as the orig-
inal size in the main scanning direction.
Photo sensor
LED
2-C-8
2-C-6
SCANNER SECTION
2. Signals [7] AE Control

a. Input signals In the case of the 7155/7165
(1) APS_TIM (PS51 to SCDB)
ADF open/close detection signal 12V2
[L]: ADF is closed. 12V2
GND
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: ADF is open. APR
ADRST
(2) APS.1/APS.1_SIG (PS63 to SCDB to ICB) PDWN
GND
Paper size detection signal TCK
/TCK
[L]: Paper is detected. GND
RCK
[H]: Paper is not detected. /RCK
(3) APS.2/APS.2_SIG (PS64 to SCDB to ICB) GND
LCLK1
Paper size detection signal /LCLK1
GND
[L]: Paper is detected. SCLK
/SEN
[H]: Paper is not detected. SDI CCD
SDO
(4) APS3/APS.3_SIG (PS65 to SCDB to ICB) TG ADB
CLAMP
Paper size detection signal GND
BCLAMP
D0
[H]: Paper is not detected. /D0
(5) SIZE_PS_L (PS309 to SCDB to ICB) GND
D1
Paper size detection signal /D1
GND
[L]: Paper is detected. D2
/D2
[H]: Paper is not detected. GND
LCLK0
(6) SIZE_PS_S (PS310 to SCDB to ICB) /LCLK0
GND
Paper size detection signal 5V2
5V2
ICB
[H]: Paper is not detected.
(7) SIZE_ANA (PS301 to SCDB to ICB)
Paper size detection signal
[L]: Paper is detected.
[H]: Paper is not detected.
(8) COVER_SIG (SCDB to ICB)
Same as APS TIM signal.
(9) APS_TIMING (SCDB to PRCB)
Same as APS TIM signal.
b. Output signals
(1) APS_CONT
This signal controls ON/OFF states of APS_5V
power for driving PS63, PS64, and PS65 (APS1
to APS3).
[L]: APS_5V OFF
[H]: APS_5V ON
2-C-9
2-C-7
SCANNER SECTION
4 In the case of the 7255/7272 1. Operation

a. AE detection
GND (1) Platen mode
TG
TG_OUT The image density on an original is measured
CLAMP
A_CLAMP during AE scanning preceding the exposure
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
PRD_KEEP
GND scanning that is carried out after depression of
+LCLK
-LCLK
the START button.
GND <AE sampling area>
-RCLK
+RCLK
4 1) Normal copy
GND
GND 10 mm inside the perimeter of the original
+TCK
-TCK detected by APS. (7155/7165)
GND
GND 10 mm inside the perimeter of the scanned area
SCLK
/SEN within 30mm from the leading edge of an original.
SDI
SDO (7255/7272)
GND
-AD_D0
2) Non-image area erasure mode
+AD_D0
CCD
GND
Entire original area detected during pre-scan-
-AD_D1 ADB ning.
+AD_D1
GND (2) ADF mode
-AD_D2
+AD_D2 The image at the leading edge of the original is
GND
-LVDSCLKO read when the PRINT button is pressed.
+LVDSCLKO
GND The read data is used to measure the image den-
ADRST
APR sity on the original.
LVDS_PDWN
GND
<AE sampling area>
+5V 1) Main scanning direction
+5V
+5V 10 mm area inside the original detected by APS
+5V
+5V 2) Sub-scanning direction
+5V
GND 2-to-4 mm area from the leading edge of the orig-
+12V
+12V inal.
+12V
GND
ICB
7272ma2018
The CCD sensor detects the image density on an

original during AE scanning to select the opti-
mum copy gamma correction curve.
AE processing is controlled by the ICB (image
control board).

2-C-10
WRITE UNIT
WRITE UNIT
[1] Composition
Index sensor board (INDXSB)

Laser driver board (LDB)
Cylindrical lens 2
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Collimator lens unit
Write mirror
Cylindrical lens 1
Polygon mirror
f lens Index mirror
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method Semiconductor laser
Write mirror
Scan*1 Polygon mirror
Light source*2 1-chip, 2-beam laser diode Collimator lens
(Power: 15 mW per beam)
Reference posi- Index sensor Cylindrical lens 1
tioning
*1 Path of laser light

The light output from the semiconductor laser is Polygon mirror
radiated onto the OPC drum via the collimator
f lens
lens, cylindrical lens 1, polygon mirror, fθ lens,
cylindrical lens 2, and write mirror. Cylindrical lens 2

7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK Nov. 2001 2-D-1 REPLACEMENT
WRITE UNIT
*2 Light source [3] M15 (Polygon) Control

Conventionally, two parallel beams were gener-
ated from two laser beams. The laser diode
adopted for this machine can generate two
beams using a single chip, requiring neither fine- 24V1
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
P.GND
adjustment prism nor beam composition prism. POLM CONT
POLM CLK
POLM LOCK
M15
PMDB
PRCB
24V/1
5V/2
S.GND
P.GND
DCPS
M15 (polygon) is driven by PMDB (polygon drive

board) and is controlled by PRCB (printer control
board).
1. Operation
a. Explanation of operation
M15 is a 3-phase brushless DC motor which is
driven by the 3-phase bipolar method. The cur-
rent flowing through the coil is switched accord-
ing to the position of the rotor detected by the
position sensor (magnetic sensor) in the motor.
This motor rotates the polygon mirror to scan the
laser beams from LDB (laser driver board) in the
axial direction of the drum. Its rotation is held
constant by PLL control.
b. Rotational speed
M15 is powered by 24 VDC and its rotational
speed is as follows:
Rotational Linear
7155 7165
speed speed
37,795 rpm 320 mm/s - normal
33,070 rpm 280 mm/s normal -
21,850 rpm 185 mm/s thick paper

Rotational Linear
7255 7272
speed speed
40,748 rpm 345 mm/s - normal
33,070 rpm 280 mm/s normal -
40,748 rpm 172.5 mm/s thick paper

2-D-2
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 2-D-2 REPLACEMENT
WRITE UNIT
2. Signals [4] Image Write Control

a. Input signals In the case of the 7155/7165
(1) POLM_LOCK (PMDB to PRCB)
This signal indicates the clock synchronization 5V
SGND
state of M15 (polygon). /IND
SGND
INDXSB
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
/INDPR
[L]: Synchronous (normal) GND
[H]: Asynchronous (abnormal) VIDEO2
/VIDEO2
GND
b. Output signals LPR5V
LD5V
LD5V
(1) POLM_CONT (PRCB to PMDB) GND
VIDEO1
This signal turns ON/OFF M15. /VIDEO1
GND LDB
/ENB1
[L]: M15 ON /S/H1
/ALM1
GND
[H]: M15 OFF /ENB2
/S/H2
(2) POLM_CLK (PRCB to PMDB) /ALM2
GND
DADI
This is a reference clock signal for PLL-control- DACLK
DALD
ling M15 in PMDB.
CCD
24V1
5V2 ADB
S.GND
P.GND
DCPS ICB
5V
GND
/IND
GND
/INDPR INDXSB
/ENB
/ALM1
/S/HB1
/S/H1
GND
LD+5V
LD+5V
+5VRN
GND
-VIDEO2
+VIDEO2 LDB
GND
LOAD
DACLK
DI
GND
/ALM2
/S/HB2
/S/H2
/ALMRST
GND
-VIDEO1
+VIDEO1
GND
24V1 CCD
5V2
S.GND ADB
P.GND
DCPS ICB
7272ma2019

2-D-3
WRITE UNIT
The analog image data from the CCD sensor is

A/D-converted by the ADB (A/D converter
board), then sent to the ICB (image control
board) for data processing. The processed
image data is converted into a laser beam on the
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
LDB (laser driver board), and then the beams are

radiated onto the drum surface. Two beams are
emitted per laser diode. Two lines of image data
is written per scan.
The write start reference position is detected by
the INDXSB (index sensor board). The ICB has
an E-RDH (electronic RDH) function to store dig-
itized image data. Various editing functions can
be performed based on this data.

2-D-4
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 2-D-3-1 ADDITION
Blank page
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
WRITE UNIT
1. Operation (2) APC (Automatic Power Control)

a. Image processing After MPC is set, the ICB (image control board)
The following processing is performed by the ICB outputs an APC start instruction to LDB (laser
(image control board): driver board) at the following timing:
(1) AOC (Automatic Offset Control) <APC timing>
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
The IC on the ADB (A/D converter board) auto- LDB (laser driver board) automatically monitor
matically adjusts the analog offset voltage of the the laser drive current one line at a time, and con-
CCD sensor output so that it is at the lower limit trols it so that the light intensity remains the MPC
of the A/D converter level. value.
(2) AGC (Automatic Gain Control) (3) Write timing
During shading correction, the white reference a) Main scanning direction
plate is read to adjust the analog amplification Using INDEX signal (/IND) from INDXSB (index
factor of the CCD sensor output so that the read sensor board), the laser write reference position
level is at the upper limit of the A/D converter is determined for each scan in the drum rotation
level. direction, and the image is written onto the copy
(3) Shading correction paper according to the copy paper position
<Timing> detected by PS70 (paper mis-centering).
• When SW2 (sub power) is ON b) sub scanning direction
• At job start Specified interval after PS44 (registration)
(4) Brightness/density conversion detects the leading edge of the copy paper.
(5) AE processing
(6) Text/dot pattern judgment 2. Signals
(7) Filtering a. Input signals
(8) Magnification change processing (1) /IND (INDXSB to ICB)
(9) Copy gamma correction This is an index signal used to detect deviation of
(10) Skew correction main scanning.
(11) Error diffusion processing (2) /INDPR (INDXSB to ICB)
(12) Data compression/expansion processing This signal monitors the INDXSB (index sensor
(13) Write density control board) power supply.
b. Write [H]: Abnormal
The ICB (image control board) sends image data [L]: Normal
on a pixel basis to LDB (laser driver board) (3) /ALM1 (LDB to ICB)
according to the control signals from the PRCB This signal indicates the state of the laser 1 drive
(printer control board). current.
LDB causes the laser light to be emitted for a [H]: Normal
period corresponding to the image data. This [L]: Abnormal
laser light is radiated onto the drum surface. (4) LPR5V (LDB to ICB)
(1) MPC (Maximum Power Control) This signal monitors the LDB (laser driver board)
ICB (image control board) informs LDB (laser power supply.
driver board) of the maximum output value and [H]: Normal
sets that value for the laser beam emission. LDB [L]: Abnormal
store this value and maintain the laser beam level (5) /ALM2 (LDB to ICB)
using the APC (Auto Power Control). This signal indicates the state of the laser 2 drive
<MPC timing> current.
When SW2 (sub power switch) is turned ON [H]: Normal
[L]: Abnormal
2-D-6
2-D-4
WRITE UNIT
b. Output signals
(1) /S/H1 (ICB to LDB)
APC sampling signal for one line (for laser 1)
(2) /ENB1 (ICB to LDB)
Laser APC function ON/OFF control signal (for
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
laser 1)
Laser beam emission stops when it is OFF.
(3) /S/H2 (ICB to LDB)
APC sampling signal for one line (for laser 2)
(4) /ENB2 (ICB to LDB)
Laser APC function ON/OFF control signal (for
laser 2)
Laser beam emission stops when it is OFF.
(5) VIDEO1/VIDEO1 (ICB to LDB)
Image signal for laser 1
(6) VIDEO2/VIDEO2 (ICB to LDB)
Image signal for laser 2
(7) DACLK (ICB to LDB)
LDB (laser driver board) MPC value data trans-
mission clock signal
(8) DADI (ICB to LDB)
LDB (laser driver board) signal for MPC
(9) DALD (ICB to LDB)
LDB (laser driver board) MPC value memory
command signal
4 (10) /S/HB1 (ICB to LDB)
Sampling signal for laser bias current control
(for laser 1) (7255/7272 only)
4 (11) /S/HB2 (ICB to LDB)
Sampling signal for laser bias current control
(for laser 2) (7255/7272 only)

2-D-7
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Blank page
DRUM UNIT
DRUM UNIT
[1] Composition
Cleaning/toner recycle section

Charging
corona unit
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Separation
claw SD (SD1)
Separation
Developing unit claws
Toner guide roller (TGR)
Drum
Charging corona unit

PCL
Drum
Cleaning/toner recycle section Developing unit
Transfer and separation corona unit

TSL
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method Separation claw SD (SD1)
PCL/TSL LED
Auxiliary separa- Separation claws
tion *1
Transport assis- Ratchet wheel
tance *2
The drum unit is an integral assembly consisting

of a drum, charging corona unit, developing unit, Separation claws
cleaning/toner recycle unit, PCL, and separation
claws.
*2 Transport assistance
*1 Auxiliary separation
The thick paper conveyance ability has been
• To prevent paper jamming, three separation
improved by the use of ratchets.
claws are used to separate paper from the
drum forcibly. These separation claws are
pressed against the drum or detached from it
by turning ON/OFF the separation claw sole-
noid (SD1).
• To prevent a specific part of image-copied
paper from being stained and to prevent the
drum from being scratched, the swing mecha-
nism slides the separation claws about 8 mm
back and forth in parallel with the drum sur-
face.
2-E-1
DRUM UNIT
[3] Separation Claw Control [4] Paper Guide Plate Control
MC24V 2 GP.CONT
SD1
SPSD DRV
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
GP
5V PRCB
HV
P.GND
DRUM CONT MS1 MS2
DRUM CLK 24V2
CW/CCW
DRUM EM P.GND
M2 DCPS
PRCB
MS1 MS2
24V2
To prevent toner from adhering to the paper
P.GND
DCPS guide plate, a constant voltage is applied to the
paper guide plate. This voltage is supplied from
HV (high voltage unit) and is controlled by PRCB
(printer control board).
Separation claws are driven by SD1 (separation
claw). Separation claws are swung by M2 1. Operation
(drum). SD1 is controlled by PRCB (printer con- a. ON/OFF timing
trol board). Turning ON/OFF in sync with M2 (drum)
b. Applied voltage
1. Operation -500 VDC
a. Separation claw ON/OFF control
SD1 (separation claw) is a pull-type solenoid 2. Signal
powered by 24 VDC. It turns ON to press sepa- a. Output signal
ration claws against the drum to help image-cop- (1) GP. CONT (PRCB to HV)
ied paper separate. This signal controls turning ON/OFF the voltage
(1) SD1 (separation claw) operation timing application to the paper guide plate.
SD1 turns ON after a lapse of specified time from [L]: Voltage applied
turning ON of PS43 (leading edge) of the second [H]: Voltage not applied
paper feed section. It turns OFF after a lapse of
the time set by PRCB (printer control board).
b. Separation claw swing control
Separation claws are swung by M2 (drum) via the
cam mechanism.
2. Signals
a. Output signal
(1) SPSD_DRV (PRCB to DCDB)
SD1 (separation claw) drive control signal
[L]: SD1 ON
[H]: SD1 OFF
2-E-2
CORONA UNIT SECTION
CORONA UNIT SECTION

[1] Composition
<Charging corona unit> <Transfer and separation corona unit>
Transfer entrance Guide rollers
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Charging control plate guide plate
Transfer
Charging corona wire corona
wire
Plunging prevention
plate (rear)
Separation
corona wire
PCL
Plunging prevention
plate (front)
Charging wire cleaning
motor (M14)
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Charging Scorotron (DC negative
corona discharge)
Discharging wire: Tungsten,
0.06 mm dia. (gold-plated skin
path, with automatic wire
cleaner)
Grid control: Gold-plated
stainless plate
Transfer DC positive corona discharge
Discharging wire: Oxide film
tungsten, 0.06 mm dia., with
automatic wire cleaner
Separation AC/DC corona discharge
Discharging wire: Oxide film
tungsten, 0.06 mm dia., with
automatic wire cleaner
2-F-1
CORONA UNIT SECTION
[3] Charging Control b. Output signals

(1) C.CONT (PRCB to HV)
C.CONT
EM(C).SIG This signal turns ON/OFF the charging wire.
TXD
CLK
[L]: Charging voltage ON
LATCH CHARGING [H]: Charging voltage OFF
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
PRCB
HV (2) TXD (PRCB to HV)
MS1 MS2
24V2
Output level of each high voltage electrode.
P.GND Serial data signal for control
DCPS
(3) CLK (PRCB to HV)
Clock signal for TXD
The current output to the charging wire and the (4) LATCH (PRCB to HV)
voltage applied to the grid are supplied from HV Latch signal for TXD
(high voltage unit) and they are controlled by
PRCB (printer control board).
The levels of outputs to these are transmitted
using 8-bit serial data. This serial data includes
the level information for all outputs driven by HV,
excluding the ON/OFF control signal. Accord-
ingly, a separate signal line is provided to turn
ON/OFF only the charging wire output and the
grid output at the same time.
1. Operation
a. Charging
A Scorotron charging method is used. 24 VDC
supplied from DCPS is raised to a negative DC
voltage which is then discharged after being
applied to the charging wire.
Charge output range: -600 µA to -1200 µA
b. Grid voltage
The grid voltage is output from HV to the charg-
ing plate.
Grid voltage output range: -500 V to -1000 V
2. Signals
a. Input signal
(1) EM (C).SIG (HV to PRCB)
This signal indicates the leak or short state of the
charging corona unit.
[L]: Normal
[H]: Abnormal
2-F-2
CORONA UNIT SECTION
[4] Transfer/Separation Control b. PRCB output signals

(1) T.CONT (PRCB to HV)
T.CONT This signal turns ON/OFF the voltage applied to
EM(T).SIG
S.CONT
the transfer wire.
EM(S).SIG
TRANSFER [L]: Transfer voltage ON
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
TXD
CLK
LATCH
[H]: Transfer voltage OFF
HV
PRCB SEPARATION (2) S.CONT (PRCB to HV)
MS1 MS2 This signal turns ON/OFF the voltage applied to
24V2
the separation wire.
P.GND
DCPS [L]: Separation voltage ON
[H]: Separation voltage OFF
The voltages applied to the transfer wire and
separation wire is supplied from HV (high voltage
unit) and are controlled by PRCB (printer control
board). The levels of outputs to these wires are
transmitted using 8-bit serial data. This serial
data includes the level information for all outputs
driven by HV, excluding the ON/OFF control sig-
nal. Accordingly, a separate signal line is pro-
vided to turn ON/OFF only the transfer wire or
separation wire.
1. Operation
a. Transfer
Positive DC high voltage is used for transfer.
Transfer DC output range: 50 µA to 600 µA
b. Separation
AC high voltage and negative DC voltage are
used for separation.
Separation AC output range: 4kV to 5.7kV
Separation DC output range: 0 µA to -400 µA
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) EM (T) .SIG (HV to PRCB)
transfer corona unit.
[L]: Normal
[H]: Abnormal
(2) EM (S) .SIG (HV to PRCB)
separation corona unit.
[L]: Normal
[H]: Abnormal
2-F-3
CORONA UNIT SECTION
[5] M14 (Charger Cleaning) Control 2. Signals

a. Output signal
(1) CHGM_A, B (PRCB to M14)
CHGM A
CHGM B M14 M14 (charger cleaning) drive control signal.
The drive direction of M14 is controlled by switch-
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
ing between the drive current directions of two

signals.
PRCB
Status CHGM_A CHGM_B
24V/1 Forward stroke
5V/2 H L
S.GND of cleaning
P.GND
Backward stroke
L H
DCPS of cleaning
Stop L L
M14 (charger cleaning) is a DC motor powered
by 24 VDC and is controlled by PRCB (printer
control board).
1. Operation
a. Purpose of driving
M14 (charger cleaning) is used to drive the
charging wire cleaning unit.
b. Operation timing
The charging wires are cleaned when SW2 (sub
power) is turned ON and when the fixing temper-
ature is lower than 122°F. They are also cleaned
after the specified copy count is reached.
* Changeable with the 25-mode DIP SW
c. Cleaning operation
Normally, the charging wire cleaning unit is on
the front side of the machine. It moves back and
forth to clean the charging wires. The movement
direction is changed by changing the rotational
direction of M14 (charge cleaning).
The rotational direction of M14 and the position
of the cleaner are detected by monitoring the cur-
rent value of M14 with PRCB (printer control
board).
2-F-4
CORONA UNIT SECTION
[6] M10 (Transfer/Separation Cleaning) 4 The rotational direction of M10 and the position
Control of the cleaner are detected by turning on/off the
PS52 (transfer/separation PS/F) and PS53
4
(transfer/separation PS/R). (7255/7272)
IO DTXD
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
IO DCLK
ADU LATCH 2. Signals
IO UCLK
REQ1 a. Input signals
IO URXD
ACK1 (1) IO_URXD (ADUDB to PRCB)
ERR OUT1
Serial data used to report the ADUDB (ADU
SEP CLM M A
M10 drive board) operation state to PRCB (printer
SEP CLM M B
PRCB control board)
(2) REQ1 (ADUDB to PRCB)
5V2 This signal indicates that sending data from
5V2 HP_PS_F PS52
S.GND SGND ADUDB (ADU drive board) to PRCB (printer con-
24V1 5V2
trol board) is requested.
5V2
S.GND
HP_PS_R
SGND
PS53 When ADUDB receives ACK1 and can send
P.GND
data, this signal stands at the [L] level.
(7255/7272)
(3) IO_UCLK (ADUDB to PRCB)
DCPS ADUDB Clock signal for IO_URXD signal
7272ma2003
4 (4) HP_PS_F (PS52 to ADUDB)
Home position detection signal of transfer/sepa-
M10 (transfer/separation cleaning) is a DC motor ration cleaning member
powered by 24 VDC and is controlled by PRCB It becomes L when transfer/separation cleaning
(printer control board) via ADUDB (ADU drive member reaches the home position.
board). Between PRCB and ADUDB, signals are 4 (5) HP_PS_R (PS53 to ADUDB)
exchanged using serial data. Reverse position detection signal of transfer/
separation cleaning member
1. Operation It becomes L when transfer/separation cleaning
a. Purpose of driving member reaches the reverse position.
M10 (transfer/separation cleaning) used to drive
the transfer/separation wire cleaning pads.
b. Operation timing
The transfer/separation wires are cleaned when
SW2 (sub power) is turned ON or when the fixing
temperature is lower than 122°F.
It is also carried out after the specified copy count
is reached.
* Changeable with the 25-mode DIP SW
c. Cleaning operation
Normally, the transfer/separation wire cleaning
pads are on the front side of the machine. They
move back and forth to clean the transfer and
separation wires. The movement direction is
changed by changing the rotational direction of
M10 (transfer/separation cleaning).
The rotational direction of M10 and the position
of the cleaner are detected by monitoring the cur-
rent value of M10 with PRCB (printer control
board). (7155/7165)

2-F-5
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 2-F-5 REPLACEMENT
CORONA UNIT SECTION
b. Output signals [7] PCL/TSL Control

(1) SEP_CLM_M A, B (ADUDB to M10)
M10 (transfer/separation cleaning) drive control MC 24V2
signal PCL CONT
PCL
The drive direction of M10 (transfer/separation IO DTXD

2 UNIT EXPLANATION
IO DCLK
cleaning) drive control signal ADU LATCH
IO UCLK
The drive direction of M10 is controlled by switch- REQ1
IO URXD
ACK1
ing between the drive current directions of two ERR OUT1
signals.
MC24V
PRCB TSL
Status SEP_CLM_MA SEP_CLM_MB TSL DR
Forward stroke of 5V2

H L S.GND
cleaning 24V1
P.GND
Backward stroke 24V1

5V2
L H S.GND
of cleaning P.GND
DCPS ADUDB
Stop L L
(2) IO_DTXD (PRCB to ADUDB) LEDs are used for PCL (pre-charging exposure
Serial data used to report the machine operation lamp) and TSL (transfer synchronization lamp).
state understood by PRCB (printer control PCL is driven by the PRCB (printer control
board) to ADUDB (ADU drive board) board). TSL is driven by ADUDB (ADU drive
(3) IO_DCLK (PRCB to ADUDB) board). PCL and TSL are controlled by PRCB .
Clock signal for IO_DTXD signal
(4) ADU_LATCH (PRCB to ADUDB) 1. Operation
Latch signal for IO_DTXD signal PCL turns ON when the START button is
(5) ACK1 (PRCB to ADUDB) pressed. It is turned OFF after a lapse of the
Reception acknowledgment signal. It is sent specified time from turning ON of PS37 (paper
each time PRCB (printer control board) receives exit). TSL turns ON after a lapse of the specified
one-byte data from ADUDB (ADU drive board). time from turning ON of PS43 (leading edge) of
When PRCB receives REQ1 and can receive the second paper feed section. It turns OFF after
data, this signal stands at the [L] level. a lapse of the specified time from detection of the
(6) ERR_OUT1 (PRCB to ADUDB) trailing edge of copy paper.
This signal requires resending of data when
PRCB (printer control board) has failed in data 2. Signals
reception from ADUDB (ADU drive board) due to a. Output signals
an error. (1) PCL CONT (PRCB to PCL)
PCL ON/OFF control signal
[L]: PCL ON
[H]: PCL OFF
(2) TSL_DR (ADUDB to TSL)
TSL ON/OFF control signal
[L]: TSL ON
[H]: TSL OFF
2-F-6
DEVELOPING UNIT
DEVELOPING UNIT
[1] Composition
Developing unit cover Splash prevention

sheet (upper)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Developing
regulation plate
Agitator screws
Developing Agitator
Developing sleeve Developing wheel Agitator
sleeve
regulation plate screws
[2] Mechanisms
Splash prevention sheet (upper)
Mechanism Method
Developing 2-component developer Developing
regulation plate
Developing bias DC bias
Developer Main agitator
agitation Auxiliary agitator
1. Developing drive
The developing motor (M3) drives the following
parts via the gear unit at the back:
Agitator
• Developing sleeve Developing
wheel Agitator
• Agitator wheel sleeve
screws
• Agitator screws
2. Flow of developer
The developer inside the developing unit is sup-
plied to the developing sleeve by the agitator
wheel, and maintained at a constant thickness by
the developer regulation plate (bristle height reg-
ulation plate). The developer remaining on the
developing sleeve is returned to the agitator
screws.
2-G-1
DEVELOPING UNIT
[3] M3 (Developing) Control 2. Signals

a. Input signals
5V (1) DEVM_EM (M3 to PRCB)
P.GND
DEVM CONT M3 (developing) abnormality detection signal
DEVM CLK
DEVM CW/CCW [H] Abnormal rotation (when motor speed
DEVM GAIN
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
DEVM EM changes by 6.5% more or less than the motor

PRCB M3
speed specified value)
MS1 MS2 [L] Normal rotation
24V2
b. Output signals
P.GND
(1) DEVM_CONT (PRCB to M3)
DCPS M3 (developing) drive control signal
[L] M3 ON
M3 (developing) is controlled by PRCB (printer [H] M3 OFF
control board) and the motor drive power is sup- (2) DEVM_CLK (PRCB to M3)
plied from DCPS (DC power supply unit). M3 (developing) rotational speed control clock
signal
1. Operation (3) DEVM_CW/CCW (PRCB to M3)
M3 (developing) is a DC motor driven by 24 V. It M3 (developing) rotational direction indication
drives the developing sleeve, agitator wheel, and signal
agitator screws. [H]: CW direction rotation
M3 turns ON when the PRINT button is pressed, [L]: CCW direction rotation
and turns OFF after lapse of the specified time (4) EDVM_GAIN (PRCB to M3)
from turning OFF of the charging. M3 (developing) rotational speed range indica-
tion signal
[H]: High speed range
[L]: Low speed range
2-G-2
DEVELOPING UNIT
[4] Developing Bias Control

B.CONT
TXD
CLK
LATCH
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
BIAS
PRCB
24V1
P.GND
DCPS HV
The developing bias voltage is supplied from HV

(high voltage unit) and is controlled by PRCB
(printer control board). The output level of the
developing bias voltage is transmitted using 8-bit
serial data. This serial data includes the level
information for all outputs driven by HV, excluding
the ON/OFF control signal. Accordingly, a sepa-
rate signal line is provided to turn ON/OFF only
the developing bias.
1. Operation
Application of the developing bias voltage starts
after a lapse of the specified time from turning
ON of the START button, and stops after a lapse
of the specified time from turning OFF of PS43
(leading edge) by the last copy paper.
Developing bias output range: -300 V to -700 V
2. Signals
a. Output signal
(1) B.CONT (PRCB to HV)
Developing bias output ON/OFF control signal.
[L]: Developing bias ON
[H]:Develpoing bias OFF
2-G-3
DEVELOPING UNIT
[5] Dmax Control
12V 5V
A.GND P.GND
DMLED CONT DRUM CONT
DM MONI EX DRUM CLK
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
DJLED CONT CW/CCW

DM SIG EX DRUM EM
DRUM JSIG EX
TNLED REF
TEMP
3.3V2 M2
TCSB
5V
P.GND
DEVM CONT
DEVM CLK
DEVM CW/CCW
DEVM GAIN
DEVM EM
PRCB M3
12V2
S.GND
MS1 MS2
24V2
P.GND
DCPS
Dmax control is performed by TCSB (toner con- a. Dmax control

trol sensor board), M2 (drum), M3 (developing), (1) Method
and so on under the control of PRCB (printer Several latent images are created at the maxi-
control board). mum laser power, images are developed with the
rotational speed of the developing sleeve varied,
1. Operation then each density is read by the Dmax sensor
The purpose of Dmax control is to adjust the (PD1) on TCSB (toner control sensor board).
maximum density to the reference level for each The developing sleeve speed detected when the
machine. density has reached the reference level is
recorded as the optimum sleeve speed, allowing
developing to be performed at this sleeve speed.
(2) Timing
a) When the fixing temperature is lower than
122°F at SW2 (sub power) ON
b) Every 10,000 prints, upon completion of the
last job.
2-G-4
DEVELOPING UNIT
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) DM_SIG_EX (TCSB to PRCB)
Output voltage of Dmax detection sensor (PC1)
on TCSB (toner control sensor board)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Reference voltage: 2.5 V
(2) DM_MONI_EX (TCSB to PRCB)
This signal monitors the light reflected by the
drum surface (without toner).
The voltage applied to the Dmax detection LED
is corrected by TNLED_REF so that the output
voltage becomes 1.9 V (calibration).
Reference voltage: 1.9 V
<Timing>
Before Dmax correction
(3) DRUM_JSIG_EX (TCSB to PRCB)
This signal detects a jam caused by paper wrap-
ping around the drum. A jam is detected when
the voltage becomes 4.0 V or more.
(4) TEMP, 3.3V2 (TCSB to PRCB)
Drum temperature detection signal
b. Output signals
(1) DMLED CONT (PRCB to TCSB)
Dmax LED ON/OFF control signal
[L]: LED ON
[H]: LED OFF
(2) TNLED_REF (PRCB to TCSB)
Power supply line for PD1 LED on TCSB.
The voltage is adjusted so that the Dmax MONI
signal becomes 1.9 V.
(3) DJLED_CONT (PRCB to TCSB)
JAM LED ON/OFF control signal
[L]: LED ON
[H]: LED OFF
2-G-5
DEVELOPING UNIT
[6] Gradation Correction Control
12V 5V
A.GND P.GND
DRUM CONT
G SIG EX DRUM CLK
LED CONT CW/CCW
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
DRUM EM
TNLED REF
M2
TCSB
5V
P.GND
DEVM CONT
DEVM CLK
DEVM CW/CCW
DEVM GAIN
DEVM EM
PRCB M3
12V2
S.GND
MS1 MS2
24V2
P.GND
DCPS
Gradation correction control is performed by (2) Timing

TCSB (toner control sensor board), M2 (drum), a) When the fixing temperature is lower than
M3 (developing), and so on under the control of 122°F at SW2 (sub power) ON
PRCB (printer control board). b) Every 5,000 prints, upon competion of the
last job.
1. Operation
The gradation characteristics of the toner density 2. Signals
versus exposure amount at the image forming a. Input signals
section (drum area) are detected to obtain a lin- (1) G_SIG_EX (TCSB to PRCB)
ear relation between the image density on a doc- This signal monitors the output voltage from the
ument and the copying image density. γ sensor (PD2) on the TCSB (toner control sen-
(1) Method sor board) as well as the light reflected by the
Exposure is performed with the laser PWM var- drum surface (without toner).
ied in several steps, and development is per- The voltage applied to the gradation detection
formed at the sleeve speed obtained by Dmax LED is corrected by TNLED_REF so that the out-
correction. put voltage becomes 3.0 V (calibration).
Next, each density is read by the γ sensor (PD2) Reference voltage: 3.0 V
on TCSB (toner control sensor board) to detect <Timing>
the gradation characteristics of image density. Before gradation correction.
The gradation characteristics obtained here are b. Output signal
used as the values for correcting the laser expo- (1) γ LED CONT (PRCB to TCSB)
sure amount. Gradation detection LED ON/OFF control signal
Gradation correction control must be performed [L]: LED ON
in two ways: 1-dot PWM (for normal mode) and [H]: LED OFF
2-dot PWM (for photo mode).
2-G-6
DEVELOPING UNIT
[7] Dot Diameter Correction Control [8] Toner Density Control
12V TNSM24V
12V A.GND TNSM24V
A.GND DMLED CONT TNSM A M12
DM MONI EX TNSM AB
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
G SIG EX DJLED CONT TNSM B
LED CONT DM SIG EX TNSM BB
DRUM JSIG EX
TNLED REF
TNLED REF TEMP
3.3V2
TCSB
TCSB
PRCB
12V2
S.GND 24V1
5V2
S.GND
DCPS PRCB P.GND
DCPS
Dot diameter is detected by TCSB (toner control
sensor board) and is controlled by PRCB (printer
The density of toner is controlled by controlling
control board).
M12 (toner supply) from PRCB (printer control
board).
1. Operation
Dot diameter correction is performed to prevent
1. Operation
the 1-dot laser beam diameter from fluctuating
a. Toner density detection
due to the change in developing characteristics
The reference patch density is detected using
(caused by deteriorated developer) and soil in
the patch detection method of TCSB (toner con-
the write unit.
trol sensor board) and the corresponding analog
(1) Method
voltage signal is output to PRCB (printer control
Multiple dot pattern patches with the same con-
board), thus detecting the toner density.
densation are created to be read by the γ sensor
The PRCB compares the detected voltage with
(PD2). The laser power where the γ sensor out-
the reference value to determine whether toner
put reaches the reference voltage is used as the
must be added.
MPC value.
b. Toner supply operation
(2) Timing
Upon read of the patch, M12 (toner supply) is
a) Every 10,000 prints, upon completion of the
turned ON to supply toner. The time needed to
last job.
add toner depends on the paper size.
2. Signals
a. Output signals
(1) TNSM_A, AB (PRCB to M12)
A-phase drive signal of M12 (toner supply)
(2) TNSM_B, BB (PRCB to M12)
B-phase drive signal of M12 (toner supply)
2-G-7
DEVELOPING UNIT
[9] FM4 (Developing Suction) Control
SUCTFAN D
SFAN EM FM4
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
P.GND
PRCB
24V1
5V2
S.GND
P.GND
DCPS
FM4 (developing suction) is controlled by PRCB

1. Operation
a. ON timing
FM4 (developing suction) is turned ON when M2
(drum) is turned ON.
b. OFF timing
FM4 (developing suction) is turned OFF after a
lapse of the specified time from turning OFF of
M2 (drum).
2. Signals
a. Input signal
(1) FM2 EM (FM4 to PRCB)
FM4 (developing suction) abnormality detection
signal
[L]: FM4 is normal.
[H]: FM4 is abnormal.
b. Output signal
(1) SUCTFAN_D (ACDB to FM4)
FM4 (developing suction) drive signal
[L]: FM4 OFF
[H]: FM4 ON
2-G-8
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
TONER SUPPLY UNIT

[1] Composition
Toner cartridge
Toner bottle motor (M13)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Hopper
Toner level detection
Toner supply sensor (TLD)
motor (M12) Toner supply screws
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Toner supply Supply by screw Toner cartridge
Toner level detection Piezoelectric method

100 ± 25 g
Toner agitation*1 Agitator plate
Toner cartridge*2 Rotary cartridge
Capacity: 1000 g
Toner leakage Toner supply shutter
Toner bottle
prevention motor (M13)
*1 Toner agitation
Toner agitator plates are driven by the following
two motors through the gear unit:
Agitator plate
a) Toner supply motor (M12): Drives the toner
supply screws.
Toner supply
b) Toner bottle motor (M13): Drives the toner screws
cartrdge. Toner supply
motor (M12)
The agitator plates prevent toner from solidifying
and collecting on the toner level detection sensor
(TLD).
2-H-1
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
*2 Toner cartridge [3] Toner Level Detection Control

When the toner cartridge rotates, toner is fed to
the outlet of the cartridge through the spiral
S.GND
groove on the surface of the toner cartridge. TONER SIG TLD
T SENSE CONT
When the outlet of the cartridge faces downward,
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
5V
toner flows out of the outlet into the agitation/con- P.GND
TONERM CONT
veyance section of the toner supply unit. TONERM CLK
TONERM CW/CCW
TONERM EM
M13
PRCB
Outlet
MS1 MS2
24V2
P.GND
DCPS
90
rotation
Toner level detection is controlled by the TLD
(toner level detection sensor) and the PRCB
1. Operation
To agitation/conveyance block a. Toner level detection
of toner supply unit
A piezoelectric device is used as the TLD (toner
level detection sensor).
When the level of toner in the hopper becomes
low, the toner supply signal is output to PRCB
(printer control board). As a result, a message is
displayed on the LCD connected to OB1 (oper-
ation board/1).
b. Detection timing
The detection timing is as follows:
• Power-on
• When the front door opens or closes
• During copying
c. Toner supply to toner supply unit
When the no toner state is detected by TLD
(toner level detection sensor), M13 (toner bottle)
is turned ON to supply toner from the toner car-
tridge to the toner supply unit.
d. Detection of no toner state in toner cartridge
If the no toner state is detected by TLD (toner
level detection) after M13 has been held ON for
a specified period of time, the toner cartridge is
assumed to be empty.
2-H-2
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
2. Signals [4] M12 (Toner Supply) Control

a. Input signals
(1) TONER_SIG (TLD to PRCB)
TNSM24V
When the level of toner in the toner supply unit TNSM24V
TNSM A
becomes low, this signal goes low ([L]), display- TNSM AB M12
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
TNSM B
ing a message on the LCD connected to OB1 TNSM BB
(operation board/1).
12V
(2) TONERM_EM (M13 to PRCB) A.GND
DMLED CONT
M13 (toner bottle) abnormality detection signal DM MONI EX
DJLED CONT
[L]: M13 is normal. DM SIG EX
DRUM JSIG EX
[H]: M13 is abnormal. TNLED REF
TCSB
b. Output signals
(1) T_SENSE_CONT (PRCB to TLD)
TLD (toner level detection sensor) power control
signal PRCB
The TLD is powered only when it is detecting the
24V1
toner level. 5V2
(2) TONERM_CONT (PRCB to M13) S.GND
P.GND
M13 (toner bottle) control signal
[L]: M13 ON DCPS
[H]: M13 OFF
(3) TONERM_CLK (PRCB to M13) M12 (toner supply) is controlled by the PRCB
M13 (toner bottle) rotation speed control clock (printer control board). Toner density is detected
signal by TCSB (toner control sensor board).
(4) TONERM_CW/CCW (PRCB to M13)
M13 (toner bottle) rotational direction indication 1. Operation
signal a. Toner density detection
[H]: CW direction rotation The Dmax sensor (PD1) on the TCSB (toner
[L]: CCW direction rotation control sensor board) detects the density of the
toner control patch developed on the drum sur-
face to output the signal corresponding to the
detected density to PRCB (printer control board).
2-H-3
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
b. Toner supply
When the voltage detected by TCSB (toner con-
trol sensor board) is below the specified value,
PRCB issues a control signal to drive M12 (toner
supply). The relationship between the paper size
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
and toner supply time is summarized in the fol-

lowing table:
Paper size Supply time (sec.)
A3 1.30
B4 0.98
F4 0.98
A4 0.65
B5 0.49
B5R 0.49
A5 0.33
11 X 17 1.30
8.5 X 14 0.98
8.5 X 11 0.65
5.5 X 8.5 0.49
2-H-4
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT

[1] Composition
Cleaning blade
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Cleaning/toner recycle section
Cleaning blade
Scraper
Toner recycle MC (MC14)
Toner conveyance screw Separation Drum

claw
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method HV Terminal
Drum cleaning Cleaning blade
Toner collection *1 Toner guide roller (TGR) Cleaning blade
Toner recycle Screw conveyance + Toner

recycle MC (MC14)
*1 Toner collection
Toner removed by the cleaning blade is collected
by the toner guide roller (TGR) and removed by
the scraper, then conveyed by the toner convey-
ance screw to be reused. High pressure is
applied to the toner guide roller (TGR) to
enhance the toner cleaning ability.
*2 Toner recycle
When the drum performs preliminary rotation as
warm-up, toner recycle MC (MC14) is turned
OFF, stopping the drive force from the toner con-
veyance screw. This prevents excessive recy-
cled toner from being conveyed to the developing
unit.
2-I-1
[3] TGR (Toner Guide Roller) Control [4] Other Control

To improve durability of the cleaning blade, the
TGR.CONT
following control is performed:
TXD
CLK
a. Blade setting mode
LATCH
TGR
A blade setting mode is available in the 36 mode.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
PRCB
HV This mode will perform a task that is required
24V2
MS1 MS2 after blade replacement during maintenance,
P.GND
etc. When this mode is used, toner adheres on
DCPS the drum and then the blade cleans the drum,
preventing blade peeling.
To enhance the toner cleaning ability, voltage is 4 b. Black stripe creation control
applied to the TGR (toner guide roller). This volt- To improve durability of the blade (stabilize load
age is applied by HV (high voltage unit) under the and stabilize paper dust crushing), a black stripe
control of PRCB (printer control board). The out- of toner is adhered on the drum and then
put level of the applied voltage is transmitted cleaned.
using 8-bit serial data. This serial data includes 7155/7165: once every 10 copies
the level information for all outputs driven by the 7255/7272: once every 12 copies
HV unit excluding the ON/OFF control signal. * Changeable with the 25-mode DIP SW
Accordingly, a separate signal line is provided to
turn ON/OFF only the TGR.
1. Operation
a. ON/OFF timing
The TGR is turned ON/OFF in sync with M2
(drum).
b. TGR (toner guide roller) output range
0 to 50 µA
2. Signals
a. Output signal
(1) TGR.CONT (PRCB to HV)
TGR (toner guide roller) voltage ON/OFF control
signal
[L]: Voltage is applied.
[H]: Voltage is not applied.

2-I-2
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 2-I-2 REPLACEMENT
TRAY 1/2 (7155/7165), TRAY 3/4 (7255/7272) PAPER FEED UNIT
4 TRAY 1/2 (7155/7165), TRAY 3/4 (7255/7272)

PAPER FEED UNIT
4 Caution: Tray 1/2 of 7155/7165 and tray 3/4 of 7255/7272 have the same shape and mechanism.
Therefore, the explanation for only tray 1 and 2 shall be given here.
[1] Composition
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Drive pulley (for wire C/D)
Tray up drive motor /1/2
(M16/17) Feed roller
Paper feed roller
Side guide Side guide
Drive pulley
(for wire A/B)
End stopper
Paper size VR /1/2

Paper size PS /2-1/2-2 (VR1/2)
(PS6/12)
Paper size PS /1-1/1-2

(PS5/11)
[2] Mechanisms *1 Paper lift-up

a) Hoisting of up/down plate
Mechanism Method
Paper feed trays are driven by wires. When a
Paper lift-up *1 Up: Driven by wires
paper tray is loaded, the tray up drive motor/
Down: Falls down by its own
1(M16)/2(M17) rotates to wind the wires
weight
around the drive pulleys and consequently
Tray loading Front loading the up/down plate in the tray moves up. When
Double feed pre- Torque limiter the tray upper limit PS/1(PS2)/2(PS8) detects
vention the actuator of the roller that has been moved
1st paper feed Paper feed roller up by paper, the tray up drive motor/1(M16)/
2 (M17) stops.
No paper detec- Photosensor + Actuator
tion
Paper size detec- Width: VR
tion *2 Length: Phtosensor + Actu-
(Universal) ators (two)
1st paper feed Photosensor + Actuator
paper loop mech- + clutch
anism*3

2-J-1
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 2-J-1 ADDITION
b) Lowering of tray *3 First paper feed paper loop mechanism

When the paper feed tray is pulled out, the When paper feed starts, paper is fed to the pre-
coupling shaft of the tray is disengaged from registration roller by the feed roller and paper
the coupling gear of the tray up drive motor on feed rollers. The fed out paper operates the
the main body side, allowing the up/down actuator of the paper feed PS/1 (PS1), the paper
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
plate in the tray to fall down by its own weight. feed PS/2 (PS7) turning it ON. The feed and
paper feed rollers remain ON for a specified time
after the actuation of the paper feed PS/1 (PS1)
and PS/2 (PS7) causing a paper loop to form
Coupling gear
against the pre-registration rollers which are not
turning. In this way paper skew is corrected.
[Main body side] Pre-registration roller

Paper feed PS/1(PS1), /2 (PS7)
Feed roller
Paper feed roller
Coupling
[Tray side]
*2 Paper size detection

Length: When paper pushes the paper size
detection actuator, the paper size PS/2-
1/2-2 (PS6/PS12) and the paper size
PS/1-1/1-2 (PS5/PS11) turn ON. Thus,
the paper size is automatically deter-
mined according to the combination of
the ON/OFF states of these PSs.
Width: When the side guides of the tray are slid,
the rack gear of the side guide (front)
turns the paper size VR/1/2 gear. Thus,
the paper size is automatically deter-
mined according to the change in the
resistance value of the VR.
Paper size VR gear
Rack gear
Side guide (front)
2-J-2
[3] First Paper Feed Control
24V1 MC24V_1
P.GND T1FEED_DRV MC3
5V2
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
S.GND MC24V_1
T1PREMC_DRV MC4 Tray 1
24V2
P.GND
5V3
MS1 T1PRE_PS PS1
DCPS SGND
MS2
MC24V_1
C MC5
FEEDM_CONT
FEEDM_CLK
M1 FEEDM_F/E MC24_1
FEEDM_EM T2PREMC_DRV MC6 Tray 2
5V
P.GND 5V3
T2PRE_PS PS7
SGND
PRCB
The 1st paper feed from tray 1/2 takes place as 1. Operation
the result of the transmission of the drive force a. Operation of the MC3/5 (paper feed MC/1/2)
from M1 (paper feed) to each paper feed roller by (1) Start timing of printing of the first copy
MC3/5 (paper feed MC/1/2) and MC4/6(pre-reg- MC3/5 (paper feed MC/1/2) turns ON at the tim-
istration MC/1/2). The feed roller picks up paper ing that is determined by the P counter from
using its own weight. when copying starts, and turns OFF after a lapse
The above operations are controlled by the of the specified time from PS1/7 (paper feed/1/7)
PRCB (printer control board). Related signals turning OFF. Thus, paper skew is corrected by
are PS1/7 (paper feed/1/2) and PS25/26 (verti- forming the loop before pre-registration roller.
cal conveyance/1/2) issued from the vertical con- (2) Start timing of printing of the second copy
veyance section. When the preceding paper turns OFF PS1/7.
(3) OFF timing
When PS1/7 is turned ON.
b. Operation of the MC4/6 (pre-registration
MC1/2)
(1) ON timing
After a specified time from MC3/5 (paper feed
MC/1/2) turning ON.
(2) OFF timing
When PS1/7 (paper feed/1/2) is turned OFF.
2-J-3
2. Signals
a. PRCB input signals
(1) T1PRE_PS (PS1 to PRCB)
Paper passage detection signal (tray 1)
[L]: Detected.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: Not detected.

[L]: Detected.
[H]: Not detected.
b. PRCB output signals
(1) T1FEED_DRV (PRCB to MC3)
MC3 drive control signal (tray 1)
[L]: MC3 ON
[H]: MC3 OFF
(2) T1PREMC_DRV (PRCB to MC4)
[L]: MC4 ON
[H]: MC4 OFF
[L]: MC5 ON
[H]: MC5 OFF
[L]: MC6 ON
[H]: MC6 OFF
2-J-4
[4] Paper Up Drive Control
24V1 5V3
P.GND TIUP_PS PS2
5V2 SGND
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
S.GND
Tray 1
5V3
DCPS TIRM_PS PS4
SGND
5V3
T2UP_PS PS8
T1RISEM_24V SGND
M16 T1RISEM_D Tray 2
5V3
T2RM_PS PS10
SGND
T2RISEM_24
M17 T2RISEM_D
PRCB
Paper stacked in the tray is pushed up by trans- b. Paper up drive timing

mitting the drive force of M16/17 (tray up drive/ (1) ON timing
1/2) to the up/down plate in the tray via drive M16/17 (tray up drive/1/2) is turned ON when
wires. M16/17 are controlled by the PRCB loading of a tray is detected. (by shorting wires at
(printer control board). Related signals are PS2/ both ends of the drawer connector)
8 (tray upper limit/1/2) and PS4/10 (remaining (2) OFF timing
paper/1/2). One of M16/17 (tray up drive/1/2) is turned OFF
when PS2/8 (tray upper limit/1/2) is turned ON.
1. Operation c. Remaining Paper Detection Control
a. Paper up drive control The level of paper remaining in each tray is
When tray 1/2 is loaded, M16/17 (tray up drive/1/ detected according to the time that M16/17 (tray
2) turns ON to lift the up/down plate in the tray. up drive/1/2) requires to lift up the up/down plate
When PS2/8 (tray upper limit/1/2) detects the when the tray is set. This lift-up time (operation
upper limit of paper as the paper up/down plate time of M16/17) is saved in the PRCB (printer
in the tray goes up, it turns ON and consequently control board) . After this, the remaining paper
M16/17 goes OFF, causing the tray to stop going is detected using the paper feed counter. The
up. When PS2/8 turns OFF after paper is fed, detected remaining paper level is displayed on
M16/17 goes ON again to move the paper up/ the operation panel in five steps. PS4/10
down plate upward. The up/down plate in the tray (remaining paper/1/2) are used to detect the
is lowered mechanically by its own weight. remaining paper level when it lowers below about
10%.
2-J-5
2. Signals [5] Paper Size Detection Control

Tray 1
(1) T1UP_PS (PS2 to PRCB)
5V3
Paper upper limit detection signal (tray 1) T1SIZE_S_PS PS5
SGND
[L]: Not detected. 5V3
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: Detected. T1SIZE_L_PS PS6

SGND
(2) T1RM_PS (PS4 to PRCB) 3.3V2
T1SIZE_VR VR1
Remaining paper detection signal (tray 1) AGND
[L]: Not detected. Tray 2

[H]: Detected. 5V3
(3) T2UP_PS (PS8 to PRCB) T2SIZE_S_PS PS11
SGND
Paper upper limit detection signal (tray 2) 5V3
T2SIZE_L_PS PS12
[L]: Not detected. SGND
3.3V2
[H]: Detected. T2SIZE_VR VR2
AGND
(4) T2RM_PS (PS10 to PRCB)
Remaining paper detection signal (tray 2) 5V2
PRCB S.GND
[L]: Not detected.
DCPS
[H]: Detected.
The paper size in tray 1/2 is detected using PS5/
(1) T1RISEM_24V (PRCB to M16)
6/11/12 (paper size/1-1/2-1/1-2/2-2), and VR1/2
M16 ON/OFF control signal (tray 1)
(paper size/1/2). Based on the detection signals,
(2) T2RISEM_24 (PRCB to M17)
the PRCB (printer control board) judges the
M17 ON/OFF control signal (tray 2)
paper size.
1. Operation
The length of paper is detected using PS5/6/11/
12 (paper size/1-1/2-1/1-2/2-2) . Variable resis-
tors (VR1/2) interlocked with the guide position
are installed at the bottom of the tray to detect the
width of paper.
The relationships between the sensors and
paper sizes (lengths) are as follows:
Paper size
8.5 x 11 A4R to F4 or
or less B5R larger
Sensor
PS5/11 OFF ON ON
PS6/12 OFF OFF ON
2-J-6
2. Signals [6] No Paper Detection Control

(1) T1SIZE_S_PS (PS5 to PRCB) 5V3
Paper size detection signal (tray 1) T1_0PS PS3
SGND
[L]: Paper does not exist. 5V3
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: Paper exists. T2_0PS PS9
SGND
(2) T1SIZE_L_PS (PS6 to PRCB)
Paper size detection signal (tray 1)
[L]: Paper does not exist.
[H]: Paper exists.
5V2
Paper size detection signal (tray 2) S.GND
[L]: Paper does not exist. PRCB DCPS
[H]: Paper exists.
(4) T2SIZE_S_PS (PS12 to PRCB)
No paper in the tray is detected by PS3 (no
Paper size detection signal (tray 2)
paper/1) and PS9 (no paper/2) which are con-
trolled by the PRCB (printer control board).
[H]: Paper exists.
(5) T1SIZE_VR (VR1 to PRCB)
1. Operation
Paper width detection signal (tray 1)
When the tray becomes empty, PS3/9 (no paper/
1/2) is turned OFF, displaying a message on the
Paper width detection signal (tray 2)
LCD via OB1 (operation board/1).
2. Signals
(1) T1_0PS (PS3 to PRCB)
No paper detection signal (tray 1)
[L]: Paper does not exist in tray.
[H]: Paper exists in tray.
2-J-7
TRAY 1/2 PAPER FEED UNIT (7255/7272)
4 TRAY 1/2 PAPER FEED UNIT (7255/7272)

[1] Composition
Feed roller Paper feed roller Double feed prevention roller
J UNIT EXPLANATION
Side guide
Horizontal conveyance roller/L
Pre-registration roller Horizontal conveyance PS/L (PS5)
Horizontal conveyance PS/R (PS6)
Paper feed roller Horizontal conveyance section
Feed roller Horizontal conveyance
roller/R
Pre - registration roller

Paper feed roller
Tray up drive motor /2(M17)
Double feed prevention roller Tray 1 Feed roller Tray 2
Tray up drive motor /1 (M16) 7272ma2004
Caution: Trays 1/2 have the same mechanism.

Mechanism Method
Paper feed trays are driven by wires. When a
Down: Falls down by its paper tray is loaded, the tray up drive motor/
own weight 1(M16)/2(M17) rotates to wind the wires
Tray loading Front loading around the drive pulleys and consequently
the up/down plate in the tray moves up. When
Double feed preven- Torque limiter
tion the tray upper limit PS/1(PS2)/2(PS8) detects
the actuator of the roller that has been moved
1st paper feed Paper feed roller
up by paper, the tray up drive motor/1(M16)/
No paper detection Photosensor + Actuator 2 (M17) stops.
1st paper feed paper Photosensor + Actuator
loop mechanism*2 + clutch
Horizontal convey- Horizontal conveyance
ance (Tray 1) roller /L, /R

2-J-8
b) Lowering of tray
When the paper feed tray is pulled out, the
coupling shaft of the tray is disengaged from
the coupling gear of the tray up drive motor on
the main body side, allowing the up/down
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
plate in the tray to fall down by its own weight.
Coupling gear
[Main body side]
Coupling [Tray side]
7272ma2005
*2 First paper feed paper loop mechanism

When paper feed starts, paper is fed to the pre-
registration roller by the feed roller and paper
feed rollers. The fed out paper operates the
actuator of the paper feed PS/1 (PS1), the paper
feed PS/2 (PS7) turning it ON. The feed and
paper feed rollers remain ON for a specified time
after the actuation of the paper feed PS/1 (PS1)
and PS/2 (PS7) causing a paper loop to form
against the pre-registration rollers which are not
turning. In this way paper skew is corrected.
Paper feed PS/1(PS1), /2 (PS2)
Feed roller
Paper feed roller
7272ma2006

2-J-9
24V1 MC24V_1
5V2
S.GND
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
MC24V_1
24V2
P.GND
5V3
MS1 T1PRE_PS PS1
DCPS SGND
MS2
MC24V_1
C MC5
FEEDM_CONT
FEEDM_CLK
M1 FEEDM_F/E MC24_1
FEEDM_EM T2PREMC_DRV MC6 Tray 2
5V
P.GND 5V3
T2PRE_PS PS7
SGND
PRCB
7272ma2007
The 1st paper feed from tray 1/2 takes place as 1. Operation
the result of the transmission of the drive force a. Operation of the MC3/5 (paper feed MC/1/2)
from M1 (paper feed) to each paper feed roller by (1) Start timing of printing of the first copy
MC3/5 (paper feed MC/1/2) and MC4/6(pre-reg- MC3/5 (paper feed MC/1/2) turns ON at the tim-
istration MC/1/2). The feed roller picks up paper ing that is determined by the P counter from
using its own weight. when copying starts, and turns OFF after a lapse
The above operations are controlled by the of the specified time from PS1/7 (paper feed/1/7)
PRCB (printer control board). Related signals turning OFF. Thus, paper skew is corrected by
are PS1/7 (paper feed/1/2) and PS25/26 (verti- forming the loop before pre-registration roller.
cal conveyance/1/2) issued from the vertical con- (2) Start timing of printing of the second copy
veyance section. When the preceding paper turns OFF PS1/7.
(3) OFF timing
When PS1/7 is turned ON.
b. Operation of the MC4/6 (pre-registration
MC1/2)
(1) ON timing
After a specified time from MC3/5 (paper feed
MC/1/2) turning ON.
(2) OFF timing
When PS1/7 (paper feed/1/2) is turned OFF.

2-J-10
2. Signals
[L]: Detected.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: Not detected.
[L]: Detected.
[H]: Not detected.
[L]: MC3 ON
[H]: MC3 OFF
[L]: MC4 ON
[H]: MC4 OFF
[L]: MC5 ON
[H]: MC5 OFF
[L]: MC6 ON
[H]: MC6 OFF

2-J-11
[4] Horizontal Conveyance Control (Tray 1)
5V3
PS5 HFPS_L
S.GND
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
5V3
PS6 HFPS_R
S.GND IO DTXD MC24V
IO DCLK MC1
24V3 ADU LATCH 2ND MC
MC15 IO UCLK
HFMC_L REQ1
IO URXD 5V2
ACK1 2ND PS PS44
24V3 S.GND
ERR OUT1
MC16 2NDM CLK
HFMC_R
REG PS
FEEDM_CONT
FEEDM_CLK
FEEDM_F/E
FEEDM_EM
M1 5V
P.GND
MS1 PRCB
MS2 P.GND
5V2
24V2 24V1
S.GND
24V1
5V2
S.GND
P.GND
-5V1
DCPS ADUDB
7272ma2008
The horizontal conveyance from Tray 1 is con- (3) OFF timing

ducted by transmitting the drive force of M1 After a specified time when PS44 (registration) is
(paper feed) to the horizontal conveyance roller turned ON.
/L and horizontal conveyance roller /R via MC15
(horizontal conveyance MC/L) and MC16 (hori- b. Operation of MC16 (horizontal conveyance
zontal conveyance MC/R). MC/R)
(1) ON timing for the first paper
The above operations are controlled by PRCB After a specified time when PS6 (horizontal con-
(printer control board). Related signals are PS1 veyance /R) is turned ON.
(feed /1), PS5 (horizontal conveyance /L) and (2) ON timing for the second paper
PS6 (horizontal conveyance /R). After a specified time when MC1 (registration
MC) is turned ON.
(3) OFF timing
1. Operation After a specified time when PS6 (horizontal con-
a. Operation of MC15 (horizontal conveyance veyance /R) is turned ON.
MC/L)
4 (1) ON timing for the first paper
When the restart of MC3 (feed MC/1) is turned
ON.
(2) ON timing for the second paper
After a specified time when MC1 (registration
MC) is turned ON.

2-J-12
2. Signal
a. PRCB input signal
(1) HFPS_L (PS5 to PRCB)
Paper passage detection signal
[L]: Detected.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: Not detected
(2) HFPS_R (PS6 to PRCB)
[L]: Detected.
[H]: Not detected
b. PRCB output signal
(1) HFMC_L (PRCB to MC15)
MC15 drive control signal
[L]: MC15 ON
[H]: MC15 OFF
(2) HFMC_R (PRCB to MC16)
[L]: MC16 ON
[H]: MC16 OFF

2-J-13
24V1 5V3
TIUP_PS PS2
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
P.GND
5V2 SGND
S.GND
Tray 1
5V3
DCPS TIRM_PS PS4
SGND
5V3
TIUP_PS PS8
T1RISEM_24V SGND
M16 T1RISEM_D Tray 2
5V3
TIRM_PS PS10
SGND
T2RISEM_24
M17 T2RISEM_D
PRCB
7272ma2009

mitting the drive force of M16/17 (tray up drive/ (1) ON timing
1/2) to the up/down plate in the tray via drive M16/17 (tray up drive/1/2) is turned ON when
wires. M16/17 are controlled by the PRCB loading of a tray is detected. (by shorting wires at
(printer control board). Related signals are PS2/ both ends of the drawer connector)
8 (tray upper limit/1/2) and PS4/10 (remaining (2) OFF timing
paper/1/2). One of M16/17 (tray up drive/1/2) is turned OFF
when PS2/8 (tray upper limit/1/2) is turned ON.
1. Operation c. Remaining Paper Detection Control
a. Paper up drive control The level of paper remaining in each tray is
When tray 1/2 is loaded, M16/17 (tray up drive/1/ detected according to the time that M16/17 (tray
2) turns ON to lift the up/down plate in the tray. up drive/1/2) requires to lift up the up/down plate
When PS2/8 (tray upper limit/1/2) detects the when the tray is set. This lift-up time (operation
upper limit of paper as the paper up/down plate time of M16/17) is saved in the PRCB (printer
in the tray goes up, it turns ON and consequently control board). After this, the remaining paper is
M16/17 goes OFF, causing the tray to stop going detected using the paper feed counter. The
up. When PS2/8 turns OFF after paper is fed, detected remaining paper level is displayed on
M16/17 goes ON again to move the paper up/ the operation panel in five steps. PS4/10
down plate upward. The up/down plate in the tray (remaining paper/1/2) are used to detect the
is lowered mechanically by its own weight. remaining paper level when it lowers below about
10%.

2-J-14

Paper upper limit detection signal (tray 1) 5V3
T1_0PS PS3
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
5V3
[H]: Detected. T2_0PS PS9
(2) T1RM_PS (PS4 to PRCB) SGND
Remaining paper detection signal (tray 1) 5V2

S.GND
[L]: Not detected. PRCB DCPS
[H]: Detected. 7272ma2010
Paper upper limit detection signal (tray 2) No paper in the tray is detected by PS3 (no paper
[L]: Not detected. /1) and PS9 (no paper /2), and which is controlled
[H]: Detected. by the PRCB (printer control board).
(4) T1RM_PS (PS10 to PRCB)
Remaining paper detection signal (tray 2) 1. Operation
[L]: Not detected. When the tray becomes empty, PS3/9 (no paper/
[H]: Detected. 1/2) is turned OFF, displaying a message on the
b. PRCB output signals LCD via OB1 (operation board/1).
(1) T1RISEM_24V (PRCB to M16)
M16 ON/OFF control signal (tray 1) 2. Signals
(2) T2RISEM_24 (PRCB to M17) a. PRCB input signals
M17 ON/OFF control signal (tray 2) (1) T1_0PS (PS3 to PRCB)
[H]:Paper exists in tray.

2-J-15
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Blank page
TRAY 3 PAPER FEED UNIT (7155/7165)

[1] Composition
Drive pulley (for wire C/D)
Tray up drive motor/3
(M18) Feed roller
Paper feed roller
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Side guide Side guide
Drive pulley
(for wire A/B)
End stopper
Paper size VR/3

Paper size PS/2-3 (VR3)
(PS18) Paper size PS/1-3
(PS17)

Mechanism Method
Paper feed tray is driven by wires. When the
paper tray is loaded, the tray up drive motor 3
Down: Falls down by its own
(M18) rotates to wind the wires around the
weight
drive pulleys and consequently the up/down
Tray loading Front loading plate in the tray moves up. When the tray
Double feed pre- Torque limiter upper limit PS/3 (PS14) detects the actuator
vention of the roller that has been moved up by paper,
1st paper feed Paper feed roller the tray up drive motor 3 (M18) stops.
No paper detec- Photosensor + Actuator

tion
Paper size detec- Width: VR
tion *2 Length: Photosensor
(Universal) + Actuators (two)
1st paper feed Photosensor + Actuator
paper loop mech- + Magnetic clutch
anism*3
2-K-1
b) Lowering of tray *3 First paper feed paper loop mechanism

When the paper feed tray is pulled out, the When paper feed starts, paper is fed to the pre-
coupling shaft of the tray is disengaged from registration roller by the feed roller and paper
the coupling gear of the tray up drive motor on feed rollers. The fed out paper operates the
the main body side, allowing the up/down actuator of the paper feed PS/3 (PS13), turning
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
plate in the tray to fall down by its own weight. it ON. The feed and paper feed rollers remain
ON for a specified time after the actuation of the
paper feed PS/3 (PS13) causing a paper loop to
form against the pre-registration rollers which
Coupling gear
are not turning. In this way paper skew is cor-
rected.
Paper feed PS/3 (PS13)
[Main body side] Feed roller
Paper feed roller
Coupler
[Tray side]
*2 Paper size detection

Length: When paper pushes the paper size
detection actuator, the paper size PS/2-
3/ (PS18) and the paper size PS/1-3
(PS17) turns ON. Thus, the paper size is
automatically determined according to
the combination of the ON/OFF states of
this PS.
Width: When the side guides of the tray are slid,
the rack gear of the side guide (front)
turns the paper size VR3 gear. Thus, the
paper size is automatically determined
according to the change in the resis-
tance value of the VR.
Paper size VR gear
Rack gear
Side guide (front)
2-K-2
24V1 MC24V_1
5V2
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
S.GND MC24V_1
24V2
P.GND
5V3
MS1 T3PREM_PS PS13
DCPS SGND
MS2
FEEDM_CONT
FEEDM_CLK
M1 FEEDM_F/E
FEEDM_EM
5V
P.GND
PRCB
The 1st paper feed from tray 3 takes place as the 1. Operation
result of the transmission of the drive force from a. Operation of the MC7 (paper feed MC/3)
M1 (paper feed) to each paper feed roller by MC7 (1) Start timing of printing of the first copy
(paper feed MC/3) and MC8 (pre-registration MC7 (paper feed MC/3) turns ON at the timing
MC/3). The feed roller picks up paper using its that is determined by the P counter from when
own weight. copying starts, and turns OFF after a lapse of the
The above operations are controlled by the specified time from PS13 (paper feed/3) turning
PRCB (printer control board). Related signals OFF. Thus, paper skew is corrected by forming
are PS13 (paper feed/3) and PS27 (vertical con- the loop before pre-registration roller.
veyance/3) issued from the vertical conveyance (2) Start timing of printing of the second copy
section. When the preceding paper turns OFF PS13.
(3) OFF timing
When PS13 is turned ON.
b. Operating of the MC8 (pre-registration MC/3)
(1) ON timing
After a specified time from the MC7 (paper feed
MC/5).
(2) OFF timing
When PS13 (paper feed/3) is turned OFF.
2-K-3
2. Signals
(1) T3PREM_PS (PS13 to PRCB)
[L]: Detected.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: Not detected.

[L]: MC7 ON
[H]: MC7 OFF
(2) T3PREM_PS (PRCB to MC8)
[L]: MC8 ON
[H]: MC8 OFF
2-K-4
24V1 5V3
P.GND TIUP_PS PS14
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
5V2 SGND
S.GND
Tray 3
5V3
DCPS TIRM_PS PS16
SGND
T3RISEM_24
M18 T3RISEM_D
PRCB

mitting the drive force of M18 (tray up drive/3) to (1) ON timing
the up/down plate in the tray via drive wires. M18 M18 (tray up drive /3) is turned ON when loading
is controlled by the PRCB (printer control board). of a tray is detected. (by shorting wires at both
Related signals are PS14 (tray upper limit/3) and ends of the drawer connector)
PS16 (remaining paper/3). (2) OFF timing
M18 (tray up drive/3) is turned OFF when PS14
1. Operation (tray upper limit/3) is turned ON.
a. Paper up drive control c. Remaining Paper Detection Control
When tray 3 is loaded, M18 (tray up drive/3) turns The level of paper remaining in the tray is
ON to lift the up/down plate in the tray. When detected according to the time that M18 (tray up
PS14 (tray upper limit/3) detects the upper limit drive/3) requires to lift up the up/down plate when
of paper as the paper up/down plate in the tray the tray is set. This lift-up time (operation time of
goes up, it turns ON and consequently M18 goes M18) is saved in the PRCB (printer control
OFF, causing the tray to stop going up. When board). After this, the remaining paper is
PS14 turns OFF after paper is fed, M18 goes ON detected using the paper feed counter. The
again to move the paper up/down plate upward. detected remaining paper level is displayed on
The up/down plate in the tray is lowered mechan- the operation panel in five steps. PS16 (remain-
ically by its own weight. ing paper/3) is used to detect the remaining
paper level when it lowers below about 10%.
2-K-5

(1) T3UP_PS (PS14 to PRCB) Tray 3
Paper upper limit detection signal 5V3
[L]: Not detected.
T3SIZE_S_PS PS17
SGND
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: Detected. 5V3

T3SIZE_L_PS PS18
(2) T3RM_PS (PS16 to PRCB) SGND
Remaining paper detection signal 3.3V2
T3SIZE_VR VR3
[L]: Not detected. AGND
[H]: Detected.
5V2
b. PRCB output signals PRCB S.GND
(1) T3RISEM_24 (PRCB to M18) DCPS
M18 ON/OFF control signal
The paper size in tray 3 is detected using PS17
(paper size/1-3), PS18 (paper size/2-3), and
VR3 (paper size/3). Based on the detection sig-
nals, the PRCB (printer control board) judges the
paper size.
1. Operation
The length of paper is detected using PS17/18
(paper size/1-3/2-3). Variable resistor (VR3)
interlocked with the guide position is installed at
the bottom of the tray to detect the width of paper.
Paper size
8.5 x 11 A4R to F4 or
or less B5R larger
Sensor
PS17 OFF ON ON
PS18 OFF OFF ON
2-K-6

(1) T3SIZE_S_PS (PS17 to PRCB)
5V3
Paper size detection signal T3_0PS PS15
[L]: Paper does not exist. SGND
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: Paper exists.
Paper size detection signal 5V2
S.GND
[L]: Paper does not exist. PRCB DCPS
[H]: Paper exists.
Paper width detection signal No paper in the tray is detected by PS15 (no
paper/3), and which is controlled by the PRCB
1. Operation
When the tray becomes empty, PS15 (no paper/
3) is turned OFF, displaying a message on the
2. Signals
(1) PS15 (PS15 to PRCB)
No paper detection signal
2-K-7
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Blank page
BYPASS TRAY
BYPASS TRAY
[1] Composition
Up/down motor/BP (M20)
By-pass paper feed roller By-pass feed roller
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
By-pass double feed
prevention roller
Loop roller
By-pass tray

The up/down motor/BP (M20) drives the paper
Mechanism Method
up/down plate via gears. Paper is automatically
First paper feed Bypass feed roller
pushed up to the paper feed position, when the
Paper lift-up *1 Paper up/down plate print start button is pressed. When paper is
Up/down motor/BP removed or exhausted M20 will drive down the
(M20) + Upper/lower limit up/down plate.
detection sensor
Double feed preven- Torque limiter Paper up/down plate
tion
No paper detection Photosensor + Actuator
Paper size detection Width: VR Up/down motor/BP
*2 Length: Photosensor + (M20)
Actuators (two)
2-L-1
BYPASS TRAY
*2 Paper size detection [3] First Paper Feed Control

The paper size is automatically detected by the
following three sensors: 24V
• Lateral: Paper size detection VR/BP (VR5) 24V2 24V
P.GND
• Longitudinal: Paper size PS/1, 2-BP (PS31/ 5V2 A M6
S.GND /A
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
32)
B
/B
Paper size VR/BP (VR5)
5V3
LOOP_PS PS36
S.GND
5V2
2ND_PS
S.GND PS44
PRCB
Second paper
feed unit
Paper size PS/2-BP (PS32)
Paper size PS/1-BP (PS31) The first paper feed from the bypass tray takes
By-pass tray place as the result of the transmission of the drive
force from M6 (loop roller) to the paper feed
roller. M6 is controlled by PRCB (printer control
board). The related signal is PS36 (loop).
1. Operation
(1) When printing of the first copy starts
M6 (loop) is turned ON at the timing that is deter-
mined by the P counter (that starts when printing
starts), thus starting feed of paper.
M6 is stopped temporarily after lapse of a spec-
ified time from turning ON of PS44 (registration)
by the leading edge of paper, a loop is formed by
registration rollers, and the paper is fed to the
transfer unit.
(2) When printing of the second or subsequent copy
After lapse of the specified time from turning OFF
of PS44 (registration) by the trailing edge of the
preceding paper.
2. Signals
(1) LOOP_PS (PS36 to PRCB)
[H]: Paper exist.
(2) 2ND_PS (PS44 to PRCB)
Second paper feed reference timing detection
signal
[L]: Paper exists.
[H]: Paper does not exist.
2-L-2
BYPASS TRAY
b. PRCB output signals [4] Paper Up/Down Control

(1) A and /A (PRCB to M6)
A-phase drive control pulse signal for M6
(2) B and /B (PRCB to M6)
5V3
B-phase drive control pulse signal for M6 PS34 BPUP_PS BPUDM_A
BPUDM_B M20
SGND
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
5V3
PS35 BPDN_PS
5V2
SGND
S.GND
DCPS
PRCB
Paper in the bypass tray is pushed up/down by

M20 (up/down motor/BP). M20 is controlled by
PRCB (printer control board). Related signals
are PS34 (tray upper limit /BP) and PS35 (tray
lower limit /BP).
1. Operation
a. Paper up/down control
M20 (up/down motor/BP) is turned ON to push
up paper. When PS34 (tray upper limit/BP)
detects the paper upper limit and turns ON, M20
turns OFF to stop pushing up paper. When paper
is fed and consequently PS34 turns OFF, M20
turns ON again, maintaining the upper limit posi-
tion of paper.
b. Paper up timing
(1) ON timing
At start of copying
(2) OFF timing
M20 (up/down motor/BP) is turned OFF when
PS34 (tray upper limit /BP) is turned ON.
c. Paper down timing
(1) ON timing
When there is no paper or a paper jam occurs.
(2) OFF timing
M20 (up/down motor/BP) is turned OFF when
PS35 (tray lower limit/BP) is turned ON.
2-L-3
BYPASS TRAY

(1) BPUP_PS (PS34 to PRCB) 5V2 5V3
S.GND
Paper upper limit position detection signal (by- BPSIZE_S_PS PS31
SGND
DCPS
pass tray) 5V3
BPSIZE_L_PS PS32
2 UNIT EXPLANATION

[H]: Detected. 5VA
BPSIZE_VR VR5
(2) BPDN_PS (PS35 to PRCB)
Paper lower limit position detection signal (by- PRCB
pass tray)
[L]: Not detected. The size of paper in the by-pass tray is detected
[H]: Detected. by PS31 (paper size/1-BP), PS32 (paper size/2-
b. PRCB output signal BP), and VR5 (paper size/BP). Based on the
(1) BPUDM_A, B (PRCB to M20) detection signals, PRCB (printer control board)
M20 drive control signal judges the paper size.
1. Operation
The length of paper is detected by PS31 (paper
size/1-BP) and PS32 (paper size/2-BP). The by-
pass tray is provided with a variable resistor
(VR5) interlocked with the guide position to judge
the paper width according to the change in the
resistance value.
Paper size 8.5 x 11 A4R to F4 or
Sensor or less B5R larger
PS31 OFF ON ON
PS32 OFF OFF ON
2. Signals
(1) BPSIZE_S_PS (PS31 to PRCB)
[H]: Paper exists.
(2) BPSIZE_L_PS (PS32 to PRCB)
[H]: Paper exists.
(3) BPSIZE_VR (VR5 to PRCB)
Paper width detection signal
2-L-4
BYPASS TRAY
[6] No Paper Detection Control
5V2 5V3
S.GND BP_OPS PS33
SGND
DCPS
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
PRCB
No paper in the tray is detected by PS33 (no

paper/BP) which is controlled by PRCB (printer
control board).
1. Operation
When the tray becomes empty, PS33 (no paper/
BP) is turned OFF, displaying a message on the
2. Signal
a. Input signal
(1) BP_0PS (PS33 to PRCB)
No paper detection signal
[H]: Paper exists.
2-L-5
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Blank page
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION

4 [1] Composition
2 UNIT EXPLANATION

Vertical conveyance roller (lower)

(7255/7272 only)
4 [2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Paper conveyance Rollers
Conveyance drive Vertical conveyance roller
(upper): Paper feed motor
(M1)
Vertical conveyance roller
(middle): Paper feed motor
(M1)
Vertical conveyance roller
(lower): Paper feed motor
(M1)

2-M-1
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 2-M-1 REPLACEMENT
[3] Vertical Conveyance Control rotate all vertical conveyance rollers, thus feed-
ing paper to the second paper unit.
4
The paper feed standby position for tray 4 is set
24V1 MC24V_2
P.GND VFMC1_DRV MC11 to the position where the PS28 (vertical convey-
5V2
S.GND MC24V_2
ance /4) is turned ON. (7255/7272)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
VFMC2_DRV MC12
24V2
P.GND
5V3
MS1 T1PASS_PS PS25 2. Signals
DCPS S.GND
MS2 5V3
T2PASS_PS PS26 (1) T1PASS_PS (PS25 to PRCB)
S.GND
FEEDM_CONT
M1
FEEDM_CLK 5V3 Paper passage detection signal (for tray 1)
FEEDM_F/R T3PASS_PS PS27
FEEDM_EM
5V
S.GND [L]: Not detected.
5V3
P.GND T4PASS_PS PS28 [H]: Detected.
S.GND
5V3 (2) T2PASS_PS (PS26 to PRCB)
VF_DOOR_PS PS29 Paper passage detection signal (for tray 2)
S.GND
5V3
VF_DRT_PS PS12
[L]: Not detected.
S.GND
PRCB
[H]: Detected.
(3) T3PASS_PS (PS27 to PRCB)
7272ma2011
Paper passage detection signal (for tray 3)
[L]: Not detected.
4 In the vertical conveyance section, paper is fed [H]: Detected.
vertically by transmitting the drive force of M1
4 (4) T4PASS_PS (PS28 to PRCB)
(paper feed) to the vertical conveyance roller
Paper passage detection signal (for tray 4)
(upper) and vertical conveyance roller (middle)
[L]: Not detected.
via MC11 (vertical conveyance MC/1) and MC12
[H]: Detected.
(vertical conveyance MC/2). And, the vertical
(5) VF_DOOR_PS (PS29 to PRCB)
conveyance roller (lower) is driven by the vertical
Vertical conveyance section open/close detec-
conveyance roller (middle) via the timing belt.
tion signal
The above parts are controlled by PRCB (printer
[L]: Open
control board). Related signals are PS25 to
[H]: Closed
PS28 (vertical conveyance/1 to 3), PS29 (verti-
4 (6) VF_DRT_PS (PS12 to PRCB)
cal conveyance door open/close) and PS12 (ver-
tical conveyance door open/close /U). Vertical conveyance section open/close detec-
tion signal
[L]: Open
1. Operation
[H]: Closed
4 Paper fed from tray 1 (7155/7165) or tray 1 or 2
(7255/7272) is then fed to the second paper feed
(1) VFMC1_DRV (PRCB to MC11)
unit directly without passing through vertical con-
veyance rollers. When paper is fed from tray 2 or
[L]: MC11 ON
3 (7155/7165) or tray 3 or 4 (7255/7272), PS26
[H]: MC11 OFF
(vertical conveyance/2) is used to feed paper to
(2) VFMC2_DRV (PRCB to MC12)
the standby position. When PS26 is turned OFF
by the preceding paper, MC11 and MC12 (verti-
[L]: MC12 ON
cal conveyance MC/1 and MC/2) are turned ON
[H]: MC12 OFF
and the paper fed from tray 2 or 3 (7155/7165) or
tray 3 or 4 (7255/7272) is fed to the standby posi-
tion (where PS26 was turned ON) by the drive
force of M1 (paper feed). MC11 and MC12 are
turned ON after lapse of the specified time from
restart of registration of the preceding paper to

2-M-2
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 2-M-2 REPLACEMENT
ADU
ADU
[1] Composition
4
7255/7272
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
ADU conveyance roller 2
Conveyance belt Pre-transfer roller

Paper exit roller ADU conveyance roller 1
Registration roller
Paper exit
conveyance roller
Reverse/exit gate

Reverse/exit roller
ADU gate
ADU reverse roller
Reverse/exit motor (M8)
Reverse gate SD (SD7) Transfer/separation cleaning
Paper exit roller rotation knob motor (M10)
Paper exit motor (M7)
Paper exit fan/R (FM7) TSL
Paper exit fan/F (FM6) Reverse/exit roller rotation knob Conveyance motor (M5)
ADU drive board (ADUDB) ADU deceleration MC (MC2)

Registration roller rotation knob ADU conveyance MC (MC13)
7155/7165 7255/7272
Registration MC
(MC1)
Mis-centering PS (PS70) Paper dust cleaning brush Paper dust cleaning brush
7272ma2012

2-N-1
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 2-N-1 REPLACEMENT
ADU
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanisms Method
Second paper feed paper loop *1 Loop roller (trays 1-3/LCT), Feed roller (bypass tray), ADU
pre-registration roller (ADU)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Image position correction *2 Image position is corrected according to the information

detected by PS43 (leading edge) and PS70 (paper mis-
centering).
Second paper feed auxiliary mechanism *3 Pre-transfer roller
Second paper feed paper conveyance Conveyance motor (M5) drive
Second paper feed jam removal mechanism Opening/closing of jam removal section of pre-transfer
section, Registration roller rotation knob
Conveyance section paper conveyance Conveyance belts (two)
Conveyance section paper suction mechanism Conveyance suction fan (FM3) + Suction duct
*4
Reverse/exit section paper path selection *5 Reverse/exit selection gate, Reverse gate SD (SD7) drive
paper is automatically guided owing to the paper guide
shape.
Reverse/exit section paper conveyance Reverse/exit roller, ADU reverse roller
Reverse/exit section paper conveyance drive Reverse/exit motor (M8) drive, ADU reverse motor (M9)
drive
Reverse/exit section jam removal mechanism Paper exit guide plate opening/closing, ADU bottom plate
assembly opening/closing, Reverse/exit roller rotation
knob
Paper exit section jam removal mechanism Paper exit roller rotation knob
Paper exit conveyance Paper exit motor (M7) drive
ADU paper feed *6 Nonstack
ADU reverse paper conveyance path selection Paper is automatically guided owing to ADU gate opera-
tion and the paper guide shape.
ADU paper conveyance ADU reverse roller, ADU conveyance rollers 1 and 2
ADU pre-registration mechanism *7 ADU pre-registration roller, ADU conveyance rollers 3 and
4
Thick paper conveyance *8 Conveyance motor (M5), Paper exit motor (M7), reverse/
exit motor (M8), ADU reverse motor (M9), linear velocity
selection
ADU paper conveyance drive Conveyance motor (M5), reverse/exit motor (M8), ADU
reverse motor (M9), loop roller motor (M6)
ADU jam removal mechanism ADU bottom plate assembly opening/closing, Exit guide
plate opening/closing
2-N-2
ADU
*1 Second paper feed paper loop mechanism

A paper loop is formed before the registration <Trays 1-3/LCT>
roller to correct mis-centering of paper during
second paper feed. The paper loop is formed by Loop formation point
pushing the fed paper against the registration
Feed roller (LCT)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
roller for the prescribed time. The paper loop
mechanism differs between paper feed paths.
• Trays 1-3, LCT paper feed
Loop roller Registration roller
• Bypass tray
Bypass feed roller Loop roller
• ADU
<By-pass tray>
Loop formation point
Feed roller
Registration roller
<ADU>
Registration roller
Loop formation point
*2 Image position correction

A leading edge PS (PS43) and paper mis-cen-
tering PS (PS70) are provided at the exit of the
registration roller, thus enhancing the positional
accuracy of the copy image.
The paper position information detected by PS43
and PS70 is processed by the image processor
to correct the image write position in such a man-
ner that the document (scanned image) position
match the copy paper position.
The leading edge PS (PS43) is used to correct
the write position in the sub-scanning direction,
2-N-3
ADU
and the mis-centering PS (PS70) is used to cor- *5 Reverse/exit paper path selection
rect the write position in the main scanning direc- The reverse/exit selection gate in the fixing unit
tion. determines whether the paper is to be ejected
*3 Second paper feed auxiliary mechanism straight or reversed and ejected. The paper gate
The distance between the registration roller and is operated by the reverse gate SD (SD7)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
the transfer and separation corona unit is made installed in the ADU.
long to achieve the time required for correcting Because paper is reversed in the reverse/exit
the image position. To assist conveyance of section in the ADU, the reverse/exit section is
paper between the registration roller and the provided with a reverse/exit gate to switch
image transfer and separation corona unit, a pre- between the forward and backward paper con-
transfer roller is provided just before the transfer veyance paths. This gate has no drive mecha-
and separation corona unit. nism and it is opened by the rigidity of the paper.
a. Reverse/exit operation
Leading edge PS Normally, the reverse/exit selection gate opens
(PS43) (rear)
Paper mis- when the reverse gate SD (SD7) is turned OFF.
centering PS The paper fed by the exit roller in the fixing unit is
(PS70) (front)
fed, through the path under the reverse/exit
selection gate, to the reverse/exit section in the
ADU by the decurler roller. Normally, the
Pre-transfer roller reverse/exit gate in the reverse/exit section is
closed. This gate is opened by the rigidity of the
Transfer and separation corona unit
fed paper, allowing the paper to be fed to the
Registration roller reverse/exit roller, ADU gate, and ADU reverse
roller sequentially. Normally, the ADU gate is
*4 Conveyance section paper suction mecha- closed and it has no drive mechanism; it is
nism opened by the rigidity of paper.
A paper suction duct is provided in the middle of When the paper reverse PS (PS42) detects the
the conveyance section and is led to the convey- trailing edge of paper and consequently turns
ance suction fan (FM3) installed in the ADU. To OFF, the reverse/exit roller and ADU reverse
improve transportability of the paper that passes roller start rotating in the opposite direction, feed-
through the conveyance section, the conveyance ing the paper back toward the fixing unit. How-
suction fan is used to provide suction for the ever, since the reverse/exit gate is closed, the
paper. paper is fed to the main body exit roller via the
path outside this gate. Thus, the paper is ejected
Conveyance suction fan (FM3) with the print side down.
Suction holes
Duct
Conveyance
section
2-N-4
ADU
Fixing roller (upper)

Reverse/exit selection gate
Fixing exit PS (PS30)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Fixing
roller
(lower)
Exit roller
Decurler roller Fixing roller (lower)
Fixing exit PS (PS30)

Exit roller
ADU gate
Main body exit roller
Reverse/exit roller
Paper reverse PS (PS42)
c. ADU paper conveyance
Reverse/exit gate
In the two-sided copy mode, the paper finished
Main body exit roller ADU reverse roller
with printing on the front side is fed, through the
path under the reverse/exit selection gate, into
the reverse/exit section just like the reverse/exit
operation. Then, the paper is fed to the ADU by
the reverse/exit roller and ADU reverse roller.
These rollers do not rotate in the opposite direc-
tion even when the paper reverse PS (PS42)
detects the trailing edge of the paper, allowing
the paper to be fed until the reverse/exit PS
(PS46) turns OFF.
Reverse/exit Reverse/exit gate

gate Reverse/exit selection gate
Fixing roller
b. Straight ejection (upper)
When paper is ejected straight, the reverse gate Fixing roller
SD (SD7) is turned ON to close the reverse/exit (lower)
selection gate. The paper fed by the paper exit Reverse/exit PS
(PS46)
roller is fed to the paper exit roller with the print
side up.
ADU reverse roller

ADU gate
Reverse/exit roller
Paper reverse PS (PS42)
*6 Non-stack paper feed mechanism

In the two-sided copy mode, the ADU reverse
roller starts rotating in the opposite direction
when the reverse/exit PS (PS46) detects the
trailing edge of paper and consequently it turns
2-N-5
ADU
OFF. The paper is fed toward the reverse/exit rollers 3 and 4. The ADU conveyance MC
section. However, since the ADU gate is closed, (MC13) is turned ON/OFF only when the paper
the paper is fed to the ADU conveyance roller/1 length is 325 mm or longer. If the paper length is
through the path above this gate. Thus, the paper less than 325 mm, it stays ON during copying.
is reversed and fed to the ADU exit, without being
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
stacked in the ADU. ADU conveyance roller/3

The reversed paper is fed by ADU conveyance ADU conveyance roller/4
rollers 1-4.
Reverse/exit roller
ADU conveyance roller/1

ADU reverse roller
ADU conveyance roller/2 Pre-registration loop formation point
ADU conveyance roller/3 ADU pre-registration roller
ADU conveyance
roller/4 *8 Thick paper conveyance mechanism
To enhance reliability of thick paper copying, the
conveyance motor (M5), paper exit motor (M7),
reverse/exit motor (M8), and ADU reverse motor
(M9) are switched as shown below according to
the paper type selected in the key operator
Reverse/exit PS (PS46) mode.
4 Paper type Linear speed
185 mm/s (7155/7165)
Thick paper
172.5 mm/s (7255/7272)
280 mm/s (7155/7255)
Others 320 mm/s (7165)
345 mm/s (7272)
*7 ADU pre-registration mechanism

In the ADU, paper is looped by the ADU pre-reg-
istration roller to correct paper inclination in the
conveyance section. The ADU pre-registration
roller stops when the loop roller motor (M6)
stops; however, the ADU conveyance roller con-
tinues to feed paper at a constant speed, forming
a paper loop between the ADU pre-registration
roller and ADU conveyance roller. As a result,
paper inclination is corrected. When M6 starts,
the ADU pre-registration roller starts rotating to
feed the paper to the second feed section. An
ADU conveyance MC (MC13) is provided to turn
ON/OFF the drive force of ADU conveyance roll-
ers 1 and 2 in order to stop the looped paper tem-
porarily and to adjust the loop size. In addition,
an ADU deceleration MC (MC2) is provided to
turn ON/OFF the drive force of ADU conveyance

2-N-6
ADU
[3] Loop/Second Paper Feed Control
24V
24V
A
/A M6
B
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
/B
5V3
LOOP PS PS36
S.GND
+5V
PGND
START/STOP
CLK
CW/CCW M5
IO DTXD LD
IO DCLK H/L
ADU LATCH PGND
IO UCLK +24V
REQ1
IO URXD MC24V
ACK1 MC1
ERR OUT1 2ND MC
2NDM CLK
REG PS 5V2
EDGE PS PS43
S.GND
5V2
2ND PS PS44
S.GND
PRCB 5V2
ADUEXT PS PS50
S.GND
5V2 DEF VIDEO

24V1 GMD
S.GND 5V2
-5V
GND PS70
24V1 DEF SI
5V2 DEF CLK
S.GND DEF LED
P.GND 24V1
-5V1
DCPS ADUDB
The paper fed from each tray is fed to the second 1. Operation
paper feed section. The second paper feed takes a. Loop control
place as the result of the transmission of the drive After a lapse of the specified time from turning
force from M5 (conveyance) to the second paper ON of PS44 (registration) by the paper fed from
feed roller via MC1 (registration). The second each tray or the ADU at a high speed, M6 (loop
paper feed section is preceded by a loop roller roller) is turned OFF to form a paper loop in the
used to form a paper loop, and this conveyance registration section.
section is also used for the paper fed from the b. Second paper feed control
LCT. It is not used for the paper fed from the by- After formation of a paper loop under loop con-
pass tray or ADU. The loop roller is driven by M6 trol, MC1 (registration) is turned ON to transmit
(loop roller). The above parts are controlled by the drive force of M5 (conveyance) to the second
PRCB (printer control board) via ADUDB (ADU paper feed roller, starting the second paper feed.
drive board). M6 is driven by PRCB directly. c. Image position correction control
Related signals are PS36 (loop), PS43 (leading Mis-centering of the paper fed from each tray is
edge), PS44 (registration), and PS50 (ADU pre- detected by PS70 (paper mis-centering) and the
registration). paper leading edge timing is detected by PS43
(leading edge) and they are corrected at the time
of image write.
2-N-7
ADU
A contact image sensor is used as PS70 (paper (5) DEF_CLK (ADUDB to PS70)
mis-centering). The paper edge position is PS70 (paper mis-centering) drive clock signal
detected by paper mis-centering sensors. Based (6) DEF_LED (ADUDB to PS70)
on the edge position information, the image write PS70 (paper mis-centering) LED control signal
position is shifted to correct mis-centering and (7) CW/CCW (ADUDB to M5)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
leading edge timing at the time of image write. M5 (conveyance) rotational direction indication
PS70 operates after a lapse of the specified time signal
from turning ON of PS43 (leading edge). [L]: CCW
[H]: CW
2. Signals (8) H/L (ADUDB to M5)
a. Input signals M5 (conveyance) rotational speed indication sig-
(1) LOOP_PS (P36 to PRCB) nal
Loop formation reference timing detection sig- [L]: Low speed
nal. [H]: High speed
The leading edge or trailing edge of paper is (9) A, /A (PRCB to M6)
detected. M6 (loop roller) A-phase drive control pulse sig-
[L]: Detected. nal
[H]: Not detected. (10) B, /B (PRCB to M6)
(2) LD (M5 to ADUDB) M6 (loop roller) B-phase drive control pulse sig-
M5 fault detection signal nal
[L]: Normal
[H]: Abnormal
(3) DEF_VIDEO (PS70 to ADUDB)
PS70 (paper mis-centering) sensor output signal
(4) 2ND_PS (PS44 to ADUDB)
Second paper feed reference timing detection
signal
[L]: Detected.
[H]: Not detected.
(5) EDGF_PS (PS43 to ADUDB)
Paper leading edge detection signal
[L]: Detected.
[H]: Not detected.
(6) REG_PS (ADUDB to PRCB)
Paper leading edge detection signal.
[L]: Detected.
[H]: Not detected.
b. Output signals
(1) START/STOP (ADUDB to M5)
M5 (conveyance) drive control signal
[L]: M5 ON
[H]: M5 OFF
(2) 2NDM_CLK, CLK (PRCB to ADUDB to M5)
M5 (conveyance) clock signal
(3) 2ND_MC (ADUDB to MC1)
MC1 (registration) drive control signal
[L]: MC1 ON
[H]: MC1 OFF
(4) DEF_SI (ADUDB to PS70)
PS70 (paper mis-centering) start pulse
2-N-8
ADU
[4] Paper Conveyance Control 2. Signals

a. Input signals
5V (1) MAINEXIT_PS (PS37 to PRCB)
MAINEXIT PS PS37
S.GND
Main body exit section paper passage detection
IO DTXD
IO DCLK signal
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
ADU LATCH
IO UCLK
REQ1
[L]: Detected.
IO URXD SUC FAN
ACK1
ERR OUT1 SUC EM FM3
[H]: Not detected.
2NDM CLK P.GND (2) SUC_EM (FM3 to ADUSDB)
PRCB
+5V
PGND FM3 (conveyance suction) fault detection signal
START/STOP
CLK
CW/CCW M5
[L]: FM3 is normal.
5V2
LD
24V1
S.GND H/L [H]: FM3 is abnormal.
PGND
MS1 MS2
24V2
+24V
b. Output signal
P.GND
24V1
5V2
(1) MAINEXIT_PS (ADUDB to FM3)
S.GND
P.GND FM3 (conveyance suction) drive signal
DCPS ADUDB
[L]: FM3 OFF
[H]: FM3 ON
The paper fed from the second paper feed sec-
tion is fed to the fixing unit by the pre-transfer
roller and conveyance belt driven by M5 (convey-
ance). In the conveyance section, paper suction
is provided by FM3 (conveyance suction)
through the duct installed on the back of the con-
veyance belt. M5 and FM3 are controlled by
PRCB (printer control board) via ADUDB (ADU
drive board).
1. Operation
a. M5 (conveyance) operation
M5 (conveyance) starts when the START button
is pressed, and it stops when the PS37 (paper
exit) turns OFF at detection of the trailing edge of
the last sheet of paper.
b. FM3 (conveyance suction) operation
FM3 is turned ON/OFF in sync with M2 (drum).
2-N-9
ADU
[5] Paper Reverse and Exit Control
5V
P.GND
MAINM CONT
MAINM CLK M4
MAINM F/R
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
MAINM EM
24V
24V
A
/A M7
B
/B
5V2
FIXEXIT PS PS30
S.GND
5V
MAINEXIT PS PS37
S.GND
24V
24V
A
/A M8
B
IO DTXD /B
IO DCLK
ADU LATCH 24V
IO UCLK 24V
REQ1 A
IO URXD /A M9
ACK1 B
ERR OUT1 /B
2NDM CLK
5V2
DECUR PS PS42
S.GND
PRCB
5V2
ADU REV PS45
5V2 S.GND
24V1
S.GND 5V2
MS1 MS2 REV PS PS46
24V2 S.GND
P.GND
24V2
24V1
5V2 SD7
GATE DR
S.GND
P.GND
DCPS ADUDB
The reserve/exit selection gate in the fixing unit M4 and M7 are controlled by PRCB (printer con-
determines whether the paper fed from the fixing trol board) directly. M8, M9, and SD7 are con-
unit is to be ejected straight or reversed. trolled by PRCB (printer control board) via
The reverse/exit selection gate is driven by SD7 ADUDB (ADU drive board).
(reverse gate). The decurler roller is driven by M4 Related signals are PS30 (fixing exit), PS37
(fixing) and the reverse/exit roller is driven by M8 (paper exit), and PS42 (paper reverse).
(reverse/exit). The ADU reverse roller is driven by
M9 (ADU reverse). The exit conveyance roller
and main body exit roller are driven by M7 (paper
exit).
2-N-10
ADU
1. Operation quently turns OFF, M8 and M9 start rotating in

a. Reverse/exit selection gate control the opposite direction at a high speed, feeding
The reverse/exit selection gate is driven by SD7 the paper in the paper exit direction.
(reverse gate). Normally, the reverse/exit selec- When PS45 (ADU paper reverse) detects the
tion gate is open to guide paper to the reverse/ trailing edge of paper and consequently turns
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
exit section in ADU. When paper is ejected OFF, M9 starts rotating in the forward direction at
straight, SD7 is turned ON to close the reverse/ a low speed. After a lapse of the specified time
exit selection gate. from detection of the trailing edge of paper by
When paper is ejected straight, SD7 is turned PS46 (reverse/exit), M8 (reverse/exit) starts
ON when the START button is pressed and it is rotating in the forward direction at a low speed,
turned OFF when PS37 (paper exit) turns OFF at proceeding to feed the next sheet of paper.
detection of the trailing edge of the last sheet of (2) ADU conveyance
paper. The operation performed from the moment PS30
b. M4 (fixing) control (fixing exit) turns OFF at detection of the trailing
M4 (fixing) starts when the START button is edge of paper to the moment M8 (reverse/exit)
pressed, and it stops when PS37 (paper exit) and M9 (ADU reverse) start rotating in the for-
turns OFF at detection of the training edge of the ward direction at a high speed, is the same as
last sheet of paper. that of reverse/exit.
(1) Straight paper exit When PS46 (reverse/exit) turns OFF at detection
Paper is fed to the paper exit section straight by of the trailing edge of paper, M8 starts rotating in
the paper exit roller driven by M4 (fixing) because the forward direction at a high speed, proceeding
SD7 (reverse gate) is turned ON to close the to feed the next sheet of paper.
reverse/exit selection gate. After a lapse of the specified time from detection
(2) Paper reverse/exit of the trailing edge of paper by PS46, M9 starts
Because SD7 (reverse gate) has been turned rotating in the opposite direction at a low speed,
OFF to open the reverse/exit selection gate, feeding paper to the ADU conveyance section.
paper is fed to the reverse/exit section in ADU by When PS45 (ADU paper reverse) detects the
the paper exit roller and decurler roller driven by trailing edge of paper and consequently turns
M4 (fixing). OFF, M9 starts rotating in the forward direction at
(3) ADU conveyance a low speed, proceeding to feed the next sheet of
Same as paper reverse/exit. paper.
c. Reverse control d. M7 (paper exit) control
M8 (reverse/exit) starts when the START button M7 (paper exit) turns ON when the START button
is pressed, and it stops when PS37 (paper exit) is pressed. The OFF timing is different between
turns OFF at detection of the trailing edge of the paper straight exit and reverse/exit.
last sheet of paper. Its rotational speed and (1) Paper straight exit
direction change when paper is ejected or The paper fed from the fixing unit by the exit roller
reversed, or is fed to ADU. is ejected by the main body exit roller driven by
(1) Paper reverse/exit M7 (paper exit). M7 is always rotating at a con-
The paper fed from the fixing unit is then fed to stant speed and it is turned OFF when PS37
the reverse/exit section via the reverse/exit (paper exit) turns OFF at detection of the trailing
selection gate. Normally, M8 and M9 are rotating edge of the last sheet of paper.
in the forward direction at a low speed, feeding (2) Paper reverse/exit
the paper to the ADU reverse section. The paper fed from the reverse/exit section in
When PS30 (fixing exit) detects the trailing edge ADU with it reversed, is ejected by the exit con-
of paper and consequently turns OFF, M8 and veyance roller and main body exit roller which are
M9 start rotating in the forward direction at a high driven by M7 (paper exit) rotating at a high
speed, feeding paper to the ADU reverse section speed. After a lapse of the specified time from
continuously. When PS42 (paper reverse) turning OFF of PS42 (paper reverse) at detection
detects the trailing edge of paper and conse- of the trailing edge of paper, M7 (paper exit)
2-N-11
ADU
starts rotating at a low speed to even up the 2. Signals

edges of paper in the exit tray. When PS37 a. Input signals
(paper exit) is turned OFF at detection of the trail- (1) FIXEXIT_PS (PS30 to PRCB)
ing edge of paper, M7 starts rotating at a high Detection signal of paper passage at fixing unit
speed again, proceeding to eject the next sheet exit
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
of paper. When PS37 detects the trailing edge of [L]: Detected.

the last sheet of paper, M7 (paper exit) stops. If [H]: Not detected.
FNS is provided, M7 is always rotating at a high (2) DECUR_PS (PS42 to ADUDB)
speed. Reverse/exit gate open/close detection signal
[L]: Gate is open.
[H]: Gate is closed.
(3) ADU_REV (PS45 to ADUDB)
ADU reverse section paper passage detection
signal
[L]: Detected.
[H]: Not detected.
(4) REV_PS (PS46 to ADUDB)
ADU gate open/close detection signal
[L]: Gate is open.
[H]: Gate is closed.
b. Output signals
(1) GATE_DR (ADUDB to SD7)
SD7 (reverse gate) ON/OFF drive signal
[L]: SD7 ON
[H]: SD7 OFF
(2) A, /A (PRCB to M7)
M7 (paper exit) A-phase drive control pulse sig-
nal
(3) B, /B (PRCB to M7)
M7 (paper exit) B-phase drive control pulse sig-
nal
(4) A, /A (ADUDB to M8)
M8 (reverse/exit) A-phase drive control pulse
signal
(5) B, /B (ADUDB to M8)
M8 (reverse/exit) B-phase drive control pulse
signal
2-N-12
ADU
[6] ADU Paper Conveyance/Feed Control
24V
24V
A
/A M6
B
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
/B
+5V
PGND
START/STOP
CLK
CW/CCW M5
LD
H/L
PGND
+24V
5V2
ADU JAM PS41
S.GND
5V2
ADU REV PS45
IO DTXD S.GND
IO DCLK
ADU LATCH 5V2
IO UCLK REV PS PS46
REQ1 S.GND
IO URXD
ACK1
ERR OUT1 5V2
2NDM CLK HD PS PS47
S.GND
5V2
PRCB ADUCR PS PS48
S.GND
5V2
ADUDN PS PS49
S.GND
5V2
ADUEXIT PS PS50
S.GND
MC24V
SD9
LOCK SD
5V2 MC24V
24V1 MC2
S.GND ADUDN MC
MS1 MS2
24V2 MC24V
P.GND MC13
24V1 ADUCR MC
5V2
S.GND
P.GND
DCPS ADUDB
The paper fed from the ADU paper reversal sec- are PS41 (ADU conveyance/1), PS45 (ADU
tion is fed by transmitting the drive force of M5 paper reverse), PS46 (reverse/exit), PS48 (ADU
(conveyance) to ADU conveyance rollers 1 to 4. paper conveyance/2), PS49 (ADU deceleration),
Paper is then fed to the second paper feed sec- and PS50 (ADU pre-registration). SD9 (ADU
tion by the drive force of M6 (loop roller). In the lock) is provided to lock the handle of the ADU.
ADU conveyance section, pre-loop control is per-
formed to correct paper skew forcibly. To perform
this control, MC2 (ADU deceleration) and MC13
(ADU conveyance) are provided. Related signals
2-N-13
ADU
1. Operation 2. Signals
a. ADU conveyance control a. Input signals
The paper fed from the ADU paper reversal sec- (1) ADU_JAM (PS41 to ADUSDB)
tion is fed to ADU pre-registration rollers at a high Detection signal of paper passage from exit of
speed by transmitting the drive force of M5 (con- ADU conveyance roller 1
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
veyance) to ADU conveyance rollers 1 to 4. ADU [L]: Detected.

conveyance rollers 1 and 2 are turned ON/OFF [H]: Not detected.
by MC13 (ADU conveyance) and ADU convey- (2) HD_PS (PS47 to ADUDB)
ance rollers 3 and 4 are controlled by MC2 (ADU ADU handle position detection signal
deceleration). After a lapse of the specified time [H]: Handle is released.
from turning ON of PS49 (ADU deceleration), (3) ADUCR_PS (PS48 to ADUDB)
MC2 and MC13 are turned OFF to press the Detection signal of paper passage from exit of
paper against the ADU pre-registration roller, ADU conveyance roller 2
forming a paper loop. [L]: Detected.
MC13 is turned ON/OFF only when the paper [H]: Not detected.
length is 325 mm or longer. If the paper length is (4) ADUDN_PS (PS49 to ADUDB)
less than 325 mm, it stays ON during copying. Detection signal of paper passage from exit of
b. ADU feed control ADU conveyance roller 3
M6 (loop roller) starts rotating at a high speed [L]: Detected.
after a lapse of the specified time from detection [H]: Not detected.
of the leading edge of paper by PS50 (ADU pre- b. Output signals
registration). Thus, the ADU pre-registration (1) LOCK_SD (ADUDB to SD9)
roller starts rotating to feed paper to the second SD9 (ADU lock) drive signal
paper feed section. At this time, MC2 (ADU [L]: SD9 ON
deceleration) and MC13 (ADU conveyance) are [H]: SD9 OFF
turned OFF so that the drive force of M5 (con- (2) ADUDN_MC (ADUDB to MC2)
veyance) which is also used to drive the second MC2 (ADU deceleration) drive signal
paper feed section is not transmitted to ADU con- [L]: MC2 ON
veyance rollers 1, 2, 3, and 4. MC2 and MC13 [H]: MC2 OFF
are turned ON after a lapse of the specified time (3) ADUCR_MC (ADUDB to MC13)
from detection of the trailing edge of paper by MC13 (ADU conveyance) drive signal
PS49 (ADU deceleration), proceeding to feed [L]: MC13 ON
the next sheet of paper. [H]: MC13 OFF
After a lapse of the specified time from detection
of the leading edge of paper by PS44 (registra-
tion), M6 starts rotating at a low speed. MC1
(registration) is turned ON after formation of a
paper loop by the registration roller, thus writing
the image on the back side.
c. ADU lock control
The ADU handle is locked by SD9 (ADU lock).
PS47 (ADU handle) detects the handle position
to determine whether the handle is locked or
released.
2-N-14
FIXING UNIT
FIXING UNIT
[1] Composition
Fixing heater lamp/2 (L3)

Cleaning web wind-up shaft
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Pressure roller Cleaning web unwinding shaft
Fixing claw unit (upper)
Fixing claw (upper)
Fixing unit cover (upper)
Cleaning web
Fixing heater lamp/1 (L2)
Fixing heater lamp/3

Restriction shaft
(L4)
Pressure release lever Fixing claw (lower)
Exit roller
Fixing roller (lower)
Decurler roller
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Fixing Pressure + Heat roller
Heat source *1 Heater lamp(Upper rollers: Two, Lower roller: One)
Cleaning *2 Upper roller: Cleaning web (containing silicon oil)
Upper roller Aluminum + Teflon coating
Lower roller Silicon rubber + PFA tube
Separation Separation claws (six upper and three lower claws)
Temperature detection Upper roller: - Noncontact type thermistor (for control) TH1
- Contact type thermistor (for fault detection) TH2
Overheat protection Upper roller: - Noncontact type thermostat (for fault detec-
tion) TS1
Lower roller: - Noncontact type thermostat (for fault detec-
tion) TS2
Neutralizing Neutralizing brush
Pressure release Pressure release shaft and spring
Exit path selection Reverse/exit selection gate
Decurler *3 Decurler roller + Restriction shaft
Jam detection *4 Jam detection plate + Actuator + Photosensor
2-O-1
FIXING UNIT
*1 Fixing heater lamps *3 Decurler

Two halogen lamps are used for the fixing upper The paper guided by the reverse/exit selection
roller and one halogen lamp is used for the fixing gate is decurled while it passes between the
lower roller to reduce the warm-up time and decurler roller and restriction shafts. The
ensure reliable fixing. decurler roller is driven by the fixing roller (upper)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
*2 Cleaning via gears.

Cleaning web is used to clean the fixing upper
roller. The web SD (SD2) in the main body turns Fixing roller (upper)
ON/OFF to drive the cleaning web wind-up shaft
via the ratchet mechanism and gears, thus sup-
Decurler roller
plying cleaning web from the cleaning web
unwinding shaft. SD2 is controlled according to Restriction
the copy count, and cleaning web supplied about shafts
0.025 to 0.05 mm/copy. Cleaning web containing
silicon oil is pressed against the fixing roller
(upper) by the pressure roller.
Pressure roller Cleaning web unwinding shaft

Web SD (SD2)
*4 Jam detection
When a jam occurs in the fixing exit section, the
paper exit guide plate (lower) is pressed down,
causing the fixing exit PS (PS30) to detect a jam
via the jam detection plate and actuator.
Cleaning web
Actuator
wind-up shaft Exit guide plate (lower)
Ratchet
Jam detection Fixing exit PS (PS30)

plate
2-O-2
FIXING UNIT
[3] M16 (Web Drive) Control 2. Signals

a. PRCB input signal
24VDC 5V2
(1) FIXEXIT_PS (PS30 to PRCB)
PGND FIXEXIT_PS
S.GND
PS30 Detection signal of passage of paper at fixing unit
5VDC
SGND exit
MC24V_2
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
DCPS WEBSC_DRV SD2 [L]: Detected.
PRCB [H]: Not detected.
b. PRCB output signal
(1) WEBSC_DRV (PRCB to SD2)
SD2 (web) is controlled by PRCB (printer control SD2 (web) drive control signal
board). The related signal is PS30 (fixing exit). [L]: SD2 ON
[H]: SD2 OFF
1. Operation
When PS30 is turned ON by passage of paper,
SD2 is controlled by PRCB (printer control
board) according to the fixing web counter value.
The fixing web counter value is incremented
together with the total counter in exit section of
the main body. The relationship between the fix-
ing web counter values and SD2 (web) is as fol-
lows:
Fixing web counter
SD2 drive count
value
1 to 12,000 Once per copy
12,001 to 30,000 Once per copy *1
30,001 to 60,000 Once per copy *2
60,001 to 125,000 Once per 2 copies
125,0001 to 260,000 Once per 3 copies
260,001 or more Once per 6 copies
*1 SD2 is turned ON once per copy, but is not turned

ON once per six copies.
*2 SD2 is turned ON once per copy, but is not turned
ON once per three copies.
2-O-3
FIXING UNIT
[4] Fixing Temperature Control
AC(H) RL1 TS1 L2 TRC1 FIXHT1_CONT

2 UNIT EXPLANATION
L3 TRC2 FIXHT2_CONT
TS2 L4 TRC3 FIXHT3_CONT

24VDC
5V2
AC(C) S.GND
MAINRL_CONT
DCPS
TH1 TH1+
TH1-
TH2 TH2+
TH2-
PRCB
The fixing roller (upper) is heated by L2 (fixing The operating temperature of the thermostats
heater lamp 1) and L3 (fixing heater lamp 2) and are as follows:
the fixing roller (lower) is heated by L4 (fixing TS1: Opens at 356°F
heater lamp 3). The PRCB (printer control board) TS2: Opens at 230°F
detects the temperature of the fixing roller
(upper) using TH1 (fixing temperature sensor/1) 2. Signals
TH2 (fixing temperature sensor/2) and controls a. PRCB input signals
L2 and L3 via DCPS (DC power supply unit). (1) TH1+,- (TH1 to PRCB)
Fixing roller (upper) temperature detection sig-
1. Operation nal
a. Temperature control This signal is used to control the temperature of
The PRCB (printer control board) turns ON the the fixing roller (upper) and to detect abnormal
fixing heater lamp circuit in DCPS as soon as the temperature rise.
SW2 (sub power) is turned ON, holding L2 (fixing (2) TH2+,- (TH2 to PRCB)
heater lamp/1), L3 (fixing heater lamp/2), and L4 Fixing roller (upper) temperature detection sig-
(fixing heater lamp/3) lit until the fixing roller nal
(upper) reaches the specified temperature. L2, This signal is used to detect the fixing roller
L3 and L4 are turned ON/OFF under the control (upper) abnormal temperature rise.
of the TRC1 (triac/1 ), TRC2 (triac/2) and TRC3
(triac/3).
b. Protection against abnormal temperature
rise
Thermostats are used to prevent the tempera-
ture of the fixing rollers from rising abnormally.
TS1 (thermostat/U) and TS2 (thermostat/L) are
used for the fixing roller (upper/lower). As these
thermostat are of the noncontact type, those do
not touch the fixing roller (upper/lower).
2-O-4
FIXING UNIT

(1) FIXHT1_CONT (PRCB to DCPS)
L2 drive control signal
[L]: L2 ON
[H]: L2 OFF
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[L]: L3 ON
[H]: L3 OFF
[L]: L4 ON
[H]: L4 OFF
2-O-5
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Blank page
OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL

[1] Parts Energized When SW1 (Main Power) is OFF
SW1
CBR1 AC(L)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
RL2
NF COIL2 5V1
12V1
(Europe
only) DCPS
CBR2 COIL1 AC(N)
(Europe
only)
ICB
HTR1
HTR2
HTR3
TRANSFORMER OPTION
SW1
CBR1 AC(L)
SW3
RL2
NF
5V1
12V1
DCPS
CBR2 AC(N)
ACDB
ICB
HTR1
HTR2
HTR3
TRANSFORMER OPTION
7272ma2014

2-P-1
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 2-P-1 REPLACEMENT
1. Operation
If the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet, the
following parts are energized regardless of
whether SW1 (main power) is ON or OFF:
a. CBR1/2 (circuit breaker/1/2)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
If an excessive current flows due to a short in an

internal part or other factors, this breaker turns
OFF to cut off the power to the machine.
b. NF (noise filter)
The noise filter is used to reduce the noise arriv-
ing through the power line.
c. DCPS (DC power supply unit)
RL2 (heater relay) is turned ON to turn ON HTR1
(heater/1), HTR2 (heater/2), and HTR3 (drum
heater (spare parts)).
4 d. Internal heaters
HTR1 (heater/1), HTR2 (heater/2), and HTR3
(drum heater (spare parts)) are energized in syn-
chronization with ON or OFF operation of SW1
(main power). (7155/7165)
HTRs 1 to 3 are energized by turning ON/OFF
SW3 (heater switch). (7255/7272)

2-P-2
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 2-P-1-1 ADDITION
Blank page
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[2] Parts That Operate When SW1 (Main Power)/SW2 (Sub Power) is ON
4 SW1
AC(L)
RL1 5VDC
-5VDC
12VDC
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
L2
L3
DCPS 5V1
AC(N) 12V1
SW2
REM/2
REM/3
AC OFF(IN)
5VDC IP-511
12VDC
-12VDC /IP-511Type-A
5VDC
12VDC HD-105
-12VDC
OB1 ICB
7272ma2020
1. Operation 4 (2) AC_OFF (IN) (DCPS to ICB)

a. Operation performed when SW1 (main AC input OFF detection signal (for data evacua-
power) is ON tion to HDD)
When SW1 (main power) is turned ON, AC [L]: When AC power is turned ON.
power is supplied to DCPS (DC power supply [H]: Until DC power output is stopped after AC
unit). As a result, DCPS supplies 5 VDC and 12 power is turned OFF.
VDC to the status management and control cir-
cuit on ICB (image control board), HD-105, and
IP-511. ICB supplies 5 VDC to OB1 (operation
board/1).
b. Operation performed when SW2 (sub power)
is ON
If SW2 (sub power) is turned ON when SW1
(main power) is already ON, DCPS supplies 24
DVC for driving various loads. Thus, all boards
are energized and initialization of this machine
starts.
2. Signals
a. Output signals
(1) REM/2, /3 (ICB to DCPS)
The DC voltage output from DCPS (DC power
supply unit) is controlled according to the com-
bination of levels of two signals.
REM/2 REM/3 Output
H H 5V1,12V1
5V1,12V1,5V2,12V2,
L H
24V1,-5V1
5V1,12V1,5V2,12V2,
L L
24V1,-5V1,24V2

2-P-4
[3] Cooling Fan Control

4
MAINFAN EM
MAINFAN D
MAINFAN HL 20 FM1
P.GND
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
WRFAN1 EM
WRFAN1 D
WRFAN1 HL FM2
P.GND
BINF_D CLFAN EM
FM12 CLNFAN D
BINFF_EM
CLFAN HL FM5
GND P.GND
(7255/7272)
FIXFAN D
FIXFAN3 EM FM6
P.GND
FIXFAN D
FIXFAN2 EM FM7
P.GND
FIXFAN D
FIXFAN1 EM FM8
P.GND
24V DRV SCANFAN CONT-18
FM9 EM SCANFAN EM
IO DTXD
P.GND IO DCLK
SCDB ADU LATCH
IO UCLK
REQ1
IO URXD
ACK1
ERR OUT1
PRCB
5V2
24V1 24V1
P.GND S.GND
ADU FAN/1
FAN1 24V1 ADUFAN EM/1 FM10
FM13 FAN2 P.GND
P.GND
FAN3
DCPS ADUDB
7272ma2015
FM1 (main body cooling/1), FM2 (write section 1. Operation

cooling), FM5 (cleaner cooling), FM6 (paper exit A 24 VDC motor is used for each cooling fan.
/F), FM7 (paper exit/R), and FM8 (main cooling a. FM1 (main body cooling/1)
/2) are controlled by PRCB (printer control (1) ON timing
board) directly. FM9 (scanner cooling) is driven • During warm-up, starts rotating at a low speed
by SCDB (scanner drive board). FM10 (ADU when M2 (drum) is turned ON.
reverse motor cooling) is driven by ADUDB (ADU • During copying, held rotating at a high speed.
drive board) and is controlled by PRCB. FM13 When copying is completed, rotates at a high
(power supply cooling) is driven by DCPS (DC speed for the specified time according to the
power supply unit). temperature in the machine, then starts rotat-
ing at a low speed.

2-P-5
(2) OFF timing (1) ON timing

• During warm-up, stops when M2 (drum) is At the start of copying, starts rotating at a con-
turned OFF. stant speed.
• After completion of warm-up, not turned OFF (2) OFF timing
until SW2 (sub power) is turned OFF. Turned OFF when M7 (paper exit) is turned ON.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
b. FM2 (writing section cooling) e. FM9 (scanner cooling)

(1) ON timing (1) ON timing
Turned ON when M15 (polygon) is turned ON. Turned ON when L1 (exposure lamp) is turned
• During copying, held rotating at a high speed ON.
in sync with M2 (drum). (2) OFF timing
• When not copying, held rotating at a low Turned OFF when L1 (exposure lamp) is turned
speed. OFF.
(2) OFF timing f. FM10 (ADU reverse motor cooling)
Not turned OFF until SW2 (sub power) is turned (1) ON timing
OFF. Starts rotating at a constant speed when M9
c. FM5 (cleaner cooling) (ADU reverse) is turned ON.
(1) ON timing (2) OFF timing
Turned ON when SW2 (sub power) is turned ON. Turned OFF when M9 (ADU reverse) is turned
• During coping, held rotating at a high speed. OFF.
• When copying is completed, starts rotating at g. FM13 (power supply cooling)
a low speed after a lapse of the specified time (1) ON timing
from turning OFF of M7 (paper exit). After this, Starts rotating at a constant speed when SW1
switching between high- and low-speed oper- (main power) is turned ON.
ations takes place according to the tempera- (2) OFF timing
ture in the machine. Not turned OFF until SW1 (main power) is turned
(2) OFF timing OFF.
Not turned OFF until SW2 (sub power) is turned 4 h. FM12 (Developer cooling) (7255/7272)
OFF. (1) ON timing
d. FM6 (paper exit/F), FM7 (paper exit/R), and Turned ON when the copying is started.
FM8 (main cooling/2) (2) OFF timing
Turned OFF when M7 (paper exit) is turned ON.
i. Fan air flow
4 FM4
Developing suction fan
FM9 Duct
Scanner cooling fan Duct (Lower side of developing unit)
FM1 FM5
Main body cooling fan 1 Cleaner cooling fan
FM12 (Developer cooling fan)

Duct (7255/7272 only)
FM3
Duct
FM8 Conveyance suction fan
Main body cooling fan 2 Duct
FM7
Paper exit fan/R
FM13
Power supply cooling fan
Duct
FM6
FM2
Paper exit fan/F
Write unit cooling fan FRONT
7272ma2016

2-P-6
2. Signals 4 (11) BINFF_EM

a. Input signals FM12 (developer cooling) abnormality detection
(1) MAINFAN_EM (FM1 to PRCB) signal
FM1 (main body cooling/1) abnormality detec- [L]: FM12 is normal
tion signal [H]: FM12 is abnormal
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: Abnormality is detected. b. Output signals
(2) WRFAN1_EM (FM2 to PRCB) (1) MAINFAN_D (PRCB to FM1)
FM2 (writing section cooling) abnormality detec- FM1 (main body cooling/1) ON/OFF control signal
tion signal [L]: FM1 ON
[H]: Abnormality is detected. [H]: FM1 OFF
(3) CLFABN_EM (FM5 to PRCB) (2) MAINFAN_HL_20 (PRCB to FM1)
FM5 (cleaner cooling) abnormality detection sig- FM1 (main body cooling/1) rotational speed con-
nal trol signal
[H]: Abnormality is detected. [L]: Low speed
(4) FIXFAN3_EM (FM6 to PRCB) [H]: High speed
FM6 (paper exit/F) abnormality detection signal (3) WRFAN1_D (PRCB to FM2)
[L]: FM6 is normal. FM2 (writing section cooling) ON/OFF control
[H]: FM6 is abnormal signal
(5) FIXFAN2_EM (FM7 to PRCB) [L]: FM2 ON
FM7 (paper exit/R) abnormality detection signal [H]: FM2 OFF
[L]: FM7 is normal. (4) WRFAN1_HL (PRCB to FM2)
[H]: FM7 is abnormal. FM2 (write section cooling) rotational speed con-
(6) FIXFAN1_EM (FM8 to PRCB) trol signal
FM8 (main cooling/2) abnormality detection sig- [L]: Low speed
nal [H]: High speed
[L]: FM8 is normal. (5) CLNFAN_D (PRCB to FM5)
[H]: FM8 is abnormal. FM5 (cleaner cooling) ON/OFF control signal
(7) EM (FM9 to SCDB) [L]: FM5 ON
FM9 (scanner cooling) abnormality detection [H]: FM5 OFF
signal (6) CLFFAN_D (PRCB to FM5)
[L]: FM9 is normal. FM5 (cleaner cooling) rotational speed control
[H]: FM9 is abnormal. signal
(8) ADUFAN_EM/1 (FM10 to PRCB) [L]: Low speed
FM10 (ADU reverse motor cooling) abnormality [H]: High speed
detection signal (7) FIXFAN_D (PRCB to FM6)
[L]: FM10 is normal. FM6 (paper exit/F) rotational speed control sig-
[H]: FM10 is abnormal. nal
(9) FAN2 (FM13 to PRCB) [L]: Low speed
FM13 (power supply cooling) abnormality detec- [H]: High speed
tion signal (8) FIXFAN_D (PRCB to FM7)
[L]: FM13 is normal. FM7 (paper exit/R) ON/OFF control signal
[H]: FM13 is abnormal. [L]: FM7 ON
(10) SCANFAN_EM (SCDB to PRCB) [H]: FM7 OFF
FM9 (scanner cooling) abnormality detection (9) FIXFAN-D (PRCB to FM8)
signal FM8 (main cooling/2) ON/OFF control signal
[L]: FM9 is normal. [L]: FM8 ON
[H]: FM9 is abnormal. [H]: FM8 OFF

2-P-7
(10) 24V DRV (SCDB to FM9) (12) FAN1 (DCPS to FM13)

FM9 (scanner cooling) ON/OFF control signal [L]: FM13 ON
[L]: FM9 ON [H]: FM13 OFF
[H]: FM9 OFF (13) SCANFAN_CONT-18 (PRCB to SCDB)
(11) ADU FAN/1 (ADUSDB to FM10) FM9 (scanner cooling) ON/OFF control signal
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
FM10 (ADU reverse motor cooling) ON/OFF [L]: FM9 ON

control signal [H]: FM9 OFF
[L]: FM10 ON 4 (14) BINF_D
[H]: FM10 OFF FM12 (developer cooling) ON/OFF control signal
[L]: FM12 ON
[H]: FM12 OFF
[4] Operation Panel Control
S OUT2
S IN2
/RTS2
/CTS2
/DTR2 PAKB
/DSR2
LCD
ICB
24V1
5V2 OB INVB
S.GND
P.GND
DCPS OB1
The operation panel consists of OB1 (operation b. LCD (indicator board) control
board 1), PAKB (panel key board), and LCD (indi- (1) LCD (indicator board) display operation
cator board). The LCD has a backlight which is The LCD (image control board) displays various
driven by OB IVNB (OB inverter) and touch information according to the 4-bit parallel data
switches which correspond to the display mes- from ICB (image control board) via OB1 (opera-
sages. tion board 1).
The operation panel is controlled by the OB1 (2) Backlight ON operation
based on the serial data output from the ICB The LCD (indicator board) has a backlight (cold
(image control board). cathode tube) to facilitate viewing. The backlight
is driven by OB INVB (OB inverter), and con-
1. Operation trolled by the OB1 (operation board/1).
a. LED ON operation (3) PAKB (panel key board) control
The LED on the OB1 (operation board/1) is con- The LCD (indicator board) has PAKB (panel key
trolled by sub CPU of OB1 at the command of board) to allow you to select an item displayed on
ICB (image control board). the LCD directly. PAKB is controlled by OB1
(operation board/1).
2-P-8
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) S_IN2 (OB1 to ICB)
Serial data which informs ICB (image control
board) of the operation state of OB1 (operation
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
board/1).
(2) /CTS2 (OB1 to ICB)
Signal which indicates that data can be sent from
OB1 (operation board/1) to ICB (image control
board)
When this signal is at the high level ([H]), ICB
stops sending the S_OUT2 signal.
(3) /DSR2 (OB1 to ICB)
Acknowledgment signal which is returned each
time OB1 (operation board/1) receives one-byte
data from ICB (image control board)
b. Output signals
(1) S_OUT2 (ICB to OB1)
Serial data which informs OB1 (operation board
/1) of the machine status that is known to ICB
(image control board).
(2) /RTS2 (ICB to OB1)
Signal which indicates that data can be sent from
ICB (image control board) to OB1 (operation
board/1).
When this signal is at the high level ([H]), OB1
stops sending the S_IN2 signal.
(3) /DTR2 (ICB to OB1)
Acknowledgment signal which is returned each
time ICB (image control board) receives one-
byte data from OB1 (operation board/1).
2-P-9
2-P-7
[5] Counter Control
MC24V 3
TC DRV C(T)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
KEYC DRV
S.GND
KEYC SET C(K)
MC24V 3
5V
MAINEXIT PS PS37
S.GND
S OUT2
S IN2
/RTS2
/CTS2
/DTR2
/DSR2
ICB
24V1
5V2
S.GND
P.GND
PRCB DCPS OB1
This machine has the following counters: 2. Signals

C (T): Total counter a. PRCB input signals
C (K): Key counter (1) KSYC_SET (C (K) to PRCB)
These counters are controlled by the PRCB Signal indicating the state of 24 V power supply
(printer control board). to C (K)
The related signal is PS37 (paper exit). [L]: 24V power is not supplied.
b. Output signals
1. Operation (1) TC_DRV (PRCB to C (T))
This machine counts copies using a software C (T) drive control signal
counter. [L]: C (T) ON
(1) Paper exit counter (2) KEYC_DRV (PRCB to C (K))
The count increases by 1 each time PS37 (paper C (K) drive control signal
exit) which has been ON is turned OFF (two [L]: C (K) ON
counts in the dual-sided document copy mode).
<Operation of each counter>
a. Copy quantity display counter on OB
Displays the count of ejected papers
b. C (K)
This counter counts in sync with the paper exit
counter.
c. C (T)
This counter counts in sync with the paper exit
counter.
2-P-10
2-P-8
[6] Option Control

4
FNS
(FS-110/FS-210/FS-111)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
SF
(SF-101)
LCT
(LT-402/LT412)
IP-511
ICB HD-105
MODEM
24V1
CV P.GND
(COPY VENDOR) 5V2
S.GND
PRCB 12V1
DCPS
7272ma2021
Options such as LCT and FNS are controlled by

the PRCB (printer control board).
1. Operation
FNS incorporates CB which exchanges only
control data with PRCB (printer control board) of
the main body. LCT, FNS, and HDD are powered
by the DCPS (DC power supply unit).

2-P-11
<Functions and output timings of signals for copy vendors>

Connector Pin No. Signal name Description Output timing Signal type
1 DV24V Key counter power supply Always 24 V, 300 mA
C(K) SIG Key counter connection rec-
2
ognition
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
- -
35 3 C(K) GND Signal ground
C(K) DRIVE Key counter signal count up 100-ms L-signal output
4 -
after paper ejection
5 P. GND Power ground - -
Vendor Copy Copying signal Output from the moment Open collector
START PRINT button is 5V, 200 mA
1 pressed to the moment
paper ejection is com-
pleted.
Vendor FEED Paper feed signal Common to main body
tray. 100-ms L-signal
2
output in sync with paper
feed.
3 Paper size 0 Paper size signal Output when paper size
36 is changed.
4 Paper size 1
5 Paper size 2
6 Paper size 3
Vendor Double-sided copy selec- Output when ADU mode
7
screen tion signal is selected.
CPF SIG0 CPF mode selection signal Output when copy or
8
printer mode is selected.
9 CPF SIG1
10 P. GND Power ground - -
2-P-12
2-P-10
3
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
This section explains how to disassemble and reassemble the machine.

When disassembling and reassembling the machine, follow the precau-
tions given below.
1. Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet.
2. The disassembled parts must be reassembled following the disas-
sembly procedure in reverse unless otherwise specified.
3. Care should be taken not to lose small parts. Care should also be
taken not to install small parts in wrong places.
4. Do not operate the machine before installing all the disassembled
parts completely.
5. Removal of some screws is prohibited in this section. Never loosen
them.
EXTERNAL SECTION
EXTERNAL SECTION
[1] Replacing the Ozone Filter 4 In the case of the 7255/7272
In the case of the 7155/7165 Caution:
Caution: Be sure the power cord has been
Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet.
unplugged from the wall outlet.
Caution: When replacing the ozone filter /M and
Caution: When replacing the ozone filter, insert /S, insert it in the opening in the main
it in the opening in the main body as far body as far as it will go.
as it will go. b. Procedure
a. Procedure (1) Loosen two screws to remove the ozone filter
(1) Loosen two screws to remove the ozone filter cover.
cover.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screw
Screw
Ozone filter cover
Ozone filter cover
Screw
Screw
(2) Replace the ozone filter /M and /S.

(2) Replace the ozone filter.
Ozone filter /M Ozone filter /S
Ozone filter
Ozone filter cover

7272ma3001
Ozone filter cover
(3) Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
3-A-1
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-A-1 REPLACEMENT
EXTERNAL SECTION
[2] Replacing the Developing Suction

Filter
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been
Caution: When replacing the developing suc-

tion filter, insert it in the opening in the
main body as far as it will go.
a. Procedure
(1) Loosen the screw to remove the developing suc-
tion filter cover.
(2) Replace the developing suction filter.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Developing suction filter
Screw
(3) Reinstall the above parts following the removal

steps in reverse.
Caution: When installing the developing suc-

tion filter, the filter-supporting material
should face the back of the machine.

3-A-2
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-A-1-1 ADDITION
Blank page
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
EXTERNAL SECTION
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the (2) Remove seven screws to detach the left side
External Covers cover.
Caution: Left side cover

Screw
a. Procedure Screw
(1) Remove fourteen screws to detach the rear
cover.
Caution: The ozone filter cover and the option

cover detach together with the rear
cover.
Option cover
Ozone filter cover
Screws
Screw Screws
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws Rear cover
3-A-4
3-A-2
EXTERNAL SECTION
(3) Loosen one screw and remove the developing (14) Remove the top cover (middle front) and top
suction filter cover. cover (middle rear).
(4) Loosen five screws and detach the right side
cover (upper). Original stopper plate (rear)
Shoulder screws
Caution: The developing suction filter cover Top cover
detaches together with the right side (middle rear)
Top cover (right)
cover (upper). Top cover (left)
Screws
(5) Loosen two screws to detach the right side cover
(lower front).
(lower rear).
(lower middle).
Right side cover (upper)

Screws
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Top cover
Screws
Shoulder screws (middle front)
Platen glass
Original stopper plate (left)
Screws
Screws
Right side cover

Screws
Screws (lower rear)
Right side cover
Right side cover (lower middle)
(lower front)
(8) Open the RADF.

(9) Remove the two shoulder screws to remove the
original stopper plate (left).
(10) Remove the three shoulder screws to remove the
original stopper plate (rear).
(11) Remove the platen glass.
(12) Remove two screws to detach the top cover (left).
(13) Remove two screws to detach the top cover
(right).
3-A-5
3-A-3
EXTERNAL SECTION
(15) Open the front right door and front left door. [4] Changing the Operation Panel
(16) Remove one screw to remove the front open/ Attachment Angle and Removing/
close stopper. Reinstalling
(17) Remove two screws to remove the front right
door open/close hinge (lower) and front right Caution:
door. Be sure the power cord has been
(18) Remove two screws and remove the front left unplugged from the wall outlet.
door hinge (lower) and the front left door. a. Procedure
(1) Open the front left door and front right door.
(2) Remove two screws to remove the operation
Front open/close stopper
panel cover (middle).
Screw Operation panel cover (middle)
Screws
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Front right door hinge (lower) Front right door
Screws
(3) Remove two screws to unlock the operation

Front left door panel.
hinge (lower)
Operation panel
Screw Screw
Screws
Front left door

steps in reverse.
Attachment holes when changing

the operation panel angle
3-A-6
3-A-4
EXTERNAL SECTION
(4) When changing the operation panel attachment (5) Remove the relay connectors (CN163, 164).
angle, align the operation panel stopper with the
Caution: Each relay connector consist of two
stopper hole at the front side on the bottom of the
male sides and one female side. Be
operation panel and fasten using two screws in
sure to remove only the male side
the operation cover attachment holes.
(shown below).
Caution1: To remove the operation panel, skip
(6) Remove the operation panel.
this step and proceed to step (5).
Caution2: When the attachment angle of the
operation panel is changed, the Relay connector (CN164)
operation panel cover and two
Relay connector
screws will become unnecessary. (CN163)
Stopper hole
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Operation panel stopper
Operation panel
Stopper hole Operation panel

steps in reverse.
Stopper hole
Screws
Operation panel stopper
3-A-7
3-A-5
EXTERNAL SECTION
[5] Resetting the Circuit Breaker (3) Turn over the circuit breaker assemblies and
press the reset button at the center of each circuit
Caution:
breaker.
steps in reverse.
Caution:
Connection of cables to circuit breaker 1
and 2 (CBR1, 2) must not be changed.
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove two screws and loosen the circuit
breaker assembly.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Noise filter (NF)

Faston
(FT3: noise filter side/
black cable)
Circuit breaker 1 (CBR1)
Screws (2)
Faston (FT1:
wall outlet side/
black cable)
Circuit breaker
assembly
Circuit breaker 2
(CBR2)
Faston (FT2:
wall outlet side/
white cable)
Faston (FT4:
noise filter side/
white cable)
3-A-8
3-A-6
DRIVE SECTION
DRIVE SECTION
[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Drum (5) Remove five screws at the rear and three screws
Motor (M2) on the right side and remove all connectors from
the image control board (ICB).
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been Screws (3)
Image control board (ICB)
Caution: Be sure to draw the drum unit out of
the main body before removing or
reinstalling the drum drive motor. If
you fail to draw out the drum unit, the
cleaning blade may be damaged
because the drum rotates when
installing or removing the flywheel or
gear. Screws (3)
a. Procedure
(1) Draw the drum unit out of the main body. (See
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
"DRUM UNIT.")
(2) Remove the rear cover. (See "EXTERNAL SEC-
TION.")
(3) Remove the developing suction cover and right Screws (2)
cover (top). (See "EXTERNAL SECTION.") Image control board mounting board
(4) Remove twenty-one screws and remove the
image control board cover.
4 Caution: When removing CN110 ribbon cable,
Image control board cover
pull and recline the lock lever front-
Screws (7)
ward, release the lock, and then pull
out the ribbon cable.
Ribbon cable
Screws (5)
Screws (5)
Screws (4)
Lock lever
7272ma3002

3-B-1
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-B-1 REPLACEMENT
DRIVE SECTION
When installing the ribbon cable, pull and recline (6) Remove each cable from wire guide.
the lock lever frontward, be sure to insert it fully (7) Remove one cable from the scanner board and
to the end of the connector so that the conductive two cables from the write unit, draw then through
surface of the ribbon cable is positioned in the the hole and open the image control board
opposite side. mounting plate.
Ribbon cable Image control board mounting plate

3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Lock lever
Conductive surface
7272ma3003
Subsequently, set back the lock lever in original

position and lock the ribbon cable.
Ribbon cable
Lock lever 7272ma3004

3-B-2
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-B-1-1 ADDITION
Blank page
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
DRIVE SECTION
(8) Remove three screws and remove the two fly- [2] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing
wheels. Input Gear
Caution:
Flywheels (2)
a. Procedure
(1) Open the image control bard mounting board.
(2) Remove six screws and remove the fixing motor
Screws (3) cover.
(3) Pull out the connector (CN304), remove four
screws to remove the fixing motor assembly.
Caution: Hold the fixing motor assembly with

your hand because it is connected to
the main body with cable.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws (4) Fixing motor assembly
(9) Remove the connector (CN301).

(10) Remove four screws and remove the drum motor
(M2).
Connector
(CN304)
Drum motor (M2) Connector (CN301)
Fixing motor cover Screws (6)
(4) Remove two screws to remove the fixing input

gear holder.
(5) Pull out the fixing input gear from the shaft.
Screws (4) Fixing input gear holder

steps in reverse.
Fixing input gear
Screws (2)

steps in reverse.
3-B-4
3-B-2
SCANNER SECTION
SCANNER SECTION
[1] Screws That Must Not be Removed [2] Removing and Reinstalling the CCD Unit
a. 14 screws securing the CCD unit
Caution:
Screws that Screws that
must not be must not be removed unplugged from the wall outlet.
removed Caution1: Be sure to adjust the image after
installing the CCD unit (See
"ADJUSTMENT.")
Caution2: When disconnecting or reconnecting
connectors from / to the AD con-
verter board, be careful not to place
any stress on the board.
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the right side cover (top), left side cover,
original stopper plates (left and rear), platen
Screws that glass and top cover (right, left, front center, and
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
must not be removed rear center). (See "EXTERNAL SECTION.")
(2) Remove eleven screws to remove the lens light
b. Read position adjusting plate screw (1 each) blocking cover.
Screws (11)
Read position adjusting plate
Screws that
(left rear)
Screws that must not be
must not be removed
removed
Read position adjusting

plate (right rear)
Lens light blocking cover
(3) Remove the connector (CN170) from the A/D

converter board (ADB).
Screws that
CCD unit
must not be
removed
Read position adjusting plate (left front)
Connector (CN170)
A/D converter board (ADB)

3-C-1
SCANNER SECTION
4 In the case of the 7255/7272 When installing the ribbon cable, pull and recline
the lock lever frontward, be sure to insert it fully
CCD unit to the end of the connector so that the conductive
surface of the ribbon cable is positioned in the
opposite side.
Lock lever
Connector (CN170)
A/D converter board (ADB) 7272ma3005
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Caution: When removing CN170 ribbon cable,

pull and recline the lock lever front-
ward, release the lock, and then pull
out the ribbon cable.
Conductive surface Ribbon cable 7272ma3032
Lock lever
Subsequently, set back the lock lever in original
position and lock the ribbon cable.
Lock lever
Ribbon cable 7272ma3031
Ribbon cable 7272ma3033

3-C-2
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-C-1-1 ADDITION
Blank page
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
SCANNER SECTION
(4) Remove two screws to remove the CCD unit. [3] Replacing the Exposure Lamp
Screws
Caution1:
Caution2:
Do not touch the exposure lamp with bare
hands.
Caution: Be sure to check the image after

installing the exposure lamp. (See
"ADJUSTMENTS.")
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the original stopper plates (left and
rear), platen glass and top cover (right, middle
Marking CCD unit front, and middle rear). (See "EXTERNAL SEC-
Marking
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
TION.")
(2) Move the exposure unit to the notch in the main
Caution: Mark the place where the CCD unit is body frame on the paper exit side.
installed before removing it. (3) Remove the connector and two screws, then
(5) Reinstall the above parts following the removal remove the exposure lamp.
steps in reverse.
Screw
Exposure lamp
Connector
Screw
Exposure lamp

steps in reverse.
3-C-4
3-C-2
SCANNER SECTION
[4] Removing and Reinstalling the (6) Move the exposure unit to the notch in the main
Exposure Unit body frame on the paper exit side.
(7) Remove two screws to detach the cord clamp
Caution:
(B).
(8) Remove one screw to remove the ground termi-
nal.
Caution1: When installing the exposure unit,
(9) Disconnect the connector (CN630).
use the optics unit positioning jig.
(10) Remove four screws to detach the exposure unit.
Caution2: Be sure to perform image adjust-
ment after installing the exposure
unit. (See "ADJUSTMENT.") Cord clamp (B)
a. Procedure Optical wire fastener Screws
(1) Remove the right side cover (top), left side cover,
original stopper plates (left and rear), platen Screws
Screw
glass and top cover (right, left, front center, and
Ground
rear center). (See "EXTERNAL SECTION.") terminal
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(2) Remove the operation panel. (See "EXTERNAL
SECTION.")
(3) Remove the relay connector (CN162).
Caution: Each relay connector consist of two

(shown below) of the CN162 connec- Exposure unit Connector (CN630)
tor.
(4) Loosen the left and right screws on the operation
panel cover (top).
(5) Remove three screws and remove the operation
unit cover (top).
Exposure unit
Optical wire fastener
Relay connector
(CN162)
Operation panel cover Screws Screws

(top)
Exposure unit
Screws (loosen) Screws (loosen)
3-C-5
3-C-3
SCANNER SECTION
b. Installation procedure [5] Installing the Optics Wire

(1) Move the V-mirror unit toward the paper exit side,
Caution:
then insert the optics positioning jigs from the
front to secure the V-mirror unit. Ensure that the
optics positioning jigs pass through the V-mirror
Caution1: When winding the optics wire around
unit.
the pulley, be sure to run the wire
(2) Insert the optics positioning jigs in the holes at
tightly so that it does not ride on the
the exposure unit mounting position from the
side of the pulley.
front.
Caution2: When re-tensioning or replacing the
(3) Slide the exposure unit to the paper exit side until
optics wire, be sure to use the optics
it touches the optics unit positioning jig.
positioning jig.
Exposure unit fixing hole Unused hole Caution3: Be sure to perform image adjust-
ment after replacing or re-installing
the wire (See "ADJUSTMENT.")
a. Procedure
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(1) Remove the exposure unit.

(2) Move the V-mirror unit toward the paper exit side
then insert the optics positioning jigs from the
V-mirror unit
front to secure the V-mirror unit. Ensure that the
Optics unit positioning jig optics positioning jigs pass through the V-mirror
unit.
(3) Place the metal bead at the midpoint of each
optics wire in the mounting hole in the drive pul-
ley. Starting at this point, wind the optics wire five
turns to the outside and four times to the inside
on the drive pulley.
Caution1: Ensure that there is a metal bead at
For exposure unit positioning the end of the outer wire, and a wire
terminal at the end of the inner wire.
Exposure unit
Caution2: Pull out the outer wire from above the
Stopping surface drive pulley in the paper exit direc-
tion, and the inner wire from under
the drive pulley in the paper feed
direction.
(4) After winding the outer wire, secure it to the wire
stopper via the outside of pulley 1 and V-mirror
pulley through the notch in the wire stopper.
Optics unit
positioning jig
V-mirror unit fixing hole (left)
(4) Install the exposure unit to the optics wire mount-

ing bracket with four screws.
(5) Remove two optics unit positioning jigs.
(6) Reverse the removal procedure to reinstall the
removed parts.
3-C-6
3-C-4
SCANNER SECTION
3 Four turns 4 3Four turns

Rear Front
Metal bead
Five turns
Five turns Metal bead
Metal bead Wire stopper
Pulley 1
Exposure unit mounting piece
Pulley 1
V-mirror pulley
Wire stopper
V-mirror unit
Exposure unit
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Pulley 3 mounting piece
Drive pulley
Wire stopper
Spring
Pulley 2
5 Spring fixing plate

Drive pulley
Front
7 Screws
6 Spring fixing plate Pulley 3

V-mirror pulley
Pulley 2
4 Metal bead
Wire stopper
Caution: There are two grooves in the wire (6) Install the other wire following the same proce-
stopper. Ensure that the outer groove dure.
is at the rear and the inner groove is at (7) Loosen each screw that was tightened tempo-
the front. rarily, install the spring on the spring fixing plate,
(5) Reverse the inner wire at pulley 2, pass it along and tighten each screw.
the inside of the V-mirror pulley and pulley 3, then
attach the wire terminal to the spring fixing plate.
At this time, secure the spring fixing plate tem-
porarily with one screw.
3-C-7
3-C-5
SCANNER SECTION
[6] Cleaning the Slit Glass and Platen [7] Replacing the Scanner Motor (M11)
Glass Caution:
unplugged from the wall outlet. a. Procedure
(1) Remove the original stopper plates (left and (1) Remove the RADF unit, original stopper plates
rear), platen glass, and top cover (right, left, front (left and rear), platen glass, and top cover (right,
center, and rear center). (See "EXTERNAL SEC- left, front center, and rear center). (See "EXTER-
TION.") NAL SECTION.")
(2) Remove two screws to detach the slit glass. (2) Remove one connector (CN639) from the APS
(3) Place the removed slit glass and platen glass on timing PS (PS51).
a rag and clean with drum cleaner and cleaning
pad.
Connector(CN639)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screw
Slit glass
(3) Remove the hinge mounting plate (rear side)

from the scanner unit. (12 screws)
Slit glass
(4) Remove four screws from the scanner motor
(M11), then remove the scanner belt and the
Screw
scanner motor.

steps in reverse.

7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK Nov. 2001 3-C-6 REPLACEMENT
SCANNER SECTION
(5) Install the scanner motor (M11) and the scanner (7) Pull the spring scale upward, and tighten the
belt. Tighten the scanner motor loosely with four scanner motor (M11) tightly with the tension
screws. pressure of 2 ± 0.2kgf. (Use four screws)
Caution1: Make sure to install the belt in the
Caution: Make sure that the scanner motor
middle of two pulleys. Also make
moves up and down when confirming
sure that the belt is not placed on the
the tension pressure.
edges of pulleys, or that it is running
off from the pulleys.
Caution2: Tighten the motor by first tightening Spring scale
the screw and then give it one turn to Scanner motor (M11)
loosen slightly.
Scanner Belt
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws
(8) Make sure that the belt is not slacked off after
marking an adjustment.
(9) Insert the connector to the scanner motor (M11).
Pulley (10) Follow the disassembly procedures in reverse
order to install.
(6) Hook the spring scale on the upper hole of the
scanner motor (M11).
Spring scale
Upper hole

7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK Nov. 2001 3-C-7 ADDITION
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
WRITE SECTION
WRITE SECTION
[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Write
Unit
Warning:
(1) Do not energize the write unit when it is
not in the correct position.
(2) Never remove the write unit cover and
the polygon unit cover.
(3) Never look directly into the laser beam. It
can cause blindness.
(4) Never remove the write unit for at least
two minutes after turning OFF the main
switch.
Caution:
Fan holder assembly
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
unplugged from the wall outlet. Relay connector (CN338)
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the left side cover. (See "EXTERNAL
SECTION.")
(2) Remove nine screws to detach the fan holder
assembly.
Screws
Caution: Each relay connector consists of two Screws
Screws
(shown below) of the CN338 connec- (4) Remove the three connectors (CN185, 187,
tor. 188).
(5) Loosen the screw to draw out and remove the
write unit.
Connector (CN187)
Connector (CN185)
Connector (CN188)
Screw
Write unit

steps in reverse.
3-D-1
WRITE SECTION
4 In the case of the 7255/7265 (4) Remove the three connectors (CN185, 187,
Warning: 188).
(1) Do not energize the write unit when it is (5) Loosen the screw to draw out and remove the
not in the correct position. write unit.
(2) Never remove the write unit cover and Relay connector(CN187)
the polygon unit cover. Relay connector(CN185)
(3) Never look directly into the laser beam. It
can cause blindness.
(4) Never remove the write unit for at least
two minutes after turning OFF the main
switch.
Caution:
b. Procedure
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(1) Remove the left side cover. (See "EXTERNAL

SECTION.") Relay connector Write unit
(2) Remove the relay connector (CN338). (CN187) Screws 7272ma3007
(3) Remove eleven screws to detach the fan holder
assembly. (6) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Screws Fan folder assembly
Relay connector
(CN338) Screws 7272ma3006

3-D-2
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-D-1-1 ADDITION
Blank page
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
WRITE SECTION
[2] Cleaning the Dust-Proof Glass

Caution:
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the write unit.
(2) Clean the dust-proof glass at the bottom of the
write unit with cleaning pad and blower brush.
Write unit
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Dust-proof glass

steps in reverse.
3-D-4
3-D-2
DRUM UNIT
DRUM UNIT
[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Drum (5) Loosen the screw of the blade fixing component.
Unit
Caution:
Caution1: Be sure to put a drum cover over the
removed drum unit and store the
drum unit in a dark place.
Caution2: When installing or removing the
drum unit, do not rotate it in the direc-
tion opposite to the specified one.
Rotating the drum unit in the oppo- Blade fixing component
site direction during copy operation

could damage the cleaning blade.
Caution3: When installing or removing the
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Release
drum unit, take care not to touch the
separation claw.
4 Caution4: When installing a new drum, be sure
to enter mode 25 and select "Copy
Count by Parts to be Replaced" to Screw
reset OPC drum counter.
a. Procedure
(1) Open the left and right front doors.
(2) While pressing the solenoid release lever on top (6) Remove the two screws securing the drum unit.
of the ADU rack to the left, flip the ADU rack pull- (7) Release the toner supply pipe in the direction of
out lever to the left. the arrow.
(3) Loosen three screws to remove the drum cover. (8) Remove the screw securing the coupling to
detach the drum shaft coupling and drum cou-
Drum cover Screws pling.
(9) Hold the two sections shown in the figure and pull
out the drum unit.
Screws
Toner supply pipe
Drum unit
ADU rack pullout lever
Solenoid release lever

Hold here
Screw
Drum coupling
Drum shaft coupling

(4) Loosen one screw and slide the blade fixing com- steps in reverse.
ponent in the direction of the arrow until it stops
to release the crimp of the cleaning blade. Caution: To install the coupling, see "[2] Install-
ing the Coupling."
3-E-1
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-E-1 REPLACEMENT
DRUM UNIT
[2] Installing the Coupling (4) Turn the head of the drum coupling clockwise so
that the flange section on the drum shaft coupling
Caution:
is flush.
a. Procedure
(1) Clean the outer surface of the drum coupling and
drum shaft coupling with drum cleaner and
cleaning pad.
(2) Insert the drum coupling aligning the protrusions
on the drum coupling with the notches in the
drum.
Drum coupling
Flange section
Drum notches
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Drum shaft coupling
(5) Tighten with screw.
Drum coupling
Protrusions
(3) Insert the drum shaft coupling so that the D cut

section of the drum shaft coupling matches the
drum shaft.
Drum coupling
Drum shaft
D cut section
Drum shaft coupling
3-E-2
DRUM UNIT
[3] Removing, Cleaning, and a. Procedure

Reinstalling the Drum (1) Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(2) Remove the charging corona unit, developing
Caution:
unit, cleaning blade, and toner guide roller from
the drum unit. (See "CHARGING CORONA
UNIT SECTION," DEVELOPING UNIT," and
Caution1: Be careful not to touch the drum or
"CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE SECTION.")
the cleaning blade with bare hands,
(3) Supporting the drum at both ends with your fin-
or damage them.
gers so that the drum surface is not damaged,
Caution2: When leaving the drum, be sure to
slowly remove it upward (front side first).
put the drum cover over the drum
(4) Clean the toner scattered around the drum
and store it in a dark place.
installation area using a blower brush and clean-
Caution3: When reinstalling the drum, cleaning
ing pad.
blade, and toner guide roller, apply
setting powder to the entire surface Drum
of the drum and also to the cleaning
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
blade regardless of whether the
parts are new or old.
Caution4: After applying setting powder to the
drum, perform the following before
installing the drum unit in the main
body. Hold here
1) With the charging corona unit and
developing unit removed, turn the
drum once (to prevent setting (5) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
powder from scattering onto the steps in reverse.
charging corona unit, and to pre-
vent image defects).
2) When installing a new drum, be
sure to enter mode 25 and select
"Copy Count by Parts to be
Replaced" to reset drum counter.
(See "ADJUSTMENT.")
3-E-3
DRUM UNIT
[4] Removing and Reinstalling the (5) Remove the stop ring, slide the shaft, and
Separation Claws and Separation remove the three separation claws.
Claw Solenoid Caution1: Clean the shaft with drum cleaner
and a cleaning pad when installing.
Caution: The separator claws cannot move
Be sure the power cord has been smoothly if they are installed with
unplugged from the wall outlet. toner remaining on the shaft.
Caution1: Take care not to damage the drum Caution2: When installing, insert the retaining
when removing the separation ring between the ribs.
claws. Caution3: After installing the separation claws,
Caution2: Note the orientation and position of check that they move smoothly.
the separation claws when reinstall-
ing them.
Caution3: Do not touch the cleaning blade and
drum with bare hands.
a. Procedure
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body. Separation claws
(2) Remove the drum.
Stop ring
(3) Remove the connector (CN363) and separation
swing spring.
(4) Remove two screws and detach the separation
guide plate assembly.
Shaft
Screws
Separation claw Rib
Connector (CN363)
(6) Remove two screws and remove the separator

claw solenoid assembly.
Separation claw solenoid assembly
Separation swing spring

Separation guide plate assembly
Screws
3-E-4
DRUM UNIT
(7) Remove two screws and detach the separation [Reference]

claw SD (SD1). When removing the separation claw solenoid
(Normally, it should not be removed except when
Separation claw SD (SD1) replacing the solenoid).
(1) Install the separation claw unit to the drum
unit.
(2) Tighten the solenoid screw when the claw
closest to the drum touches the drum.
(Bottom surface of the drum unit)

Separation
claw SD
(SD1)
Screws
Screws
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Drum unit
steps in reverse.
Caution: When installing the separation claw Separation claw

unit, match the pin and guide hole
shown in the figure. (3) Set the drum unit to the main body and
check that the tips of the separation claws
are off the drum. (Standard clearance: More
Drum unit
than 0 mm up to 1mm.)
Pin
Guide hole
Separation guide plate assembly
3-E-5
DRUM UNIT
[5] Removing and Reinstalling the Toner Caution: When installing the toner control sen-
Control Sensor Board sor board, tighten the screws pulling it
up until stoppers.
Caution:
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(2) Remove the drum.
(3) Remove the separator claw solenoid assembly.
(5) Remove three screws and remove the toner con-
trol sensor board.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws
Connector (CN362)
Toner control sensor board (TCSB)
(6) Clean the sensors of the toner control sensor

board (the Dmax/jam sensor at the front and the
γ sensor at the back) using a blower brush, drum
cleaner, and cleaning pad.
Dmax/jam sensor sensor

steps in reverse.
3-E-6
CORONA UNIT
CORONA UNIT
[1] Screws That Must Not be Removed [2] Removing and Reinstalling the
a. Five screws securing the transfer entrance Charging Corona Unit
guide plate
Caution:
Screws that must not be removed
Caution: When removing the charging corona

unit, do not touch the mesh of the
charging corona unit control plate.
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body. (See
"DRUM UNIT.")
(2) Disconnect the two connectors (CN364, 365).
Remove the charging corona unit by holding it at
the positions shown below with both hands.
Transfer entrance guide plate
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Charging corona unit
Caution: Do not strain the transfer entrance

guide plate and guide rollers, for
example, pressing down on them
strongly.
Caution: Take care not to damage the edge of

the transfer entrance guide plate
since it is deformed easily.
Connector
(CN364)
Connector (CN365)

steps in reverse.
3-F-1
CORONA UNIT
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the (3) Remove the spark arrester plates (front and
Charge Control Plate rear).
Caution: Spark arrester plate (front)

unplugged from the wall outlet. Spark arrester plate (rear)
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the charging corona unit.
(2) Remove the two springs and remove the charge
control plate.
Charge control plate
(4) Remove the charge control plate cleaner.

3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(5) Remove the spring and remove the charging

wire.
Springs
Charge control plate cleaner

Charging wire

steps in reverse.
[4] Replacing the Charging Wires
Caution:
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the charging corona unit.
Spring
(2) Remove the charge control plate.
Charging
wire

steps in reverse.
3-F-2
CORONA UNIT
[5] Removing and Reinstalling the [6] Removing and Reinstalling the PCL
Charging Wire Cleaning Unit Caution:
unplugged from the wall outlet. a. Procedure
a. Procedure (1) Remove the charging corona unit.
(1) Remove the charging wire. (2) Disconnect the wire binding band at two loca-
(2) Remove the stop ring and remove the charging tions.
wire cleaning pad. (3) Release the lock and remove the PCL.
Caution1: When removing the charging wire
cleaning pad, be careful not to drop PCL
the two collars.
Stop ring 2
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
1
Lock
Collar PCL
Collar
Charging wire cleaning pad
Caution2: When installing the charging wire

cleaning pad, install the pad in the
orientation shown below. Also, do
not forget to attach the two collars. PCL
Charging wire cleaning pad

Wire binding band

steps in reverse.
3-F-3
CORONA UNIT

steps in reverse.
4 Caution: When the urethane sheet is peeled off

from PCL, be sure to paste it again.
(7272/7255)
PCL Charging corona unit

3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Urethane sheet
7272ma3008

3-F-4
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-F-3-1 ADDITION
Blank page
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
CORONA UNIT
[7] Cleaning the Charging Corona Unit/ [8] Removing and Reinstalling the
PCL Transfer/Separation Corona Unit
Caution: Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been Be sure the power cord has been
unplugged from the wall outlet. unplugged from the wall outlet.
a. Procedure a. Procedure
(1) Remove the charging corona unit. (1) Draw the ADU frame from the main body. (See
(2) Remove the charge control plate and PCL. "ADU UNIT.")
(3) Place the charge control plate on a flat surface (2) Loosen two screws to remove the transfer/sep-
and clean by gently tapping with a cleaning pad aration corona unit.
moistened with drum cleaner. Next, remove any
remaining dirt with a blower brush.
Caution: Take care not to damage the mesh of

the charge control plate during clean-
ing.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(4) Clean the PCL with a cleaning pad moistened

with drum cleaner.
Screw
Charging corona unit control plate
PCL
Transfer/separation
corona unit
Screw

steps in reverse.
Caution: When installing the transfer/separa-

tion corona unit, make sure the clean-
ing gear coupling is engaged properly.
3-F-6
3-F-4
CORONA UNIT
[9] Removing and Reinstalling the [10] Replacing the Transfer/Separation

Plunger Prevention Plate Wires and Transfer/Separation Wire
Caution: Cleaning Block
Be sure the power cord has been Caution:
unplugged from the wall outlet. Be sure the power cord has been
a. Procedure unplugged from the wall outlet.
(1) Draw the ADU frame from the main body. (See a. Procedure
"ADU UNIT.") (1) Draw the ADU frame from the main body. (See
(2) Remove the transfer/separation corona unit. "ADU UNIT.")
(3) Release the six locks and remove the plunger (2) Remove the transfer/separation corona unit.
prevention plate (front). (3) Remove the plunger prevention plate.
(4) Release the six locks and remove the plunger (4) Remove the spark arrester plates (front and
prevention plate (rear). rear).
plunger prevention plate (front)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Spark arrester plate (rear)
plunger prevention
Spark arrester plate (front)
plate (rear)
Lock
Lock
Lock
(Same as on the opposite side)
(5) Remove the springs of wires (one each).
steps in reverse. Caution: When installing the springs, bend the
edge of each spring inside.
3-F-7
3-F-5
CORONA UNIT
(6) Release and remove three wires from each (7) Turn the transfer/separation corona unit upside
cleaning block. down, remove the stop rings, and remove the
transfer wire cleaning block and separation wire
Caution: Be careful not to drop and lose the
cleaning block from the front side.
support rubber when removing the
wire. Stop rings
Coupling
Transfer wire
Spring
Transfer wire
Separation wire cleaning block
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Separation wire
cleaning block
Transfer wire
Support rubber
steps in reverse.
Caution: When installing the transfer/separa-

tion wires, check that the coupling of
Separation wire the cleaning pad drive gear is
engaged correctly.
3-F-8
3-F-6
CORONA UNIT
[11] Removing and Reinstalling the TSL

Unit
Caution:
a. Procedure
(1) Draw the ADU frame from the main body. (See
"ADU UNIT.")
(2) Remove the transfer/separation corona unit.
Caution: A relay connector consists of two male

sides and one female side. Be sure to
remove only the male side (shown
below) of the CN463 connector.
(4) Remove the three screws and remove the TSL
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
unit.
4 TSL unit Relay connector
(CN463)
Screws 7272ma3034

steps in reverse.

3-F-9
3-F-7
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-F-7 REPLACEMENT
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
DEVELOPING UNIT
DEVELOPING UNIT
[1] Screws That Must Not be Removed [2] Removing and Reinstalling the
a. Procedure Developing Unit
(1) Two screws securing the toner transfer regula-
Caution:
tion plate.
(2) One screw securing the magnet angle adjusting
knob.
a. Procedure
(1) Draw out the drum unit from the main body. (See
Screws that must not be removed "DRUM UNIT.")
(2) Release the toner supply pipe.
(3) Release the developing unit push pressure lever.
(4) Supporting the developing unit at the positions
shown below with both hands, remove it from the
drum unit.
Toner supply pipe
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Developing unit
Screw that must not be removed
Developing unit push

pressure lever

steps in reverse.
3-G-1
DEVELOPING UNIT
[3] Replacing the Developer (4) Tilt the developing unit about 45° and rotate the
Caution1: When replacing the developer in the developing gear counterclockwise to discharge
developing unit, take care not to all of the developer adhering to the inside of the
allow dirt to get into it. developing unit and magnet roller.
Caution2: To rotate the developing sleeve,
rotate the developing gear counter-
clockwise.
Caution3: Never rotate the developing gear
clockwise.
4 Caution4: When installing a new developer, be
sure to enter mode 25 and select
"Copy Count by Parts to be 45˚
Replaced" to reset developer
counter.
Developing gear
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Developing gear
(5) Supply fresh developer evenly from the top of the

agitator screws.
(6) Rotate the developing gear until the developer
enters the developing unit.
(7) Repeat steps (5) and (6) to supply all of the
developer.
Developer
a. Procedure
"DRUM UNIT.")
(2) Remove the developing unit from the drum unit.
(3) Release the hook of the developing unit cover
and remove it upward.
Developing unit cover Developing unit stopper roller
Hooks
(Same as
on the
opposite
side)
Hooks

3-G-2
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-G-2 REPLACEMENT
DEVELOPING UNIT
(8) Rotate the developing gear counterclockwise to [4] Cleaning the Developing Unit Bias
check that the developer bristles along the entire Shaft
length of the developing sleeve.
Caution:
Developing sleeve
a. Procedure
Developing unit
stopper roller
"DRUM UNIT.")
(2) Remove the developing unit from the drum unit.
(3) Wipe the dirt on the developing unit bias shaft
with cleaning pad.
Developing gear
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Developing gear
(9) Install the developing unit cover, then install the

developing unit in the drum unit.
Caution: After installing the developing unit in

the drum unit, make sure the develop-
ing unit stopper roller is in contact with
the developing unit stopper plate (allo- Developing sleeve
cation of DSD). Developing unit bias shaft

steps in reverse.
3-G-3
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
TONER SUPPLY UNIT

[1] Replacing and Cleaning the Toner
Cartridge
a. Procedure
(1) Open the toner supply door and pull the toner
supply unit forward.
Toner supply door
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Toner supply unit
(2) Remove the toner cartridge.

(3) After removing the toner cartridge, clean the
area around the toner cartridge insertion hole
with a cleaning pad.
Toner cartridge
Cartridge
insertion hole

steps in reverse.
3-H-1
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page

[1] Removing and Reinstalling the (5) Check that the blade fixing component is
Cleaning Blade released. If it is not, release it referring to"DRUM
UNIT."
Caution:
Caution1: Be sure to replace the following parts
at the same time: Released
Screw
• Cleaning blade position
• Toner guide roller (TGR)
Caution2: Do not touch the edges of the clean-
ing blade with bare hands.
Caution3: When reinstalling the cleaning blade,
apply setting powder to the entire Blade fixing component
surface of the drum and cleaning
blade regardless of whether the (6) Remove the blade support bearing to remove the
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
drum and cleaning blade are new or cleaning blade.
old.
Caution4: When you have applied setting pow- Cleaning blade
der to the drum, perform the follow-
ing before installing the drum unit on
the main body:
1) To ensure accurate toner concentration, wipe
scattered setting powder off the γ sensor and
Dmax/JAM sensor on the toner control sen-
sor board with a rag moistened with alcohol.
2) With the charging corona unit and developing
unit removed, turn the drum once (to prevent
setting powder from scattering onto the
charging corona unit, and to prevent image
defects).
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit. (See "DRUM UNIT.")
(2) Remove the charging corona unit. (See
"CHARGING CORONA UNIT.")
Blade support bearing
(3) Remove the developing unit. (See "DEVELOP-
ING UNIT.")
(4) Remove two screws to remove the cleaner cover. (7) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Screws
Caution: After replacing the cleaning blade, be
sure to perform Blade Setting Mode
Adjustment in the 36 mode. (To pre-
vent the blade from peeling.)
Cleaner cover

7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK May 2002 3-I-1 REPLACEMENT
[2] Removing and Reinstalling the Toner 4 a. Procedure

Guide Roller (TGR) (1) Remove the drum unit. (See "DRUM UNIT.")
(2) Remove the charging corona unit. (See
Caution:
"CHARGING CORONA UNIT.")
(3) Remove the cleaning blade.
(4) Release the power supply pin in contact with the
Caution1: Be sure to replace the following parts
toner guide roller shaft.
at the same time:
(5) Remove the stop ring.
• Cleaning blade
(6) Remove the cleaner idle gear.
• Toner guide roller
(7) Remove the screws securing the front and rear
Caution2: Do not touch the edges of the clean-
positioning parts.
ing blade with bare hands.
Caution3: When reinstalling the cleaning blade,
apply setting powder to the entire
surface of the drum and cleaning
blade regardless of whether the
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
parts are new or old.

Caution4: When reinstalling the toner guide
roller, apply setting powder to the
toner guide roller evenly. Apply with
the toner guide roller removed from
the drum unit.
Caution5: Do not touch the toner guide roller
brush with bare hands. Also, do not
directly contact the rollers to any
object.
Caution6: After replacing the toner guide roller,
be sure to apply electricity lubricant
on the edge of the guide roller shaft
(on power supply pin side).
4 Caution7: When installing a toner guide roller,
be sure to enter mode 25 and select
"Copy Count by Parts to be
Replaced" to reset toner collection
roller assembly counter.

3-I-2
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-I-2 REPLACEMENT
(8) Remove the toner guide roller.
Screw Positioning part
Toner guide roller
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Positioning part
Screw
Power supply pin Cleaner idle gear

Cleaner idle gear Positioning part
Power supply pin Stop ring Screw

7272ma3009

steps in reverse.
3-I-3
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-I-3 ADDITION
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAYS 1 AND 2 (7155/7165)

[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper [2] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
Feed Unit Feed Trays 1 and 2
Caution: Warning:
Be sure the power cord has been When removing the tray, stand in a proper
unplugged from the wall outlet. position so that you do not hurt your back
a. Procedure and waist. If the tray contains paper,
(1) Draw out paper feed tray 1 or 2. remove all paper before removing the tray.
(2) Loosen the securing shaft screw, and remove
Caution:
one screw.
(3) Disconnect the relay connector (CN814, 834)
and remove the paper feed unit by lifting.
a. Procedure
(1) Draw out paper feed tray 1 or 2.
Relay connector (CN814, 834) (2) Remove the paper feed unit.
Securing shaft screw (3) Remove four screws and remove tray 1 or 2 by
lifting.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Paper feed unit
Screw Screws
(4) Reinstall the above parts following the removal Tray 1,2
steps in reverse.

steps in reverse.
3-J-1
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper [4] Removing and Reinstalling the DF
Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber Prevention Roller Rubber
(1) Remove the paper feed unit. (1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the two stop rings and slide the two (2) Remove the paper feed roller unit.
bearings outward. (3) Remove the stop ring to detach the double feed
(3) Release the feed roller axis from the holder slit to prevention roller.
detach the paper feed roller unit. (4) Remove the double feed prevention roller rubber
from the roller.
Slit
Paint mark
Stop ring
Double feed
prevention roller
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Double feed
Bearing prevention roller
rubber
Paper feed roller unit
Bearing
Stop ring
(4) Remove the two stop rings from the paper feed
roller unit to detach the paper feed roller and feed Stop ring
roller.
(5) Remove the rubber from each roller.
Paint mark
steps in reverse.
Caution1: When reinstalling the double feed
Paper feed roller prevention roller, pay attention to
their orientation.
Paper feed roller Caution2: Check that no grease or the like
rubber remains on the double feed preven-
tion roller.
Feed roller
Feed roller rubber Stop rings

steps in reverse.
Caution1: When reinstalling the rollers, pay
attention to their orientation.
Caution2: Check that no grease or the like
remains on each roller.
3-J-2
[5] Replacing the Pre-Registration and

Feed Clutches (MCs)
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the four connectors (CN810, 811, 830,
831).
(3) Remove the stop ring to detach the pre-registra-
tion MC/1/2 (MC4/6) and feed MC/1/2 (MC3/5).
Detent Connector
(CN810, 830)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Stop ring
Feed MC/1/2
(MC3/5)
Stop ring
Pre-registration MC/1/2
(MC4/6)
Connector
(CN811, 831)

steps in reverse.
Caution: When reinstalling each MC, fit the

detent in the slit in the MC.
3-J-3
[6] Replacing the Wires

Caution1: After replacing or reinstalling the wires, manually rotate the up/down drive shaft to check that the
tray moves up and down smoothly.
Caution2: Be sure to install the wires so that they do not cross or ride over each other.
Removing Wires
(2) Remove three screws to remove the wire cover(front) and wire cover (rear).
Wire cover (rear)

Wire cover (front)
Screws (6)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
3-J-4
(3) Remove the front and rear wires according to steps 1 to 7 below.
2, 4 Remove the E-ring to detach 1 Remove the E-ring to slide out

the wire restraining cover the drive pulley.
and pulley.
Wire D Wire C
Wire restraining cover (white) (black)
Drive pulley Wire D Wire C
(white) (black)
Pulley E-ring
E-ring
3. Remove wire C.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Wire C (black) 6. Remove drive pulley holder
and E-ring and pull out the
drive pulley.
Wire D (White) Wire B Wire A
(white) (black)
5. Remove wire D. Drive pulley holder
Wire A (black)
Up/down plate
Wire B (white)
7. Repeat steps 2 to 5 Drive pulley

to remove wire A and wire B. E-ring
3-J-5
Wire Lengths
182.8±1 mm (Tray 1, 2)
Wire A, C
473.1±1 mm (Tray 1, 2)
Wire B, D
Installing Wires
2. Install the pulley, pass 4. Install the pulley, pass 5. Install the wires C and D from
wire D through the pulley, wires C and D, and install inside the drive shaft hole, push in
and install the wire the wire restraining cover the drive pulley, and secure with
restraining cover and and retaining ring. Wire D E-ring.
E-ring. must be inside. Wires must
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
not cross.
Wire restraining cover Wire D
(white) Wire C
(black)
Wire C
Wire D (black)
(white)
Pulley
E-ring
E-ring
3. Pass wire C
through the up/down
plate.
7. Install the wires A and B from

inside the drive shaft hole, push
in the drive pulley, and secure
with E-ring. Next, install the drive
pulley holder.
Wire C (black)
Wire A
Wire B (black)
Wire D (white)
(white)
1. Pass wire D Drive pulley holder
through the
up/down plate. Wire A
(black)
Up/down plate
Wire B (white)
6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 to install Drive pulley

wire A and wire B. E-ring
3-J-6
4 PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAYS 1 AND 2 (7255/7272)

Caution: 4 [2] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
Trays 1 and 2 have the same shape and Feed Tray 1
mechanism.
Warning:
4 [1] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper When removing the tray, stand in a proper
Feed Unit position so that you do not hurt your back
The contents here shall be in accordance with and waist. If the tray contains paper,
the "[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper remove all paper before removing the tray.
Feed Unit" of PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAY 1
Caution:
and 2 (7155/7165).
a. Procedure
(1) Draw out paper feed tray 1.
(3) Remove four screws and remove the LCT cover
/L.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws
LCT cover /L
Screws
7272ma3010

3-J-7
(4) Remove five screws to detach the tray 1 by lifting. 4 [3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
Feed Tray 2
Screws
Warning:
When removing the tray, stand in a proper
position so that you do not hurt your back
and waist. If the tray contains paper,
remove all paper before removing the tray.
Caution:
a. Procedure
Screws Tray 1 (3) Remove five screws and remove the LCT cover
7272ma3011 /R.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(5) Reinstall the above parts following the removal Screws

steps in reverse.
LCT cover /R
Screws
7272ma3012

3-J-8
(4) Remove five screws to detach the tray 2 by lifting. 4 [4] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber
Screws a. Procedure
(2) Remove the two stop rings and slide the two
bearings outward.
(3) Release the feed roller axis from the holder slit to
detach the paper feed roller unit.
Slit
Stop ring
Screws Tray 2
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
7272ma3013
(5) Reinstall the above parts following the removal Bearing

steps in reverse.
Bearing
Stop ring
(4) Remove the two stop rings from the paper feed
roller unit to detach the paper feed roller and feed
roller.

3-J-9
(5) Remove the rubber from each roller. 4 [5] Removing and Reinstalling the DF
Prevention Roller Rubber
The contents here shall be in accordance with
Paper feed roller rubber Paint mark
the "[4] Removing and Reinstalling the Double
Feed Prevention Roller Rubber" of PAPER FEED
UNITS OF TRAY 1 AND 2 (7155/7165).
Paint mark Paper feed roller
Feed roller rubber

Feed roller Stop ring
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Arrow mark
7272ma3014

steps in reverse.

3-J-10
4 [6] Replacing the Pre-Registration and 4 [7] Replacing the Horizontal Conveyance
Feed Clutches (MCs) MC/L and /R
The contents here shall be in accordance with a. Procedure
the "[5] Replacing the Pre-registration and Feed (1) Remove the vertical conveyance section. (See
Clutches (MCs)" of PAPER FEED UNITS OF "VERTICAL CONVEYNACE SECTION")
TRAY 1 and 2 (7155/7165). (2) Draw out the horizontal conveyance section and
tray 2.
(3) Remove two relay connectors (CN902, 903).
(4) Remove a screw to detach the sensor mounting
plate.
(5) Remove a stop ring for each, detach the horizon-
tal conveyance MC/L (MC15) and horizontal con-
veyance MC/R (MC16).
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Horizontal
conveyance
Horizontal conveyance MC/R (MC16)
Sensor
MC/L (MC15)
mounting
Detent plate
Stop ring Relay connector

Screw
(CN902)
Relay connector
(CN903) 7272ma3015

steps in reverse.
Caution: When installing, align the projections

with the detent guides.

3-J-11
4 [8] Replacing the Wires

Removing Wires
(2) Remove two screws for each to remove the wire cover (front) and wire cover (rear).
Screws
Wire cover (rear)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Wire cover (front)

Screws 7272ma3016

3-J-12
(3) Remove the wires A and B according to steps 1 to 10 of the figure below.
E-ring Wire restraining cover Wire restraining cover

Wire B (White) Pulley Wire B (White) Pulley
Wire A (Black) E-ring
6. Remove the E-ring.

7. Remove the pulley and wire restraining cover 4. Remove the E-ring.
to release the wire B (white). 5. Remove the pulley and wire restraining cover
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
to release the wire A (black) and B(white).
Wire B (White)
Wire A (Black) E-ring
Drive pulley Drive shaft
8. Pull out and remove the wire B (white) toward

the bottom side of the up/down plate.
10. Pull out and remove the wire B (white) toward
the bottom side of the up/down plate. 3. Remove the E-ring, slide the drive pulley in
ward, and remove the wire B (white) from the
Drive pulley E-ring drive shaft.
Wire A (Black) Drive shaft Bearing
Gear assembly Bearing E-ring
2. Remove the bearing.

9. Remove the E-ring, slide the drive pulley outward, 1. Remove the E-ring and bearing to detach the
and remove the wire A (black) from the drive shaft.
gear assembly.
7272ma3017

3-J-13
(4) Remove the wires C and D according to steps 1

to 8 of the figure below.
Wire restraining cover

Wire C (Black)
Wire D (White) Pulley E-ring
4. Pull out and remove the wire C (black) toward

8. Pull out and remove the wire D (white) toward

3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. Remove the pulley and wire restraining cover to

release the wire C (black) and Dire restraining
cover to release the wire C (black) and D (white).
Wire D (White) Pulley

Wire restraining cover E-ring

7. Remove the pulley and wire restraining cover to
release the wire D (white).
Wire C (Black) Wire D (White)

Drive pulley Wire D (White) E-ring
Wire C (Black)
E-ring Drive shaft Drive pulley Drive shaft
1. Remove the E-ring, slide the drive pulley inward, 5. Remove the E-ring, slide the drive pulley outward,
and remove the wire C (black) from the drive shaft. and remove the wire D (white) from the drive shaft.
7272ma3018

3-J-14
Wire Lengths
294.8 1mm(Tray 1)
232.4 1mm(Tray 2)
Wire A, C
391.7 1mm(Tray 1)
329.2 1mm(Tray 2)
Wire B, D 7272ma3019
<Installing Wires>
Reinstall the wires following the removal steps in
reverse.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY

3-J-15
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
PAPER FEED UNIT OF TRAY 3 (7155/7165)

[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper [2] Removing and Reinstalling Paper
Feed Unit Feed Tray 3
Caution: Warning:
Be sure the power cord has been When removing the tray, stand in a proper
unplugged from the wall outlet. position so that you do not hurt your back
a. Procedure and waist. If the tray contains paper,
(1) Draw out paper feed tray 3. remove all paper before removing the tray.
(2) Loosen the securing shaft screw, and remove
Caution:
one screw.
(3) Disconnect the relay connector (CN854) and
remove the paper feed unit by lifting.
a. Procedure
Relay connector (CN814, 834) (2) Remove the paper feed unit.
Securing shaft screw (3) Remove four screws and remove tray 3 by lifting.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Paper feed unit
Screws
Screw
(4) Reinstall the above parts following the removal Tray 3

steps in reverse.

steps in reverse.
3-K-1
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper [4] Removing and Reinstalling the DF
(1) Remove the paper feed unit. (1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Remove two stop rings and slide the two bear- (2) Remove the paper feed roller unit.
ings outward. (3) Remove the stop ring to detach the double feed
(3) Release the feed roller axis from the holder slit to prevention roller.
detach the paper feed roller unit. (4) Remove the double feed prevention roller rubber
from the roller.
Slit
Paint mark
Stop ring
Double feed
prevention roller
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Double feed
Bearing prevention roller
rubber
Bearing
Stop ring
(4) Remove two stop rings from the paper feed roller
unit to detach the paper feed roller and feed Stop ring
roller.
(5) Remove the rubber from each roller.
Paint mark
steps in reverse.
Caution1: When reinstalling the double feed
Paper feed roller prevention roller, pay attention to
their orientation.
Paper feed roller Caution2: Check that no grease or the like
rubber remains on the double feed preven-
tion roller.
Feed roller
Feed roller rubber Stop rings

steps in reverse.
3-K-2
[5] Replacing the Pre-Registration and

Feed Clutches (MCs)
a. Procedure
(2) Remove two connectors (CN850, 851).
(3) Remove two stop rings to detach the pre-regis-
tration MC/3 (MC8) and feed MC/3 (MC7).
Detent Connector
(CN810, 830)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Stop ring
Feed MC/1/2
(MC3/5)
Stop ring
Pre-registration MC/1/2
(MC4/6)
Connector
(CN811, 831)

steps in reverse.
Caution: When reinstalling each MC, fit the

detent in the slit in the MC.
3-K-3
[6] Replacing the Wires

Removing Wires
(2) Remove two claws to remove the tray front cover.
(3) Remove two screws to remover shaft supporting plate.
(4) Remove three screws to remove the wire cover(front) and wire cover (rear).
Screws
Wire cover (rear)
Screws
Wire cover (front)
Shaft supporting plate
Screws
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Tray cover (front)
3-K-4
(5) Remove the front and rear wires according to steps 1 to 7 below.
2, 4 Remove the E-ring to detach 1 Remove two E-rings to slide out the
the wire restraining cover drive pulley.
and pulley. Wire D Wire C
(white) (black)
Wire restraining cover E-ring
E-ring
Wire D Wire C
(white) (black)
Pulley
E-ring Drive pulley
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. Remove wire C.
Wire C (black) 6. Remove drive pulley holder

and three E-rings and pull out
the drive pulley.
Wire B (white)
Wire A (black)
5. Remove wire D. E-ring
Wire A (black) E-ring
Up/down plate
E-ring
Wire B (white)
Drive pulley
7. Repeat steps 2 to 5
to remove wire A and wire B.
3-K-5
Wire Lengths
298.9±1 mm (Tray 3)
Wire A, C
589.2±1 mm (Tray 3)
Wire B, D
Installing Wires
2. Install the pulley, pass 4. Install the pulley, pass 5. Install the wires C and D from
wire D through the pulley, wires C and D, and install inside the drive shaft hole, push in
and install the wire the wire restraining cover the drive pulley, and secure with
restraining cover and and retaining ring. Wire D E-rings.
must be inside. Wires must
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
E-ring.
not cross. Wire D (white)
Wire C (black)
Wire restraining cover
E-ring
E-ring
Wire D Wire C
(white) (black)
Pulley
E-ring Drive pulley
3. Pass wire C through

the up/down plate.
7. Install the wires A and B from

inside the drive shaft hole, push
in the drive pulley, and secure
with E-rings. Next, install the drive
pulley holder.
Wire C (black)
Wire B
Wire A
(white)
(black)
Wire D (white)
1. Pass wire D E-ring
through the E-ring
Wire A
up/down plate.
(black)
E-ring
Up/down plate
Wire B (white)
Drive pulley
6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 to install
wire A and wire B.
3-K-6
4 PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAYS 3 AND 4 (7255/7272)

Caution: 4 [2] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
Trays 3 and 4 have the same shape and Feed Tray 3 and 4
mechanism.
Warning:
4 [1] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper When removing the tray, stand in a proper
Feed Unit position so that you do not hurt your back
The contents here shall be in accordance with and waist. If the tray contains paper,
the "[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper remove all paper before removing the tray.
Feed Unit" of PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAY 1
Caution:
AND 2 (7155/7165).
a. Procedure
(3) Remove eight screws and detach the tray 3 by
lifting.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws
Screws
Tray 3
Screws
7272ma3020

steps in reverse.

3-K-7
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-K-7 ADDITION
4 [3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper 4 [4] Removing and Reinstalling the DF
The contents here shall be in accordance with The contents here shall be in accordance with
the "[4] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper the "[4] Removing and Reinstalling the Double
Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber" of PAPER Feed Prevention Roller Rubber" of PAPER FEED
FEED UNITS OF TRAY 1 AND 2 (7255/7272). UNITS OF TRAY 1 AND 2 (7155/7165).
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY

3-K-8
4 [5] Replacing the Pre-registration and 4 [6] Replacing the Wires

Feed Clutches (MCs) The contents here shall be in accordance with
The contents here shall be in accordance with the "[6] Replacing the Wires" of PAPER FEED
the "[5] Replacing the Pre-registration and Feed UNITS OF TRAY 1 and 2 (7155/7165).
Clutches (MCs)" of PAPER FEED UNITS OF
TRAY 1 and 2 (7155/7165).
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY

3-K-9
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
BYPASS FEED TRAY
BYPASS FEED TRAY

4 [1] Removing and Reinstalling the [2] Replacing the Paper Feed Roller/
Bypass Feed Tray Paper Feed Roller Rubber
a. Procedure
Caution:
(1) Remove the bypass feed tray.
(2) Remove the stop ring and bearing and pull out
the shaft from the paper feed roller.
a. Procedure
(3) Remove the two bearings and one gear and
(1) Remove the developing suction filter cover and
remove the paper feed roller rubber from the
right side cover (upper). (See "EXTERNAL SEC-
paper feed roller.
TION.")
(3) Remove five screws to remove the bypass feed
Paint mark
tray.
Shaft
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws (2) Paper feed roller rubber
Paper feed roller
Gear
Screw
Bearing
Paper feed roller

assembly
Screws (2)
Stop ring Bearing
By-pass feed tray
Connector (CN214)
(4) Remove the stop ring from the paper feed roller
7272ma3021
assembly to pull out the shaft and remove the
paper feed roller rubber from the paper feed
roller.
steps in reverse.
Shaft
Stop ring Paper feed roller
Paper feed roller rubber

steps in reverse.
Caution1: Check that the orientation of the
roller is correct when installing.
remains on the roller.
3-L-1
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-L-1 REPLACEMENT
BYPASS FEED TRAY
[3] Replacing the DF Prevention Roller (6) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
Rubber steps in reverse.
a. Procedure Caution1: Check that the orientation of the dou-
(1) Remove the bypass feed tray and place the tray ble feed prevention roller is correct
upside down. when installing.
(2) Remove two screws to remove the bottom plate Caution2: Check that no grease or the like
assembly. remains on the double feed preven-
(3) Remove the spring. tion roller.
Caution3: There are three spring holes. Insert
Screws (2) the spring in the middle hole.
Bottom plate
assembly
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Spring
Spring hole
(4) Remove the double feed prevention roller

assembly from the bypass feed tray unit.
(5) Remove the stop ring to pull out the shaft and
remove the double feed prevention roller rubber
from the double feed prevention roller.
Paint mark
Double feed prevention
roller rubber
Double feed
prevention roller
Shaft
Double feed prevention

roller assembly
Stop ring
3-L-2

[1] Removing/Reinstalling the Vertical [2] Removing/Reinstalling the Vertical
Conveyance Section Conveyance MC (MC11, MC12)
Caution: Caution:
(1) Remove all right side covers. (See "EXTERNAL (1) Remove the vertical conveyance section.
SECTION.") (2) Remove the gear lock to remove the two gears
(2) Disconnect the connector (CN880). and two spacer axes.
(3) Remove eleven screws to remove the vertical (3) Disconnect the two connectors (CN881, CN882)
conveyance section. to remove the wiring harness from the harness
guide.
(4) Remove each MC.
Vertical
conveyance door Connector
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(CN881)
Spacer axis
Vertical
Vertical conveyance
conveyance MC/1(MC11)
section
Gear
Connector (CN882)
Vertical
Screws (11) Spacer axis conveyance
Connector (CN880)
MC/2(MC12)

steps in reverse. Vertical conveyance MC
Caution: When installing the vertical convey-

ance section, be sure to secure the
screws with the vertical conveyance
door closed.
Detent

steps in reverse.
Caution: When installing, be sure the detent of

the clutch is at the position shown
above.
3-M-1
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
ADU UNIT
ADU UNIT
[1] Drawing Out and Reinstalling the 4 [2] Cleaning the Paper Dust Removing
ADU Stand Brush
Warning:
The interlock which is turned OFF when Caution:
the front right or left door opens or closes Be sure the power cord has been
should never be turned ON forcibly with unplugged from the wall outlet.
the ADU stand drawn out. a. Procedure
(1) Draw out the ADU stand from the main body.
Caution:
(2) Release the left and right lock levers, lift the
brush handles by the handles to remove the
paper dust removing brush.
a. Procedure
(1) Open the front right and left doors.
(2) With the solenoid release lever on the ADU stand Brush handles
Lock lever
pushed to the left, turn down the ADU drawing
lever to the left.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(3) Grip the ADU stand drawing lever and draw out
the ADU stand.
ADU stand
Projections
Lock lever
Second paper feed unit

Paper dust
removing
brush
Left door Right door
Solenoid release lever

Positioning holes
(3) Using a blower brush, clean the paper dust

removing brush.
Paper dust removing brush
ADU stand drawing lever
(4) To reinstall the ADU stand, push in the ADU

stand and then turn the ADU stand drawing lever
upright.
Cleaning area

steps in reverse.
Caution: When installing, align the projection

on the paper dust removing brush with
the positioning hole on the second
paper feed unit.

3-N-1
ADU UNIT
4 In the case of the 7255/7272 (3) Using a blower brush, clean the paper dust
removing brush.
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been Paper dust removing brush
b. Procedure
(2) Push two projections for each to release the lock
and remove the paper dust removing brush.
Paper dust removing brush
Cleaning area
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
7272ma3023

steps in reverse.
Caution: When installing, align the projections

on the paper dust removing brush with
Second paper feed unit Projections the positioning holes on the second
paper feed unit.
7272ma3022

3-N-2
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-N-1-1 ADDITION
Blank page
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
ADU UNIT
[3] Cleaning the Paper Mis-Centering PS [4] Removing and Reinstalling the
(PS70)/Leading Edge PS (PS43) Registration MC (MC1)
Warning: Warning:
The interlock which is turned OFF when The interlock which is turned OFF when
the front right or left door opens or closes the front right or left door opens or closes
should never be turned ON forcibly with should never be turned ON forcibly with
the ADU stand drawn out. the ADU stand drawn out.
Caution: Caution:
(1) Draw out the ADU stand from the main body. (1) Draw out the ADU stand from the main body.
(2) Open the pre-transfer jam handler. Clean the (2) Remove one screw to remove the ADU stand
sensor of the paper mis-centering PS (PS70) drawing lever.
and leading edge PS (PS43) at the rear of the
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
pre-transfer jam handler using a drum cleaner or

cleaning pad.
Leading edge
PS (PS43) ADU stand drawing lever
Paper mis-centering PS (PS70) Screw
Pre-transfer jam
handler
(3) Remove three screws to remove the ADU cover.
(3) Reinstall the above parts following the removal ADU cover
steps in reverse.
Screws
3-N-4
3-N-2
ADU UNIT
(4) Remove one screw and remove the registration 4 (8) Detach the registration MC (MC1).
roller rotation knob.
Caution: When reinstalling, be sure the detent
4 of the clutch is in the clutch cover
groove.
Registration MC (MC1) Screw
Screw
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Clutch fixing member
Hexagon socket head screws 7272ma3027
Registration roller rotation knob (9) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
7272ma3026
(5) Disconnect the relay connector (CN422).
Caution: A relay connector consists of two male

sides and one female side. Be sure to
remove only the male side (shown
below) of the CN422 connector.
4 (6) Loosen two hexagon socket head screws.
4 (7) Remove the screw to detach the clutch fixing
member.

3-N-5
ADU UNIT

Second Paper Feed Unit
Warning:
The interlock which is turned OFF when
the front right or left door opens or closes
should never be turned ON forcibly with
the ADU stand drawn out.
Caution:
a. Procedure
(2) Detach the ADU cover.
(3) Disconnect the two relay connectors (CN420,
422), and disconnect the relay connector from
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
the wiring harness.
Caution: Each relay connector consists of two

(shown below) of the connector.
Registration MC (MC1)
Relay connector (CN420)
Relay connector (CN422)

3-N-6
Blank page
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
ADU UNIT
(4) Remove five screws to remove the second paper [6] Cleaning the Registration PS (PS44)
feed unit.
Warning:
Screws The interlock which is turned OFF when
Screws
Caution:
a. Procedure
(3) Remove the second paper feed unit
(4) Turn the second paper feed unit upside down and
clean the registration PS (PS44) with a blower
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Second paper feed unit

brush.
(5) Reinstall the above parts following the removal Registration PS (PS44)
steps in reverse.

steps in reverse.
3-N-8
3-N-4
ADU UNIT
4 [7] Removing and Reinstalling the (6) Remove the two E-rings (one at the left and the
Registration Roller other at the right) and one bearing from the reg-
In the case of the 7155/7165 istration roller.
Warning:
The interlock which is turned OFF when Bearing
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been E-ring
a. Procedure
(3) Remove the second paper feed unit
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(4) Remove the registration MC (MC1).
Registration roller
Front side
remove the E-ring on the front of the registration
roller.
E-ring
Bearing
E-ring
(7) Slide the registration roller to the front, then

remove it by lifting the rear end.
2
Registration roller

steps in reverse.

3-N-9
ADU UNIT
4 In the case of the 7255/7272 (8) Slide the registration roller to the front, then
remove it by lifting the rear end.
Warning:
(9) Remove the bearing from the registration roller.
Caution:
b. Procedure
(3) Remove the second paper feed unit.
(4) Remove the registration MC (MC1).
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
remove the two E-rings on the front of the regis- Registration roller Bearing
tration roller. 7272ma3029
(6) Remove the two E-rings at the rear of the regis-
tration roller. (10) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
(7) Remove the two bearings (one at the left and the steps in reverse.
other at the right) from the registration roller.
Bearing
Registration E-ring
roller
E-ring Bearing Bearing E-ring

7272ma3028

3-N-10
Blank page
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
ADU UNIT
[8] Removing and Reinstalling the (4) Remove the E-ring to remove the pre-transfer
Pre-Transfer Roller roller from the shaft.
Warning: Caution: When reinstalling, pay attention to the

The interlock which is turned OFF when position of the E-ring.
Pre-transfer roller
Caution:
unplugged from the wall outlet. Shaft
a. Procedure
(2) Remove the two springs.
(3) Open the pre-transfer jam handler to remove the
pre-transfer roller assembly.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
E-ring

steps in reverse.
Pre-transfer jam handler
Pre-transfer roller assembly
Springs
3-N-12
3-N-6
ADU UNIT
[9] Cleaning the ADU Paper Reverse PS (7) Remove two screws to remove the ADU reverse
(PS45)/Reverse/Exit PS (PS46) guide assembly.
Warning: Caution: When reinstalling, align the projection

The interlock which is turned OFF when on the rear of the ADU reverse guide
the front right or left door opens or closes assembly with the hole on the ADU
should never be turned ON forcibly with bottom plate assembly.
Open/close wire Screws
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been ADU bottom plate
assembly
a. Procedure
(2) Remove the fixing unit. (See "FIXING UNIT.")
(3) Remove the ADU cover.
(4) Remove one screw to remove the ground plate.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(5) Remove the open/close spring from the paper
exit side open/close wire.
Open/close
Screws wire assembly
ADU reverse guide assembly
Holes
ADU bottom plate assembly
Open/close
wire
Projections
Open/close
ADU reverse guide spring
assembly
Ground plate
Screw
(6) Remove two screws to remove the open/close

wire assembly. ADU reverse guide assembly
3-N-13
3-N-7
ADU UNIT
(8) Remove the nine screws illustrated from the bot- (10) Lower the ADU bottom plate assembly straight
tom of the ADU stand. down and remove the ADU guide cover.
Front
Screws
Screws
Paper
exit side

ADU guide cover
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(9) Remove one screw while holding the ADU bot- (11) Clean the ADU paper reverse PS (PS45) and
tom plate assembly to remove the paper feed reverse/exit PS (PS46) with a blower brush.
side open/close wire.
Reverse/exit PS (PS46)
Caution: Be sure to hold ADU bottom plate
assembly when removing the screws
because the ADU bottom plate
assembly becomes free when the
paper feed side open/close wire is
removed.
ADU paper reverse PS (PS45)

steps in reverse.
Screws
Open/close wire
3-N-14
3-N-8
ADU UNIT
[10] Removing and Reinstalling the ADU (9) Slide the ADU reverse roller to the upper side
Reverse Roller and then to the lower side to slide it out.
Warning: Paper exit reverse gear (1) E-ring (1)

Caution: Pin
a. Procedure
Bearing
(1) Draw out the ADU stand from the main body. E-ring (2)
(3) Remove the ADU cover.
(4) Remove the ADU guide cover.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(5) Remove the screw to remove two wiring har-
nesses.
(6) Remove E-ring (1) to remove the paper eject Wiring
reverse gear (1) and pin. Screws harnesses
(7) Remove E-ring (2) to remove the rear side bear-
ing.
(8) Remove E-ring (3) to remove the front side bear- ADU reverse
ing. roller
Bearing
E-ring (3)

steps in reverse.
3-N-15
3-N-9
ADU UNIT
[11] Removing and Reinstalling the ADU (8) Disconnect the three relay connectors (CN445,
Stand 446, 447).
Warning: Caution: Disconnect each connector on the

The interlock which is turned OFF when ADU stand.
should never be turned ON forcibly with Screw
Connector
Warning: cover Stay
Removal and reinstallation of the ADU
stand involve carrying a heavy load so it Screw
should be performed by two persons.
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been Relay connector
(CN446)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
a. Procedure
(2) Remove the fixing unit. (See "FIXING UNIT.") Relay
Relay connector
(3) Remove the transfer/separation corona unit. connector
(CN445)
(See "CORONA UNIT.") (CN447)
(5) Remove the front right door and the front left
door. (See "EXTERNAL SECTION.")
4 (6) Remove one screw (in the case of the 7155/

7165) or loosen one screw (in the case of the
7255/7272) to detach the connector cover.
(7) Remove the screw to loosen the stay.

3-N-16
ADU UNIT
(9) Remove one screw to release the lock of the han- [12] Removing and Reinstalling the
dle(right). Pre-Registration Roller
(10) Remove the two screws securing the guide rails
Warning:
on the paper feed side and paper exit side.
Caution: Do not mistake the screws securing the front right or left door opens or closes
the guide rails for screws(black) that should never be turned ON forcibly with
must not be removed. (Black screws the ADU stand drawn out.
must not be removed)
Warning:
(11) To remove the ADU stand, one person holds the
handle(right) on the paper-feed side, and the
stand involve carrying a heavy load so it
other holds the the handle(left) on the fixing unit.
Then, they lift up the ADU stand.
Caution:
Screws Handle (left) Be sure the power cord has been
Handle (right) unplugged from the wall outlet.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the front and rear registration springs.
Caution: When reinstalling, pay attention to the

location of the registration spring
hook.
(2) Remove the E-ring (φ6)
(3) Press the cleaner coupling and pull out the pin.
Guide rail
(4) Remove the spring.
(5) Remove the front and rear E-rings (φ8) and
ADU stand
Screws remove each bearing.
Guide rail
Screws that must not be removed (Black)
Screw
Handle
(right)
Screws
Both the left and right black screws
must not be removeed.

steps in reverse.
3-N-17
3-N-11
ADU UNIT
(6) Slide the ADU pre-registration roller back and [13] Removing and Reinstalling the ADU
forth to remove. Conveyance Roller 3 and 4
E-ring( / 8) Warning:
E-ring( / 6) The interlock which is turned OFF when
Registration Polyslider the front right or left door opens or closes
spring Spring should never be turned ON forcibly with
Pin
Warning:
Hook Removal and reinstallation of the ADU
Cleaner
coupling Caution:
Bearing
Pre-registration roller unplugged from the wall outlet.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
a. Procedure
(See "CORONA UNIT SECTION.")
(5) Remove the ADU stand.
Bearing (6) Remove two screws to detach the conveyance
duct (rear assembly).
Registration
spring
Conveyance duct
Screws
Hook (rear assembly)
E-ring( / 8)

steps in reverse.
3-N-18
3-N-12
ADU UNIT
(7) Remove two screws to release the high voltage (11) Remove two screws to remove the harness
supply unit (1). guide plate (front).
(8) Disconnect the two connectors (CN460, 461).

(9) Remove two screws to remove the conveyance
unit.
Relay connector Relay connector

Relay connector
High voltage Screws (CN460) (CN421)
(CN427)
supply unit (1)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Relay
connector Screw Harness guide plate
(CN461) (front)
Relay connector Screw
(CN426)
(12) Remove four screws to detach the registration

Conveyance drive motor assembly.
unit
Screw Registration drive motor assembly
Screw
(10) Disconnect the three connectors (CN421, 426,

427)
Screws(3)
3-N-19
3-N-13
ADU UNIT
(13) Remove the stop rings to remove the ADU decel- (18) Remove the front E-ring and bearing, and
eration MC (MC2) and ADU conveyance MC remove the ADU conveyance roller (3) and ADU
(MC13). conveyance roller (4) by sliding them back and
forth.
ADU conveyance Bearing E-ring Pin

belt (1)
E-ring Bearing
Pin
ADU conveyance ADU deceleration MC Belt holding

MC (MC13) (MC2) collars
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
E-rings
ADU conveyance pulley

ADU conveyance roller (3)
Stop rings
(14) Remove the E-ring at the rear, two belt holding

collars, ADU conveyance belt (1), and two ADU
conveyance pulleys.
(15) Remove the pin from each roller shaft.
(16) Remove the E-ring and bearing on the inside of ADU conveyance
roller (4)
the ADU conveyance pulley.
(17) Remove the E-ring on the ADU conveyance Bearing
roller(3) shaft.
E-ring E-rings

steps in reverse.
3-N-20
3-N-14
ADU UNIT
[14] Removing and Reinstalling the ADU (11) Disconnect the connector (CN415).
Conveyance Roller 1 and 2 (12) Remove three screws to detach the reverse
motor assembly.
Warning:
The interlock which is turned OFF when Screws
should never be turned ON forcibly with Reverse motor
assembly
Warning: Connector
Removal and reinstallation of the ADU (CN415)
Screw
Connector cover
Caution:
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
a. Procedure
(See "CORONA UNIT.")
(5) Remove the ADU stand. Screws
(6) Remove the conveyance unit.
(7) Remove the ADU conveyance MC(MC13). Connector
(8) Disconnect the connector (CN407). (CN407)
(9) Remove three screws to detach the reverse gate
solenoid assembly.
(10) Remove one screw to remove the connector
cover.
Reverse gate solenoid assembly
3-N-21
3-N-15
ADU UNIT
(13) Disconnect the two connectors (CN403, 404). (17) Remove the E-ring from ADU conveyance roller
(14) Disconnect the connector (CN417). (2) shaft.
(18) Remove the front E-ring, two belt holding collars,
ADU conveyance belt (2), and two ADU convey-
ance pulleys.
(19) Remove the pin from the shaft of each roller.
(20) Remove the E-ring and bearing inside the ADU
(15) Remove one screw to remove the wiring harness
conveyance pulley.
for CN404.
(21) Remove the rear E-ring and bearing, and remove
(16) Remove eight screws (three front, five rear) and
the ADU conveyance roller (1) and ADU convey-
turn over the fixing attachment rail assembly to
ance roller (2) by sliding them back and forth.
the paper exit side.
E-ring, bearing Belt holding collars,
Screws ADU transport pulleys
Pin
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Pin
E-rings ADU conveyance

ADU conveyance roller (2) shaft
belt (2)
ADU conveyance
Relay connector
ADU conveyance roller (1)
(CN417)
roller (2)
Fixing attachment
rail assembly
Relay connector
Wiring
(CN404) Bearing
harnesses Screw
E-rings

steps in reverse.
Relay connector Screws

(CN403)
3-N-22
3-N-16
ADU UNIT
[15] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper (12) Remove the paper reverse/exit roller by sliding it
Reverse/Exit Roller back and forth.
Warning: E-ring Bearing

Warning:
Pin
E-ring
Paper reverse/exit Paper exit/
Caution: roller reverse gear (1)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
a. Procedure
(See "CORONA UNIT.")
(5) Remove the ADU stand.
(6) Remove the conveyance unit.
(7) Remove the ADU conveyance roller (1).
(8) Remove the screw to remove the paper reverse/
exit roller rotation knob. Screw
(9) Remove the front E-ring and remove the bearing.
(10) Remove the rear E-ring to remove the paper exit
reverse gear (1) and pin. Bearing
(11) Remove the E-ring and remove the bearing.
Paper reverse/exit roller E-ring

rotation knob

steps in reverse.
3-N-23
3-N-17
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
FIXING UNIT
FIXING UNIT
[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing [2] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing
Unit Unit (Top)
Caution:
Warning:
Before opening the fixing unit (top), check
Do not touch the fixing unit immediately
that the pressure release lever is turned
after turning OFF the main power switch
counterclockwise and the bottom roller
because it is very hot and you may suffer
pressure is released.
burns. Wait until the fixing unit has cooled
a. Procedure
down sufficiently before working on it.
(1) Remove the fixing unit.
Caution: (2) Remove one screw to detach the fixing unit front
Be sure the power cord has been cover.
unplugged from the wall outlet. (3) Remove two screws to open the fixing unit (top).
a. Procedure
(1) Draw out the ADU stand. (See "ADU UNIT.") Screw
(2) Turn the pressure release lever counterclock- Fixing unit front cover
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
wise to release the pressure.
Screw
(3) Remove two screws and remove the fixing unit
by lifting. Fixing unit (top)
Caution: Do not hold the connector socket.
Remove by holding the pressure
release lever and the holding end at
the far side.
Connector socket Screw

Screws (2)
7272ma3030

steps in reverse.
holding end
Pressure release
Fixing unit lever

steps in reverse.
Caution: After installing the fixing unit, turn the

pressure release lever clockwise and
return it to the original position.
3-O-1
FIXING UNIT
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the Web [4] Removing and Reinstalling the
Cover Cleaning Web
(1) Remove the fixing unit. (1) Draw out the ADU stand. (See "ADU UNIT.")
(2) Remove the fixing unit front cover. (2) Remove the web cover.
(3) Open the fixing separation claw (upper) unit and (3) Remove two screws to remove the cleaning web
remove two screws inside. unit.
(4) Remove two screws to detach the web cover.
Cleaning web unit
Fixing separation Screws (2)
claw (upper) unit Web cover
Screws (2)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screw
Screws (2) Fixing unit front cover

steps in reverse. Caution1: When reinstalling, make sure the
cleaning web does not sag.
Caution2: When reinstalling, wind it until the
red line of the cleaning web is fully
wound to the take-up shaft.
Caution3: After replacing the cleaning web,
make sure to reset the count value of
the fixing unit cleaning web by "Copy
Count by Parts to be Replaced
(Fixed Parts)" in the 25 mode.
3-O-2
FIXING UNIT
[5] Replacing the Fixing Heater Lamps (7) Remove the two Faston terminals of the far side
(L2, L3) lamp.
Caution: Caution: When removing the Faston terminals,

Do not touch the fixing heater lamp with be sure to hold the connector. Con-
bare hands. nector cannot be removed by pulling
Caution1: Install the heater lamp with the man- on the harness.
ufacturers mark facing the rear.
Caution2: The heater lamp should not touch
the inner surface of the upper roller.
Caution3: When replacing the heater lamp, be
sure to insert the lamp end in the
lamp terminal securely. Also, check Faston terminals (2)
that the Faston terminals are con-
nected correctly.
a. Procedure
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(2) Remove the fixing unit front cover.
(3) Remove the screw at the front to remove the
lamp fixing plate (front).
(4) Remove the front lamp harness from the harness
guide to remove the two Faston terminals.
Screw
Caution: When removing the Faston terminals,
be sure to hold the connector. Con-
nector cannot be removed by pulling
on the harness. Lamp fixing plate (rear)
(8) Pull out the fixing heater lamps (L2, L3) from the
front side of the fixing upper roller.
Faston terminals
(2)
Screw
Harness guide Fixing heater lamps (L2, L3)
Lamp fixing plate

(front)
(5) Open the fixing unit (top).

(6) Remove the screw at the far side to remove the
lamp fixing plate (rear).
3-O-3
FIXING UNIT
(9) Reinstall the above parts following the removal [6] Replacing the Fixing Heater Lamp
steps in reverse. (L4)
Caution: When installing the lamps, pay atten- Caution:
tion to their orientation. The size of the Do not touch the fixing heater lamp with
lamp terminal mounting hole in the bare hands.
front lamp fixing plate is different from Caution1: Install the heater lamp with the man-
that in the rear lamp fixing plate. The ufacturers mark facing the rear.
lamp cannot be installed properly if it Caution2: The heater lamp should not touch
is facing the opposite direction. the inner surface of the upper roller.
Caution3: When replacing the heater lamp, be
sure to insert the lamp end in the
lamp terminal securely. Also, check
that the Faston terminals are con-
nected properly.
a. Procedure
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(1) Open the fixing cover (upper).

(2) Remove the screw at front to remove the lamp
fixing plate (lower front).
(3) Remove the Faston terminal.
Lamp fixing plate (lower front) Screw
Faston
terminal
3-O-4
FIXING UNIT
(4) Remove the rear lamp harness from the two har- [7] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing
ness guide to remove the Faston terminal. Separation Claw (Upper) Unit and
Fixing Separation Claws (Upper)
a. Procedure
Harness guides (2) Remove the fixing unit front cover.
(3) Remove the web cover.
(4) Remove the screw to detach the fixture.
(5) Remove the fixing separation claw (upper) unit
Fixing separation claw

(upper) unit Screw
Fixture
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Faston terminal
Lamp fixing plate (rear)
(5) Pull out the fixing heater lamp (L4) from the front
side of the fixing lower roller.
(6) Remove the screw to remove the upper separa-

tion claw support shaft from the fixing separation
claw (upper) unit.
Caution: Be careful when removing the shaft

because it bends easily.
(7) Remove six springs attached to the fixing sepa-
ration claw (upper) unit.
(8) Remove six fixing separation claws (upper).
Separation claw
Fixing heater lamp (L4) Screw (upper) support shaft
Spring

steps in reverse.
Fixing separation
Caution: When installing the lamp, pay atten- claw (upper) (6)
tion to its orientation. The lamp cannot
be installed properly if it is facing the
opposite direction.
3-O-5
FIXING UNIT
(9) Reinstall the above parts following the removal [8] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing
steps in reverse. Separation Claw (Lower) Unit and
Caution: After installing the fixing separation Fixing Separation Claws (Lower)
claw (upper), move the upper claws a. Procedure
with your finger and check that they (1) Remove the fixing unit.
return with the force of the spring. (2) Open the fixing unit (upper).
(3) Remove two screws to detach the fixing separa-
tion claw (lower) assembly.
(4) Remove the three springs from the three fixing
separation claws (lower).
(5) Slide the frame holding the fixing separation
claws (lower) and remove the three claws.
Fixing separation
claws (lower) (3)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Spring
Screws(2)
Frame
Fixing
separation claw
(lower) assembly

steps in reverse.
Caution: After installing the fixing separation

claw (lower), check that the frame
moves smoothly.
3-O-6
FIXING UNIT
4 [9] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing (8) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
Upper Roller and Fixing Drive Gear steps in reverse.
a. Procedure Caution1: Before reinstalling the insulating
(1) Remove the fixing unit. sleeve, coat the inside with Tri-flow.
(2) Remove the fixing unit front cover. Caution2: Reinstall the bearings and insulating
(3) Remove the fixing separation claw (upper) unit. sleeves with the collars facing the
(4) Open the fixing unit (top). directions shown in the figure.
(5) Remove the fixing heater lamps (L2, L3). 4 Caution3: When reinstalling the fixing upper
4 (6) Remove the two C-rings, fixing drive gear, gear, roller, the Lot No. or the grooves
two bearings, two washers (7255/7272: one located on the circumference of the
washer) and two insulating sleeves from the fix- roller edge should be directed
ing upper roller. toward the front side.
(7) Remove the fixing upper roller from the frame. And, refer to the following list for
checking the type of the fixing upper
Bearing rollers.
Insulating sleeve
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Number of grooves on
the circumference of
C-ring the roller edge
Gear 7155/7255 2
Washer 7165/7272 None (only Lot No.)
4 Caution4: The fixing drive gear of 7155/7165 is
Fixing upper roller different from that of 7255/7272.
The fixing drive gear of 7255/7272 is
designated for periodical replace-
ment parts.
Fixing unit (upper)
Bearing Washer
(7155/7165 only)
Fixing drive gear
C-ring
Insulating sleeve
Collars Collars
7272ma3035

3-O-7
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 3-O-7 REPLACEMENT
FIXING UNIT
[10] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing [11] Removing and Reinstalling the
Lower Roller De-Curler Roller
(1) Remove the fixing unit. (1) Remove the fixing unit.
(2) Remove two screws to remove the fixing (2) Open the fixing unit (top).
entrance guide plate (lower) (3) Lift the fixing exit guide plate (upper) and remove
two screws to remove the fixing exit guide plate
Fixing entrance guide plate (lower) (lower).
(4) Remove the screw to detach the jam handling
release knob.
4 (5) From the front side, remove one E-ring, one
gear, one E-ring, two washers, one screw, and
bearing in this order.
4 (6) From the rear side, remove one E-ring, two wash-
ers, one screw, and bearing in this order and then
remove the decurler roller from the frame.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Fixing exit
Screw Washer
guide plate (lower)
Screw Screw
(3) Remove the fixing separation claw (lower) unit.

(4) Remove the fixing lower roller upward.
(5) Remove two bearings from the fixing lower roller. E-ring
Bearing
Washer Screw
Fixing lower roller Fixing exit guide Fixing exit guide
plate (upper) plate (lower)
Bearing
Bearing
Decurler roller
Fixing exit guide plate (lower)
(6) Reinstall the above parts following the removal Washer

steps in reverse. Screw
Caution: The fixing entrance guide plate

(lower) should be pressed against the Screw
fixing upper roller bearing when Screw
installing. Bearing
Washer
E-ring Gear E-ring
Jam handling release knob
7272ma3036

3-O-8
FIXING UNIT
(7) Reinstall the above parts following the removal [12] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing
steps in reverse. Temperature Sensors 1 and 2
Caution1: After reinstalling fixing temperature
Caution: When reinstalling, check that the gear
sensor 2, make sure that the sensor
is installed correctly.
touches the fixing upper roller.
Caution2: Make sure the sensor wires do not
touch the fixing upper roller.
Caution3: When reinstalling fixing temperature
sensor 1, adjust its position using the
positioning jig (7050K0010) and secure
it with screws. Be sure to apply screw
lock agent to the screws. This adjust-
ment should be made in a pressured
state.
a. Removal procedure
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(3) Remove the cleaning web.
(4) Disconnect the two relay connectors (fixing tem-
perature sensor 1, CN52; fixing temperature
sensor 2, CN53) and release the sensor wires
from the cable guides.
(5) Remove two screws to detach fixing temperature
sensor 1.
(6) Remove one screw to detach fixing temperature
sensor 2.
Fixing temperature Fixing temperature

sensor 2 sensor 1
Screw
Screws (2)
Fixing Fixing
temperature temperature
sensor 1 sensor 2
(CN52) (CN53)
3-O-9
FIXING UNIT
b. Reinstallation procedure a) Set the distance "a" between the fixing tem-
(1) Secure fixing temperature sensor 2 to the fixing perature sensor 1 and fixing upper roller so
plate with a screw. that it is equal to the thickness of the position-
ing jig.
4 Caution: Be careful not to apply a pressure to
the sensor welding portion [A].
(2) Make sure that fixing temperature sensor 2 a
touches the fixing upper roller. If they do not
touch each other, be sure to bring the sensor in
contact with the roller.
(3) Set a fixing temperature sensor positioning jig Fixing temperature
sensor 1
between fixing temperature sensor 1 and fixing
upper roller, and secure fixing temperature sen-
sor 1 with two screws so that the distance Fixing upper roller
between the sensor and roller is equal to the
thickness of the jig.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Fixing temperature sensor 2

Standard value of a: 0.75 0.05mm
Screw
[A] (4) Apply screw lock agent to the two screws secur-
ing fixing temperature sensor 1.
(5) Secure the wires of fixing temperature sensors 1
The fixing temperature and 2 in the wire guides and connect their con-
sensor 2 must contact
the fixing upper roller.
nectors.
(6) Reverse the removal procedure to reinstall other
parts.
Fixing upper roller Screws(2)
Positioning jig
(7050K0010)
Fixing temperature sensor 1 7272ma3037

3-O-10
FIXING UNIT
[13] Removing and Reinstalling the b. Reinstallation procedure

Thermostat/U (TS1) (1) Connect two Faston terminals to the thermostat/
U.
Caution:
(2) Set a thermostat positioning jig (00M8-1-00)
This is an important safety part. (P/N:
between the thermostat/U and fixing upper roller
SP00-0020) Be sure to observe the follow-
and secure the thermostat/U with one screw so
ing cautions and steps when removing or
that the distance between the roller and thermo-
reinstalling.
stat/U is equal to the thickness of the jig.
Caution1: After reinstalling the thermostat/U,
make sure that its wires do not touch Screw
the fixing upper roller. Faston
terminal
Caution2: When reinstalling the thermostat/U,
adjust its position using the position- Faston
ing jig (00M8-1-00) and secure it with terminal
screws. Be sure to apply screw lock
agent to the screws. This adjustment
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
should be made in a pressured state.
a. Removal procedure Positioning jig
(1) Remove the fixing unit. (00M8-1-00)
Thermostat/U (TS1)
(3) Remove the cleaning web.
(4) Remove one screw and two Faston terminals to
detach the thermostat/U. Fixing upper roller
a) Set the distance "a" between the thermostat/

Thermostat/U (TS1)
U and fixing upper roller so that it is equal to
Screw
the thickness (B) of the positioning jig.
Faston terminals (2)

Thermostat/U
(TS1)
Fixing upper roller

3-O-11
FIXING UNIT
b) When making the adjustment, make sure that [14] Removing and Reinstalling the
the thermostat/U does not ride on the posi- Thermostat/L (TS2)
tioning jig (C).
Caution:
This is an important safety part. (P/N :
SP00-0010) Be sure to observe the follow-
(C)
ing cautions and steps when removing or
(B) reinstalling.
Caution1: After reinstalling the thermostat/L,
(A)
make sure that its wires do not touch
the fixing lower roller.
Caution2: When reinstalling the thermostat/L,
adjust its position using the position-
ing jig (56AEJG011) and secure it
(3) Apply screw lock agent to the screw securing the with screws. Be sure to apply screw
thermostat/U. lock agent to the screws. This adjust-
(4) Reverse the removal procedure to install other
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
ment should be made in a pressured

parts. state.
a. Removal procedure
(1) Remove the fixing lower roller.
(2) Close the fixing cover (top).
(3) Remove the two Faston terminals of the thermo-
stat/L through the fixing entrance side.
Faston
(4) Open the fixing cover (top).

(5) Remove two screws to remove the thermostat/L.
Screws
Thermostat/L
3-O-12
FIXING UNIT
b. Reinstallation procedure b) After setting the distance “b”, remove the

(1) Set a part (a) thermostat/L positioning jig thermostat/L positioning jig, and make sure
(56AEJG011) between the thermostat/L and the that the part (b) thermostat/L positioning jig
fixing lower roller, and secure the thermostat/L cannot be inserted in a space between the fix-
with two screws so that the distance between the ing lower roller and the thermostat/L.
thermostat/L and roller is equal to the thickness
of the jig.
Part (a)
Screws
Positioning jig
(56AEJG011)
Thermostat/L (TS2) Part (b)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Faston terminal
(2) Apply screw lock agent to the two screws secur-
ing the thermostat/L.
(3) Reverse the removal procedure to reinstall other
parts.
a) Set the distance "b" between the thermostat/

L and the fixing lower roller so that it is equal
to the thickness of the positioning jig.
Fixing lower roller
Thermostat/L
(TS2)
3-O-13
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
SERVICE MANUAL
Models
7155/7165/7255/7272
Service Section
JANUARY 2004
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS U.S.A., INC.

7155/7165/7255/7272
SERVICE MANUAL
JANUARY 2004
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of the possible hazards to an inexperienced
person servicing this equipment, as well as the risk of
damage to the equipment, Konica Minolta Business
Solutions U.S.A., Inc. strongly recommends that all
servicing be performed by Konica-trained service tech-
nicians only.
Changes may have been made to this equipment to

improve its performance after this service manual was
printed. Accordingly, Konica Minolta Business Solu-
tions U.S.A., Inc., makes no representations or war-
ranties, either expressed or implied, that the informa-
tion contained in this service manual is complete or
accurate. It is understood that the user of this manual
must assume all risks or personal injury and/or dam-
age to the equipment while servicing the equipment for
which this service manual is intended.
Corporate Publishing Department
© 2004, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS U.S.A., INC.

All rights reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
31DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING 1. ADJUSTMENT
. . . . .S-1 HOW TO USE THIS SECTION .................................1-1
ITEMS
[1] Scope and Precautions ..............................1-1
IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S-1 ADJUSTMENTS MADE WHEN REPLACING
PARTS.......................................................................1-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS................................1-2
WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . .S-1
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
LCD ADJUSTMENT ..................................................1-4
[1] LCD Control Panel Adjustment ..................1-4
SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S-2 [2] LCD Panel Contrast/Key Sound
2 ISW
Adjustment .................................................1-4
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S-10 SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENTS MADE WITH THE
P FUNCTION.............................................................1-4
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . .S-10
[1] Checking and Printing the P Function ........1-4
SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11 [2] Setting up the P Function ...........................1-4
MODE CHANGING MENU........................................1-5
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . .S-13 [1] Mode Selection...........................................1-5
25 MODE...................................................................1-6
[1] Setting the 25 Mode ...................................1-6
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2] List of Adjustment Items for 25 Mode.........1-7
[3] Setting Software DIP Switches...................1-8
3 KRDS
[4] Setting the Paper Size.......................... 1-20-2
[5] PM Count Resetting .................................1-22
[6] Setting the PM Cycle................................1-22
[7] Collecting Data .........................................1-23
[8] Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced
(Fixed Parts).............................................1-38
(Optional Parts) ........................................1-43
[10] Setting Passwords....................................1-44
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[11] Setting the Telephone Number and/or
4 SERVICE
Fax Number of the Service Center...........1-45
[12] Setting the Serial Number ........................1-46
[13] Displaying the ROM Version ....................1-46
[14] KRDS Setting ....................................... 1-46-1
[15] ISW Setting .......................................... 1-46-1
[16] Setting Date.......................................... 1-46-1
36 MODE.................................................................1-47
[1] Setting Method .........................................1-47
[2] High Voltage Adjustment..........................1-47
PARTS LIST
[3] Charging Grid Voltage Adjustment...........1-48
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[4] Drum Peculiarity Adjustment ....................1-49
[5] Drum Peculiarity Adjustment (Manual).....1-55
[6] User Paper Setting ...................................1-55 5 ELECTRIC
[7] Recall Standard Data
(Process Adjustment) ...............................1-56
[8] Tray Adjustment .......................................1-56
[9] Magnification Adjustment .........................1-57
[10] Timing Adjustment....................................1-60
[11] RADF Adjustment.....................................1-64
[12] Centring Adjustment.................................1-66
[13] Distortion adjustment (Copier)..................1-69
[14] Non-image area erase check ...................1-69
[15] Recall standard data (Image adjustment) 1-70
[16] Running Test Mode ..................................1-71
[17] Test pattern output mode .........................1-71
[18] Test pattern density setting ......................1-78

31DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT
[19] Finisher adjustment ................................. 1-78 [26] PK Adjusting the punch hole vertical position
[20] List Output Mode ..................................... 1-83 (PK-110).................................................1-130
47 MODE................................................................ 1-84 [26-1]Sensitivity adjustment for the PK paper edge
[1] 47 Mode / Multi Mode Setting Method..... 1-84 sensor (PK-120) ..................................1-130-1
[2] Adjustment Data Display ......................... 1-86 [27] PI Centering Adjustment (PK-110)......1-130-2
[3] Hard Disk Check...................................... 1-86 [27-1]Adjusting the tilt of PI (when PK punch
[4] Input checklist.......................................... 1-87 is used) (PK-110) ................................1-130-3
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[5] Output checklist....................................... 1-92 [27-2]Sensitivity adjustment for the PZ paper edge
OTHER ADJUSTMENT .......................................... 1-97 sensor (PZ) .........................................1-130-4
2 ISW
[1] Centring Adjustment................................ 1-97 [28] FNS Stapler Driver Belt Position
[2] Skew adjustment (Main body) ............... 1-100 Adjustment (FS-110/210) .......................1-131
[3] Adjusting the LCT Paper Feed Roller [29] Adjusting the PZ Paper-Path Switching
Pressure (LT-412 only).......................... 1-100 Solenoid (PZ) .........................................1-132
[4] Paper up/down plate horizontal [30] Adjusting the Tension of the PZ Punch Shift
adjustment (LT-402/LT-412 only) .......... 1-101 Timing Belt (PZ) .....................................1-133
[5] Skew adjustment (LT-402/LT-412 only) 1-103 [31] Adjusting the PZ 1st Folding Skew (PZ) 1-134
[6] Tray spring pressure adjustment........... 1-104 [32] Adjusting the Position of the PZ 2nd Folding
[7] Paper feed height (upper limit) Stopper (PZ)...........................................1-135
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
adjustment (LT-402/LT-412 only) .......... 1-106 [33] Adjusting the PZ 2nd Folding Skew 2nd
[8] Pick-up release amount Stopper Assembly (PZ) ..........................1-136
3 KRDS
adjustment (LT-402/LT-412 only) .......... 1-107 [34] FNS Adjusting the Magnets on Conveyance
[9] RADF mounting position adjustment..... 1-108 Guide Plate B (FS-111)..........................1-137
[10] [35] FNS Adjusting the Magnets on Conveyance
[11] RADF paper skew adjustment............... 1-110 Guide Plate C (FS-111)..........................1-138
[12] FNS Adjusting the magnets on the [36] FNS Adjusting the Sub-tray Paper Exit Gate
by-pass conveyance guide plate (FS-111) .................................................1-139
(FS-110/210) ......................................... 1-112 [37] FNS Adjusting the Paper-Path Switching Gate
[13] FNS adjusting the by-pass gate (FS-111) .................................................1-140
(FS-110/210) ......................................... 1-113 [38] FNS Adjusting the By-pass Gate
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[14] FNS Adjusting the Shift Position (FS-111) .................................................1-142

4 SERVICE
(FS-110/210) ......................................... 1-115 [39] FNS Adjusting the Shift Position

[15] FNS Adjusting the paper exit solenoid (FS-111) .................................................1-143
(FS-110/210) ......................................... 1-116 [40] FNS Adjusting Opening/Closing at the Paper
[16] FNS Adjusting the mount location Exit (FS-111) ..........................................1-144
of the paper exit arm (FS-110/210) ....... 1-117 [41] FNS Adjusting the Paper Exit-Opening Sole-
[17] FNS Adjusting the mount location noid (FS-111) .........................................1-145
of the alignment plates / U [42] FNS Adjusting the Paper Exit-Opening Lower
(FS-110/210) ......................................... 1-118 Guide Plate (FS-111) .............................1-146
[18] FNS Adjusting the mount location [43] FNS Adjusting the Mount Location of
PARTS LIST
of the alignment plates / L (FS-210) ...... 1-119 the Paper Exit Arm (FS-111)..................1-147
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[19] FNS Adjusting the stapling position [44] FNS Adjusting the Mount Location of
(Flat stapling) (FS-110/210)................... 1-120 the Upper Alignment Plates (FS-111) ....1-148
[20] FNS Adjusting the stapler vertical [45] FNS Adjusting the Tension of the Upper
positioning (FS-110/210) ....................... 1-121 Alignment Plate Drive Timing Belt
5 ELECTRIC
[21] FNS Adjusting the stapling position (FS-111) .................................................1-149

(stapling-and-folding) (FS-210).............. 1-123 [46] FNS Adjusting the Stapling Position
[22] FNS Adjusting the angle of the folding (Flat Stapling) (FS-111)..........................1-149
stopper (FS-210) ................................... 1-124 [47] SF-101 Testing Operation......................1-150
[23] FNS Adjusting the folding force
(FS-210) ................................................ 1-125
[24] FNS Adjusting the three-holding positions
(FS-210) ................................................ 1-126
[25] PK Adjusting the tilt of the punch hole position
(PK-110) ................................................ 1-127
[25-1] PK Adjusting the tilt of the punch hole position
(PK-120) ................................................ 1-128

31DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT
2. ISW 4. SERVICE
What's ISW? ............................................................. 2-1 SERVICE SCHEDULE ..............................................4-1
SETUP...................................................................... 2-2 [1] Service Schedule .......................................4-1
[1] ISW-compatible boards ............................. 2-2 [2] Maintenance Items .....................................4-2
[2] Data flow.................................................... 2-2 [3] Main Body Periodic Inspection Items .......4-11
[3] Prepare the copier to start an ISW [4] RADF [DF-316/DF-322]............................4-13
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
transfer ...................................................... 2-2 [5] FNS [FS-110] (Old type only)/
[4] Preparing the copier to transfer ................. 2-4 [FS-210] (Old type only) ...........................4-14
[5] Relationships between processing states [6] FNS [FS-111] ...........................................4-14
2 ISW
and operational LEDs ................................ 2-5 [7] LCT [LT-402/412] .....................................4-15
[6] Rewriting procedure after an error [8] PI [PI-110] ................................................4-16
interruption................................................. 2-5 [9] PZ [PZ-108/109] .......................................4-16
[6-1] Preparation when PZ is installed ............... 2-6 [10] Replacement parts list..............................4-17
[7] Connecting to the ISW connector.............. 2-6 [11] Important maintenance parts....................4-20
INTERNET ISW ........................................................ 2-8 COPY MATERIALS .................................................4-21
[1] What is the Internet ISW ?......................... 2-8 [1] Single unit supply .....................................4-21
[2] Operating environment .............................. 2-8 [2] Maintenance kit ........................................4-21
[3] Main features............................................. 2-8 SERVICE MATERIAL LIST .....................................4-22
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[4] Initial setting............................................... 2-9 CE TOOL LIST ........................................................4-23
[5] Mail Remote Notification System............. 2-16
3 KRDS
[6] Internet ISW using Web utility.................. 2-30 5. ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
[7] Internet ISW by operation panel .............. 2-33 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING.....................................5-1
[8] Precautions for use.................................. 2-35 [1] 7155/7165/7255/7272 Parts Layout
Drawing ......................................................5-1
3. KRDS [2] DF-316/DF-322 Parts Layout Drawing .......5-9
[3] LT-402/LT-412 Parts Layout Drawing ......5-10
[4] FS-110/FS-210 Parts Layout Drawing .....5-11
[5] PI-110 Parts Layout Drawing ...................5-14
[6] PK-110/PK-120 Parts Layout Drawing .....5-15
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[7] PZ-108/PZ-109 Parts Layout Drawing...... 5-15-1
4 SERVICE
[8] FS-111 Parts Layout Drawing .............. 5-15-2
[9] SF-101 Parts Layout Drawing .............. 5-15-4
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING........................5-16
[1] 7155/7165/7255/7272 Connector Layout
Drawing ....................................................5-16
[2] LT-402/LT-412 Connector Layout
Drawing ....................................................5-20
[3] FS-110/FS-210 Connector Layout
Drawing ....................................................5-20
PARTS LIST
[4] PI-110 Connector Layout Drawing ...........5-21
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[5] PK-110/PK-120 Connector Layout
Drawing ....................................................5-21
[6] PZ-108/PZ-109 Connector Layout
5 ELECTRIC
Drawing .................................................... 5-21-1
[7] FS-111 Connector Layout Drawing .......... 5-21-2
[8] SF-101 Connector Layout Drawing .......... 5-21-2
JAM CODE LIST......................................................5-22
ERROR CODE LIST................................................5-36
TIMING CHART.......................................................5-48
[1] 7165 Timing Chart (1) ..............................5-48
[2] 7165 Timing Chart (2) ..............................5-49
[3] 7272 Timing Chart (1) .......................... 5-49-1
[4] 7272 Timing Chart (2) .......................... 5-49-2
[5] DF-316/DF-322 Timing Chart (1) .............5-50
[6] DF-316/DF-322 Timing Chart (2) .............5-51
[7] LT-402/LT-412 Time Chart.......................5-52

31DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT
[8] FS-110/FS-210 TIming Chart (1)............. 5-53

[9] FS-110/FS-210 Timing Chart (2)............. 5-54
[12] PI-110 Timing Chart ............................ 5-56-1
[13] PK-110 Timing Chart ........................... 5-56-2
[14] PK-120 Timing Chart ........................... 5-56-3
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[15] PZ-108/PZ-109 Timing Chart ............... 5-56-4

[16] FS-111 Timing Chart (1)....................... 5-56-5
2 ISW
[17] FS-111 Timing Chart (2)....................... 5-56-6

[18] SF-101 Timing Chart ........................... 5-56-7
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM ............................... 5-57
[1] DF-316/DF-322 Overall Wiring Diagram . 5-57
[2] LT-402/LT-412 Overall Wiring Diagram... 5-58
[3] PI-110 Overall Wiring Diagram................ 5-59
[4] PK-110 Overall Wiring Diagram .............. 5-60
[5] PK-120 Overall Wiring Diagram .............. 5-61
[6] PZ-108/PZ-109 Overall Wiring Diagram.. 5-62
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[7] FS-111 Overall Wiring Diagram............... 5-63

[8] SF-101 Overall Wiring Diagram............... 5-64
3 KRDS
APPENDIX
[1] 7155/7165 Overall Wiring Diagram ........... A-1
[2] 7255/7272 Overall Wiring Diagram ........... A-2
[3] FS-110/FS-210 Overall Wiring Diagram.... A-3
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
4 SERVICEPARTS LIST
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
5 ELECTRIC


Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing ser-
vice work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
4 Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to
the copier, Konica Minolta Business Solutions U.S.A., INC. (hereafter called the KMBS) strongly recommends
that all servicing be performed only by KMBS-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed.
Accordingly, KMBS does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service
Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while ser-
vicing the copier for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND

CAUTION
4 In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “ CAUTION” is defined
as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,
etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and
property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier. General precaution Electric hazard High temperature
:Prohibition when using the copier.

General prohibition Do not touch with wet hand Do not disassemble
:Direction when using the copier.

General instruction Unplug Ground/Earth

S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS
4 [1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY

KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-qual-
ity design and a solid service network.
Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical
aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For
this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such mod-
ifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the rea-
soning behind this policy.
DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS

4
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBS.
4 • Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBS. Safety will not be
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, sol-
der or similar object.
• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
4 • Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by KMBS
4 • Using parts not specified by KMBS

S-2
[2] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

4 Konica Minolta brand copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety stan-
dards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of
injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order
to maintain safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
1.Power Supply
WARNING: Wall Outlet

• Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedi-
cated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consump-
tion.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. kw
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.
4 • Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBSKMBS. Using the dam-
aged power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
• When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure to
observe the following precautions:
a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket
on the rear panel of the copier.
Secure the cord with a fixture properly.
4 b. If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBS.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk
of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.

S-3
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
WARNING: Wiring
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same out-
let.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.

Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long
extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may
result.

• Check whether the copier is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric
shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the
following points:
a. Ground terminal of wall outlet
b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done
S-4

• Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected.
Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed
below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock:
a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.)
b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.)
c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case
of lightning.)
d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)
2.Installation Requirements
WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place

• Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile
materials that may catch fire.
• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
WARNING: Nonoperational Handling
• When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity

• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heat
source such as a heater.
A risk of degradation in copier performance or deformation exists.
Do not place the copier in a place exposed to cool wind.
Recommended temperature and humidity are as follows:
Temperature: 10°C to 30°C
Humidity: 10% to 80% (no dew condensation)
Avoid other environments as much as possible.
• Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarette
smoke, or ammonia gas.
Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problems
and image faults.
S-5
• The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be
harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the
room.
a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple copiers at the same time
CAUTION: Vibration
• When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sure to
install the copier in a level and sturdy place.
Constant vibration will cause problems.
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.

In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a
injury.
CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing

4 • Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service
manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the
prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do
not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a
risk of injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from

the copier and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still pow-
ered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock
exists.
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

You may get burnt.

• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check
with the copier powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external
cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be
caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.

S-6
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.

• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the
copier.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

• When disconnecting connectors, grasp the connector, not the cable.

(Specifically, connectors of the AC line and high-voltage parts)
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and elec-
trode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make

sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write
unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery speci-
fied in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
S-7
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the
interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the orig-
inal location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
DANGER: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not
to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with
eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.
When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

You may be burned due to dust explosion.
S-8
DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are
highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
• Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants
on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
[3] MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency
measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
4 2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried
out quickly and KMBS must be notified.
4 3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site
checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBS.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in “Serious Accident
Report/Follow-up Procedures”.
[4] CONCLUSION
1. Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration.
Therefore, safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer
engineer.
2. When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must
verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.

S-9
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products mar-
keted in the United States.
This copier is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S.

Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user opera-
tion.
S-10
SAFETY CIRCUITS
This machine is provided with the following safety cir- [2] Protection by L2, L3 and L4 (fixing
cuits to prevent machine faults from resulting in seri-
heater lamps) overheating prevention
ous accidents.
circuit
[1] Overall protection circuit
[2] L2 and L3 (fixing heater lamps) overheating TS2
DCPS
prevention circuit TS1
These safety circuits are described below to provide RL1
the service engineer with a renewed awareness of PRCB

them in order to prevent servicing errors that may
RL1
impair their functions.
TH2
Control
[1] Overall Protection Circuit section L2
AC driver
section L3
CBR1
TH1
L4
NF
1. Protection by software
The output voltage from TH1 (fixing tempera-
CBR2
ture sensor 1) is read by the CPU. If this volt-
age is abnormal, L2 (fixing heater lamp 1), L3
(fixing heater lamp 2), L4 (fixing heater lamp 3)
1. Protection by CBR1 and CBR2 (circuit
and RL1 (main relay) are turned OFF.
breakers)
CAUTION:
CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instanta- Do not change the gap between the roller
neously when an excessive current flows due and TH1. When replacing TH1, check the
to a short in the AC line. specified mounting dimensions. The RL1
CAUTION: function must not be deactivated under
The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not any circumstances.
be deactivated under any circumstances.
S-11
2. Protection by the hardware circuit
The output voltages from TH1 and TH2 (fixing
temperature sensors) are compared with the
abnormality judgment reference value in the
comparator circuit. If the output voltage from
TH1 or TH2 exceeds the reference value, L2
(fixing heater lamp 1), L3 (fixing heater lamp
2), L4 (fixing heater lamp 3) and RL1 (main
relay) are turned OFF in hardware means.
CAUTION:
Periodically check the TH2 face contact-
ing the roller, and replace TH2 if any
abnormality is detected.
Since TH1 (fixing temperature sensor)
face does not contact the roller, check the
distance from the roller and the sensor
orientation if any abnormality is detected.
The RL1 function must not be deactivated
under any circumstances.
3. Protection by TS1 (thermostat/U) and TS2
(thermostat/L)
When the temperature of the fixing roller
(upper/lower) exceeds the specified value, TSs
are turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to
L2 (fixing heater lamp/1), L3 (fixing heater
lamp/2), and L4 (fixing heater lamp/3) directly.
CAUTION:
Do not use any other electrical conductor
in place of TS1 and TS2. Do not change
the distance between the roller and TS
(thermostat).
S-12
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns
and electric shock.
CAUTION
DO NOT INSERT
your finger into the
two RADF hinge WARNING
portions; This area generates
otherwise you may high voltage. If touched,
be injured. electrical shock may
occur. DO NOT TOUCH.
CAUTION
ATTENTION
VORSICHT
CAUTION PRECAUCION
ATTENZIONE
ATTENTION
CAUTION VORSICHT
High temperature!
Do not touch. Use care PRECAUCION
when clearing paper.
ATTENZIONE
ATTENTION
Temp rature lev e!
Risque de br lure. Soyez
prudent en retirant la CAUTION
feuille coinc e.
VORSICHT CAUTION
Hei§e OberflŠche!
Brandverletzungsgefahr.
Bei Beseitigung von
Papierstaus vorsichtig
vorgehen.
The fixing unit is
very hot. To avoide The conveyance fixing
CAUTION
PRECAUCION
ÁTemperatura alta! getting burned, DO unit is heavy. Use care DO NOT put your hand between
No tocar. Tener cuidado al
remover el papel.
NOT TOUCH. and draw it out gently; the main body and developing
ATTENZIONE
Alta temperatura!
Non toccare. Agire con otherwise you may be fixing unit; otherwise you may
prudenza nel rimuovere la
carta.
injured. be injured.
CAUTION
self away from.
S-13
CAUTION
self away from.

S-14
7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK Apr. 2003 S-14 REPLACEMENT
The shift tray moves to and fro while

printing. DO NOT put your hand in
between the tray and tray supporting part;
Also, DO NOT put your hand in the paper
exit outlet while the tray is moving;
(SF-101 Shift tray)

between the main
body and tray;
injured.

between the main
body and tray;
injured.

7272sf006
CAUTION
self away from.

S-15
4
Use care after opening the

paper exit outlet.
DO NOT put your hand into
it; otherwise you may be
injured.
To avoid injury, DO
NOT put your hand
on top of the
printed sheets.
Be sure to hold
both sides of the
printed sheets
when removing
them, and DO NOT
leave your hand on
the printed sheets
while the primary
(main) tray goes up.
(FS-111 Finisher)
7272sf007
CAUTION
self away from.

S-16
<SCANNER SECTION>
7272sf004
<WRITE UNIT>
7272sf005
7272sf001

S-17
<REAR COVER>
CAUTION
self away from.
S-18
S-16
WARNING
<PZ Puncher with Z-folding>
CAUTION
self away from.

S-19
7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK Apr. 2003 S-17 ADDITION
Blank page

7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 S-18 ADDITION
1
ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Blank page
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
1 ADJUSTMENT
HOW TO USE THIS ADJUSTMENTS MADE
SECTION WHEN REPLACING
[1] Scope and Precautions PARTS
This section provides detailed information about Adjustments (including checks) and settings are not
adjustment items and procedures. Before addressing only required when a customer complaint about the
customer complaints, perform the following checks. copy image quality is received, but also after replacing
or reassembling parts.
1. Check whether the power supply voltage meets
[How to Read Tables]
the specifications.
2. Check whether the power supply is properly Components of the tables used in this section are as
grounded. follows:
3. Check whether this machine shares the power
supply with any other machine that draws large 1. Mode
current intermittently (e.g., elevator and air con- Adjustment mode to be selected.
ditioner that produce electrical noise). [P]: P mode
4. Check whether the installation environment is [25]: 25 mode
good. [36]: 36 mode
a. High temperature / High humidity, direct sun- [47]: 47 mode
light, ventilation, etc.
b. Level of installed location 2. Code
5. Check whether original has a problem that may Code and copy quantity setting button used in
cause defective images. each mode.
6. Check whether the selected density value is correct.
7. Check whether the platen glass, slit glass, etc. is 3. Page
soiled. Page in the "ADJUSTMENT" section.
8. Check whether correct paper is used for copying.
9. Check whether copying materials and parts 4. Circled numbers
(e.g., developer, drum, and cleaning blade) are 1 2 Indicate that adjustments (including
replenished and replaced when they reach the checks) must be made in order of pre-
end of their useful life. cedence.
10. Check whether toner remains. (Circle without numeric character):
Indicates that adjustments (including
When servicing the machine, observe the following checks) can be made independently.
precautions:
11. Only either side of the AC line is shut off when the
SW1 (main power) of this machine is turned off.
Always unplug the power cord before starting
service work. If it is necessary to service the
machine with the power on, take care not to be
caught in the scanning gear of the exposure unit.
12. Special care should be taken when handling the
fixing unit because it operates at extremely high
temperatures.
13. The developing unit has a strong magnetic field.
Keep watches and measuring equipment away
from it.
14. Take care not to damage the drum with tools and
so on.
15. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
1-1
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
1 ADJUSTMENT
Mis-centering detection sensor

Classification by Adjustment
By-pass paper feed unit
Registration clutch
Tray up/down wire
Registration roller
Dust-proof glass
Adjustment Item
Registration unit
Memory board
Each tray unit
PK (PK-120)
PK (PK-110)
Stapler unit
Developer
Fixing unit
Write unit
CCD unit
ADU unit
Item No.
RADF
Mode
Drum
Page
FNS
LCT
PZ
PI
1 Process High voltage
Adjust- adjustment
Charging grid manual
adjustment 1-48 1 O
2 ment Drum Pecu- Blade setting mode 1-49 3 O
liarity Adjust-
3 ment Auto maximum density 1-49
adjustment 4 2 1 1 O
4 Auto dot diameter 1-50

adjustment 5 3 2 2 O
5 LD1 offset adjustment 1-51 6 4 3 O
6 LD2 offset adjustment 1-52 7 5 4 O
7 Auto gamma adjustment (1dot) 1-53 8 6 5 3 O
8 Auto gamma adjustment (2dot) 1-54 9 7 6 4 O
9 Cartridge set mode 1-54 2 1 O
10 Image
Adjust-
Tray Adjustment 1-56 O O O
ment Magnification Printer vertical magnifi-
11 Adjustment cation adjustment 1-57 O O O
12 Printer horizontal magni- 1-58

fication adjustment O O O
13 Scanner (platen) vertical 1-58

adjustment O O
14 Scanner (RADF) vertical 1-59

adjustment O O
15 Timing Adjust- Printer leading edge tim- 1-61

ment ing adjustment O O O O O
16 Printer registration loop 1-61

adjustment O
17 Printer pre-registration 1-62

adjustment O
18 Printer leading edge tim- 36 1-62

ing adjustment O
19 Scanner (platen) leading 1-63

edge timing adjustment O O
20 Scanner (RADF) leading 1-63

edge timing adjustment (O) O O
21 Scanner (RADF) regis- 1-64

tration loop adjustment O
22 RADF Adjust- RADF density adjust- 1-65

ment ment O
23 RADF original size 1-65

adjustment O O
24 RADF incline offset 1-66

adjustment O O
25 Centering Printer centering adjust- 1-67

Adjustment ment O O O
26 Scanner (platen) center- 1-67

ing adjustment O O
27 Scanner (RADF) center- 1-68

ing adjustment (O) O O
28 Warp Adjust- Scanner (platen) warp 1-68

ment (Copier) (main scan) O O
29 Scanner (platen) warp 1-68

(sub-scan) O O
30 Scanner (RADF) warp 1-68

(main scan) O O
31 Scanner (RADF) warp 1-68

(sub-scan) O O
32 Finisher Stitch and fold stopper adjustment 1-79 O O
33 Adjust- Folding stopper adjustment 1-79 O O
ment
34 Cover sheet tray size adjustment 1-80 O O

7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK May 2002 1-2 REPLACEMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Mis-centering detection sensor
Classification by Adjustment
By-pass paper feed unit
Registration clutch
Tray up/down wire
Registration roller
Dust-proof glass
Adjustment Item
Registration unit
Memory board
Each tray unit
PK (PK-120)
PK (PK-110)
Stapler unit
Developer
Fixing unit
Write unit
CCD unit
ADU unit
Item No.
RADF
Mode
Drum
Page
FNS
LCT
PZ
PI
35 Finisher Punch Adjust-
Adjust- ment
Punch vertical position
adjustment 1-81 O O O
ment Punch horizontal
36 position adjustment 36 1-81 O O O O
37 Punch regist loop adjust- 1-81-1

ment O O O
38 1st Z- fold position adjustment 1-81-1 O O
39 2nd Z-fold position adjustment 1-81-2 O O
40 Three-fold position adjustment 1-82 O O
41 2 positions staple pitch adjustment 1-82 O O
Other Adjustments
42 Tray Centering Adjustment 1-97 O O

43 RADF Mounting Position Adjustment 1-108 O
44 RADF Skew Adjustment 1-109 O
45 RADF Paper Skew Face side of original 1-110
Adjustment paper O
46 Back side of original 1-111

paper O
47 PI Centering adjustment 1-129 3
48 PK Adjusting the Skew of Punched Holes Position 1-127 1
49 PK Adjusting the Vertical Positioning of Punched 1-128
Holes 2
50 Drum Count Reset 1-38 O
51 Developer Count Reset 25 1-38 O
52 Web Counter Reset 1-38 O
Caution: Replacing the image control board

• When a damaged image control board is replaced, the memory board on this board must be used on the
new image control board.
Only when the memory board is damaged, use a new memory board on a new control board.
Since the new memory board does not have adjustment data, the all adjustments are required. Before mak-
ing the all adjustments, make the "47mode-92(output) " setting to make the new memory board effective.
• After making any adjustment, make the “47mode -96 (output) setting”. After made the “47mode-96 (output)”
setting, the adjustment data is saved.
4 • However, the “47mode-92” and -96” settings are protected to prevent them from careless operation. In order
to make “47mode -92” and -96” settings using the saved adjustment data, the protection must be disabled.
For the unprotection method, contact the service manager ot the authorized distributor.

1-3
LCD ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
LCD ADJUSTMENT SETTINGS AND ADJUST-

[1] LCD Control Panel Adjustment MENTS MADE WITH THE
Enter the key operator mode and select " 10 Touch
panel adjustment" to adjust the LCD touch panel.
P FUNCTION
The P function allows you to perform following numeri-
*If you cannot select the touch panel adjustment
cal value checks using the P button:
mode pressing any numeric key after entering key
1. Total counter
operator mode will take you directly to " 10 Touch
2. Copier counter
panel adjustment".
3. Printer counter
[2] LCD Panel Contrast/Key Sound 4. * PM counter
Adjustment 5. Density Shift (Auto <Text/Photo>)
6. Density Shift (Inclease Contrust)
Enter the key operation mode and select " 7 LCD
7. Density Shift (Photo)
Panel contrast/Key sound adjustment" to adjust the
8. Density Shift (Text)
contrast, backlight, and/or buzzer as desired.
* PM counter is only displayed when ! Check
key is pressed on the operation panel.
[1] Checking and Printing the P Function

1. Turn ON the SW2 (sub power).
2. Press the P button.
3. Counter list is displayed.
4. Press the COUNTER MENU key.
5. Press the START button to print out the counter
list. The P function is cancelled automatically.
6. If the counter list need not be displayed, press the
EXIT key.
[2] Setting up the P Function

1. Turn ON the SW2 (sub power).
2. Press the SPECIAL
ORIGINAL key.
3. Select the required image quality, text, photo etc.
Then press the P button to set the desired density
shift.
4. Enter a value (0-5) with a numeric key, then press
the OK key. The smaller the value, the darker
the density.
5. Press the OK key to return to the Basic screen.
1-4
MODE CHANGING MENU
1 ADJUSTMENT
MODE CHANGING MENU
[1] Mode Selection
You can select a mode from the following [Mode chang-
ing menu: [Select mode] without turning OFF and ON
the power switch.
1 Basic screen
2 3-6 mode
3 2-5 mode
4 Key operation mode
5 4-7 mode
Step Operation
1 Turn on the SW2 (sub power).
Press P button and wait until [Enter pass-
2 word for mode selection] message
appears.
Enter the password 9272 and press the
Start button.(Note that this password is
3
fixed and cannot be changed.)The [Mode
changing menu] appears.
Enter the number to select the desired
4
mode.
To return to the [Mode changing menu],
5 press P button and wait until the menu
appears again.
Upon completion of the adjustment, press
6
EXIT key to return to the Basic screen.
1-5
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
[1] Setting the 25 Mode
This machine has an adjustment mode called the "25
Mode". Select this mode to rewrite data in the non-vol-
atile memory or make various settings.
1. Turn OFF the SW2 (sub power).
2. While pressing the copy quantity setting button 2
and 5, turn ON the SW2 (sub power).
The Memory setting mode menu Screen will
appear.
Now the machine is in the 25 mode, disabling
normal copy operations.
[Memory setting mode menu Screen]
3. Press the numeric button of the desired setting

item.
The associated setting screen will appear.
4. Enter data in the setting screen.
5. Turning OFF the SW2 (sub power) cancels the
25 mode.
6. New data will take effect after restart.
1-6
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[2] List of Adjustment Items for 25 Mode
Adjustment Item Menu Remarks
1 Software DIP SW setting See "list of Software DIP
Switches".
2 Paper size setting
3 PM count Resetting PM Count
Setting PM cycle
4 Data collection (7155/7165) 1 Total count of each paper size
2 Copy count of each paper size
3 Print count of each paper size
4 RADF count
5 Pixel ratio of each section
6 Pixel ratio ranking list
7 JAM data of time series
8 JAM count
9 Count of each copy mode
10 SC count
11 JAM count of each section
12 SC count of each section
4 Data collection (7255/7272) 1 Total count of each paper size
2 Copy count of each paper size
3 Print count of each paper size
4 RADF count
5 Scanner count
6 Pixel ratio of each section
8 JAM data of time series
9 JAM count
10 Count of each copy mode
11 SC count
12 JAM count of each section
SC count of each section
5 Parts counter 1 Count of special parts COUNT RESET
2 Count of each part COUNT RESET
Part name setting
P/N setting
Limit Setting
6 Password setting Key Operator password 4 digits
EKC master key code 8 digits
Weekly timer password 4 digits
HDD management password 4 digits
7 Telephone/Fax number set- Customer support telephone number 16 digits
ting Customer support FAX number 16 digits

1-7
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Item Menu Remarks

8 M/C serial number setting Main body
Optional tray
Finisher
9 Indication of ROM version Indication of versions of
ROMs installed in the image
control, printer control, fin-
isher, and Z-fold.
4 10 KRDS setting 1 Setting Host Call See Chapter 3.
2 Setting Host Password
3 Setting KRDS Phone Number
4 Setting KRDS Software SW
5 Setting KRDS Setup
6 Call for maintenance start
7 Call for maintenance end
8 KRDS mail setting
11 ISW updating
12 Setting date input

1-8
1 ADJUSTMENT
Blank page

7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 1-7-2
1-9 ADDITION
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[3] Setting Software DIP Switches

1. Procedure
Bring up the Software DIP SW Setting screen
and set software DIP switches.
Step Operation
1 Enter the 25 mode.
2
Select " 1 Software DIP SW setting".
[Software DIP SW setting screen]
Select a DIP switch number.
Use the or key or numeric
3 keys.
To use numeric keys, press the DIP
switch number key at the left before
entering a DIP switch number.
Select a bit number of the selected DIP
switch.
Use the or key or numeric
4 keys.
To use numeric keys, press the bit num-
ber key at the upper center before enter-
ing a DIP switch number.
Select ON (=1), or OFF (=0) of the
switch.
Use the ON or OFF key.
5
ON : Sets 1.
OFF : Sets 0.
Press the RETURN key to return to the

6
Memory setting mode menu Screen.
For the function of each switch, refer to “list of

Software DIP Switches”.
1-8
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
< List of Software Switches >
Note: Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function.
DIPSW Initial Value
Bit Function 0 1 Japan Inch Metric
No.
0
Condition for stopping copying after indica- 1 1 1
tion of toner supply
1 *1 *1 0 0 0
2
Method for stopping copying after indica- 1 1 1
tion of toner supply
3 *2 *2 0 0 0
DIPSW 1 Inhibition of copying when PM count is
4 reached Disabled Inhibited 0 0 0
5 Number of copies made before inhibition of 0 0 0
6 copying when PM count is reached *3 *3 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
0 Hard disk connection Disconnected Connected 0 0 0
1 Electrode cleaning cycle (when power is 0 0 0
2 turned ON, fixing temperature is 50ºC or * 4 *4 0 0 0
3 less) 0 0 0
DIPSW2 4 Electrode cleaning cycle (after power is 0 0 0
5 turned ON) *5 *5 0 0 0
6 - - - 0 0 0
7 - - - 0 0 0
0 - - - 0 0 0
1 SC latch Unlatched Latched 0 0 0
25, 36, 47 mode password request (pass-
2 word: 9272) Not requested Requested 0 0 0
DIPSW3 3 Charger cleaning function ON OFF 0 0 0
4 Transfer/separation cleaning function ON OFF 0 0 0
5 - - - 0 0 0
6 47 mode 15-01 data collection clearing Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
7 JobEditor connection Disconnected Connected 0 0 0
0 ADF automatic skew adjustment Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
1 Inhibition of postcard double sided copy Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
2 - - - 0 1 0
3 - - - 0 0 1
DIPSW4 4 Key counter removal recovery Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
5 Inhibition of magnified APS Enabled Disabled 0 1 0
Fixed magnification rate setting change in
6 key operator mode Enabled Disabled 1 0 0
Incremented by Incremented by
7 A3 (11x17) counting method 0 0 0
1 2
4 0 Image density selection (Toner concentra- 0 0 0
*7 *7
1 tion threshold) 0 0 0
2 Image density selection (laser PWM) for 1 1 1
*8 *8
3 copier 0 0 0
DIPSW5 -
4 - - 0 0 0
5 - - - 1 1 1
6 - - - 0 0 0
7 - - - 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
1 Transfer/separation output for plain paper * 9 *9 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 Transfer/separation output for thick paper * 10 * 10 0 0 0
DIPSW 6 4 0 0 0
5 Transfer/separation output for thin paper * 11 * 11 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 - - - 0 0 0
1-9
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW Initial Value

No.
4 0 Toner guide roller current correction * 12 * 12 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
TSL user-specified paper control (7255/
2 7272) (Note1) Lighted Not lighted 0 0 0
DIPSW 7 3 TSL postcard control (7255/7272) (Note1) Lighted Not lighted 0 0 0
4 - - - 0 0 0
5 Transfer/separation output for recycled 0 0 0
6 paper * 13 * 13 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
0 Image density selection (laser PWM) for IP * 35 * 35 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 Fixing roller initial rotation * 14 * 14 0 0 0
3 1 1 1
DIPSW8 4 0 1 1
Fixing roller initial rotation time setting * 15 * 15
5 0 0 0
6 A3(11 × 17) PM counter switch 1 count 2 count 0 0 0
7 Store on hard disk Enable Disable 0 0 0
0 Operation at key counter removal (copy) Same as stop Immediate 0 0 0
key stop (JAM)
1 Operation at key counter removal (IP) Ignored Same as 0 0 0
DIPSW9-0
DIPSW 9 2
3
Message switching * 16 * 16 0
0
0
0
0
0
4 0 0 0
5 Copy count limit * 17 * 17 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
4 0 Page memory allocation when powered. * 18 * 18 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 Page memory allocation when job starts * 19 * 19 0 0 0
Duplex shift printing from Adobe PS3 Independent
(7155/7165) (Note2) Common shift shift 0 0 0
DIPSW10 3 Fixing low power recalling temperature set- Recalled after Recalled after
ting (7255/7272) (Note3) 45 seconds 30 seconds 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 Transfer/separation output for high-quality * 20 * 20 0 0 0
6 paper 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
4
0 - - - 0 0 0
1 - - - 0 0 0
2 Index paper rear end erasing amount 3mm erased 1mm erased 0 0 0
Not switched (All
3 SC/E code screen switchover Switched are F codes)
0 0 0
DIPSW11 4 Selection of filter for jagged edges on slanting lines Not selected Selected 0 0 0
5 Tone switchover in photo mode 2bitED-2dot 1bitED-1dot 0 0 0
PWM PWM
Fixing control for domestic normal temperature and Priority in Priority in fix-
6 normal humidity environment (7255/7272) WUT ing condition 0 0 0
7 JAM indication screen type Without Jam code With Jam code 0 0 0
4 Note 1: TSL does not light up at all when “Not lighted” is selected.
When “Lighted” is selected, TSL does not light up for the last one-fifth part of a copy paper divided in the feed-
ing direction but lights up for the remained four-fifth part.
Note 2: When printing from Adobe PS3 driver in duplex mode with image shift function, shift amount of copier
(it can set from “APLICATION-Image shift”) is used for print job.
0: Both front and back side is decided by the front side shift amount data of copier.
1: The shift data for each front and back side set in copier is used for duplex print mode.
4 Note 3: The time recalled from low-powered state can be selected from 45 seconds or 30 seconds.
For the temperature set for low-powered state, the temperature set for 30-second lapse is higher than that for
45-second lapse.
1-10
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW Initial Value
No.
4
Every 10 copies Every 50 copies
(7155/7165) (7155/7165)
0 Black stripe creation interval Every 12 copies Every 60 copies
0 0 0
(7255/7272) (7255/7272)
Coin vendor paper size signal switchover
A3 A3R 0 0 0
1 (7155/7165)
Shifting from A3 to A3R (7255/7272) Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
DIPSW 12
2 - - - 0 0 0
3 Printer automatic centering correction Enable Disable 0 0 0
4 High voltage output in 36/47 mode Not output Output 1 1 1
5 Paper exit direction of booklet mode Face down Face up 0 0 0
6 - - - 0 0 0
7 - - - 0 0 0
0 Size detection 1 A5 5.5 x 8.5 0 1 0
1 Size detection 2 A4R 8.5 x 11R 0 1 0
2 Size detection 3 8.5 x 14 F4 0 0 1
DIPSW 13 3 Size detection 4 * 21 * 21 0 0 0
4 0 1 0
5 F4 size detection * 22 * 22 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 - - - 0 0 0
B4 : 11 x 17/
0 Size detection 5 (main body) B5 : 8.5 x 11/B5R
8K/16K/16KR 0 0 0
1 - - - 0 0 0
2 - - - 0 0 0
B4 : 11 x 17/
3 Size detection 5 (by-pass feed) B5 : 8.5 x 11/B5R
8K/16K/16KR 0 0 0
DIPSW14 B4 : 11 x 17/
4 Size detection 5 (platen) B5 : 8.5 x 11/B5R
8K/16K/16KR 0 0 0
B4 : 11 x 17/
5 Size detection 5 (ADF) B5 : 8.5 x 11/B5R
8K/16K/16KR 0 0 0
B4 : 11 x 17/
6 Size detection 5 (PI) B5 : 8.5 x 11/B5R
8K/16K/16KR 0 0 0
7 - - - 0 0 0
0 KRDS type selection Telephone line E-mail 0 0 0
4
1 Maximum number of sheets to an be sta- * 23 * 23 0 0 0
2 pled 0 0 0
DIPSW15 3
4 FNS alarm stop SW * 24 * 24 0
0
0
0
0
0
5 KRDS connection Disconnected Connected 0 0 0
6 Dmax. value in printer mode 1.43 1.35 0 0 0
7 Large-size table limit change (7255/7272) Not changed -20 copies 0 0 0
4
0 Remote diagnosis system selection (7255/7272) KRDS EP-NET 0 0 0
1 Copy Reserve Function Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
2 Index original + RADF double-sided Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
DIPSW16 3 Key counter counting in printer mode Not counted Counted 0 0 0
4 TC start date indication (P mode) Indicated Not indicated 0 0 0
5 Non-original area automatic erasure mode * 25 * 25 0 0 0
6 judgement level 0 0 0
7 E-mail KRDS NIC selection IP NIC Copier NIC 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
1 Weekly timer summer time setting * 26 * 26 1 1 1
2 1 1 1
3 0 0 0
DIPSW17 4 0 0 0
5 Density selection for scanning tab paper * 27 * 27 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 - - - 0 0 0

1-11
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW Initial Value

No.
0 Tray 1's faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
3 LCT faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
DIPSW18 4 ADF faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
Folding, stapling and three-holding faulty
5 Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
part isolation
6 PI faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
7 HDD faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
0 - - - 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 Fixing temperature setting switch over * 28 * 28 0 0 0
DIPSW 19 3 0 0 0
4 PZ -fold faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
5 PK faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0
6 IP scanner default resolution * 29 * 29 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
0 Group stapling Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
1 Original size scanning with shift function (Note3) Normal Original priority 0 0 0
Based on orig- Based on
2 Stamp page number switching 0 0 0
inal transfer paper
DIPSW20 3 Keyboard layout ABC layout QWERTY layout 0 0 0
4 - - - 0 0 0
5 - - - 0 0 0
6 - - - 0 0 0
7 Tandem connection Disconnected Connected 0 0 0
4
Disabled
Mixed sized print stapling inhibition Enabled (real-
0 (batch pro- 0 0 0
(IP) time output)
cessing)
1 LCT size setting in key operator mode Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
2 Original count display Displayed Not displayed 0 0 0
3 - - - 0 0 0
DIPSW21 4 - - - 0 0 0
5 - - - 0 0 0
Enabled
6 Special paper APS response Disabled (except thick 0 0 0
paper)
7 IP scanner 600/400dpi Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
4
0 IP address setting Inhibited Allowed 1 1 1
1 Number of punched holes * 30 * 30 0 1 0
2 0 0 1
Image reference position of unspecified
3 size of paper - - 0 0 0
4 Power save button function Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
DIPSW22 Correspondence of PZ-109 (7155/7165) Not correspond Correspond 0 0 0
5 Automatic punch hole switching unit (7255/ Not provided Provided 0 0 0
7272)
Request for staple
Staple supply
6 FNS no staple operation supply and sta- 0 0 0
requested
pling canceled
7 JAM indication screen type Position Illustration 0 0 0
Note 3: When "Normal" is selected, the original size is compared with the copy paper size and the smaller
one is assumed to be the image area size. When "Original priority" is selected, the original size is
compared assumed to be the image area size only when the image shift mode is selected.
1-12
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW Initial Value
No.
0 - - - 0 0 0
Operation when printer EKC password is Counted and Not output
4
not matched output to EKC (display it on
1 or other user the JOB list 0 0 0
domain that is not pro-
duced)
2 Image density selection (toner density * 31 * 31 0 0 0
DIPSW23 3 selection of developer) 0 0 0
4 - - - 0 0 0
Postcard face up ejection (7255/7272) Disabled Determined by
5 engine/IP set- 0 0 0
ting
Registration of by-pass special paper set- Prohibited Allowed
6 0 0 0
ting for JOB memory
7 Ejection of the thick paper 2 to sub-tray (IP) Face-down Face-up 0 0 0
Method of accessing Hard disk JOB Password Password +
4 0 0 0 0
file name
Job Editor image transfer method default Automatic Manual
1 0 0 0
setting
2 - - - 0 0 0
DIPSW24 Additional providing of platen-specific Disabled Enabled
3 0 0 0
machine
4 Maximum number of sheets with Z-folding 0 0 0
* 33 * 33
5 (main tray) 0 0 0
6 Maximum number of sheets with Z-folding 0 0 0
7 + stapling (main tray) * 34 * 34 0 0 0
4 0 IP scanner image format TIFF TIFF/PDF 0 0 0
1 - - - 0 0 0
2 Mixplex rotation control Each job Each page 0 0 0
3 - - - 0 0 0
CPF signal switching for user specified
4 paper when vendor (D-103) is used (7255/ Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
DIPSW25 7272)
When coin is When coin
5 Coin vendor reset timing 0 0 0
inserted runs out
Master Sub machine
6 Image shift on tandem sub machine (IP). 0 0 0
machine data data
7 Proof/wait with tandem mode (IP). Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
0 - - - - - -
4 Setting of document size to be defined Sub-scan: Sub-scan:
1 large-size by scanner count 0 0 0
338mm or more 391mm or more
2 - - - - - -
DIPSW26 3 - - - - - -
4 - - - - - -
5 - - - - - -
6 - - - - - -
7 - - - - - -

1-13
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW Initial Value

No.
Image's gray background control at power Not performed Performed
0 ON 0 0 0
(toner density reduction control) *32
ON
1 (toner recycle MC control during printing) 0 0 0
*32
2 Toner supply operation (use prohibited) Performed Not performed 0 0 0
ON
3 (drum/developer rotation control at power 0 0 0
DIPSW27 ON after γ correction) *32
Image density optimization control (use Performed Not performed
4 prohibited) 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
ON
(toner recycle MC ON control during drum/
6 developer rotation performed when the 0 0 0
power is turned ON) *32
ON
7 (toner recycle MC ON control during Dmax 0 0 0
and γ correction) *32
4 0 Correspondence of Mixplex (IP) Correspond Not correspond 0 0 0
1 IP scanner function Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
2 Connecting tray 4 (7255/7272) Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
3 Limitation of punch function Selected Not selected 0 0 0
DIPSW28 4 - - - 0 0 0
Centering adjustment in key operation Not available Available
5 mode (7255/7272) 0 0 0
6 - - - 0 0 0
7 - - - 0 0 0
4
Correspondence of E-mail KRDS (IP) Not correspond Correspond
(7155/7165) 0 0 0
0 Correspondence of E-mail KRDS (IP) Not correspond Correspond
(7255/7272) 1 1 1
1 Correspondence of memory overflow 0 0 0
2 when IP printing *36 *36 0 0 0
Include of proof copy to the set copy quan- Not included Included
3 tity 0 0 0
DIPSW29 4 Detection size at minimum size 5.5 x 8.5R Special size 5.5 x 8.5R
(7255/7272) 0 0 0
5 - - - 0 0 0
6 - - - 0 0 0
Initialization when connecting HDD (Even Not initialized Initialized (It is
though initializing is preset, the setting is turned OFF
7 shifted from 1 to 0 after the initializing is when the ini- 0 0 0
completed.) (7255/7272) tializing is
completed.)

1-14
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
0 - - - 0 0 0
25 mode collection data 7-12 for checking Display No display
1 0 0 0
restriction restriction
2 - - - 0 0 0
DIPSW30 3 - - - 1 1 1
4 - - - 0 0 0
5 - - - 0 0 0
6 - - - 0 0 0
7 Passwords to save/access hard disk JOB Not displayed Displayed 0 0 0
4 0 - - - - - -
1 - - - - - -
2 - - - - - -
Double-sided copy of non-standard size Disabled Enabled
3 papers 0 0 0
DIPSW32
4 - - - - - -
5 - - - - - -
6 - - - - - -
7 - - - - - -
4 0 *37 *37 0 0 0
1 Fixing linear velocity adjustment 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
DIPSW33 4 - - - - - -
5 - - - - - -
6 - - - - - -
7 - - - - - -

1-15
1 ADJUSTMENT
Blank page

7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 1-14-2
1-16 ADDITION
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
*1 Condition for stopping copying after indication of *5 Electrode cleaning cycle (after power is turned
toner supply request ON)
Mode 1-1 1-0 Mode 2-5 2-4
Stops after printing 1,500 copies 0 0 10,000 copies 0 0
*2 Method for stopping copying after indication of

toner supply request
Mode 1-3 1-2
Stops after ejecting the paper
0 0
remaining in the machine
Stops after printing specified num-
0 1 *7 Image density selection
ber of copies
(toner concentration threshold)
Stops at the end of the current job 1 0 These bits set the read level of the toner concen-
Does not stop 1 1 tration patch formed on the drum to determine
the toner concentration. Against image exces-
*3 Number of copies made before inhibition of
sive density, image blur, and toner scattering in
copying when PM count is reached
all tone areas, the setting should be made by
Mode 1-7 1-6 1-5 shifting the threshold of black color to the positive
1,000 copies 0 0 0 side.
2,000 copies 0 0 1 Against insufficient density in all tone areas, shift
3,000 copies 0 1 0 to the negative side.
• Standard -10:The image becomes darker.
4,000 copies 0 1 1
• Standard +10:The image becomes lighter.
5,000 copies 1 0 0 • Standard +20:The image becomes far lighter.
1,000 copies 1 0 1 Mode 5-1 5-0
1,000 copies 1 1 0 Standard 0 0
1,000 copies 1 1 1 Standard -10 0 1
*4 Electrode cleaning cycle (fixing temperature is Standard +10 1 0
50°C or lower when power is turned ON) Standard +20 1 1
Mode 2-3 2-2 2-1
Note: There are three DIP switches to change
When power is tured ON 0 0 0 the image density : 5-0/1 (toner concen-
5,000 copies 0 0 1 tration threshold, 5- 2/3 (laser PWM), and
10,000 copies 0 1 0 23-2/3 (toner density of developer).
15,000 copies 0 1 1 The priority of order of these adjustments
20,000 copies 1 0 0 are as follows :
(1) Laser PWM
25,000 copies 1 0 1
(2) Toner density of developer
30,000 copies 1 1 0 (3) Toner concentration threshold
Not cleaned 1 1 1

7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK Apr. 2003 1-15 REPLACEMENT
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
*8 Image density selection (laser PWM) for copier *10 Transfer/separation output for thick paper
These bits set image write laser PWM. Against This bit is used when "Thick" is selected for
exessive density of 100% black color, thick let- "Paper type/special size setting" in the key oper-
ters and lines, and excessive toner consumption, ator mode to change transfer/separation output,
the setting should be made by selecting “light.” linear speed, and fixing temperature.
In the opposite case, select “dark.” When "No specification" is selected, standard
Mode 5-3 5-2 data for 170g/m2 (45 lb) or heavier paper is used.
Darker (255) 0 0 • 170g/m2 (45 lb) or heavier (TSL OFF) : When
Normal (235) toner is scattered around the image.
0 1
• Plain paper : Transfer / separation data for
Lighter (215) 1 0 plain paper of each destination is used to set
Note: There are three DIP switches to change only the line speed and fixing temperature for
the image density : thick paper. This setting is applied when the
5-0/1(toner concentration threshold), fixing condition is insufficient even though
5-2/3 (laser PWM), and 23-2/3 (toner paper is not so thick.
density of developer). The priority of Mode 6-4 6-3
order of these adjustments are as follows: No specification 0 0
(1) Laser PWM 170 g/m2 (45 lb) or more (TSL OFF) 0 1
(2) Toner density of developer
Plain paper 1 0
(3) Toner concentration threshold
*11 Transfer/separation output for thin paper
*9 Transfer/separation output for plain paper This bit is used when "Thin" is selected for "Paper
These bits are used when "- - - -", "Normal", type/special size setting" in the key operator
"Color", "Special" or "Seal" is selected for "Paper mode.
type/special size setting" in the key operator When "No specification" is selected, the output
mode. data by destination (Japan: 52.4 g/m2 paper, Inch
When "User paper" is selected with this bit, the area: 16lb, paper, Metric area: 48g/m2 paper) is
transfer/separation output for the "user paper used.
setting" made in the 36 mode is applied.
Mode 6-6 6-5
When "No specification" is selected, the output
No specification 0 0
data by destination and paper size (metric or inch
system) (Japan/metric: 64g/m2 plain paper, 52.4 g/m2 (13 lb) paper 0 1
Inch: 20 lb plain paper, Inch area / Inch: 20 lb 64 g/m2 (16 lb) paper 1 0
plain paper, metric: 80g/m2 plain paper, Metric
area/metric: 80g/m2 plain paper, Inch: 20 lb plain *12 Toner guide roller current correction
paper) is used. When the room temperature causes defect
cleaning, the bias value of the toner guide roller
Mode 6-2 6-1 6-0
should be changed to +10 µA or +20 µA. If the
No specification 0 0 0
original setting value is changed without any
Not used 0 0 1 defective cleaning observed, the drum can be
Not used 0 1 0 damaged, or the toner may be spilled. In this
Not used 0 1 1 case, the use of copier is never recommended.
Recycled paper 1 (Japan) 1 0 0 Mode 7-1 7-0
Recycled paper 2 (Inch area) 1 0 1 Standard 0 0
Recycled paper 3 (Metric area) 1 1 0 Approx. +10 µA 0 1
User paper 1 1 1 Approx. +20 µA 1 0
No correction 1 1

25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
*13 Transfer/separation output for recycled paper
These bits are used when "Recycle" is selected Mode 8-3 8-2
for "Paper type/special size setting" in the key Low temperature 0 0
operator mode. Low and normal temperature 0 1
When "User paper" is selected with these bits, Low, normal, and high tem-
the transfer/separation output for the user paper 1 0
peratures
setting made in the 36 mode is applied. When No initial rotation 1 1
"No specification" is selected, output data by
destination and paper size (metric or inch series)
*15 Fixing roller initial rotation time setting
(Japan/metric: 64 g/m2 recycled paper, Inch: 20
This bit sets the maximum time of initial rotation
lb recycled paper, Inch area/inch: 20 lb recycled
of the fixing roller.
paper, metric: 80g/m2 recycled paper, Metric
7155/7165
area/metric: 80g/m2 recycled paper, inch: 20 lb
recycled paper) is used. Mode 8-5 8-4
When humid paper causes uneven image, select 2 minutes (Japan) 0 0
“humid paper 1/2/3”. 3 minutes (Inch and Metric series) 0 1
Mode 7-7 7-6 7-5 4 minutes 1 0
No specification 0 0 0 10 minutes 1 1
64 g/m2 standard paper
0 0 1 4 7255/7272
(Japan)
20 lb standard paper (USA) 0 1 0 Mode 8-5 8-4
80g/m2 standard paper 80 seconds
0 1 1 (Japan, High temperature and
(Europe)
Humid paper 1 (Japan) 1 0 0 high humidity)
Humid paper 2 (USA) 100 seconds
1 0 1
(Japan, Except for high tempera-
Humid paper 3 (Europe) 1 1 0
ture and high humidity)
User paper 1 1 1 180 seconds 0 0
*14 Fixing roller initial rotation (Inch and Metric series, High tem-
Fixing may be insufficient if the temperature of perature and high humidity)
the place where the machine is installed is low. 150 seconds
To prevent this, increase the warm-up time (fix- (Inch and Metric series, Except for
ing roller initial rotation time) to allow the fixing high temperature and high humid-
roller to be evenly warmed up. This bit specifies ity)
the condition(s) under which initial rotation of the 2 minutes 0 1
fixing roller is required. 3 minutes 1 0
• Low temperature: Initial rotation of the fixing 4 minutes 1 1
roller is carried out only under the low temper-
ature condition. *16 Message switching
• Low and normal temperatures: Initial rotation Mode 9-3 9-2
of the fixing roller is carried out under low and Please insert key counter. 0 0
normal temperature conditions.
Please insert copy card. 0 1
• Low, normal, and high temperatures: Initial
rotation of the fixing roller is carried out under Please insert coin. 1 0
low, normal, and high temperature conditions. Please insert key counter. 1 1

25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
*17 Copy count limit *20 Transfer/separation out put for high-quality
Mode 9-7 9-6 9-5 9-4 paper
No limit 0 0 0 0 These bits are used when “High-quality” is
1 copy 0 0 0 1 selected for “Paper type/special size setting” in
3 copies 0 0 1 0 the key operator mode.
When “No specification” is selected, output data
5 copies 0 0 1 1
by paper size (metric or inch system) (metric:
9 copies 0 1 0 0
64g/m2 standard paper, Inch: 20 lb standard
10 copies 0 1 0 1
paper) is used.
20 copies 0 1 1 0
30 copies 0 1 1 1 4 Mode 10-7 10-6 10-5 10-4
50 copies 1 0 0 0 No specification 0 0 0 0
99 copies 1 0 0 1 64 g/m2 (16 lb) paper
0 0 0 1
250 copies 1 0 1 0 for printing press
No limit 1 0 1 1 80g/m2 (20 lb) paper
No limit 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
for printing press
No limit 1 1 0 1 Copied backing
No limit 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
papers (7255/7272)
No limit 1 1 1 1
*21 Size detection 4
*18 Page memory allocation when powered
Destination Mode 13-4 13-3
Mode 10-1 10-0
Metric series A5R 0 0
No allocation 0 0
B6R 0 1
32 MB (default for DP65) 0 1
Inch series 5.5 x 8.5R 1 0
64 MB 1 0
*22 F4 size detection
*19 Page memory allocation when starts
When memory overflow occurs in a mode where Mode 13-6 13-5
page memory is used, this bit allocates page 8 x 13 0 0
memory at the start of job to print out copied 8.25 x 13 0 1
paper, the data of which was already read in the 8.125 x 13.25 1 0
memory. 8.5 x 13 1 1
Page memory quantity differs as in the following
table, according to the number of gradation. *23 Maximum number of sheets that can be stapled
1 bit ED 18 MB (11x17 x 2) Mode 15-2 15-1
2 bit ED 36 MB (11x17 x 2) 50 sheets 0 0
45 sheets 0 1
Mode 10-2
40 sheets 1 0
No allocation 0
35 sheets 1 1
Allocated 1
*24 FNS alarm stop SW
When “Allocated” is selected by DIP switch 10-0
Mode 15-4 15-3
or 10-1 with power supply ON, this setting has
priority. Stop immediately after detection 0 0
Stop at end of copy after detection 0 1
No alarm stop 1 0
No alarm stop 1 1

1-18
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 1-18 ADDITION
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
*25 Selection of area to be erased in non-original *28 Fixing temperature setting switch over
area automatic erasure This setting is performed to change fixing tem-
These bits are used to make a setting associated perature when fixing is insufficient or paper curl
with the non-original automatic erasure mode is excessive.
(application function). This setting is effective only when standard
Mode 16-6 16-5 paper is used. Therefore, it is not applied when
thick or thin paper is used or temperature is spec-
Standard 0 0
ified in power mode.
Dark original 0 1 • Standard Standard setting value
Coping with light interfer- • Standard+α Set when fixing is insufficient
1 0
ence • Standard-α Set when paper curl is excessive
Mode 19-3 19-2 19-1
*26 Weekly timer summer time setting
Standard 0 0 0
Mode 17-3 17-2 17-1 17-0
Standard+5°C 0 0 1
0 minute 0 0 0 0 Standard+10°C 0 1 0
10 minutes 0 0 0 1 Standard+15°C 0 1 1
20 minutes 0 0 1 0 Standard-5°C 1 0 0
50 minutes 0 1 0 1 Standard+20°C 1 1 1
60 minutes 0 1 1 0
*29 IP scanner default resolution
70 minutes 0 1 1 1
Mode 19-7 19-6
80 minutes 1 0 0 0 400dpi 0 0
90 minutes 1 0 0 1 600dpi 0 1
100 minutes 1 0 1 0 200dpi 1 0
110 minutes 1 0 1 1 300dpi 1 1
120 minutes 1 1 0 0
*30 Number of punched holes
130 minutes 1 1 0 1
Mode 22-2 22-1
140 minutes 1 1 1 0 2 holes (Japan) 0 0
150 minutes 1 1 1 1 3 holes or 2 and 3 holes
0 1
(Inch area)
*27 Density selection for scanning tab paper
The higher the brightness level, the higher the 4 holes or 2 and 4 holes
1 0
density. (Metric area)
Mode 17-6 17-5 17-4

80 (brightness level) 0 0 0
40 0 0 1
60 0 1 0
100 0 1 1
120 1 0 0
160 1 0 1
200 1 1 0
255(not clipped) 1 1 1

25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
*31 Image density selection (toner density selection *33 Maximum number of sheets with z-folding
of developer) (main tray)
These bits set the toner density of developer by
Mode 24-5 24-4
changing toner supply threshold and developing
Up to 50 sheets 0 0
sleeve rotation speed with image density
unchanged. Up to 40 sheets 0 1
Decrease toner density when the image is gray Up to 30 sheets 1 0
background or toner is scattered. Increase toner Up to 20 sheets 1 1
density when the image is unevenly transferred
or white spots occur. *34 Maximum number of sheets with z-folding + sta-
pling
Mode 23-3 23-2
Standard toner density 0 0 Mode 24-7 24-6
Approx. 0.75% up 0 1 Up to 5 sheets 0 0
Approx. 0.75% down 1 0 Up to 8 sheets 0 1
Approx. 1.5% down 1 1 Up to 10 sheets 1 0
Up to 3 sheets 1 1
Note: There are three DIP switches to change
the image density : 5-0/1 (toner concen- *35 Image density selection (laser PWM) for IP
tration threshold), 5-2/3 (lase PWM), and Mode 8-1 8-0
23-2/3 (toner density of developer). The Normal (235) 0 0
priority of order of these adjustment are
Dark (255) 0 1
as follows:
(1) Laser PWM Lighter (175) 1 0
(2) Toner density of developer Lightest (150) 1 1
(3) Toner concentration threshold
*36 Countermeasure for memory overflow during IP
printing
*32 Image's gray background control at power ON
When copier stops due to paper empty and so on
If an image's gray background problem occurs
during large amount printing from IP without
while making about 100 copies after power ON
reserved print, memory overflow will occur on
(the fixing temperature is 50°C or lower), set bits
copier, and then time out will occur on PC. When
0, 1, 3, 5, 6, and 7 of DIPSW27 to 1.
remaining capacity of E-RDH memory is
Note: When this setting is used, be sure to set reached to the specified amount, the transmis-
six bits to 1 all together. And never set bits sion speed from IP to E-RDH memory will be
2 and 4 of DIPSW27 to 1. delayed to gain time until memory overflow
4 7255/7272 models enable to set the control time occurs.
of DIPSW27-5/6 (turning-ON control of toner
Mode 29-2 29-1
recycle MC during drum/developer rotation).
No cuuntermeasure 0 0
Mode 27-6 27-5 Remaining capacity 10% 0 1
None 0 0
Remaining capacity 20% 1 0
30 seconds 0 1
Remaining capacity 30% 1 1
45 seconds 1 0
60 seconds 1 1

1-20
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 *37 Fixing linear velocity adjustment
To protect from transfer misalignment, the fixing
linear velocity can be adjusted to the convey-
ance linear velocity.
Mode 33-3 33-2 33-1 33-0
0% 0 0 0 0
-0.2% 0 0 0 1
-0.4% 0 0 1 0
-0.6% 0 0 1 1
-0.8% 0 1 0 0
-1.0% 0 1 0 1
-1.2% 0 1 1 0
-1.4% 0 1 1 1
-1.6% 1 0 0 0
+0.2% 1 0 0 1
+0.4% 1 0 1 0
+0.6% 1 0 1 1
+0.8% 1 1 0 1
+1.0% 1 1 0 1
+1.2% 1 1 1 0
+0.4% 1 1 1 1

1-20-1
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[4] Setting the Paper Size

When the LCT paper type is changed, it must be stored
in the main body. This setting is effective when an
optional LCT is added.
Select a paper size among standard, non-standard
paper sizes. After selecting a tray size, specify a paper
size.
4 Note: In 7255/7272 models, when tray 1 or 2 is
selected, [Non STD size] or [Wide size
paper] are not displayed.
1. Setting the standard size

Step Operation
2 [Memory setting mode menu Screen]
Select " 2 Paper size setting".
4 3 [Paper size setting mode Screen]
Select necessary tray and press the
STD SIZE key.
4 Press the or button to select
a paper size.
5 Press the OK key to finish setting.To
cancel the new setting, press the
CANCEL key, Pressing either key will
display the Memory setting mode menu
Screen again.

1-20-2
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
2. Setting the non-standard size 3. Setting the wide paper
Step Operation Step Operation
1 Enter the 25 mode. 1 Enter the 25 mode.
2 [Memory setting mode menu Screen] 2 [Memory setting mode menu Screen]
Select " 2 Tray Size Setting." Select " 2 Paper size setting."
4 3 [Paper size setting mode Screen] 4 3 [Paper size setting mode Screen]
Select necessary tray and press the Select necessary tray and press the
Non STD size key. Wide size paper key.
4 [Paper size input Screen] 4 [Paper size selecting Screen]
Press the key for specifying the main Press the or key to select a
(vertical) scanning direction to highlight
wide paper size.
it.
5 Input size key.
5 Press the or key or numeric
keys to enter the size in the main (verti- 6 [Paper size input Screen]
cal)scanning direction. Max. 314 mm Press the key for specifying the main
(vertical) scanning direction to highlight
6 Press the key for specifying the sub (hor-
it.
izontal) scanning direction to highlight it.
keys to enter the size in the main (verti-
keys to enter the size in the sub (hori-
cal) scanning direction. Max. 314 mm
zontal) scanning direction. Max. 223
mm(LT-402), 459mm(LT-412) 8 Press the button for specifying the sub
(horizontal) scanning direction to high-
8 Press the OK key to finish setting. light it.
To cancel the new setting, press the 9 Press the or key or numeric
CANCEL key.
keys to enter the size in the sub (hori-
Pressing either key will display the Mem- zontal) scanning direction. Max.
ory setting mode menu Screen again. 223mm(LT-402), 459mm(LT-412)
10 Press the OK key to finish setting.
To cancel the new setting, press the
CANCEL key.
Pressing either key will display the Mem-
ory setting mode menu Screen again.
Reference 1:
Each time the current tray size is changed on this
screen, the new setting will be written into the
non-volatile memory.

1-21
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[5] PM Count Resetting [6] Setting the PM Cycle

Care should be taken not to reset the PM count by mis- This function allows you to change the PM cycle.
take.
Caution: The PM cycle is factory-set. Use this
Step Operation function to change the factory-set PM
1 Enter the 25 mode. cycle.
2 [Memory setting mode menu Screen] Step Operation
Select " 3 PM count". 1 Enter the 25 mode.
3 [PM count/cycle Screen] 2 [Memory setting mode menu Screen]
Press the COUNT RESET key. Select " 3 PM count".
4 [Reset Confirmation Screen] 3 [PM count/cycle Screen]

Press the YES key.The PM count is Press the PM Cycle Setting key.
reset and the start date is input automat- 4 After making sure that three digits of the
ically. cycle value are displayed in reverse
Pressing the NO key closes the Reset video, enter a desired cycle value using
numeric keys.
Confirmation screen at once.
Only the three digits of the cycle value
5 Press the OK key to finish setting. can be entered. The entered digits will
To cancel the new setting, press the be shifted to the left one after another.
CANCEL key. 5 Press the OK key to finish setting.

To cancel the new setting, press the
CANCEL key.
1-22
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[7] Collecting Data 4 In the case of the 7255/7272
This function allows you to view various data retained No. Data Type Pre-operation
by the machine. Total count of each
1
paper size
Reference: The above data can also be viewed
using the data collection function of Copy count of each
2
the KRDS. paper size
Print count of each
3
1. Data that can be Viewed paper size
In the case of the 7155/7165 4 RADF count
No. Data Type Pre-operation 5 Scanner count
Total count of Pixel ratio of each
1 6
each paper size section
Copy count of
2 7 Pixel ratio ranking list
each paper size
JAM data of time Enter the 25
Print count of 8
3 series mode, select " 1
each paper size
9 JAM count Software DIPSW
4 RADF count
Count of each copy Setting", and set
Pixel ratio of each 10
5 mode bit 1 of address
section 30-1 to 1. (Note 1)
11 SC count
JAM count of each
JAM data of time Enter the 25 12
7 section
series mode, select " 1
SC count of each sec-
8 JAM count Software DIPSW 13
tion
Setting", and set
Count of each copy
9 bit 1 of address
mode Note: When bit 1 of DIP switch 30-1 is set to 0,
30-1 to 1. (Note 1)
only collected data 1 to collected data 7
10 SC count
can be viewed.
JAM count of each
11
section
2. Viewing Collecting Data No.1 to No.6
SC count of each sec-
12 Step Operation
tion
Note: When bit 1 of DIP switch 30-1 is set to 0, 2 [Memory setting mode menu Screen]
only collected data 1 to collected data 6 Select " 4 Data collection".
can be viewed.
3 [Collecting data menu Screen]
4 Select the collecting data you want to
view by pressing one of numeric keys
1 to 6 (7155/7165), 1 to 7
(7255/7272).
4 [Individual data view Screen]
View the selected data by scrolling the
screen using the and keys.
5 Press the RETURN key to return to the

1-23
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
3. Viewing Collecting Data No.7 to No.12

(7155/7165), No.8 to 13 (7255/7272)
Step Operation
Select " 1 Software DIP SW setting".
3 [Software DIP SW Setting Screen]
Set bit 1 of DIP switch 30-1 to 1.
Select " 4 Data Collection".
4 6 [Collecting data menu Screen]
Select the collected data you want to
view by pressing one of numeric keys
7 to 12 (7155/7165), 8 to 13
(7255/7272).
To select the key 11 or later press the
key.
If the key is pressed with key 11
displayed, the Collected Data Selection
screen containing keys 1 to 10
appears again.
7 [Individual data view Screen]
View the selected data by scrolling the
screen using the and keys.
(Note)
4 Note: On the Individual Data View screen

showing the JAM count of each section
(collected data 11 (7155/7165),
12 (7255/7272)) or SC count of each
section (collected data 12 (7155/7165),
13 (7255/7272)), the COUNT RESET
key appears.
Pressing the COUNT RESET key resets
the selected data count.

1-24
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4. Details on Display Data
(1) Collecting data No.1 to No.3: Total/copy/print counts of each paper size
4 KRDS parameter Destination
NO Maximum count Remarks
(B1, B6, B8) Japan Inch area Metric area
Not counted and 0 is
1 00 A2 17x22 A2
sent. (7255/7272)
2 01 A3 11x17 A3
3 02 B4 8.5x14 B4 (8K)
4 03 A4 8.5x11 A4
5 04 B5 5.5x8.5 B5 (16K)
6 05 A5 - A5
99999999
7 06 B6 - F4 All counters are
8 07 8.5x14 - - 8-digit counters.
9 08 8.5x11 A4 -
10 09 Special Special Special
11
(7255/ 0A Postcard - -
7272)
1. Each time a printed copy is ejected, the counter is incremented by 1 regardless of the paper size.
2. Any size other than paper sizes 1-9 is counted as Special size. (SEL/LEF are counted as the same size.)

1-25
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
(2) Collecting data No.4: RADF mode

KRDS
Maximum
NO parameter Items Remarks
count
(F0)
1 00 Number of originals fed in ADF mode All counters are 8-digit
2 01 Number of originals fed in RADF mode counters.
3 02 Number of originals fed in RDH mode
4 03 Number of originals fed in RRDH mode
5 04 Number of originals fed in LDF mode
sent.
6 05 Number of originals fed in CFF mode
7 06 Number of 1-sided originals fed in SDF mode
8 07 Number of mixed originals fed in ADF mode All counters are 8-digit
9 08 Number of mixed originals fed in RADF mode 99999999 counters.
10 09 Number of originals fed in 2in1 mode
sent.
11 0A Number of 1-sided Z-folded mode original fed All counters are 8-digit
12 0B Number of 2-sided Z-folded mode original fed counters.
13 0C Number of 2-sided originals fed in SDF mode
sent.
14 0D
15 0E Undefined
16 0F
1. The counter is incremented each time one original side has been scanned in each mode.
2. Counters 1 and 2 count original sides independently of counters 3-7.
4 (3) Collecting data No. 5 (7155/7165), No.6 (7255/7272): Pixel ratio of each section *1
This allows checking the average pixel ratio of 5000 prints for latest 30 data.
4 (4) Collecting data No. 6 (7155/7165), No.7 (7255/7272): Pixel ratio ranking list *1
This allows checking pixel ratio data, number of prints, transfer paper size, mode, and date for the top 15 job
data ranked from highest rates of pixel ratio.
The pixel ratio rank list is allowed to contain only those jobs which have five or more copies, so that jobs that
have made erroneous copies will be excluded from the list.
4 (5) Collecting data No. 7 (7155/7165), No.8 (7255/7272): JAM data of time series
A jam code, total count, date and time of occurrence, tray type, paper size, and magnification can be dis-
played for the latest 100 jams.
*1 This pixel ratio is the theoretical value obtained by converting the black dot area on the image data and
the area of the transfer paper, therefore it is different from the black ratio obtained by the actual printing.

1-26
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 (6) Collecting data No.8 (7155/7165), No.9 (7255/7272): JAM count / Collecting data No.11 (7155/7165), No.12
(7255/7272): JAM count of each section (can be reset)
Description of JAM Jam
KRDS Code displayed position
param- when display of display Maximum Counting
NO jam code is
eter Location of jam on oper- count condition
(J0) selected by ation
25DIPSW panel
1 00 By-pass paper feed 10-1 6
2 01 10-2 6
3 02 Tray 1 paper feed 11-1 1
4 03 11-2 1
6 05 12-2 2
8 07 13-2 3
10 09 (7255/7272 only) 14-2 4
11 0A LCT paper feed 15-1 5
12 0B 15-2 5
Paper feed conveyance (com-
13 0C 17-1 9
mon to all trays)
14 0D Paper feed conveyance (tray 1) 17-2 7
Paper feed conveyance
15 0E 17-3 7
(tray 2/3/4)(7255/7272 only)
16 0F Paper feed conveyance (tray 2) 17-4 7
17 10 Paper feed conveyance (tray 3) 17-5 7
18 11 Paper feed conveyance (tray 4) 17-6 7 All counts are
999999
19 12 (7255/7272 only) 17-7 7 6-digit counters.
20 13 LCT 17-8 8
21 14 Drum 21-1 10
22 15 Second paper feed conveyance 31-1 9
23 16 31-2 10
24 17 32-1 11
25 18 32-2 11
26 19 Fixing / Exit 32-3 11
27 1A 32-4 11
28 1B 32-5 11
29 1C 92-1 12
30 1D 92-2 12
31 1E ADU 93-1 13
32 1F 94-1 13
33 20 94-2 13
34 21 Vertical conveyance door 19-1 -
35 22 LCT 19-2 -
36 23 Front door 51-1 -
37 24 FNS 71-1 -
38 25 71-2 -

1-27
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT

NO jam code is
25DIPSW panel
39 26 61-1 -
40 27 61-2 -
41 28 62-1 14
42 29 62-2 14
43 2A 62-3 14
44 2B 62-4 14
45 2C 62-5 14
46 2D 62-6 14
47 2E ADF 62-7 14
48 2F 62-8 14
49 30 62-9 14
50 31 62-10 14
51 32 63-1 15
52 33 63-2 15
53 34 63-3 15
54 35 63-4 15
55 36 63-5 15
56 37 72-16 16
57 38 72-17 16
58 39 72-18 16
59 3A 72-19 16
60 3B 72-20 16
61 3C 72-21 16
62 3D 72-22 17 All counts are
999999
63 3E FNS 72-23 17 6-digit counters.
64 3F 72-24 18
65 40 72-25 18
66 41 72-26 18
67 42 72-27 16
68 43 72-28 16
69 44 72-29 16
70 45 72-30 16
71 46 72-32 19
72 47 - 72-33 19
73 48 72-34 19
74 49 PI 72-35 17
75 4A 72-38 20
76 4B 72-39 20
77 4C PZ 72-40 20
78 4D 72-41 20
79 4E 72-42 20
80 4F PK 72-43 16
81 50 72-44 20
82 51 PZ 72-45 20
83 52 72-46 20
84 53 72-47 20
85 54 FNS 72-48 18

25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
NO jam code is
25DIPSW panel
86 55 72-49 17
87 56 PI 72-50 17
88 57 72-51 17
89 58 72-81 16
90 59 FNS 72-82 16
91 5A 72-83 16 All counts are
999999
92 5B 72-90 16 6-digit counters.
93 5C 72-60 20
94 5D 72-61 20
95 5E PZ 72-62 20
96 5F 72-63 20
97 60 71-3 -
1. When a jam occurs, the associated counter is incremented by 1 (Static jams are not counted.)

25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 (7) Collecting Data No.7 (7155/7165), No.10 (7255/7272):Count of each copy mode
KRDS Maximum
NO parameter Item count Counting condition
(F1)
1 00 1-1 mode
2 01 1-2 mode
3 02 2-1 mode
4 03 2-2 mode
5 04 ADF1-1 mode
6 05 ADF1-2 mode
7 06 Mixed original mode
8 07 Index original
9 08 Z-folded original mode
10 09 LEF/portrait, SEF/landscape normal set
11 0A LEF/landscape, SEF/portrait normal set
12 0B LEF/portrait, SEF/landscape reverse set All counters are 8-digit
13 0C LEF/landscape, SEF/portrait reverse set counters.
14 0D Auto (text/photo)
15 0E Text
16 0F Photo
17 10 Pencil
18 11 Non STD size
19 12 1 staple (upper-left)
20 13 1 staple (upper-right)
21 14 2 staples (left side)
22 15 2 staples (top side)
Stapled at left (7155/7165), stapled at both sides
23 16 (7255/7272) 99999999
24 17 Stapled at right Not available (7255/7272)
25 18 Stapled on top All counters are 8-digit
26 19 Three-holding counters.
27 1A Stitch and fold
28 1B Folding
Main tray: Group Not counted at group sta-
29 1C pling (7255/7272)
30 1D Main tray: Sort All counters are 8-digit
31 1E Main tray: Non sort counters.
32 1F Sub-tray: Group (FACE DOWN)
33 20 Sub-tray: Group (FACE UP)
34 21 Sub-tray: Sort (FACE DOWN) Not available (7255/7272)
35 22 Sub-tray: Sort (FACE UP)
36 23 Sub-tray: Non sort (FACE DOWN) All counters are 8-digit
37 24 Sub-tray: Non sort (FACE UP) counters.
38 25 Cover sheet
39 26 Trimmer Not available (7255/7272)
40 27 Real size copy All counters are 8-digit
41 28 Preset magnification E4 counters.
42 29 Preset magnification E3
43 2A Preset magnification E2
44 2B Preset magnification E1
45 2C Preset magnification R4

1-30
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
KRDS Maximum
(F1)
46 2D Preset magnification R3
47 2E Preset magnification R2
48 2F Preset magnification R1
49 30 User lens mode 1
52 33 ZOOM
53 34 Vertical/Horizontal zoom
54 35 Maximum ZOOM
55 36 Minimum ZOOM
56 37 APS
57 38 AMS
58 39 Auto density (EE)
59 3A User density level 1
60 3B User density level 2
61 3C Interrupted copy
62 3D Automatic image rotation cancellation
63 3E Inter sheet
64 3F Chapter control
65 40 Combination
66 41 Booklet copy
67 42 OHP interleave (copy)
68 43 OHP interleave (blank) All counters are 8-digit
99999999 counters.
69 44 Image insert
70 45 Dual Page
71 46 Program job
72 47 Non-image area erase
73 48 Reverse image
74 49 Auto repeat
75 4A Manual repeat
76 4B STD size repeat
77 4C Frame erasure
78 4D Fold erasure
79 4E Auto layout
80 4F Full-image Area
81 50 Image Shift
82 51 Reduction shift
83 52 Overlay
84 53 Water mark
85 54 Stamp
86 55 Date / Time
87 56 Page
88 57 Numbering
89 58 Set quantity 1
90 59 Set quantity 2-5
91 5A Set quantity 6-10
1-31
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
KRDS Maximum
(F1)
Set quantity 11 or more All counters are 8-digit
92 5B counters.
Energized time of power condition 1 Total period of time during
which image control board
93 5C is energized. Total period
of time during the opera-
tion of CPU.
which remote power sup-
94 5D ply 2 is on.
1 is counted per minutes.
95 5E Unused
which remote power sup-
96 5F ply 3 is on.
1 is counted per minutes.
Time during low power mode Total period of time during
which low power mode is
97 60 selected. The count is
incremented by 1 per
minute.
Time during WUP Total period of time during
which fixing unit heater is
ON when the fixing is
98 61 UNREADY. The count is
incremented by 1 per sec-
ond. Data is output per
minute.
Time during front door open Total period of time during
99999999 which front door is open.
99 62 The count is incremented
by 1 per second. Data is
output per minute.
Ope. time in 1 side straight exit Total time from start to end
100 63 of printing. The count is
Ope. time in 1 side reverse exit incremented by 1 per sec-
101 64 ond. Data is output per
minute. (Halt time caused
Ope. time in 2 side print by JAM stop, etc. is not
102 65
included.)
Operation time in ADF mode Total operation time of
ADF. The count is incre-
103 66 mented by 1 per second.
Data is output per minute.
Morning Correction count The count is incremented
by 1 each time correction
104 67 is made before starting
work in the morning.
Time during APS sensor on Total period of time during
which APS sensor is ON.
105 68 The count is incremented
by 1 per second. Data is
output per minute.
106 69 N of main tray used jobs
107 6A N of sub tray used jobs
108 6B N of stapling folding used jobs Number of jobs
109 6C N of folding jobs
110 6D N of ADF NF occurred
1-32
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
KRDS Maximum
4
(F1)
N of ADF special error 1 occurred Original size detection
111 6E error occurrence count
N of ADF special error 2 occurred Next original information
112 6F error occurrence count
N of ADF special error 3 occurred Mixed loading prohibited
113 70 original size error occur-
rence count
N of Scanner scanned The count is incremented by
114 71 1 each time Platen Mode
Copy button is pressed.
115 72 N of electrode cleaned
N of memory overflow When memory is insufficient
116 73 for No.124+125+126 +HDD
reading (7255/7272)
117 74 N of fixing alarm occurred
118 75 N of no toner stop occurred
119 76 N of AGC retry
120 77 N of sub scan beam correct error
121 78 N of mis-centering correct error
122 79 N of ADF distortion adjust error
123 7A N of ADF distortion data error
Compression memory overflow When memory is insuffi-
cient for scanner compres-
124 7B sion/printer compression
(7255/7272)
Page memory overflow (scan) When memory is insuffi-
125 7C cient for printer data
99999999 receiving (7255/7272)
Page memory overflow (print) When memory is insuffi-
126 7D cient for page expansion
(7255/7272)
127 7E FNS alarm (tray/trimming)
128 7F FNS alarm (staple)
129 80 Scanner count Not available (7255/7272)
130 81 N of ADF special error 4 occurred Ready-time out error
131 82 Store for HDD (Sync. with Copying)
132 83 Store for HDD (SRV mode scan-> HDD)
133 84 Store for PC (SRV mode scan-> HDD)
134 85 Store for PC (SRV mode HDD-> PC)
135 86 Recall from HDD (SRV mode HDD)
136 87 Recall from PC (SRV mode PC)
137 88 Image edit count by SRV
138 89 Wide paper count (A3W or 11x17W)
139 8A Wide paper count (A4W or 8.5x11W)
140 8B Wide paper count (A4RW or 8.5x11RW)
141 8C Wide paper count (A5W or 5.5x8.5W)
142 8D Wide paper count (Others)
143 8E Punch
144 8F Z-fold
145 90 Unused
146 91 Mixplex (1-sided)
147 92 Mixplex (2-sided)

1-33
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 (8) Collecting data No.10 (7155/7165), No.11 (7255/7272): SC count / Collecting data No.12 (7155/7165), No.13
(7255/7272): SC count of each section (can be reset)
KRDS Trouble Maximum
NO parameter code Description count Remarks
(E0)
1 00 13 1 Paper feed MT EM
2 01 13 2 LCT conveyance MT EM
3 02 18 10 Tray 1 up MT EM
4 03 18 11 Tray 1 up error
5 04 18 20 Tray 2 up MT EM error
7 06 18 30 Tray 3 up MT EM error
9 08 18 40 Tray 4 up MT EM error (7255/7272 only)
10 09 18 41 Tray 4 up error (7255/7272 only)
11 0A 18 50 LCT up/down MT EM
12 0B 18 51 LCT up/down error
13 0C 18 60 By-pass tray up error
14 0D 21 1 Charging corona unit cleaning MT error 1
15 0E 21 2 Charging corona unit cleaning MT error 2
16 0F 21 3 Charging corona unit cleaning MT error 3
17 10 21 4 Charging corona unit cleaning MT error 4
Transfer/separation corona unit cleaning
18 11 21 5 MT error 1
19 12 21 6 MT error 2
20 13 21 7 MT error 3
Transfer/separation corona unit cleaning 9999 All counters are 4-
21 14 21 8 MT error 4 digit counters.
22 15 22 1 Developing suction fan lock
23 16 22 2 Cleaner cooling fan lock
24 17 23 1 Toner bottle MT EM
25 18 23 2 Developing MT EM
26 19 23 3 Drum MT error
27 1A 28 1 Charging EM
28 1B 28 2 Transfer EM
29 1C 28 3 Separation EM
30 1D 29 1 Maximum density correction error 1
31 1E 29 2 Maximum density correction error 2
32 1F 29 3 Maximum density correction error 3
33 20 29 4 γ correction error 1
36 23 29 7 Dot diameter correction error 1
37 24 29 8 Dot diameter correction error 2
38 25 32 1 Conveyance suction fan lock
Main cooling fan/2 lock (7155/7165)
39 26 32 2 Paper exit fan/F lock (7255/7272)
40 27 32 3 Paper exit fan/R lock
Paper exit fan/F lock (7155/7165)
41 28 32 4 Main cooling fan/2 lock (7255/7272)

1-34
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
(E0)
42 29 32 1 Second paper feed MT EM
Fixing upper roller high temperature error
43 2A 33 1 detection
Fixing upper roller high temperature error
44 2B 34 2 detection
Fixing upper roller low temperature error
45 2C 34 1 detection 1
46 2D 35 2 detection 2
47 2E 35 3 detection 3
48 2F 35 1 Fixing upper roller sensor error detection
49 30 36 2 Fixing lower roller sensor error detection
50 31 36 1 Scanner HP return error
51 32 41 2 Polygon MT error
52 33 41 1 Scanner cooling fan lock
53 34 42 2 Write section cooling fan lock
54 35 42 1 APC error
55 36 46 2 Scanner FIFO error
56 37 46 3 Printer FIFO error
57 38 46 5 Compressed input/output FIFO error
58 39 46 6 Expansion error
59 3A 46 8 Index sensor error
60 3B 46 10 No margin of scanner control All counters are 4-
9999 digit counters.
61 3C 46 11 No margin of printer control
62 3D 46 12 SVV length error
63 3E 46 13 Scanner time-out
64 3F 46 14 Printer time-out
65 40 46 15 Expansion device access error
66 41 46 16 Compression device access error
67 42 46 17 Filter factory error
68 43 46 19 Memory device access error on data flow
69 44 46 21 Data flow memory mode time-out
70 45 46 23 SVV off error
71 46 46 24 Black/white collection error
72 47 46 25 AOC/AOG Level adjustment error
73 48 46 26 Invalid correction data by resolution
Density conversion (γ curve generation
74 49 46 27 error)
75 4A 46 29 Calibration start error
76 4B 46 30 Calibration abend
77 4C 46 31 APC initial sampling error
78 4D 46 32 MPC error
79 4E 46 33 Sub-scan beam correction error
80 4F 46 34 Unfinished Calibration
81 50 46 35 Continuous copy page area error

25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT

(E0)
82 51 46 40 HDD initialization trouble
83 52 46 41 HDD JOB save error
84 53 46 42 HDD periodic cleaning error
85 54 46 43 HDD access failure
86 55 46 50 Tandem communication error
87 56 46 51 Tandem image communication error
88 57 46 64 PWMg curve generation failure
89 58 46 80 Insufficient/broken message queue
90 59 46 81 Invalid message or method parameter
91 5A 46 82 Invalid task
92 5B 46 83 Invalid event
93 5C 46 90 Memory access error
94 5D 46 91 Header access error
95 5E 46 99 DIMM initialization error
96 5F 49 1 IP board failure
97 60 49 2 IP communication error
98 61 49 3 Direct Memory Access error
99 62 49 4 IP HDD failure
100 63 49 5 IP fan lock
101 64 50 1 Main body drive serial input error 1
All counters are 4-
104 67 50 4 Main body drive serial input error 4 9999 digit counters.
Drive board communication reception
105 68 50 5 error detection
Image control board communication con-
106 69 50 10 nection error
Detection error of image control board
107 6A 50 11 communication serial reception error
108 6B 52 1 Power supply cooling fan lock
109 6C 52 2 Main body cooling fan/1 lock
110 6D 53 1 Fixing MT EM
111 6E 56 2 Operation section communication error
112 6F 62 1 ADF fan lock
113 70 70 1 FNS communication error
FNS communication start acknowledge-
114 71 70 2 ment error detection error
115 72 77 1 Shift driving error
116 73 77 2 Tray up/down driving error
117 74 77 3 Alignment plate/U drive error
118 75 77 4 Exit roller drive error
119 76 77 5 Exit driving error
120 77 77 6 Stapler movement driving error
121 78 77 7 Clincher rotation driving error
122 79 77 8 Stapler rotation driving error
123 7A 77 11 Stapler/F error
1-36
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
(E0)
124 7B 77 12 Stapler/R error
125 7C 77 13 Clincher/F driving error
126 7D 77 14 Clincher/F driving error
127 7E 77 21 Stopper motor drive error
128 7F 77 22 Alignment plate/L drive error
129 80 77 25 Folding knife motor drive error
130 81 77 26 Folding conveyance motor drive error
131 82 77 31 Trimmer conveyance drive error
132 83 77 32 Trimmer conveyance error
133 84 77 33 Trimmer rear end stopper drive error
134 85 77 34 Trimmer rear end release motor driving error
135 86 77 35 Trimmer press motor driving error
136 87 77 36 Trimmer pusher motor driving error
137 88 77 37 Trimmer holder motor driving error
138 89 77 41 Sheet feeder up motor driving error /L
139 8A 77 42 Sheet feeder up motor driving error /U
140 8B 77 43 Sheet feeder conveyance driving error
141 8C 77 52 Motor drive error for Z-fold stopper 1
142 8D 77 53 Motor drive error for Z-fold stopper 2
143 8E 77 54 Punch drive motor driving error
144 8F 77 81 Gate motor drive error
145 90 77 91 Sub-CPU reception error All counters are 4-
9999 digit counters.
146 91 77 92 Main CPU reception error
147 92 80 1 Printer control initial communication error
148 93 80 2 Printer control communication error
149 94 80 3 Operation panel communication error
150 95 80 1* Printer control ISW not written
151 96 80 21 VIF control ISW not written
152 97 80 30 ISW time-out error
153 98 80 31 ISW data error
154 99 80 32 ISW write error
155 9A 80 40 FNS with unwritten ISW
156 9B 80 41 ZU with unwritten ISW
157 9C 90 1 ADU drive serial input error 1
158 9D 90 2 ADU drive serial input error 2
159 9E 92 1 ADU cooling fan lock
160 9F 77 44 Punch shift motor driving error
161 A0 77 45 Unused
162 A1 77 46 Stacker fan driving error
Communication error between FNS and
163 A2 77 47 PK-120
164 A3 77 55 PZ punch shift motor driving error
165 A4 77 56 PZ conveyance motor fan driving error
166 A5 77 57 PZ punch motor driving error
1-37
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 KRDS
Trouble Maximum
NO parameter Description Remarks
code count
(E0)
PZ punch 2/3 (·4) hole switching motor
167 A6 77 58 driving error
All counters are 4-
9999
168 A7 22 3 Developer cooling fan lock (7255/7272 only) digit counters.
169 A8 23 4 PCL connection error (7255/7272 only)
Note: When DIP switch is set to 3-1-1, SC34, 35, are not counted
4 (9) Collecting data No.5 (7255/7272)
Maximum
NO KRDS parameter (F4) Description Remarks
count
Large size All counters are
1 01 99999999 8-digit counters.
1. Counted when the uploading is completed.

2. The threshold for large size is set by 25-mode DIPSW26-1.

1-38
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 1-37-1 REPLACEMENT
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
Blank page

25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT

(Fixed Parts)
This function allows you to display or reset the copy
count for a fixed part or data.
Step Operation
Select “ 5 Parts counter.”
3 [Copy count of parts menu Screen]
Select “ 1 Count of special parts.”
4 [Copy count of special menu Screen]
Data numbers (No.), part names
(Name), and count values are displayed
in a list format.
Using and keys, select a part name.
To scroll the screen, use and keys.
5 Press the COUNT RESET key to reset
the count value of the part highlighted.
Copy count parts counter
KRDS
Maximum
NO para- Part name Part No. Counting condition
meter
count
1 00 Web unit *1 56AA-543 Count 1 per ejected paper for single sided, 2 for
double sided
2 01 Developer *1 56AA3060 25DIPSW8-6
3 02 OPC drum *1 56AA-220 =0: Count 1 per ejected paper for single sided, 2
4 03 Cleaning blade 56AA2010 for double sided
4 5 04 Toner reclaim roller 56AA-213 =1: For A3, 11x17, 8k, count 2 per ejected paper
unit assembly (7155/7165) for single sided, 4 for double sided
56QA-213
(7255/7272)
6 05 Charging blade 56AA2503 99999999
7 06 Charger cleaning 56AA-253
block for upper
assembly
8 07 Charger cleaning 56AA-254
block for lower
assembly
9 08 Drum separation claw 56AA2070
10 09 Discharging wire 56AA2609
*1. Caution: You must reset the counter when replace these parts, otherwise image failure may occur.

1-38
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
KRDS
4 Maximum
meter
count
11 0A Trans./sep. cleaning 56AA-264 25DIPSW8-6
assembly =0: Count 1 per ejected paper for single sided, 2
12 0B Fixing upper roller 56AA5305 for double sided
13 0C Fixing lower roller 55AA5306 =1: For A3, 11x17, 8k, count 2 per ejected paper
(7155/7165) for single sided, 4 for double sided
56AA5306
(7255/7272)
14 0D Fixing upper claw 56AA5427
15 0E Fixing lower claw 25BA5333
(7155/7165)
56QA5320
(7255/7272)
16 0F Heat insulate sleeve 45405339
(upper)
17 10 Upper roller bearing 45407504
18 11 Cleaning roller (7155/7165) 56AA5308
19 12 Toner control board 56AA-910
unit
20 13 Trans./sep. corona 56AA-260
unit (7155/7165) 99999999
56QA-260
(7255/7272)
21 14 Separation cleaning 56AA-267
assembly
22 15 Charging wire 56AA2509
23 16 Upper roller error 56AA8804
detection sensor
24 17 Ozone filter (7155/7165) 56FA7301
Ozone filter/M (7255/7272)
56QA1059
25 18 Charging corona unit 56AA-250
(7155/7165)
56QA-250
(7255/7272)
26 19 PCL assembly (7155/7165) 56AA-256
27 1A Developer 56AA-300
(7155/7156)
56QA-300
(7255/7272)
28 1B TSL cover assembly 56AA-387

1-39
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 KRDS
Maximum
meter
count
29 1C Tray 1 feed rubber 25AA4001 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 1 is
(7155/7165) ejected.
56AA-658
(7255/7272)
30 1D Tray 1 feed conv/rev 25SA4096
rubber
31 1E Tray 1 feed clutch 56AA8201
32 1F Tray 1 convey clutch 56AA8201
33 20 Tray 1 feed count 56AA-400
(7155/7165)
56QA-400
(7255/7272)
34 21 Tray 2 feed rubber 25AA4001 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 2 is
(7155/7165) ejected.
56AA-458
(7255/7272)
35 22 Tray 2 feed conv/rev 25SA4096
rubber
99999999
36 23 Tray 2 feed clutch 56AA8201
37 24 Tray 2 convey clutch 56AA8201
38 25 Tray 2 feed count 56AA-400
(7155/7165)
56QA-400
(7255/7272)
39 26 Tray 3 feed rubber 25AA4001 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 3 is
(7155/7165) ejected.
56AA-458
(7255/7272)
40 27 Tray 3 feed conv/rev 25SA4096
rubber
41 28 Tray 3 feed clutch 56AA8201
42 29 Tray 3 convey clutch 56AA8201
43 2A Tray 3 feed count 56AA-400
(7155/7165)
56QA-400
(7255/7272)

1-40
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 KRDS
Maximum
meter
count
44 2B Tray 4 feed rubber 56AA-458 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 4 is
(7255/7272 only) ejected.
45 2C Tray 4 feed conv/rev 25SA4096
rubber (7255/7272 only)
46 2D Tray 4 feed clutch 56AA8201
(7255/7272 only)
47 2E Tray 4 convey clutch 56AA8201
(7255/7272 only)
48 2F Tray 4 feed count 56QA-400
(7255/7272 only)
49 30 By-pass feed roller 55FA4233 1 is counted each time the paper from by-pass
50 31 By-pass conveyance/ 54004056 tray is ejected.
reverse roller
51 32 By-pass count 56AA-460
(7155/7165)
56QA-460
(7255/7272)
52 33 LCT feed roller 55VA-484 1 is counted each time the paper from LCT is
53 34 LCT conveyance/ 55VA-483 ejected.
reverse roller
54 35 LCT feed clutch 56AA8201 99999999
55 36 LCT conveyance 56AA8201
clutch
56 37 LCT feed count 13RJ/RE-050
(7155/7165)
57 38 Loop roller 56AA4251 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 1, tray
2, tray 3, tray 4 and LCT is ejected.
58 39 V-convey exit feed 56AA4408 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 2, tray
roller 3 and tray 4 is ejected.
59 3A V-convey feed roller/ 56AA4408 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 3 and
M tray 4 is ejected.
60 3B V-convey feed roller/ 56AA4408 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 4 is
L ejected.
61 3C V-convey feed clutch 56AA8201 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 2, tray
1 3, and tray 4 is ejected.
62 3D V-convey feed clutch 56AA8201 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 3 and
2 tray 4 is ejected.
63 3E Web solenoid 55VA8252 Every operation
(7155/7165)
56QA8251
(7255/7272)

1-41
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 KRDS
Maximum
meter
count
64 3F Registration clutch 56AA8201 1 is counted each time single side original is
ejected; 2 is counted each time double side
paper is ejected.
65 40 ADU preregistration 56AA8201 1 is counted each time double side paper is
clutch ejected (not counted for single side paper)
66 41 Resistration feed - 1 is counted each time single side original is
count ejected; 2 is counted each time double side orig-
inal is ejected.
67 42 Reverse exit count - 2 is counted each time single side paper is
ejected after being reversed. 0 is counted each
time single side paper is ejected straight. 1 is
counted each time bouble side paper is ejected.
68 43 ADU feed count - 1 is counted each time double side paper is
ejected (not counted for single side paper)
69 44 FNS up/down motor 129U8004 1 is counted each time the paper from FNS main
(FS-110/210 tray is ejected. 1 is counted each time a copy is
Old type/FS- ejected in stapling mode.
111)
56AA8001
(FS-110/
210 New
type)
70 45 FNS stapler/front 13QE4241 1 is counted each time a copy is ejected in sta-
99999999
(FS-110/210) pling front 1-point stapling, stapling 2-point sta-
13TQ4250 pling, or middle binding mode.
(FS-111)
71 46 FNS stapler/rear 12QE4241
(FS-110/210)
13TQ4250
(FS-111)
72 47 FNS shift motor 12QR-361 1 is counted each time even-numbered paper is
(FS-110/210) ejected.
13TR-356
(FS-111)
73 48 FNS exit opening 12QR-361 1 is counted each time large size stapling (A4R/
open/close motor 8.5x11R or larger) job starts. 1 is counted each
time paper is ejected from each section. 1 is
counted each time stitch and fold or folding job
starts.
74 49 FNS folding knife 120H8001 1 is counted each time one set of papers in sta-
motor pling/folding, folding, or three-holding mode is
ejected.
75 4A FNS By-pass SD 12QR-263 1 is counted each time one set of papers in DM
folding mode is ejected.
76 4B FNS DM gate SD 12QR-263 Counted each time one paper is ejected in three-
holding mode

1-42
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
KRDS
4 Maximum
meter
count
77 4C PI sheet feed clutch/U 13QN8201 Counted each time are paper is fed into PI/U
78 4D PI feed roller unit/A 50BA-574
79 4E PI feed roller unit/B 50BA-575
80 4F PI reverse robber unit 13QN-443
81 50 PI torque limiter 13QN4073
82 51 PI sheet feed clutch/L 13QN8201 Counted each time one paper is fed into PI/L
83 52 PI feed roller unit/A 50BA-574
84 53 PI feed roller unit/B 50BA-575
85 54 PI reverse robber unit 13QN-443
86 55 PI torque limiter 13QN4073
87 56 Trimmer knife 13LH1026 1 is counted each time knife movement is made
57 Punched holes 13NK5001 Number of ejected papers with the punch mode
88
(2 holes) selected
58 Punched holes 13NL5001
89
(3 holes)
59 Punched holes 13NM5001
90
(4 holes)
91 5A - - Not used
92 5B ADF feed roller 13QA4127 Number of originals passes in all modes
93 5C ADF Separation roller 13QA4104
5D ADF double-feed pre- 13QA4045
94
vention robber
5E ADF double-feed pre- 13QA4001 99999999
95
vention roller
5F ADF paper exit sole- 12QV8251 1 is counted each time one original passes in the
noid (7155/7165) double side or the mixed mode
96
13QA-407
(7255/7272)
60 ADF feed clutch 56AA8201 single side: Number of originals passes in every
single side mode count
97
double side: Number of originals passes in every
double side mode x3 counts
61 ADF reverse solenoid 12QV8251 1 is counted each time one original passes in the
(7155/7165) double side or the mixed mode
98
13QA-407
(7255/7272)
62 ADF pressure roller 25SA8265 2 is counted each time one original passes in the
release solenoid (7155/7165) double side or the mixed mode
99
13QA-406
(7255/7272)
63 Exposure ON time 55TA8301 Unit
(7155/7165)
100
56AA8301
(7255/7272)
101 64 Sub power switch 55GA8602 1 is counted each time sub power is switched off.
102 65 Door switch 40AA8501 1 is counted each time front door is opened.

1-43
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
KRDS
4 Maximum
meter
count
66 Drum separation claw 1 is counted each time a paper is ejected, 2 is
103 26NA8251
solenoid counted for double-sided.
67 Main power switch 1 is counted each time image control turns ON
(number of times CPU is activated from other
104 25AA8502
than sub power supply (SK/KRDS/SHUT OFF/
WT))
105 68 PI regist clutch 13QN8201 1 is counted each time PI sheet is ejected.
69 Punch motor Number of papers ejected when punch mode is
106 54008003
selected.
6A Ozone filter /S (7255/ 25DIPSW8-6
107 56QA1057
7272) =0: 1 is counted each time a paper is ejected for
6B Developer suction fil- single-sided, and 2 is counted for double-
ter (7255/7272) sided.
108 56QA7320 =1: For a3, 11x17, and 8K, 2 is counted each
time a paper is ejected for single-sided, and
4 is counted for double-sided.
6C Horizontal convey- 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 1 is
109 ance roller / right 56QA5705 ejected.
(7255/7272) 99999999
6D Horizontal convey-
110 ance roller / left (7255/ 56QA5706
7272)
6E Horizontal convey-
111 ance clutch / right 56AA8201
(7255/7272)
7F Horizontal convey-
112 ance clutch / right 56AA8201
(7255/7272)
70 Fixing decurler roller 25DIPSW8-6
113 56AA5307
(7255/7272) =0: 1 is counted each time a paper is ejected for
71 Fixing decurler bear- single-sided, and 2 is counted for double-
114 07AA7509 sided.
ing (7255/7272)
72 Fixing input gear =1: For a3, 11x17, and 8K, 2 is counted each
115 25BA7726 time a paper is ejected for single-sided, and
(7255/7272)
73 Fixing drive gear 4 is counted for double-sided.
116 56QA7721
(7255/7272)
124 7B
125 7C
126 7D
127 7E
128 7F

1-44
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[9] Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced 2. Changing the data on the Copy Count by
(Optional Parts) Parts to be Replaced (Optional Parts)
This function allows you to change the limit value, part
This function allows you to make the following settings
number, or part name for the desired optional copy
for an optional part or data:
count by parts to be replaced (optional parts).
1. Copy count resetting
2. Limit value setting Step Operation
3. Part number setting 1 Enter the 25 mode.
4. Part name setting [Memory setting mode menu Screen]
The above settings can be made for 30 data numbers, 2
Select the " 5 Parts counter".
No.1 to No.30.
The copy count is incremented by 1 for each side irre- [Copy count of part menu Screen]
spective of the paper size. 3
Select the " 2 Count of each parts".
1. Resetting the Copy Count by Parts to be [Copy count of each part Screen]
Replaced (Optional Parts) Data numbers (No.), part names
This function allows you to reset the copy count (Name), part numbers (P/N), and count/
by parts to be replaced (optional parts). limit values are displayed in a list format.
4 Using and keys, select a data
Step Operation
1 Enter the 25 mode. number.
[Memory setting mode menu Screen] To scroll the screen, use and
2
Select the " 5 Parts counter". keys.
[Copy count of part menu Screen] Press the Part Name Set, P/N Set, or
5
3 Limit Set key.
Select the " 2 Count of each parts".
[Data change screen by parts to be
[Copy count of each part Screen] replaced]
Data numbers (No.), part names
6 Press the Parts name , P/N set or
(Name), part numbers (P/N), and count/
limit values are displayed in a list format. Limit set key corresponding to the
4 Using and keys, select a part data you want to change.
name. Enter new data using alphabetic and
7
To scroll the screen, use and numeric keys.
keys. Perform steps 6 and 7 repeatedly to
8
change other data.
Press the COUNT RESET key to reset
5 Press the OK key to allow the new
the count value of the part highlighted.
data to take effect.
Press the RETURN key to return to the To cancel the new data, press the
6
Memory setting mode menu Screen. 9 CANCEL key.
Reference: If the copy count exceeds the limit, Pressing either key will display the Copy
the * mark appears to the left of the count by parts to be replaced (optional
limit value. parts) screen again.
[Data change screen by parts to be
replaced]
10
Press the RETURN key to return to
the Memory setting mode menu Screen.
1-43
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
Reference1: The characters entered in the data [10] Setting Passwords

field of each data item will be This function allows you to set the following pass-
shifted to the left one after another. words:
Reference2: When the number of entered char- 1. Key operator password (4 digits)
acters exceeds 10, the leftmost This password is required to enter the key oper-
character will disappear. ator mode.
2. EKC master key code (8 digits)
Reference3: Relationships between data num- This code is necessary when entering various
bers and KRDS parameters are EKC setting modes.
shown in the following table: 3. Weekly timer password (4 digits)
No. Parts P/N Count Limit This password is necessary when entering vari-
1 Z4:00 Z3:00 G0:00 H0:00 ous weekly timer setting modes.
2 Z4:01 Z3:01 G0:01 H0:01
Note: This password cannot be set if "Weekly
3 Z4:02 Z3:02 G0:02 H0:02
timer ON" is not specified for the weekly
4 Z4:03 Z3:03 G0:03 H0:03
timer in the key operator mode.
5 Z4:04 Z3:04 G0:04 H0:04
4. HDD management password (4 digits)
6 Z4:05 Z3:05 G0:05 H0:05
This password is necessary when entering the
7 Z4:06 Z3:06 G0:06 H0:06
HDD management modes in the key operator
8 Z4:07 Z3:07 G0:07 H0:07
mode while connecting the optional hard disk.
9 Z4:08 Z3:08 G0:08 H0:08
10 Z4:09 Z3:09 G0:09 H0:09 Step Operation
11 Z4:0A Z3:0A G0:0A H0:0A 1 Enter the 25 mode.
12 Z4:0B Z3:0B G0:0B H0:0B [Memory setting mode menu Screen]
13 Z4:0C Z3:0C G0:0C H0:0C 2
Select the " 6 Password setting".
14 Z4:0D Z3:0D G0:0D H0:0D
15 Z4:0E Z3:0E G0:0E H0:0E [Password setting mode Screen]
16 Z4:0F Z3:0F G0:0F H0:0F Select "key operator password (4 dig-
17 Z4:10 Z3:10 G0:10 H0:10 its)", "EKC master key code (8 digits)",
3
18 Z4:11 Z3:11 G0:11 H0:11 "Weekly timer password (4 digits)" or
19 Z4:12 Z3:12 G0:12 H0:12 "HDD management password (4 dig-
20 Z4:13 Z3:13 G0:13 H0:13 its)".
21 Z4:14 Z3:14 G0:14 H0:14 Enter a new password using numeric
22 Z4:15 Z3:15 G0:15 H0:15 4
keys.
23 Z4:16 Z3:16 G0:16 H0:16 Perform step 3 and 4 repeatedly to set
24 Z4:17 Z3:17 G0:17 H0:17 5
other passwords.
25 Z4:18 Z3:18 G0:18 H0:18
26 Z4:19 Z3:19 G0:19 H0:19 Press the OK key to allow the pass-
27 Z4:1A Z3:1A G0:1A H0:1A words to take effect.
28 Z4:1B Z3:1B G0:1B H0:1B To cancel the new passwords, press the
29 Z4:1C Z3:1C G0:1C H0:1C 6
CANCEL key. Pressing either key
30 Z4:1D Z3:1D G0:1D H0:1D
will display the Memory setting mode
menu Screen again.
Reference1: The digits entered in the data field

of each data item will be shifted to
the left one after another.
Reference2: When the number of entered digits

exceeds 4 or 8, the leftmost char-
acter will disappear.
1-44
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
Reference1: The digits entered in the data field [11] Setting the Telephone Number and/or
of each data item will be shifted to Fax Number of the Service Center
the left one after another.
This function allows you to set the telephone number
Reference2: When the number of entered digits and/or fax number of the service center displayed
exceeds 4 or 8, the leftmost char- when a service call occurs. The telephone number
acter will disappear. and/or fax number are/is also displayed as the basic
help topic "Contact Number of Service Center" on the
Reference3: Setting the key operator pass- user screen. This function is not related to the KRDS
word, weekly timer password, and functions; the telephone number and/or fax number
HDD management password to are/is just displayed on the screen.
"0000" allows you to use individual
Step Operation
modes without passwords. That
is, the menu screen of each mode 1 Enter the 25 mode.
appears directly without display- [Memory setting mode menu Screen]
ing the password input screen. 2 Select the " 7 Telephone number/FAX
number setting".
[Customer support TEL/FAX setting
Screen]
3 Select "Service center Telephone num-
ber (16 digits)" or "Service center Fax
number (16 digits)".
Enter the telephone or fax number using
4
numeric keys.
To set both telephone number and fax
5 numbers, perform steps 3 and 4 repeat-
edly.
Press the OK key to allow the tele-

phone number and/or fax number to take
effect.
6 To cancel the telephone number and/or
fax number, press the CANCEL key.
Reference1: If the length of a telephone or fax

number is shorter than 16 digits,
use a hyphen(s) to make the over-
all length 16 digits.
Reference2: The entered digits will be shifted to

the left one after another, starting
at the right end.
1-45
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[12] Setting the Serial Number [13] Displaying the ROM Version
This function allows you to display, set, or change the This function allows you to display the versions of the
serial number of the main body or option. installed ROMs.
Serial number data can also be read from KRDS. Step Operation
Step Operation 1 Enter the 25 mode.
1 Enter the 25 mode. [Memory setting mode menu Screen]
[Memory setting mode menu Screen] 2 Select the " 9 Indication of ROM ver-
2
Select the " 8 Serial number setting". sion".
[Serial number setting mode Screen] [Indication of ROM Version Screen]
Press the key you want to change The versions of the ROMs installed in
3 among the Main body , Option tray , 3 the image control (I1 to I5), printer con-
trol (C1 to C5), finisher (N), and Punch
or Finisher key. (H) are displayed.
Enter the serial number using alphabetic Press the RETURN key to return to the
4 4
and numeric keys.
Perform steps 3 and 4 repeatedly to set
5
other serial numbers.
Press the OK key to allow the serial

numbers to take effect.
To cancel the serial numbers, press the
6
CANCEL key. Pressing either key
will display the Memory setting mode
menu Screen again.
Reference1: If the set serial number is invalid, a

pop-up window appears to display
a warning message. Press the
OK key to close the pop-up
window, then enter a valid serial
number again.
Reference2: The entered characters will be

shifted to the left one after another,
starting at the right end.

25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[14] KRDS setting
4 See the "KRDS Setup Manual".
[15] ISW setting

See the chapter "ISW".
[16] Setting date

Set the total count start day.
Step Operation
2
Press " 12 Setting date input".
[Setting date input Screen]
3 Using the numeric keys, input the new
setting date.
Press the OK key to return to the

4
Note:
Ends when the CANCEL key is pressed with-
out amending the entered date, and returns to
the Memory setting mode menu Screen.

7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 1-46-1
Dec. 2003 1-46-1 REPLACEMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Blank page

7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 1-46-2 REPLACE
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
[1] Setting Method [2] High Voltage Adjustment
This machine is provided with 36 Mode as an adjust- Adjusting the high voltage for charging, transfer, sepa-
ment mode. ration, and development.
This mode is used to perform various adjustments. 1. Select " 1 Process adjustment" in the Adjust-
1. Turn off SW2 (sub power). ment mode menu Screen to display the Process
2. Turn on SW2 while holding down both paper adjustment mode menu Screen.
quantity buttons 3 and 6. 2. Press " 1 High voltage adjustment" in the Pro-
The Adjustment mode menu Screen appears. cess adjustment mode menu Screen to display
At this point, you are in 36 mode and normal copy the High voltage adjustment mode menu.
operation is disabled. 3. High voltage adjustment consists of the following:
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] 1 HV adjustment (Charge)
2 HV adjustment (Transfer)
3 HV adjustment (Separation AC)
4 HV adjustment (Separation DC)
5 HV adj. (Charging grid voltage)
6 HV adj. (Bias of development)
7 Transfer guide confirm
8 HV adjustment (TGR)
4. Press the number key corresponding to the item
3. Press the number key corresponding to the item to be adjusted.
to adjust. The adjustment screen of the selected item is dis-
The setting screen for each item is displayed. played.
4. Enter data in each adjustment screen. 5. When adjustment completes, the screen returns
5. If there are several adjustment items, press the to the High voltage adjustment mode menu
NEXT or BACK key to select the desired screen.
item. If there are more screens below, press the 6. Press the RETURN key in the High voltage
key displayed on screen to change screen. Adjustment mode menu Screen to return to the
6. Enter data and press the SET key if it is avail- Process adjustment mode menu Screen.
able, to confirm your entry.
7. Press the RETURN key to end adjustment.
8. Turn off the SW2 and exit the 36 mode.
9. The new adjustment values take effect after
restarting the machine.
1-47
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
1. Charging main manual adjustment [HV adjustment (Charging grid volt-

Charging main manual adjustment is inhibited in age) Screen]
the field. 7 Press START button , and check the
2. Transfer manual adjustment voltage shown, then press CANCEL but-
Default setting value must be set under the guid- ton.
ance of Konica Technology Support Center.
When the voltage measured is not sat-
3. Separation (AC) manual adjustment
isfactory, change the data using the
Default setting value must be set under the guid- 8 numeric keys on the screen and press
4. Separation (DC) manual adjustment the SET key.
Default setting value must be set under the guid- 9 Turn the SW2 (sub power) OFF.
5. Charging grid manual adjustment
Standard value: Specified value on the
See [3] "Charging Grid Voltage Adjustment".
drum flange ±5V
6. Developing bias manual adjustment
Range of input: 0 to 255
Default setting value must be set under the guid-
1 step: 1.6V
7. Transfer guide confirm
Transfer guide confirm is inhibited in the field.
8. TGR manual adjustment
TGR manual adjustment is inhibited in the field.
[3] Charging Grid Voltage Adjustment

Adjusting the charging grid voltage. Before performing
this adjustment, Check that the drum counter was reset.
Preparation: Insert the door SW jig to interlock Grid +

Metal frame
MS/L and interlock MS/R.
Step Operation
Check the adjustment value of the charg-
1
ing grid voltage on the durm flange.
Connect the V tester as shown below.
+: Grid pin
2
-: GND (Earth)
Range: DC1000V
[Adjustment mode menu Screen]
4
Press " 1 Process adjustment".
[Process adjustment mode menu
5 Screen]
Press " 1 High voltage adjustment".
[High voltage adjustment mode menu
Screen]
6
Press " 5 HV adj. (Charging grid volt-
age)".

36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[4] Drum Peculiarity Adjustment 1. Blade setting mode
Adjusting the blade set, maximum density (Dmax), dot In this mode, toner stuck on the drum surface
diameter, laser offset and gamma. during replacement of the cleaning blade or
1. Select " 1 Process adjustment" in the Adjust- drum is removed to prevent damage to the drum
ment mode menu Screen to display the Process and cleaning blade.
adjustment mode menu Screen. Preparation: Be sure the drum unit is set.
2. Press " 2 Drum peculiarity adjustment" in the Apply setting powder to all the sur-
Process adjustment mode menu Screen to dis- face of the drum.
play the Drum peculiarity adjustment mode
Step Operation
menu Screen.
3. Drum Peculiarity Adjustment consists of the fol- 1 Enter the 36 mode.
lowing: [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
1 Blade setting mode 2
2 Auto maximum density adj.
3 Auto dot diameter adjustment [Process adjustment mode menu
4 LD1 offset adjustment Screen]
3
5 LD2 offset adjustment Press " 2 Drum peculiarity adjust-
6 LD1 bias adjustment ment".
7 LD2 bias adjustment
[Drum peculiarity adjustment mode
8 Auto gamma adjustment (1 dot)
4 menu Screen]
9 Auto gamma adjustment (2 dot)
10 Cartridge set mode Press " 1 Blade setting mode".
4. Press the number key corresponding to the item [Blade setting mode Screen]
to be adjusted.
Press the Start key.
The adjustment screen of the selected item is 5
displayed. Adjustment completes in about 1 second
5. When adjustment completes, the screen returns and a complete message is displayed.
to the Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu Press the RETURN key to return to the
Screen. 6 Drum peculiarity adjustment mode
6. Press the RETURN key in the Drum peculiarity
menu Screen.
adjustment mode menu Screen to return to the
Process adjustment mode menu Screen.
1-49
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
2. Auto maximum density adjustment 3. Auto dot diameter adjustment

(Dmax adjustment) Automatically adjusting the dot diameter.
Automatically adjusting the maximum density This adjustment should be performed when the
(Dmax). This adjustment should be performed drum, developer, write unit, or dust-proof glass is
when the drum, developer, write unit, or dust- replaced.
proof glass is replaced.
Preparation: Be sure the drum unit is set and
Preparation: Be sure the drum unit is set and developer is in the developing
developer is in the developing unit.
unit. Auto maximum density adjust-
Step Operation ment must have been completed.
1 Enter the 36 mode. Step Operation
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] 1 Enter the 36 mode.
2 [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2
Screen] [Process adjustment mode menu
3 Screen]
Press " 2 Drum peculiarity adjust-
3
ment.". Press " 2 Drum peculiarity adjust-
[Drum peculiarity adjustment mode ment".
4 menu Screen] [Drum peculiarity adjustment mode

Press " 2 Auto maximum density adj.". 4 menu Screen]
Press " 3 Auto dot diameter adjustment".
[Auto maximum density adjustment
Screen] [Auto dot diameter adjustment
Press the Start key. Screen]
The maximum density (Dmax) is Press the Start key.
5
adjusted automatically. 5 The dot diameter is adjusted automatically.
Adjustment completes in about 15 sec- Adjustment completes in about 10 sec-
onds and an complete message is dis- onds and a complete message is dis-
played. played.
Press the RETURN key to return to the Press the RETURN key to return to
6 Drum peculiarity adjustment mode 6 the Drum peculiarity adjustment mode
menu Screen. menu Screen.
Reference: Reference:
If any one of the following error messages If either of the following error messages
appears during auto maximum density adjust- appears during auto dot diameter adjustment,
ment, clean the TSCB (toner control sensor clean the TSCB (toner control sensor board),
board), check its installation state, and retry check its installation state, and retry the auto
the auto maximum density adjustment. dot diameter adjustment.
<1> Error 1: The Dmax sensor dirt correction <1> Error 1: The γ sensor dirt correction has
has been corrected. been corrected.
<2>Error 2: Maximum density adjustment is <2>Error 2: Auto dot diameter adjustment has
not complete when the number of rotation ended with an abnormal value.
of developing sleeve reaches the speci-
fied value.
<3>Error 3: No signal is output from the Dmax
sensor. No control patch is output.
1-50
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 4. LD1 offset adjustment Check the test pattern.
This adjusts the place at which LD1 laser starts
writing. Specification: Check if two output pat-
This adjustment should be performed when the terns from laser are con-
drum or developer is replaced. sistent and the
In the case of the 7155/7165 beginning of the lower
The adjustment is performed at line speed of density part is aligned
320, 280 and 185 respectively. between the two lines as
In the case of the 7255/7272 illustrated below.
The adjustment is performed at line speed of
345, 280 and 172.5 respectively.
Preparation: Be sure the drum unit is set. 8

Auto maximum density adjust- Reference line
ment and auto dot diameter
adjustment must have been com- Reference line
pleted.
Step Operation
2
LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2

Screen]
3 If the specification is not satisfied, press
Press " 2 Drum peculiarity adjust- 9
the C button while pressing the P button.
ment".
[LD1 offset adjustment Screen]
Enter an offset value using the numeric
4 menu Screen] 10
keys and press the SET key.
Press " 4 LD1 offset adjustment".
Setting range: -128 to +127
[LD1 offset adjustment Screen]
Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the specifica-
4 Press any key of LS320 , LS280 , or 11
tion is satisfied.
5 LS185 . (in the case of the 7155/7165) Press the RETURN key to return to the
Press any key of LS345 , LS280 or 12 Drum peculiarity adjustment mode
menu Screen.
LS172.5 . (in the case of the 7255/7272)
Reference:
6 Press the COPY SCREEN key. Select LS320 to adjust in normal mode (line
Select 11x17 size paper and press the speed 320mm/sec.), LS280 to adjust in
7 postcard mode (280mm/sec.) (Japan only), or
START button to output the test pattern.
LS185 to adjust in thick paper mode
(185mm/sec.).

36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 5. LD2 offset adjustment Check the test pattern.

This adjusts the place at which LD2 laser starts
writing. Specification: Check if two output pat-
This adjustment should be performed when the terns from laser are con-
drum or developer is replaced. sistent and the
In the case of the 7155/7165 beginning of the lower
The adjustment is performed at line speed of density part is aligned
320, 280 and 185 respectively. between the two lines as
In the case of the 7255/7272 illustrated below.
The adjustment is performed at line speed of
345, 280 and 172.5 respectively.
Preparation: Be sure the drum unit is set. 8

Auto maximum density adjust- Reference line
ment, auto dot diameter adjust-

Reference line
ment, and LD1 offset adjustment
must have been completed.
Step Operation
2
LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2

Screen]
3 If the specification is not satisfied, press
Press " 2 Drum peculiarity adjust- 9
ment". [LD2 offset adjustment Screen]
[Drum peculiarity adjustment mode Enter an offset value using the numeric
menu Screen] 10
4 keys and press the SET key.
Press " 5 LD2 offset adjustment". Setting range: -128 to +127
[LD2 offset adjustment Screen] Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the specifica-
11
4 Press any key of LS320 , LS280 , or tion is satisfied.
LS185 . (in the case of the 7155/7165)

5
12 Drum peculiarity adjustment mode
Press any key of LS345 , LS280 , or menu Screen.
Reference:
Select LS320 to adjust in normal mode (line
6 Press the COPY SCREEN key.
speed 320mm/sec.), LS280 to adjust in
Select 11x17 size paper and press the postcard mode (280mm/sec.) (Japan only), or
7
START button to output the test pattern. LS185 to adjust in thick paper mode
(185mm/sec.).

36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
6. LD1 bias adjustment Reference:
LD1 bias adjustment is inhibited in the field. If any one of the following error messages
appears during auto gamma adjustment,
7. LD1 bias adjustment clean the TSCB (toner control sensor board),
LD1 bias adjustment is inhibited in the field. check its installation state, and retry the auto
gamma adjustment.
8. Auto gamma adjustment (1 dot) <1>Error 1: The γ sensor dirt correction has
Performs gamma adjustment (1 dot) automati- been corrected.
cally. <2>Error 2: No signal is output from the γ sen-
This adjustment should be performed when the sor. No control patch is output.
drum, developer, write unit, or dust-proof glass is <3>Error 3: A recurrence error occurred dur-
replaced. ing γ curve calculation.
Preparation: Be sure the drum unit is set.

Auto maximum density adjust-
ment, LD1 offset adjustment and,
LD2 offset adjustment must have
been completed.
Step Operation
2
Screen]
3
Press " 2 Drum peculiarity adjust-
ment".
menu Screen]
4
Press " 8 Auto gamma adjustment
(1 dot)".
[Auto gamma adjustment (1 dot)
Screen]
5 The drum and developer operate to
automatically adjust Gamma.
Adjustment completes in about 10 sec-
onds and a complete message is dis-
played.

6 the Drum peculiarity adjustment mode
menu Screen.
1-53
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
9. Auto gamma adjustment (2 dot) <3>Error 3: A recurrence error occurred dur-

Performs gamma adjustment (2 dot) automatically. ing γ curve calculation.
This adjustment should be performed when the drum, 10. Cartridge set mode
developer, write unit, or dust-proof glass is replaced. This adjustment should be performed when
black dots appears on the copy after the drum
Preparation: Be sure the drum unit is set.
removing and installing.
Auto maximum density adjust-
ment, LD1 offset adjustment , LD2 Step Operation
offset adjustment, and auto 1 Enter the 36 mode.
gamma adjustment (1 dot) must [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
have been completed. 2
Step Operation
Screen]
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] 3
2 Press " 2 Drum peculiarity adjust-
ment".
[Process adjustment mode menu [Drum peculiarity adjustment mode
Screen] menu Screen]
3 4
Press " 2 Drum peculiarity adjust- Press " 10 Cartridge set mode".
ment".
[Cartridge set mode Screen]
[Drum peculiarity adjustment mode 5
menu Screen] Press the Start key.
4 The developing unit and the drum rotate
Press " 9 Auto gamma adjustment
6 for two mintes, and return to Cartridge
(2 dot)".
set mode Screen.
[Auto gamma adjustment (2 dot)
Screen] 7 Press the COPY SCREEN key.
Press the Start key. Select the wide paper (ie A3, A4, 11x17,
The drum and developer operate to 8 8.5x11) in the direction of the drum shaft,
5
automatically adjust Gamma. set 10 copies, and press START button.
Adjustment completes in about 10 sec- If black dots still appear, press the C but-
onds and an complete message is dis- ton while pressing the P button to return
played. 9
to the cartridge set mode, and repeat the
step 5 to 8.
6 Press the C button while pressing P but-
the Drum peculiarity adjustment mode 10
ton when black dots disappear.
menu Screen.
Press RETURN key to return to the
Reference: 11 Drum peculiarity adjustment mode
If any one of the following error messages
menu Screen.
appears during auto gamma adjustment,
clean the TSCB (toner control sensor board),
check its installation state, and retry the auto
gamma adjustment.
<1>Error 1: The γ sensor dirt correction has
been corrected.
<2>Error 2: No signal is output from the γ sen-
sor. No control patch is output.

7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK Nov. 2001 1-54 REPLACEMENT
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[5] Drum Peculiarity Adjustment [6] User Paper Setting
(Manual) This adjustment is only performed when the user uses
4 1. Maxiumum density manual adjustment special copy paper and can not be adjusted using the
This adjustment must be performed under the standard adjustment process.
guidance of the authorized distributor. This setting is applied when "User" is selected for
Variable range: 0 to 41 "Paper type/Special size setting" in the key operator
mode or when "User paper" is selected for "Transfer/
4 2. Dot diameter manual adjustment separation output for plain paper" or "recycled paper"
This adjustment must be performed under the in 25 mode DIPSW.
guidance of the authorized distributor. The data for 16 lb. plain paper" is input as the default.
Variable range: 0 to 255 Step Operation
2
3 Screen]
Select " 4 User paper setting".
Transfer/separation output screen
appears.
Enter data according to the user speci-
4
fied paper. Data should be input under
the guidance of the authorized distribu-
tor.

1-55
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[7] Recall Standard Data (Process [8] Tray Adjustment

Adjustment) This adjustment should be performed when the tray or
Restoring process adjustment settings to standard val- by-pass unit is replaced.
ues (factory setting data). Step Operation
1 Enter the 36 mode. [Adjustment mode menun Screen]
Press " 2 Image adjustment".
2
Press " 1 Process adjustment". [Image adjustment mode menu
[Process adjustment mode menu 3 Screen]
3 Screen] Select " 1 Tray adjustment".
Select " 5 Recall standard data". [Tray adjustment Screen]
[Recall standard data Screen] 4
Press the NEXT or BACK key to
Press the YES key. select the tray to be adjusted.
4
Various data is restored to standard val- The screen changes from Tray 1 to Tray
ues. 2 to Tray 3 to By-pass tray 1 to By-pass
tray 2. (7155/7165)
Press the RETURN key to return to the The screen changes from Tray 3 to Tray
5
Process adjustment Screen. 4 to By-pass tray 1 to By-pass tray 2.
(7255/7272)
4 Using a scale, perform each adjustment
individually, set the distance between
(the inner surfaces of) the paper side
guide plates of each tray to 210mm
(A4R) .
Set the distance between (the inner sur-
faces of ) the paper side guide plates of
by-pass tray 1 to 210mm (A4R) and tray
2 to 280mm (8.5 × 11) respectively.Vari-
ous data is restored to standard values.

The selected tray is automatically
5 adjusted.
After adjustment completes, a message
is displayed.
6 Press the RETURN key.

1-56
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[9] Magnification Adjustment 1. Printer drum clock magnification adjust-
Adjusting the printer and copy vertical and horizontal ment
magnifications. Adjusting the printer vertical magnification.
1. Select " 2 Image adjustment" in the Adjust- Step Operation
ment mode menu Screen to display the Image 1 Enter the 36 mode.
adjustment mode menu Screen. [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2. Press " 2 Magnification adjustment" in the 2
Image adjustment mode menu Screen to display Press " 2 Image adjustment".
the Magnification adjustment mode menu [Image adjustment mode menu
Screen. Screen]
3
3. Magnification adjustment consists of the follow-
Select " 2 Magnification adjustment".
ing:
1 Printer drum clock adjustment [Magnification adjustment mode
2 Printer horizontal adjustment menu Screen]
3 Scanner drum clock adjustment
4
Press " 1 Printer drum clock adjust-
4 RADF drum clock adjustment ment".
to be adjusted. [Printer drum clock adjustment
5 Screen]
5. After adjustment completes, return to the Mag-
nification adjustment menu Screen. Press the COPY SCREEN key.
6. Press the RETURN key on the Magnification Select 11x17 size paper and press the
adjustment menu Screen to return to the Image START button to output the test pattern
6
adjustment mode menu Screen. (No.16).
Caution: Check and adjust the printer vertical Measure the vertical magnification with
magnification adjustment during a ruler.
maintenance. Also adjust the printer Specification:
restart timing because it changes with ± 0.5% or less (100% magnification)
the printer vertical magnification Within ± 1mm with respect to 206mm.
adjustment 7
206 1
If the specification is not satisfied, press

8
[Printer drum clock adjustment
Screen]
Enter a value using the numeric keys
9
and press the SET key.
1 step=0.05%
Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the specification
10
is satisfied.

11 Magnification adjustment mode menu
Screen.
1-57
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
2. Printer horizontal magnification adjust- 3. Scanner (platen) drum clock magnifica-

ment tion adjustment
Adjusting the horizontal magnification. Adjusting the vertical magnification for the scan-
Step Operation ner.
2
[Image adjustment mode menu
3 Screen] [Image adjustment mode menu
Select " 2 Magnification adjustment". 3 Screen]
[Magnification adjustment mode Select " 2 Magnification adjustment".

menu Screen] [Magnification adjustment mode
4 menu Screen]
Press " 2 Printer horizontal magnifica-
4
tion adjustment". Press " 3 Scanner drum clock adjust-
[Printer horizontal adjustment ment".
5 Screen] [Scanner (Platen) drum clock adjust-
Press the COPY SCREEN key. 5 ment Screen]
Select 11x17 size paper and press the Press the COPY SCREEN key.
6 START button to output the test pattern Select 11x17 size paper, set a pyramid
(No.16). 6 chart on the original glass, and press the
Measure the horizontal magnification START button.
with a ruler. Measure the vertical magnification with
Specification: a ruler.
± 0.5% or less (100% magnification)
Within± 1mm with respect to 190mm. Specification:
7
Within ± 1mm with respect to 200mm.
7
190±1

8
the C button while pressing the P button. 200±1
[Printer horizontal adjustment
Screen] 8
Enter a value using the numeric keys
9 [Scanner (Platen) drum clock adjust-
and press the SET key.
ment Screen]
Setting range: -10 to +10 Enter a value with the numeric keys and
1 step=0.1% 9
press the SET key.
Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the specification
10 Setting range: -40 to +40
is satisfied.
1 step=0.05%
Press the RETURN key to return to the Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the specification
11 10
Magnification adjustment mode menu is satisfied.
Screen.
1-58
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4. Scanner (RADF) drum clock magnifica-
tion adjustment
11 the Magnification adjustment mode Adjusting the vertical magnification during RADF
menu Screen. copy.
Step Operation
2
3 Screen]
Select " 2 Magnification adjustment".
[Magnification adjustment mode
menu Screen]
4
Press " 4 RADF drum clock adjust-
ment".
[RADF drum clock adjustment
Screen]
5
select the magnification to be adjusted.
The screen rotates from 100% to 50% to
200% to 400%.

Select 11x17 size paper, set an adjust-
7 ment chart on RADF, and press the
START button.
Measure the vertical magnification with
a ruler.
Specification:
Within ± 1mm with respect to 190mm.
8
190±1

9
1-59
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[RADF drum clock adjustment [10] Timing Adjustment

Screen] Adjusting the leading edge timing (paper feed restart
Enter a value with the numeric keys and timing), registration loop amount, and leading edge
10 erasure amount.
press the SET key.
1. Select 2 Image adjustment in the Adjustment
mode menu Screen to display the Image adjust-
1 step=0.05%
ment mode menu Screen.
Repeat steps 5 to 11 until the specifica- 2. Press “ 3 Timing adjustment” in the Image
11
tion is satisfied. adjustment mode menu Screen to display the
Press the BACK key to return to the Timing adjustment mode menu Screen.
12 Magnification adjustment mode menu 3. Timing adjustment consists of the following
adjustments:
Screen.
1 Printer restart timing adj.
2 Printer regist loop adjustment
3 Printer pre-registration adjustment
4 Printer lead edge timing adj.
5 Scanner restart timing adj.
6 RADF restart timing adjustment
7 RADF regist loop adjustment
to be adjusted.
The adjustment screen of the selected item
appears.
5. After adjustment completes, return to the Timing
adjustment mode menu Screen.
6. Press the RETURN key in the Timing adjust-
ment mode menu Screen to return to the Image
1-60
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
1. Printer restart timing adjustment Step Operation
4 This adjusts the printer restart timing (paper feed [Printer restart timing adjustment
timing). The adjustment is performed at line Screen]
speed of 320, 280 and 185 respectively. Enter a value with the numeric keys and
IIn the case of the 7155/7165 10
The adjustment is performed at line speed of press the SET key.
320, 280 and 185 respectively. Setting range: -30 to +60
In the case of the 7255/7272 1 step=0.1mm
The adjustment is performed at line speed of Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the specifica-
345, 280 and 172.5 respectively. 11
tion is satisfied.
Step Operation
1 Enter the 36 mode. 12
Timing adjustment mode menu Screen.
2
3 Screen]
Press " 3 Timing adjustment".
[Timing adjustment mode menu
4 Screen]
Press " 1 Printer restart timing adj".
4
[Printer restart timing adjustment
Screen]
Press any key of LS320 , LS280 , or
5 LS185 . (in the case of the 7155/7165)
Press any key of LS345 , LS280 , or


Select 11x17-size paper and press the
7 START button to output the test pattern
(No.16).
Check the leading edge detection tim-
ing.
Specification: 20mm+1.0mm-0mm
20

9

36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
2. Printer registration loop adjustment

4 Adjusting the printer registration loop amount for 12
trays (7155/7165 : tray 1, 2, 3) (7255/7272 : tray Timing adjustment mode menu Screen.
1, 2, 3, 4), LCT, by-pass tray, and ADU.
Step Operation
2
3 Screen]
Screen]
4
Press " 2 Printer regist loop adjust-
ment".
[Printer regist loop adj Screen]
5 select the item to be adjusted.
The screen changes from Tray to By-
pass tray to ADU.

7 Press the START button to make a copy.
Check the printer registration loop
8
amount.
If the printer registration loop amount is
9 not appropriate, press the C button while
pressing the P button.
4 [Printer regist loop adj. Screen]
Enter a value with the numeric keys and
press the SET key.
• Tray and LCT
(7155/7165 : tray 1, 2, 3)
(7255/7272 : tray 1, 2, 3, 4)
1 step=2ms
• By-pass tray
1 step=2ms
• ADU
1 step=2ms
Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the printer reg-
11
istration loop amount is appropriate.

1 ADJUSTMENT
Blank page

36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
3. Printer pre-registration amount adjust- 4. Printer leading edge timing adjustment

ment Adjusting the printer leading edge timing (image
4 Adjusting the pre-registration loop amount for erasure amount).
trays (7155/7165 : tray 1, 2, 3) (7255/7272 : tray Step Operation
1, 2, 3, 4), LCT and ADU.
Step Operation [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
1 Enter the 36 mode. 2
2 [Image adjustment mode menu
3 Screen]
[Image adjustment mode menu Press " 3 Timing adjustment".
3 Screen]
Screen]
[Timing adjustment mode menu 4
Press " 4 Printer lead edge timing
Screen]
4 adjustment".
Press " 3 Printer pre-registration
[Printer lead edge timing adjustment
adjustment".
5 Screen]
4 [Printer pre-regist adj. Screen]
Press the COPY SCREEN key.
5 Select 11x17 size paper, place a pyra-
select the item to be adjusted.
6 mid chart on the original glass, and press
The screen changes from Tray 1 to Tray
2 to Tray 3 to Tray 4 to LCT to ADU. the START button.
Check the printer leading edge erasure
6 Press the COPY SCREEN key. 7 amount.
7 Press the START button to make a copy. Specification: Within 3mm
Check the printer pre-registration loop If the printer leading edge erasure
8 8 amount is not appropriate, press the C
amount.
If the printer pre-registration loop button while pressing the P button.
9 amount is not appropriate, press the C [Printer lead edge timing adjustment
button while pressing the P button. Screen]
4 [Printer pre-regist adj. Screen] Enter a value with the numeric keys and
9
Enter a value with the numeric keys and press the SET key.
press the SET key. Setting range: -20 to +40
• Tray and LCT 1 step=0.1mm
(7155/7165 : tray 1, 2, 3) Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the printer
10 (7255/7272 : tray 1, 2, 3, 4) 10 leading edge erasure amount is within
Setting range: -5 to +5 specification.
1 step=2ms
• ADU Press the RETURN key to return to the
11
Setting range: -10 to +10 Timing adjustment mode menu Screen.
1 step=2ms
Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the printer pre-
11
registration loop amount is appropriate.

12
Timing adjustment mode menu Screen.

36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
5. Scanner (platen) restart timing adjustment 6. RADF restart timing adjustment
Adjusting the scanner restart timing during platen Adjusting the scanner leading edge timing during
copy. RADF copy.
Caution: Printer restart timing adjustment must Caution: Printer restart timing adjustment must
be completed before performing this be completed before performing this
adjustment. adjustment.
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2 2
Press " 2 Image adjustment". Press " 2 Image adjustment".
[Image adjustment mode menu [Image adjustment mode menu
3 Screen] 3 Screen]
Press " 3 Timing adjustment". Press " 3 Timing adjustment".
[Timing adjustment mode menu [Timing adjustment mode menu
Screen] Screen]
4 4
Press " 5 Scanner restart timing adj.". Press " 6 RADF restart timing adjust-
ment".
[Scanner (platen) restart timing adj.
Screen] [RADF restart timing adj. Screen]
5
Press the COPY SCREEN key. Press the COPY SCREEN key and
5
then switch to double sided /single sided
Select 11x17-size paper, set a pyramid
copy mode.
6 chart on the original glass, and press the
START button. Select 11x17 size paper, set an adjustment
6
chart on RADF, and press the START button.
Check the restart timing.
7 Check the leading edge timing on front
Specification: Within 3mm
7 and back side.
If the leading edge timing is not appro-
Specification: Within 3mm
8 priate, press the C button while pressing
the P button. If the restart timing is not appropriate,
8 press the C button while pressing the P
[Scanner (platen) restart timing adj.
button.
Screen]
Enter a value with the numeric keys and [RADF restart timing adj. Screen]
9 Press the NEXT or BACK key to
press the SET key.
Setting range: -60 to +20 9 select the item to be adjusted.
1 step=0.1mm The screen changes from single side to dou-
ble-side (front), to double side (back) copy.
Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the leading
10 Enter a value with the numeric keys and
edge timing is within specification.
press the SET key.
Press the RETURN key to return to 10
the Timing adjustment mode menu
1 step=0.1mm
Screen.
Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the leading
11
edge timing is within specification.

12 the Timing adjustment mode menu
Screen.
1-63
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
7. RADF registration loop amount adjust- [11] RADF Adjustment

ment Performing RADF density adjustment, RADF original
Adjusting the registration loop amount during size adjustment and RADF skew offset adjustment.
RADF copy. 1. Select 2 Image adjustment in the Adjustment
Caution: Printer restart timing adjustment must mode menu Screen to display the Image adjust-
be completed before performing this ment mode menu Screen.
adjustment. 2. Press 4 RADF adjustment in the Image
adjustment mode menu Screen and display the
Step Operation
1 Enter the 36 mode. RADF adjustment mode menu Screen.
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] 3. RADF adjustment consists of the following
2 items:
[Image adjustment mode menu 1 RADF density adjustment
2 RADF original size adjustment
3 Screen] 3 RADF Incline offset adjustment
Press " 3 Timing adjustment". 4. Press the number key corresponding to the item
[Timing adjustment mode menu to be adjusted.
Screen] The adjustment screen of the selected item
4 appears.
Press " 7 RADF regist loop adjust-
5. After adjustment completes, return to the RADF
ment".
[RADF regist loop adjustment
6. Press the RETURN key in the RADF adjust-
Screen]
ment mode menu Screen to return to the Image
5 Press the COPY SCREEN key and adjustment mode menu Screen.
then switch to double-sided / single-
sided copy mode.
Select 11x17 size paper, set an adjustment
6
chart on RADF, and press the START button.
Check the loop amounts on the front and
7
back side.
If the registration loop amount is not
8 appropriate, press the C button while
[RADF regist loop adjustment
Screen]
The screen changes from single sided to
double sided (front) to double sided
(back), to double sided pre-registration.
press the SET key.
10
1 step=0.5mm
Repeat steps 5 to 11 until the registration
11
loop amount is within specification.
12 the Timing adjustment mode menu
screen.
1-64
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
1. RADF density adjustment 2. RADF original size adjustment
When the original reader slit glass is replaced, Perform this adjustment when the RADF original
the density when reading originals with the size detection does not operate properly.
RADF must be adjusted.
Caution: RADF original size adjustment con-
Preparation: Wipe the original reader slit glass sists of A4 and A5R. Use the NEXT
clean. Check that the white chart
is not dirty or folded. or BACK key to select the desired
Step Operation adjustment item.
2
3 Screen] [Image adjustment mode menu
Press " 4 RADF adjustment". 3 Screen]
Press " 4 RADF adjustment".
[RADF adjustment mode menu
4 Screen] [RADF adjustment mode menu
Press " 1 RADF density adjustment". Screen]
4
Press " 2 RADF original size adjust-
[RADF density adjustment Screen]
5 ment".
Set white chart on RADF (Caution 1).
[RADF original size adj. Screen]
6 RADF density is adjusted automatically.
5 select original size to adjust.
When adjustment completes, a mes-
sage appears on the screen. The screen changes between 8.5x11 to
5.5x8.5R.
If an error message is displayed, repeat
7 Set the original of the selected size on
steps 5 and 6 (Caution 2).
RADF and press the Start key.
Press the RETURN key to return to the 6
8 RADF original size is adjusted automat-
RADF adjustment mode menu Screen.
ically.
Caution1: Be sure to set the white chart in A4 Repeat steps 5 and 6 and adjust both
7
orientation. sizes.
Caution2: If the error message appears repeat-
edly, there is a possibility of scanner
8 the RADF adjustment mode menu
system mechanical, optical, or elec-
trical adjustment error or parts Screen.
defect.

36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
3. RADF incline offset adjustment [12] Centring Adjustment

Adjusting the standard value of the distortion Perform this adjustment to centre the image in a direc-
adjustment (Copier). tion perpendicular to the paper feed direction.
Step Operation 1. Select “ 2 Image adjustment” in the Adjust-
1 Enter the 36 mode. ment mode menu Screen to display the Image
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] adjustment mode menu Screen.
2 2. Press “ 5 Centring adjustment” in the Image
Press " 2 Image adjustment". adjustment mode menu Screen to display the
[Image adjustment mode menu Centring adjustment menu screen.
Screen] 3. Centring adjustment consists of the following:
3
1 Printer centring adjustment
Press " 4 RADF adjustment".
2 Scanner centring adjustment
[RADF adjustment mode menu 3 RADF centring adjustment
Screen] 4. Press the number key corresponding to the item
4 to be adjusted.
Press " 3 RADF Incline offset adjust-
ment". The adjustment screen of the selected item
appears.
[RADF Incline offset adjustment 5. After adjustment completes, return to the Cen-
5 Screen] tring adjustment menu Screen.
Press the COPY SCREEN key. 6. Press the RETURN key in the Centring adjust-
ment menu screen to return to the Image adjust-
Select 11x17 size paper, set an adjust-
ment mode menu Screen.
6 ment chart on RADF, and press the
START button.
Check the RADF skew offset amount.
7
Specification: 0.5%
If the RADF incline offset amount is not
8 appropriate, press the C button while
[RADF Incline offset adjustment
Screen]
9
press the SET key.
1 step=0.05%
If the RADF skew offset amount is not
10
within specification, repeat steps 5 to 9.

11
RADF adjustment mode menu Screen.

36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
1. Printer Centring Adjustment 2. Scanner (platen) centring adjustment
Adjusting the printer centring. Adjusting the scanner (platen) centring.
Step Operation Preparation: Printer centring adjustment must
1 Enter the 36 mode. be completed before performing
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] this adjustment.
2 Step Operation
Screen] [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
3 2
Press " 5 Centring adjustment". Press " 2 Image adjustment".
[Centring adjustment mode menu [Image adjustment mode menu

Screen] 3 Screen]
4
Press " 1 Printer centring adjustment". Press " 5 Centring adjustment".
[Printer centring adjustment Screen] [Centring adjustment mode menu

5 Screen]
Press the COPY SCREEN key. 4
Press " 2 Scanner centring adjust-
Select 11x17-size paper and press the
ment".
6 START button to output the test pattern
(No.16). [Scanner (Platen) centring adjust-
5 ment Screen]
Fold 11x17 size paper in half in the short
edge (landscape) orientation and check Press the COPY SCREEN key.
7 whether the lines on the left and right Select 11x17-size paper, set a pyramid
overlap completely. chart on the original glass, and press the
6
Specification: ± 1mm or less START button.
If the printed image is not appropriate, Fold 11x17 size paper in half in the short
8 press the C button while pressing the P edge (landscape) orientation and check
button. whether the lines on the left and right
7
[Printer centring adjustment Screen] overlap completely.
Enter a value with the numeric keys and Specification: ± 2mm
9 press the SET key. If the offset is not within specification,
Setting range: -64 to +63 8 press the C button while pressing the P
1 step=0.1mm button.
Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the offset is [Scanner (Platen) centring adjust-
10 ment Screen]
within specification.
Press the RETURN key to return to the 9
press the SET key.
11 Centring adjustment mode menu
Screen.
1 step=0.1mm
Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the offset is
10

Screen.
1-67
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
3. RADF centring adjustment Enter a value with the numeric keys and
This adjusts centring for the RADF copy.
press the SET key.
There are six adjustment items as follows: 10
• Single sided small size Setting range: -30 to +30
• Double sided (front) small size 1 step=0.1mm
• Double sided (back) small size Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the centering
• Single sided large size 11
is within specification.
• Double sided (front) large size
• Double sided (back) large size Press the RETURN key to return to the
Step Operation
Screen.
2
3 Screen]
Press " 5 Centring adjustment".
[Centring adjustment mode menu
4 Screen]
Press " 3 RADF centring adjustment".
[RADF centring adj. Screen]
Press the COPY SCREEN key and
5
enter double sided / single sided copy
mode.
Load 11x17 size paper in the tray, place
6 small size or large size original on RADF,
and press the START button.
Fold 11x17 size paper in half in the short
edge (landscape) orientation and check
7 whether the lines on the left and right
overlap completely.
Specification: ± 1mm
If the offset is not within specification,
8 press the C button while pressing the P
button.
[RADF centring adj. Screen]
select the item to be adjusted.
The screen changes from single sided
9 small size to double sided (front) small
size to double sided (back) small size to
single sided large size to double sided
(front) large size to double sided (back)
large size.
1-68
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[13] Distortion adjustment (Copier) [14] Non-image area erase check
This is to correct distortion during platen/RADF copy- When this machine is installed in a place or is moved
ing. There are four adjustment items as follows: to another location, research should be conducted on
• Scanner (platen) distortion (main scan) the conditions under which the machine is placed.
• Scanner (platen) distortion (sub-scan)
Preparation: RADF must be opened.
• Scanner (RADF) distortion (main scan)
Nothing should be put on the orig-
• Scanner (RADF) distortion (sub-scan)
inal glass. The original glass must
Step Operation be clean and transparent.
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] Step Operation
2 1 Enter the 36 mode.
[Image adjustment mode menu 2
3 Screen]
Press " 6 Warp adjustment (Copier)". [Image adjustment mode menu
Screen]
[Scanner warp adj. Screen] 3
4 Select " 7 Non-image area erase
check".
Select 11x17 size paper. To check the [Non-image area erase check Screen]
platen, set an adjustment chart on the
5 4 Open the RADF, and press the Start
original glass. To check RADF, set it on
RADF. key.
Check for platen copy distortion or Confirm that a message indicating that it
RADF copy distortion. operated normally is displayed in the
6 Specification: The difference in lengths message display. When a message
of two diagonals of a 200mm square indicating it did not operate properly is
5
must be within 1.4mm. displayed, refer to Reference 1 shown
below. Then, perform the non-original
If the platen copy distortion or RADF
automatic erasure installation research
copy distortion is not within specification,
7 again.
press the P button while pressing the P
button.
[Scanner warp Adj. Screen] Reference 1:
Here are measures to be taken when the fol-
8 Press the NEXT or BACK key to lowing error messages are indicated.
select the desired adjustment item. <Error message 1>
Enter a value with the numeric keys and Adjust for Extreme Brightness. In many cases,
the Non-image-area-erase function will not
press the SET key.
9 operate correctly. Please confirm "adjustment"
Range of setting: -50 to +50 - "36 mode" columns of the Service Hand
1 step=0.05% book.
Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the distortion is <Countermeasure1>
10
within specification. If you use the non-original erasure function, or
copy originals that have a dark background
11 using the non-original erasure method, rela-
Image adjustment mode menu Screen. tively infrequently, use the machine in its
present installation environment.
If, however, you copy originals that have a dark
background fairly frequently, re-install the
1-69
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
machine in a dark location and facing a direc- [15] Recall standard data (Image adjust-
tion such that external light does not get into it, ment)
then carry out the installation survey once
Restoring image adjustment settings to standard val-
again.
ues (factory setting data).
<Error message2>
A datum with potentioal not to function non- Step Operation
image-area-erase is found. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 mode" col- [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
ums of the Service Hand book. 2
<Countermeasure2>
If you use the non-original erasure function rel- [Image adjustment mode menu
atively infrequently, you can use the machine 3 Screen]
in its present installation environment. Select " 8 Recall standard data".
If, however, you copy originals that have a dark
background fairly frequently, re-install the [Recall standard data Screen]
machine in a dark location and facing a direc- Press the YES key.
4
tion such that external light does not get into it, Various data is restored to standard val-
then carry out the installation survey once ues.
again. In this case, if there is a bright light
source, such as a fluorescent light, directly Press the RETURN key to return to
above the machine, reconsider the installation 5 the Image adjustment mode menu
location and direction, or take steps to block off Screen.
the light from the light source (by using a cover,
for example), then carry out the installation
survey once again.
1-70
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[16] Running Test Mode [17] Test pattern output mode
Testing continuous copy operation. Output test pattern.
Select “ 3 Running test mode” in the Adjustment Select “ 4 Test pattern output mode” in the Adjust-
mode menu Screen. ment mode menu Screen to display the Test pattern
This adjustment consists of the following items: output mode screen.
1 Intermittent copy mode Caution: Do not touch any mode that is not spe-
In this mode, the machine goes into the copy cifically described.
ready state after completing a set number of Step Operation
copy operations, waits 0.5 sec, and then repeats
the same operation.
2 Paperless running mode 2
Press " 4 Test pattern output mode".
In this mode, the machine goes into the copy
ready state after completing a set number of [Test pattern output mode Screen]
copy operations without performing paper detec- Use the numeric keys to enter the num-
tion or jam detection, waits 0.5 sec, and then 3 ber of the test pattern to output and press
repeats the same operation. the SET key.
3 Paperless mode
In this mode, the machine makes a set number
of copies at approximately the same timing as for [Copy Screen]
normal copy without performing paper detection 5 Select 11x17 size paper and press the
or jam detection. START button to output the test pattern.
4 Paperless endless mode To output another test pattern, press the
In this mode, the machine makes copies at 6 C button while pressing the P button and
approximately the same timing as for normal repeat steps 3 to 5.
copy without performing paper detection or jam 7 Press the RETURN key to end.
detection. The copy quantity is set to infinity
automatically.
5 Running mode
This mode consists of Paperless mode with
repetitive scanner scan and auto paper feed tray
change.
Step Operation
2
Press " 3 Running test mode".
[Running test mode menu Screen]
3
Press mode keys 1 to 5 .
[Copy Screen]
4
Press the START button.
Check the copy operation and then
5
press the STOP button to stop.
6 Turn the SW2 (sub power) OFF.
1-71
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
No.1 Overall halftone
Check item
● When density is set to 70 (halftone)

If there are white stripes, black stripes, or uneven density, determine whether the fault is with the
scanner or the printer.
● When density is set to 0 (white)
If the test pattern is gray background, determine whether the fault is with the scanner or the printer.
● When density is set to 255 (black)
If the density is light, determine whether the fault is with the scanner or the printer.
* The above density settings are typical values. See [18] "Test pattern density setting" for more
information on density setting.
Test patterns
Density set to 70 Density set to 0 Density set to 255
1-72
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
No.2 Gradation pattern
Check item
If the test pattern is gray background or the density is light, determine whether the fault is with the
processing system or with γ correction. If the copy image is abnormal despite this test pattern being
normal, either the image processing system or the scanner system is abnormal.
Test patterns
1-73
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
Check item
If the test pattern is abnormal, check whether the two lasers are emitting light normally.
Test patterns
1-74
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
Check item
If the test pattern is abnormal, check whether the two laser outputs are uniform.
Test patterns
LD1 LD2
1-75
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
No.11 Beam misalignment check
Check item
If the test pattern is abnormal, check to see if position correction of the two laser beams is normal.
Test patterns
1-76
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern
Check item
Use this check pattern to determine whether the fault is with the scanner or the printer. The printer
horizontal magnification, vertical magnification, tilt, and leading edge timing and etc, can be
checked. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality in the test pattern, the scanner is
at fault.
Test patterns
Edge of paper
31mm 237mm
Edge of paper
20mm
190mm
m
0m
28
206mm
28
0m
m
190mm
1-77
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[18] Test pattern density setting [19] Finisher adjustment

Setting the test pattern density. Adjusting the finisher, cover sheet tray, and puncher.
Select “ 5 Test pattern density setting” in the Adjust- 1. Select “ 6 Finisher adjustment” on the Adjust-
ment mode menu Screen to display the Finisher
ment mode menu Screen to display the Test pattern
density setting Screen.
4 2. Finisher adjustment items are as follows:
Step Operation 1 Stitch & Fold stopper adj.
1 Enter the 36 mode. 2 Fold stopper adjustment
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] 3 Cover sheet tray size adj.
2 4 Punch adjustment
Press " 5 Test pattern density setting".
(in the case of the 7255/7272)
[Test pattern density Screen] 5 Punch adjustment
Use the numeric keys to enter the num- (in the case of the 7155/7165)
3 ber of the test pattern to output and press 5 Z-fold position adjustment
the SET key. (in the case of the 7255/7272)
6 Z-fold position adjustment
Setting range: 0 to 255
4 Press the COPY SCREEN key. 6 Three-Fold position adjustment
Press the START button to output a test
5 7 Three-Fold position adjustment
pattern.
To output another test pattern, press the 7 2 positions staple pitch adjustment
6 C button while pressing the P button and (in the case of the 7255/7272)
repeat steps 3 to 5. 8 2 positions staple pitch adjustment
7 Press the RETURN key to end. (in the case of the 7155/7165)
to be adjusted.
4. The adjustment screen for the selected adjust-
ment item appears.
5. After adjustment completes, return to the Fin-
isher adjustment mode menu Screen.
6. Press the RETURN key of the Finisher adjust-
ment menu to return to the Adjustment mode
menu Screen.

36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
1. Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FS- 2. Folding stopper adjustment (FS-210 only)
210 only) Adjusting the folding position when stitch and
Adjusting the stapling position when stitch and fold or folding mode.
fold mode. Step Operation
1 Enter the 36 mode. [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
Press " 6 Finisher adjustment".
2
[Finisher adjustment mode menu
[Finisher adjustment mode menu 3 Screen]
3 Screen] Press " 2 Fold stopper adjustment".
Press " 1 Stitch and fold stopper adj.".
[Fold stopper adjustment Screen]
[Stitch and Fold stopper adj. Screen] 4
4
Set paper in the tray, set originals on
5
Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button.
5
RADF, and press the START button. Check the paper center and folding posi-
Check the paper center and stapling 6 tion.
6 position. Specification: ± 1mm
Specification: ± 1mm If the folding position is not within spec-
If the stapling position is not within spec- 7 ification, press the C button while press-
7 ification, press the C button while pressing the P button.
ing the P button. [Fold stopper adjustment Screen]
[Stitch and Fold stopper adj. Screen] 8 Press the NEXT or BACK key to
8 Press the NEXT or BACK key to select a desired paper size.
select a desired paper size. Enter a value with numeric keys and
4
4 Enter a value with numeric keys and press the SET key.
press the SET key. Setting range: -128 to +127
Setting range: -128 to +127 9 1 step=0.1mm
9 1 step=0.1mm (in the case of the 7155/7165)
(in the case of the 7155/7165) 1 step = 0.15mm
1 step = 0.15mm (in the case of the 7255/7272)
(in the case of the 7255/7272) Repeat steps 4-9 until the folding posi-
10
Repeat steps 4-9 until the stapling position is within specification.
10
tion is within specification.
Press the RETURN key to return to 11 the Finisher adjustment mode menu
11 the Finisher adjustment mode menu Screen.
Screen.

36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
3. Cover sheet tray size adjustment 4. Punch adjustment (PK-110/120, PZ only)

(PI-110 only) This adjusts the punch vertical positions, punch
This adjustment should be performed when the horizontal positions, and punch registration loop
cover sheet tray size cannot be detected prop- amount.
erly and when centring adjustment for cover 1. Select “ 5 Punch adjustment" on the Finisher
sheet tray is performed. adjustment mode menu Screen to display the
Punch adjustment menu Screen.
Step Operation 2. Punch adjustment includes the following items:
1 Punch kit vertical position adjustment
(PK-120)
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] 2 Punch kit horizontal position adjustment
2
Press " 6 Finisher adjustment". (PK-110/120)
3 Punch unit vertical position adjustment
(PZ)
Screen]
3 4 Punch unit horizontal position adjustment
Press " 3 Cover sheet tray size adjust- (PZ)
ment". 5 Punch regist loop adjustment
[Cover sheet tray size adj. Screen] 3. Press the number key corresponding to the item
to be adjusted. The adjustment screen for the
4 Press NEXT or BACK key to select
selected adjustment item appears.
the tray to be adjusted. 4. After adjustment completes, return to the Punch
Set a 8.5x11R size paper on the cover adjustment menu Screen.
sheet tray (upper/lower), press the 5. Press the RETURN key of the Punch adjust-
Start key on the LCD. A complete ment menu to return to the Finisher adjustment
mode menu Screen.
message appears on the screen.
Cover sheet tray

6 the Finisher adjustment mode menu
Screen.

36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
(1) Punch vertical position adjustment (PK-120, (2) Punch horizontal position adjustment (PK-
PZ only) 110/120, PZ only)
Adjusting the punch vertical position. Adjusting the punch horizontal position.
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2 2
Press " 6 Finisher adjustment". Press " 6 Finisher adjustment".
[Finisher adjustment mode menu [Finisher adjustment mode menu
3 Screen] 3 Screen]
Press " 5 Punch adjustment". Press " 5 Punch adjustment".
4 [Punch adjustment menu Screen] 4 [Punch adjustment menu Screen]

Press " 1 Punch kit Vertical pos. adj." Press " 2 Punch kit Horizontal pos.
4 in the case of the PK-120, and press 4 adj." in the case of the PK-110/120, and
" 3 Punch unit Vertical pos. adj." in the press " 4 Punch unit Horizontal pos.
case of the PZ. adj." in the case of the PZ.
[Punch Vertical position adj.] [Punch Horizontal position adj.]
5 5
Press the COPY SCREEN key. Press the COPY SCREEN key.
Set paper in the tray, set originals on Load papers in the tray, place the origi-
6
RADF, and press the Start button. 6 nal on RADF, and then press the START
7 Check the punch vertical position. button.
If the punch vertical position is not appro- Check the paper center and the position
8 priate, press the C button while pressing of punch holes.
down the P button. Specification (Length between the edge
7
of paper and the center of punch hole):
[Punch Vertical position adj. Screen]
10.5mm (2 holes/4 holes/swedish
9 Press the NEXT or BACK key to 4 holes), 9.5mm (3 holes/inch 2 holes)
select a desired paper size. If the punch horizontal position is not
Enter a value with numeric keys and 8 appropriate, press the C button while
press the SET key. pressing down the P button.
10 [Punch Horizontal position adj.
1 step=0.1mm Screen]
9
Repeat steps 5-10 until the punch verti- Press the NEXT or BACK key to
11 select a desired paper size.
cal position is appropriate.
Press the RETURN key to return to the Enter a value with numeric keys and
12
Punch adjustment menu Screen. press the SET key.
10
1 step=0.1mm
Repeat steps 5-9 until the punched posi-
11
tion is within the specification.

12
Punch adjustment menu Screen.

36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
(3) Punch regist loop adjustment 5. 1st Z-folding position adjustment (PZ
Adjusting the registration loop amount for the only)
reversed paper exit, the ADU paper exit (straight Adjusting the positions at which the 1st Z-folding
exit) and cover sheet upper/lower. is performed.
Enter the 36 mode. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
1
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] 2 Press "
6 Finisher adjustment".
2
Press " 6 Finisher adjustment". [Finisher adjustment mode menu
4
Screen]
Press " 6 Z-folding position adjust-
3 Screen] 3 ment" in the case of the 7155/7165, and
Press " 5 Punch adjustment". press " 5 Z-folding position adjust-
ment" in the case of the 7255/7272.
4 [Punch adjustment mode Screen]
[Z-folding position adjustment menu
Press " 5 Punch regist loop adj." in the Screen]
4 case of the 7155/7165, and press 4
Press " 1 1st folding position adjust-
" 4 Punch regist loop adj." in the case ment".
of the 7255/7272. [1st Z-folding position adjustment
5 Screen]
Press " 1 Punch regist loop adj. (main Press the COPY SCREEN key.
5 body)" or " 2 Punch regist loop adj. Load papers in the tray, place the origi-
(PI)". 6 nal on RADF, and then press the START
button.
[Punch Regist Loop adj. Screen]
Check the 1st Z-folding position.
L1
The screen changes as follows; Reverse
Paper eject → ADU Paper eject or Cover
sheet Upper → Cover sheet Lower.
7
7 Press the COPY SCREEN key. Specification
8 Press the START button to make a copy. 11 x 17 108
A3 105
Check the punch registration loop L1
9 8K 97
amount. (mm) B4 91
If the punch registration loop amount is 8.5 x 14 -
10 not appropriate, press the C button while If the 1st Z-folding position is not appro-
pressing the P button. 8 priate, press the C button while pressing
[Punch Regist Loop Adj. Screen] the P button.
Enter a value with numeric keys and [1st Z-folding position adjustment
Screen]
11 press the SET key. Enter a value with numeric keys and
Setting range: -20 to +20 9
press the SET key.
1 step=0.8mm Setting range: -128 to +127
Repeat steps 6-11 until the punch regis- 1 step=0.1mm
12 tration loop amount is within the specifi- Repeat steps 5-9 until the 1st Z-folding
cation. 10 position is appropriate.
Press the RETURN key to return to Press the RETURN key to return to
13 11 the Z-folding position adjustment menu
the Punch adjustment menu Screen.
Screen.
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
6. 2nd Z-folding position adjustment (PZ Repeat steps 5-9 until the 2nd Z-folding
only) 10
position is appropriate.
Adjusting the positions at which the 2nd Z-folding
is performed.
11 the Z-folding position adjustment menu
Step Operation
Enter the 36 mode. Screen.
1
2
4 [Finisher adjustment mode menu
Screen]
Press " 6 Z-folding position adjust-
3
ment" in the case of the 7155/7165, and
press " 5 Z-folding position adjust-
ment" in the case of the 7255/7272.
[Z-folding position adjustment menu
Screen]
4
Press " 2 2nd folding position adjust-
ment".
[2nd Z-folding position adjustment
5 Screen]
Load papers in the tray, place the origi-
6 nal on RADF, and then press the START
button.
Check the 2nd Z-folding position.
D
L2
7
Specification
L2 (mm) D (mm)
11 x 17 less than 215
A3 less than 209
35±1.5
8K less than 194
B4 less than 181
8.5 x 14 less than 261.6 -
If the 2nd Z-folding position is not appro-
8 priate, press the C button while pressing
the P button.
[2nd Z-folding position adjustment
Screen]
Enter a value with numeric keys and
9
press the SET key.
1 step=0.1mm

36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
7. Three-folding adjustment (FS-210 only) 8. 2 positions staple pitch adjustment

Adjusting the folding positions during the three- Adjusting the pitch of the 2 positions staple.
folded copy. Step Operation
1 Enter the 36 mode. [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] Press " 6 Finisher adjustment".
2
Press " 6 Finisher adjustment". 4 [Finisher Adjustment mode Menu
[Finisher Adjustment mode Menu Screen]
4
Screen] Press " 8 2 positions staple pitch
Press " 7 Three-folded positions 3 adjustment" in the case of the7155/7165,
3
adjustment" in the case of the 7155/7165, and press " 7 2 positions staple pitch
and press " 6 Three-folded positions adjustment" in the case of the 7255/
adjustment" in the case of the 7255/7272. 7272.
[Three-Folding adjustment Screen] [2 positions staple pitch adjustment
4
Press the COPY SCREEN key. 4 Screen]
Load papers in the tray, place the original on Press the COPY SCREEN key.
5
RADF, and then press the START button. Load papers in the tray, place the origi-
Check the three-folded positions of 5 nal on RADF, and then press the START
paper. button.
Check the pitch of the 2 positions staple.
c A
a
6
A:120mm
b 6 (Standard)
Folded Reference value Specifi-

positions A4R 8.5x11R cation Folded Reference value Specifi-
a 93mm 86.4mm ± 2mm positions A4R 8.5x11R cation
b 102mm 97mm ± 2mm a 93mm 86.4mm ± 2mm
c 102mm 97mm ± 2mm b 102mm 97mm ± 2mm
c 102mm 97mm ± 2mm
If the folded positions are not within the
7 specification, press the C button while When changing the dimension A, press
7
pressing the P button. the C button while pressing the P button.
[Three-Folding adjustment Screen] [2 positions staple pitch adjustment
8 Press the NEXT or BACK key to Screen]
select the item to be adjusted. Enter a value with numeric keys and
8
Enter a value with numeric keys and press the SET key.
press the SET key. Setting range: 120 to 160
9 1 step=1mm
Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the dimension
1 step=0.1mm 9
A is improved.
Repeat steps 4-9 until the folded posi-
10 Press the RETURN key to return to
tions are within the specification.
11 the Finisher adjustment mode menu
11 Screen.
the Finisher adjustment mode menu
Screen.
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[20] List Output Mode
Outputting various data.
1. Select " 7 List output mode" in the Adjustment
mode menu Screen to display the List output
mode menu Screen.
2. List output mode menu consists of the following:
1 Machine management list 1
2 Adjustment data list
3 Pixel ratio data list
4 Machine management list 2
5 Parameter list
6 Memory dump list
7 Font pattern
to output.
The output setting screen for the selected item
appears.
4. After output completes, return to the List output
mode menu Screen.
5. Press the RETURN key in the List output
mode menu Screen to return to Adjustment
mode menu Screen.
Note: List output screen is not displayed for 4

Machine management list 2 and subse-
quent items unless address 30-1 is set to
1 with 1 Software DIPSW setting in 25
mode.

47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
[1] 47 Mode / Multi Mode Setting Method (4) Ending 47 mode
a. Press the stop button to cancel the operation.
1. 47 Mode
This mode provides self-diagnostic functions b. Turn off the main switch to exit the 47 mode.
(input/output check function) to check and adjust Step Operation
various signals and loads. Turn on the SW2 (sub power) while hold-
2. 47 mode operation 1 ing down 4 and 7 of the copy quantity
(1) Starting 47 mode button.
a. Turn off the SW2 (sub power). [I/O check Screen]
b. Turn the SW2 back on while holding down 4 and 2 Use the copy quantity button to enter the
7 of the copy quantity button. code.
c. Check that the 47 mode is started when message
Check the input signal check result dis-
"I/O check mode" appears in the first row of the
3 played after "IN:" in the second row of
message area.
the message area.
(2) Input/output check
a. Use the copy quantity button to enter the code To perform the output check, press the
4
(Refer to the I/O check code list.) for the desired Start button to check the output load.
signal sources (such as sensors). Press the Stop button to end output
b. The entered code appears enclosed in <> in the 5
check.
second row of the message area. To perform other checks, enter a new
c. The numbers are shifted left as they are dis- 6
code using the copy quantity button.
played.
Turn off the main switch to exit the 47
d. Check the status of the signal displayed as H or L 7
mode.
after "IN:" in the second row of the message dis-
play area. Note1: No data appears on the second row of
Caution: H and L indicate the level of the signal the message area when 47 mode is
input to PRCB (printer control board). entered. Message appears when a num-
Note the relationship between the sta- ber is entered.
tus of the input signal source and the
message display. Note2: Simply enter a new code to switch to
(3) Output check another code.
a. Use the copy quantity button to enter the code
(Refer to the I/O check code list.) for the desired Note3: A newly entered number is written over
output load. the previously entered number.
b. Press the Start button.
Depending on the output, a load will be activated
or a signal will be output.
Start button Code Description
Before pressing
Input Input signal level
indication
Output load opera-
After pressing Output
tion/signal
1-84
47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
3. Multi mode Step Operation
This machine features Multi modes amongst the Enter the 47 mode.
1
47 Mode functions.
This enables multiple I/O checks using a single I/ [I/O check Screen]
O check code. 2 Use the copy quantity button and enter
the code.
4. Multi mode operation method
Start the 47 mode and proceed as follows: 3 Press the P button.
(1) To check the input Enter the multi number using the copy
a. Using the copy quantity button, enter the check 4
quantity button.
code for the desired I/O.
5 Press the P button.
b. The 47 mode code appears enclosed in <> in the
second row of the message area. Check the input signal check result dis-
c. Press the P button. 6 played after "IN:" in the second row of
d. Enter the desired multi number using the copy the message area.
quantity button. (Refer to the multi mode list.) To perform the output check, press the
7
e. The multi number will be displayed enclosed in Start button to check the output load.
<>, following the 47 mode code and "- ". Press the STOP button to end the output
8
check.
I/O check mode
< 10-01 > IN: -- OUT: -- Turn off the main switch to exit the 47
9
mode.
f. Press the P button. Note1: To check another multi number in the

g. Check the status of the signal displayed as H or same code, press the P button after
L after "IN:" in the second row of the message completing step 8. And enter another
display area. multi number. A newly entered number
(2) To check the output is written over the previously entered
a. Press the START button. number.
b. Press the STOP button after checking the out-
put. Note2: To return to the normal 47 mode, press
(3) Ending multi mode the STOP button while holding down
a. Turn off the main switch to exit the 47 mode (multi the P button after completing step 8.
mode).
1-85
47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[2] Adjustment Data Display (1) When the total capacity of the hard
Displaying a list of machine adjustment values disk is checked:
(factory-set values and current values). The total capacity of the hard disk is
No adjustment (data value change) can be made displayed after "OUT:" in the mes-
in this mode. sage display field.
Step Operation (2) When the remaining capacity of the
1 Enter the 47 mode. hard disk is checked:
The remaining capacity of the hard
[I/O check Screen]
disk is displayed after "OUT:" in the
Enter 94 with numeric keys.
2 message display field.
Make sure 94 is displayed in the mes-
sage display field. (3) When bad sectors on the hard disk
5 are checked and recovered:
3 Press the Start button.
"NOW" is displayed after "OUT:" in
[Adjustment data display Screen] the message display field and bad
4 Press the or button to display sector check and recovery start.
a desired adjustment item. Several minutes later, "OK" is dis-
played in the case of normal termi-
Press the End key to return to the I/ nation, "NG" is displayed in the case
5
O check mode screen. of abnormal termination.
When "NG" is displayed, retry bad
[3] Hard Disk Check sector check and recovery. If "NG"
This adjustment is to be performed when check- is displayed again, replace the hard
ing the total capacity and remaining capacity of disk.
the optional hard disk and when error codes Note1: Once the bad sector check and recov-
related to the hard disk occur. ery procedure start, it can not be can-
Step Operation celed. (The STOP button and mode
1 Enter the 47 mode. change key are ineffective.)
Note2: The hard disk is weak against vibration
2 Enter 99 with numeric keys.
and shock. When moving the copy
(1) Checking the total capacity of the machine, be sure to remove the hard
hard disk: Press the P button and disk in advance.
enter 1 with a numeric key. Make
sure 99-01 is displayed in the mes-
sage display field.
(2) Checking the remaining capacity of
the hard disk:
Press the P button and enter 2 with
3 a numeric key. Make sure 99-02 is
displayed in the message display
field.
(3) Checking and recovering bad sec-
tors on the hard disk:
Press the P button and enter 3 with
a numeric key. Make sure 99-03 is
displayed in the message display
field.
4 Press the START button.
1-86
47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[4] Input checklist
Display and
Classi- Multi
Code Symbol Name Signal Source
fication mode
H L
001 TLD Remaining toner detection signal In Empty
002 VR301 ADF original size VR signal
0 to 255
Fixer upper roller temperature detection signal
Analog signal
003 TH1
004 Fixer upper roller temperature °C
005 Humidity sensor signal
006 Dmax MONI signal
007 Dmax signal 0 to 255
008 γ signal
009 Machine inside temperature signal
PS3 1 Tray 1 no paper detection signal
011
PS33 5 By-pass feed tray no paper detection signal
PS108 6 LCT no paper detection signal
PS4 1 Tray 1 remaining paper detection signal
012
PS102 5 LCT remaining paper detection signal 1
ON OFF
4 PS5 1 Tray 1 paper size detection signal 1(7155/7165 only)
PS6 2 Tray 1 paper size detection signal 2(7155/7165 only)
Paper feed
PS17 5 Tray 3 paper size detection signal 1

013
PS18 6 Tray 3 paper size detection signal 2
- 7 -
- 8 -
PS31 9 By-pass feed tray paper size detection signal 1
PS32 10 By-pass feed tray paper size detection signal 2
Tray 1 paper size detection VR signal
4 VR1 1
(7155/7165 only)
Tray 2 paper size detection VR signal
VR2 2
014 (7155/7165 only) 0 to 255
VR3 3 Tray 3 paper size detection VR signal
- 4 -
VR5 5 By-pass feed tray paper size detection VR signal
Tray 1 paper size signal
4 1
(7155/7165 only) 0:11x17,1:A3,2:B4,3:8.5x14,4:A4R,5:8.5x11
Tray 2 paper size signal R,6:B5R,7:8.5x11,8:5.5x8.5R,9:A4,10:A5R1
2 1:B5,12:A5,13:B6R,14:5.5x8.5,15:B6,16:Sp
015 (7155/7165 only)
3 Tray 3 paper size signal esial,17:F4(8.125x13.25),18:F4(8x13),19:F4
4 - (8.25x13),20:F4(8.5x13)
5 By-pass feed tray paper size signal

47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
Display and
Classi- Multi
fication mode
H L
PS2 1 Tray 1 upper limit detection signal
- 4 -
016
PS34 5 By-pass feed tray upper limit detection signal
Paper feed
PS35 6 By-pass feed tray lower limit detection signal

PS109 7 LCT upper limit detection signal
PS101 8 LCT lower limit detection signal
1 Tray 1 tray set detection signal
2 Tray 2 tray set detection signal
017 3 Tray 3 tray set detection signal
4 -
4
PS11 5 Tray 1 horizontal conveyance set detection signal
PS1 1 Tray1 pre-registration detection signal
PS7 2 Tray2 pre-registration detection signal
020 PS13 3 Tray3 pre-registration detection signal
- 4 -
PS107 5 LCT pre-registration detection signal
Tray 1 vertical conveyance detection signal ON OFF
4 PS25 1
Tray 1 horizontal conveyance PS/L detection signal
PS5 1
PS26 2 Tray 2 vertical conveyance detection signal
021 PS27 3 Tray 3 vertical conveyance detection signal
- 4 -
Tray 1 horizontal conveyance PS/R detection signal
Paper feed/Conveyance
PS6 5
Tray 1 horizontal conveyance PS/L detection signal
PS5 6
022 PS106 1 LCT paper feed detection signal
PS43 1 Transfer paper leading edge detection signal
023 PS36 2 Loop detection signal
PS44 3 Second paper feed detection signal
PS30 1 Fixing exit detection signal
PS37 2 Main body paper exit detection signal
024
PS42 3 Paper reverse detection signal
PS46 4 Reversed paper exit detection signal
PS29 1 Vertical conveyance door open/close detection signal
PS39 2 Front door open/close detection signal (left front door)
Front door open/close detection signal (right front
PS38 3
door)
025 MS1 Open Close
4 Front door open/close detection SW signal
MS2
PS100 5 LCT top cover open/close detection signal
PS110 6 LCT jam access cover open/close detection signal
PS40 7 Toner supply door open/close detection signal

47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
Display and
Classi- Multi
fication mode
H L
030 PS61 1 Scanner home position detection signal
PS63 1 APS sensor 1 detection signal
Scanner unit

OFF ON
- 4 -
031
- 5 -
- 6 -
- 7 -
PS51 8 APS timing detection signal Close Open
051 SW100 LCT tray down SW ON OFF
Key counter Not
052 C(K) Provided
provided
Proper
func- Transfer/separation PS/F detection signal
4 tions PS52 1 (7255/7272 only)
054 ON OFF
Transfer/separation PS/R detection signal
PS53 2 (7255/7272 only)
PS310 1 Original size detection signal 1
PS309 2 Original size detection signal 2
PS304 3 Original registration detection signal 1
PS305 4 Original registration detection signal 2
ON OFF
PS306 5 Original conveyance detection signal
PS303 6 Original ejection detection signal
ADF
060
PS301 7 Last original detection signal
PS302 8 Original setting detection signal
MS301 9 Cover open/close MS detection signal OFF ON
PS311 10 ADF open/close detection signal
PS307 11 Original skew detection signal/F ON OFF
PS308 12 Original skew detection signal/R
PS701 0 Sub tray paper exit detection signal OFF ON
PS702 1 Tray upper limit detection signal
ON OFF
PS703 2 Tray lower limit detection signal
PS704 3 FNS entrance detection signal OFF ON
PS705 4 Stacker entrance detection signal
ON OFF
PS706 5 Main tray paper exit detection signal
PS707 6 Stapler paper exit upper limit detection signal OFF ON
PS708 7 Alignment HP/U detection signal
PS709 8 Paper exit belt HP detection signal
PS713 9 Stapler rotation HP detection signal
PS711 10 Stapler movement HP detection signal
FS-110/ 076
210 PS712 11 Paper exit HP detection signal ON OFF
PS714 12 Clincher rotation HP detection signal
PS715 13 Counter reset HP detection signal
PS718 14 Shift HP detection signal
PS720 15 Stacker no paper detection signal
SW702 16 Staple/R SW detection signal
PS730 17 Stapler HP/R detection signal OFF ON
SW701 18 Cartridge/R detection signal
Other
M710 19 Clincher /R detection signal than Start
start
- 20 - - -

47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
Display and
Classi- Multi
fication mode
H L
PS732 21 Clincher HP/R detection signal OFF ON
PS719 22 Sub tray full detection signal
ON OFF
MS701 23 FNS interlock MS detection signal
SW704 24 Staple/F SW detection signal
PS731 25 Stapler HP/F detection signal OFF ON
SW703 26 Cartridge/F detection signal
Other
M715 27 Clincher /F detection signal than Start
start
- 28 - - -
FS-110/ M733 29 Clincher HP/F detection signal OFF ON
210 Other than
Controlled
M707 30 Paper exit motor lock detection signal controlled
speed
speed
Not
FNS 31 FNS connection signal Connected connected
PS722 32 Folding knife HP detection signal
ON OFF
PS723 33 Stopper HP detection signal
PS724 34 Alignment/L HP detection signal
PS725 35 Folding exit detection signal OFF ON
PS726 36 Folding passage detection signal
Other
PS729 37 Folding full detection signal than full Full
No With
PZ
- 38 Paper edge PS (leading/trailing/side edge sensor 1)

Paper Paper
Other than Controlled
FS-210 M720 39 Folding conveyance motor lock detection signal controlled speed
speed
PS8 40 Exit PS
076
- 41 Paper edge PS (side edge sensor 2) No With
PZ
- 42 Paper edge PS (side edge sensor 3) Paper Paper

- 43 Paper edge PS (side edge sensor 4)
Other than Controlled
M203 44 PI conveyance motor controlled
speed
PI
speed
- 45 - - -
PS4 46 Punch shift HP ON OFF
PS2 47 2nd stopper HP
OFF ON
MS 48 Front door MS
PZ
PS6 49 Paper scraps box detection

ON OFF
- 50 Z-folding conveyance motor locking detection
PZ punch 2/3 holes and 2/4 holes derection signal 3/4 2holes
MS2 51
holes
PS201 52 PI passage /U detection signal
ON OFF
PI
PS206 53 PI passage /L detection signal

PS3 54 1st stopper HP
OFF ON
PS7 55 Paper scraps full detection
PS5 56 Punch HP ON OFF
Other
- 57 Fan motor locking detection Lock
PZ
than lock
- 58 - - -
Fold connecting detection- Not con-
- 59 nected
Connected
- 60 - - -
FS-110/
PS716 61 Gate HP detection signal ON OFF
210

47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
Display and
Classi- Multi
fication mode
H L
- 62 Paper edge PS (side edge sensor 5) No With
PZ
PS1 63 Passage PS Paper Paper

PS202 64 No sheet /U detection signal
OFF ON
PS203 65 Sheet setting /U detection signal
PS205 66 Tray lower limit/U detection signal
ON OFF
PS204 67 Tray upper limit/U detection signal
68 PI start /stop detection signal
69 PI punch SW detection signal
PI
70 PI mode SW detection signal

OFF ON
MS201 71 PI interlock MS detection signal
PS207 72 No sheet /L detection signal
PS208 73 Sheet setting /L detection signal
PS210 74 Tray lower limit /L detection signal
ON OFF
PS209 75 Tray upper limit /L detection signal
- 76 - - -
PS212 77 Sheet size/ L detection signal OFF ON
- 78 - - -
Not
PI 79 PI connection signal
PI
connect Connect
- 80 -
- 81 - - -
- 82 -
PS801 83 Punch HP detection signal ON OFF
- 84 -
- -
- 85 -
PK
076 PS802 86 Punch scraps full detection signal OFF ON

Punch scraps box detection signal Other
PS804 87 Set than set
88 Paper edge PS (side edge sensor 1)
Paper edge PS (side edge sensor 3) No With
- 90
PK-120
Paper Paper
PS803 93 Punch shift HP ON OFF
- 94 PK-120 detection
4 PS1 0 Sub-tray paper exit
PS2 1 Tray upper limit
PS3 2 Tray lower limit
PS4 3 FIN entrance passage
PS5 4 Stacker conveyance passage
PS6 5 Paper exit 1
PS7 6 Staple paper exit upper limit
FS-111
PS8 7 Alignment plate/upper HP OFF ON OFF ON

PS9 8 Paper exit belt HP
PS10 9 Paper exit 2
PS11 10 Stapler movement HP
PS12 11 Paper exit opening
PS13 12 Entrance paper detection
PS14 13 Stapler rotation HP
PS15 14 Tray no paper detection
PS18 15 Roller shift HP

47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 Display and
Classi- Multi
fication mode
H L
PS20 16 Stacker no paper detection
- 17 -
- 18 -
- 19 -
OFF ON
- 20 -
- 21 -
- 22 -
- 23 -
- 24 -
- 25 -
- 26 -
- 27 - - -
- 28 -
- 29 -
- 30 -
FM1,2,3 31 Motor lock signal
Motor lock signal Orerat-
M1 32 Lock
ing
M7 33 Motor lock signal
- 34
- 35 - -
- 36
- 37 Folding unit No unit With unit
- 38 - -
- 39 PI-108 No unit With unit
FS-111
- 40 Stapler/R Cartridge 50 sheets 100 sheets

076 Stapler/R HP Signal
PS31 41
OFF ON
PS40 42 Stapler/R staple absent signal
- 43 Stapler (R) Ready signal Busy Ready
- 44 Stapler (R) Busy signal Ready Busy
- 45 Stapler (R) Clear-request signal Normal Demand
- 46 -
- -
- 47 -
- 48 Stapler/F Cartridge 50 sheets 100 sheets
PS34 49 Stapler/FHP signal
OFF ON
PS37 50 Stapler/F staple absent signal
- 51 Stapler (F) Ready signal Busy Ready
- 52 Stapler (F) Busy signal Ready Busy
- 53 Stapler (F) Clear-demand signal Normal Demand
- 54
- 55
- 56
- 57
- 58 - -
- 59
- 60 -
- 61 -
- 62 -
PS50 63 Sub-tray full detection OFF ON
PS29 64 Folding full - -
- 65 - With paper No paper
- 66 - - -

47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 Display and
Classi- Multi
fication mode
H L
MS1 67 Interlock detection signal Open Close
- 68 -
- 69 -
- 70 -
- 71 -
- 72 -
- 73 -
- 74 -
- 75 -
M4 76 Punch motor error detection
MS2 76
MS 77 Front door MS
FS-111
PS5 78 Punch HP
PS3 79 1st foloding stopper HP - -
- 80 Paper edge PS (leading/trailing/side edge sensor 1)
076 - 82 Paper edge PS (side edge sensor 3)
PS4 85 Punch shift HP
PS1 86 Passage
PS2 87 2nd foloding stopper HP
- 88 -
- 89 -
PS8 90 Exit
- 91 -
PS701 0 Conveyance paper detection signal No paper With paper
PS703 1 Tray upper limit detection signal ON OFF
SF-101
PS704 2 Tray lower limit detection signal

OFF ON
PS702 3 Shift HP detection signal
SW701 4 Conveyance cover detection signal Open Close
- 5 -
- 6 -
PS45 1 ADU reverse detection signal
PS48 2 ADU conveyance detection signal /2
PS49 3 ADU deceleration detection signal
ADU
080 ON OFF
PS50 4 ADU pre-registration detection signal
PS47 5 ADU handle detection signal
PS41 6 ADU conveyance detection signal (7155/7165only)

47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[5] Output checklist

Classi- Multi Cannot be set or
Code Symbol Name
fication mode changed in field
000 L1 *1 Exposure lamp
001 M13 Toner bottle motor
002 Charger ×
003 HV Transfer ×
Analog signal
004 Separation (AC+DC) ×

005 D max LED ×
006 γ LED ×
007 Jam detection LED ×
008 Transfer access guide plate ×
009 HV Bias
010 Toner guide roller ×
Process adjustment related:
Clear the following data from main body and KRDS:
1 Copy count by size, ADF passage count, JAM count,
KRDS
015 optional parts count, fixed parts count, count by mode, SC

count, JAM data of time series (including pointer)
2 Job memory clear
98 KRDS initialization
4 020 SD100 LCT paper feed pickup SD
Feed MC
MC3 1 Tray 1
MC5 2 Tray 2
MC7 3 Tray 3
MC9 4 Tray 4
021
MC101 5 LCT
MC11 6 Vertical conveyance CL1
MC12 7 Vertical conveyance CL2
MC15 8 Horizontal conveyance CL/L (7255/7272 only)
MC16 9 Horizontal conveyance CL/R (7255/7272 only)
Pre-registration CL
Paper feed
MC4 1 Tray 1
MC6 2 Tray 2
022
MC8 3 Tray 3
MC10 4 Tray 4
MC102 5 LCT
Tray up motor /LCT UP/DOWN motor
M16 1 Tray 1
M17 2 Tray 2
M18 3 Tray 3
023 M19 4 Tray 4
5 LCT up
M100
6 LCT down
7 By-pass up
M20
8 By-pass down
025 MC1 Registration MC

47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 Classi- Multi Cannot be set or
Code Symbol Name
fication mode changed in field
Loop roller motor
1 Loop motor H(470mm/s), forward
Loop motor L(7155/7165:320mm/s,
2
7255/7272:345mm/s), forward
3 Loop motor L(280mm/s), forward
Loop motor L(7155/7165:185mm/s,
026 M6 4
7255/7272:172.5mm/s), forward
Loop motor H(7155/7165:470mm/s,
5
7255/7272:402.7mm/s), backward
6 Loop motor L(320mm/s), backward(7155/7165 only)
Paper feed

Paper exit motor
Paper exit motor(7155/7165:320mm/s,
1
7255/7272:345mm/s)
027 M7 2 Paper exit motor(280mm/s)
Paper exit motor(7155/7165:185mm/s,
3
7255/7272:172.5mm/s)
4 Paper exit motor(660mm/s)
M1 1 Paper feed motor(470mm/s)
028
M101 2 LCT Paper feed motor (470mm/s)
029 SD1 Separation claw SD
- - -
031 M11 *2 Scanner drive motor
*3 Polygon motor
Scanner unit
0 7155/7165:320mm/s, 7255/7272:345mm/s
032 M15
1 280mm/s
2 185mm/s(7155/7165 only)
034 *4 Shading correction
037 Write-securing shaft adjustment
038 LD alarm check
*Caution:When the START key is pressed, "Watch input?" YES and NO appears. When YES or
NO is selected for each code, the following operation is performed (7155/7165 only):
*1 YES Turns ON the exposure lamp and scanner cooling fan.

NO Turns ON the exposure lamp for 10 minutes.
*2 YES Performs HP search and scanner to-and-fro operations.
NO Moves the scanner 10mm to the right.
*3 YES Turns ON the polygon motor and write unit cooling fan.
NO Turns ON the polygon motor for 30 seconds.
*4 YES Performs HP search and shading operations.
NO Moves the scanner 10mm to the right.‘

47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT

fication Code Symbol mode Name changed in field
Fixing motor
0 Fixing motor (7155/7165:320mm/s, 7255/7272:345mm/s)
040 M4 Fixing motor (280mm/s)
1
2 Fixing motor (7155/7165:185mm/s, 7255/7272:172.5mm/s)
Drum motor
Drum motor / Developing motor (7155/7165:320mm/s,
0
7255/7272:345mm/s)
M2/M3 Drum motor / Developing motor (280mm/s)
1
Drum motor / Developing motor (7155/7165:185mm/s,
041 2
7255/7272:172.5mm/s)
3 Drum motor (345mm/s) (7255/7272 only)
M2 4 Drum motor (280mm/s) (7255/7272 only)
5 Drum motor (172.5mm/s) (7255/7272 only)
6 Developing motor (2500rpm) (7255/7272 only)
M3 Developing motor (1500rpm) (7255/7272 only)
7
M Fan motor
FM9 1 Scanner cooling fan
2 Write unit cooling fan (High)
FM2 Write unit cooling fan (Low) (in the case of the 7155/7165)
3
FM12 3 Exhaust cooling fan (in the case of the 7155/7272)
FM3 4 Conveyance suction fan
FM4 5 Developing suction fan
6 Main body cooling fan (High)
042 FM1 Main body cooling fan (Low)
7
8 Cleaner cooling fan (High)
FM5 Cleaner cooling fan (Low)
9
FM8 10 Main body cooling fan/2 (7155/7165)
Main body
FM6 10 Paper exit fan/F (7255/7272)

FM13 11 Power supply cooling fan
FM10 12 ADU reverse motor cooling fan
FM8 13 Main body cooling fan/2 (7255/7272 only)
Counter
043 1 Total counter
-
2 Key counter
L2 1 Fixing heater lamp /1
L3 2 Fixing heater lamp /2
045 L4 Fixing heater lamp /3
3
SD2 4 Fixing web SD
Charger cleaning motor
0 To-and-fro operation
046 M14 Move to rear
1
2 Move to front
Transfer/separation cleaning motor
0 To-and-fro operation
047 M10 1 Move to rear
2 Move to front
3 Corona unit cleaning (charging / transfer or separation)
048 - Illuminate all LEDs on the operation board
049 - Operation unit check
050 M2/M3 Developing motor / Drum motor
051 PCL PCL
052 TSL TSL
054 MC14 Toner recycle MC
055 - Message test
056 M12 Toner supply motor
057 IP connection check test
058 LCT connection check test
059 FNS connection check test

47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
1 Original feed motor (forward)
M301 Original feed motor (backward)
2
3 Original conveyance motor (forward)
M302 Original conveyance motor (backward)
4
ADF
060 MC301 5 Paper feed MC

SD303 6 Pressure roller release SD
SD301 7 Reverse gate SD
SD302 8 Paper exit gate SD
FM301 9 Original conveyance motor cooling fan
M701 1 FNS conveyance motor
2 Shift motor (HP search)
M702 3 Shift motor (moves to the shifting position)
4 Shift motor (one turn)
5 Tray up/down motor (HP search)
6 Tray up/down motor (moves to the lower limit)
M703
Tray up/down motor (up/down operation in the case of small
7 quantity of staple mode )
M705 8 Alignment motor /U (HP search)
M707 9 Paper exit roller motor (staple mode HP search)
M707 10 Paper exit roller motor (reverse)
11 Paper exit opening motor (HP search)
M708 Paper exit opening motor (shifts the opening)
12
M709 13 Stapler motor /R (initial)(for FS-110/210)
M722 13 Stapler motor /R (Initial) (for FS-111)
M709 14 Stapler motor /R (stapling operation) (for FS-110/210)
M722 14 Stapler motor /R (Staple operation) (for FS-111)
M714 15 Stapler motor /F (initial) (for FS-110/210)
M724 15 Stapler motor /F (initial) (for FS-111)
M714 16 Stapler motor /F (stapling operation) (for FS-110/210)
M724 16 Stapler motor /F (stapling operation) (for FS-110/210)
Stapler movement motor HP search (moves 2 stapling posi-
17 tions)
M711 Stapler movement motor HP search (moves 1 stapling position
18 for 8.5x11)
FNS
075 Stacker entrance motor

M713 19
M718 20 Stopper motor (HP search) (FS-210 only)
M716 21 Alignment motor /L (HP search) (FS-210 only)
- 22 -
M719 23 Folding knife motor (HP search) (FS-210 only)
M720 24 Folding conveyance motor (FS-210 only)
- 25 -
- 26 -
- 27 -
- 28 -
- 29 -
SD704 31 Paper exit SD
SD705 32 By-pass gate SD
33 Alignment /U motor (open)
M705 34 Alignment /U motor (close)
35 Alignment /U motor (rocking) (FS-210 only)
36 Alignment motor /L (open) (FS-210 only)
M716 37 Alignment motor /L Close(A4 position)only allowed from HP
38 Alignment motor /L rocking (only allowed from Open position)
M718 39 Stopper motor (FS-210 only)
- 40 -
FM701 41 Stacker fan
- 50 -
- 51 -
47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT

4
- 52 -
M8 53 Punch switching motor (2 holes position movement)
M8 54 Punch switching motor (3/4 holes position movement)
- 55 -
- 56 -
-
FNS
- 57
- 58 -
- 59 -
- 60 -
- 61 -
- 62 -
- 63 -
MC202 64 Conveyance MC /L
65 Tray up/down motor /L (move to the lower limit)
M202 Tray up/down motor /L (HP research)
66
SD202 67 Sheet feed SD /L
PI
- 68 -
- 69 -
- 70 -
- 71 -
M1/M6 72 Registration motor/Conveyance motor
M2 73 1st stopper motor
M3 74 2nd stopper motor
PZ
SD2 75 Gate SD/U

SD1 76 Gate SD/L
MC1 77 Punch clutch
M801 78 Punch motor
PK
M802 79 Punch shift motor (HP search)

- 80 -
M7 81 Punch scraps conveyance motor
PZ
075 M10 82 Main motor cooling fan

MC201 83 Conveyance MC /U
84 Tray up/down motor /U (rise)
M201 Tray up/down motor /U (HP search)
PI
85
SD201 86 Sheet feed SD /U
M203 87 PI conveyance motor
Gate drive motor (HP search : sub tray direction) (FS-110/120
88
only)
Gate drive motor (switches the stacker direction) (FS-110/120
M712 89
only)
Gate drive motor (switches the main tray direction) (FS-110/
90
FNS
120 only)
M721 91 Sub-tray paper exit motor (FS-110/120 only)
92 Clincher rotation motor (HP search) (FS-110/120 only)
M704 Clincher rotation motor (skew shift) (FS-110/120 only)
93
94 Stapler rotation motor (HP search) (FS-110/120 only)
M706 Stapler rotation motor (skew shift) (FS-110/120 only)
95
SD706 96 Three folding SD (FS-110/120 only)
M4 97 Punch motor
FNS PZ
M5 98 Punch shift motor

99 FNS paperless running mode
M701 1 Conveyance motor (3secON)
M703 2 Shift motor (shifted to the opposite side)
Tray up/down motor (Upper limit is detected after the motor is
M702 3
SF
lowered.)
M702 4 Tray up/down motor (Lower limit is detected.)
5
6
7

47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4
1 Reverse gate SD
080 ADU lock SD
2
081 MC13 ADU conveyance MC
082 MC2 ADU conveyance MC
Second paper feed motor (in the case of the 7155/7165)
1 Second paper feed motor (345mm/s) (7255/7272 only)
083 M5 Second paper feed motor (280mm/s) (7255/7272 only)
2
3 Second paper feed motor (172.5mm/s) (7255/7272 only)
ADU reverse motor
1 Forward(7155/7165:320mm/s, 7255/7272:345mm/s)
2 Forward(280mm/s)
3 Forward(7155/7165:185mm/s, 7255/7272:172.5mm/s)
Forward(600mm/s)
ADU
084 M9 4
5 Forward(700mm/s)
6 Backward(660mm/s)
7 Backward(7155/7165:577mm/s, 7255/7272:763mm/s)
8 Backward(7155/7165382mm/s, 7255/7272:619mm/s)
9 Backward(660mm/s) (7255/7272 only)
085 - - -
Reversed paper exit motor
1 Forward(7155/7165:320mm/s, 7255/7272:345mm/s)
2 Forward(280mm/s)
086 M8 3 Forward(7155/7165:185mm/s, 7255/7272:172.5mm/s)
4 Forward(600mm/s)
5 Forward(700mm/s)
6 Backward(660mm/s)
092 Process initial set (Prohibited in the field) ×
Adjustment process
093 -
094 Adjustment mode display mode
096 Finished process and shipment setting (Prohibited in the field) ×
097 DIMM capacity check for Electronics RDH
098 DIMM check for Electronics RDH
1 HDD total capacity check
099 HDD 2 HDD remaining capacity check
3 HDD bad sectors check and recovery

1 ADJUSTMENT
Blank page

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[1] Centring Adjustment 4 a. Adjustment method
Caution: Centring adjustment need not be per- Step Operation

formed normally because paper incli- 1 Draw out the tray.
nation is detected in the second paper Loosen the two screws at the centre of
feed section and original image is cor- the tray. (7155/7165 : tray 1/2/3, 7255/
rected in the image processing unit to 2 7272 : tray 3/4)
fit an inclined paper. Centring adjust- Loosen the ten screws at the centre of
ment is required only when the the tray. (7255/7272 : tray 1/2)
detected paper inclination is not within Slide the guide plate to adjust the centre
the automatic image correction range. 3
position.
1. Tool
Tighten the two screws securely. (7155/
• Screwdriver (Phillips)
7165 : tray 1/2/3, 7255/7272 : tray 3/4)
4
Tighten the ten screws securely. (7255/
2. Tray 1/2/3 centring adjustment (7155/7165)
7272 : tray 1/2)
4 Tray 3/4 centring adjustment (7255/7272)
Insert the tray and make a copy to check
5
Guide
Guide plate
plate the result.
Perform steps 1-5 repeatedly until mis-
6 centring is included in the automatic
adjustment range (±3mm).
7 Perform the tray adjustment in 36 mode.
Caution: Disable the mis-centering correction

function by setting the dip switch 12-3
and confirm it (Enter 1 to set to ON).
Confirm it using the internal pattern
No.16
Screws
Screws
Standard value of mis-centring: within 3mm
4 Tray 1/2 centring adjustment (7255/7272)
Guide plate Within 3mm Centre of image
Centre of paper
Screws
Screws 7272fs1052
MODEL MANUAL REVISED EDITION

REVISED EDITION DATE
DATE PAGE
PAGE METHOD
METHOD
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE
7155/7165 SERVICE MANUAL
HANDBOOK 4 Dec. 2001
Nov. 2003 1-97 REPLACEMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
3. LCT tray centring adjustment a. Adjustment method

Step Operation
Guide plate/front Guide plate/rear
1 Raise the up/down plate.
2 Open the top cover.
Remove five screws to detach the side
cover (right).
Screws Screws
Screws
Screws
3
Center positioning
bracket
Right side
LT-402 LT-412 cover Screws
Screw Screw Loosen two screws on the upper part of

4 LCT to slide the guide plates (front/rear)
the same amount in the same direction.
Secure the guide plates by tightening
5
two screws firmly.
Loosen three screws to slide the centre
Centre positioning Centre positioning positioning brackets the same amount in
6
bracket bracket the same direction as you did for the
guide plates (front/rear) in the step 4.
Secure the centre positioning brackets
7
by tightening three screws firmly.
Put the LCT back into the original posi-
8
tion and make a copy to check the result.
Perform steps 1-8 repeatedly until mis-
9 centering is included in the automatic
adjustment range (±3mm).
Caution: Disable the mis-centering correction

function by setting the dip switch 12-3
(Enter 1 to set ON) and confirm it.
Confirm it using the test pattern
No.16.
1-98
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4. Setting the LCT Rear Guide (LT-412 only)
Standard value of mis-centring: within 3mm

Screws
Rear guide
Within 3mm Centre of image
Centre of paper
Rear guide
Screw
a. Adjustment method
Step Operation
Press SW100 (LT tray down switch) to
2
lower the up/down plate to the bottom.
Loosen two screws at the top of the rear
3
guide and one screw at the bottom.
Set paper on the up/down plate, align the
trailing edge of paper with the lower end
4
of the rear guide, then fasten the lower
screw.
Fasten the two upper screws temporarily
5 and move the up/down plate to the high-
est position.
Set paper on the up/down plate, align the
trailing edge of paper with the upper end
6
of the rear guide, then tighten the two
upper screws finally.
Reference: LCT tray size setting can be per-

formed in the key operation mode
by setting DIPSW21-1 to 1 in the 25
mode.
1-99
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[2] Skew adjustment (Main body) [3] Adjusting the LCT Paper Feed Roller
1. Tool Pressure (LT-412 only)
• Screwdriver (Phillips) Caution: This adjustment is required when no
2. Adjustment method paper feed occurs.
1. Tool
Screws • Screwdriver (Phillips)
Screws
2. Adjustment method
Screw Spring
Second paper
feed section
Piled plate
Mark
Step Operation
Step Operation
Make a copy to measure for skew. 2 Remove the spring.
1
Loosen the five screws securing the sec- Install a weight plate above the paper
2 3
ond paper feed unit. feed rollers using the two screws.
Rock the second paper feed unit to Make a copy to check whether paper is
3 4
adjust using the mark as a guide. fed properly.
Retighten the five screws. If paper is not fed properly, add another
4 5
weight plate and repeat steps 5 and 6.
Make adjustments by repeating steps 2
to 4 until the skew becomes within the 6 Install the spring.
5
specified range.
Caution: Four weight plates come standard
with the LCT, and can be installed up
Specified range:Paper skew ±5% or less to six.
(Paper skew in the paper
feed direction)
1-100
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[4] Paper up/down plate horizontal a. Adjustment method
adjustment (LT-402/LT-412 only) Step Operation
Caution: Up/down plate horizontal adjustment 1 Raise the up/down plate.
must be carried out when a paper feed 2 Open the top cover.
jam occurs frequently or after replace- Remove five screws to detach the side
ment of the up/down wires of a tray. cover (right).
1. Tool
2. LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment of LT- Screws
402
Screws
3
Up/down plate Up/down pulley
Side cover
Adjusting (right) Screws
screws
Open the jam access door, then remove
six screws to detach the front cover.
Jam access door
Up/down pulley
4
Up/down plate Screws

Screws
Screws
Side cover (right)
1-101
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
3. LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment of LT-

Step Operation 412
Remove three screws to detach the
clutch replacement cover.
Adjustment
Clutch screw
replacement
Screws Mark Screws
cover
Up/down plate
5
Screws Adjustment screws

Remove twelve screws to detach the
rear cover.
Mark
Screws
Up/down plate
6
Step Operation
1 Lift the up/down plate up.
Screws Open the top cover.
2
Loosen the two screws and adjust the
Screws
Screws Rear cover position using an adjustment screw and
3 the mark so that the front and rear of the
Loosen two screws and adjust the posi- up/down plate are at same height.
tion for each up/down pulley using an
7 adjustment screw so that the front and 4 Fasten two screws securely
rear of the up/down plate are at the same
height.
Fasten two screws securely for each up/
8
down pulley to fix its position.
Install the rear cover, clutch replacement
9
cover, front cover, and side cover (right).
1-102
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[5] Skew adjustment (LT-402/LT-412 b. Adjustment method (when some printed sheets
only) are skewed irregularly)
Step Operation
Caution: Skew adjustment is required when the
paper supplied from the current tray is Print a test pattern (No.16) in the contin-
1
different from the paper supplied from uous copy mode to check for skew.
other trays in the way it is skewed. 2 Remove the side cover (right).
However, this adjustment has little Loosen the five screws securing the
effect because skew of paper supplied guide plates (front and rear) and the cen-
from all trays is corrected in the sec- tering positioning bracket temporarily.
ond paper feed unit. Press the guide plates (front and rear)
1. Tool against paper, then tighten the five
• Screwdriver (Phillips) screws.
2. LCT skew adjustment
a. Adjustment method (when all printed sheets are Guide plate (front) Guide plate (rear)
skewed)
Step Operation
Print a test pattern (No.16) in the contin-
1
uous copy mode to check for skew. Screws
Screws
Open the jam access door of the LCT
and adjust the installation position of the
positioning bracket on the bottom plate.
3
Positioning
bracket
Screws
LT-402 LT-412
Centering Centering
positioning bracket positioning bracket
Reference: The indicated size of each guide

plate is about 2mm wider than the
size of regular paper. The 2mm gap
may cause paper skew depending
on the paper type. To reduce this
skew, press the guide plates (front
and rear) against paper tightly.
1-103
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[6] Tray spring pressure adjustment Change the spring hooking position at
the bottom of paper feed unit.
Caution: Tray spring pressure adjustment must
Weak: Double feed is prevented.
be performed when no feed or double
Strong: No feed is prevented.
feed of paper occurs. Tray spring
Reference: Reference: The spring load
pressure may be affected by the type
changes about 10% each
of paper used or the operating envi-
time the spring is hooked in
ronment (under low temperature con-
the next slit.
ditions, no feed of paper tends to
occur. Under high temperature condi-
tions, double feed of paper tends to 3
occur). Excessive adjustment of tray
spring pressure may exacerbate the Spring
problem. Take care.
1. Tool
• Screwdriver (Phillips) Weak
• Flat-nose pliers Strong

2. Tray 1/2/3 spring pressure adjustment
Step Operation
1 Draw out the tray. 4 Set the tray.
Remove one screw, loosen one hold-
down shaft screw, and detach the paper 3. By-pass paper feed spring pressure adjust-
feed unit. ment
Connector (CN814,834,854) Screws

Fixing shaft screw Bottom plate
Paper feed unit
2 Screw
Spring
Weak
Spring Strong
mounting hole
Step Operation
1 Remove the by-pass tray.
Remove two screws and detach the bot-
2
tom plate assembly.
1-104
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Change the spring hooking position. 5. PI spring pressure adjustment
Weak (standard) Strong
3 Reference: The spring load changes
about 15% each time the
spring is hooked in the next
slit.
4 Install the by-pass tray.
4. LCT spring pressure adjustment
Spring
Strong
Weak
Step Operation
Remove the following parts.
• Top cover
Step Operation 1
• Paper feed roller unit
1 Remove the LCT from the main body. • Double feed prevention roller
Change the spring hooking position. When adjusting the spring pressure for
Weak: Double feed is prevented. the lower tray, open the upper unit and
Strong: No feed is prevented. 2 detach the following parts.
2 Reference: The spring load changes • Paper feed roller unit
about 10% each time the • Double feed prevention roller
spring is hooked in the next Using flat-nose pliers, change the spring
slit. hooking position through the hole at dou-
3 Re-install the LCT. ble feed prevention roller.
Reference: Normally the spring hook-
3
ing position should be
changed when no feed
occurs. However, if the set-
ting for this position is too
strong, double feed may
occur for normal paper.
Install the parts, following the removal
4
steps in reverse.
1-105
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[7] Paper feed height (upper limit) adjust- a. Adjustment method

ment (LT-402/LT-412 only) Step Operation
Caution1: Paper feed height (upper limit) 1 Move the up/down plate up.
adjustment must be performed when 2 Open the top cover.
no paper feed occurs, when the lead-
Measure the distance between the top
ing edge of the fed paper is folded or
surfaces of the paper feed guide and
when a convexly curled paper is fed.
paper up/down plate and check whether
To perform this adjustment, move
it is within specifications.
the upper limit sensor mounting
3 Standard value: 2 to 5 mm
bracket vertically.
If the leading edge of the paper is folded
Caution2: This adjustment may affect the
irrespective of whether the above dis-
release amount of the pick-up so that
tance is within specifications, perform
[8] pick-up roller release amount
steps 4 and later.
adjustment must be performed after
this adjustment. Remove the spring from the paper pick-
1. Tool up roller unit.
• Scale Top cover
2. LCT Adjustment of paper feed height (upper Spring
limit)
Paper feed guide 4

Remove
this.
Paper feed
roller unit

Up/down plate
Screws
Remove two stop rings to slide the two
bearings outward, then remove the
paper feed roller unit.
Sensor mounting bracket
Bearing
Bearing
Stop ring Stop ring
Remove two screws securing the sensor

mounting bracket and install them in the
6
outside mounting holes (oblong holes)
temporarily.
1-106
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
<When the heights are not within speci- [8] Pick-up release amount adjustment
fications> (LT-402/LT-412 only)
Adjust the position of the sensor mount-
Caution: Pick-up release amount adjustment
ing bracket vertically so that the distance
must be performed when a no-feed
between the top surfaces of the paper
jam occurs frequently. To perform this
feed guide and paper up/down plate is
adjustment, adjust the mounting posi-
within the specifications.
tion of the pick-up solenoid.
1. Tool
When raising the height of the paper up/
down plate:
• Scale
Lower the sensor mounting bracket.
2. LCT pick-up release amount adjustment
7
When lowering the height of the paper Up/down plate paper feed roller
up/down plate:
Raise the sensor mounting bracket.
<When any fault has occurred>

When the paper has folded leading
edge: Up/down plate
When the paper has dented curl:
Raise the sensor mounting bracket. Pickup solenoid
When the paper has convex curl:
Lower the sensor mounting bracket.
Install the paper feed roller unit and
8
spring.
9 Close the top cover.
Screw
1-107
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
a. Adjustment method [9] RADF mounting position adjustment

Step Operation 1. Tool
1 Move the paper up/down plate up. • Screwdriver (Phillips)
2 Open the top cover. • Open-end wrench or flat-nose pliers.
3 Remove the paper feed pick-up cover/B.
Remove the spring from the paper feed
roller unit.
Adjusting screw B Adjusting screw A
Top cover
Spring
Paper feed
roller unit
Step Operation
Open the RADF, remove two screws and
Pull the moving parts of the pick-up sole- 1
detach the top cover (left).
noid and check whether the distance
between the bottom surface of the paper 2 Close the RADF.
feed roller and the top surface of the up/ Check if both stopper pieces on the
5 RADF side touch the slit glass.
down plate is within specification.
Specification: 0.5 to 2.5mm
If the distance is out of spec, perform
steps 5 and later.
Loosen one screw and adjust the mount-
ing position for the pick-up solenoid. Stopper piece Stopper piece
6
Caution: Take a note to remember the 3
initial mounting position. Screws
Secure the pick-up solenoid by tighten-
7
ing the screw.
8 Install the spring.
9 Install the paper feed pick-up cover/B.
Top cover (left)
10 Close the top cover.
If both stopper pieces do not touch the

4 slit glass, make adjustments using
adjusting screws A and B alternately.
Perform steps 3 and 4 repeatedly until
5 the two stopper pieces touch the slit
glass at the same time.
Using the two screws, install the top
6
cover (left).
1-108
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[10]

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[11] RADF paper skew adjustment

1. Face side of original paper skew adjustment
Note: Perform this adjustment after completing

the RADF skew adjustment described in
the previous page.
Registration roller Screw
Registration
roller bracket
Jam access cover
Step Operation
Make a copy in the single sided to single
sided copy mode, then check the skew
of the original. (Either pattern A or B)
Image
1
Copypaper
feed direction
Copy paper
Paper skew pattern A Paper skew pattern B
2 Open the Jam access cover.

Loosen the retaining screw to release
3
the registration roller bracket.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Move the registration roller bracket one 2. Back side of original paper skew adjustment
calibration in the direction below accord-
Jam access cover
ing to the paper skew pattern.
For skew in pattern A:
Move the registration roller bracket
4 downwards (direction down with orig-
inal feed flow).
For skew in pattern B:
Move the registration roller bracket
upwards (direction up towards original
feed flow).
R range adjustment plate
Repeat steps 2 to 4 unitl the original
5 skew is within specified range (0.5% or Screw
less).
Left side
Specified range: Paper skew ±0.5% or Right side

less (Paper skew in the paper feed direc-
tion) Step Operation
Make a copy in the double sided - single
sided copy mode, then check the skew
of the original. (Either pattern A or B)
Image
1
Copypaper
feed direction
Copy paper
Paper skew pattern A Paper skew pattern B
2 Open the Jam access cover.

Loosen the set screw and release the R
3
range adjustment plate.
Move the R range adjustment plate one
calibration in the direction below accord-
ing to the paper skew pattern.
For skew in pattern A:
4 Move the R range adjustment plate to
left side.
For skew in pattern B:
Move the R range adjustment plate to
right side.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 until the original
5 skew is within specified range (0.5% or
less).
Specified range: Paper skew ±0.5% or

less (Paper skew in the paper feed direc-
tion)
1-111
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4
[12] FNS Adjusting the magnets on the by- b. Adjustment
pass conveyance guide plate Step Operation
(FS-110/210) Loosen the two screws securing the
1
1. Tool magnet.
• Screwdriver (Phillips) Adjust the by-pass conveyance guide
2. Adjustment method plate to the direction indicated by the
a. Preparation 2
arrow, and press it against the convey-
Step Operation ance guide plate /L.
1 Open the front door. Adhere the magnets to the front panel
When the magnet on the by-pass con- and retighten the magnet securing
veyance guide plate is stuck to the front screws.
panel, check whether the stopping piece By-pass conveyance guide plate
of the plate makes contact with the con-
veyance guide plate /L.
By-pass conveyance guide plate
Conveyance guide plate /L Magnet
Front panel
Magnet
3
Screws
Cushioning
rubber
By-pass conveyance guide plate

Conveyance guide plate /L
4 Close the front door.

Cushioning
rubber
Cushioning rubber
If the stopping piece of the by-pass con-

veyance guide plate does not make con-
3
tact with the conveyance guide plate /L,
perform the following adjustment:

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [13] FNS adjusting the by-pass gate Step Operation
(FS-110/210) When the by-pass gate (SD705) is OFF,
1. Tool check the gap between the by-pass gate
• Screwdriver (Phillips) and the by-pass conveyance plate is
• Scale within the standard value.
2. Adjustment method Specifications: A=3.2±0.5mm
a. Preparation By-pass gate
Step Operation
1 Open the front door.
2 Draw out the stacker unit.
Remove the 2 screws securing the rail 5
stopper, and pull out the stacker unit
even further. By-pass
mm conveyance plate
Caution: To prevent the finisher from 0.5
3.2
toppling over, place a board or A=
the like to support the pulled-
out unit.
By-pass gate
3 If the gap is not within the standard

6
value, perform the following adjustment.
Stacker unit
Rail stopper
securing screw
Board to prevent the Finisher
from toppling over
Open the by-pass conveyance guide

4
plate.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment Step Operation

Step Operation Loosen two screws securing the by-pass
1 Take off the rear cover. gate SD (SD705) and adjust the position
Remove all cable assembly from the of SD705 so that the gap between the
connectors and clamps connecting to by-pass gate and by-pass conveyance
FNS CB (FNS control board). plate becomes within the standard
Clamp value.
Connector By-pass gate
A=
3.2
By-pass Screw 0.5
mm
conveyance plate
2 4
Mark
FNS control board
(FNS CB)
Screw
Remove five screws and detach the FNS
control board (FNS CB) together with its By-pass gate SD (SD705)
bracket.
Reinstall the parts in the opposite
Screws 5
sequence to removal.
Bracket
FNS CB
(FNS control
board)
1-114
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [14] FNS Adjusting the Shift Position b. Adjustment
(FS-110/210) Step Operation
1. Tool Loosen the screw fastening the bracket
• Screwdriver (Phillips) for the roller shift HP PS (PS718), and
2. Adjustment method shift the bracket to adjust the amount of
a. Preparation discrepancy using the mark as a guide.
Step Operation
1 • Top cover or option PI (if installed)
Shift HP PS (PS718)
• Top cover /2 Bracket
Power on the main body and drive the
2 roller shift (M702) using the 47 mode 1
(code 75-2/75-3).
At the both HP (home position) and shift
position, check whether the edge of the
actuator for the slide gear fits into the
notched hole of the slide stay.
Mark
Actuator Screw
Notch
Slide gear
When the position is confirmed, fasten
3 2
the screw securing the bracket.
Reassemble in the opposite sequence
3
to removal.
Slide stay
Shift unit
If the edge of the actuator for the slide

gear does not fit into the notched hole of
4
the slide stay, perform the following
adjustment:

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4
[15] FNS Adjusting the paper exit sole- b. Adjustment
noid Step Operation
(FS-110/210) Remove two screws securing the sole-
1. Tool noid bracket and remove the solenoid
• Screwdriver (Phillips) together with the bracket.
• Scale
a. Preparation Screws
Step Operation
1
• Top cover /1 or option PI (if installed)
1
• Top cover /2
• Rear cover
Power on the main body, and turn on the
2 paper exit solenoid (SD704) using the 47
mode (code 75-31).
With the paper exit solenoid (SD704) Solenoid bracket
ON, check whether the gap between the
plunger of solenoid and the stopper of Loosen the 2 screws holding the sole-
the bracket is within the spec value. noid, move the solenoid to adjust its
Spec value: A=6.5±0.5mm position, and retighten the screws.
Spec value:A=6.5±0.5mm
Paper exit nip SD Paper exit SD
(SD704)
(PS704)
3
A=6.5 0.5mm
If the gap is out of spec, perform the fol-

4
lowing adjustment. Screws

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Step Operation 4 [16] FNS Adjusting the mount location of
Place the solenoid to its original position, the paper exit arm (FS-110/210)
and tighten the screw securing the sole- 1. Tool
noid bracket at the position where the • Screwdriver (Phillips)
paper exit guide makes contact with the 2. Adjustment method
cushioning rubber of the paper exit guide a. Preparation
stay. Step Operation
Caution: Make sure that the difference Open the front door and pull out the
1
in height between the paper stacker unit.
exit guide and the paper exit When aligning the actuator edge of the
guide stay is 1mm and belt detection gear with the notch of
greater. panel /rear, check whether the top sur-
Solenoid bracket face of paper exit belt arm is positioned
Screws
in the middle of the two marks.
3
Stopping
rubber Paper exit
guide stay
Notch of panel /rear
Paper exit guide
Actuator edge
Belt detection gear
1mm
Paper exit guide

2

4
to the removal.
Top surface of paper exit belt arm
Marks
Perform the adjustment if it is out of

3
spec.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment 4 [17] FNS Adjusting the mount location of

Step Operation the alignment plates / U (FS-110/210)
Remove the two screws securing the rail 1. Tool
stopper and pull out the stacker unit • Screwdriver (Phillips)
even further. • Scale
To prevent the Finisher from toppling 2. Adjustment method
over, place a board or the like to support a. Preparation
the pulled-out unit. Step Operation
4 Power on the main body, perform the 47-
mode Code 75-8: Alignment/U (M705)
1
home position search, and then power
off.
1 Open the front door and pull out the
2
stacker unit.
Check whether the actuator of the align-
ment HP/U (PS708) is aligned with the
home position.
Stacker unit Alignment HP PS (PS708)

Actuator
Rail stopper
securing screw
Board to prevent the Finisher from toppling over
3
Remove the screw of the belt detection
gear, align the paper exit belt arm with
the specified position, and align the
detection gear with the specified position
to secure it.
Belt detection gear
Screw
Reassenble in the opposite sequence to

3
the removal.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Step Operation [18] FNS Adjusting the mount location of
4 Check whether the distances A for the the alignment plates / L (FS-210)
alignment plate /U are within specifica- 1. Tool
tion. • Screwdriver (Phillips)
+0 • Scale
Spec values: A=340.6 mm (within) 2. Adjustment method
- 1.5
A=340.6 0 mm a. Preparation
1.5
Step Operation
Make sure that "Adjusting the mount
Rear panel
4 1 location of the alignment plates / U" is
finished.
Power on the main body, drive the
motor(s) using the following codes in the
47 mode, and then power the machine
off.
Alignment HP /U • Code 75-8: Alignment /U (M705) HP
2
(PS708) search
Alignment plate /U 7272fs1048 • Code 75-21: Alignment /L (M716) HP
search
If they are out of spec, perform the fol- • Code 75-40: Stopper (M718) position-
5
lowing adjustment: ing shift (larger than 8.5x11R)
b. Adjustment Open the front door and pull out the
3
stacker unit.
Step Operation
After loosening two screws to position 4 Take off the stapler unit cover.
the rear side of the alignment plate /U to Check whether the actuators for the
the center of marking lines, adjust the alignment HP/ U (PS705) and the align-
location of its front side so that the ment HP/ L (PS724) are aligned with the
mounting location is within specification. home position.
Alignment plate /U
Screw
Screw
5
1
Alignment plate /L
Alignment HP PS/L
(PS724)
Alignment
plate /U
rear
Screw

DATE PAGE
PAGE METHOD
METHOD
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE
HANDBOOK 4 Dec.2003
Apr. 2003 1-119 REPLACEMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Step Operation 4 [19] FNS Adjusting the stapling position

Load paper sized 8.5x11R or larger, put (Flat stapling) (FS-110/210)
the paper against the alignment plate /U Caution: Do not use hands to move stapler unit
(rear) and the alignment plate /L (rear) to horizontal direction.
and check whether the paper is plumb. (Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth
In addition, check whether the distances skipping may occur.)
A for the alignment plate /L are within 1. Tool
specification. • Screwdriver (Phillips)
+0
Spec values: A=340.6 mm (within) • Scale
- 0.5
Paper Alignment plate /U a. Preparation
(rear)
Step Operation
6 Perform the following stapling actually
and check whether they are within spec-
Rear panel
surface ification. In the case of flat stapling,
check whether the paper edge is parallel
to the virtual line running between the
Alignment staplers.
plate /L
One-corner stapling One-point stapling
(at rear) (at front)
A=8.5 3mm
+0
A=340.6 - 0.5 mm
If they are out of spec, perform the fol- 1

7
lowing adjustment:
B=8.5 3mm
b. Adjustment
Step Operation Flat stapling
C=8.5 3mm
Loosen the two screws and perform the
adjustment so that the mount location of
the alignment plate /L are within specifi-
cation.
Alignment plate /L
Parallel
1
If they are out of spec or not parallel, per-

2
Alignment plate /L
form the following adjustment:
Screw
Screw

DATE PAGE
PAGE METHOD
METHOD
7155/7165 SERVICE
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICEHANDBOOK
MANUAL 4 Apr. 2003
Dec. 2003 1-120
1-1 REPLACEMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment 4 [20] FNS Adjusting the stapler vertical
Step Operation positioning (FS-110/210)
Open the front door and pull out the Caution: Do not use hands to move stapler unit
1
stacker unit. to horizontal direction.
2 Take off the stapler unit cover. (Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth
Loosen the adjustment screws for the skipping may occur.)
clincher /F and Clincher /R and perform 1. Tool
adjustment using marks as a guide. • Screwdriver (Phillips)
• Jig
a. Preparation
Step Operation
Execute stapling and check for buckled
staple-needles or clinching failure.
Caution: When replacing or removing a

clincher or stapler, perform
Clincher /F
3 adjustment after reinstalling.
Buckled
1 stapling
Clincher /R
Floating L
stapling L=1mm or less
Clincher /F Clincher /R
Height of L L=0.7mm or less

bent
staple-needle
Mark
When any defect described above can
2 be seen, perform the following adjust-
Mark Adjustment screw
ment:
Execute stapling to confirm that the sta- b. Adjustment
4
pling is within the specification range.
Step Operation
Open the front door and pull out the
1
stacker unit.
2 Take off the stapler unit cover.

DATE PAGE
PAGE METHOD
METHOD
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE
Nov. 2003 1-121
1-2 REPLACEMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT

Remove the cartridge, open the cover, Loosen the four screws for each
and then slide the staple sheet out. clincher.
Clincher /F Clincher /R
Cartridge
1 2 Staple sheet
3 5
Clincher /R
Clincher /F
Cover
Screws Screws
Remove the plate from the jig, install it so

Insert the two guide pins of the jig in the
that its hooks fit the hook holes, and then
hole of the clincher.
close the cover.
Caution: The positioning portion of the
Jig jig need not be engaged with
the clincher completely.
Jig
Cover
Hook
4 Cartridge
1
2 Plate
6
Hook holes
Hole Clincher
Jig
Guide pin
1-122
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Step Operation [21] FNS Adjusting the stapling position
Rotate the stapler gears downward. (stitch-and-fold) (FS-210)
Adjust the clincher position so that the Caution: Do not use hands to move stapler unit
plate on the cartridge fits smoothly into to horizontal direction.
the groove on the jig. Rotate the stapler (Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth
gear further to fit the plate in the groove skipping may occur.)
in the jig and the jig in the clincher unit 1. Tool
completely. • Screwdriver (Phillips)
a. Preparation
Step Operation
Execute stapling and check whether the
paper edge is parallel to the virtual line
connecting the two staples or whether
the amount of discrepancy is within
specification.
Spec value: within 1mm for the
7 amount of discrepancy
Gear
Staple
1
Groove
Plate
Parallel Within
1mm
If the amount of discrepancy for the

2 booklet is out of spec, perform the fol-
lowing adjustment:
Stapler
Tighten the four screws for each

8
clincher.
Rotate the stapler gears upwards to
remove the jig.
9 Caution: When removing the jig, be
careful not to break the myler
of the clincher.
Remove the cartridge, detach the plate,
insert the staple plate slide out on step3,
10
and place the cartridge to its original
position.
11 Check that the stapler operates properly.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment [22] FNS Adjusting the angle of the fold-

Step Operation ing stopper (FS-210)
Make sure that the "Adjusting the mount Caution: Do not use hands to move stapler unit
location of the alignment plates / U" and to horizontal direction.
1
"Adjusting the mount location of the (Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth
alignment plates / L" are finished. skipping may occur.)
Open the front door and pull out the 1. Tool
2
stacker unit. • Screwdriver (Phillips)
3 Take off the stapler unit cover. 2. Adjustment method
a. Preparation
Loosen the three screws securing the
alignment plate and adjust it using the Step Operation
mark as a guide. Execute stapling using A3 paper and
check whether the fold side discrepancy
Alignment for A3 paper is within the limit.
plate /L Limit: A= within 1mm
A= within 1mm
1
Mark Screws
4
Upper edge
If the amount of discrepancy is out of

2 specification, perform the following
adjustment:
Parallel
Mark Lower edge
Mark
After the adjustment, retighten the three

screws, execute stapling, and then
5
check that the aligned position is within
the specification range.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment [23] FNS Adjusting the folding force
Step Operation (FS-210)
Open the front door and pull out the 1. Tool
1
stacker unit. • Flat-nose pliers
2 Take off the stapler unit cover. 2. Adjustment method
a. Preparation
Loosen the five screws securing the fold-
ing stopper and adjust it using the mark Step Operation
as a guide. If necessary, change the force and pres-
1
sure of the folding rollers.
b. Adjustment
Step Operation
1 Remove the rear cover.
3 Open the front cover and pull out the
2 stacker unit.
3 Remove the stacker unit cover.
4
Change the mounting places of the two
Do not pressure springs for each of the front
Screws Loosen and rear.
screw
Folding Caution: The four pressure springs
Mark
stopper should be hooked on the hole
with the same character.
After the adjustment, retighten the five

A
screws and execute stapling to check
4 B
that the amount of discrepancy is within Front view
C
the specified limit.
C
B
4 A
C C
B B
A A
Rear view
7272fs1049

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Step Operation [24] FNS Adjusting the three-holding

Install the rear cover and stacker unit positions (FS-210)
5 cover, put the stacker unit away, and 1. Tool
close the front cover.
a. Preparation
Step Operation
Make sure that the "Adjusting the angle
1
of the folding stopper" is finished.
Execute three-holding and check
whether the three-holding positions are
c
a
2
4
Folding Reference value Specifi-
positions A4R 8.5x11 cation
a 95 89 ±1
b 101 95 ±1
c 101 95 ±1
Unit:mm
If the three-holding positions are out of
3
spec, perform the following adjustment:

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment [25] PK Adjusting the tilt of the punch hole
Step Operation position (PK-110)
Power on the main body. Use "7: Three- 1. Tool
hold positions adjustment" from "6: Fin- • Screwdriver (Phillips)
1 isher adjustment" on the 36 Mode, • Scale
adjust the first folded line (reference 2. Adjustment method
value a), and perform three-holding. a. Preparation
4 When the first folded line becomes Step Operation
2 within the spec value, open the front Check the following items:
door and pull out the stacker unit. • The finisher is connected to the main
Open the three-holding guide plate, body.
1
loosen the two screws securing the • The main body is loaded with the
three-holding stoppers, and adjust the paper based on the punch specifica-
stopper positions using the mark as a tions.
guide. Check the skew of output paper in
advance.
• Slide the side guide plate and the rear
guide plate for the main body's feed
2
tray, and align the paper loaded on the
3
main body's tray.
Marks • Check the skew by using the platen
copy or adjustment mode.
To check the tilt of the punch hole posi-
3 tion, make a sample copy in the punch
Screw mode.
Three-folding stopper Make three copies each in single side
Screw Three-folding
guide plate 4 copy mode and double side copy mode
with the punch mode to check the skew.
After the adjustment, retighten the two
screws and execute three-holding to
4
check that the three-holding positions
are within the specification.

DATE PAGE
PAGE METHOD
METHOD
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE
HANDBOOK 4 Dec.2002
May 2003 1-127 REPLACEMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment [25-1] PK Adjusting the tilt of the punch

Step Operation hole position (PK-120)
Measure the position of the sampled 2. Tool
punch holes to check the tilt of the posi- • Screwdriver (Phillips)
tion. • Scale
A
a. Preparation
Step Operation
Check the following items:
• The finisher is connected to the main
C body.
1 1
• The main body is loaded with the
paper based on the punch specifica-
tions.
Check the skew of output paper in
advance.
B
• Slide the side guide plate and the rear
Tilt of the punch hole position: guide plate for the main body's feed
2
A-B (Difference in position of the two tray, and align the paper loaded on the
punch holes)/C (Distance of hole pitch) main body's tray.
2 Open the front cover. • Check the skew by using the platen
copy or adjustment mode.
Loosen the two adjustment screws of
3 To check the tilt of the punch hole posi-
PK.
3 tion, make a sample copy in the punch
Using the mark scale as a guide, move
mode.
the punch unit horizontally by the
amount of tilt for the punch hole position. Make three copies each in single side
1 scale: 0.5% 4 copy mode and double side copy mode
with the punch mode to check the skew.
Adjustment side Adjusting in the direction of
of punch unit right and left
Adjustment screws Mark
5 Retighten the screws.

Make a sample copy of punch mode and
6 recheck the tilt of the punch hole posi-
tion.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment Step Operation
Step Operation Loosen the four adjustment screws of
4
Measure the position of the sampled PK.
punch holes to check the tilt of the posi- Using the mark scale as a guide, move
tion. the punch unit horizontally by the
A amount of tilt for the punch hole position.
1 scale: 0.5%
Adjustment screws
Adjust to the left or right
C
1
5
Tilt of the punch hole position: Mark

A-B (Difference in position of the two
Adjustment screws
punch holes)/C (Distance of hole pitch)
2 Open the front cover. 6 Retighten the screws.
Remove the punch unit cover by remov- 7 Reinstall the punch unit cover.
ing three screws. Make a sample copy of punch mode and
Punch unit cover 8 recheck the tilt of the punch hole posi-
tion.
Screw

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[26] PK Adjusting the punch hole vertical b. Adjustment

position (PK-110) Step Operation
Caution1: Perform this adjustment after finish- Fold the sample at the middle of the
ing the adjustment for the tilt of the paper, check the position of each punch
punch hole position. hole, and calculate the dimension to be
Caution2: Complete the PK adjusting the adjusted.
punch hole vertical position feeding
the paper from the by-pass tray first.
Then, perform this adjustment feed-
ing paper from the tray that is most
A
frequently used.
B
Caution3: If there is a difference in the punch
hole vertical position, perform the
centering adjustment for the trays of 1
main body or PI.
1. Tool Specified limit: (A-B) Error of position of
• Screwdriver (Phillips) the two punch holes))/2
• Scale
2. Adjustment method Reference: For adjustment of the
a. Preparation punch hole vertical posi-
tion, the dimension of the
Step Operation
punch hole vertical position
Check the following items: can be adjusted by ±5mm.
• The finisher is connected to the main Adjusting the hole pitch is
body. not allowed.
1
• The main body is loaded with the
2 Open the front cover.
paper based on the punch specifica-
tions. Loosen the two adjustment screws for
3
PK.
Check the skew of output paper in
advance. Using the mark scale as a guide, move
Slide the side guide plate and the rear the punch unit vertically to 1/2 the dis-
2 tance of the above dimension.
guide plate for the main body's feed tray,
and align the paper loaded on the main
body's tray.
Make three copies each in single side Adjust
copy mode and double side copy mode horizontally
3 4
with the punch mode to check the posi- Mark
tion of the holes.
Adjustment screws

Make a sample copy of punch mode and
6 recheck the discrepancy of the punch
hole vertical position.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[26-1] Sensitivity adjustment for the PK Step Operation
paper edge sensor (PK-120) Turn the volume fully clockwise and then
1. Tool turn it back counterclockwise until the
• Screwdriver (Phillips) LED corresponding to each volume
• Clock driver (Phillips) lights up.
a. Preparation
Step Operation Volumes
Check that the finisher is connected to
1
the main body.
b. Adjustment
Step Operation
1 Open the front door of the finisher.
Remove the punch drive board cover by 4
removing one screw.
Punch drive board cover Punch drive board (PKDB)
LED
Perform the procedure of step 4 for all

5
Screw five volumes.
Power on the main body. Power off the main body after complet-
3 6
ing the adjustment.
7 Reinstall the punch drive board cover.
8 Close the front door of the finisher.

7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK May 2002 1-130-1 REPLACEMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[27] PI Centering Adjustment (PK-110) Step Operation

Caution1: PI Centering adjustement must be When adjusting for the lower tray,
performed on the upper tray first, remove two screws and slide rightward
then on the lower tray. to remove the side guide plate (rear).
When it is necessary to slide the side
guide plate (rear) a lot, perform step
11 before step 3 and subsequent
procedures. 2
Caution2: When tightening two screws of the
side guide plate (rear), be careful not
to tighten them too much. (Tighten- Side guide plate
Screws
ing torque: less than 5kg/cm) (rear)
1. Tool
Loosen two adjustment screws securing
• Scale
the side guide plate (rear), and slide it by
the twice the difference. (ie: If there is
a. Preparation
1.5mm difference in direction of rear
Step Operation side, slide by 3mm to rear side.)
Check that PK adjusting the punch hole 1 scale : 2mm
1
vertical position has been completed.
Perform Tray 1/2/3 centering adjust- Side guide plate (rear)
2 3
ment.
Feed the three sheets from PI with the
3
punch mode.
Check the position of each punch hole
4 Adjustment
on the three sheets. screws
b. Adjustment
Step Operation
Fasten the two adjustment screws
Release the hook and remove the 4
securely to fix the side guide plate (rear).
adjustment cover of the side guide plate
In case of the lower tray, install the side
(rear). 5
guide plate (rear).
Adjustment cover
Set a sheet on the tray and fit the side
guide plate (rear) to the sheet to check
6
that the side guide plate (rear) is parallel
1 to the sheet.
Feed the three sheets from PI with the
7
punch mode.
Hook Check the position of each punch hole.
Side guide plate 8
(rear)
Repeat step 2 to 8 until the difference of
9
the holes is improved.
Install the adjustment cover to the side
10
guide plate (rear).
Set 8.5x11R size paper to the tray and
11 perform the cover sheet tray size adjust-
ment in 36 mode.

7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK May 2002 1-130-2 REPLACEMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[27-1] Adjusting the tilt of PI (when PK Step Operation
punch is used) (PK-110) Using the mark as a guide, move the
1. Tool guide plate laterally by the amount of tilt
• Screwdriver (Phillips) in the position of punch holes.
• Scale
a. Preparation
Step Operation
Check the following items:
1 • PI is connected to FNS.
• The tray of PI is loaded with paper.
Check the tilt of output paper in advance.
• Feed 3 sheets from PI with the Punch 4
2
mode selected to check the tilt of
punch holes. Screw securing
the guide plate
Loosen one screw securing the guide
3
plate.
b. Adjustment
Step Operation
Fold each of the fed 3 sheets into two as Tilting toward Tilting toward
the right edge the left edge
illustrated below and find out in which of the sheet of the sheet
direction the punch holes tilt.

Tilting toward Tilting toward
the right edge the left edge Retighten the screw securing the guide
of the sheet of the sheet 5
plate.
1 Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the amount of tilt
6 in the position of punch holes is
improved.
2 Open the FNS front cover.

Loosen one screw securing the guide
3
plate.

7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK May 2002 1-130-3 ADDITION
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[27-2] Sensitivity adjustment for the PZ Step Operation

paper edge sensor (PZ) Turn the volume fully clockwise and then
1. Tool turn it back counterclockwise until the
• Screwdriver (Phillips) LED corresponding to each volume
• Precision driver (Phillips) lights up.
a. Preparation
Step Operation
Check that PZ is connected to the main
1
body.
b. Adjustment PZ control board

Step Operation (PZCB)
3
Loosen two screws in the lower part of
PZ rear cover, remove two screws in the
upper part, and then remove the rear
cover.
Relation between VR to adjust and

LED to check.
VR 1 → LED 2
1 VR 2 → LED 3
VR 3 → LED 4
VR 4 → LED 5
VR 5 → LED 6
Perform the procedure of step 3 for all

4
Screws five volumes.
Power off the main body after complet-
Screws (loosen) Rear cover 5
ing the adjustment.
2 Power on the main body. 6 Reinstall the rear cover.

7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK Apr. 2003 1-130-4 REPLACEMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[28] FNS Stapler Driver Belt Position Step Operation
Adjustment (FS-110/210) Move the stapler/clincher to the center at
CAUTION: Stapler drive belt position adjust- the same time until it stops at the bear-
ment is only performed when the ing.
positions of drive belt and gear are 2 Caution: Make sure to move them at
misaligned when following other the same time, otherwise, the
adjustment procedures. flat-stapling stopper may frac-
1. Tool ture at the stapler plate.
Install the stapler PS jig to the stapler
• Stapler PS jig
and clincher/R, and adjust the horizontal
• Hexagonal wrench
position of the stapler and the clincher.
a. Preparation
Step Operation
Groove
Remove the following parts:
1 • Rear cover Plate
• Stapler unit cover
2 Insert the stacker unit.
b. Adjustment
Step Operation 3
Loosen two M3 screws of the staple slide
pulley/B from the backside.
Stapler
Caution: Do not loosen the screws on

the clincher. In order to adjust
the position, move the stapler
/R or the clincher/R slightly
toward the horizontal direc-
tion.
1 Insert the stacker while the jig is installed
4 (that is, when the plate and the jig are
compleetely locked with each other.
Tighten two screws of the staple slide
5
pulley/B from the backside.
Pull out the stacker unit and remove the
jig. Then, check the staple for the follow-
ing movements:
6
• Stapling at one position/rear
• Stapling at one position/front
Staple slide pulley/B • Stapling at two positions
Screws Install the rear cover and the stapler
7 cover when the adjustment is com-
pleeted.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4
[29] Adjusting the PZ Paper-Path Switch- Step Operation
ing Solenoid (PZ) Open the front door of FNS, remove the
1. Tool 1 front cover of PZ (three screws), and
• Screwdriver (Phillips) remove PZ from the main body.
2. Adjustment method Remove the AC cord and the rear cover
2
(four screws).
Pull out the z-folding/conveyance unit.
Remove the two screws from the rail and
further draw out the unit.
Screws
Registration guide plate

3
Gate SD/L (SD1) OFF

Screw (for Gate SD/L
bracket) (SD1) Gate/L
Front cover
Z-folding/conveyance unit 7272fs1002
mm
Loosen two screws securing the sole-

A=5
4
noid bracket.
Make sure that the gate solenoid/L
(SD1) is OFF, and adjust the position of
the solenoid bracket so that the gap
OFF 5 between the gate tip and the registration
guide plate is within the specification
Screw (for bracket)
Registration guide plate
range. Fasten the two screws.
Spec range: 3 to 5mm (viewing)
Gate SD/L (SD1) ON Loosen two screws securing the sole-
6
noid.
Screws (for solenoid)
ss
or le
mm
B=2
ON
7272fs1001

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [30] Adjusting the Tension of the PZ
Step Operation
Punch Shift Timing Belt (PZ)
Make sure that the gate solenoid/L
(SD1) is ON, and adjust the position of 1. Tool
the solenoid bracket so that the gap • Screwdriver (Phillips)
between the gate tip and the registration • Tension gauge or spring balance
guide plate is within the specification 2. Adjustment method
7
range. Fasten the two screws.
Spec range: 2 to 4.6mm
* The plunger must operate smoothly
when the solenoid is turned ON or OFF.
to removal.
Caution: The conveyance unit must be

inserted so that the plate on
the conveyance unit (see the
figure below) is positioned in
side the rail on the enclosure.
The tension of the timing belt

must be measured at the root
Screw of the punch shift motor shaft.
8 A=4 0.4kg
Plate Screw
Punch shift motor (M5)
Punch shift timing belt
7272fs1004
Step Operation
1 Remove the PZ from the main body.
Remove the four screws to remove the
2 rear cover.
Rail
Loosen the two screws holding the
3 punch shift motor (M5).
7272fs1003
Use a tension gauge or a spring balance
to measure the tension at the A point.
When a specification value is observed,
tighten the screws.
4 Spec value: A = 4 ± 0.4kg
Note: The tension must be measured at
the root of the motor shaft. Oth-
erwise, the measuring operation
may cause the shaft to bend.
Reinstall the rear cover using four
5 screws.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4
[31] Adjusting the PZ 1st Folding Skew
Step Operation
(PZ)
Pull out the z-folding/conveyance unit.
1. Tool Remove two screws from the rail and fur-
• Screwdriver (Phillips) ther draw out the conveyance unit.
Screws
Screw
Left Ticks Supporting point
Z-folding/conveyance unit 7272fs1007
Remove four screws to remove the z-

folding/conveyance unit cover.
Right Screws Screw
Screws
1st stopper assembly Z-folding/conveyance unit cover
7272fs1005
Step Operation
5
1 Set 11x17 paper into the tray.
Set the original chart and make a copy of
it. Check the copy for a possible folding
skew.
Spec range: within 0.5mm Z-folding/conveyance unit Screws
7272fs1008
1st folding
0.5mm or less 0.5mm or less Loosen four screws securing the 1st
6
folding stopper assembly.
2 Make adjustments by moving the 1st
stopper assembly right or left using the
ticks for reference.
Skew pattern A Skew pattern B
7 Skew pattern A:Move the 1st stopper
7272fs1006
assembly to the left.
Skew pattern B:Move the 1st stopper
If the folding skew is outside the spec
assembly to the right.
range, adjust according to the instruc-
tions described in the following steps. Temporarily tighten four screws hold-ing
the 1st stopper assembly, and put the
3 Open the front door of the FNS.
8 conveyance unit into the basis position.
Make a copy of the adjustment chart to
check for 1st folding skew.
Repeat Steps 6 to 8 until the 1st folding
9 skew falls within the spec range (0.5mm
or less).

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [32] Adjusting the Position of the PZ 2nd
Step Operation
Folding Stopper (PZ)
Tighten firmly four screws on the 1st
10 Caution: This adjustment affects the 2nd fold-
stopper assembly.
ing skew. Therefore, first complete
this adjustment and then proceed to
to removal.
the [39] Adjusting the PZ 2nd Folding
Caution: The conveyance unit must be Skew section.
inserted so that the plate on 1. Tool
the conveyance unit (see the • Screwdriver (Phillips)
figure below) is positioned in • Hex wrench
side the rail on the enclosure. 2. Adjustment method
Hex, screw Hex, screw
Pulley Pulley
11
Plate
Shaft
2nd folding
stopper 2nd folding
stopper
Rail
7272fs1009
Guide
plate
Paper stopper
A=20 0.5mm 7272fs1010

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Step Operation 4 [33] Adjusting the PZ 2nd Folding Skew

Set paper into the tray and make a copy 2nd Stopper Assembly (PZ)
1 (required to place the paper stopper at Caution: Before beginning this operation, com-
its HP position). plete the adjustment described in the
Open the front door of the FNS and draw [38] Adjusting the Position of the PZ
2
out the conveyance unit. 2nd folding Stopper section.
Make sure that the distance between the 1. Tool
edge of the guide plate and the paper • Screwdriver (Phillips)
stopper is within the specification range. 2. Adjustment method
3 Spec range: A = 20 ± 0.5mm
If the distance is outside the spec range,
adjust according to the instructions
described in the following step.
Loosen the screws holding the pulleys
and adjust the distance by rotating the
pulleys. Tighten the screws.
Note: Do not rotate the shaft on which 2nd folding stopper

4 the pulleys are attached. If it is assembly
rotated for some reason, the Screw Ticks
Ticks Screw
stopper is placed out of its HP
position. Then perform the proce-
dure again from Step 1.
Screw Screw
7272fs1011
Step Operation
1 Set A3 paper into the tray.
Set the original chart and make a copy of
it. Check the copy for a possible 2nd fold-
ing skew.
Spec range: within 2mm
2
2mm or less 2mm or less
Skew pattern A Skew pattern B
7272fs1012
If the folding skew is outside the spec

range, adjust according to the instruc-
tions described in the following steps.
MOpen the front door of the FNS and
3
draw out the conveyance unit.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [34] FNS Adjusting the Magnets on Con-
Step Operation
veyance Guide Plate B (FS-111)
Loosen the four screws holding the 2nd
4 1. Tool
stopper assembly.
Make adjustments by moving the front or 2. Adjustment method
rear side of the 2nd stopper assembly a. Preparation
upward using the ticks for reference.
Step Operation
5 Skew pattern A: Move the rear side of
the 2nd stopper assembly upward. 1 Open the front cover.
Skew pattern B: Move the front side of Check whether conveyance guide plate
the 2nd stopper assembly upward. B makes contact with the cushioning
2
Temporarily tighten the four screws hold rubber when the magnets are stuck to
ing the 2nd stopper assembly, and put conveyance guide plate A.
6 the conveyance unit into the basis posi- If conveyance guide plate B does not
tion. Make a copy of the adjustment make contact with the cushioning rub-
3
chart to check for 2nd folding skew. ber, remove the rear cover and carry out
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 above until the 2nd adjustment as described below.
7 folding skew falls within the spec range
b. Adjustment
(2mm or less).
Step Operation
Tighten firmly the four screws on the 2nd
8 Detach all FNS CB (FNS control board)
stopper assembly. 1
connectors.
Remove the 2 set screws holding the
FNS CB in place. Remove the FNS CB
together with its bracket.
FNS CB (Finisher Control Board)
Bracket
Screws 7272fs1015
Loosen the 4 magnet-holding set screws

(two at the front and two at the back), and
3 move conveyance guide plate B all the
way in the direction indicated by the
arrow.
4 Remove the E-ring and the gear.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [35] FNS Adjusting the Magnets on Con-

Step Operation
veyance Guide Plate C (FS-111)
Adhere the magnets to conveyance
guide plate A and retighten the set 1. Tool
screws. • Screwdriver (Phillips)
Magnet a. Preparation
(rear) Step Operation
Magnet 1 Open the front cover.
Gear (front) Check whether conveyance guide plate
5 C makes contact with the cushioning
2
E-ring rubber when the magnets are stuck to
conveyance guide plate D.
If conveyance guide plate C does not
make contact with the cushioning rub-
3
Conveyance ber, remove the rear cover and carry out
Conveyance Guide Plate A adjustment as described below.
Guide Plate B 7272fs1016
b. Adjustment
Reassemble in opposite sequence to
6 Step Operation
removal.
Detach all FNS CB (FNS control board)
1
connectors.
FNS CB in place. Remove the FNS CB
together with its bracket.
Bracket
Screws 7272fs1017
Loosen the 4 magnet-holding set screws

(two at the front and two at the back), and
3 move conveyance guide plate C all the
way in the direction indicated by the
arrow.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [36] FNS Adjusting the Sub-tray Paper
Step Operation
Exit Gate (FS-111)
Adhere the magnets to conveyance
guide plate A and retighten the screws. 1. Tool
Magnet • Scale
(rear) 2. Adjustment method
Magnet
(front) a. Preparation
Step Operation
4 Remove the 2 set screws holding the
FNS CB (FNS control board) in place.
Remove the FNS CB together with its
bracket.
Conveyance Bracket
Conveyance
Guide Plate D
Guide Plate C 7272fs1018
Reassemble in opposite sequence to 1

5
removal.
Screws 7272fs1019
Remove the wirings from the clamps,

and move the FNS CB together with its
bracket.
Clamps Clamps
Clamps
Clamp Clamps Clamps

7272fs1020

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [37] FNS Adjusting the Paper-Path

Step Operation
Switching Gate (FS-111)
With SD2 (sub-tray paper exit) OFF,
measure the gap between the sub-tray 1. Tool
gate and the guide plate (indicated by A • Screwdriver (Phillips)
3
in the illustration). • Scale
Spec value for gap: A = 4 ±0.5mm. 2. Adjustment method
a. Preparation
With SD2 ON, measure the gap between
the solenoid plunger and the bracket Step Operation
stopper (indicated by B in the illustra- Remove the following parts.
tion). 1 • Rear cover
Spec value for gap: B = 5 ±0.5mm. • Top cover
SD2
(Sub-tray FNS CB (FNS control board) in place.
Paper Exit) Remove the FNS CB together with its
bracket.
4 FNS CB (Finisher Control Board)
Sub-tray Gate Bracket
7272fs1021
If either gap is out of spec, carry out

5
adjustment as described below.
Screws 7272fs1023
b. Adjustment
Step Operation
Loosen the 2 set screws holding the
solenoid in place, and move the solenoid
as necessary to adjust.
Screws
Solenoid 7272fs1022

Reinstall in opposite sequence to
3
removal.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment
Step Operation
Step Operation
and move the FNS CB together with its
solenoid in place, and move the solenoid
bracket.
Clamps
as necessary to adjust.
Clamps Clamps
Screws
3 1
Clamp Clamps Clamps

7272fs1024 Solenoid 7272fs1026
With SD1 (gate) ON, measure the dis- 2 Retighten the screws.
tance between the long gate and the
guide plate, indicated by A in the illustra- 3
4 to removal.
tion.
Spec value for distance:
A = 7.6±0.5mm.
Again with SD1 ON, measure the gap
between the solenoid plunger and the
bracket stopper (indicated by B in the
illustration).
Spec value for gap: B = 5±0.5mm.
Gate
Guide
Plate
5
SD1
(Gate)
7272fs1025
If either measurement is out of spec,

6 carry out adjustment as described
below.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4
[38] FNS Adjusting the By-pass Gate
Step Operation
(FS-111)
1. Tool and move the FNS CB together with its
• Screwdriver (Phillips) bracket.
• Scale
Clamps Clamps
2. Adjustment method Clamps
a. Preparation
Step Operation
1 Remove the rear cover.
4
Open the front cover and the guide plate.
Guide Plate
2 Clamps
Clamp Clamps
7272fs1029
With SD5 (by-pass) OFF, measure the

distance between the by-pass gate and
the guide plate, indicated by A in the
5
7272fs1027 illustration.
Remove the 2 set screws holding the Spec value for distance:
FNS CB in place. Remove the FNS CB A = 4.3±0.5mm
together with its bracket. With SD5 ON, measure the gap between
the solenoid plunger and the bracket
Bracket
stopper (indicated by B in the illustra-
tion).
Spec value for gap: B = 5±0.5mm
SD5 (By-pass)
3
Screws 7272fs1028
Guide Plate Gate
7272fs1030
If either measurement is out of spec,

below.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment 4 [39] FNS Adjusting the Shift Position
Step Operation (FS-111)
Loosen the 2 set screws holding the 1. Tool
solenoid in place, and move the solenoid • Screwdriver (Phillips)
as necessary to adjust. 2. Adjustment method
Solenoid a. Preparation
Step Operation
1 • Rear cover
1 • Top cover
2 Switch the power OFF to ON to OFF.
With the M2 (roller shift) OFF (home
position), check that the actuator on
PS18 (roller shift HP) is correctly aligned
with the cutout on the shift-unit mounting
Screws
7272fs1031
plate.
Actuator
3
to removal.
3
Cutout on Mounting Plate 7272fs1032
If the actuator is not correctly aligned

4 with the cutout, carry out adjustment as
described below.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment 4 [40] FNS Adjusting Opening/Closing at

Step Operation the Paper Exit (FS-111)
Loosen the screw holding the PS18 1. Tool
(roller shift HP) bracket in place, and • Screwdriver (Phillips)
adjust the bracket position as necessary. 2. Adjustment method
a. Preparation
Screw
Step Operation
1 • Rear cover
1 • Top cover
Switch the power OFF to ON to OFF.
Then, with the paper exit closed, confirm
that the paper exit casing is firmly
against the stopper section.
Screw
Bracket 7272fs1033
2 Retighten the screw.

2
3
to removal.
Bracket 7272fs1033
If the casing is not in firm contact with the

3 stopper, carry out adjustment described
as follows.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment 4 [41] FNS Adjusting the Paper Exit-Open-
Step Operation ing Solenoid (FS-111)
Loosen the set screw holding the PS12 1. Tool
(paper exit-opening detector) bracket in • Screwdriver (Phillips)
place, and adjust the bracket position as • Scale
necessary. 2. Adjustment method
a. Preparation
Bracket
Step Operation
1 • Rear cover
1
• Top cover
With SD4 (paper exit-opening solenoid)
ON, measure the gap between the sole-
noid plunger and the bracket stopper.
Spec value for gap: A = 6.0 ±0.5mm
Screw
SD4 (Exit Opening)
7272fs1035
2 Retighten the bracket set screw.

2
3
to removal.
7272fs1036
If the gap is out of spec, carry out adjust-

3
ment describe as follows.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment 4 [42] FNS Adjusting the Paper Exit-Open-

Step Operation ing Lower Guide Plate (FS-111)
Remove the 2 set screws holding the 1. Tool
solenoid bracket in place, and remove • Screwdriver (Phillips)
the solenoid together with the bracket. • Scale
Solenoid Bracket
a. Preparation
Step Operation
1 1 • Rear cover
• Top cover
With SD4 (paper exit-opening solenoid)
OFF, confirm that the paper exit-opening
lower guide plate is a sufficient distance
(distance A) higher than the sponge roll-
ers.
Screws 7272fs1037 Spec value: A = 1.5mm and greater
Loosen the 2 screws holding the sole- Lower Guide Plate
noid to the bracket, and adjust the posi-
tion of solenoid.
2 A=1.5mm and greater
Solenoid Bracket
Sponge Roller 7272fs1039
Screws 7272fs1038
Retighten the 2 solenoid screws, then

replace the solenoid and bracket into
3
their original position and screw in the 2
bracket screws.
4
to removal.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [43] FNS Adjusting the Mount Location of
Step Operation
the Paper Exit Arm (FS-111)
Hold down the paper exit-opening lower
guide plate with your hand so that the 1. Tool
paper exit roller makes contact, and • Screwdriver (Phillips)
check that the remaining stroke for sole- 2. Adjustment method
noid SD4 (distance B) is within spec. a. Preparation
Spec value: B = 2.5±0.5mm Step Operation
PRemove the screw to remove the belt
B=2.5 0.5mm 1
detection gear.
SD4 (Paper
Exit Opening) When the stacker paper exit arm is at the
position shown below, secure the belt
3 detection gear with a screw with the
actuator end face of the belt detection
gear aligned with the bottom of the
square hole.
Paper Exit
Lower Actuator end face Screw
Guide Plate
7272fs1040
If either measurement is out of spec, Belt detection Bottom of square hole

below.
2
b. Adjustment
Step Operation
solenoid bracket in place, and adjust the
position of the bracket so that distances
A and B are within spec.
Stacker paper exit arm
7272fs1042
Solenoid Bracket
Screws 7272fs1041
2 Retighten the 2 bracket set screws.

Reassemble in the reverse sequence to
3
removal.
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4
[44] FNS Adjusting the Mount Location of b. Adjustment
the Upper Alignment Plates (FS-111) Step Operation
1. Tool Move the upper alignment plates into
• Screwdriver (Phillips) home position. (Move so that the actua-
• Scale tor on the upper-alignment-plate drive
2. Adjustment method belt is at PS8 (upper-alignment-plate
a. Preparation HP).
Step Operation PS8 (Upper Alignment Plate HP)
Open the front cover and pull out the Actuator
1
stacker/stapler unit.
1
7272fs1043
Loosen the 2 set screws fixing the upper

alignment plates in place (one screw on
each plate), and adjust the plates so that
distances A and B are within specifica-
tion.
Spec values: A = 338±1.0mm
B = 40.7±0.5mm
Screws
Rear
Panel
2
Upper Alignment Plates

7272fs1044

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [45] FNS Adjusting the Tension of the 4 [46] FNS Adjusting the Stapling Position
Upper Alignment Plate Drive Timing (Flat Stapling) (FS-111)
Belt (FS-111) 1. Tool
1. Tool • Screwdriver (Phillips)
• Screwdriver (Phillips) • Scale
2. Adjustment method 2. Adjustment method
a. Preparation a. Preparation
If the upper alignment plate drive belt Check whether the virtual line running
tensioner has been loosened as a result between the stoppers is parallel to the
1 virtual line between the staplers.
of belt replacement or for some other
reason, adjust as described below. This illustration is for FS-211. FS-111
has 4 flat-stapling stoppers.
b. Adjustment method (when some printed sheets
are skewed irregularly) Staple Positions
Step Operation
Loosen the 2 set screws (see illustra-
1
tion). 1
Move the belt tensioner so that the end
is aligned with the center mark on the
scale, and retighten the screws.
Belt Tensioner Scale
Screws
2 Flat-Stapling Stoppers 7272fs1046
If the lines are not parallel or if you need

2 to change the stapling position, carry out
adjustment as described below.
7272fs1045

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment 4 [47] SF-101 Testing Operation

Step Operation 1. Onboard Switch
Loosen the 3 set screws holding the flat- DIP
stapling stopper bracket in place, and switch Function
position the bracket so that distance A is (SW100)
within the specification range.
SW100-1 No condition to be set.
Spec range: A = 5.5 to 11.5mm
(initial value = 8.5mm) SW100-2
Testing operation is set.
SW100-3
SW100-4 Testing operation is executed.
Adjust
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
Scale Scale Scale
7272fs1047
7272fs1050
Hold paper against the stoppers and
2 confirm that all three stoppers are in
alignment.
Execute stapling to confirm that the stop-
3
per line and stapler line are parallel.

OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
2. Adjustment method 3. Each Test Mode Operation
a. Preparation a. Movement to tray lower limit sensor position
Step Operation SW100-4 :OFF
↓
Check that SF-101 is connected to the
1 ON
main body.
↓
Remove the cover/R. OFF
Caution: Keep the conveyance cover
2 The shift tray is moved down when
closed after removing the
cover/R. M702 (Tray up/down motor) is turned
ON.
b. Operation M702 is turned OFF when PS704
Step Operation (Toner lower limit sensor) is turned ON.
1 Turn ON the power of main body.
Set the DIP switches 2 and 3 in accor- b. M701 (Conveyance motor) driving (300msec)
dance with the testing operation. SW100-4 :OFF
↓
Testing Operation DIP switch ON
2 3 ↓
Movement to the tray OFF
lower limit sensor position OFF OFF
M701 (Conveyance motor) M701 (Conveyance motor) is turned

ON OFF
2 driving (300msec) OFF 300msec. after it is turned ON.
M703 (Shift motor) driving
OFF ON
(shift operation: one time)
c. M703 (Shift motor) driving
(Tray up/down motor) initial ON ON SW100-4 :OFF
operation
(Moving downward ↓
Moving upward) ON
↓
7272fs1051 OFF
Immediately after turning ON the DIP The shifting is started when M703
3 switch 4, turn it OFF and check whether (Shift motor) is turned ON.
the predetermined operation is started. M703 is turned OFF when PS702
Once the testing operation is completed, (Shift HP sensor) is turned ON.
4
turn OFF all the DIP switches 1 to 4.
5 Reinstall the cover/R. d. M702 (Tray up/down motor) initial operation
SW100-4 :OFF
↓
ON
↓
OFF
The shift tray is moved down when

M702 (Tray up/down motor) is turned
ON, and then it is moved up in reverse
after a specified time is passed.
M702 is turned OFF when PS703
(Tray upper limit sensor) is turned ON.

1 ADJUSTMENT
Blank page

2
ISW
2 ISW
2 ISW
Blank page
What's ISW?
WHAT'S ISW?
4
ISW (In-System Writer) is a process of updating the control programs stored in flash ROM mounted on var-
ious control boards in a digital copier without isolating the boards from the copier. Running ISW enables you
to upgrade control programs without replacing the boards and maintain the boards during their replacement.
Tool available for running ISW include ISW Trns (PC software), which connects a personal computer (PC)
to the digital copier.
This tool can be plugged into the ISW connector or USB connector (7255/7272) of the digital copier to directly
update the control programs in flash ROM assembled in the machine.
The copier can be directly connected to the internet without PC interface to update the control programs in
2 ISW
the flash ROM.
This chapter focuses on instructions to set up this machine to run ISW. For instruction on how to run ISW
Trns refer to the ISW (In-System Writer) Service Handbook.
Note: Only ISW Trns is enabled with ISW for this machine and the program cannot be updated via ISW Tool.

SETUP
SETUP
4 [1] ISW-compatible boards
7155/7165/7255/7272 allows ROM data residing
on the following boards to be updated via ISW:
• Image control board
• Printer control board
• Finisher control board (Except for FS-111)
The ROMs of other boards than the above need
to be replaced.
2 ISW
[2] Data flow

PC Image control board
Printer control board
Finisher control board
Important Note:
The availability of the image control program is
prerequisite to updating on other boards.
[3] Prepare the copier to start an ISW
transfer
1. Transfer modes
The copier supports two transfer modes as
described below.
• Power-on mode
If the copier does not have the image control
program installed, the program can be sent
directly from a PC to the machine when the
main switch is turned on.
• 25 mode
The 25 mode will only work if the image control
program is installed.

2-2
SETUP
2. Instance of ISW transfer

Instances of ISW transfer are as described below:
• Writing ROM data newly (Ex. when replacing boards)
Normal startup display Writing method Condition
Image control Flashing timer LED Writing is enabled with The copier does not have the
No display on the operation power turned ON. image control program installed.
LCD
2 ISW
Others Error code display 25 mode The copier has the image control
program installed.
• Upgrading
Normal startup display Writing method Condition
Image control Normal 25 mode The copier has all the programs
Others Normal installed.
3. Error Code
Error Code Description Action No.
01 There is an error in the command to ISW processing unit. a
1F A program error is detected. a
41 Input data format error. b
42 Invalid machine name input data. b
43 Invalid board name input data. b
81 Input device error such as input timeout. c
C1 Failed to erase flash ROM. (during ISW to image control board) d
C2 Failed to write to flash ROM. (during ISW to image control board) d
C3 ROM checksum error. (during ISW to image control board) e
C4 Output device error such as output timeout. f
Failed to erase flash ROM. (during ISW to printer control board and FNS
E1 control board) g
Failed to write to flash ROM. (during ISW to printer control board and FNS
E2 control board) g
Communication error between image control board, printer control board,

E3 and FNS control board (during ISW to printer control board and FNS control h
board)
<Error code table action classification >
(a) Program is not executing normally. Restart (d) There is an error in the flash ROM on the
from power ON and re-execute the ISW. image control board. Restart from ISW. If
(b) Check the ISW transfer data file. the error persists, the life of the image con-
(c) Check that the communication cable trol board flash ROM may have expired.
between input devices (PC or ISW tool) is Replace the image control board.
properly connected.

SETUP
(e) The checksum result after program writing [4] Preparing the copier to transfer
does not match the ROM checksum data of Start the copier with 25 mode enabled to put the
the ISW transfer data file. Restart from ISW. copier into ISW transfer wait state.
If the error persists, the ISW transfer data In normal case
file may not be created correctly. Step Procedure
(f) An error was detected in the ISW board tar-
1 Enter 25 mode.
geted at that time. Check the ISW board.
(g) There is an error in the flash ROM on the [Memory setting mode menu Screen]
2
2 ISW
printer control board or FNS control board. Press " 11 ISW".

Restart from ISW. If the error persists, the
[ISW mode menu Screen]
life of the targeted flash ROM may have
3 Select the control board on which to
expired. Replace the targeted control
update ROM data.
board.
(h) Check the I/F between the image control [ISW mode Screen]
board and printer control board, or IF The Start key appears, indicating the
4
between printer control board and FNS con- copiers readiness to launch an ISW
trol board. transfer.
Follow operating instructions in ISW (In-
5
System Writer) Service Manual.

SETUP
[5] Relationships between processing

states and operational LEDs
Note: This is displayed only when installing the
program to graphics control for the first
time.
2 ISW
TIMER
POWER SAVE
ON/OFF
No. Processing TIMER LED (orange) POWER SAVE LED (green)

1 Initializing CPU now OFF OFF
2 Checking memory OFF OFF
3 Memory check error (waiting for data Flashing OFF
from PC)
4 ISW processing (receiving data) OFF Flashing
5 ISW processing (writing to flash ROM) OFF Flashing
6 Transfer data error Flashing Flashing
7 Flash ROM write error Flashing ON
8 Memory check successful and reboot OFF OFF
[6] Rewriting procedure after an error

interruption
If errors occur while writing ROM data, it is writ-
ten the same way as explained in "Writing ROM
data newly" in "[3]2. Instances of ISW transfer".
• Image control program
The timer LED (orange) flashes. {Nothing will
appear on the operation LCD because the image
control board controls the entire unit.}
Retry ISW after turning the main switch OFF,
then ON.
• Other control programs
Relaunch the 25 mode to retry ISW. {It is
assumed that the copier has the iamge control
program successfully installed.}

SETUP
[6-1] Preparation when PZ is installed [7] Connecting to the ISW connector

When PZ is installed, to rewrite the flash ROM of The ISW connector is at the right side of the
the finisher, change the wiring within PZ. copier.
(1) Power off the main body. 4 In the case of the 7155/7165
(2) Loosen two screws in the lower part of PZ rear Connect the PC parallel port and the copier ISW
cover, remove two screws in the upper part, and connector with a parallel interface cable.
then remove the rear cover.
2 ISW
(3) Disconnect one connector (CN6) of PZ control ISW connector (36-pin)

board (PZCB).
(4) Remove the finisher I/F cable assembly hanging PC
on the wire saddle in the lower part of PZ control
board (PZCB) and connect it to the connector
(CN6) of PZCB disconnected in the step (3).
Parallel (printer)
CN6 (Blue) interface port
Parallel
interface cable
Finisher
I/F cable assembly
(ISW)
(5) After completing the rewrite of flash ROM, dis-

connect the connector from the finisher I/F cable
assembly and reconnect the connector to CN6 of
PZ control board (PZCB).

SETUP

(1) Connect a PC and the copier with a parallel cable
or USB cable.
(2) For performing the Internet ISW, connect a LAN
cable to the Ethernet connector of the copier.
ISW connector Parallel interface cable
(36-pin)
2 ISW
PC
USB connector
Parallel (printer)
interface port
Ethernet
connector
USB cable USB connector
ISW connector
(36-pin)
Ethernet connector
(10BASE-T)
USB connector
(Small type)
RS232C
7272fs2001

Internet ISW
4 INTERNET ISW
[1] What is the Internet ISW?
The Internet ISW is the system to perform ISW, by indicating ISW using the Internet mail (E-mail) or browser
to let copier automatically acquire the subject program from program server and rewrite its own program.
With this Internet ISW, you can update copier’s programs just by transmitting E-mail with simple keyword
described, without visiting customer’s office. With the Web function, you can perform the ISW on customer
site, without carrying the actual programs with you.
[2] Operating environment

2 ISW
• To use the Internet ISW function, the following conditions must be satisfied.
• The copier is connected to a network where programs can be downloaded from the Internet using ftp or
http protocol. *1
• The Internet ISW does not function in copier under the following conditions.
The main power is OFF.
The sub power is OFF.
The copier is shut OFF.
Note1: The Internet ISW does not function even of the copier receives the Internet ISW designating mail,
as long as it is in any of the above conditions. The Internet ISW starts if the above conditions are
released. However, the mails have period of validity.
Note2: The Internet ISW continues to function even if a paper jam or SC occurs, or in the low power mode.
[3] Main features

With the Internet ISW, the following functions are available.
1. Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system *2

By sending simple keywords to a copier by E-Mail, the programs in the copier are rewritten automatically.
The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows. *3
Image control board (I)
Print control board (C)
FNS board (N)
(Video I/F board (V))
2. Internet ISW using Web utility

By accessing copier main body’s homepage via PC web browser, programs in the copier are rewritten auto-
matically. To use the function, a Web terminal that is networked to the copier is necessary. *4
*1: Programs can be downloaded using Firewall.

*2: To use the function, the E-Mail remote notification system must be setup separately.
*3: The available boards are different depending on the copier models.
*4: In case it is connected to a LAN, it can only be used within the LAN.

Internet ISW
[4] Initial setting

To use the Internet ISW, the related settings such as network parameter, program server address, firewall
address must be performed in the copier main body beforehand.
Also, to use the [Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system], the related settings such as account
registration must be set on the mail server separately.
For the details, please refer to the Service manual for the E-Mail remote notification system.
1. Setting on Control panel
2 ISW
First, set the copier's IP address on the control panel, to network the copier. If it has already been set, go to
the next setting.
Step 1: Select "Key operator menu" on the control panel.
Step 2: Select "[1] System initial setting".
Step 3: Select "[3] IP address setting".
Step 4: Enter [IP address], [Subnetmask] and [Gateway address]. *5
Step 5: Reboot the copier.
2. Setting on Web browser

Next, set the program server, etc. from the Web browser. To use the Web browser, prepare a networked PC
*6.
(Considerations)
In any setting item, space cannot be set.
If there is a mistake in input process on the Web browser, be sure to correct it according to error message
displayed. If the mistake is left without correction, program download error may occur.
Web's layout may change without prior notice.
Step 1: Start the Web browser. *7

Step 2: Specify the copier's IP address that you have entered at [Setting on Control panel].
If you access the copier's http address, the [Main page] as the top figure on next page appears.
*5: Copier's IP address, etc. are usually assigned by the system administrator.
For the details, please contact your system administrator.
*6: Prepare a PC by borrowing customer's PC or carrying laptop PC, for example.
*7: If proxy is set on the web browser, it may not be able to access the copier's http address (web page).
For the details, please contact your system administrator. As Web browser, Internet Explorer or
Netscape is recommended.
Do not perform setting from two or more browsers concurrently.

Internet ISW
Step 3: On the [Main page], click the [Environment setup], to display [Login to Environment setup] page.
2 ISW
Copier Web Utility Main Page
Step 4: On [Login to Environment setup] page, enter the key operator password and click Apply.
The environment setup list appears. Then click [Extension for maintenance].
Login window to Environment setting Environment setup screen

Internet ISW
Step 5: On [Login to Extension for maintenance] page, enter the password for mode change and click Apply.
The environment setting list appears. Then click [Internet ISW].
2 ISW
Login window to Extension for maintenance Extension for maintenance screen
Step 6: Click [Initial Setting].
Internet ISW main screen

Internet ISW
Step 7: Set proxy server.

When you don't use proxy server (firewall), enter only the ISW password for mail and go to Step 8.
Use of proxy Select [no] if you do not use proxy

Select [Use ftp proxy] if you use ftp proxy
Select [Use http proxy] if you use http proxy
Type of proxy server *8 If you selected [Use ftp proxy] for [Use of proxy], select the type of proxy
2 ISW
from the following.

Type1 [USER USER@HOST]
Type2 [OPEN HOSTNAME]
Type3 [FW USERNAME→FW PASSWORD→SITE HOSTNAME]
Type4 [FW USERNAME→FW PASSWORD→USER USER@HOST]
Proxy server IP If you use proxy server, enter the IP address of the proxy server.
Port No. If you use proxy server, set the port No. that is used by the proxy server.
Proxy server account If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set an account
name for the proxy server.
Proxy server password If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set a password
for the proxy server.
*8: Types 2, 3 and 4 are not guaranteed.
When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen.
If all are fine, click [Next]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the mes-
sage in red.

Internet ISW
Step 8: If you selected [Use http proxy] or [Use ftp proxy] in Step7, go to Step 8-A.
If you selected [no], go to Step8-B.
Step 8-A: Set the program server. (Proxy server is used)
Program server address Enter the address of the server where programs to download are stored.
Select the protocol you use from the drop down list at the left and enter the
following address in the test box at the right.
2 ISW
In case of ftp, it is the relative path from the home directory.
Example: ftp://k-tsc2.sc2.ne.jp/7165/newest
Program server account Enter the account name of the program server.
Program server password Enter the program server password.
Reception timeout Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes)
If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. Without
performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message
in red.

Internet ISW
Step 8-B: Set the program server. (Proxy is not used.)
Program server address Select a protocol to receive programs.

Program server IP Enter the IP address of the server where programs to download are stored.
Program directory For http, enter path that follows the host domain. For ftp, enter the relative
path from the home directory.
Example: 7165/newest
2 ISW
Program server account Enter the account name of the program server.
Program server password Enter the program server password.
Reception timeout Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes)
If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated.
Without performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message
in red.

Internet ISW
Step 9: Perform the download test.

This test downloads "test.dat" from the program server set in the initial setting, to ensure all items have been
set appropriately. If the download test fails, check the setting items again according to the error message.
When the test finished successfully, the communication speed and estimated download time are displayed
as shown below. Draw upon the data to decide [Reception timeout].
2 ISW
If the download test fails, response error code sent from the server is displayed as follows. There may be input
errors. Check the initial setting again.

Internet ISW
[5] Mail Remote Notification System
1. What is the Mail remote notification system?
Mail remote notification system allows to acquire machine data, that have been available as "List Output
Mode" in 36 mode from copier, through internet mail (E-mail). This function is achieved without visiting cus-
tomer site and printing on paper if the simple keyword is e-mailed.
2 ISW
2. Operation environment
Following conditions should be satisfied in order to use mail remote notification system. The function works
during JAM, SC or Low power mode, but does not work during shut-off. However, the sent mail does not dis-
appear and the copier process the mail after next starting up. During low power mode, the machine operation
is as usual.
A. The mail server *1 that allows copier to receive mail in POP3 or IMAP protocol.
(It is preferred that mail server can receive external mail and service constantly.)
B. The mail server *2 that allows copier to transmit mail in SMTP protocol.
(It is preferred that mail server can send external mail and service constantly.).
C. Mail remote notification system disabling conditions on copier are as follows.
(1) Main power switch is OFF.
(2) Sub power switch is OFF.
*1 qpopper, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. Assign one account per one copier. It can be the same machine
to the SMTP server. "Mail remote notification system" corresponds to "POP before SMTP".
*2 Sendmail 8.9, qmail, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. It can be the same machine to the receiving server.
3. Initial setting
In order to use Mail remote notification system, settings such as network parameter on copier and account
registration on mail server are necessary.
A. Setting on operation panel

In order to connect the copier main body to network, IP address of the copier should be set on operation panel.
If it is already set, please go to "B. Setting on Web.
a. Procedure
1. Select [Key operator mode] on operation panel.
2. Select [1. System initial setting].
3. Select [3. IP address setting].
4. Input [IP address], [Subnetmask] and [Gateway address]*1.
5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.
*1 System administrator usually assigns IP address and network related setting to copier. Please ask sys-
tem administrator for details.

Internet ISW
B. Setting on Web
Next, input setting for mail server from Web browser. Please use PC*2 connected to the network in order to
use Web browser.
*2 Prepare PC; borrow the customer's one or bring notebook computer.
Note1: No blank space should be entered for any column. Following characters cannot be used for the E-
mail address.
2 ISW
()<> ;:¥"[]
When the error message is displayed on the web browser, correct the input error following to the
message. If the error is not corrected, mail sending or receiving may fail.
Note2: Web design is subject to change without notice.
(1) How to set

a. Procedure
1. Start up Web browser *1.
2. Type IP address of the copier you input to the [A. Setting on operation panel].
When accessing Web, the [main page] (see upper figure in next page) is displayed.
*1 If proxy is set on Web browser, it may not possible to access web utilities of copier. Please ask system
administrator for details. We recommend to use Internet explorer or Netscape as the Web browser. Do
not perform setting from the two or more browsers concurrently.
Copyright © 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copier Web utilities main page

Internet ISW
3. In [Main] page, click [Environment Setup] button and display [Environment setup log in] page.
2 ISW
Environment setup log in page
4. Input key operator password in [Environment setup log in] page, then click [Apply].
[Environment set up] page is displayed. Then click [E-Mail transmission setting].
Even key operator password set "0000" in 25-mode setting, input "0000".
Environment setup page

Internet ISW
5. Set the transmission setting.

In order to use Mail remote notification system, registration of E-mail address of manager (machine
administrator), and sending (SMTP) server input is mandatory.
Manager Address *1 To specify E-mail address of machine manager.

The e-mail address to notify error from SMTP.
DNS Server IP Address Input as needed. If not needed, leave it blank.
2 ISW
Time difference *1 The send time of mail is calculated referring this value.
Input the time difference from UTC within the range -1200 (-12h00min) to
+1200 (+12h00min).
If setting is not made, it is +0000 (the same as UTC).
For example, the time difference in New York is -5 hours, - 500 is input.
Sending mail (SMTP) sever *1 The IP address of SMTP sever.
Condition Informing Address *1 It is for mail transmission system. *2
You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.
E-Mail Transmission *1 It is for mail transmission system. *2
You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.
*1 The same setting can be set on LCD of the copier. But do not set concurrently from web browser and
Web.
*2 Please see the "INSTRUCTION MANUAL" of copier if use the mail transmission system.
E-Mail transmission setting page

Internet ISW
6. Click [Apply] button to finish input.

2 ISW
(2) Test mail sending

Click [Sending test] button and then a test mail is sent to SMTP server. Test mail is sent to [Manager address]
set on Step5. Click [Sending test] to display result of the test mail. If it is failed, please re-confirm the setting
following to error message.
a. Procedure
1. Set the reception setting.
In the [Extension for maintenance] column at the bottom of the page, input the password to change the
mode then click the initial setting.
Use the password for changing modes.
Extension for maintenance page (for customer engineer)

Internet ISW
The records of sent and received mails listed on mail log on the [Extension for maintenance] page are the
latest 10 mails. Even the main power switch is turned OFF, the communication is logged and kept though
there are some restrictions.
2 ISW
E-Mail reception setting page

Internet ISW
2. Set the e-mail reception screen based on the following.
Enable E-mail notification Select [Yes] to use Mail remote notification system.
Default is [No].
Interval between fetching mails Interval between checking mail on receiving mail server from copier. The
interval can be set within the range from 1 min. to 60 min.
Usually, set around 10 min. considering load for network.
2 ISW
Receiving mail server The IP address of receiving mail server.

Kind of mail spool Select [POP3] or [IMAP]. Default is [POP3].
User name on the server *1 The account name for copier assigned on receiving mail server.
Password *2 The password for the above user name.
E-Mail Address of this copy E-mail address of the copier.
machine Usually, the name is [User name@receiving mail server name].
Nickname *3 The name added to the mail subject sent from the copier.
It can be blank.
CE Password *2 Input password used for the "Subject" of the mail sent to the copier.
The copier uses this password for security check.
Also Notice to the administrator (CC mail)
- No Default (Do not send the e-mail to the administrator)
- Only illegal mails Specify whether to transfer mail in following conditions; When the mail
- All mails received by copier does not match to the registered password or the mail
size is 10 k-byte or larger.
Transfer all sending mails from Mail remote notification system.
Administrator E-Mail address Input address for the transfer if above [Only illegal mail] or [all mails] is
selected.
Announce delay time in reply Select whether to contain the time difference from CE`s transmission and
mail *4 copier reception on the mail.
Default is [No].
Enable POP (IMAP) before Select whether SMTP server transmits the mail after POP (IMAP) server
SMTP attests.
Default is [Yes].
*1 Consult system administrator and create mail account for copier on receiving mail server.
*2 No echo back from the password.
*3 Use it as identifier, when managing multiple copiers.
*4 Use it to check the copier. is turned ON or not. If the time of the copier or the mail application software
is not set correctly (including time difference), wrong time is described. In that case, select [No].

Internet ISW
3. Click "Apply" to finish input.

4. Test mail sending and receiving.
Click [Sending and receiving test] button and then sending and receiving tests are performed by one
transaction. It checks whether the sent mail is correctly received. Click [Sending and receiving test] to
display result of the test. If it is failed, please re-confirm the setting following to error message.
Sending mail test Mail sending test is performed to SMTP server.

Test mail is sent to [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set on Step2.
2 ISW
Receiving mail test Receiving test from receiving mail server is performed.
Test mail is received by [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set on Step2.
5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.

Internet ISW
4. How to use the Mail remote notification system
A. Function
CE can use following functions of Mail remote notification system by e-mailing simple keyword to copier.
CE can receive the data of the desired copier data list by the e-mail.
• JOB memory list

• User management list
2 ISW
• Font pattern list

• Machine management list 1
• Adjustment data list
• Parameter list
• E.K.C. management list
• Machine management list 2
• Counter list
• Pixel ratio data list
In order to use above function, the simple keyword (command) must be sent by e-mail.
The following table shows the command and options.
Command Options Explanation Minimum

GETLOG [List output] The [List output] specified by the following is returned G
by mail.
JOB [JOB memory list] J
USER [User management list] U
FONT [Font pattern list] F
MANAGEMENT [Machine management list 1] M
ADJUSTMENT [Adjustment data list] A
PARAMETER [Parameter list] P
EKC [EKC management list] E
2MANAGEMENT [Machine management list 2] 2
COUNTER [Counter list] C
PIXEL [Pixel ratio data list] PI
ALL All of above list data. AL
Not specified Edited [Counter list] for the cellular phone display.
CHPASS [OldPasswd] To change the password used to certify mail. C
[NewPasswd]
[OldPasswd] Specify current password
[NewPasswd] Specify new password
HELP Not specified Help mail explaining usage of the above commands is H
sent.

Internet ISW
B. Send mails
The example of the mail containing the command to the copier is shown. The command and option on the
mail are recognized by the top letters without distinction between capital and small letters. Accordingly, not
all letters of the command must be typed. It is recognized by the minimum letters in the above table *1. When
sending mail to the copier, please note followings.
Note:
• Mail software on any OS, handy terminal, free-mail using browser can be used without any differ-
2 ISW
ence.
• When sending mail on mail software, be sure to use text mode.
(Mail in HTML mode cannot be handle properly.)
• As for the reception on mail software, the desirable maximum displayable letters per one line is 128
and over (single-byte).
(The length of the one line reaches to 128 letters in the part of the data list mail. Accordingly, mail
may not be easily seen on the cellular phone or other mobile devices.)
• Put minimum one space or TAB*2 between the command and option on the mail.
• Use only single-byte alphanumeric character (ASCII character) for the command on mail. Other-
wise, an error mail, [Command Not Found], is returned.
Type command from the beginning of the line. If the line starts with blank or TAB, the line is ignored.
• Maximum number of commands that can be contained in one mail is 10. The eleventh and onwards
commands are ignored.
• Do not attach file to the mail sent to the copier. Depending on file size, it is handled as illegal mail.
• Do not attach signature to the mail sent to the copier. If automatic attachment of the signature is
already set to the mail software, change the setting not to attach the signature. The signature is
regarded as command and error mail may be returned.
• While copier is sending or receiving the mail, if the power switch of the copier is turned OFF or list
output is performed on the copier, two mails may be returned.
• The maximum number of the mails that copier receives from the mail server is 5 per one time. If
the mail server has more received mails at a time, remaining mails are processed after the [interval
between fetching mails].
*1 Example: All of G, GE, GET, GETL, GETLO, GETLOG equal to specify GETLOG.
*2 Return cannot be used.

Internet ISW
(1) Send GETLOG command

Following should be described in the sending mail.
• Subject: Input "CE password" set in reception setting.
• To: Input E-mail address of the copier.
• Body: Input command.
a. Example of mail requesting counter list

2 ISW
Mail address
of the copier
CE Password
Command
b. Example of mail requesting counter list*1
Serial number
of copier
Mail address
of the sender
Nickname
of the copier
Requested
counter
list
*1 Language of the returned mail is English only.

Internet ISW
c. When option is not specified

GETLOG command without option is specified, Counter list for the cellular phone display is returned.
Sending mail [GetLog]
Example of returned mail
2 ISW
d. To receive multiple data list
Data lists in reply to GETLOG command are separately returned by mails; one list per mail. If the same list
is requested twice or more in a mail, the list is returned only once.
When followings are described in a mail, both counter list mail and machine management list 1 mail are
returned.
[GetLog Counter]
[GetLog Management]
When the commands are written in one line continuously, Management (the later command) is ignored and
only counter list (the first command) is returned.
[GetLog Counter Management]
e. When unrecognizable option is specified.

Sending mail
[GetLog Log]
Returned mail
[Option Not Found → GetLog Log]

Internet ISW
(2) Send CHPASS command

The sending mail password described on the subject can be changed remotely. Specify 20 or less letters to
[OldPasswd] and [NewPasswd]. Use ASCII characters except space.
Password cannot be changed by mail if you don't remember the old password. Change the [CE password]
from the browser, explained in Chapter 2.
a. Example of correct password change

In this case, old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios].
2 ISW
Sending mail
[ChPass U-BIX Sitios]
Returned mail
[SE's Password was changed successfully.] → [New Password [Sitios]]
When the password is changed, use [NewPasswd] from the next mail. When the mail is sent with [Old-
Passwd], it is treated as illegal mail.
b. Example of invalid password change

Old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios].
Sending mail
[ChPass Sitios U-BIX]
Returned mail
[Old Password is Invalid.] → [ChPass Sitios U-BIX]
Then, password was not changed. Accordingly, the password is unchanged and [U-BIX].
Sending mail
[ChPass Sitios]
Returned mail
[Violation on format by new password.] → [ChPass Sitios]
When the new password is blank, password is not changed.

Internet ISW
(3) Send HELP command

The manual describing above usage of the commands is returned by mail. Use this function when you forget
how to use command and option.
Sending mail [Help]
Returned mail
2 ISW
5. Disabling system
In order to disable Mail remote notification system, in Mail reception setting, select [No] for the "Enable E-
Mail notification" and then click [Apply] button.

Internet ISW
[6] Internet ISW using Web utility
1. Function
Using the copier's web utility, just by clicking on the browser *15, customer engineer can let the copier
automatically download programs from the program server and rewrite its own programs.
The boards of which programs can be rewritten are the same as those of [Internet ISW using E-mail remote
notification system].
2 ISW
2. How to use
a. Going to Internet ISW page
The same as instructed in Chapter2, go to the [Internet ISW] page on the Web browser.
Internet ISW main screen

Next to each board name, the program version is displayed.
*15: Usually, it is not possible to access company-inside copier from outside exceeding firewall.

Internet ISW
b. Performing ISW
From the [ISW] items, select a board to ISW and check the box. When specifying a name of file to download,
type the name in the text box of [File name]. When no file name is specified, the following files are acquired
from the program server address set beforehand.
I0 bootI0.bin C0 bootC0.bin N1 bootN1.bin

I1 bootI1.bin C1 bootC1.bin (V1) (bootV1.bin)
2 ISW
I2 bootI2.bin C2 bootC2.bin
When the above input completes, click [ISW].
c. Starting ISW
When ISW starts, the following screen appears. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item
according to the message in red.
ISW execution screen

When ISW completes successfully, the copier automatically reboots.
If you click [Check status], you can check the current ISW status.
If you click [Cancel], you can stop the ISW only while program is being downloaded.

Internet ISW
d. Checking ISW status

2 ISW
ISW status check screen
This screen shows the current performance or error. The display items are as follows.
ISW communicating
ISW rewriting
Successfully completed *16
Canceled due to communication error
Canceled due to communication timeout
Canceled due to writing error
e. Ending ISW
When ISW completes and copier reboots, ensure that the program version is upgraded on the [Internet ISW
main screen].
*16: Copier reboots after ISW completes normally. Do not click [Redraw] on the browser.

Internet ISW
[7] Internet ISW by operation panel
1. Function
It is possible for service technicians to download necessary program from the program server by the copier
operation panel to automatically rewrite the program.
The PC board for the program to be rewritten is the same for "Internet ISW by mail remote communication
system".
2 ISW
2. Operation
a. Procedure
Step Operation
2
Press " 11 ISW" key.
[ISW mode menu Screen]
Press "INTERNET ISW" key to select the program to execute the ISW.
3
Note: If "INTERNET ISW" key is not highlighted, the program will function as normal ISW.
The "Collective" key enables all the items displayed below the key to be rewritten.
[Internet ISW mode menu Screen]
Pressing "FILE NAME" key displays "File name entry Screen". Specify the name of the file
to be downloaded (Max. 20 characters) and press "OK" key to go back to "Internet ISW
4
mode menu Screen".
Pressing "File auto select" key displays "AUTO" in the file name entry column to accept pre-
determined file name.
Press "Start" key.
Internet ISW rewriting is started.
While the downloading is being executed, pressing "STOP" stops the downloading but does
not stop the rewriting operation. And, turning OFF SW2 (sub power supply) cannot be
5 accepted.
Note: Take care not to turn OFF SW1 (main power supply) of the copier while the internet
ISW rewriting is being performed.
If SW2 (sub power supply) is turned OFF while the rewriting is being executed, the
SW2 is turned to OFF status after the rewriting has been completed.
[Rewriting confirmation Screen]
6
Pressing "CONTINUE" key to display "ISW mode menu Screen".

Internet ISW
3. Errors
Error code Classification Contents

Xxx Local error Rewriting error (which is generally the same as ISW error)
100 Cannot connect to the network
101 File error
4xx HTTP error After communication protocol is set up at HTTP and the con-
2 ISW
5xx nection to network is finished, the server error is returned from

the server.
5xx FTP error After communication protocol is set up at FTP and the connec-
tion to network is finished, the server error is returned from the
server.
* Error codes for FTP and HTTP are general protocol-specified errors.

Internet ISW
[8] Precautions for use
1. Prior announcement to administrator

When performing the Internet ISW, be sure to contact the copierfs administrator or the like and get his/her
agreement beforehand.
Perform ISW in condition that the copier is not being used.
If the copier is being used (a job is being processed), the Internet ISW is not performed.
2 ISW
2. If power failure occurs during data rewriting
While ISW rewriting is in progress *17, the operation panel and sub power switch are locked. However, if the
main power goes down due to power failure or other, the copier becomes unable to start up, the same as
remote ISW. *18
This is only the problem on rewriting the image processing board. Even if errors occur on rewriting other
boards, the boards can be overwritten again with the Internet ISW.
If the copier becomes unable to start for the above reason, go to the copierfs site and rewrite the program
using the ISW tool (ISWTrans).
3. ISW of multiple programs

It is not possible with the Internet ISW to ISW several programs concurrently. Always perform ISW one by
one. If several programs must be rewritten at the same time, perform ISW from board of higher priority.
*19
Priority 1 FNS board (N1)

Priority 2 Print control board (C1-C5), (VideoI/F board (V))
Priority 3 Print control board (C0)
Priority 4 Image processing board (I1-I5)
Priority 5 Image processing board (I0)
When rewriting several programs, SC may occur during rewriting intervals between programs.
However, such SC will clear when all the subject programs are rewritten.
4. If ISW fails in low power mode

If ISW fails due to errors in program download, data check, and so on, the copier recovers into normal mode.
Only in low power mode, the copier reboots when ISW fails.
*17: Rewriting takes maximum one minute.

*18: No problem is cased by power failure during program downloading process.
*19: In case of the Internet ISW using the E-mail remote notification system, the sequence of transmitted ISW
designating mails and mails received by copier may change. Transmit multiple mails while ensuring
reception of completion mail or putting enough intervals.

2 ISW
Blank page

3
3 KRDS
KRDS
4 Refer to the "KRDS Setup Manual".
3 KRDS
Blank page
4
SERVICE
4 SERVICE
Main Precautions for Maintenance
1. Points to be confirmed before mainte- 4. After replacing the drum and developer,
nance refer to the List of Adjustments to deter-
Prior to maintenance, talk to the opera- mine the adjustments that must be
tor concerning the symptoms of the made following the replacement.
machine to help determine the correc-
tive maintenance action that must be 5. After completing maintenance work,
taken. reset the PM counter using the 25
mode.
2. Copy sample
Make copy samples at the start and 6. When replacing the fixing unit cleaning
end of maintenance to compare web, developer, and drum, reset the fix-
images. ing unit cleaning web counter using the
36 mode.
3. Drum
a) Never expose the drum to sunlight. Also 7. When replacing the toner cartridge,
avoid exposing the drum to indoor light wait until the toner supply LED on the
as much as possible. operation panel flashes before the
When the drum unit or drum is remove replacement.
from the machine, ensure that it is cov-
Caution:Turn the main power switch
ered with a drum cover.
(SW1) off and pull out the power
b) When replacing the drum, toner guide
cord from the wall outlet prior
roller, or cleaning blade, refer to the sec-
to maintenance.
tion that provides instruction for remov-
4 SERVICE
ing and installing a cleaning blade.

SERVICE SCHEDULE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
4 [1] Service Schedule
Service item Number of copies

0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500
Main Maintenance Every 250,000 copies zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
body
Periodic check (I) Every 500,000 copies z z z z z z zzz z
Periodic check (II) Every 1,000,000 copies z z z z
Periodic check (III) Every 2,000,0000 copies z z
Periodic check (IV) Every 2,500,000 copies z
RADF Maintenance Every 250,000 copies zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
DF-316/
322 Periodic check (I) Every 500,000 copies z z z z z z z z z
Periodic check (II) Every 1,500,000 copies z z z
FNS Maintenance Every 250,000 copies zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
FS-110/
210 Periodic check (I) Every 1,000,000 copies z z z z
Periodic check (II)*1 Every 2,500,000 copies z
FNS Maintenance Every 250,000 copies zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
FS-111
Periodic check (I) Every 2,500,000 copies z
SF
SF-101
Maintenance Every 250,000 copies zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
LCT Maintenance Every 250,000 copies zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
LT-402/412
Periodic check (I) Every 1,000,000 copies z z z z
Periodic check (II) Every 4,000,000 copies z
PI Maintenance Every 250,000 copies zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
PI-110
Periodic check (I) Every 500,000 copies z z z z z z z z z
Periodic check (II) Every 1,000,000 copies z z z z
z
4 SERVICE
Periodic check (III) Every 3,000,000 copies
PK
PK-110/120
Maintenance Every 250,000 copies zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
PZ Maintenance Every 250,000 copies zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
PZ-108/109
Periodic check (I) Every 3,000,000 copies z
*1 Periodic check (II) for FS-110/210 is applied for old type only.

SERVICE SCHEDULE
[2] Maintenance Items
1. Main body (Every 250,000 copies)

Implementation classifica-
Number Materials/tools
NO Classification Service item of parts tion
replaced Clea- Inspe- Lubric Replace used
ning ction -ation -ment
1 Preparation (1) Image check z
2 Drum unit (1) Charging control plate
56AA2503*
1 z
(2) Charging wire 56AA2509* 1 z
(3) Charging corona unit (back Drum cleaner/
plate and peripheral section, z waste/blower brush
PCL)
(4) Charger cleaning base
56AA2540*
1 z
(5) Charger slide block
56AA2538*
1 z
(6) Charger cleaning block /U
56AA-253*
1 z
(7) Resin ring (φ 2) 45AA2040* 1 z
(8) Charger cleaning block /L
56AA-254*
1 z
(9) Drum cartridge, bottom plate of Blower brush/clean-
the developing unit, toner con- ing pad/A drum
trol sensor, separation claw z cleaner is used only
when cleaning a
toner control sensor.
Blower brush/clean-
(10) Toner collection screw A z ing pad
4 SERVICE
4 (11) Toner guide 56AA-213*

roller (7155/7165) z
56QA-213*
1
*1
z Electricity lubricant
(7255/7272)
(12) Cleaning blade (36 mode
blade setting mode) 1 z
56AA2010*
3 Developing unit (1) Developing bias armature Blower brush/clean-
z ing pad
(2) Developer (25 mode counter
resetting)
1 z
(3) Developing unit Blower brush/clean-
z ing pad
Note: *1 After replacing the toner guide roller, be sure to apply an electricity lubricant on the edge of the guide
roller shaft (on power supply pin side).

4-2
SERVICE SCHEDULE
4 Transfer / sepa- (1) Transfer separation corona unit Blower brush/clean-
ration corona (front and rear block), guide ing pad/cotton swab/
drum cleaner
rail, separation bridge, z
entrance guide plate, lightning
protection sheet, back plate
(2) Discharge wire 56AA2609* 3 z
(3) Transfer cleaning assembly
56AA-264*
1 z
(4) Separation cleaning assem-
bly 56AA-267*
1 z
(5) Resin ring (φ2) 45AA2040* 2 z
(6) Transfer presser 55VA2615* 3 z
rubber (7155/7165)
4
56AA1783*
(7255/7272)
5 Toner supply (1) Cartridge holder member Cleaning pad
z
6 Conveyance unit (1) Conveyance section upper sur- Drum cleaner/clean-
face z ing pad
(2) Conveyance belt Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(3) TSL cover member Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
7 Registration (1) Paper dust removing brush Cleaning pad/blower
z brush
(2) 2nd paper feed roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z
4 SERVICE
ing pad
4 8 Drive section (1) Ozone filter K 55FA7301* 1 z
and filter (7155/7165)
(2) Ozone filter/M 56QA1059* 1 z
(7255/7272)
(3) Ozone filter/S 56QA1057* 1 z
(7255/7272)
(4) Developing 56AA-735* 1 z
suction filter (7155/7165)
56QA7320*
(7255/7272)
9 Paper exit unit (1) Sensor (one section) z Blower brush
(2) Roller (two sections) Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad

SERVICE SCHEDULE
10 ADU (1) Roller cleaning Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(2) Reverse/exit roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(3) ADU reverse roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(4) ADU conveyance roller /1-4 Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(5) ADU registration roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(6) Sensors z Blower brush
(7) Gate sensor (two points) z Blower brush
(8) ADU horizontal conveyance Blower brush
sections (four points) z
(9) ADU reverse section (one Blower brush
point) z
(10) Gears z Plus guard No. 2
11 Paper feed sec- (1) Sensor (three points/tray) Blower brush
tion z
(2) Gears (double feed prevention Plus guard No.2
section) z
(3) Conveyance/driven roller Drum cleaner/clean-
(paper feed) z ing pad
(4) Feed roller/paper feed convey- Drum cleaner/clean-
ance roller z ing pad
(5) Double feed prevention roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
4 SERVICE
12 By-pass feed (1) Sensor (four points) z Blower brush

section (2) Gears z Plas guard No.2
(3) Section peripheral of the by- Drum cleaner/clean-
pass feed unit z ing pad
(4) Feed roller/paper conveyance Drum cleaner/clean-
roller z ing pad
z ing pad
13 Scanner (1) Original glass (including slit Drum cleaner/clean-
section glass) z ing pad
(2) Exposure lamp z Blower brush
(3) Reflector z Cleaning pad
(4) Lens Blower brush/clean-
z ing pad
(5) 1st to 3rd mirrors Blower brush/clean-
z ing pad
(6) APS sensor z Blower brush
(7) Photo interrupter z Blower brush
(8) Optical guide rail z Cleaning pad
14 Writing section Blower brush/clean-
(1) Dust-proof glass (external) z ing pad

SERVICE SCHEDULE
15 Fixing unit (1) Fixing upper roller Roller cleaner/
z cleaning pad
(2) Fixing lower roller Roller cleaner/
z cleaning pad
(3) Fixing claw (L) Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(4) Paper exit roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(5) Paper exit conveyance roller Drum cleaner/clean-
(right) and guide rib z ing pad
(6) Fixing unit entrance and exit Drum cleaner/clean-
guide plate z ing pad
(7) Fixing temperature sensor /2 z Blower brush/paper
(8) Decurler z Cleaning pad
(9) Fixing gear z Moly therm grease
(10) Fixing web unit (25 mode
counter resetting) 1 z
56AA-543*
(11) Fixing claw (U)
56AA5427*
6 z
(12) Heat insulating sleeve z Tri-flow
16 Vertical convey- (1) Horizontal conveyance roller Drum cleaner/clean-
ance 2 z ing pad
(2) Sensor 5 z Blower brush
17 Final check (1) W.U.T. check z
(2) Peripheral and exterior clean- Drum cleaner/clean-
4 SERVICE
ing z ing pad
(3) Image and paper through
check z
(4) PM counter resetting (25 mode) z

SERVICE SCHEDULE
4 2. RADF [DF-316/322] (Every 250,000 copies)

1 Preparation (1) Paper through check z
2 Paper feed sec- (1) Size detection sensor/1 1 z Blower brush
tion (2) Size detection sensor/2 1 z Blower brush
(3) Registration sensor 1 z Blower brush
(4) Feed roller Drum cleaner/clean-
1 z ing pad
(5) Paper feed roller rubber Drum cleaner/clean-
1 z ing pad
rubber 1 z ing pad
(7) Cleaning pad 1 z Blower brush
(8) Registration roller Drum cleaner/clean-
1 z ing pad
3 Conveyance (1) Read sensor 1 z Blower brush
section (2) Skew sensor (F) 1 z Blower brush
(3) Skew sensor (R) 1 z Blower brush
(4) Double side registration sensor 1 z Blower brush
(5) Read roller (F) Drum cleaner/clean-
1 z ing pad
(6) Read roller (R) Drum cleaner/clean-
1 z ing pad
(7) Platen guide Drum cleaner/clean-
1 z ing pad
(8) Reverse conveyance roller/1 Drum cleaner/clean-
1 z ing pad
(9) Reverse conveyance roller/2 Drum cleaner/clean-
z
4 SERVICE
1 ing pad
4 Paper exit sec- (1) Paper exit roller Drum cleaner/clean-
tion
1 z ing pad
5 Final check (1) Paper through check z
(2) Exterior cleaning Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad

SERVICE SCHEDULE
3. FNS [FS-110] (Every 250,000 copies)

4 Number
tion Materials/tools
NO Classification Service item of parts
2 Conveyance (1) Conveyance roller Drum cleaner/clean-
section
z ing pad
(2) Paper exit roller/A (sponge
roller) 122H4825* 10 z
(3) Cleaning of area around paper
exit roller/A z
(4) Conveyance roller/4 (sponge
roller) 13QE4531* 4 z
3 Drive section (1) Main drive unit z (z) Plus guard No. 2 *1
(2) Tray up/down unit z (z) Plus guard No. 2 *1
(3) Shift drive unit z (z) Plus guard No. 2 *1
(4) Paper exit drive unit z (z) Plus guard No. 2 *1
(5) Staple unit z (z) Plus guard No. 2 *1
4 Stapler unit (1) Staple cartridge 12QRK001* 5,000 staples/car-
2 z (z) tridge replace as
necessary
5 Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning Drum cleaner/clean-
z (z)
ing pad
6 Final check (1) Paper through check Stapler positioning
z jig *2
*1 If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it.
*2 Check to see that the upper and lower positions are properly set.
4 SERVICE

4-7
SERVICE SCHEDULE
4. FNS [FS-210] (Every 250,000 copies)

4 Number
tion Materials/tools
NO Classification Service item of parts
section
z ing pad
(2) Paper exit roller/A (sponge)
122H4825* 10 z
exit roller/A z
(4) Conveyance roller/4 (sponge)
13QE4531 4 z
(5) Staple unit z (z) Plus guard No. 2 *1
(6) Folding unit z (z) Plus guard No. 2 *1
4 Folding unit (1) Folding roller z
5 Stapler unit (1) Staple cartridge 12QRK001* 5,000 staples/car-
2 z (z) tridge replace as
necessary
6 Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
7 Final check (1) Paper through check Stapler positioning
z jig *2
*2 Check to see that the upper and lower positions are properly set.
4 SERVICE
4 5. FNS [FS-111] (Every 250,000 copies)

1 Preparation (1) Paper feeding check z
section
z ing pad
(2) Conveyance cleaning brush
13TR-272* 2 z
3 Paper exit sec- (1) Paper exit rollr A (sponge roller)
tion 122H4825* 10 z
exit roller A z
(5) Staple unit z (z) Drum cleaner/clean
5 Final check (1) Paper through check z (z)
z ing pad

SERVICE SCHEDULE
6. LCT [LT-402/412](Every 250,000 copies)

Num- Implementation classifica-
ber of tion Materials/tools
NO Classification Service item parts
replace Clea- Inspe- Lubric Replace used
d ning ction -ation -ment
2 Inside of (1) Sensors z Blower brush
machine (2) Gears z Plus guard No. 2
(3) Conveyance roller/driven roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(4) Feed roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(5) Paper feed conveyance roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
z ing pad
z ing pad
7. PI-110(Every 250,000 copies)

Num- Implementation classifica-
ber of tion Materials/tools
NO Classification Service item parts
replace Clea- Inspe- Lubric Replace used
d ning ction -ation -ment
section z ing pad
2 Paper feed sec- (1) Feed roller Drum cleaner/clean-
tion
z (z)
ing pad *1
4 SERVICE
(2) Paper feed conveyance roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z (z)
ing pad *1
z (z)
ing pad *1
z ing pad
*1 If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it {Plus guard No.2}.

SERVICE SCHEDULE
8. PK-110/120 (Every 250,000 copies)

1 Punch unit main (1) Punch die
body z Blower brush
2 Punch dust col- (1) Punch dust box (for punch dust Drum cleaner/clean-
lection section dump) z ing pad
(2) Punch dust detection sensor Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(2) Internal cleaning Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
9. PZ-108/109 (Every 250,000 copies)

1 Punch section (1) Punch die z Blower brush
2 Conveyance (1) Entrance guide plate/A
section z Cleaning pad
(2) Trailing edge detect section
(Entrance guide plate/B) z Blower brush
(3) Registration roller z Drum cleaner/clean-
(4) Conveyance roller z ing pad
Note: Check and
(5) Folding roller (1st, 2nd) z clean the remaining
(6) Exit conveyance roller z punch scraps.
4 SERVICE
(7) Exit guide plate/A z Cleaning pad

3 Finisher side (1) Conveyance guide plate/B z Cleaning pad
4 Punch scraps (1) Punch scraps box Throw away punch
conveyance sec- z scraps.
tion
Drum cleaner/clean-
(2) Exterior cleaning z ing pad
4 10. SF-101 (Ever 250,000 copies)

1 Conveyance (1) Driving roller Drum cleaner/
section z Cleaning pad
(2) Driven roller Drum cleaner/
z Cleaning pad
(3) Neutralization brush z Blower brush
(4) Sensors z Blower brush
2 Final check (1) Paper feeding check z
(2) Exterior cleaning Drum cleaner/
z Cleaning pad

SERVICE SCHEDULE
[3] Main Body Periodic Inspection Items
1. Periodic check (I) (Every 500,000 copies)

Number Implementation
tion
classifica-
NO Classification Service item of parts Materials/tools
Inspe- Lubric Replace used
replaced Clea-
4 1 Fixing unit (1) Fixing 56AA5305* 1 z
roller (U) (7155/7165)
56AE5305*
(7255/7272)
(2) Heat insulating sleeve (U) Apply Tri flow oil
45405339* 2 z z when replacing the
sleeve.
(3) Upper roller bearing
45407504* 2 z
(4) Fixing roller (L) 56AA5306* 1 z
4 (5) Fixin claw 25BA5333* 3 z
(7155/7165)
(L) 56QA5320*
(7255/7272)
(6) Fixing rolling bearing
25SA7603* 2 z
(7) Decurler roller 56AA5307* 1 z
2 Drum unit (1) Drum separation claw
3 z
56AA2070*
(2) Drum replacement (25 mode
counter resetting) 1 z
3 Paper feed unit (1) Paper feed conveyance roller
3 z Actual replacement
rubber 25SA4096* count: 125 K feeds
(2) Double feed prevention roller
rubber 25SA4096* 3 z
4 By-pass feed (1) Conveyance roller rubber (by-
1 z Actual replacement
4 SERVICE
unit pass feed) 54004056* count: 70 K feeds
rubber (manual feed) 1 z
54004056*
2. Periodic check (II) (Every 1,000,000 copies)

Number Implementation
tion
classifica-
NO Classification Service item of parts Materials/tools
used
replaced Clea- Inspe- Lubric Replace
4 1 Paper feed unit (1) Paper feed roller rubber A Actual replacement
55FA-411* 3 z count: 800 K feeds
(7155/7165)
2 By-pass feed (1) Paper feed roller rubber Actual replacement
unit (manual feed) 55FA4233* 1 z count: 140 K feeds
4 3 Fixing unit (1) Fixing lamp/1 56A*8703* 1 z
(7155/7165)
56A*8303*
(7255/7272)
(2) Fixing lamp/2 56A*8304* 1 z
(3) Fixing lamp/3 56A*8305* 1 z
(4) Bearing/1 07AA7509* 4 z
4 Drive unit (1) Fixing drive gear 25BA7726* 1 z

SERVICE SCHEDULE
3. Periodic check (III) (Every 2,000,000 copies)

1 Drum unit (1) Drum separation claw solenoid
26NA8251* 1 z
2 Second paper (1) 2nd paper feed clutch
feed unit 56AA8201* 1 z
3 Transfer/separa- (1) Transfer/separation corona unit
tion corona unit 56AA-260* 1 z
4 Fixing unit (1) Fixing drive gear
4
56QA7721*(7255/7272) 1 z
4. Periodic check (IV) (Every 2,500,000 copies)

1 Drum unit (1) Toner control board unit
56AA-910* 1 z
4 2 Charging corona (1) Charging corona 56AA-250*
unit unit (includin (7155/7165)
PCL) 56QA-250* 1 z
(7255/7272)
3 2nd paper feed (1) TSL 56AA8307*
4
unit (7155/7165) 1 z
(2) Paper feed slide shaft holder
26NA4082* 2 z
(3) Registration 56AA4603*
roller (U) (7155/7165)
z
4 SERVICE
56QA4603* 1
(7255/7272)
4 Developing unit (1) Developing 56AA-300*
4 (7155/7165)
unit
56QA-300* 1 z
(7255/7272)
5 Fixing unit (1) Upper roller error detection
sensor 56AA8804* 1 z
6 ADU (1) Registration shaft (L)
55GA7551* 2 z
(2) Registration shaft (U)
55GA7552* 2 z
(3) ADU registration roller (U)
56AA5111* 1 z
4 (4) ADU registra 56AA5112*
tion roller (L) (7155/7165)
56QA5112* 1 z
(7255/7272)
7 Conveyance unit (1) TSL cover assembly
56AA-387* 1 z
4 8 Paper feed unit (1) Paper feed roller rubber Periodical replace-
56AA-458*(7255/7272) 1 z ment count: 0.83 mil-
lion feed

SERVICE SCHEDULE
4 [4] RADF [DF-316/DF-322]

1 Paper feed sec- (1) Feed roller rubber Actual replacement
tion 13QA4127* 1 z count: 200 K feeds
(2) Paper feed roller rubber
13QA4104* 1 z
rubber 13QA4045* 1 z

1 Paper feed sec- (1) Double feed prevention roller Actual replacement
tion 13QA4001* 1 z count: 600 K feeds
4 [5] FNS [FS-110] (Old type only)/ [FS-210] (Old type only)

4 SERVICE
1 Drive unit (1) FNS up/down motor Actual replacement
13QE-115* 1 z count: 2.5 million
feeds

SERVICE SCHEDULE
4 [6] FNS [FS-111]
1. Periodic check (Every 2,500,000 copies))

1 Drive unit (1) FNS motor
129U-108* 2 z
[7] LCT [LT-402/412]
1. Periodic check (I) (Every 1,000,000 copies)

1 Inside of (1) Feed roller Actual replacement
machine 55VA-484* 1 z count: 500 K feeds
(2) Paper feed conveyance roller each
55VA-483* 1 z
55VA-483* 1 z

4 SERVICE
1 Inside of (1) Feed clutch 56AA8201* Actual replacement

machine
1 z count: 2 million
feeds
(2) Conveyance clutch
56AA8201* 1 z

SERVICE SCHEDULE
[8] PI [PI-110]

1 Paper feed sec- (1) Feed roller assembly/B Actual replacement
tion 50BA-575*
2 z count: 100 K feeds
assembly 13QN-443* 2 z

1 Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly/A Actual replacement
section 50BA-574* 2 z count: 200 K feeds
each
3. Periodic check (III) (Every 3,000,000 copies)

1 Paper feed sec- (1) Torque limiter 13QN4073* Actual replacement
tion
2 z count: 600 K feeds
4 SERVICE
[9] PZ [PZ-108/109]
1. Periodic check (I) (Every 3,000,000 copies)

1 Punch section (1) Punch clutch Actual replacement
13NKK001* 1 z count: 1,000K times
2 Punch scraps (2) Punch scraps conveyance
motor 12GQ-417* Actual replacement
conveyance sec- 1 z count: 1,000K times
tion

SERVICE SCHEDULE
[10] Periodic replacement parts list
1. Main body
No Classification Parts name Parts No. Qty Total count Actual count Parts count No.
1 Maintenance Charging control plate 56AA2503* 1 250,000 6
(Every 250,000 copies) Charging wire 56AA2509* 1 250,000 22
Charger cleaning base 56AA2540* 1 250,000
Charger slide block 56AA2538* 1 250,000
Charger cleaning block /U 56AA-253* 1 250,000 7
Resin ring (φ2) (charging corona) 45AA2040* 1 250,000
Charger cleaning block /L 56AA-254* 1 250,000 8
Toner guide roller (7155/7165) 56AA-213* 1 250,000 5
4 Toner guide roller (7255/7272) 56QA-213* 1 250,000 5
Cleaning blade 56AA2010* 1 250,000 4
Developer - 1 250,000 2
Discharge wire 56AA2609* 3 250,000 10
Transfer cleaning assembly 56AA-264* 1 250,000 11
Separation cleaning assembly 56AA-267* 1 250,000 21
Resin ring (φ2) (transfer/separation
45AA2040* 2 250,000
corona unit)
Ozone filter K (7155/7165) 55FA7301* 1 250,000 24
4 Ozone filter/M (7255/7272) 56QA1059* 1 250,000
Ozone filter/S (7255/7272) 56QA1057* 1 250,000
Developing suction filter (7155/7165) 56AA-735* 1 250,000
4 Developing suction filter (7255/7272) 56QA7320* 1 250,000
Fixing web unit 56AA-543* 1 250,000 1
Fixing claw /U 56AA5427* 6 250,000 14
Transfer presser rubber (7155/7165) 55VA2615* 3 250,000
4 SERVICE
4 Transfer presser rubber (7255/7272) 56AA1783* 3 250,000

2 Periodic check (I) Fixing roller /U (7155/7165) 56AA5305* 1 500,000 12
(Every 500,000 Fixing roller /U (7255/7272) 56AE5305* 1 500,000 12
4
copies)
Insulating sleeve /U (7155/7255) 45405339* 2 500,000 16
Upper roller bearing 45407504* 2 500,000 17
Fixing roller /L 56AA5306* 1 500,000 13
Fixing claw /L (7155/7165) 25BA5333* 3 500,000 15
4 Fixing claw /L (7255/7272) 56QA5320* 3 500,000
Fixing rolling bearing 25SA7603* 2 500,000
Decurler roller 56AA5307* 1 500,000
Drum separation claw 56AA2070* 3 500,000 9
Drum - 1 500,000 3
Paper feed conveyance roller rubber
25SA4096* 3 125,000 30,35,40
(Tray 1 to 3)
Double feed prevention roller rubber
25SA4096* 3 125,000 30,35,40
(Tray 1 to 3)
Paper feed conveyance roller rubber
54004056* 1 70,000 50
(by-pass feed)
Double feed prevention roller rubber
54004056* 1 70,000 50
(by-pass feed)

SERVICE SCHEDULE
4 3 Periodic check (II) Paper feed roller rubber/A
(Every 1,000,000 cop- (Tray 1 to 3) (7155/7165) 55FA-411* 3 800,000 29,34,39
ies) Paper feed rubber (by-pass feed) 55FA4233* 1 140,000 49
Fixing lamp/1 (7155/7165) 56A*8703* 1 1,000,000
Fixing lamp/1 (7255/7272) 56A*8303* 1 1,000,000
Fixing lamp/2 56A*8704* 1 1,000,000
Fixing lamp/3 56A*8705* 1 1,000,000
Bearing/1 07AA7509* 4 1,000,000
Fixing drive gear 25BA7726* 1 1,000,000
4 Periodic check (III) Drum separation claw solenoid 26NA8251* 1 2,000,000 103
(Every 2,000,000 cop- 2nd paper feed clutch 56AA8201* 1 2,000,000 64
ies)
Transfer/separation corona unit 56AA-260* 1 2,000,000 20
4 Developing suction filter (7255/7272) 56QA7721* 1 2,000,000 1
4 5 Periodic check (IV) Toner control board unit 56AA-910* 1 2,500,000 19
(Every 2,500,000 cop- Charging unit (including PCL)
ies) (7155/7165) 56AA-250* 1 2,500,000 25
Charging unit (including PCL)
(7255/7272) 56QA-250* 1 2,500,000
TSL 56AA8703* 1 2,500,000
Paper feed slide shaft holder 26NA4082* 2 2,500,000
Registration roller /U (7155/7165) 56AA4603* 1 2,500,000
Registration roller /U (7255/7272) 56QA4603* 1 2,500,000
Developing unit (7155/7165) 56AA-300* 1 2,500,000 27
Developing unit (7255/7272) 56QA-300* 1 2,500,000
Upper roller error detection sensor 56AA8804* 1 2,500,000 23
Registration bearing /L 55GA7551* 2 2,500,000
Registration bearing /U 55GA7552* 2 2,500,000
ADU registration roller /U 56AA5111* 1 2,500,000
4 SERVICE
ADU registration roller /L (7155/7165) 56AA5112* 1 2,500,000
ADU registration roller /L (7255/7272) 56QA5112* 1 2,500,000
TSL cover assembly 56AA-387* 1 2,500,000 28
Paper feed roller rubber/A (Tray 1 to 3)
(7255/7272) 56AA-458* 1
4 2. DF-316/DF-322
1 Periodic replacement (I) Feed roller rubber 13QA4127* 1 200,000 92
(Every 500,000 copies)
Paper feed roller 13QA4104* 1 200,000 93
Double feed prevention roller rubber 13QA4045* 1 200,000 94
2 Periodic replacement Double feed prevention roller
(II)
(Every 1,500,000 cop- 13QA4001* 1 600,000 95
ies)

SERVICE SCHEDULE
4 3. FS-110/210
1 Maintenance Paper exit roller/A (sponge roller) 122H4825* 10 250,000
Conveyance roller/4 (sponge roller) 13QE4531* 4 250,000
Staple cartridge 12QRK001* 2 5,000/each
2 Periodic check (II) FNS up/down motor (Old type only)
(Every 2,500,000 cop- 13QE-115* 1 2,500,000 69
ies)
4 4. FS-111
1 Maintenance Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 12H4825* 10 250,000 52
Every 250,000 copies
Conveyance cleaning brush 13TR-272* 2 250,000 53
Staple needle 13TQK101* 2 5,000/each 53
2 Periodic check (I) FNS motor
(Every 2,500,000 cop- 129U-108* 2 2,500,000 54
ies)
5. LT-402/412
1 Periodic check (I) Feed roller 55VA-484* 1 500,000 52
(Every 1,000,000 cop-
Paper feed conveyance roller 55VA-483* 1 500,000 53
ies)
Double feed prevention roller 55VA-483* 1 500,000 53
2 Periodic check (II) Paper feed clutch 56AA8201* 1 2,000,000 54
4 SERVICE
(Every 4,000,000 cop-

Conveyance clutch 56AA8201* 1 2,000,000 55
ies)
6. PI-110
1 Periodic check (I) Feed roller assembly/B 50BA-575* 2 100,000 79
Double feed prevention roller assem-
bly 13QN-443* 2 100,000 80
2 Periodic check (II) Feed roller assembly/A

(Every 1,000,000 cop- 50BA-574* 2 200,000 78
ies)
3 Periodic check (II) Torque limiter (U and L)
(Every 3,000,000 cop- 13QN4073* 2 600,000 81,86
ies)
7. PZ-108/109
1 Periodic check (I) Punch clutch 13NKK001* 1 1,000,000 88,89,90
(Every 3,000,000 cop-
2 Punch scraps conveyance motor 12GQ-417* 1 1,000,000 88,89,90
ies)

SERVICE SCHEDULE
4 [11] Optional replacement parts list

The parts described below are not for periodical replacement, but should be replaced when reaching the
actual count value.
1. Main body
No Parts name Parts No. Qty Actual count Parts count No.
1 Vertical conveyance clutch/ 1, 2 56AA8201* 2 2,000,000 61, 62
2 Paper feed clutch (Tray 1 to 4) 56AA8201* 4 2,000,000 31, 36, 41, 46
3 Conveyance clutch (Tray 1 to 4) 56AA8201* 4 2,000,000 32, 37, 42, 47
4 Horizontal conveyance clutch/ L, R (7255/
7272) 56AA8201* 2 2,000,000 111, 112
5 Web solenoid 56QA8251* 1 2,000,000 63

6 ADU deceleration clutch (7255/7272) 56AA8201* 1 2,000,000 65
7 ADU conveyance clutch (7255/7272) 56AA8201* 1 2,000,000 65
2. FS-110/210
1 Stapler unit/F 13QE4241* 1 2,000,000 70
2 Stapler unit/R 13QE4241* 1 2,000,000 71
3. FS-111
1 Stapler unit/F 13TQ4250* 1 2,000,000 70
2 Stapler unit/R 13TQ4250* 1 2,000,000 71
4 SERVICE

SERVICE SCHEDULE
[12] Important maintenance parts

• The important parts specified by Konica in
order to maintain safety of the products are
referred to as "important maintenance parts".
The important maintenance parts for this
machine are as described below:
Unit
No Parts name Parts No Qty
classification
1 Thermostat/U SP00-0020 1
Fixing unit
2 Thermostat/L SP00-0010 1
• "SP" is indicated in front of the parts number of

the important maintenance parts. Exercise
care when installing the parts according to "3.
Directions for disassembly and assembly" in
this manual.
4 SERVICE

COPY MATERIALS
COPY MATERIALS
[1] Single unit supply
Name Durability/copies
Toner cartridge 43,000
Developer 250,000
Drum 500,000
[2] Maintenance kit
1. 250,000 copies/kit
Name Parts No. Qty

Charging control plate 56AA2503* 1
Charging wire 56AA2509* 1
Charging cleaning base 56AA2540* 1
Charging slide block 56AA2538* 1
Charging wire cleaning block/U 56AA-253* 1
Resin ring (φ2) (charging corona. transfer/separation
corona) 45AA2040* 3
Charging wire cleaning block (L) 56AA-254* 1
4
Toner guide roller 56AA-213*(7155/7165)
1
56QA-213*(7255/7272)
Cleaning blade 56AA2010* 1
Discharging wire 56AA2609* 3
Transfer cleaning assembly 56AA-264* 1
4 SERVICE
Separation cleaning assembly 56AA-267* 1
4 Transfer/Separation vibration proot rubber 55VA2615*(7155/7165)
3
56AA1783*(7255/7272)
Ozone filter K 55FA7301*(7155/7165) 1
4 Ozone filter M 56QA1059*(7255/7272)
4 Ozone filter S 56QA1057*(7255/7272)
4 Developing suction filter 56AA-735*(7155/7165)
1
56QA7320*(7255/7272)
Fixing web unit 56AA-543* 1
Fixing claw /U 56AA5427* 6
Cleaning pad (10 pcs) - 5
Polyethylene gloves - 1
Dust bag (rubber band) - 1
Developer collection sheet (rubber band) - 1
Hand case for collection - 1
Cotton swabs (4 pcs) - 2

SERVICE MATERIAL LIST
SERVICE MATERIAL LIST

Material No. Material Name Appearance Remarks
000V-16-0 Drum cleaner
200 ml
000V-17-0 Roller cleaner
200 ml
00GR00020 Plas guard No.2
25 g
00GR00150 Molytherm grease

4 SERVICE
25 g
For toner
00GR00200 Electricity lubricant
guide roller
25 g
000V-19-0 Setting powder
25 g
000V-18-0 Cleaning pad
10 pc
1 pack

CE TOOL LIST
CE TOOL LIST
Tool No. Tool Name Appearance Quantity Remarks
Thermostat PS jig(for upper

00M8-1-00 1
roller)
Thermostat PS jig(for lower

56AEJG011 1
roller)
7050K0010 Temp. detection jig 1
7050K0020 Optics PS jig 2
4 SERVICE
00M6-2-00 Door switch jig 2set 2PCS/set
00VD-5000 New pyramid chart 1
4-23
CE TOOL LIST
Tool No. Tool Name Appearance Quantity Remarks
00VC-2-00 Drum cover 1
00VD-1000 Blower brush 1
00VE-1003 Tester 1
For DF-316
120A1052* PS shaft 2pc/set
positioning
For DF-316
4 SERVICE
120A9711* ADJ chart 1

adjustment
For DF-316
120A9712* White chart 1
adjustment
For FS-110/
129XJG011 Stapler PS jig 1 FS-210
adjustment
4-24
5
ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
5 ELECTRIC PARTS LIST

Blank page
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING

4 [1] 7155/7165/7255/7272 Parts Layout Drawing
1. Read Section
PS61 PS51
Scanner HP PS APS timing PS
PS65
APS sensor/3
FM9
Scanner cooling fan
PS63
APS sensor/1
PS64
APS sensor/2
L1
Exposure lamp
L1 INVB
L1 converter ADB
A/D converter board
2. Operation Section
LCD OB INVB OB1
SW2 indicator board OB inverter Operation board/1
Sub power switch
PAKB
Panel key board

C (T)
Total counter PS40
Toner supply door
open / close PS
SD2 PS38
Web SD Front door open / close PS/R
MS1
FM5
Interlock MS/R
Cleaner cooling fan MS2
Interlock MS/L
PS39
Front door open / close PS/L

5-1
3. Charging Corona Section
PCL
Pre-charging exposure lamp
M14
Charger cleaning motor
4. Drum Stand Section
MC14
Toner recycle MC
SD1
Separation claw SD
TCSB
Toner control sensor board
5-2
5. Tray 1, 2, 3 (7155/7165)
MC4/6/8 PS2/8/14
Pre-registration MC/1, /2, /3 Tray upper limit PS/1, /2, /3
MC3/5/7 PS3/9/15
Paper feed MC /1, /2, /3 No paper PS/1, /2, /3
PS1/7/13
Paper feed PS/1, /2, /3
PS4/10/16
Remaining paper
PS/1, /2, /3
VR1/2/3
PS6/12/18
Paper size VR/1, /2, /3
Paper size PS/2-1, /2-2, /2-3
PS5/11/17
Paper size PS/1-1, /1-2, /1-3
4 6. Tray 1, 2 (7255/7272)
MC4/6
Pre-registration MC/1, /2
MC3/5 PS3/9
Paper feed MC/1, /2 PS2/8 No paper PS/1, /2
PS1/7
PS4/10 Tray upper limit PS/1, /2 Paper feed PS/1, /2
Remaining paper PS/1, /2
7272fs5008

4 7. Tray 3, 4 (7255/7272)
MC8 PS14
Pre-registration MC/3 Tray upper limit PS/3
MC7 PS15
Paper feed MC/3 No paper PS/3
PS13
Paper feed PS/3
PS16
Remaining paper
PS/3
VR3
PS18
Paper size VR/3
Paper size PS/2-3
PS17
Paper size PS/1-3 7272fs5009
4 8. Horizontal Conveyance Section/Main body right side (7255/7272)
PS11
Horizontal conveyance set PS
FM12 PS05 PS06 MC15 MC16

Developer Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
cooling fan conveyance conveyance conveyance conveyance
PS/L PS/R MC/L MC/R 7272fs5010

4 9. Vertical Conveyance Section
PS25
PS12
Vertical conveyance PS/1
open/close PS/U (7255/7272)
MC11
PS26
Vertical conveyance MC/1
MC12
Vertical conveyance MC/2 PS27
PS29
open / close PS
PS28
7272fs5018

10. By-pass Feed Section
PS34 PS32
Tray upper limit PS/BP Paper size PS/2-BP
PS31
Paper size PS/1-BP
M20
VR5
Up/down motor/BP
Paper size VR/BP
PS35
Tray lower limit PS/BP
PS36
Loop PS
11. Second Paper Feed Section
PS43
Leading edge PS
PS70
Paper mis-centering PS
PS44
Registration PS
MC1
Registration MC
5-4
4 12. ADU Stand Section
PS46
Reverse/exit PS2
FM3
M9 Conveyance suction fan
ADU reverse motor
M8 PS47
Reverse/exit motor3 ADU handle PS
PS42
PS53
Paper reverse PS
Transfer/separation PS/R
(7255/7272)
FM10
ADU reverse motor cooling fan
PS48
ADU conveyance PS/2
PS49
PS45 ADU deceleration PS
ADU paper
reverse PS PS50
ADU pre-registration PS
SD7
Reverse gate SD TSL
Transfer synchronization
MC13
Lamp
ADU conveyance MC
HTR3
ADU DB Drum Heater (as supply part)
SD9
ADU drive board
ADU lock SD
MC2 M5
ADU deceleration MC Conveyance motor
PS52 M10
Transfer/separation Transfer/Separation cleaning motor
PS/F
(7255/7272)
Transfer
synchronization lamp
(7255/7272)
PS48 TSL
ADU paper Transfer PS43
PS37
conveyance PS/2 synchronization Lamp Leading edge PS
Paper exit PS
PS46 (7155/7165)
Reverse/exit PS1
PS70

Paper mis-centering PS
PS44
Registration PS
PS42
Paper reverse PS
PS50
PS45 PS49 ADU pre-registration PS
ADU paper reverse PS ADU deceleration PS
7272fs5011
*1: Installed only in old model.

13. Fixing Section
TH2
Fixing temperature/2
TH1
Fixing temperature/1
TS1
Thermostat/U
L4
Fixing heater
lamp/3
L2
PS30
Fixing exit PS L3
TS2
Thermostat/L
14. Toner Supply Section
M13
Toner bottle motor
TLD
Toner level detection sensor
M12
Toner supply motor
5-6
15. Write Section
INDXSB
Index sensor board
LDB
Laser driver board
M15
Polygon motor
PMDB
Polygon driver board
16. Left Side of the Main Body
SW1
Main power switch
FM2
Write section cooling fan
M7
Paper exit motor
PS37
Paper exit PS

FM13
Power supply cooling fan
FM7
Paper exit fan/R FM6
Paper exit fan/F
5-7
17. Rear Side of the Main Body

M3 MB
Developing motor Memory board M11
Scanner motor
C (K) SCDB
Key counter Scanner drive board
ICB
Image control board FM1
Main body cooling fan/1
M12
Toner supply motor M2
Drum motor
FM4
Developing suction fan FM8
Main cooling fan/2
M6
Loop roller motor M4
Fixing motor
M16 HV
Tray up drive motor/1 High voltage unit
M17
TRANSFORMER
Tray up drive motor/2
Transformer
PRCB
Printer control board NF
Noise filter
M18
Tray up drive motor/3 CBR1
Circuit breaker/1
M1
Paper feed motor CBR2
Circuit breaker/2
HTR2 HTR1 DCPS

Heater/2 Heater/1 DC power supply unit
5-8
M3 MB
Developing motor Memory board M11
Scanner motor
C (K)
Key counter
SCDB
Scanner drive board
ICB
Image control board FM1
Main body cooling fan/1
M12
Toner supply motor M2
FM4 Drum motor
Developing suction fan
FM8
Main cooling fan/2
M6
Loop roller motor M4
M16 Fixing motor
Tray up drive motor/1 HV
High voltage unit
M17
Tray up drive motor/2 TRANSFORMER
Transformer
PRCB
Printer control board NF
Noise filter
M18
Tray up drive motor/3 CBR1
Circuit breaker/1
M1
Paper feed motor CBR2
Circuit breaker/2
SW3
HTR2 Heater switch
Heater/2 T1
L1 Heater transformer
Coil/1 DCPS
ACDB (Japan only) DC power supply unit
AC drive board

(Japan only) HTR1
L2 Heater/1
Coil/2
(Europe/Taiwan only)
7272fs5012

DATE PAGE
PAGE METHOD
METHOD
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE
HANDBOOK 4 Dec.2002
May 2003 5-8-1
5-3 ADDITION
REPLACEMENT
Blank page
[2] DF-316/DF-322 Parts Layout Drawing
PS303
Original exit PS
PS304
PS301
Original registration
Last original PS
PS/1
M301
PS310
Original feed motor
Original size PS/1
PS302
Original size PS/2 PS309
Original size PS/2
MC301
Original feed MC VR301
Original size VR
M302
Original conveyance
motor
FM301
Original feed MS301
motor cooling fan Cover open/close MS
SD303
PS308
Pressure roller release SD
Original skew PS/R
SD302
PS305 Exit gate SD
Original registration SD301
PS/2 Reverse gate SD
PS306 PS311
Original conveyance PS ADF open/close PS
PS307
Original skew PS/F
FRONT
5-9
[3] LT-402/LT-412 Parts Layout Drawing
SW100
LT tray down switch
PS108
MS101
LT no paper detection PS
LT upper cover interlock MS1
PS107 PS110
LT first paper feed PS LT jam door
open / close detection PS
MS102
LT upper cover interlock MS2 SD100
LT first paper feed SD
PS100
LT upper cover PS109
open / close detection PS LT upper limit detection PS
MC101 PS106
LT paper feed MC LT paper feed PS
MC102
M100 LT first original feed MC
LT UP/DOWN motor
PS102 M101
LT remaining paper LT paper feed motor
detection PS1
LTDB
PS103 LT drive board
LT remaining paper
detection PS2 HTR101
LT heater
PS104 PS101
LT remaining paper PS105
LT lower limit detection PS
detection PS3 LT remaining paper detection PS4
5-10
[4] FS-110/FS-210 Parts Layout Drawing
SD704
Paper exit opening SD
PS719
Sub-tray full PS PS701
Sub-tray paper exit PS
PS706
Main tray paper exit PS PS712
Paper exit
M702 opening HP
Shift motor
PS718
Shift HP PS
M713
Stacker entrance motor
PS709
Paper exit belt HP PS
PS708
Alignment HP/U PS
PS716
Gate HP
PS720
Stacker no paper PS PS704
(Only when A kit is FNS entrance PS
M711
installed)
Stapler movement motor
FM701
M718
Stacker fan
Folding stopper motor
(Only when A kit is
(Only for FS-210)
installed)
MS701
FNS interlock
M704
Clincher rotation motor
PS720 PS724
Stacker no paper PS Alignment HP/L PS
M716
Alignment/L motor
PS705 (Only for FS-210)
Stacker entrance PS
PS722

Folding knife HP PS
M719 (Only for FS-210)
Folding knife motor
(Only for FS-210)
PS714
FRONT Clincher rotation HP PS
PS723 PS726
Folding stopper HP PS Folding passage PS
(Only for FS-210) (Only for FS-210)

M705
Alignment motor/U
PS711
Stapler movement HP PS
M706
Stapler rotation motor
SD706
Three-folding gate SD
PS713 PS725
Stapler rotation HP PS Folding exit PS
PS729 LED729
Folding full PS Folding full LED
Stapler/R/F
SW702
Staple SW/R
SW704
Staple SW/F
SW701
Cartridge SW/R Clincher/R/F
SW703
Cartridge SW/F
PS730
Stapler HP PS/R
PS731
Stapler HP PS/F
M709 PS732 M710

Stapler motor/R Clincher HP PS/R Clincher motor/R
M714 PS733 M715
Stapler motor/F Clincher HP PS/F Clincher motor/F
5-12
4 M708
Paper exit motor
M707
M721 Paper exit roller motor
Sub-tray paper exit motor
PS707
Stapler paper exit upper limit PS
M701
FNS conveyance
motor
PS702
M712 Tray upper limit PS
Gate drive motor
FNS CB
PS715
FNS control board
Counter reset PS
RB SD705
Relay board By-pass gate SD
M720
Folding conveyance PS703
motor Tray lower limit PS
(FS-210 only)
M703
Tray up/down motor

Old type New type
M703
Tray up/down motor
FS-110 FS-210
7272fs5004

[5] PI-110 Parts Layout Drawing
PIDB
PI driver board M203
PI conveyance motor
MC202
MC201 Conveyance MC/L
Conveyance MC/U
MC203
M201 Registration MC
Tray up/down motor/U PS202
No sheet PS/U
PS205 VR201
Tray lower limit PS/U Sheet size VR/U
PS201
PS210
PI passage PS/U
Tray lower limit PS/L
PS204
Tray upper limit PS/U
M202
Tray up/down motor/L PS206
PI passage PS/L
PIOB
PI operation
board
PS212 SD202
Sheet size PS/L Sheet feed SD/L
SD201
Sheet feed SD/U
MS201
PS203 PI interlock MS
Sheet set PS/U PS209
Tray upper limit PS/L
PS208 PS207
Sheet set PS/L No sheet PS/L
VR202
Sheet size VR/L FRONT

[6] PK-110/PK-120 Parts Layout Drawing

M801
Punch motor
PAPER EDGE SENSOR
Paper edge sensor
(PK-120 only)
PS802
PS804 Punch scraps full PS
Punch scraps box set PS
(PK-110 only) PS801
Punch HP PS
PS804
Punch scraps box set PS
(PK-120 only)
PKDB
Punch drive board
PS803
(PK-110 only)
Punch shift HP PS
(PK-120 only)
PKDB M802
Punch drive board Punch shift motor
(PK-120 only) (PK-120 only)
FRONT

4 [7] PZ-108/PZ-109 Parts Layout Drawing

PS5 (for PZ-109)
Punch HP PS MC1 M10
Punch clutch Conveyance motor
cooling fan
PS5 (for PZ-108)

Punch HP PS M4
M8 (for PZ-109) Punch motor
Punch switching motor
MS2 (for PZ-109)
Punch switching MS
Paper edge PS
M7 M5
Punch scraps Punch shift motor
conveyance motor
PS4
PS7 Puncher HP PS
Punch scraps full PS
PS6
Punch scraps box PS
FRONT MS1 PZCB

Front door MS PZ Control board
DCPS
DC power unit
CBR
COIL Circuit breaker
Coil
NF
Noise filter RELAY
Power source relay Inlet
PS1 M2
Passage PS PS3
1st stopper motor
1st stopper HP PS
SD2
M6
Gate SD/U
Conveyance motor
PS8 PS9
Exit PS Conveyance encoder PS
SD1
Gate SD/L
M3
2nd stopper motor
M1
Registration motor
PS2
2nd stopper HP PS
FRONT 7272fs5032

4 [8] FS-111 Parts Layout Drawing
PS207 M1
PS50 Paper exit-cover FNS conveyance motor
Sub-tray full PS open/close
PS1 M8
detection PS Paper exit-opening motor
Sub-tray paper
exit PS M7
M11
Paper exit-roller motor
Stapler-movement motor
SD1
PS4 Gate solenoid
FIN entrance passage PS
PS13 SD2
Entrance paper detection PS Sub-tray paper exit
solenoid
FM1
Cooling FAN 1 SD5
FM2 By-pass solenoid
Cooling FAN 2
M13
FM3 Stacker entrance motor
Cooling FAN 3
MS1
Interlock M4
Stapler rotation motor
M3
Tray up/down motor
7272fs5022
PS20
Stacker no-paper detection PS
PS8
Alignment-plate/
upper HP PS
M24
Stapler (F, R) Stapler motor/F
PS9 M22
Paper exit- Stapler motor/R
belt HP PS PS34

Stapler HP PS/F
M5 PS31
Alignment-plate/ Stapler HP PS/R
upper motor
PS11
PS37
Stapler-
Staple detection
movement
PS/F PS36
HP PS
PS40 Cartridge detection
PS14 Staple detection PS/F
Stapler- PS/R PS39
rotation PS38 Cartridge detection
HP PS Stapler ready PS/F PS/R
PS41
Stapler ready PS/R
7272fs5023

SD4 PS12
Paper exit-opening solenoid Paper exit-opening PS
PS6
Paper exit-1 PS PS5
PS10 Stacker conveyance passage PS
Paper exit-2 PS
SD6
M2 Sub-tray deceleration solenoid
Roller-shift motor
PS18
Roller-shift HP PS
PS7
Staple paper exit
upper limit PS
PS2
Tray upper limit PS
PS15
Tray no-paper detection PS
PS3
Tray lower limit PS
7272fs5024

4 [9] SF-101 Parts Layout Drawing
PS701 SW702
Conveyance PS Tray upper limit SW
SW701
Conveyance cover
PS703 SW
Tray upper limit PS
M701
(Conveyance motor)
PS702
Shift HP PS
M703
Shift motor
SFCB
SF control board
M702
(Tray up/down motor)
PS704
Tray lower limit PS
7272fs5005

CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

4 [1] 7155/7165/7255/7272 Connector Lay-
out Drawing
1. Printer control board

206 (W: 20pin) 211 (W: 7pin) 35 (W: 5pin) 202 (W: 22pin)
208 (GY: 16pin)

212 (W: 24pin)
215 (W: 6pin)

234 (W: 40pin)
225 (N.C.) 224(N.C.) 201 (W: 2pin)
210 (GY: 11pin) 230 (W: 6pin)
213 (GY: 15pin)

36 (N.C.)
232 (N.C) 233(N.C)
214 (W: 24pin) 217 (GY: 12pin)
219 (GY: 10pin) 229 (W: 14pin)
218 (GY: 6pin)

205 (GY: 15pin)
220 (N.C.)
207 (W: 12pin)
221 (N.C.)
237 (W: 38pin)
227 (W: 28pin)

223 (N.C.)
236 (W: 36pin)
216 (W: 7pin)
235 (W: 34pin) 37 (N.C.) 200 (W: 8pin)
203 (N.C.) 238 (N.C.) 222 (N.C.)


206 (GY: 20pin) 211 (GY: 7pin) 35 (W: 5pin) 202 (W: 26pin)
208 (GY: 16pin)

212 (W: 28pin)
215 (W: 6pin)

234 (W: 40pin)
225 (N.C.) 224 (N.C.) 201 (W: 2pin)
210 (GY: 11pin) 230 (W: 6pin)
213 (GY: 15pin)

36 (N.C.)
232 (N.C) 233 (N.C)
214 (W: 24pin) 217 (GY: 12pin)
219 (GY: 10pin) 229 (W: 18pin)
218 (GY: 6pin)

205 (GY: 18pin)
220 (N.C.)
207 (W: 14pin)
237 (W: 26pin) 221 (N.C.) 222 (N.C.)
223 (N.C.)
236 (W: 36pin)
227 (W: 28pin)
203 (W: 32pin)
216 (W: 10pin)
240 (N.C.)
204 (W: 34pin) 37 (N.C.) 200 (W: 9pin)
235 (W: 11pin) 238 (N.C.) 239 (W: 4pin)
7272fs5013

2. Image control board

128 (W: 20pin) 132 (GY: 5pin)
110 (W: 40pin) 130 (W: 22pin) 103 (W: 4pin)

129 (W: 40pin)
100 (W: 4pin)
118 (N.C.) 104 (W: 3pin)
105 (W: 3pin)
115 (168pin) MU-401/ 402

134 (36pin) ISW
136 (W: 14pin)
111(8pin) LAN 113 IP-511
139 (25pin) KRDS 112 HD-105
140 (GY: 11pin)
137 (GY: 7pin) 122 (N.C.) 121 (N.C.)
138 (W: 4pin) 135 (W: 22pin)


132 (GY: 5pin)

110 (W: 50pin) 130 (W: 24pin) 103 (W: 4pin)
100 (W: 5pin)
118 (N.C.) 104 (W: 6pin)
119 (N.C.)
114 (168pin) MU-401/ 402
134 (36pin) ISW
128 (W: 20pin)
136 (W: 14pin)
111(8pin) LAN
129 (W: 40pin)
125 (4pin) USB

113 IP-511/IP-511Type-A 112 HD-105
139 (9pin) KRDS
140 (GY: 11pin)

137 (GY: 7pin) 135 (W: 26pin) 122 (N.C.) 121 (N.C.) 7272fs5014

Blank page
3. ADU drive board

401 (W: 2pin) 400 (W: 7pin)

407 (W: 2pin)
402 (W: 40pin)
404 (GY: 6pin) 406 (GY: 9pin)
403 (W: 12pin)
410 (GY: 13pin)

405 (W: 20pin)
414 (N.C.)
413 (N.C.)
407 (W: 2pin) 404 (W: 3pin)

401 (W: 2pin) 402 (W: 36pin)
406 (GY: 6pin)
408 (GY: 7pin)
400 (GY: 8pin)
403 (W: 12pin)
410 (GY: 13pin) 405 (W: 20pin)

414 (N.C.) 413 (N.C.) 7272fs5015
4. DC power supply unit
15 (W: 14pin) 11 (W: 14pin) 12 (W: 22pin) 13 (W: 18pin)

31 (W: 3pin)
3 (W: 2pin)
4 (W: 3pin) 21 (W: 4pin)
14 (W: 4pin)
2 (W: 3pin)
1 (W: 5pin)

5. Scanner drive board

4
620 (W: 3pin) 615 (W: 2pin)
624 (GY: 15pin)

614 (W: 22pin)
625 (GY: 7pin)
612 (W: 30pin)

610 (GY: 16pin)
613 (W: 7pin) (7155/7165)

613 (GY: 7pin) (7255/7272)
623 (W: 6pin) 600 (W: 10pin) 611 (W: 40pin)

7272fs5016
6. High voltage unit
322 (W: 2pin) 323 (W: 2pin)

321 (W: 7pin) 320 (GY: 14pin)
7. L1 inverter 8. Toner control sensor board
362 (W: 12pin)

1 (W: 3pin)
2 (W: 4pin)

9. Operation board/1 13. Laser driver board

4
153 (W: 3pin) 152 (W: 4pin)
151 (W: 14 pin)
180 (W: 22pin) (7155/7165)

150 (W: 11pin) 180 (W: 24pin) (7255/7272)
158 (W: 2pin) 156 (W: 2pin) 7272fs5034
14. Polygon drive board
10. OB inverter
165(W:3pin) 189 (W: 7pin)
15. Memory board

166(W:4pin)
141 (W: 40pin)
11. Index sensor board
51 (GY:5pin)
142 (W: 20pin)

4 16. AC drive board
12. A/D converter board
4
18
(W:2pin)
170 (W: 40pin) (7155/7165)
170 (W: 50pin) (7255/7272) 17
(W:2pin)
7272fs5033
7272fs5038

[2] LT-402/LT-412 Connector Layout Drawing
1. LT drive board
721 (W:17pin) 720 (W:11pin)
700
729 (W:4pin)
(W:6pin)
728
(W:8pin)
710
(GY:10pin)
723 (W:2pin) 722 (GY:15pin)
4 [3] FS-110/FS-210 Connector Layout Drawing
1. FNS control board 2. Relay board

51 (W: 32pin)
62 (W: 40pin) 52 (W: 6pin)
61 (W: 2pin) 33 (N.C.)
8 (W: 8pin)
SW1 6 (W: 30pin) 5 (W: 30pin)
12 (W: 24pin) 71 (N.C.)
1 (W: 18pin)
43 (N.C.)
10 (W: 4pin)
(Old Type Only)
11 (W: 9pin)
7 (W: 6pin) 42 (N.C.)
(Old Type Only) 4 (W: 24pin) 8 (W: 34pin)
6 (W: 5pin)
(FS-210 Only)
41 (N.C.)
9 (W: 2pin)
4 (W: 40pin)
5 (W: 22pin) (Old Type Only) 1 (W: 40pin) (FS-210 Only)
9 (W: 28pin) 3 (W: 11pin) 7 (W: 28pin)
(FS-210 Only) 2 (W: 5pin) (FS-210 Only)

(Old Type)
SW1
ON 2 (W: 22pin) 3 (W: 28pin)
(FS-210 Only)
1 2 3 4 2 (W: 14pin) 7272fs5002
(New Type) 7272fs5001

[4] PI-110 Connector Layout Drawing
1. PI drive board
53 56
(W:30pin) (W:6pin)
58
(GY:12pin)
52
(W:38pin)
54
(W:6pin)
57 55
(W:11pin) (BK:24pin)
2. PI operation board
1
(GY:12pin)
[5] PK-110/PK-120 Connector Layout Drawing
1. Punch drive board (PK-110)

65 64
(W:5pin) (W:2pin)
66 63
(W:9pin) (W:40pin)

2. Punch drive board (PK-120)

69 70 68
(W:6pin) (W:15pin) (W:8pin)
65 64 67 66 63
(W:5pin) (W:2pin) (W:3pin) (GY:9pin) (GY:38pin)
3. Paper edge sensor

25
(BK:7pin)
[6] PZ-108/PZ-109 Connector Layout Drawing
1. PZ control board
9 3
(W:13pin) (W:8pin)
4
DIP switches
10 4
4
(W:12pin) (W:14pin)
3
12
6
2
(B:14pin) (W:2pin)
ON
8
(W:6pin)
20
7
(N.C.) Example of switch settings
(W:12pin)
21 5 7075 7085 7165/7155 7255/7272
(N.C.) (W:24pin)
11
ON
(W:4pin)
2 1
(W:4pin) (W:3pin) 7272fs5035

DATE PAGE
PAGE METHOD
METHOD
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE
Apr. 2003 5-21-1 ADDITION
4 [7] FS-111 Connector Layout Drawing
1. FNS control board 2. Relay board
10 51 (GY: 50PIN) 7 (W: 12PIN)

(W: 5PIN)
24 (GY: 22PIN) 23 (GY: 34PIN)
1 25
(GY: 60PIN) 28 (GY: 24PIN)
CONNECTOR for FAN
(GY: 20PIN)
6 (W: 9PIN)
21
(GY: 6PIN) 8 (W: 12PIN) 27 (GY: 60PIN)
(W: 9PIN)
22
(GY: 16PIN)
26 (GY: 14PIN)
9 (GY: 24PIN)
4 (GY: 60PIN)
5 (GY: 16PIN) 2 (W: 2PIN)
3 (GY: 12PIN) 7272fs5026
7272fs5025
4 [8] SF-101 Connector Layout Drawing
1. PI drive board
CN103 (W: 6pin) CN102 (W: 8pin)
SW100 CN107 (W: 3pin)
CN106 (W: 2pin)

CN104 (W: 7pin)

CN105 (W: 4pin)
CN100 (W:9pin) CN101 (W:8pin)
DIP SW Function
SW100
1 No setting
OFF
1 2 3 4
2
Setting of test action
3
4 Starting up the test action
7272fs5003

JAM CODE LIST
JAM CODE LIST

Jam
Classification Cause Machine response Countermeasure
Code
By-pass J10-1 PS44 (registration) does not turn The machine stops Pull the paper out of
ON within the predefined time immediately after the by-pass feed tray
after M6 (loop roller) has turned paper ejection has temporarily and
ON. completed when jam- remove the jammed
J10-2 PS44 (registration) has turnned ming occurs while a job paper.
ON when by-pass feed starts. is being processed .
4 Tray 1 J11-1 PS1 (paper feed /1) does not turn Open the vertical
ON within the predefined time conveyance door on
after MC3 (paper feed MC/1) has the main body and
turned ON. remove the jammed
J11-2 PS1 (paper feed /1) is ON and paper. (7155/7165)
PS36 (loop) is OFF for the pre- Pull out the horizon-
Operating
defined time after MC4 (pre-regis- tal conveyance unit

tration MC/1) has turned ON. and remove the
(7155/7165) jammed paper.
PS1 (paper feed /1) is ON and PS6 (7255/7272)
(horizontal conveyance /R) is OFF Pull out the tray and
for the predefined time after MC4 remove the jammed
(pre-registration MC/1) has turned paper.
Main body
ON. (7255/7272)
PS5 (horizontal conveyance /L) or
PS6 (horizontal conveyance /R)
does not turn ON within the pre-
defined time after MC4 (pre-regis-
tration MC/1) has turned ON.
(7255/7272)
J11-3 PS25 (vertical conveyance /1) is Open the vertical
turned ON while in the idling sta- conveyance door on
tus. (7155/7165) the main body and
remove the jammed
paper. (7155/7165)
PS6 (horizontal conveyance /R) is Pull out the horizon-
Stationary
5 FOR THE PAGE ADJUST-
turned ON while in the idling sta- tal conveyance unit

-
tus. (7255/7272) and remove the
J11-4 PS5 (horizontal conveyance /L) is jammed paper.
turned ON while in the idling sta- (7255/7272)
tus. (7255/7272)
J11-5 PS1 (paper feed /1) is turned ON Pull out the tray and
while in the idling status. remove the jammed
paper.

5-1
JAM CODE LIST
Jam
Code
Tray 2 J12-1 PS7 (paper feed /2) does not turn The machine stops Open the vertical
ON within the predefined time immediately after conveyance door on
after MC5 (paper feed MC/2) has paper ejection has the main body and
turned ON. completed when jam- remove the jammed
ming occurs while a job paper.
4 J12-2 PS7 (paper feed /2) is ON and is being processed . Pull out the tray and
Operating PS26 (vertical conveyance /2) is remove the jammed
OFF for the predefined time after paper.
MC6 (pre-registration MC/2) has
turned ON. (7155/7165)
PS7 (paper feed /2) is ON and
PS25 (vertical conveyance /1) is
OFF for the predefined time after
turned ON. (7255/7272)
tus. (7155/7165) the main body and
Stationary
Main body
remove the jammed

-
paper. (7155/7165)
J12-5 PS7 (paper feed /2) is turned ON Pull out the tray and
while in the idling status. remove the jammed
paper.
Tray 3 J13-1 PS13 (paper feed 3) does not turn The machine stops Open the vertical
ON within the predefined time immediately after conveyance door on
after MC7 (paper feed MC/3) has paper ejection has the main unit and
Operating

J13-2 PS13 (paper feed /3) does not turn ming occurs while a job paper.
OFF, within the predefined time is being processed. Pull out the tray and
after MC8 (pre-registration MC/3) remove the jammed
has turned ON. paper.

tus. the main body and
Stationary
remove the jammed

-
paper.
J13-5 PS13 (paper feed PS/3) is turned Pull out the tray and
ON while in the idling status. remove the jammed
paper.

5-2
JAM CODE LIST
Jam
Code
4 Tray 4 J14-1 PS19 (paper feed 4) does not turn The machine stops Open the vertical
(7255/7272) ON within the predefined time immediately after conveyance door on
after MC9 (paper feed MC/4) has paper ejection has the main unit and
Operating
J14-2 PS19 (paper feed /4) does not turn paper.
ming occurs while a job
OFF, within the predefined time is being processed. Pull out the tray and
after MC10 (pre-registration MC/4) remove the jammed
Main body

tus. the main body and
Stationary
remove the jammed

-
paper.
J14-5 PS19 (paper feed PS/4) is turned Pull out the tray and
ON while in the idling status. remove the jammed
paper.
LCT J15-1 PS107 (LT first paper feed) does The machine stops Open the upper
not turn ON within the predefined immediately after cover of the LCT and
time after MC102 (LT first paper paper ejection has remove the jammed
Operating
feed MC) has turned ON. completed when jam- paper.

J15-2 PS106 (LT paper feed) does not ming occurs while a job Open the LCT jam
turn ON within the predefined time is being processed. access door and
LCT
after MC101 (LT paper feed MC) remove the jammed

J15-3 PS106 (LT paper feed) is turned
Stationary
ON while in the idling status.

J15-4 PS107 (LT first paper feed) is -
turned ON while in the idling sta-
tus.
Paper con- J17-1 PS44 (registration) does not turn The machine stops Open the front door
veyance (all ON within the predefined time immediately after and pull out the ADU
trays) after PS36 (loop) or PS50 (ADU paper ejection has stand. Then, open
pre-registration) has turned ON. completed when jam- the registration loop
Paper con- J17-2 PS36 (loop) does not turn ON ming occurs while a job jam processing sec-
Main body
Operating
4
veyance (tray within the predefined time after is being processed. tion and ADU exit
1) PS1 (paper feed PS/1) has turned guide plate, and
ON. (7155/7165) remove the jammed
PS36 (loop) does not turn ON paper.
within the predefined time after
PS6 (horizontal conveyance /R)
has turned ON. (7255/7272)

5-3
JAM CODE LIST
Jam
Code
4 Paper J17-3 PS36 (loop) does not turn ON The machine stops Open the vertical
conveyance within the predefined time after immediately after conveyance door on
(7155/7165: PS26 (vertical conveyance /2) has paper ejection has the main body and
tray 2/3) turned ON. completed when jam- remove the jammed
(7255/7272: ming occurs while a job paper.
tray 3/4) is being processed.
4 Paper J17-4 PS26 (vertical conveyance /2)
conveyance does not turn ON within the pre-
(tray 2) defined time after PS7 (paper feed
/2) has turned ON.(7155/7165)
PS36 (loop) does not turn ON
turned ON. (7255/7272)
Main body

Operating
(tray 3) defined time after MC8 (pre-regis-

PS27 (vertical conveyance /3)
defined time after MC8 (pre-regis-
(7255/7272)
(tray 4) defined time after MC10 (pre-reg-
(7255/7272) istration MC/4) has turned ON.
J17-7 PS28 (vertical conveyance /4)
defined time after MC10 (pre-reg-
istration MC/4) has turned ON.
LCT J17-8 PS36 (loop) does not turn ON Open the LT jam door
within the predefined time after and remove the

LCT
PS106 (LT paper feed) has turned jammed paper.

ON.
Paper feed/ J17-9 PS43 (leading edge) is turned ON Open the vertical
conveyance while in the idling status. conveyance door
Main body
Stationary
J17-10 PS44 (registration) is turned ON and/or the front door

- on the main body and
while in the idling status.
J17-12 PS36 (loop) is turned ON while in remove the jammed
the idling status. paper.

5-4
JAM CODE LIST
Jam
Code
Vertical con- J19-1 The vertical conveyance door is The machine stops Open the vertical
Main body
veyance door opened while copying. immediately after conveyance door on

paper ejection has the main body and
completed when jam- remove the jammed
ming occurs while a job paper.
Operating is being processed
LCT J19-2 The jam access door or the top Open the LT jam
cover is opened while copying. access door or the
LCT
top cover and

remove the jammed
paper.
Drum J21-1 Dmax has detected a paper while Open the front door
the print sequence is in motion. and pull out the ADU
Stationary
J21-2 Dmax sensor has detected a paper stand and remove

while in the idling status. - the jammed paper.
Second J31-1 PS43 (leading edge) does not turn The machine stops Open the front door
paper feed ON within the predefined time immediately after and pull out the ADU
conveyance after MC1 (registration MC) has paper ejection has stand and remove
turned ON. completed when jam- the jammed paper.
J31-2 PS30 (fixing exit) does not turn ON ming occurs while a job
within the predefined time after is being processed
PS43 (leading edge) has turned
ON.
Fixing/paper J32-1 PS37 (paper exit) does not turn ON
exit within the predefined time after
Main body
PS30 (fixing exit) has turned ON.

Operating
J32-2 PS42 (paper reverse) does not

turn ON within the predefined time
after PS30 (fixing exit) has turned
ON.
J32-3 PS42 (paper reverse) does not
turn OFF within the predefined
time after PS42 has turned ON.

J32-4 PS37 (paper exit) does not turn ON
PS42 (paper reverse) has turned
OFF.
J32-5 PS37 (paper exit) does not turn
OFF within the predefined time
after PS37 has turned ON.
J32-6 PS37 (paper exit) is turned ON
Stationary

-
J32-8 PS42 (paper reverse) is turned ON

5-5
JAM CODE LIST
Jam
Code
Fixing/paper J32-9 PS30 (fixing exit) is turned ON Open the front door
Stationary
exit while in the idling status. and pull out the ADU
-
Main body
J32-10 PS46 (reversal/exit) is turned ON stand and remove

while in the idling status. the jammed paper.
Front door J51-1 Front door on the right or on the left The machine stops
is opened while a job is being pro- immediately.
cessed.
4 DF-316/322 J61-1 Open/close cover was opened RADF stops immedi- Open the open/close
while RADF is in motion. ately. The machine cover and the paper
J61-2 RADF was opened while RADF is stops after paper ejec- feed unit to remove
in motion. tion if copying/copied the jammed paper.
J62-1 PS304 (original registration /1) paper is present.
does not turn OFF within the pre-
defined time after feeding of the
single-side original has started.
J62-2 PS304 (original registration /1)
double-side original has started.
single-side original has started.
Operating

RADF
defined time since reverse paper

feed of the back side of the double-
side copy has started.
defined time since reverse paper
feed of the front side of the double-
side copy has started.

defined time since it has turned ON
when feeding the paper for the sin-
gle-side copy.
defined time since it has turned ON
when processing the reverse
paper feed for copying the back
side of the double-side original.

5-6
JAM CODE LIST
Jam
Code
4 DF-316/322 J62-8 PS305 (original registration /2) RADF stops immedi- Open the open/close
does not turn OFF within the pre- ately. The machine cover and the paper
defined time since it has turned ON stops after paper ejec- feed unit to remove
when processing the reverse tion if copying/copied the jammed paper.
paper feed for copying the front paper is present.
side of the double-side original.
J62-9 PS306 (original conveyance) does
not turn ON within the predefined
time after re-feeding of the single-
side original has started.
time since reverse paper feed of
the double-side copy has started.
not turn OFF within the predefined
time since it has turned ON when
feeding the paper for the single-
Operating
side copy.
RADF
processing the reverse paper feed

for copying the back side of the
double-side original.
processing the reverse paper feed
for copying the front side of the
double-side original.
J63-4 PS303 (original exit) does not turn
ON within the predefined time
after PS306 (original conveyance

PS) has turned ON.
J63-5 PS303 (original exit PS) does not
time since it has turned ON.
J65-1 PS304 (original registration) is
tus.
Stationary
J65-2 PS306 (original conveyance) is

-
tus.
J65-4 PS303 (original exit) is turned ON

5-7
JAM CODE LIST
Jam
Code
4 DF-316/322 J65-8 PS305 (original registration /2) is Open the open/close
turned ON while in the idling sta- cover and the paper
Stationar
tus. feed unit to remove
RADF
J65-10 PS307 (original skew /F) is turned - the jammed paper.

J65-20 PS308 (original skew /R) is turned
4 FS-110/210/ J71-1 Front door of FNS, front door of PZ FNS/SF/main body Remove the jammed
111 or the top cover of PI has opened stops immediately. paper from the FNS,
while a job is being processed. SF, or the main body.
4
FS-110/210 J72-16 PS704 (FNS entrance) does not turn

ON within the predefined time after
PS37 (paper exit) has turned ON.
FS-111 PS4(FNS entrance passage) is not
turned ON within the specific time
after the main body paper exit PS is
turned ON.
SF-101 PS701 (conveyance) does not turn
ON within the predefined time after
PS37 (main body paper exit) has
turned ON.
FS-101/210 J72-17 PS706 (main tray paper exit) does
time after PS704 (FNS entrance)
Operating
has turned ON.

FNS
FS-111 PS10(paper exit 2) is not turned

ON within the specific time after
PS4(FIN entrance passage) is
turned ON.
FS-110/210 J72-18 PS705 (stacker entrance) does not
after PS704 (FNS entrance) has

turned ON. (Staple mode)
FS-111 PS5(stacker conveyance pas-
sage) is not turned ON within the
specific time after PS4(FIN
entrance passage) is turned ON (in
staple mode).
FS-110/210 J72-19 PS705 (stacker rotation) does not
time after M713 (stacker entrance)
has turned ON.
FS-111 PS5(satcker conveyance pas-
sage) is not turned OFF within the
specific time after it turns ON.

5-8
JAM CODE LIST
4 Jam
Code
FS-110/210 J72-20 PS706 (main tray paper exit) does FNS/SF/main body Remove the jammed
not turn ON within the predefined stops immediately. paper from the FNS,
time after the paper ejection has SF, or the main body.
started. (Staple mode)
FS-111 PS6(paper exit 1) is not turned ON
within the specific time after the
paper exit operation is started (in
staple mode).
time since it has turned ON. (Sta-
ple mode large-size paper)
OFF within the specific time after it
turns ON after the paper exit oper-
ation is started (in staple mode).
FS-110/210 J72-22 PS701 (sub-tray paper exit) does
time after PS704 (FNS entrance)
has turned ON. (Sub-tray paper
exit mode)
FS-111 PS1(subtray paper exit) is not
Operating

FNS
after PS4(FIN entrance passage)

is turned ON (in subtray paper
exit).
FS-110/210 J72-23 PS701 (sub-tray paper exit) does
time since it has turned ON. (Sub-
tray paper exit mode)
FS-111 PS1(subtray paper exit) is not
turned OFF within the specific time
after it turns ON (in subtray paper
exit).
FS-110/210 J72-24 PS726 (folding passage) does not

since stapling has completed.
J72-25 PS725 (folding exit) does not turn
ON within the predefined time
since M719 (folding knife) has
turned ON.
FS-110/210/ J72-26 PS725 (folding exit) does not turn
111 OFF within the predefined time
since it has turned ON.
FS-110/210 J72-27 PS720 (stacker no paper) is turned
OFF when stapling starts. (Old
type only)

5-8-1
JAM CODE LIST
4 Jam
Code
FS-110/210/ J72-28 PS705 (stacker entrance) does not FNS/SF/main body Remove the jammed
111 turn OFF within the predefined stops immediately. paper from the FNS,
time since it has turned ON. SF, or the main body.
time since it has turned ON. (non-
stapling mode)
FS-111 PS10(paper exit 2) is not turned OFF
within the specific time after it turns ON.
SF-101 Does not turn ON within the pre-
defined time after PS701 (convey-
ance) has turned ON.
time since it has turned ON. (Sta-
ple mode small-size paper)
OFF within the specific time after it
turns ON.
PI-110 J72-35 PS206 (PI passage /L) does not
after MC202 (conveyance MC/L)
has turned ON.
FNS
PZ-108/109 J72-38 Leading/trailing/side edge PS on PZ/main body stops Remove any jammed
paper edge PS does not turn ON immediately. paper in the PZ/main
within the predefined time since body.
PS37 (main body paper exit) has
turned ON.
J72-39 Leading/trailing/side edge PS on
paper edge PS does not turn OFF
within the predefined time since it
has turned ON.
J72-40 PS1 (passage) does not turn ON

within the predefined time since
leading/trailing/side edge PS on
paper edge PS has turned ON.
J72-41 PS1 (passage) does not turn OFF
within the predefined time since it
has turned ON. In Z-fold mode,
during the 2nd folding operation,
PS1 (passage) does not turn OFF
within the predefined time after it
has been turned ON.
J72-42 During the 2nd Z-fold exit opera-
tion, PS1 (passage) does not turn
since it has turned ON.

5-8-2
JAM CODE LIST
Jam
Code
PK-110/120 J72-43 PS801 (punch HP) does not turn FNS/main body stops Remove the jammed
4 ON within the predefined time immediately. paper from the FNS
after M801 (punch) has turned ON. or the main body.
Or, leading/trailing/side edge PS
on paper edge PS does not turn
since M802 (Punch shift) has
turned ON.
PZ-108/109 J72-44 PS8 (exit) does not turn ON within PZ/main body stops Remove any jammed
the predefined time since leading/ immediately. paper in the PZ/main
trailing/side edge PS on paper body.
edge PS has turned ON.
J72-45 PS8 (exit) does not turn ON within
the predefined time since PS37
(main body paper exit) has turned
ON.
J72-46 PS8 (exit) does not turn OFF within
the predefined time since it has
Operating
turned ON.
FNS
J72-47 Remaining paper is detected in PZ

after the predefined time has
passed since PZ had received stop
operation signal from the main
body.
FS-110/210 J72-48 PS726 (folding passage) does not Machine stops imme- Remove the jammed
turn OFF within the predefined diately. paper from the FNS
time since it has turned ON. or the main body.
PI-110 J72-49 PS201 (PI passage /U) does not Open the top cover of
turn ON within the predefined time PI and remove the
after MC201 (conveyance MC/U) jammed paper.
has turned ON.
J72-50 PS704 (FNS entrance) does not
after PS201 (PI passage /U) has

turned ON.
J72-51 PS704 (FNS entrance) does not
after PS206 (PI passage /L) has
turned ON.

5-9
JAM CODE LIST
Jam
4 Classification Cause Machine response Countermeasure
Code
PZ-108/109 J72-60 Leading/trailing/side edge PS on PZ/main body stops Remove any jammed
paper edge PS does not turn OFF immediately. paper in the PZ/main
within the predefined time since paper body.
edge PS has turned ON. Or, side edge
PS corresponding to paper size on
paper edge PS does not turn ON within
the predefined time since leading/trail-
ing/side edge PS on paper edge PS
has turned OFF.
J72-61 PS1 (passage) does not turn ON
within the predefined time since
leading/trailing/side edge PS on
paper edge PS has turned ON.
J72-62 PS8 (exit) does not turn ON within
the predefined time since PS1
(passage) has turned ON.
J72-63 M6 (conveyance) lost synchro-
nism.
J72-64 PS5 (punch HP) does not turn ON
MC1 (punch) has turned ON.
FS-110/210 J72-81 PS731 (stapler HP /F) and PS733 FNS/main body stops Remove the jammed
Operating
(clincher HP /F) do not turn ON immediately. paper from the FNS

FNS
within the predefined time after or the main body.

M714 (stapler /F) and M715
(clincher /F) have turned ON.
FS-111 PS33(clincher HP/F) and PS34
(stapler HP/F) are not turned ON
within the specific time after M23
(clincher F) and M24(stapler F) go
ON.
FS-110/210 J72-82 PS730 (stapler HP /R) and PS732
(clincher HP /R) do not turn ON

M709 (stapler /R) and M710
(clincher /R) have turned ON.
FS-111 PS30(clincher HP/R) and PS31
(stapler HP/R) are not turned ON
within the specific time after M21
(clincher R) and M22(stapler R) go
ON.
FS-110/210 J72-83 PS730/731 (stapler HP /R, /F) and
PS732/733 (clincher HP /R, /F) do
time after M709/714 (stapler/R, /F)
and M710/715 (clincher /R, /F)
have turned ON.

5-10
JAM CODE LIST
4 Jam
Code
FS-111 J72-83 PS30(clincher HP/R), PS33 FNS/main body stops Remove the jammed
(clincher HP/F), PS31(stapler HP/ immediately. paper from the FNS
R) and PS34(stapler HP/F) are not or the main body.
after M21(clincher R),
Operating M23(clincher/ F), M22(stapler R)
and M24(stapler/ F) go ON.
FS-110/210 J72-90 FNS does not stop within the pre-
defined time since the stop signal
has been transmitted to FNS from
the main unit.
FS-111 FNS does not stop within the spe-
cific time after it receives start-
operation signal from the main
body.
FS-110/210 J73-1 PS706 (main tray paper exit) is
tus.
FS-111 PS6(paper exit 1) is ON during
idling.
SF-101 PS701 (conveyance) has turned
FS-110/210 J73-2 PS705 (stacker entrance) is turned
FNS

FS-111 PS5(stacker conveyance pas-
-
sage) is ON during idling.
FS-110/210 J73-5 PS704 (FNS entrance) is turned
FS-111 PS4(FIN entrance passage) is ON
during idling.
Stationary
FS-110/210 J73-7 PS701 (sub-tray paper exit) is

tus.
FS-111 PS1(subtray paper exit) is ON dur-

ing idling.
FS-110/210 J73-8 PS720 (stacker no paper) is turned FNS/main body stops
ON when paper jam has occurred immediately.
during paper ejection.
FS-111 PS20(stacker no paper detection)
is ON during jamming at the paper
exit.
FS-110/210 J73-9 PS726 (folding passage) is turned
J73-10 PS725 (folding exit) is turned ON
PI-110 J73-14 PS206 (PI passage /L) is turned
-

5-11
JAM CODE LIST
Jam
Code
PZ-108/109 J73-15 Any of the following sensors is ON Remove the jammed
during idling. paper from the FNS
• Leading/trailing PS on paper or the main body.
Stationary
edge PS
FNS
-
• PS1 (passage)
• PS8 (exit)
PI-110 J73-17 PS201 (PI passage /U) is turned
ADU J92-1 PS46 (reverse/exit) does not turn The machine stops Open the front door
ON within the predefined time immediately after and pull out the ADU
after PS42 (paper reverse) has paper ejection has unit and remove the
Operating
turned ON. completed when jam- jammed paper.

4 J92-2 PS45 does not turn OFF within the ming occurs while a job
predefined time after PS45 (ADU is being processed
reverse) has turned ON. (7255/
7272)
Stationary
J92-3 PS45 (ADU paper reverse) is

turned ON while in the idling sta- -
tus.
J93-1 PS48 (ADU conveyance /2) does The machine stops
not turn ON within the predefined immediately after
Operating
time after PS46 (reverse /exit) has paper ejection has

turned OFF. completed when jam-
ming occurs while a job
Main body
is being processed
J93-2 PS48 (ADU conveyance /2) is

Stationary
tus.
-
J93-3 PS50 (ADU pre-registration) is
tus.

J94-1 PS49 (ADU deceleration) does not The machine stops
turn ON within the predefined time immediately after
after PS48 (ADU conveyance /2) paper ejection has
Operating
has turned ON. completed when jam-

J94-2 PS50 (ADU pre-registration) does ming occurs while a job
not turn ON within the predefined is being processed
time after PS49 (ADU decelera-
tion) has turned ON again.
Stationary
J94-3 PS49 (ADU deceleration) is turned

ON while in the idling status. -

5-12
ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST

Note: As for the error codes, “Please call service” will be displayed for the F code, and “Please switch OFF/ON”
on E code. On the actual LCD screen, everything is displayed with SC codes.
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
Drive F13-01 Error detection signal is detected con- The machine stops M1 (paper feed)
tinuously for one second when two immediately and turns PRCB (printer control board)
seconds have passed since M1 (paper OFF RL1 (main).
feed) has turned ON.
F13-02 Error detection signal is detected con- M101 (LT paper feed)
tinuously for one second when two LTDB (LT drive board)
seconds have passed since M101 (LT
paper feed) has turned ON.
Tray 1 F18-10 Error detection signal for M16 (tray up M16 (tray up drive /1)
drive /1) is detected while M16 is PRCB (printer control board)
turned ON. PS2 (tray upper limit/1)
4 F18-11 PS2 (tray upper limit/1) does not turn Error code is not dis-
ON within 20 seconds (7155/7165)/ 36 played on the operation
seconds (7255/7272) since the lifting panel. It is displayed
motion triggered by activating M16 only in data collection,
(tray up drive /1) has started while PS2 list output, and KRDS.
is turned OFF.
Tray 2 F18-20 Error detection signal for M17 (tray up The machine stops M17 (tray up drive /2)
drive /2) is detected while M17 is immediately and turns PRCB (printer control board)
turned ON. OFF RL1 (main). PS8 (tray upper limit/2)
Main body
4 F18-21 PS8 (tray upper limit/2) does not turn Error code is not dis-
ON within 20 seconds (7155/7165)/ 27 played on the operation
seconds (7255/7272)since the lifting panel. It is displayed
motion triggered by activating M17 only in data collection,
(tray up drive /2) has started while PS8 list output, and KRDS.
is turned OFF.
Tray 3 F18-30 Error detection signal for M18 (tray up The machine stops M18 (tray up drive /3)
drive /3) is detected while M18 is immediately and turns PRCB (printer control board)
F18-31 PS14 (tray upper limit/3) does not turn Error code is not dis-
ON within 20 seconds since the lifting played on the operation
motion triggered by activating M18 panel. It is displayed
(tray up drive /3) has started while only in data collection,
PS14 is turned OFF. list output, and KRDS.
4 Tray 4 F18-40 Error detection signal for M19 (tray up The machine stops M19 (tray up drive /4)
(7255/7272) drive /4) is detected while M19 is immediately and turns PRCB (printer control board)
F18-41 PS20 (tray upper limit/4) does not turn Error code is not dis-
ON within 20 seconds since the lifting played on the operation
motion triggered by activating M19 panel. It is displayed
(tray up drive /4) has started while only in data collection,
PS20 is turned OFF. list output, and KRDS.

5-13
ERROR CODE LIST
Warning Estimated
Code abnormal parts
LCT F18-50 Error detection signal for M100 (LT up/ The machine stops M100 (LT up/down)
down) is detected continuously for one immediately and turns LTDB (LT drive board)
second while M100 is turned ON. OFF RL1 (Main). PS101
F18-51 PS109 (LT upper limit detection) or Error code is not dis- (LT lower limit detec-
PS101 (LT lower limit detection) does played on the operation tion)
LCT
not turn ON within 35 seconds since panel. It is displayed PS109

the lifting or descent motion triggered only in data collection, (LT upper limit detection)
by activating M100 (LT up/down) has list output, and KRDS.
started while PS109 or PS101 is
turned OFF.
By-pass feed F18-60 PS34 (tray upper limit/BP) or PS35 On the operation M20 (up/down/BP)
(tray lower limit/BP) does not turn ON panel, jam code J10-1 PRCB (printer control board)
within 10 seconds since the upward or is displayed but no PS34 (tray upper limit/BP)
downward motion triggered by activat- error code is displayed. PS35 (tray lower limit/BP)
ing M20 (up/down/BP) has started For the data collection,
while PS34 or PS35 is turned OFF. list output, and KRDS,
the error and jam
codes are displayed.
Wire cleaning F21-01 The lock signal for M14 (charger The machine stops M14 (charger cleaning)
abnormality cleaning) is not detected when more immediately and turns PRCB (printer control board)
than 25 seconds have passed since OFF RL1 (main).
the return motion (back to front) of M14
has started.
F21-02 The lock signal for M14 (charger M14 (charger cleaning)
cleaning) is detected within 2 seconds PRCB (printer control board)
Main boby
since the return motion (back to front)

of M14 has started.
F21-03 The lock signal for M14 (charger
cleaning) is not detected when more
than 25 seconds have passed since
the return motion (back to front) of M14

has started while re-try process is in
motion after lock detection.
F21-05 The lock signal for M10(transfer/sepa- M10 (transfer/sepa-
ration cleaning) is not detected when ration cleaning)
more than 25 seconds have passed ADUDB (ADU drive board)
since the return motion (back to front) PRCB (printer control board)
of M10 has started.
F21-06 The lock signal for M10 (transfer/sep-
aration cleaning) is detected within 2
seconds since the return motion (back
to front) of M10 has started.

5-14
ERROR CODE LIST
Warning Estimated
Code abnormal parts
Wire cleaning F21-07 The lock signal for M10 (transfer/sep- The machine stops M10 (transfer/sepa-
abnormality aration cleaning) is not detected when immediately and turns ration cleaning)
more than 25 seconds have passed OFF RL1 (main). ADUDB (ADU drive board)
since the return motion (back to front) PRCB (printer control board)
of M10 has started while re-try process
is in motion after lock detection.
Fan abnor- F22-01 An error for SFAN_EM signal is FM4 (developing suction)
mality detected when 2 seconds have PRCB (printer control board)
passed since FM4 (developing suc-
tion) has turned ON. The error does
not clear after 2 seconds from the
OFF/ON operation.
F22-02 An error for CLEAN_EM signal is FM5 (cleaner cooling)
detected when 2 seconds have ADUDB (ADU drive board)
passed since FM5 (cleaner cooling) PRCB (printer control board)
has turned ON. The error does not
clear after 2 seconds from the OFF/ON
operation.
Main body
4 E22-03 An error for BINFF_EM signal is FM12 (developer cooling)

(7255/ detected when 2 seconds have PRCB (printer control
7272) passed since FM12 (developer cool- board)
ing) has turned ON. The error does
not clear after 2 seconds from OFF/ON
operation.
Motor abnor- F23-01 An error for TONERM_EM signal is M13 (toner bottle)
marity detected when 7 seconds have PRCB (printer control board)
passed since M13 (toner bottle) has
turned ON.
F23-02 An error for DEVM_EM signal is M3 (developing)
detected when more than 1 second PRCB (printer control board)
has passed since M3 (developing) has
turned ON.
F23-03 An error for DRUM_EM signal is M2 (drum)
detected when more than 3 seconds PRCB (printer control board)
have passed since M2 (drum) has
turned ON.
4 PCL connec- E23-04 Failure of PCL connection is detected. PCL
tion abnor- (7255/
mality 7272)

5-15
ERROR CODE LIST
Warning Estimated
Code abnormal parts
High-voltage F28-01 5 consecutive charging ON/OFF oper- The machine stops HV (high-voltage unit)
power error ations have been executed since the immediately and turns
charging error detection signal has OFF RL1 (main).
been detected while charging is turned
ON.
F28-02 5 consecutive transfer ON/OFF oper-
ations have been executed since the
transfer error detection signal has
been detected while transfer is turned
ON.
F28-03 5 consecutive separation ON/OFF
operations have been executed since
the separation error detection signal
has been detected while separation is
turned ON.
Process F29-01 Dirt correction failure of the Dmax sen- TSCB (toner control
abnormality sor during maximum density adjust- sensor board)
ment. If this error is detected 10 PRCB (printer control board)
successive times, the error code is dis-
Main Unit
played.
F29-03 Control patches are not output while TSCB (toner control
Dmax correction is in process. sensor board)
(No output from the Dmax sensor.) PRCB (printer control board)
F29-04 Dirt correction failure of the γ sensor
during γ adjustment. If this error is
detected 10 successive times, the
error code is displayed.
F29-05 Control patches are not output while γ No error code is dis-
correction is in process. played on the operation
(No output from the γ sensor.) panel. The code is reg-
F29-06 A recurrence error occurred when istered in data collec-

tion, list output and
carry out γ curve for γ correction.
KRDS. Main body con-
trol is performed using
previous data.
F29-07 Dirt correction failure of the γ sensor The machine stops
during dot diameter adjustment. If this immediately and turns
error is detected 10 successive times, OFF RL1 (main).
the corresponding error code is dis-
played.

5-16
ERROR CODE LIST
Warning Estimated
Code abnormal parts
Process F29-08 The dot diameter correction ended No error code is dis- TCSB (toner control
abnormality with error value. played on the opera- sensor board)
tion panel. The code is PRCB (printer control board)
registered in data col-
lection, list output and
KRDS. Main body con-
trol is performed using
previous data.
Fan abnor- F32-01 An error for SUC_EM signal is The machine stops FM3 (conveyance
mality detected when 2 seconds have immediately and turns suction)
passed since FM3 (conveyance suc- OFF RL1 (main). ADUDB (ADU drive board)
tion) has turned ON. The error does PRCB (printer control board)
not clear after 2 seconds from the
OFF/ON operation.
F32-02 An error for FIXFAN1_EM signal is FM8 (main cooling /2)
(7155/ detected when 2 seconds have PRCB (printer control board)
7165) passed since FM8 (main unit cooling /
2) has turned ON. The error does not
operation.
4 F32-02 An error for FIXFAN3_EM signal is FM6 (paper exit fan /F)
Main body

7272) passed since FM6 (paper exit fan /F)
has turned ON. The error does not
clear after 2 seconds from OFF/ON
operation.
F32-03 An error for FIXFAN2_EM signal is FM7 (paper exit /R)
detected when 2 seconds have PRCB (printer control board)
passed since FM7 (paper exit /R) has
turned ON. The error does not clear
after 2 seconds from the OFF/ON
operation.
F32-04 An error for FIXFAN3_EM signal is FM6 (paper exit /F)

7165) passed since FM6 (paper exit /F) has
turned ON. The error does not clear
after 2 seconds from the OFF/ON
operation.
4 F32-04 An error for FIXFAN1_EM signal is FM8 (main body cooling fan /2)
7272) passed since FM8 (main body cooling
fan /2) has turned ON. The error does
not clear after 2 seconds from OFF/ON
operation.

5-17
ERROR CODE LIST
Warning Estimated
Code abnormal parts
Motor abnor- F33-01 Error detection signal is detected con- The machine stops M5 (conveyance)
mality tinuously for 1 second when 2 seconds immediately and turns PRCB (printer control board)
have passed since M5 (conveyance) OFF RL1 (main).
has turned ON.
High fixing F34-01 TH1 (fixing temperature /1) detects PRCB (printer control board)
temperature more than 220°C for five consecutive DCPS (DC power supply unit)
abnormality times in 1 second cycle. L2 (fixing heater lamp/1)
F34-02 The output voltage of TH1 (fixing tem- L3 (fixing heater lamp/2)
perature /1) and TH2 (fixing tempera- TH1 (fixing temperature /1)
ture /2) is detected as abnormally high TH2 (fixing temperature /2)
at the comparator circuit (more than
228°C). WARNING
Low fixing F35-01 TH1 (fixing temperature /1) has not • When F-34-∗∗, F35-
temperature reached the predefined temperature ∗∗ or F-36∗∗(Fixing
abnormality when the specified time has passed temperature
since the fixing ON control has been related abnormal-
processed after SW2 (sub power) is ity) occurs, be
turned on. sure to repair a
defective part
F35-02 TH1 (fixing temperature /1) detects
before setting the
less than 120°C for 5 consecutive
25 DIPSW 3-1 to 0.
times in 1 second cycle while the fixing
If the 25 DIPSW 3-1
Main body
ON control is processed after warm-up

is set to 0 without
operation is complete.
repairing a defec-
F35-03 The output voltage of TH1 (fixing tem- tive part, this may
perature /1) is detected as abnormality cause a fire.
low at the comparator circuit (less than
-6°C).
Fixing sen- F36-01 TH1 (fixing temperature /1) has not
sor abnor- reached 50°C when the specified time
mality has passed since the fixing ON control
has been processed after SW2 (sub

power) is turned on.
F36-02 The output voltage of TH2 (fixing tem-
perature /2) is detected as abnormality
low (less than -6°C) or abnormally high
(more than 240.5°C) at the compara-
tor circuit.
Scanner F41-01 PS61 (scanner HP) does not turn ON M11 (scanner)
abnormality within 5 seconds since M11 (scanner) PS61 (scanner HP)
has turned ON. SCDB (scanner drive board)
PRCB (printer control board)
Motor abnor- F41-02 The lock signal for M15 (polygon) is not M15 (polygon)
mality detected within 25 seconds from the PMDB (polygon drive board)
switch drive when M15 starts or when PRCB (printer control board)
switching the rotation speed.

5-18
ERROR CODE LIST
Warning Estimated
Code abnormal parts
Fan abnor- F42-01 An error for EM signal is detected The machine stops FM9 (scanner cooling)
mality when 2 seconds have passed since immediately and turns SCDB (scanner drive board)
FM9 (scanner cooling) has turned ON. OFF RL1 (main). PRCB (printer control board)
The error does not clear after 2 sec-
onds from the OFF/ON operation.
F42-02 An error for WRFAN1_EM signal is FM2 (write section cooling)
detected when 2 seconds have PRCB (printer control board)
passed since FM2 (write section cool-
ing) has turned ON. The error does not
operation.
Image control E46-01 During image write, APC cannot be If copy operation is Write section
abnormality performed for sub-scanning beam cor- being performed, the ICB (image control
rection. machine stops after board) power connector
The 12 VDC power for driving the laser paper ejection.
is not supplied. RL1 (main) is turned
The laser does not turn ON due to OFF.
defective laser, or MPC value is differ-
ent.
Main body
The index sensor cannot detect the

laser because the polygon mirror does
not rotate, the index sensor is dis-
placed, or the index sensor is defec-
tive.
E46-02 Illegal address of FIFO for scanner. ICB (image control board)
During image read, image data com- MU-401/402
pression is not completed normally.
E46-03 Illegal address of FIFO for printer. Dur-
ing image read, image data decom-
pression is not completed normally.
E46-05 The FIFO of the compression / expan-
sion chip caused an error interrupt.

E46-06 Decompression error of image data.
E46-08 When APC is performed, the index Write section
sensor output does not change. ICB (image control
board) power connector
E46-12 Compression of the read image and ICB (image control board)
decompression in the page memory
are not completed within the specified
time after negation of SVV.

5-19
ERROR CODE LIST
Warning Estimated
Code abnormal parts
Image control E46-13 During image read, image data com- If copy operation is PRCB (printer control board)
abnormality pression from the scanner to the mem- being performed, the ICB (image control board)
ory is not completed within the machine stops after
specified time. Image data decom- paper ejection.
pression from the scanner to the page RL1 (main) is turned
memory is not completed within the OFF.
specified time. SVV is not detected
within the specified time.
E46-14 During image read, image data
decompression from the memory to
the printer is not completed within the
specified time. Image data output from
the page memory to the printer is not
completed within the specified time.
PVV is not detected within the speci-
fied time.
E46-15 During image write, improper process- ICB (image control board)
ing was performed. For example, the ICB program
decompression device was accessed
although there was no resource.
E46-16 During image read, improper process-
Main body
ing was performed. For example, the

compression device was accessed
although there was no resource.
E46-17 During image processing, a filter coef-
ficient could not be generated prop-
erly.
E46-19 During access to the memory device, a
software error was detected.
E46-21 Decompression from the memory to PRCB (printer control board)
the page memory is not completed ICB (image control board)

within the specified time. ICB program
Compression from the page memory
to the memory is not completed within
the specified time.
Decompression from the memory to
the page memory is not completed
within the specified time.
Compressed data transfer between
memories is not completed within the
specified time.
E46-23 During image read, SVV is not turned ICB (image control board)
OFF within the specified time and
therefore preparation for next page
scanning cannot be started.

5-20
ERROR CODE LIST
Warning Estimated
Code abnormal parts
Image control E46-24 Shading correction error (GA error) If copy operation is ICB (image control board)
abnormality being performed, the ICB program
E46-25 AOC/AGC error machine stops after ADB (A/D conversion board)
• The light blocking cover and lens paper ejection. L1 (exposure lamp)
cover are removed from the scanner RL1 (main) is turned
section. OFF.
• The A/D converter board connector
is disconnected.
• The power cable of A/D converter
board is disconnected.
• The IC protector on the A/D con-
verter board is blown out.
• The exposure lamp intensity is
excessive.
• The exposure lamp does not light.
E46-26 Correction data saved on a resolution Error code is not dis- ICB (image control board)
basis is not found. played on the operation
E46-27 The density correction γ curve cannot panel. It is displayed
Main body
be generated properly. only in data collection,

list output, and KRDS.
E46-29 Calibration start error. If copy operation is ICB (image control board)
E46-30 Calibration end error being performed, the ICB program
machine stops after
E46-31 An attempt was made to perform APC
paper ejection.
initial sampling before completion of
RL1 (main) is turned
MPC.
OFF.
E46-32 An attempt was made to perform MPC
during APC.
E46-33 An attempt was made to perform sub-
scan beam correction before comple-
tion of APC or MPC.
E46-34 An attempt was made to perform sub-
scan beam interval correction

although the image write clock was
abnormal.
E46-35 Dual page memory area error
Due to the image area abnormality on
the memory, image is not decom-
pressed on the memory.

5-21
ERROR CODE LIST
Warning Estimated
Code abnormal parts
Image control F46-40 Hard disk initialization abnormality The machine stops ICB (image control board)
abnormality Hard disk failure, or poor connection of immediately and RL1 ICB program
connectors (main) turns OFF. HDD (hard disk drive)
F46-41 Job information could not be stored on
the hard disk.
F46-42 A route could not be opened during
hard disk job automatic deletion.
F46-43 Hard disk access failure
Hard disk failure or poor connection of
connectors
F46-50 Communication error is detected dur- ICB (image control board)
ing the tandem operation. ICB program
F46-51 An error is detected during the data Around the tandem cable
transfer of tandem image.
F46-60 Adjustment of the sub-scan beam Error code is not dis- Write section
interval is not completed within the played on the operation
specified number of time for the follow- panel. It is displayed
ing reason: only in data collection,
• Defective index sensor list output, and KRDS.
• Abnormal 12 VDC power supply
Main body
• M15 (polygon) driving failure

F46-61 Scanning started before completion of PRCB (printer control board)
original auto skew correction. (Skew PS311 (original mis-centering /F)
correction was not in time). PS311 (original mis-centering /R)
F46-62 Printing started before correction of PS1 (paper mis-cen-
auto paper mis-centering. (Mis-center- tering detection PS)
ing correction was not in time).
F46-63 AGC was retried because of reduction L1 (exposure lamp)
in exposure lamp intensity, but no error
occurred.

F46-64 The PWM γ curve could not be gener- TCSB (toner control
ated properly. sensor board)
E46-80 The message queue was insufficient If copy operation is ICB (image control board)
or destroyed. being performed, the
E46-81 The parameter value is too large. machine stops after
paper ejection.
E46-82 The ID of message queue source task ICB (image control board)
is undefined. MU-401/402 contact
OFF.
E46-83 The message reception event is unde- failure
fined.
E46-90 The access to the memory is illegal. ICB (image control board)
MU-401/402

5-22
ERROR CODE LIST
Warning Estimated
Code abnormal parts
Image control E46-91 The header read address is illegal.
If copy operation is ICB (image control board)
abnormality E46-99 E-RDH memory initialization error being performed, the MU-401/402
E-RDH memory may not be connected machine stops after
properly. paper ejection.
Communica- E49-01 IP-511 connection was confirmed, but IP-511 system board
OFF.
tion abnor- it does not operate normally.
mality E49-02 Transmission from IP-511 to ICB
(Image control board) failed.
E49-03 Direct Memory Access error
E49-04 IP-511 builtin HDD error. IP-511 HDD
E49-05 IP-511 cooling fan lock error. IP-511 cooling fan
motor
E50-01 Main body drive serial input error 1. The machine stops PRCB (printer control board)
Serial data is not received from the immediately. RL1
main body drive section within 0.5 sec- (main) is turned OFF.
ond after reception of power-on ACK.
E50-02 Main body drive serial input error 2.
Serial data is not received from the
main body drive section within 0.5 sec-
Main body

E50-05 Drive board communication reception PRCB (printer control board)
error detection fault. Drive boards
A reception error occurred during

reception of drive board serial data, or
a data checksum error or ID informa-
tion error occurred four consecutive
times although a resent request had
been issued three times.
E50-10 Image control board communication PRCB (printer control board)
error. ICB (image control board)
Initial data is not received from ICB
(image control board) within 10 sec-
onds after power-on.
E50-11 Image control board communication ICB (image control board)
serial reception error detection fault.

5-23
ERROR CODE LIST
Warning Estimated
Code abnormal parts
Fan abnor- F52-01 FM13 (power supply cooling) EM sig- The machine stops FM13 (power supply cooling)
mality nal was abnormal 2 seconds after immediately. RL1 DCPS (DC power supply unit)
turning ON FM13. 2 seconds after (main) is turned OFF.
turning FM13 OFF and ON again, the
signal is still abnormal.
F52-02 The MAINFAN_EM signal was abnor- FM1 (main body cooling /1)
mal 2 seconds after turning ON FM1 PRCB (printer control board)
(main body cooling /1). 2 seconds after
Main body
turning OFF and ON again, the signal

is still abnormal.
Motor abnor- F53-01 5 seconds or later after turning ON M4 M4 (fixing)
mality (fixing), an abnormal MAINM_EM sig- PRCB (printer control board)
nal has been detected for 1 consecu-
tive second.
Operation E56-02 Communication between the ICB Operation panel does ICB (image control board)
panel abnor- (image control board) and OB1 (oper- not display normally. OB1 (operation board 1)
mality ation board 1) does not start within 30
seconds after SW2 (sub power) turns
ON.
Fan Abnor- F62-01 FM301 (original conveyance motor The machine stops SCDB (scanner drive board)
mality cooling) EM signal was abnormal 2 immediately and RL1 FM301 (original con-
RADF
seconds after turning ON FM301. 2 (main) is turned OFF. veyance motor cooling)
seconds after turning FM301 OFF and
ON again, an abnormal detection sig-
nal is detected.
FS-110/210 E70-1 Communication error The machine and the FNSCB (FNS control board)
abnormality E70-2 Start response error. finisher stop immedi- Connector
ately and RL1 (main) is
4 FS-110/210/ F77-1 After M702 (shift) starts operation, the FNSCB (FNS control board)
turned OFF.
111 (FS-110/ shift unit does not reach the shift posi- M702 (shift)
SF-101 210/111) tion or the HP within the specified time. PS718 (shift HP)
abnormality F77-1 PS702 (shift HP) does not turn ON The SF/main body SFCB (SF control board)

(SF-101) within the predefined time after M703 stops immediately. M703 (shift)
(shift) starts operation. RL1 (main) is turned PS702 (shift HP)
FNS
F77-2 After M703 (tray up/down) starts oper- OFF. FNSCB (FNS control board)
(FS-110/ ation, PS702 (tray upper limit) or M703 (tray up/down)
210/111) PS707 (stapler paper exit upper limit) PS702 (tray upper limit)
does not turn ON within the specified PS707 (stapler paper
time. exit upper limit)
F77-2 The machine and FNS stop immedi- SFCB (SF control board)
(SF-101) ately. RL (main) is turned OFF. M702 (tray up/down)
PS703 (tray upper limit)
PS704 (tray lower limit)

5-23-1
ERROR CODE LIST
Warning Estimated
Code abnormal parts
4 FS-110/210/ F77-3 After M705 (alignment /U) starts oper- The machine and the FNSCB (FNS control board)
111 ation, PS708 (alignment HP/U) does finisher stop immedi- RB (relay board)
abnormality not turn OFF within the specified time, ately and RL1 (main) is M705 (alignment /U)
or does not turns ON after OFF. turned OFF. PS708 (alignment HP/U)
F77-4 After M707 (paper feed roller) starts FNSCB (FNS control board)
operation, it does not reach the pre- M707 (paper exit roller)
scribed speed within the specified
time.
F77-5 After M708 (paper exit opening) starts FNSCB (FNS control board)
operation, its open/close operation M708 (paper exit opening)
does not finish within the specified PS712 (paper exit opening HP)
time.
PS712 (paper exit opening HP) does
not turn ON or OFF.
F77-6 After M711 (stapler movement) starts FNSCB (FNS control board)
operation, PS711 (stapler movement RB (relay board)
HP) does not turn OFF, or does not M711 (stapler movement)
turn ON after OFF. PS711 (stapler move-
ment HP)
4 FS-110/210 F77-7 After M704 (clincher rotation) starts FNSCB (FNS control board)
abnormality operation, PS714 (clincher rotation RB (relay board)
HP) does not turn OFF, or does not M704 (clincher rotation)
FNS
turn ON after OFF. PS714 (clincher rotation HP)

4 FS-110/210/ F77-8 After M706 (stapler rotation) starts FNSCB (FNS control board)
111 (FS-110/ operation, PS713 (stapler rotation HP) RB (relay board)
abnormality 210) does not turn OFF, or does not turn ON M706 (stopler rotation /R)
after OFF. PS713 (stapler rotation HP)
F77-8 After M704 (stapler rotation) starts FNS CB (FNS control board)
(FS-111) operation, PS714 (stapler rotation HP) M704 (stapler rotation)
does not turn ON, or does not turn ON PS714 (stapler rotation HP)
after OFF.
F77-11 After M714 (stapler /F) starts opera- FNSCB (FNS control board)
(FS-110/ tion, PS731 (stapler HP/F) does not RB (relay board)
210) turn ON within the specified time. M714 (stapler /F)
PS731 (stapler HP/F)
F77-11 After M724 (stapler /F) starts opera- FNS CB (FNS control board)
(FS-111) tion, PS734 (stapler HP/F) does not M724 (stapler /F)
turn ON within the predefined time. PS734 (stapler HP/F)
F77-12 After M709 (stapler /R) starts opera- FNSCB (FNS control board)
(FS-110/ tion, PS730 (stapler HP/R) does not RB (relay board)
210) turn ON within the specified time. M709 (stapler /R)
PS730 (stapler HP/R)
F77-12 After M722 (stapler /R) starts opera- FNS CB (FNS control board)
(FS-111) tion, PS731 (stapler HP/R) does not M722 (stapler /R)
turn ON within the predefined time. PS731 (stapler HP/R)

5-24
ERROR CODE LIST
Warning Estimated
Code abnormal parts
FS-110/210 F77-13 After M715 (clincher /F) starts opera- The machine and the FNSCB (FNS control board)
abnormality tion, PS733 (clincher HP/F) does not finisher stop immedi- RB (relay board)
turn ON within the specified time. ately and RL1 (main) is M715 (clincher /F)
turned OFF. PS733 (clincher HP/F)
F77-14 After M710 (clincher /R) starts opera- FNSCB (FNS control board)
tion, PS732 (clincher HP/R) does not M710 (clincher /R)
turn ON within the specified time. PS732 (clincher HP/R)
F-77-15 M1 (FNS conveyance) does not reach FNS CB (FNS control board)
the prescribed speed within the spec- M1(FNS conveyance)
ified time after the start of its operation.
4 FS-210 F77-21 After M718 (folding stopper) starts FNSCB (FNS control board)
abnormality operation, PS723 (folding stopper HP) RB (relay board)
does not turn ON within the specified M718 (folding stopper)
time. PS723 (folding stopper HP)
F77-22 After M716 (alignment /L) starts oper- FNSCB (FNS control board)
ation, PS724 (alignment HP/L) does RB (relay board)
not turn ON within the specified time. M716 (alignment /L)
PS724 (alignment /L)
F77-25 PS22(folding knife HP) does not go FNS CB (FNS control board)
ON within the specified time after M19 (folding knife)
M19(folding knife) starts operation of PS22 (folding knife HP)
HP detection.
FNS
F77-26 After M720 (folding conveyance) FNSCB (FNS control board)

starts operation, it does not reach the M720 (folding conveyance)
prescribed speed within the specified
time.
PI-110 abnor- F77-41 After M202 (tray up/down /L) starts FNSCB (FNS control board)
mality operation, PS209 (tray upper limit /L) PIDB (PI drive board)
or PS210 (tray lower limit /L) do not M202 (tray up/down /L)
turn ON within the specified time. M209 (tray upper limit /L)
PS210 (tray lower limit /L)

F77-42 After M201 (tray up/down/ U) starts FNSCB (FNS control board)
operation, PS204 (tray upper limit /U) PIDB (PI drive board)
or PS205 (tray lower limit /U) do not M201 (tray up/down /U)
turn ON within the specified time. PS204 (tray upper limit /U)
PS205 (tray lower limit /U)
F77-43 After M203 (PI conveyance) starts FNSCB (FNS control board)
operation, it does not reach the pre- M203 (PI conveyance)
scribed speed within the specified
time.
PK-120 F77-44 PS803 (punch shift HP) does not turn FNSCB (FNS control board)
abnormality ON within the specified time after PKDB (PK drive board)
M802 (punch shift) operation has been M801 (punch)
started. PS803 (punch HP)

5-25
ERROR CODE LIST
Warning Estimated
Code abnormal parts
4 PZ-108/109 F77-46 EM signal abnormality is detected The machine and the RB (relay board)
Akit abnor- within the specified time after FM701 finisher stop immedi- FNSCB (FNS control board)
mality (stacker fan) is turned ON. ately and RL1 (main) is FM701 (stacker fan)
FNS/PK-120 F77-47 Communication abnormality occurred turned OFF. RB (relay board)
abnormality between FNS and PK-120. Abnormal- FNSCB (FNS control board)
ity remains even when retry operation PKDB (PK drive board)
is executed four times.
PZ-108/109 F77-52 PS3 (1st stopper HP) does not turn PZCB (PZ control board)
abnormality ON within the specified time after M2 M2 (1st stopper)
(1st stopper) has searched the HP. PS3 (1st stopper HP)
F77-53 PS2 (2nd stopper HP) does not turn PZCB (PZ control board)
ON within the specified time after M3 M3 (2nd stopper)
(2nd stopper) has searched the HP. PS2 (2nd stopper HP)
PK-110/120 F77-54 After MC801 (punch) starts operation, FNSCB (FNS control board)
abnormality PS801 (punch HP) does not turn ON PKDB (PK drive board)
within the specified time. M801 (punch)
PS801 (punch HP)
PZ-108/109 F77-55 PS4 (punch shift HP) does not turn ON M5 (punch shift)
abnormality within the specified time after M5 PS4 (punch shift HP)
(punch shift) has started to search the PZCB (PZ control board)
HP.
F77-56 Abnormality is found in EM signal of M10 (conveyance motor fan)
FNS
M10 (conveyance motor fan) within PZCB (PZ control board)

the specified time after M10 has been
turned ON, and the abnormality
remains even when retry operation is
executed 3 times after it is turned OFF.
F77-57 M4 (punch) does not turn OFF within M4 (punch)
the specified time after it has started PZCB (PZ control board)
the operation.
F77-58 After M8 (Punch switching motor) M8 (Punch switching motor)
searches home position, MS2 (Punch MS2 (Punch switching MS)

switching MS) does not switch from PZCB (PZ control board)
ON to OFF/OFF to ON.
FS-110/210 F77-81 After MC712 (gate drive) starts opera- FNSCB (FNS control board)
abnormality tion, PS716 (gate HP) does not turn RB (relay board)
ON within the specified time or does M712 (gate drive)
not turn OFF after ON. PS716 (gate HP)
4 FS-110/210/ F77-91 Communication abnormality in FNS FNS CB (FNS control board)
111 CB (FNS control board) when sub-
abnormality CPU receives data.
F77-92 Communication abnormality in FNS
CB (FNS control board) when main
CPU receives data.

ERROR CODE LIST
Warning Estimated
Code abnormal parts
Communica- E80-01 No response from PRCB (printer con- The machine stops PRCB (printer control board)
tion abnor- trol board) for 5 seconds after SW2 immediately and RL1
mality (sub power) is turned ON. (main) is turned OFF.
E80-02 Communication abnormality in PRCB PRCB (printer control board)
E80-03 Communication abnormality in opera- OB1 (operation board /1)
tion unit.
ISW abnor- F80-11 When SW2 (sub power) was turned PRCB program
mality ON, an area which had not been writ-
ten by ISW was detected in the printer
control program.
F80-30 When data is transferred by ISW, nor- Printer cable
mal header information cannot be PC parallel port
received within the specified time.
F80-31 When data is transferred by ISW, a Printer cable
checksum error or header error was Program file error
detected in the downloaded data.
F80-32 When data is transferred by ISW, data Printer cable
cannot be written to the flash ROM Program transfer
properly. destination board
Main body
F80-40 When SW2 (sub power) was turned FNS program

ON, an area which had not been writ-
ten by ISW was detected in the FNS
program.
4 F80-41 When SW2 (sub power) was turned ZU program
ON, an area which had not been writ-
ten by ISW was detected in the FNS
program.
ADU stand E90-01 ADU drive serial input error 1. ADUDB (ADU drive board)
abnormality Serial data from ADUDB (ADU drive

board) (ID=0) cannot be received from
ACK within 0.5 second when SW2
(sub power) turns ON.
E90-02 ADU drive serial input error 2.
Serial data from ADUDB (ADU drive
board) (ID=7) cannot be received from
ACK within 0.5 second when SW2
(sub power) turns ON.
Fan abnor- F92-01 The FM10 (ADU reverse motor cool- FM10 (ADU reverse
mality ing) EM signal was abnormal 2 sec- motor cooling)
onds after turning ON of FM10. 2 ADUDB (ADU drive board)
seconds after turning FM10 OFF and PRCB (Printer control board)
ON again, the signal is still abnormal.

ERROR CODE LIST
For the following abnormalities, the user can disconnect the faulty unit temporarily to continue using the
machine.
When an abnormality occurs, press the reset button following the LCD message, and turn the SW2 (sub
power) OFF/ON. This allows temporary use of machine until the SW2 (sub power) is turned OFF/ON next
time.
Warning code Cause Unit to be disconnected
F18-10 Tray 1 up drive motor abnormality
Tray 1
F18-11 Tray 1 up abnormality
Tray 2
Tray 3
4 F18-40 Tray 4 up drive motor abnormality
Tray 4 (7255/7272)
F18-41 Tray 4 up abnormalityj
F13-02 LCT paper feed motor abnormality
LCT
F18-50 LCT UP/DOWN motor abnormality
F46-40 to 43 HDD abnormality HDD
F62-01 DF motor cooling fan abnormality RADF
F77-22,25,26 Fold, stitch and fold, three-fold abnormality Fold, stitch and fold, three-fold
F71-41 to 43 PI abnormality PI
F77-46,52,53 Stacker fan, PZ folding abnormality Z-folding
F77-44,47,55 PK, PZ punch shift motor abnormality PK, PZ

Blank page

Time (sec) (sec)

Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Items
M1 Paper feed motor

TIMING CHART
M2 Drum motor
M3 Developing motor
M4 Fixing motor
M5 Conveyance motor
H
M6 Loop roller motor
L
H
M7 Paper exit motor
L
TIMING CHART
H
[1] 7165 Timing Chart (1)
Reverse/ L
M8 exit motor
F
R
H
L
M9 ADU reverse motor
F
R
F
M11 Scanner motor
R
MC1 Registration MC
MC2 ADU deceleration MC
MC3 Paper feed MC/1
5-48
MC4 Pre-registration MC/1
PCL Pre-charging exposure lamp
Charge
Transfer
Separation
A4, life size, 1-1 mode, Tray 1, reversed paper exit, non AE, 2 sets
HV
Developing bias
Paper guide plate
Toner guide roller
SD1 Separation claw SD
SD7 Reverse gate SD
PS1 Paper feed PS/1

PS36 Loop PS
PS44 Registration PS
PS43 Leading edge PS
PS30 Fixing exit PS
PS42 Paper reverse PS
PS46 Reversed/exit PS6
PS45 ADU paper reverse PS
PS48 ADU paper conveyance PS/2
PS50 ADU pre-registration PS
PS37 Paper exit PS
START button ON Stop print

Time (sec) (sec)
Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Items
M1 Paper feed motor

M2 Drum motor
M3 Developing motor
M4 Fixing motor
M5 Conveyance motor
H
L Loop Loop Loop Loop
H
M7 Paper exit motor
L
H
Reverse paper L
M8 exit motor
F
R
H
A4, life size, 1-2 mode, Tray 1, 2 sets
L
F
R
F
M11 Scanner motor
R
MC1 Registration MC
MC3 Paper feed MC/1 Loop Loop
5-49
Charge
Transfer
Separation
HV
Developing bias
Paper guide plate
Toner guide roller
SD7 Reverse gate SD
PS1 Paper feed PS/1

PS36 Loop PS
PS30 Fixing exit PS
PS46 Reversed paper exit PS6
PS37 Paper exit PS
Stop print
TIMING CHART

4
Time (sec) (sec)
Symbol Items 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
M1 Paper feed motor
MODEL
Drum motor
TIMING CHART
M2
M3 Developing motor
M4 Fixing motor
7155/7165/7255/7272
M5 Conveyance motor
H
L
H
M7 Paper exit motor
L
H
L
M8 Reverse/exit motor
F
R
H
L
MANUAL
F
R
SERVICE MANUAL
F
M11 Scanner motor
R
MC1 Registration MC
MC3 Paper feed MC/1
MC15 Horizontal conveyance MC/L
MC16 Horizontal conveyance MC/R
4
Charge
Transfer
Separation
HV
REVISED EDITION
Developing bias
A4, life size, 1-1 mode, Tray1, face-up paper exit, non AE, 2 sets
Paper guide plate

Toner guide roller
SD7 Reverse gate SD
DATE
PS1 Paper feed PS/1
Dec. 2003
PS5 Horizontal conveyance PS/L
PS6 Horizontal conveyance PS/R
PS36 Loop PS
5-49-1
PAGE
PS30 Fixing exit PS
PS37 Paper exit PS
7272fs5019
METHOD
ADDITION
4
Time (sec) (sec)
Symbol Items 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MODEL
M1 Paper feed motor
M2 Drum motor
M3 Developing motor
M4 Fixing motor
7155/7165/7255/7272
M5 Conveyance motor
H
L
H
M7 Paper exit motor
L
H
L
M8 Reverse/exit motor
F
R
H
MANUAL
L
A4, life size, 1-2 mode, Tray1, 2 sets
F
R
SERVICE MANUAL
F
M11 Scanner motor
R
MC1 Registration MC
MC3 Paper feed MC/1
MC15 Horizontal conveyance MC/L
MC16 Horizontal conveyance MC/R
4
Charge
Transfer
REVISED EDITION
Separation
HV
Developing bias
Paper guide plate
Toner guide roller
SD7 Reverse gate SD
DATE
Dec. 2003
PS1 Paper feed PS/1
PS5 Horizontal conveyance PS/L
PS6 Horizontal conveyance PS/R
PS36 Loop PS
5-49-2
PAGE
PS30 Fixing exit PS
PS37 Paper exit PS
METHOD
ADDITION
7272fs5020
TIMING CHART

MODEL
TIMING CHART
7155/7165/7255/7272
A4, 3 originals (single side)
Time (sec) (sec)

Symbol Items 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PS301 Last original PS

PS302 Original size PS/2
MANUAL
PS304 Original registration PS/1
SERVICE MANUAL
PS306 Original conveyance PS
[5] DF-316/DF-322 Timing Chart (1)
PS303 Original exit PS
MC301 Original feed MC
640mm/s
F
320mm/s
M301 Original feed motor
320mm/s
4
R
400mm/s
640mm/s
M302 Original conveyance motor F
320mm/s
REVISED EDITION
SD301 Reverse gate SD
SD303 Pressure roller release SD
SD302 Exit gate SD
V-VALID signal
DATE
Last original ejected
Dec. 2003
START button Scanning the 3rd original
ON Scanning the 2nd original
Scanning the 1st original
5-50
PAGE
METHOD
REPLACEMENT
4
MODEL
7155/7165/7255/7272
Time (sec) (sec)
Symbol Items 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A4, 3 originals (double side)
PS301 Last original PS

PS302 Original size PS/2
MANUAL
PS306 Original conveyance PS
SERVICE MANUAL
PS303 Original exit PS
[6] DF-316/DF-322 Timing Chart (2)
MC301 Original feed MC
640mm/s
F
320mm/s
M301 Original feed moter
320mm/s
R
400mm/s
4
640mm/s
M302 Original conveyance motor F
320mm/s
SD301 Reverse gate SD
SD303 Pressure roller release SD
REVISED EDITION
SD302 Exit gate SD
V-VALID signal
START button ON Scanning the back side of Scanning the front side of Scanning the back side of Scanning the front side of Scanning the back side of Scanning the front Last original
DATE
the 1st original the 1st original the 2nd original the 2nd original the 3rd original side of the 3rd ejected
Dec. 2003
original
5-51
PAGE
METHOD
REPLACEMENT
TIMING CHART

Time (sec) 0 1 2 (sec)

Symbol Items
TIMING CHART
M101 LT paper feed motor
MC101 LT paper feed MC
Loop Loop
SD100 LT first paper feed SD

[7] LT-402/LT-412 Timing Chart
A4, life size, 1-1 mode, non AE, 2 sets
MC102 LT first original feed MC
5-52
MC1 Registration MC
PS107 LT first paper feed PS
PS106 LT paper feed PS
PS36 Loop PS
START button ON
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4
Symbol
Items
PS704 FNS entrance PS
670mm/s
M701 FNS conveyance
400mm/s
M702 Shift motor
PS718 Shift HP PS
A
SD704 Paper exit SD
253mm/s
400mm/s
PS706 Main tray exit PS
Sort, A4, 2 originals (single side), 3 sets
[8] FS-110/FS-210 TIming Chart (1)
PS702 Tray upper limit PS

UP
M703 Tray up/down motor
DOWN
Start signal for FNS ON 1st paper of 1st set 2nd paper of 1st set 1st paper of 2nd set
5-53
5 6 7 8 Time (sec) Symbol
Items
FNS entrance PS PS704
670mm/s
FNS conveyance M701
400mm/s
Shift motor M702
Shift HP PS PS718
Paper exit SD SD704
253mm/s
A Paper exit roller motor M707
400mm/s
Main tray exit PS PS706
Tray upper limit PS PS702
UP
Tray up/down motor M703
DOWN
2nd paper of 2nd set 1st paper of 3rd set 2nd paper of 3rd set
TIMING CHART

Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5
Symbol Items
TIMING CHART
M701 FNS conveyance 670mm/s

SD705 By-pass gate SD
PS705 Stacker entrance PS
M713 Stacker entrance motor
CLOSE
M705 Alignment motor/U
OPEN
M711 Stapler movement motor
M714 A
M715 Stapler,Clincher motor/F
M709 Stapler,Clincher motor/R
M710
PS709 Paper exit belt HP PS
PS706 Main tray paper exit PS
SD704 Paper exit solenoid
950mm/s
M707 Paper exit roller motor 660mm/s
[9] FS-110/FS-210 Timing Chart (2)
280mm/s
PS707 Stapler paper exit upper limit
UP
DOWN
Stat signal for FNS ON 1st paper of 1st set 2nd paper of 1st set 1st paper of 2nd set
5-54
6 7 8 9 10 11 Time (sec)
Items Symbol
670mm/s FNS conveyance M701
2 staples (flat), A4, 2 originals (single side), 6 sheets (single side)
By-pass gate SD SD705

Stacker entrance PS PS705
Stacker entrance motor M713
CLOSE
Alignment motor/U M705
OPEN
Stapler movement motor M711
A M714
Stapler,Clincher motor/F M715
M709
Stapler,Clincher motor/R M710
Paper exit belt HP PS PS709
Main tray paper exit PS PS706
Paper exit solenoid SD704
950mm/s
660mm/s Paper exit roller motor M707
280mm/s
Stapler paper exit upper limit PS707
UP
Tray up/down motor M703
DOWN
2nd paper of 2nd set 1st paper of 3rd set 2nd paper of 3rd set
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Symbol Items
M701 FNS conveyance
670mm/s
500mm/s
PS708 Alignment HP PS/U
CLOSE
OPEN
PS724 Alignment HP PS/L
CLOSE
M716 Alignment motor/L
OPEN
M714 Stapler,Clincher motor/F
M715
M709
A
M710 Stapler,Clincher motor/R
PS723 Stopper HP PS
DOWN
M718 Folding stopper motor
UP
400mm/s
M720 Folding conveyance motor
80mm/s
PS725 Folding exit PS

M719 Folding knife motor
M722 Folding knife HP PS
PS726 Folding passage HP PS
PS712 Paper exit HP PS
M708 Paper exit motor
Start signal for FNS ON 1st paper of 1st set 2nd paper of 1st set 3rd paper of 1st set
5-55
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Time (sec) Symbol
Items
FNS conveyance M701
670mm/s
Stitch and fold, A4, 2 originals (single side), 6 sheets (single side)
500mm/s
Alignment HP PS/U PS708
CLOSE
OPEN
Alignment HP PS/L PS724
CLOSE
Alignment motor/L M716
OPEN
A
Stapler,Clincher motor/F M714
M715
Stapler,Clincher motor/R M709
M710
Stopper HP PS PS723
DOWN
Folding stopper motor M718
UP
400mm/s
Folding conveyance motor M720
80mm/s
Folding exit PS PS725
Folding knife motor M719
Folding knife HP PS M722
Folding passage HP PS PS726
Paper exit HP PS PS712
Paper exit motor M708
1st paper of 2nd set 2nd paper of 2nd set 3rd paper of 2nd set
TIMING CHART

Time(sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Symbol Items
M712 Gate drive motor
MODEL
TIMING CHART
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
M716 Alignment motor/L
OPEN
670 /s
500 /s
PS726 Folding passage PS
M719 Folding knife motor
PS722 Folding knife HP PS
M701 FNS conveyance motor
MANUAL
DOWN
M718 Stopper motor
UP
SD706 Three-folding gate SD
7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK

M720 Folding conveyance motor
PS725 Folding exit PS
Start signal for FNS ON
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Time(sec)
Items Symbol
Paper exit roller motor M707
REVISED EDITION
Paper exit belt HP PS PS709
Three-folding/A4R/3 sheets of originals/2 sets setting/single side

Gate drive motor M712
CLOSE
OPEN
DATE
CLOSE
Alignment motor/L M716
Nov. 2001
OPEN
670 /s
500 /s
5-56
PS726
PAGE
Folding passage PS
Folding knife motor M719
Folding knife HP PS PS722
FNS conveyance motor M701
DOWN
Stopper motor M718
UP
Three-folding gate SD SD706
Folding conveyance motor M720
METHOD
Folding exit PS PS725
ADDITION
MODEL
[12] PI-110 Timing Chart
Time(sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Symbol Items
253mm/s
M203 PI conveyance MC/L
MANUAL
670mm/s
MC202 Conveyance MC/L
M202 Tray up/down motor/L
PS209 Tray upper limit/L

SD202 Sheet feed SD/L
- PI paper feed pre-request
- PI paper feed request
PS206 PI passage PS/L
MC203 Registration MC
CLOSE
OPEN
M714
M715 Stapler, clincher motor/F
M709
M710 Stapler, clincher motor/R
REVISED EDITION
M712 Gate drive motor
PS709 Paper exit motor HP PS
DATE
May 2002
PAGE
5-56-1
PI automatic paper feed (bottom) /2 staples (flat) /A4/2 sheets of original/2 sets setting/single side
METHOD
ADDITION
TIMING CHART

MODEL
TIMING CHART
Time(sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
[13] PK-110 Timing Chart
Symbol Items
PS37 Paper exit PS
M712 Gate drive motor PS
PS704 FNS entrance Ps
MANUAL
M801 Punch motor
PS801 Punch HP PS

SD705 Bypass gate SD
CLOSE
OPEN
M714
M715 Stapler, clincher motor/F
M709
M710 Stapler, clincher motor/R
REVISED EDITION
PS706 Main tray paper exit PS
SD704 Paper exit SD

Punch/2 staples (flat) /A4/2 sheets of original/3 sets setting/single side
DATE
Nov. 2001
PAGE
5-56-2
METHOD
ADDITION
TIMING CHART
[14] PK-120 Timing Chart

Punch/2 staples (flat) /A4/2 sheets of original/3 sets setting/single side
(GY:38pin)
(W:8pin)
63
68
(W:3pin) (GY:9pin)
(W:15pin)
66
70
67
(W:2pin)

(W:6pin)
64
(W:5pin)
69
65

7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK May 2002 5-56-3 ADDITION
MODEL
TIMING CHART
7155/7165/7255/7272
Time(sec)
Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Item
- Ejection signal from main body
68ms loop 68ms loop 68ms loop
MANUAL
- Paper edge sensor(leading and trailing edge)
[15] PZ-108/PZ-109 Timing Chart
Registration motor 790mm/s

M1
SERVICE MANUAL
370mm/s
Conveyance motor 790mm/s

M6
370mm/s
Release
M2 1st stopper motor
Set Release Set Release Set Release
M3 2nd stopper motor
PS1 Passage PS
Z-folding + punch mode, A3, 3 originals (single side)
PS8 Exit PS
4
- FNS entrance PS
Punch shift motor F

M5
R
- Paper edge sensor(side edge)
M4 Punch motor
REVISED EDITION
MC1 Punch MC Punch Punch Punch
M7 Punch scraps conveyance motor
SD1 Gate SD/L
SD2 Gate SD/U
DATE
Dec. 2003
5-56-4
PAGE
7272fs5036
METHOD
ADDITION
4
MODEL
7155/7165/7255/7272
Time (sec) (sec)
Symbol Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

[16] FS-111 Timing Chart (1)
PS4 FNS entrance passage PS

Sort, A4, 2 originals, 3 sets, 1-1
MANUAL
PS18 Roller shift HP PS
M2 Roller shift motor
SERVICE MANUAL
SD4 Paper exit opening solenoid
PS6 Paper exit 1 PS
PS10 Paper exit 2 PS
PS7 Staple paper exit upper limit PS
UP
M3 Tray up-down motor
DOWN
SD5 By-pass solenoid
4
M5 Alignment plate/upper motor
M15 Alignment plate/kower motor
PS8 Alignment plate/upper HP PS
M21,22 Stapler/R
REVISED EDITION
M23,24 Stapler/F
M4 Stapler rotation motor
DATE
SD1 Gate solenoid
Dec. 2003
5-56-5
PAGE
7272fs5029
METHOD
ADDITION
TIMING CHART

MODEL
TIMING CHART
7155/7165/7255/7272
Time (sec) (sec)
Symbol Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

[17] FS-111 Timing Chart (2)
Flat, A4, 2 originals, 3 sets, 1-1
PS4 FNS entrance passage PS

MANUAL
PS18 Roller shift HP PS
M2 Roller shift motor
SERVICE MANUAL
SD4 Paper exit opening solenoid
PS6 Paper exit 1 PS
PS10 Paper exit 2 PS
PS7 Staple paper exit upper limit PS
UP
M3 Tray up-down motor
DOWN
SD5 By-pass solenoid
4
M5 Alignment plate/upper motor
M15 Alignment plate/kower motor
PS8 Alignment plate/upper HP PS
M21,22 Stapler/R
REVISED EDITION
M23,24 Stapler/F
M4 Stapler rotation motor
DATE
SD1 Gate solenoid
Dec. 2003
5-56-6
PAGE
7272fs5030
METHOD
ADDITION
4
MODEL
7155/7165/7255/7272
[18] SF-101 Timing Chart
Symbol Time (sec) 0 6 7 8 9 10 11

Item
Sort, A4, 2 originals, 2 sets, 1-1
????????
MANUAL
????????
PS701 Conveyance PS
SERVICE MANUAL
680mm/s
M701 Conveyance motor
200mm/s
UP
DOWN
4
M703 Shift motor
PS702 Shift HP PS
REVISED EDITION
START button ON
DATE
Dec. 2003
5-56-7
PAGE
7272fs5021
METHOD
ADDITION
TIMING CHART

Blank page
4
CN661-5
CN200B-8 CN611-A1 (DF_M1_CLK) P CN614-A6 (24V)
CN661-2
CN200B-7 CN611-A2 (DF_M1_F/R) P CN614-A5 (24V)
CN661-4
CN200B-6 CN611-A3 (DF_M1_EN) H P CN614-A2 (A)
CN661-6 ORIGINAL FEED MOTOR
CN200B-2 CN611-A4 (DF_M1_M1) L P CN614-A3 (A)
M301
CN661-3
CN200B-4 CN611-A5 (DF_M1_M2) L P CN614-B11 (B)
CN661-1
CN200B-3 CN611-A6 (DF_M1_I1) P
P CN614-B10 (B)
CN200B-1 CN611-A7 (DF_M1_I2) P
CN660-5
CN200B-8 CN611-A8 (DF_M2_CLK) P CN614-A8 (24V)
CN660-2
CN200B-7 CN611-A9 (DF_M2_F/R) P CN614-A7 (24V)
CN660-4
CN200B-6 CN611-A10 (DF_M2_EN) H P CN614-B1 (A)
CN660-6 ORIGINAL CONVEYANCE MOTOR
CN200B-2 CN611-A11 (DF_M2_M1) L P CN614-A11 (A)
M302
CN660-3
CN200B-4 CN611-A12 (DF_M2_M2) L P CN614-A10 (B)
CN660-1
CN200B-3 CN611-A13 (DF_M2_I1) P P CN614-A9 (B)
CN200B-1 CN611-A14 (DF_M2_I2) P
[1] DF-316/DF-322 Overall Wiring Diagram
CN691-7 CN666-1
CN200B-8 CN611-A15 (DF_M2_MOI) H CN614-B3 (24V)
CN691-8 CN666-2 REVERSE GATE SOLENOID
CN200B-7 CN611-A16 (DF_FAN_CONT) H H CN614-B9 (DRIVE)
SD301
CN200B-6 CN611-A17 (DF_SD1_CONT) H

OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
CN691-5 CN665-1
CN200B-2 CN611-A18 (DF_SD2_CONT) H CN614-B4 (24V)
CN691-6 CN665-2 EXIT GATE SOLENOID
SD302
CN200B-4 CN611-A19 (DF_SD3_CONT) H H CN614-B7 (DRIVE)

CN200B-3 CN611-A20 (DF_M1_RETURN) L
CN691-3 CN664-1
CN200B-1 CN611-B1 (DF_M2_RETURN) L CN614-B5 (24V)
CN691-4 CN664-2 PRESSURE ROLLER RELEASE SOLENOID
CN200B-8
SD303
CN611-B2 (DF_CL_CONT) L H CN614-B8 (DRIVE)

CN200B-7 CN611-B3 (PS309_SIG) H
CN691-1 CN663-3
CN200B-6 CN611-B4 (PS310_SIG) H L (FM CONT)
CN663-2
CN200B-2 CN611-B5 (PS304_SIG) H H CN613-1 (SIG) ORIGINAL FEED MOTOR COOLING FAN
FAN301
CN691-2 CN663-1
CN200B-4 CN611-B6 (PS305_SIG) H CN614-A4 (P.G)
CN200B-3 CN611-B7 (PS306_SIG) H
CN662-2
CN200B-1 CN611-B8 (PS307_SIG) H CN614-B2 (24V)
CN662-1 ORIGINAL FEED CLUTCH
CN200B-8 CN611-B9 (PS308_SIG) H H CN614-B6 (DRIVE)
MC301
CN200B-7 CN611-B10 (PS301_SIG) H

CN690-1 CN677-1
CN200B-6 CN611-B11 (PS302_SIG) H CN612-B9 (5V)
CN690-2 CN677-2
CN200B-2 CN611-B12 (PS303_SIG) H H CN612-B8 (SIG) LAST ORIGINAL SENSOR
PS301
CN690-3 CN677-3
CN200B-4 CN611-B13 CN612-B7 (S.G)
CN200B-3 CN611-B14 (PS311_SIG) L
CN681-1
CN200B-1 CN611-B15 (DF_FAN_SC_SIG) H CN612-B12 (5V)
CN681-2 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR
CN200B-8 CN611-B16 (DF_M_RESET) H H CN612-B11(SIG)
PS302
CN681-3
CN200B-7 CN611-B17 (S.G) CN612-B10(S.G)
CN200B-6 CN611-B18 (3.3V)
CN682-1
CN200B-2 CN611-B19 (VR301_SIG) CN612-B15 (5V)
* CN682-2 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR
CN200B-4 CN611-B20 (S.G2) H CN612-B14(SIG)
PS303
CN682-3
CN612-B13(S.G)
H CN615-1 (24V)
COVER OPEN/CLOSE MS
MS301
H CN615-2 (24V)
MODEL
CN672-1
CN613-7 (5V)
CN672-2
L CN613-6 (SIG) ADF OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
PS311
CN672-3
SCDB
7155/7165/7255/7272
CN613-5 (S.G)
CN693-2 CN679-1
CN613-2 (3.3V)
MAIN BODY
CN693-3 CN679-2
CN613-3 (SIG) ORIGINAL SIZE VR
VR301
CN693-1 CN679-3
(S.G)
* CN613-4
CN692-4 CN680-1
CN612-A3 (5V)
CN680-2
MANUAL
CN692-5 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSOR/2
H CN612-A2 (SIG)
PS309
(1)
CN692-6 CN680-3
CN612-A1 (S.G)
SERVICE MANUAL
Crimp
CN692-1 CN678-1
CN612-A6 (5V)
CN692-2 CN678-2
H CN612-A5 (SIG) ORIGINAL SIZE SENSOR/1
PS310
CN692-3 CN678-3
CN612-A4 (S.G)
[Symbol]
L Low level
H High level
Connector
[How to see the diagram]
50-1
P Pulse signal
CN694-1 CN670-1
4
CN612-A9 (5V)
the main switch turned ON.
CN694-2 CN670-2 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR/1

H CN612-A8 (SIG)
PS304
CN694-3 CN670-3
CN612-A7 (S.G)
under normal idling conditions with
Relay connector
(2) Signal types are as follows:
CN695-1 CN675-1
REVISED REVISION
1.The signals shown reflect levels present
CN612-A12 (5V)
Faston
CN695-2 CN675-2
2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows.
H CN612-A11(SIG) ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR/2

PS305
CN695-3 CN675-3
CN612-A10(S.G)
Analog signal/Unspecified signal
DATE
CN674-1
Dec. 2003
CN612-A15 (5V)
CN674-2
H CN612-A14(SIG) ORIGINAL CONVEYANCE SENSOR
CB
PS306
CN674-3
CN612-A13(S.G)
Example)
(4) Signal flow
5-57
PAGE
SGND
PS1
5VDC
CN673-1
CN612-B3 (5V)
CN673-2
H CN612-B2 (SIG) ORIGINAL SKEW SENSOR/F
PS307
CN673-3
(3) RC is the flat cable.
CN612-B1 (S.G)
signal flow
Direction of
the connector symbols ( )
CN676-1
CN612-B6 (5V)
CN676-2
H CN612-B5 (SIG) ORIGINAL SKEW SENSOR/R
The solid black circle ( ) among
PS308
CN676-3
PS1
CN612-B4 (S.G)
METHOD
indicates the direction of signal flow.
REPLACEMENT
[2] LT-402/LT412 Overall Wiring Diagram
LT INTERNAL HEATER MAIN BODY

761-1 751-5 88-5
HTR101 761-2 TRANS
751-6 88-6
FORMER
751-4 88-4
LT DB 700-2 P_GND
700-2 24V
751-1 88-1
13-17 PGND
13-4 24V
751-3 88-3 DCPS
745-1 700-2 P_GND 13-12 SGND
CN772-3 5V 751-2 88-2
LT LOWER LIMIT 745-2 700-2 5V 13-8 5V
DITECTION SENSOR
PS101 CN772-2 SIG L
745-3 CN772-1 S_GND
780-1 CN722-6 5V
LT RENAINING PAPER 780-2 PRDB
PS102
DITECTION SENSOR 1 780-3
CN772-5 SIG
*
CN772-4 S_GND 750-1-10
710-10 RXD 219-1 IO_DTXD P
750-2-9
781-1 710-9 5V 219-2 5V2
CN772-9 5V 750-3-8
LT RENAINING PAPER 781-2 710-8 CLK_DN 219-3 IO_DCLK P
PS103 CN772-8 SIG
DITECTION SENSOR 2 781-3 *
CN772-7 S_GND
710-7 S_GND
750-4-7
750-5-6
219-4 S_GND
710-6 LATCH_DN 219-5 LCT_LATCH P
750-6-5
782-1 P 710-5 CLK_UP 219-6 IO_UCLK
CN772-12 5V 750-7-4
LT RENAINING PAPER 782-2 710-4 ERR 219-7 ERR_OUT4 P
PS104
DITECTION SENSOR 3 782-3
CN772-11 SIG
*
CN772-10 S_GND
P 710-3 TXD
750-8-3
750-9-2
219-8 IO_URXD
710-2 ACK 219-9 ACK4 P
750-10-1
783-1 P 710-1 REQ 219-10 REQ4
CN772-15 5V
LT RENAINING PAPER 783-2
PS105 CN772-14SIG
DITECTION SENSOR 4 783-3 *
CN772-13 S_GND
740-3 773-8-3
CN721-1 5V
PS106 740-2 773-7-4
LT FEED SENSOR CN721-2 CONV_PS H
740-1 773-1-10
CN721-8 S_GND
741-3 [How to see the diagram]

LT PRE-REGISTRATION PS107 741-2 1.The signals shown reflect levels present
CN721-3 PR_PS H
SENSOR 741-1
742-1 the main switch turned ON.
LT NO PAPER PS108 742-2 773-5-6 759-2-1
CN721-4 O_PS H H CN723-1 D1 LT UP/DOWN 2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows.
DITECTION SENSOR 742-3 759-1-2 M100
H CN723-2 D2 MOTOR (1) [Symbol]
744-1 50-1
LT UPPER LIMIT PS109 744-2 773-4-7
CN721-5 UP_PS H
DITECTION SENSOR 744-3
Connector Faston
302-1 5V Crimp Relay connector
LT JAM ACCESS CN720-1 5V
PS110 773-3-8 302-2 S.G.
DOOR OPEN/CLOSE CN721-6 SIDOP_PS H CN720-2 P_GND (2) Signal types are as follows:
DETECTION SENSOR 302-3 CONT
H CN720-3 LCTM_CONT
302-4 CLK H High level
P CN720-4 LCTM_CLK
302-5 CW/CCW
766-1-2 773-2-9 H CN720-5 LCTM_F/R LT PAPAER FEED L Low level
LT TRAY DOWN SW100 CN721-7 DW_SW H 302-6 LD M101
766-2-1 H CN720-6 LCTM EM MOTOR
DRIVE SWITCH 302-7 H/L Analog signal/Unspecified signal
CN720-7 NC
302-8 P.G.
CN720-8 P_GND P Pulse signal
302-9 P.G.
CN721-9 5V CN720-9 P_GND
LT TOP COVER PS100 302-10 24V
OPEN/CLOSE
CN721-10 UPOP_PS H CN720-10 24V
302-11
CN721-11 S_GND CN720-11 24V 24V
DITECTION SENSOR (4) Signal flow
745-1-2 The solid black circle ( ) among
CN721-12 24V LT INTERLOCK MS2
LT FEED DRIVE CLUTCH MC101 745-2-1 MS102 the connector symbols ( )
CN721-13 CONT H
766-1-2 LT INTERLOCK MS1 Example)
LT FIRST PAPER FEED MC102 CN721-14 24V
766-2-1 MS101 Direction of
CLUTCH CN721-15 CONT H
CB signal flow
5VDC
PS1 PS1
767-1-2 773-10-1 SGND
LT FIRST PAPER FEED SD100 CN721-16 24V
767-2-1 773-9-2
SOLENOID CN721-17 CONT H
MODEL MANUAL REVISED REVISION DATE PAGE METHOD

7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK Nov.2001 5-58 REPLACEMENT
2
PI INTERLOCK MS
MS201
CN200-1
CN57-1 5V
CN57-2 NC
CN200-3
H CN57-3 M203 P/S
CN200-4
P CN57-4 M203 CLK
CN200-5
CN231-A19 CN231-A1 H CN57-5 M203 F/R
CN52-1 24V CN52-A1 24V CN200-6
CN231-A18 CN231-A2 H CN57-6 M203 LD M203 PI CONVEYANCE MOTOR
CN52-2 24V CN52-A2 24V
CN231-A17 CN231-A3 CN57-7 NC
[3] PI-110 Overall Wiring Diagram
CN52-5 PG CN52-A3 PG CN200-8

CN231-A16 CN231-A4 CN57-8 PG
CN52-6 PG CN52-A4 PG CN200-9
CN231-A15 CN231-A5 CN57-9 PG
CN52-3 5V CN52-A5 5V CN200-10
CN231-A14 CN231-A6 CN57-10 24V
CN51-A1 5V CN52-A6 5V CN200-11
CN231-A13 CN231-A7 CN57-11 24V
CN52-4 SG CN52-A7 SG
CN51-A16 SG CN231-A12 CN231-A8
CN52-A8 SG
H CN51-A5 MPI_DRV_SEL CN231-A11 CN231-A9
CN52-A9 MPI_DRV_SEL CN54-5 MC201 24V CN201-1
H CN51-A6 MPI_M_CONT CN231-A10 CN231-A10
CN52-A10 MPI_M_CONT H CN54-6 MC201 DRV CN201-2 MC201 CONVEYANCE CLUTCH/U
H CN51-A7 MPI_M_F/R CN231-A9 CN231-A11
CN52-A11 MPI_M_FR
H CN51-A 8 MPI_SD_CONT CN231-A8 CN231-A12
CN52-A12 MPI_SD_CONT
CN231-A7 CN231-A13 CN54-7 MC203 24V CN207-1
H CN51-A 9 MPI_MC_CONT CN52-A13 MPI_MC_CONT
CN231-A6 CN231-A14 H CN54-8 MC203 DRV CN207-2 MC203 REGISTRATION CLUTCH 2
H CN51-A10 M203 P/S CN52-A14 M203 P/S
P CN51-A11 M203 CLK CN231-A5 CN231-A15
CN52-A15 M203 CLK
CN51-A12 NC CN231-A4 CN231-A16 CN202-1
CN52-A16 M203 NC CN54-3 SD201 24V
CN51-A13 M203 LD CN231-A3 CN231-A17 CN202-2 SD201 SHEET FEED SOLENOID/U
CN52-A17 M203 LD H CN54-4 SD201 DRV
H CN51-A14 M203 F/R CN231-A2 CN231-A18
CN52-A18 M203 F/R
CN51-A15 NC CN52-A19 NC
CN51-A2 NC CN203-1
L CN54-2 M201 DRV1
CN51-A3 NC CN203-2 M201 TRAY UP/DOWN MOTOR/U
L CN54-1 M201 DRV2
CN51-A4 NC
CN231-B19 CN231-B1
FNS CB
CN51-B1 MPI_S_IN1_1 CN52-B1 MPI_S_IN1_1 CN251-1
CN231-B18 CN231-B2 CN55-A1 PS201 5V
CN231-B17 CN231-B3 L CN55-A9 PS201 IN PS201 PI PASSAGE SENSOR/U
CN231-B16 CN231-B4 CN55-B5 PS201 SG
CN51-B4 MPI_S_IN2_2 CN52-B4 MPI_S_IN2_2
CN51-B5 MPI_S_OUT1_1 CN231-B15 CN231-B5
CN52-B5 MPI_S_OUT1_1
CN51-B6 MPI S_OUT1_2 CN231-B14 CN231-B6 CN235-1 CN235-15 CN252-1
CN52-B6 MPI_S_OUT1_2 CN55-A2 PS202 5V
CN51-B7 MPI_S_OUT2_1 CN231-B13 CN231-B7 CN235-6 CN235-10 CN252-2
** CN52-B7 MPI_S_OUT2_1 H CN55-A10 PS202 IN
CN231-B12 CN231-B8 CN235-11 CN235-5 CN252-3
PS202 NO SHEET SENSOR/U
CN51-B8 MPI_S_OUT2_2 CN52-B8 MPI_S_OUT2_2 CN55-B6 PS202 SG
CN51-B9 MPI_OBOUT1_1 CN231-B11 CN231-B9
CN52-B9 MPI_OBOUT1_1
**
CN51-B10 MPI_OBOUT1_2 CN231-B10 CN231-B10 CN235-2 CN235-14 CN253-1
CN52-B10 MPI_OBOUT1_2 CN55-A3 PS203 5V
CN51-B11 SUB OUT 2 CN231-B9 CN231-B11 CN235-7 CN235-9 CN253-2
CN52-B11 MC203 DRV H CN55-A11 PS203 IN PS203 SHEET SET SENSOR/U
CN51-B12 PS201 IN CN231-B8 CN231-B12 CN235-12 CN235-4 CN253-3
CN52-B12 PS201 IN CN55-B7 PS203 SG
CN51-B13 PS206 IN CN231-B7 CN231-B13
CN52-B13 PS206 IN
CN51-B14 VR201 IN CN231-B6 CN231-B14 CN235-3 CN235-13 CN254-1
CN52-B14 VR201 IN CN55-A4 PS205 5V
CN51-B15 VR202 IN CN231-B5 CN231-B15 CN235-8 CN235-8 CN254-2
CN52-B15 VR202 IN H CN55-A12 PS205 IN PS205 TRAY LOWER LIMIT SENSOR/U
CN51-B16 NC CN52-B16 NC CN55-B8 PS205 SG CN235-13 CN235-3 CN254-3
CN52-B17 NC 2
CN52-B18 NC CN235-4 CN235-12 CN255-1
CN55-A5 PS204 5V
CN52-B19 NC CN235-9 CN235-7 CN255-2
L CN55-B1 PS204 IN PS204 TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/U
CN235-14 CN235-2 CN255-3
CN55-B9 PS204 SG
CN55-A6 NC
CN55-B2 NC
CN55-B10 NC
CN235-5 CN235-11 CN291-1
CN55-A7 VR201 5V
CN235-10 CN235-6 CN291-2
CN55-B3 VR201 IN VR201 SHEET SIZE VR/U
CN235-15 CN235-1 CN291-3
CN55-B11 VR201 SG
*
CN55-B2 NC
CN55-B4 NC
CN55-B12 NC
CN56-5 MC202 24V CN204-1

H CN56-6 MC202 DRV CN204-2 MC202 CONVEYANCE CLUTCH/L
CN56-3 SD202 24V CN205-1

CN205-2 SD202 SHEET FEED SOLENOID/L
PIDB
H CN56-4 SD202 DRV
MODEL
L CN56-2 M202 DRV1 CN206-1
L CN56-1 M202 DRV2 CN206-2 M202 TRAY UP/DOWN MOTOR/L
CN256-1
CN53-A1 PS206 5V
CN256-2
L CN53-A11 PS206 IN PS206 PI PASSAGE SENSOR/L
CN256-3
CN53-B 6 PS206 SG
CN237-1 CN237-3 CN259-1
CN53-A4 PS209 5V
CN237-2 CN237-2 CN259-2
H CN53-A14 PS209 IN PS209 TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/L
CN237-3 CN237-1 CN259-3
CN53-B9 PS209 SG
(1)
CN236-1 CN236-3 CN260-1

CN53-A5 PS210 5V
CN236-2 CN236-2 CN260-2
MANUAL
L CN53-A15 PS210 IN PS210 TRAY LOWER LIMIT SENSOR/L
CN236-3 CN236-1 CN260-3
CN53-B10 PS210 SG
Crimp
CN238-1 CN238-12 CN257-1

CN53-A2 PS207 5V
7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK H CN53-A12 PS207 IN
CN53-B 7 PS207 SG
CN238-5
CN238-9
CN238-8
CN238-4
CN257-2
CN257-3
PS207 NO SHEET SENSOR/L
[Symbol]
L Low level
CN238-2 CN238-11 CN258-1

H High level
CN53-A3 PS208 5V
Connector
H CN53-A13 PS208 IN CN238-6 CN238-7 CN258-2

50-1
P Pulse signal
CN238-10 CN238-3 CN258-3

PS208 SHEET SET SENSOR/L
CN53-B8 PS208 SG
CN53-A6 PS211 NC
CN53-B1 PS211 NC
2
CN53-B11 PS211 NC
Relay connector
CN53-A7 PS212 5V CN238-3 CN238-10 CN262-1

H CN53-B2 PS212 IN CN238-7 CN238-6 CN262-2
PS212 SHEET SIZE SENSOR/L
CN238-11 CN238-2 CN262-3

Faston
CN53-B12 PS212 SG
CN53-A8 PS213 NC
REVISED REVISION
CN53-B3 PS213 NC
CN53-B13 PS213 NC
CN53-A9 VR202 5V CN238-4 CN238-9 CN292-1

CN53-B4 VR202 IN CN238-8 CN238-5 CN292-2
CN238-12 CN238-1 CN292-3 VR202 SHEET SIZE VR/L
CN53-B14 VR202 SG
DATE
*
CB
May 2002
CN53-A10 NC
Example)
CN53-B5 NC
(4) Signal flow
CN53-B15 NC
SGND
PS1
5VDC
CN232-1 CN299-1
CN58-1 5V
5-59
CN232-2 CN299-2
PAGE
CN58-2 LED1
CN232-3 CN299-3
CN58-3 LED2
CN232-4 CN299-4
CN58-4 LED3
CN232-5 CN299-5
signal flow
CN58-5 LED4
Direction of
CN232-6 CN299-6
CN58-6 LED5
CN232-7 CN299-7
CN58-7 LED6
PIOB
CN232-8 CN299-8
CN58-8 LED7
CN232-9 CN299-9
H CN58-9 SW201 IN
CN232-10 CN299-10
H CN58-10 SW202 IN
CN232-11 CN299-11
PS1
H CN58-11 SW203 IN
CN232-12 CN299-12
CN58-12 SG
METHOD
REPLACEMENT
[4] PK-110 Overall Wiring Diagram
CN62-A1 5V CN63-A1 5V
CN62-A2 5V CN63-A2 5V
L CN65-1 M801 DRV1 CN551-1
L CN65-2 M801 DRV2 CN551-2 M801 PUNCH MOTOR
CN501-1
CN62-A9 NC CN63-A9 NC CN65-3 PS801 5V
CN501-2
CN62-A10 NC CN63-A10 NC L CN65-4 PS801 IN PS801 PUNCH HP SENSOR
CN501-3
CN62-A11 NC CN63-A11 NC CN65-5 PS801 SG
CN62-A14 PS801 IN CN63-A14 PS801 IN L
CN62-A16 NC CN63-A16 NC CN531-1 CN531-6 CN502-1
CN66-1 PS802 5V
CN62-A17 PS802 IN CN63-A17 PS802 IN H CN531-3 CN531-4 CN502-2 PUNCH SCRAPS
H CN66-4 PS802 IN PS802
CN62-A18 PS804 IN CN63-A18 PS804 IN H
CN66-7 PS802 SG CN531-5 CN531-2 CN502-3 FULL SENSOR
CN62-A19 SUBIN1 CN63-A19 SUBIN1
CN62-A20 NC CN63-A20 NC CN531-2 CN531-5 CN504-1
CN66-2 PS804 5V
CN62-B1 NC CN63-B1 NC
H CN66-5 PS804 IN CN531-4 CN531-3 CN504-2
PS804 PUNCH SCRAPS
CN62-B2 NC CN63-B2 NC CN531-6 CN531-1 CN504-3 BOX SET SENSOR
CN66-8 PS804 SG
CN62-B4 PKSET CN63-B4 PKSET L
CN66-3 NC
CN66-6 NC
CN66-9 NC
H CN62-B15 M801 CONT CN63-B15 M801 CONT 1.The signals shown reflect levels present (3) RC is the flat cable.
L CN62-B16 M801 F/R CN63-B16 M801 F/R under normal idling conditions with (4) Signal flow
CN62-B18 NC CN63-B18 NC the main switch turned ON. The solid black circle ( ) among
CN62-B19 SG CN63-B19 SG 2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows. the connector symbols ( )
CN62-B20 SG CN63-B20 SG
(1) [Symbol] indicates the direction of signal flow.
50-1 Example)
CN61-1 24V CN64-1 24V
CN61-2 PG CN64-2 PG Direction of
CB signal flow
5VDC
Connector Faston
PS1 PS1
FNSCB PKDB Crimp Relay connector SGND
H High level
L Low level
P Pulse signal
5-60
2
[5] PK-120 Overall Wiring Diagram
CN62-A 1 5V CN63-A 1 5V
CN62-A 2 5V CN63-A 2 5V
CN62-A 3 CN63-A 3 OUT-1 P
CN62-A 7 CN63-A 7 OUT-5 P CN551-1
CN65-1 M801 DRV1
CN62-A 8 CN63-A 8 OUT-6 P CN551-2 M801 PUNCH MOTOR
CN65-2 M801 DRV2
CN62-A10 CN63-A10 OUT-8 P
CN62-A11 CN63-A11 OUT-9 P
CN62-A12 CN63-A12 OUT-10 P
CN62-A13 N.C. CN63-A13 N.C.
CN62-A14 CN63-A14 PS801 L
CN62-A15 N.C. CN63-A15 N.C.
CN62-A16 N.C. CN63-A16 N.C.
CN62-A17 CN63-A17 PS802 IN H
CN62-A18 CN63-A18 PS804 IN H
CN62-A19 N.C. CN63-A19 N.C.
CN62-A20 N.C. CN63-A20 N.C.
CN62-B 1 N.C. CN63-B 1 N.C.
CN62-B 2 N.C. CN63-B 2 N.C.
CN62-B 3 PKSET2 CN63-B 3 PKSET2 L
CN62-B 4 PKSET CN63-B 4 PKSET L
P CN62-B 5 SIG_1 CN63-B 5
P CN62-B 6 SIG_2 CN63-B 6 CN501-1
CN65-3 PS801 5V
FNS CB
P CN62-B 7 SIG_3 CN63-B 7 CN501-2
H CN65-4 PS801 IN PS801 PUNCH HP SENSOR
P CN62-B 8 SIG_4 CN63-B 8 CN501-3
CN65-5 PS801 SG
P CN62-B 9 SIG_5 CN63-B 9
P CN62-B10 SIG_6 CN63-B10
P CN62-B14 SIG_10 CN63-B14
CN62-B15 M801CONT CN63-B15
CN62-B16 M801F/R CN63-B16
CN62-B17 N.C. CN63-B17 N.C.
CN62-B18 N.C. CN63-B18 N.C.
CN61-1 24V CN64-1 24V CN504-1

CN68-1 5V
CN61-2 PG CN64-2 PG CN504-2
L CN68-2 IN1
CN504-3
L CN68-3 IN2
CN504-4
L CN68-4 IN3
CN504-5 PAPER EDGE SENSOR
L CN68-5 IN4
CN504-6
L CN68-6 IN5
CN504-7
CN68-7 SG
CN68-8 N.C.
CN504-1
CN66-2 PS804 5V PUNCH SCRAPS
CN504-2
H CN66-5 PS804 IN PS804
CN504-3 BOX SET SENSOR
CN66-8 PS804 SG
MODEL
CN66-3 5V NC
CN66-6 IN NC
CN66-9 SG NC
CN531-3 CN531-1 CN502-1
CN66-1 PS802 5V PUNCH SCRAPS
CN531-2 CN531-2 CN502-2 PS802
H CN66-4 PS802 IN CN531-1 CN531-3 CN502-3
CN66-7 PS802 SG FULL SENSOR
PKDB
(1)
MANUAL
Crimp

[Symbol]
L Low level
CN158-3
H High level
CN69-1 24V
Connector
CN158-9
CN69-2 24V
50-1
P Pulse signal
CN158-1
P CN69-3 M802 DRVA
CN158-5 M802 PUNCH SHIFT MOTOR

P CN69-4 M802 DRVA
CN158-7
P CN69-5 M802 DRVB
CN158-11
2
P CN69-6 M802 DRVB

Relay connector
Faston
REVISED REVISION
CN505-1
CN67-1 PS803 5V
CN505-2
H CN67-2 PS803 IN PS803 PUNCH SHIFT HP SENSOR
CN505-3
CN67-3 PS803 SG
DATE
CB
May 2002
Example)
(4) Signal flow
SGND
PS1
5VDC
5-61
PAGE
signal flow
Direction of
PS1
ADDITION
METHOD
4
(1)
Crimp
CN53- 3/1
CN 7- 9 M10-24V O O
CN53- 1/3 CONVEYANCE MOTOR COOLING FAN
H CN 7- 10 M10-DRV BK BK
M10
CN53- 2/2
H CN 3- 8 M10-EM Y
[Symbol]
CN 7- 11 24VDRV
CN 7- 12 DRVSPR
Connector
50-1
INLET

CN32- 4 CN42- 1
CN 5- B1 M2 24V R R
CN32- 5 CN42- 6
P CN 5- B2 M2 A BK BK
CN32- 6 CN42- 4
FT2
FT3
FT1
P CN 5- B3 M2 A B BN
CN32-13 CN42- 2 1ST STOPPER MOTOR
M2
CN 5- B4 M2 24V R R
CN32-14 CN42- 5
P CN 5- B5 M2 B O O
Relay connector
CN32-15 CN42- 3
P CN 5- B6 M2 B Y Y
W
BK
Y/GN
CN32- 7 CN74- 1/13 CN43- 5
CN 5- B7 M3 24V W

CN32- 8 CN74- 2/12 CN43- 4
Faston
P CN 5- B8 M3 A R
CN32- 9 CN74- 3/11 CN43- 6
P CN 5- B9 M3 A Y

CN32-16 CN74- 4/10 CN43- 2
RT1
2ND STOPPER MOTOR
M3
BK
FT5
FT4
CN 5-B10 M3 24V
CN32-17 CN74- 5/9 CN43- 3
P CN 5-B11 M3 B B
CN32-18 CN74- 6/8 CN43- 1
P CN 6-B12 M3 B O
CN30- 1 CN46- 5
CN 8- 1 M6 24V W W
CBR
CN30- 2 CN46- 4
CBR
P CN 5- 6 M6 B O O
[6] PZ-108 Overall Wiring Diagram
CN30- 3 CN46- 6
P CN 8- 5 M6 B B B
CN30- 4 CN46- 2 CONVEYANCE MOTOR
M6
CN 8- 4 M6 24V BK BK
FT7
FT6
CN30- 5 CN46- 3
P CN 8- 3 M6 A R R
CN30- 6 CN46- 1
P CN 8- 2 M6 A Y Y
W
BK
CN32- 1 CN41- 1
CN 5- A7 M1 24V W W
CN32- 2 CN41- 3
P CN 5-A12 M1 B B B
CN32- 3 CN41- 4
P CN 5-A11 M1 B O O
FT9
FT8
CN32-10 CN41- 2 REGISTRATION MOTOR
M1
CN 5-A10 M1 24V BK BK
CN32-11 CN41- 5
P CN 5- A9 M1 A R R
4
3
CN32-12 CN41- 6
L Low level
P CN 5- A8 M1 A Y Y
H High level
P Pulse signal
NF2
1
FT11
FT10
CN45- 5
CN 5- A1 M5 24V W
CN45- 4
P CN 5- A2 M5 A B
CN45- 6
P CN 5- A3 M5 A O
CN45- 2
W
BK
PUNCH SHIFT MOTOR
M5
CN 5- A4 M5 24V BK

CN45- 3
P CN 5- A5 M5 B R
CN45- 1
P CN 5- A6 M5 B Y
RELAY
CN39- 9/6 CN52- 2
FT13
FT12
CN 7- 5 MC1-24V O B
CN 8- 1 RL5V CN39-10/5 CN52- 1 PUNCH CLUTCH
FT17 FT16 H CN 7- 6 MC1-DRV BK O
MC1
R R
A
C

FT19 FT18 CN 8- 2 RLS.G
BK BK
B
D
CN39-11/4 CN44- 2
FT15
FT14
CN11- 1 M4-24V O B
CN39-12/3 CN44- 1 PUNCH MOTOR
M4
H CN11- 4 M4-DRV BK R
W
BK
CN47- 1 PUNCH SCRAPS
CN 7- 7 M7-24V O O
CN47- 2
CB
M7
H CN 7- 8 M7-DRV BK BK
CONVEYANCE MOTOR
FT22
FT21
Example)
(4) Signal flow
RT5
RT4 B
MS1
SGND
PS1
5VDC
FT24
FT23
CN36-13/1 CN50- 1 GATE
CN 7- 1 SD1-DRV1 O O
CN36-12/2 CN50- 2 SD1
H CN 7- 2 SD1-DRV2 BK B SOLENOID/L

W
FRONT DOOR MS
BK
PZCB
signal flow
Direction of
CN36-11/3 CN51- 1 GATE
CN 7- 3 SD2-DRV1 O O
CN36-10/4 CN51- 2

H CN 7- 4 SD2-DRV2 BK B SD2
SOLENOID/U
CN78- 1

PGC7
PS1
CN39- 1/14

CN 3- 1 5V R R R CN25- 1 5V
COIL
L CN 3- 2 PSS-IN1 CN39- 2/13
CN25- 2 PSS-IN1
L CN 3- 3 PSS-IN2 CN39- 3/12
CN25- 3 PSS-IN2
CN 3- 4 PSS-IN3 CN39- 4/11
L CN25- 4 PSS-IN3
CN 3- 5 PSS-IN4 CN39- 5/10
L CN25- 5 PSS-IN4
CN78- 2
CN 3- 6 PSS-IN5 CN39- 6/9
L CN25- 6 PSS-IN5
CN 3- 7 GND CN39- 7/8
B B B CN25- 7 GND
SENSOR
PGC8
CN 3- 8 SPR2
PAPER EDGE
BK
CN65- 1
R PUNCH HP
H CN 4- 8 P-HP2-IN CN39- 8/7 CN65- 2
RT2
CN65- 3
PS5
B SENSOR
B
W
BK
CN39- 14/1 RT4

RT3 B B
L
N
FG
RT7
RT6
RT8
MODEL
CN62- 1
R
+V:24V CN 4- 5 S-HP1-IN CN36- 4/10 CN62- 2
CN 2- 1 24V1
L PS3 1ST STOPPER HP SENSOR
RT10 O CN62- 3
B
7155/7165/7255/7272
+V:24V
RT13 O CN 2- 2 24V2
CN74-10/4 CN63- 1
-V:P.G R 2ND STOPPER
BK CN 2- 3 P.G L CN 4- 6 S-HP2-IN CN36- 5/9 CN74-11/3 CN63- 2
RT11 PS2
CN74-12/2 CN63- 3
DCPS
B HP SENSOR
-V:P.G
RT12 BK CN 2- 4 P.G
PGC5 PGC9
CN 4- 3 5V CN36- 7/7 CN74- 9/5 CN61- 1
R R PASSAGE
CN 4- 4 PSS-IN CN36- 6/8 CN74- 8/6 CN61- 2
H PS1
CN 4- 14 GND CN36- 2/12 CN74- 7/7 CN61- 3
B B SENSOR
PGC6 PGC10
CN68- 1
CN36-1/13 CN74-13/1 CN68- 2
EXIT
L CN 4- 11 EXT-PS PS8
MANUAL
CN68- 3
SENSOR
CN 4- 2 5V CN36- 8/6 CN68- 1

R R CONVEYANCE ENCODER
CN36- 9/5 CN68- 2
SERVICE MANUAL
P CN 4- 12 M6 EN PS9
CN36- 3/11 CN68- 3
B B SENSOR
CN67- 3
R PUNCH SCRAPS
H CN 4- 9 P-FULL-IN CN67- 2
CN67- 1 PS7
B FULL SENSOR
3
R CN 1- 1 5V PGC3
CN 4- 1 5V CN66- 1
R R PUNCH SCRAPS BOX
CN 4- 10 BOX-IN CN66- 2
H
4
B CN 1- 3 S.G CN66- 3 PS6

CN 4- 13 GND B B SENSOR
4
PGC4
CN64- 1
R PUNCH SHIFT HP
CN 4- 7 P-HP1-IN CN64- 2
H PS4
CN64- 3
B SENSOR
REVISED REVISION
P CN 9- 7 F-TXD-OUT CN90-12
CN 9- 2 SGND CN90-11
P CN 9- 9 P-REQ-OUT CN90-10
DATE
CN 9- 4 SGND CN90- 9
CN 9- 11 F-ACK-IN CN90- 8
Dec. 2003
P
P CN 9- 1 F-RXD-IN CN90- 6
P CN 9- 3 F-REQ-IN CN90- 4
CN 9- 10 SGND CN90- 3
P CN 9- 5 P-ACK-OUT CN90- 2
CN 9- 12 SGND CN90- 1
CN95- 1 CN10- 1 M-RXD-IN P CN 9- 13
5-62
PAGE
CN95- 2 CN10- 2 SGND

CN95- 3 CN10- 3 M-REQ-IN P
FNS
CN95- 5 CN10- 5 M-ACK-OUT P

CN95- 7 CN10- 7 M-TXD-OUT P
CN95- 9 CN10- 9 P-REQ-OUT P
CN95-10 CN10- 10 SGND
CN95-11 CN10- 11 M-ACK-IN P
CN95-12 CN10- 12 SGND
B
C
MAIN BODY
A
CN96- 1 O CN91- 1 24VDC

PGC1
ADDITION
METHOD
CN96- 2 R R CN91- 2 5VDC

CN96- 3 B B CN91- 3 SGND
PGC2
CN96- 4 BK CN91- 4 PGND
4
D
3
4
STAPLER M22 DRV F CN10-1 24V

CN156-1
SUB-TRAY DECELERATION
MOTOR/R M22 M22 DRV R CN156-2 SD6
H CN10-2 DRV SOLENOID
CN170-1 CN5-1 STR_R_DRV1
5V CN201-1 24V
STAPLER CN170-2 CN5-2 STR_R_DRV2 *
PS31 PS31 IN CN201-2 DRV *
HP SENSOR/R GND
CARTRIGE CN171-15 CN171-1 CN4-A1 5V CN177-3 CN177-2 CN120-1
5V CN202-1 5V CN10-3 5V
CN171-14 CN171-2 CN4-A2 R_READY L CN177-2 CN177-3 CN120-2
DETECTION PS39 PS39 IN CN202-2 /READY
[7] FS-111 Overall Wiring Diagram
CN171-13 CN171-3 H CN10-4 IN PS50 SUB-TRAY FULL SENSOR

SENSOR/R GND CN202-3 CD CN4-A3 R_CD L CN177-1 CN177-4 CN120-3
CN171-12 CN171-4 CN10-5 GND
CN202-4 GND CN4-A4 SGND
STAPLE 5V CN171-11 CN171-5 CN4-A5 R_HOME L
CN202-5/HOME
PS40 IN CN171-10 CN171-6 CN4-A6 R_LS L
DETECTION PS40 CN202-6 LS
GND CN171-9 CN171-7 CN4-A7 SGND CN170-3 CN170-1 CN121-1
SENSOR/R CN202-7 GND CN1-A12 5V
CN170-2 CN170-2 CN121-2 SUB TRAY PAPER
STAPLER/R
5V H CN1-A30 IN PS1
STAPLER CN170-1 CN170-3 CN121-3
PS41 IN CN1-A21 GND EXIT SENSOR
READY PS41 GND UL1007#22
SENSOR/R CN1-A13 5V
CN357-1 PAPER EXIT COVER
CN357-2
STAPLER M24 DRV F L CN1-B18 IN CN357-3
PS207 OPEN/CLOSE DETECTION
M24 M24 DRV R UL1007#22 CN1-A22 GND
MOTOR/F SENSOR
5V CN170- 3 CN5-3 STR_F_DRV1 CN102-2
STAPLER CN203-1 24V CN1-A 2 24V
PS34 IN CN170- 4 CN5-4 STR_F_DRV2 * CN102-1 M2 ROLLER SHIFT MOTOR
PS34 CN203-2 DRV
HP SENSOR/F GND * L CN1-B29 DRV
CARTRIGE 5V CN171-8 CN171-8 CN4-A8 5V

CN204-1 5V
DETECTION PS36 IN CN171-7 CN171-9 CN4-A9 F_READY L
PS36 CN204-2 /READY
GND CN171-6 CN171-10 CN4-A10 F_CD L CN108-1
SENSOR/F CN204-3 CD CN1-A 1 24V PAPER EXIT OPENING
CN171-5 CN171-11 CN4-A11 SGND CN108-2 M8
CN204-4 GND
STAPLE 5V CN171-4 CN171-12 CN4-A12 F_HOME L L CN1-B30 DRV MOTOR
CN204-5/HOME
PS37 IN CN171-3 CN171-13 CN4-A13 F_LS L
DETECTION PS37 CN204-6 GND
GND CN171-2 CN171-14 CN4-A14 SGND
SENSOR/F CN204-7 GND
CN101-1
STAPLER/F
5V CN1-B 6 5V
CN101-2 NC
STAPLER PS38 IN CN101-3
PS38 GND H CN1-B 2 CONT
READY CN1-B 3 CLK
CN101-4
P
SENSOR/F CN101-5
L CN1-B 5 F/R FNS CONVEYANCE
CN101-6
H CN1-B 4 LD M1
CN101-7 MOTOR
L CN1-B 1 H/L
CN101-8
CN1-B13 PGND
CN101-9
CN1-B14 PGND
CN101-10
STACKER CN1-B19 24V
CN140-1 CN162-3 CN162- 4 CN172-9 CN172-1 CN4-A15 5V CN101-11
CN1-B20 24V
NO PAPER CN140-2 CN162-2 CN162- 5 CN172-8 CN172-2 CN4-A16 IN H
PS20 CN140-3 CN162-1 CN162- 6 CN172-7 CN172-3
DETECTION CN4-A17 SGND
SENSOR CN107-1
CN1-B 7 5V
CN107-2 NC
CN107-3
H CN1-B 8 P/S
CN107-4
CN128-1 CN162-6 CN162- 1 CN172-6 CN172-4 P CN1-B 9 CLK
ALIGNMENT CN4-A27 5V CN107-5
CN128-2 CN162-5 CN162- 2 CN172-5 CN172-5 L CN1-B10 H/L PAPER EXIT ROLLER
PS 8 CN4-A28 IN L CN107-6
PLATE/UPPER CN128-3 CN162-4 CN162- 3 CN172-4 CN172-6 H CN1-B11 LD M7
CN4-A29 SGND CN107-7 NC MOTOR
HP SENSOR CN107-8
CN1-B16 PGND
CN107-9
CN1-B17 PGND
CN107-10
CN1-B21 24V
CN107-11
CN1-B22 24V
CN107-12
L CN1-B12 F/R
CN129-1 CN172-3 CN172-7 CN4-A24 5V
PAPER EXIT CN129-2 CN172-2 CN172-8 CN4-A25 IN L CN1-B15 PGND
PS 9 CN129-3 CN172-1 CN172-9
BELT HP SENSOR CN4-A26 SGND
CN124-1
CN1-A11 5V FNS ENTRANCE
CN124-2
H CN1-A29 IN PS 4
CN124-3
CN4-A30 DPSW0 CN1-A20 GND PASSAGE SENSOR
CN4-B30 NC
CN125-1
CN1-A10 5V
CN125-2 STACKER CONVEYANCE
H CN1-A28 IN PS 5
CN125-3
CN1-A19 GND PASSAGE SENSOR
CN105-1 CN173-12 CN173-1 CN4-B3 24V
CN105-2 CN173-11 CN173-2 CN4-B4 24V
ALIGNMENT CN105-3 CN173-10 CN173-3 CN126-1
CN4-B5 DRV A P CN1-A 9 5V
PLATE/UPPER M5 CN105-4 CN173-9 CN173-4 CN126-2
CN4-B6 DRV A P H CN1-A27 IN PS 6 PAPER EXIT1 SENSOR
CN105-5 CN173-8 CN173-5 CN126-3
MOTOR CN4-B7 DRV B P CN1-A18 GND
CN105-6 CN173-7 CN173-6 CN4-B8 DRV B P
CN130-1
CN1-A 8 5V
CN113-5 CN173-6 CN173-7 CN130-2
CN4-B15 24V H CN1-A26 IN PS10 PAPER EXIT2 SENSOR
CN113-4 CN173-5 CN173-8 CN130-3
CN4-B17 DRV A P CN1-A17 GND
STACKER CN113-6 CN173-4 CN173-9 CN4-B18 DRV A P
M13 CN113-3 CN173-3 CN173-10 CN132-1
ENTRANCE CN4-B19 DRV B P CN1-A 7 5V
CN113-1 CN173-2 CN173-11 CN132-2 PAPER EXIT OPENING
CN4-B20 DRV B P H CN1-A25 IN PS12
MOTOR CN113-2 CN173-1 CN173-12 CN1-A16 GND
CN132-3
CN4-B16 24V SENSOR
CN133-1
CN1-A 6 5V ENTRANCE PAPER
CN133-2
H CN1-A24 IN PS13
CN133-3 DETECTION SENSOR
STAPLER CN1-A15 GND
ROTATION CN104-1 CN175-5 CN175-1 CN174-14 CN174-1 CN4-B1 24V
M4 CN104-2 CN175-4 CN175-2 CN174-13 CN174-2 CN4-B2 M4 DRV H
MOTOR
CN138-1
CN1-A 5 5V
CN138-2
CN111-1 CN174-12 CN174-3 L CN1-A23 IN PS18 ROLLER SHIFT HP SENSOR
CN4-B9 24V CN138-3
STAPLER- CN111-2 CN174-11 CN174-4 CN1-A14 GND
CN4-B10 24V
MOVEMENT CN111-3 CN174-10 CN174-5 CN4-B11 DRV A P
M11 CN111-4 CN174-9 CN174-6 CN4-B12 DRV A P
MOTOR CN111-5 CN174-8 CN174-7 CN4-B13 DRV B P
CN111-6 CN174-7 CN174-8 CN4-B14 DRV B P
CN103-1
CN2-1 DRV-F TRAY UP-DOWN
* CN103-2 M3
CN2-2 DRV-R MOTOR
MODEL
*
STAPLER CN134-1 CN175-3 CN175-3 CN174-6 CN174-9 CN4-A18 5V
CN134-2 CN175-2 CN175-4 CN174-5 CN174-10 CN122-1
CN4-A19 IN L CN3-B6 5V TRAY UPPER
ROTATION HP PS14 CN134-3 CN175-1 CN175-5 CN174-4 CN174-11 CN122-2
CN4-A20 SGND H CN3-A1 IN PS 2
TRAY UNIT
SENSOR CN122-3
CN3-A5 GND LIMIT SENSOR
7155/7165/7255/7272
CN123-1
CN3-B5 5V
STAPLER CN131-1 CN174-3 CN174-12 CN4-A21 5V CN123-2 TRAY LOWER
H CN3-A2 IN PS 3
CN131-2 CN174-2 CN174-13 CN4-A22 IN L CN123-3
MOVEMENT PS11 CN3-A6 GND LIMIT SENSOR
CN131-3 CN174-1 CN174-14 CN4-A23 SGND
HP SENSOR
CN127-1 STAPLE PAPER
CN3-B4 5V
CN127-2
H CN3-A3 IN PS 7 EXIT UPPER LIMIT
CN127-3
CN3-B2 GND
SENSOR
CN157-3 CN4-B21 FAN 24V

CN157-2 CN4-B22 FAN1 LD H
COOLING FAN/1 FM1 CN157-1 CN135-1
CN4-B23 PGND CN3-B3 5V
CN135-2 TRAY NO PAPER
H CN3-A4 IN PS15
CN135-3
CN3-B1 GND DETECTION SENSOR
CN158-3 CN4-B24 FAN 24V
COOLING FAN/2 FM2 CN158-1
MANUAL
CN4-B26 PGND
CN159-3 CN4-B27 FAN 24V

COOLING FAN/3 FM3 CN159-1 CN4-B29 PGND
SERVICE MANUAL CN4-B30 NC

(1)
CN155-2 CN1-B23 DRV H

GATE SOLENOID SD1 CN155-1 CN1-A 3 24V
Crimp
SUB-TRAY PAPER CN152-2

FNS CB
CN1-B24 DRV H
SD2 CN152-1 CN1-B28 24V
EXIT SOLENOID
4
CN154-1 CN1-B25 DRV H

PAPER EXIT OPENING SD4 CN154-2 CN1-A 4 24V
SOLENOID
[Symbol]
L Low level
CN151-2
H High level
CN1-B26 DRV H
Connector
BY-PASS SOLENOID SD5 CN151-1 CN1-B27 24V

50-1
P Pulse signal
CN29-2 CN6-1 24V-IN H

INTERLOCK MS MS1
REVISED REVISION
CN29-1
Relay connector
CN75-1 24V CN753-1

CN753-2
Faston
CN56-5 5V CN6-3 5V
CN56-10 S.GND CN753-3 CN6-4 SGND
DATE
CN75-3 P.GND CN753-4

CN6-5 PGND
CN74-10 P.GND CN753-5
CN6-6 PGND
Dec. 2003
CN40-6 NC CN753-6
CN6-2 N.C
CN106-1 TxD CN752-12 CN752-1 CN7-1 M_TXD P

CN106-2 SGND CN752-11 CN752-2 CN7-2 SGND
CN106-3 REQ_T CN752-10 CN752-3 CN7-3 M_REQ P
CN106-5 ACK_T CN752-8 CN752-5 CN7-5 M_ACK P
5-63
PAGE
CN106-7 RXD CN752-6 CN752-7 CN7-7 M_RXD P

CB
CN106-9 REQ_R CN752-4 CN752-9 CN7-9 S_REQ P

MAIN BODY

CN106-11 ACK_R CN752-2 CN752-11 CN7-11 S_ACK
Example)
P
(4) Signal flow
SGND
PS1
5VDC
signal flow
Direction of
ADDITION
METHOD
PS1
4 [8] SF-101 Overall Wiring Diagram
CN104-1 24V
CN104-2 24V
CN104-4 M701 DRV A

M701 CONVEYANCE MOTOR
CN104-5 M701 DRV A
CN104-6 M701 DRV B
CN104-7 M701 DRV B
CN102-1 GND
SW701 CONVEYANCE COVER SW
CN102-2 COVER SW
CN103-1 GND
L CN103-2 PS701 IN PS701 CONVEYANCE SENSOR
CN103-3 5V
CN105-1 M702 DRV-F

M702 TRAY UP/DOWN MOTOR
CN105-2 M702 DRV-R
CN106-1 TRAY SW1

SW702 TRAY UPPER LIMIT SW
CN106-2 TRAY SW2
CN102-6 GND
H CN102-7 PS703 IN PS703 TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR
CN102-8 5V [How to see the diagram]
CN107-1 GND under normal idling conditions with
L CN107-2 PS701 IN PS704 TRAY LOWER LIMIT SENSOR the main switch turned ON.
CN107-3 5V 2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows.
(1) [Symbol]
CN208-2 CN208-1 50-1
CN105-3 M703 DRV
CN208-1 CN208-2 M703 SHIFT MOTOR
CN104-5 M703 24V
Connector Faston
Crimp Relay connector
CN103-4 GND
H CN103-5 PS702 IN PS702 SHIFT HP SENSOR
CN103-6 5V H High level
L Low level
CN100-2 24V IN
CN200-1
CN1-1 24V
CN1-2 5V P Pulse signal
CN1-3 SGND
CN200-4 (3) RC is the flat cable.
CN100-6 GND CN1-4 PGND
CN200-5 (4) Signal flow
CN100-9 GND CN1-5 PGND
CN200-6 The solid black circle ( ) among
CN1-6 FGND
CN201-1
CN101-5 RXD CN106-1 MTXD
CN201-2
CN101-1 GND CN106-2 SGND
CN201-3
Example)
CN101-6 RTS CN106-3 MCTS Direction of
CN101-7 TXD
CN201-4
CN106-4 MRXD CB signal flow
5VDC
CN201-5 PS1 PS1
CN101-2 GND CN106-5 SGND
CN201-6 SGND
CN101-8 CTS CN106-6 MRTS1
SFCB MAIN BODY
MODEL MANUAL REVISED REVISION DATE PAGE METHOD

2
APPENDIX
AC100V
H 216-1 FIXHT1_CONT
H 216-2 FIXHT2_CONT
90-2
90-1
POWER PLUG
H 216-3 FIXHT3_CONT
216-4 MAINRL_CONT
216-5 PSFAN_CONT-17
216-6 PSFAN_EM
POWER PLUG
9006/1061#22
INLET TYPE ONLY

AC220V TO 240V : INLET
216-7 SGND
812-1 H CN200-1 24V/1

237-B13 T1RISEM_24V
FT33
812-2 CN200-2 12V/2
FT34
237-B12 T1RISEM_D
M16
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/1 H CN200-3 5V/2
FT35
FT36
FT11
CN200-4 5V/2 FT10
FT1
810-2-1 814-4-10 800B-7-10 237-A7 T1FEEDMC_DRV H CN200-5 S-GND
G/Y
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/1 810-1-2 814-3-11 -6-11 237-A6 MC24V_1 CN200-6 S-GND
MC3
CN200-7 S-GND EUROPE ONLY
CN200-8 P-GND
811-2-1 814-2-12 -5-12 237-A5 T1PREMC_DRV
FT2
FT1
PRE-REGISTRATION CLUTCH/1 811-1-2 814-1-13 -4-13 237-A4 MC24V_1
MC4
TRAY1
817-1 237-A19 NC
F/G
CBR2
817-2
27
CN
237-A18 NC CN201-1 24V_INT
F/G
817-3 CBR1
DUMMY
28
237-A17 NC CN201-2 PGND
[1] 7155/7165 Overall Wiring Diagram
P 208-16 SCAN_CLK 610-1 SCAN_CLK 612-A1 S.GND
FT4
91-1
HTR1 L 208-15 SCAN_F/R 610-2 SCAN_F/R 612-A2 SIZE_PS_L FT3
91-2 612-A3 5V
P 208-14 SCAN_MGN 610-3 SCAN_MGN(ENBL)
208-13 SCAN_CUR1 610-4 SCAN_CUR1 612-A4 S.GND
614-A8 24V4
614-A7 24V4
614-A6 24V4
614-A5 24V4
HEATER/1 P
614-A4 P.GND
P 208-12 SCAN_CUR2 610-5 SCAN_CUR2 612-A5 SIZE_PS_S
614-B1 DF_M2_A
614-A9 DF_M2_B
614-A3 DF_M1_A
614-A2 DF_M1_A
832-1 612-A6 5V
614-B11 DF_M1_B
614-B10 DF_M1_B
614-A11 DF_M2_A
614-A10 DF_M2_B
236-B13 T2RISEM_24V H P 208-11 SCAN_CUR3 610-6 SCAN_CUR3
FT5
FT6
832-2 610-7 MODE1 612-A7 S.GND
614-B6 DF_CL_DRIVE
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/2 236-B12 T2RISEM_D H P 208-10 MODE1
M17
614-B9 DF_SD1_DRIVE
614-B8 DF_SD3_DRIVE
614-B7 DF_SD2_DRIVE
614-A1 DF_FAN_DRIVE
610-8 MODE2 612-A8 RES_PS(SIDE1)
614-B2 DF_24V_OUT(CL)
P 208-9 MODE2
SCANNER I/F
NF
614-B5 DF_24V_OUT(SD3)
SNSOR
H 208-8 MODE3 610-9 MODE3 612-A9 5V
10-2
10-1
7-2
7-1
830-2-1 834-4-10 820B-7-10 236-A7 T2FEEDMC_DRV H H 208-7 EXP_CONT 610-10 EXP_CONT 612-A10 S.GND
HUMIDITY
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/2 830-1-2 834-3-11 -6-11 612-A11 RES_PS(SIDE2)
FT8
208-6 SCANFAN_CONT-18 610-11 SCANFAN_CONT-18
FT7
236-A6 MC24V_1
MC5
208-5 SCANFAN_EM 610-12 SCANFAN_EM L 612-A12 5V
610-13 SCANHP_PS 612-A13 S.GND EUROPE ONLY
831-2-1 834-2-12 -5-12 208-4 SCANHP_PS L
236-A5 T2PREMC_DRV H 610-14 SCN_DET(SGND) 612-A14 READ_PS
PRE-REGISTRATION CLUTCH/2 831-1-2 834-1-13 -4-13 208-3 SCN_DET
236-A4 MC24V_1
MC6
610-15 S.G 612-A15 5V
FT10
208-2 SGND
FT9
208-1 APS_TIMING 610-16 APS_TIMING 612-B1 S.GND
TRAY2
F/G
882-1
6-4
6-1
9-4
9-1
612-B2 SKEW_PS_F
TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMER
DF-316
236-A18 NC
F/G
CN
882-2 236-A17 NC 612-B3 5V
DUMMY
611-A1 DF_M1_CLK
COIL2
234-A20 DF_M1_CLK
234-A19 DF_M1_F/R 611-A2 DF_M1_F/R 612-B4 S.GND
FT12
612-B5 SKEW_PS_R
FT11
234-A18 DF_M1_EN 611-A3 DF_M1_EN

92-1 612-B6 5V
611-A4 DF_M1_M1
EUROPE ONLY
HTR2 234-A17 DF_M1_M1

92-2 612-B7 S.GND
234-A16 DF_M1_M2 611-A5 DF_M1_M2
DF_M1=FEED M
234-A15 DF_M1_I1 611-A6 DF_M1_I1 612-B8 LAST_PS
HEATER/2 612-B9 5V
234-A14 DF_M1_I2 611-A7 DF_M1_I2
8-2
8-1
852-1 235-B13 T3RISEM_24V H 612-B10 S.GND

234-A13 DF_M2_CLK 611-A8 DF_M2_CLK
852-2 235-B12 T3RISEM_D 612-B11 ORG_SET_PS
M18
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/3 H 234-A12 DF_M2_F/R 611-A9 DF_M2_F/R
234-A11 DF_M2_EN 611-A10 DF_M2_EN 612-B12 5V
234-A10 DF_M2_M1 611-A11 DF_M2_M1 612-B13 S.GND
850-2-1 854-4-10 840B-7-10 235-A7 T3FEEDMC_DRV H 612-B14 EXIT_PS
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/3 850-1-2 854-3-11 -6-11 234-A9 DF_M2_M2 611-A12 DF_M2_M2 F/G
DF_M2=REV M
235-A6 MC24V_1 612-B15 5V
MC7
FT37
234-A8 DF_M2_I1 611-A13 DF_M2_I1

5-2
234-A7 DF_M2_I2 611-A14 DF_M2_I2
COIL1 COIL
851-2-1 854-2-12 -5-12 613-1 FAN_LD 5-1

ONLY
235-A5 T3PREMC_DRV H 234-A6 DF_M2_MOI 611-A15 DF_M2_MOI

SW1
50-1
PRE-REGISTRATION CLUTCH/3 613-2 3.3V(SIZE_VR)

50-2
851-1-2 854-1-13 -4-13 235-A4 MC24V_1 234-A5 DF_FAN_OCNT 611-A16 DF_FAN_CONT

SWITCH
EUROPE
MC8
613-3 SIZE_ANA
TRAY3
611-A17 DF_SD1_CONT
MAIN POWER
234-A4 DF_REVSD_CONT
51-1
FT38
613-4 A.GND
F/G
611-A18 DF_SD2_CONT
UNIT
234-A3 DF_SEPSD_CONT
F/G
FIXING
613-5 S.GND
F/G
234-A2 DF_EXITSD_CONT 611-A19 DF_SD3_CONT
DF I/F
SCDB
611-A20 DF_M1_RETURN 613-6 ADF_OPEN_PS
234-A1 DF_M1_RETURN
51-2
611-B1 DF_M2_RETURN 613-7 5V

234-B20 DF_M2_RETURN
234-B19 DF_CL_CONT 611-B2 DF_CL_CONT
1-4 N.C.
RL1
FT17
234-B18 SIZE_PS_L 611-B3 SIZE_PS_L 615-1 24V2

1-1 ACIN(L)
1-3 ACIN(L)
1-2 ACIN(L)
TS1
1-6 ACIN(N)
1-5 ACIN(N)
872-1 611-B4 SIZE_PS_S 615-2 I/L_24V2

203-B13 T4RISEM_24V H 234-B17 SIZE_PS_S
MRL
FT13
TS2
FT14
872-2
FT15 180 C
203-B12 T4RISEM_D 611-B5 RES_PS(SIZE1)
M19
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/4 H 234-B16 REG_PS(SIZE1)
234-B15 REG_PS(SIDE2) 611-B6 RES_PS(SIDE2)
234-B14 READ_PS 611-B7 READ_PS
870-2-1 874-4-10 860B-7-10
110 C
FT16
203-A7 T4FEEDMC_DRV H 234-B13 SKEW_PS_F 611-B8 SKEW_PS_F

MAIN
THARMOSTAT/U
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/4 870-1-2 874-3-11 -6-11

RELAY
203-A6 MC24V_1 234-B12 SKEW_PS_R 611-B9 SKEW_PS_R
MC9
THARMOSTAT/D
234-B11 LAST_PS 611-B10 LAST_PS

NOT EXIST WITH JAPAN
871-2-1 874-2-12 -5-12 234-B10 SET_PS 611-B11 ORG_SET_PS

FT18
203-A5 T4PREMC_DRV H
PRE-REGISTRATION CLUTCH/4 871-1-2 874-1-13 -4-13 203-A4 MC24V_1 234-B9 EXIT_PS 611-B12 EXIT_PS
ONLY)
MC10
TRAY4
234-B8 OPEN_PS 611-B13 COVER_OPEN_PS
(JAPAN
234-B7 ADF_OPEN_PS 611-B14 ADF_OPEN_PS 3-1 JH_DRIVE
F/G
234-B6 FAN_LD 611-B15 FAN_LD
FT22
FT19
F/G
234-B5 RESET_OUT 611-B16 RESET_OUT 600-5 24V1 3-2 JH1_DRIVE
234-B4 S.GND 611-B17 S.GND 600-6 24V1
234-B3 3.3V 611-B18 3.3V 600-7 24V1
FT28
FT24
RL2
890A-1-12 214-A1 NC 234-B2 SIZE_ANA 611-B19 SIZE_ANA 600-1 5V2

898-1-2 890A-2-11 214-A2 BPUDM_A 234-B1 A.GND 611-B20 A.GND 600-2 5V2
H FT100 FT101
HEATER RELAY
UP/DOWN MOTOR/BP 898-2-1 890A-3-10 214-A3 BPUDM_B 600-3 S.G
M20
H 5 6
L4
L3
L2
800B-1-16 814-1-13 801-1 600-4 S.G

237-A16 5V3
-2-15 814-2-12 -2 600-8 P.G
237-A15 T1PRE_PS
BY-PASS
H PAPER FEED SENSOR/1 600-9 P.G
PS01
-3-14 814-3-11 -3 15-12 TEST PIN1 24V 40-1
237-A14 SGND
600-10 L.PG
L
237-A13 5V3 -4-13 814-4-10 803-1
881-1-2 (Xe_LAMP)
FT29
FT27
FT25
236-B14 MC24V_2 -5-12 814-5-9 -2 15-13 TEST PIN2 DRV 40-2

VERTICL CONVEYANCE CLUTCH /1 881-2-1 L 237-A12 T1UP_PS
FIXING HEATER LAMP/1
TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/1
PS02
236-B15 VFMC1_DRV H -6-11 814-6-8 -3
237-A11 SGND
P
P
P
FT26 FIXING HEATER LAMP/2
-7-10 814-7-7 805-1

882-1-2
624-3 5V
L 623-5 EM
237-A10 5V3
FT21
FT20
625-4 NC
624-15 5V
FT23
236-B16 MC24V_2
624-14 SIG
882-2-1 -8-9 814-8-6 -2
H 624-8 APS.2
L 624-5 APS.1
VERTICL CONVEYANCE CLUTCH /2 237-A9 T1_0PS
FEED
625-1 S.GND
624-9 S.GND
624-6 S.GND
624-1 S.GND
623-6 P.GND
H NO PAPER SENSOR/1
H 624-11 APS.3
236-B17 VFMC2_DRV H
PAPER
MC11 MC12
624-12 S.GND
624-13 S.GND
624-7 APS_5V
624-4 APS_5V
PS03
-9-8 814-9-5 -3
H 623-4 24V DRV
H 624-2 APS_TIM
624-10 APS_5V
237-A8 SGND
H 625-5 APS.3_SIG
H 625-6 APS.2_SIG
H 625-7 APS.1_SIG
625-2 APS_CONT
L 625-3 COVER_SIG
-14-3 804-1
VERTICAL
L 623-3 LAMP.PG
623-2 CONT
623-1 24V
620-3 W
620-2 V
620-1 U
237-A3 5V3
237-A2 T1RM_PS -15-2 -2
L REMAINING PAPER SENSOR/1
PS04
50-3
51-4
51-3
302-1 237-A1 SGND -16-1 -3

5V 237-B14 5V
S.G. 302-2
237-B15 P.GND 237-B11 T1_SET_P 800A-3-12
CONT 302-3
237-B16 FEEDM_CONT H 237-B1 5V3 -13-2
CLK 302-4
237-B17 FEEDM_CLK P -1-14
CW/CCW 302-5
237-B18 FEEDM_F/R L -2-13
639-1-3
639-2-2
639-3-1
LD 302-6
PAPER FEED MOTOR 237-B19 FEEDM_EM H 800A-4-11 815-1-6 808-1
M1
302-7 237-B10 5V3
TRAY1
F/G
H/L -5-10 815-2-5 -2

P.G. 302-8 307-4 H 237-B9 T1SIZE_S_PS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-1
PS05
631-1-3
631-2-2
631-3-1
302-9 307-3 -6-9 815-3-4 -3

237-B8 SGND
637-4
20 20
637-3
637-2
637-1
P.G.
302-10 307-2 -7-8 815-4-3 807-1
24V 237-B7 5V3
FT(PS)30
FT(PS)32
FT(PS)31
L1_CONT
302-11 307-1 -8-7 815-5-2 -2

L1_DRIVE
LP_DRIVE
19 19
L 237-B6 T1SIZE_L_PS
636-1
636-2
636-3
635-1
635-2
635-3
634-1
634-2
634-3
633-1
633-2
633-3
632-1
632-2
632-3
SCANNER UNIT
24V PAPER SIZE SENSOR/2-1

2-1 L_DRIVE
PS06
-9-6 815-6-1 -3
2-2 L2_DRIVE
2-3 L3_DRIVE
237-B5 SGND
4-3 L1_CONT'
4-1 L1_DRIVE'
4-2 LP_DRIVE'
-10-5 809-1
L1
237-B4 3.3V2
F/G
FM9
PS65
PS64
PS63
PS51
PS61
-11-4 -2
237-B3 T1SIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/1
630-3
630-2
630-1
VR1
-12-3 -3
DCPS
* 237-B2 AGND
TRC3
362-1(MINI CT) 360-B12-B1

SIG 206-12 G_SIG_EX
-2 -B11-B2 *
12V 206-11 12V
-3 -B10-B3
LED(Dmax) 206-10 DMLED_CONT H
L1 INVB
-4 -B9-B4 820B-1-16 834-1-13 821-1

TRC2
DmaxMONI 206- 9 DM_MONI_EX 236-A16 5V3

-5 -B8-B5 -2-15 834-2-12 -2
M11 SCANNER MOTOR
TONER CONTROL LED(JAM) 206- 8 DJLED_CONT *H H 236-A15 T2PRE_PS PAPER FEED SENSOR/2
PS07
-6 -B7-B6 -3-14 834-3-11 -3
APS SENSOR/3
APS SENSOR/2
APS SENSOR/1
DmaxSIG 206- 7 DM_SIG_EX 236-A14 SGND

SENSOR BOARD -7 -B6-B7 * -4-13 834-4-10 823-1
GND 206- 6 A.GND 236-A13 5V3
TRC1
-8 -B5-B8 15-1 FIXHT1_CONT LAMP
TCSB
JAM SIG 206- 5 DRUM_JSIG_EX L 236-A12 T2UP_PS -5-12 834-5-9 -2
APS TIMING SENSOR
-9 -B4-B9 TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/2 15-2 FIXHT2_CONT LAMP
PS08
LED( ) 206- 4 LED_CONT -6-11 834-6-8 -3
SCANNER HP SENSOR
*H 236-A11 SGND
SCANNER COOLING FAN
-10 -B3-B10 15-3 FIXHT3_CONT LAMP

Vref 206- 3 TNLED_REF -7-10 834-7-7 825-1
L1
-11 -B2-B11 236-A10 5V3 15-4 MAINRL_CONT

TH+ 206- 2 TEMP * -8-9 834-8-6 -2
TH- -12 -B1-B12 H 236-A9 T2_0PS NO PAPER SENSOR/2 15-5 PSFAN_CONT-17
PS09
206- 1 3.3V2 * -9-8 834-9-5 -3
363-1-2 360-A1-A10 236-A8 SGND 15-6 PSFAN_EM
206-13 MC24V_2 * -14-3 824-1 15-7 SGND
EXPOSURE LAMP
363-2-1 -A2-A9 236-A3 5V3
SD1
SEPARATION CRAW SOLENOID 206-14 SPSD_DRV H L 236-A2 T2RM_PS -15-2 -2
REMAINING PAPER SENSOR/2
PS10
-16-1 -3
236-A1 SGND
DRUM
366-1-2 -A3-A8
206-15 MC24V_2 820A-3-12
366-2-1 -A4-A7 236-B11 T2_SET_P
TONER RECYCLE CLUTCH 206-16 TRCMC_DRV
MC14
-13-2
236-B1 5V3 12-1 24V1 PRCB
-1-14
12-4 12V2 PRCB
364-1-2 -A5-A6 -2-13
TRAY2
PRE-CHARGING EXPOSURE 206-17 MC_24V2 12-9 5V2 PRCB
364-2-1 -A6-A5 820A-4-11 835-1-6 828-1
PCL
LAMP 206-18 PCL CONT H 236-B10 5V3 12-10 5V2 PRCB
-5-10 835-2-5 -2 12-15 S_GND PRCB
365-1-2 H 236-B9 T2SIZE_S_PS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-2
PS11
-A7-A4 -6-9 835-3-4 -3
PRCB
206-19 CHGM_B L 236-B8 SGND 12-16 S_GND PRCB

CHRGE CLEANING MOTOR 365-2-1 -A8-A3
M14
206-20 CHGM_A L -7-8 835-4-3 827-1 12-17 S_GND PRCB
-A9-A2 236-B7 5V3
12-18 P_GND PRCB
SCANNER
L 236-B6 T2SIZE_L_PS -8-7 835-5-2 -2

-A10-A1 PAPER SIZE SENSOR/2-2
PS12
-9-6 835-6-1 -3
236-B5 SGND
-10-5 829-1
236-B4 3.3V2
137-4
-11-4 -2
236-B3 T2SIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/2 13-1 24V1 SCDB
VR2
* -12-3 -3
236-B2 AGND 13-2 24V1 SCDB
137-7 S.GND
332-1-6 330-1-9 236-B18 NC 13-3 24V1 DF

137-3 APS.3_SIG
137-2 APS.2_SIG
137-1 APS.1_SIG
210-1 TNSM24V
137-6 APS_CONT
137-5 COVER_SIG
332-2-5 330-2-8 13-6 5V2 SCDB

210-2 TNSM24V
332-3-4 330-3-7 13-7 5V2 DF
210-3 TNSM_A
TONNER SUPPLY MOTOR 332-4-3 330-4-6 P 840B-1-16 854-1-13 841-1 13-10 S_GND SCDB
M12
210-4 TNSM_AB 235-A16 5V3
SCDB/DF
332-5-2 330-5-5 P -2-15 854-2-12 -2 13-11 S_GND DF

210-5 TNSM_B H 235-A15 T3PRE_PS
332-6-1 330-6-4 P PAPER FEED SENSOR/3 13-14 P.GND SCDB
PS13
210-6 TNSM_BB 235-A14 S.GND -3-14 854-3-11 -3
P 13-15 P.GND SCDB
235-A13 5V3 -4-13 854-4-10 843-1
-5-12 854-5-9 -2
13-16 P.GND DF
TONOR LEVEL 333-3 330-7-3 L 235-A12 T3UP_PS
210-7 S.GND TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/3
PS14
-6-11 854-6-8 -3
F/G
333-2 330-8-2 235-A11 SGND
TLD
DETECTION SENSOR/R 210-8 TONER_SIG H
333-1 330-9-1 -7-10 854-7-7 845-1
210-9 T_SENSE_CONT L 235-A10 5V3
-8-9 854-8-6 -2 78-1
H 235-A9 T3_0PS NO PAPER SENSOR/3 12-7 5V2 OB
PS15
235-A8 SGND -9-8 854-9-5 -3 78-2
TONER SUPPLY
12-8 5V2 OB
-14-3 844-1 78-3
235-A3 5V3 12-13 S_GND OB
OB
-15-2 -2 78-4
L 235-A2 T3RM_PS REMAINING PAPER SENSOR/3 12-14 S_GND OB
78-5
PS16
235-A1 SGND -16-1 -3 12-22 24V1 OB

324-3 94-1-15 95-1-15 235-B11 T3_SET_P 840A-3-12
213-1 S.GND 14-1 12V2 ICB
324-2 94-2-14 95-2-14 235-B1 5V3 -13-2
FRONT DOOR OPEN/CLOSE 213-2 FDOORR_PS 14-2 5V2 ICB
TRAY3
ICB
-1-14
PS38
324-1 94-3-13 95-3-13 14-3 S_GND ICB
SENSOR /R 213-3 5V2 -2-13
14-4 S_GND ICB
235-B10 5V3 840A-4-11 855-1-6 848-1
311-3 94-4-12 95-4-12 -5-10 855-2-5 -2
24V 415-2 213-4 S.GND H 235-B9 T3SIZE_S_PS
PS17
403-1 24V FRONT DOOR OPEN/CLOSE 311-2 94-5-11 95-5-11 235-B8 SGND -6-9 855-3-4 -3 PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-3
24V 415-5 213-5 FDOORL_PS
403-2 24V
PS39
311-1 94-6-10 95-6-10 -7-8 855-4-3 847-1 11-1 5V1 ICB
A 415-1 SENSOR /L 213-6 5V2 235-B7 5V3
ICB
403-3 A P -8-7 855-5-2 -2 11-2 5V1 ICB

A 415-3 L 235-B6 T3SIZE_L_PS
M8
REVERSE EXIT MOTOR 403-4 /A P PAPER SIZE SENSOR/2-3 11-3 5V1 IP
PS18
B 415-4 235-B5 SGND -9-6 855-6-1 -3

403-5 B P 325-3 94-7-9 95-7-9 11-4 5V1 IP
B 415-6 213-7 S.GND -10-5 849-1
403-6 /B P TONNER SUPPLY DOOR 325-2 94-8-8 95-8-8 235-B4 3.3V2 187-1-5
213-8 TNDOOR_PS -11-4 -2 CN132-1 5V 51-1 11-5 5V1 HDD
235-B3 T3SIZE_VR -2-4
PS40
325-1 94-9-7 95-9-7 11-6 12V1 IP
VR3
24V 416-2 417-1-6 OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR 213-9 5V2 * -12-3 -3 PAPER SIZE VR/3 CN132-2 SGND -2
403-7 24V 235-B2 AGND -3-3
24V 416-5 417-2-5 P CN132-3 /IND -3 11-7 12V1 HDD
403-8 24V 235-B17 NC -4-2 L 31-1 FAN1
A 416-4 417-3-4 CN132-4 SGND -4 11-8 S_GND ICB
403-9 A 235-A17 NC -5-1 11-9 P_GND ICB L 31-2 FAN2
ADU REVERSE MOTOR A 416-6 417-4-3
P 341-1-4 94-10-6 95-10-6
L CN132-5 INDPR -5
INDX SB
M9
403-10 /A P 213-10 CLNFAN_D L 235-B16 NC 11-10 S_GND IP
B 416-3 417-5-2 341-2-3 94-11-5 95-11-5
403-11 B P 213-11 CLFAN_EM L 235-B15 NC 11-11 S_GND IP 31-3 FAN3
B 416-1 417-6-1 CLEANER COOLING 341-3-2 94-12-4 95-12-4
FM5
403-12 /B P 213-12 CLFAN_HL L 235-B14 NC 11-12 S_GND IP
FAN 341-4-1 94-13-3 95-13-3 185-1-11 180-A1
213-13 P_GND CN130-A1 GND 11-13 S_GNDHDD
-2-10 -A2
ONLY FOR OLD TYPE 860B-1-16 874-1-13 861-1 P -A2 VIDEO2 11-14 S_GND HDD
203-A16 5V3 - 3-9
FM13
P -A3 /VIDEO2 -A3

432-1 -2-15 874-2-12 -2 - 4-8
404-6 5V2 254-1-2 94-14-2 95-14-2 H 203-A15 T4PRE_PS PAPER FEED SENSOR/4 -A4 GND -A4
PS19
432-2 213-14 MC24V_3 203-A14 SGND -3-14 874-3-11 -3 - 5-7

254-2-1 94-15-1 95-15-1 -A5
2
TC
ADU CONVEYANCE SENSOR/1 404-5 REV_PS H TOTAL COUNTER 213-15 TC_DRV H -A5 LPR5V 13-5 24V1 FNS
PS41
432-3 H 203-A13 5V3 -4-13 874-4-10 863-1 - 6-6 -A6
404-4 S_GND -A6 LD5V 13-9 5V2 FNS
L 203-A12 T4UP_PS -5-12 874-5-9 -2 - 7-5 -A7
FNS
TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/4 -A7 LD5V 13-13 S_GND FNS

PS20
203-A11 SGND -6-11 874-6-8 -3 - 8-4 -A8

430-1 -A8 GND 13-18 P_GND FNS
404-3 5V2 -7-10 874-7-7 865-1 P - 9-3 -A9
430-2 203-A10 5V3 -A9 VIDEO1
PAPER REVERSE SENSOR 404-2 DECUR_PS H -8-9 874-8-6 -2 -10-2 -A10
PS42
430-3 H 203-A9 T4_0PS P -A10 /VIDEO1
404-1 S_GND NO PAPER SENSOR/4 -11-1
PS21
-9-8 874-9-5 -3 -A11

WRITING
203-A8 SGND -A11 GND 12-3 24V1 ADUDB

LDB
303-1 203-A3 5V3 -14-3 864-1 12-5 12V2 ADUDB

5V 212-A1 5V 186- 1-11 -B1
475-1 303-2 203-A2 T4RM_PS -15-2 -2 P CN130-B1 /ENB1 12-6 5V2 ADUDB
407-1 24V2 S.G. 212-A2 P.GND REMAINING PAPER SENSOR/4 - 2-10 -B2
PS22
REVERSE GATE SOLENOID 303-3 203-A1 SGND -16-1 -3 P -B2 /S/H1 12-11 -5V1 ADUDB
475-3 212-A3 DEVM_CONT H - 3-9
SD7
407-2 GATE_DR CONT -B3
L 303-4 H -B3 /ALM1 12-12 S_GND ADUDB
CLK 212-A4 DEVM_CLK P 860A- 3-12 - 4-8
ADUDB
303-5 203-B11 T4_SET_P -B4 GND -B4 12-20 P_GND ADUDB

CW/CCW 212-A5 DEVM_CW/CCW H -13-2 - 5-7 -B5
203-B1 5V3
POWER SUPPLY COOLING FAN
DEVELOPPING 303-6 -B5 /ENB2 12-21 P_GND ADUDB

LD 212-A6 DEVM_EM H - 1-14 - 6-6
M3
427-1-2 303-7 P -B6 /S/H2 -B6
ADU CONVEYANCE CLUTCH 405-1 MC24V MOTOR (H/L) 212-A7 DEVM_GAIN L - 2-13 - 7-5 -B7
427-2-1 303-8 313-4 H -B7 /ALM2
405-2 ADUCR_MC L - 8-4
MC13
P.G. 860A- 4-11 875-1-6 868-1 -B8
303-9 313-3 -B8 GND
860A- 4-11 875-1-6 868-1 - 9-3 13-6 26V1 LCT
303-10 313-2
PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-4 P -B9 GND -B8
- 10-2 13-8 5V2 LCT
PS23
303-11 313-1 860A- 4-11 875-1-6 868-1 P -B10 GND -B8

426-1-2 13-12 S-GND LCT
16 16 16 16
LCT
405-3 MC24V - 11-1 -B8

ADU DECELERATION CLUTCH 426-2-1 - 9-6 875-6-1 -3 P -B11 GND 13-17 P-GND LCT
MC2
405-4 ADUDN_MC L PAPER SIZE SENSOR/2-4
- 9-6 875-6-1 -3
TRAY4 (JAPAN ONLY)
212-A8 SUCTFAN_D H 203-B6 T4SIZE_L_PS

PRCB
PS24
337-2-2 - 9-6 875-6-1 -3

DEVELOPING SUCTION 212-A9 SFAN_EM L 203-B5 SGND
FM4
337-3-1 -10-5 869-1
425-1 420-16-1 FAN 212-A10 P.GND 203-B4 3.3V2
425-1 VIDEO 405-20 DEF_VIDEO -11-4 -2
425-2 420-15-2 203-B3 T4SIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/4
VR4
425-2 GND
420-14-3
405-19 GND * * 203-B2 AGND -12-3 -3
425-3 +5V
425-3 405-18 5V2 CN103-1 5V2
425-4 420-13-4 203-B16 NC
PAPER MIS-CENTERING 425-4 -5V 405-17 -5V CN103-2 12V2
425-5 420-12-5 203-B15 NC
425-5 GND 405-16 GND CN103-3 GND
SENSOR 425-6 420-11-6
P 301-1 203-B14 NC CN103-4 GND 83-1 93-1
425-6 SI 405-15 DEF_SI 5V 212-B1 5V 21-1 24V2
PS70
425-7 420-10-7 301-2 83-2 93-2
425-7 GND 405-14 GND S.G. 212-B2 P.GND 21-2 24V2
425-8 420-9-8 P 301-3
425-8 CLK 405-13 DEF_CLK CONT 212-B3 DRUM_CONT H
425-9 420-8-9 301-4 880-1-15 884-1 21-3 P.GND
425-9 GLED 405-12 DEF_LED P CLK 212-B4 DRUM_CLK P 205-15 5V3 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE 154-14 LCD_ADJ
425-10 420-7-10 301-5 880-2-14 884-2 LCD_ADJ 21-4 P.GND
FT40
425-10 VLED 405-11 24V1 CW/CCW 212-B5 CW/CCW H L 205-14 T1PASS_PS 154-13 24V 12-2 24V1 HV
PS25
301-6 880-3-13 884-3 SENSOR/1 164-A14-1 LCD_24V

205-13 S.GND
HV
DRUM MOTOR LD 212-B6 DRUM_EM H 154-12 LCD_D3 LD3 12-19 P.GND H/V
M2
424-3 420-6-11 301-7 164-A13-2
405-10 5V2 SGND 880-4-12 885-1 P 140- 1 S_OUT2 150- 1 S_IN2 154-11 LCD_D2
420-5-12 301-8 316-4 205-12 5V3 164-A12-3 LD2
LEADING EDGE SENSOR 424-2 405-9 EDGE_PS P.G. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE 140- 2 S_IN2 150- 2 S_OUT2 P
H 880-5-11 885-2 164-A11-4 154-10 LCD_D1 LD1
PS43
424-1 420-4-13 301-9 316-3 L 205-11 T2PASS_PS 150- 3 CTS
P.G. P 140- 3 /RTS2
PS26
405-8 S_GND
18 18
880-6-10 885-3 SENSOR/2 164-A10-5 154- 9 LCD_D0 LD0

301-10 316-2 205-10 S.GND 140- 4 /CTS2 150- 4 RTS P
423-1 420-3-14 24V 154- 8 24V
MS1
405-7 5V2 164-A9-6 LCD_24V

MS/R
REGISTRATION
420-2-15 24V 301-11 316-1 880-7-9 886-1 150- 5 DSR P
P 140- 5 /DTR2
17 17
423-2 205-9 5V3 164-A8-7 154- 7 GND GND

REGISTRATION SENSOR 405-6 2ND_PS H 880-8-8 886-2 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE 150- 6 DTR
PS44
423-3 420-1-16 140- 6 /DSR2 154- 6 5V 5V
INTER LOCK
LCD
405-5 S_GND L 205-8 T3PASS_PS 164-A7-8

PS27
5V 331-1 334-11-1 880-9-7 886-3 SENSOR/3 140- 7 SHUT 150- 7 SHUT 154- 5 CP 32-1 24V1
212-B7 5V 205-7 S.GND 164-A6-9 CP
331-2 334-10-2 140- 8 SW_SIG 150- 8 SW_SIG 154- 4 LP 32-2 P.GND
S.G. 212-B8 P.GND 880-10-6 887-1 164-A5-10 LP
331-3 334-9-3 205-6 5V3 140- 9 WT_LED_ON 150- 9 WT_LED_ON 154- 3 FLM
SPARE
CONT 212-B9 TONERM_CONT H 880-11-5 887-2 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE 164-A4-14 FLM

422-1-2 331-4 334-8-4 140-10 SHUT_LED_ON 150-10 SHUT_LED_ON 154- 2 NC
408-12 MC24V CLK 212-B10 TONERM_CLK P L 205-5 T4PASS_PS NC
PS28
880-12-4 887-3 164-A3-12

FT41
REGISTRATION CLUTCH 422-2-1 331-5 334-7-5 205-T4PASS SENSOR/4(JAPAN ONLY) 140-11 5V1 150-11 5V1 154- 1 DSP_OFF
MC1
408-13 2ND_MC H CW/CCW 212-B11 TONERM_CW/CCW H 164-A2-13 DSP_OFF
TONER BOTTLE LD 331-6 334-6-6 205-10 S.GND
212-B12 TONERM_EM L 880-13-3 888-1 164-A1-14
M13
331-7 205-3 5V3

MOTOR SGND 880-14-2 888-2 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
5V 421-1 331-8 334-4-8 322-4 H 205-2 VF_DOOR_PS
408-11 +5V P.G.
PS29
880-15-1 888-3
S.G 421-2 331-9 334-3-9 322-3 205-1 S_GND DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
408-10 PGND P.G.
24 24
421-3 164-B14-1 151- 1 LCD_D3 155- 1 X2_CONT Y1CONT

331-10 334-2-10 322-2 136- 1 LCD_D3
VERTICAL PAPER FEED
CONT 408-9 START/STOP H 24V 164-B13-2 155- 2 Y2_CONT X1CONT

MS2
421-4 151- 2 LCD_D2

MS/L
CLK 408-8 CLK 24V 331-11 334-1-11 322-1 136- 2 LCD_D2

23 23
P 164-B12-3 155- 3 X1_CONT Y2CONT

CW/CCW 421-5 136- 3 LCD_D1 151- 3 LCD_D1
408-7 CW/CCW H 164-B11-4 155- 4 Y1_CONT X2CONT
INTER LOCK
421-6 136- 4 LCD_D0 151- 4 LCD_D0

PAKB
LD 408-6 LD L 164-B10-5
M5
CONVEYANCE MOTOR 421-7 136- 5 GND 151- 5 GND
OB1
(H/L) 408-5 H/L H 50-A4-A1 55-1 164-B9-6

P.G. 421-8 336-1 207- 9 5V2 136- 6 CP 151- 6 CP
408-4 PGND 227-B1 MAINFAN_D L 50-A3-A2 55-2 164-B8-7
P.G. 421-9 336-2 H 207-10 FIXEXIT_PS FIXING EXIT SENSOR 136- 7 GND 151- 7 GND
408-3 PGND
PS30
421-10
MAIN BODY 227-B2 MAINFAN_EM L 50-A2-A3 55-3 164-B7-8 153- 1 PWM 165- 1 PWM
15-9 N.C.
15-8 N.C.
24V 408-2 +24V 336-3 207-1 1 S_GND 136- 8 LP 151- 8 LP

FM1
COOLING FAN/1 227-B3 MAINFAN_HL_20 L 50-A1-A4 164-B6-9 153- 2 GND 165- 2 GND
421-11 207-1 2 S_GND 151- 9 GND
15-11 REM/3
15-10 REM/2
24V 408-1 +24V 336-4 136- 9 GND

15-14 NMI ICB
164-B5-10 153- 3 5V 165- 3 5V

227-B4 P.GND 136-10 FLM 151-10 FLM
338-1-4 164-B4-11
ADU DB
227-B5 WRFAN1_D L 207- 8 S_GND 51-A1-A10 136-11 GND 151-11 GND

WRITTING SECTION 338-2-3 164-B3-12
51-A10-A1 136-12 DSP_OFF 151-12 DSP_OFF
OB INVB
461-1-3 227-B6 WRFAN1_EM L 207- 1 FIX_SET_N 164-B2-13

402-B13 SUC_FAN H 338-3-2
FM2
COOLING FAN 227-B7 WRFAN_HL L 51-A2-A9 52-1 FIXING TEMPERTURE 136-13 5V2 151-13 5V2
CONVEYANCE 338-4-1 207- 7 TH1+ TH1 164-B1-14
461-2-2 227-B8 P-GND 51-A3-A8 52-2 SENSOR/1 136-14 5V2 151-14 5V2
FM3
SUCTION FAN 461-3-1
402-B14 SUC_EM L * 207- 6 TH1-
402-B15 P_GND 304-1 *
FIXING
FIXING TEMPERTURE
93-6
93-5
93-3
5V 227-B9 5V 51-A4-A7 53-1

304-2 207- 5 TH2+ TH2 161-2-1 162-2-1
S.G. 51-A5-A6 53-3
2
227-B10 P.GND * SENSOR/2 158- 1 SW_SIG

462-1-2 460-4-4 304-3 207- 4 TH2- 161-1-2 162-1-2
TRNSFER/SEPARATION 402-B16 SEP_CLR_M B L CONT 227-B11 MAINM_CONT H * 158- 2 GND
SW2
462-2-1 460-5-3 CLK 304-4

51-A6-A5
M10
402-B17 SEP_CLR_M A L 227-B12 MAINM_CLK P 207- 3 TH3+
CLEANING MOTOR CW/CCW 304-5
227-B13 MAINM_F/R L * 51-A7-A4
304-6 207- 2 TH3-
FIXING MOTOR LD 227-B14 MAINM_EM H
M4
TRNSFER 463-1-2 460-6-2 S.G. 304-7 *

CN152-2 5V2
402-B18 MC24V
82-2
82-1
83-3
CN152-1 24V1
463-2-1 460-7-1 304-8 314-4
TSL
P.G.
SUB POWER SWITCH
402-B19 TSL_DR H
CN152-4 S_GND
CN152-3 S_GND
SYNCHRONIZATION 304-9 314-3

P.G.
14 14
402-B20 NC
LAMP 24V 304-10 314-2
439-1-2 460-3-5 414- 1 NC 24V 304-11 314-1 890-A1-12 899-1-9 897-1
13 13
HTR3 214-A12 5VA

439-2-1 460-2-6 414- 2 NC 890-A2-11 899-2-8 897-2 163-4-1
214-A11 BPSIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/BP
VR5
DRUM HEATER 414- 3 NC * 890-A3-10 899-3-7 897-3 163-3-2

214-A10 AGND 163-2-3
(OPTION) ADU F/G 414- 4 NC
890-A4-9 899-4-6 896-1
163-1-4
PAPER CONVEYANCE
414- 5 NC 350-1 214-A9 5V3
188-7-1 890-A5-8 899-5-5 896-2
414- 6 NC -2 189-1 211-7 24V1 L 214-A8 BPSIZE_S_PS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-BP
188-6-2
PS31
ICB
414- 7 NC -3 -2 211-6 P.GND 890-A6-7 899-6-4 896-3

188-5-3 214-A7 SGND
414- 8 NC -4 -3 211-5 POLM_CONT H
188-4-4 890-A7-6 899-7-3 895-1
POLYGON -5 -4 211-4 POLM_CLK P 214-A6 5V3
188-3-5 890-A8-5 899-8-2 895-2
M15
-6 -5 211-3 POLM_LOCK H L 214-A5 BPSIZE_L_PS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/2-BP

PMDB
413- 1 NC 899-9-1
PS32
MOTOR 188-4-6:TEST
214-A4 SGND 890-A9-4 895-3
413- 2 NC -7 -6 211-2 N.C. 106-1 FOR IP
188-3-7:TEST 106-2
413- 3 NC -8 -7 211-1 N.C. 890-B1-12 893-1 106-3
214-B12 5V3 106-4
24
24
23
23
413- 4 NC -9
LAN I/F
890-B2-11 893-2
-10 L 214-B11 BP_0PS NO PAPER SENSOR/BP
PS33
413- 5 NC 890-B3-10 893-3

214-B10 SGND
PARALLEL
413- 6 NC
453-3-1 436-1-3 318-2 890-B4-9 892-1
406- 1 ADU FAN/1 H 24V 215-1 24V 214-B9 5V3
ADU REVERSE 890-B5-8 892-2 TRAY UPPLY LIMIT
BY-PASS
453-2-2 436-2-2 24V 318-5 L 214-B8 BPUP_PS

406- 2 ADUFAN_EM/1 L 215-2 24V
PS34
890-B6-7 892-3
FM10
MOTOR COOLING 453-1-3 436-3-1 A 318-1 214-B7 SGND SENSOR/BP

406- 3 P_GND LOOP ROLLER MOTOR 215-3 A P
318-3
M6
FAN A
HD-105
215-4 /A P 890-B7-6 891-1

B 318-4 214-B6 5V3
450-1 451-3-1 215-5 B P 890-B8-5 891-2 TRAY LOWER LIMIT
402-A20 5V2 B 318-6 H 214-B5 BPDN_PS
(OPTION)
PS35
ADU PAPER 450-2 451-2-2 215-6 /B P

214-B4 SGND 890-B9-4 891-3
SENSOR/BP
402-A19 ADJAM_PS H
PS45
REVERSE SENSOR 450-3 451-1-3

402-A18 S_GND 890-B10-3 894-1
SENSOR 24V 305-2 315-1-6 214-B3 5V3
230-1 24V 890-B11-2 894-2
305-5 315-2-5 L 214-B2 LOOP_PS LOOP SENSOR
TONER BOTTLE MOTOR
24V
PS36
452-1 230-2 24V 890-B12-1 894-3

402-A17 5V2 A 305-4 315-3-4 214-B1 S.GND
REVERSE/EXIT 452-2 230-3 A P
402-A16 ADURV_PS H PAPER EXIT MOTOR 305-6 315-4-3
M7
A
PS46
452-3 230-4 /A P
SENSOR 402-A15 S_GND B 305-3 315-5-2
230-5 B P
305-1 315-6-1
IP-511
B 230-6 /B P
453-1
402-A14 5V2
ADU HANDLE 453-2 699- 4 699-A5
HDD I/F
402-A13 HD_PS L 35- 1 MC24V_3

PS47
SENSOR 453-3 699- 2 699-A1 321- 1

402-A12 S_GND
(OPTION)
(OPTION)
35- 2 KEYC_SET H
35
447-12-1 24V/2
2
402-B1 IO_DRXD 699- 1 699-A2

35-3 S-GND 321- 2 CN322-1 DEVELOPING BIAS
C(K)
36
447-11-2 24V/2
ADU
402-B2 IO_DCLK 699- 3 699-A6 321- 3

(OPTION)
454-1 35- 4 KEYC_DRV H

37
447-10-3 PGND
FT44
ADU PAPER 402-A11 5V2 402-B3 ADU_LATCH 321- 4

35-5 P-GND
KEY COUNTER
454-2
38
447-9-4 ***-** ***-** PGND

402-A10 ADUCR_PS H P 402-B4 IO_UCLK 321- 5
PS48
CONVEYANCE 454-3 447-8-5 36-1 CVM1_SIG NC

402-A9 S_GND 402-B5 IO_UREQ ***-** ***-** 321- 6
P 447-7-6 36-2 CVFEED_SIG PGND
SENSOR/2 P 402-B6 IO_UTXD ***-** ***-** 321- 7
447-6-7 36-3 CV_SIZE0 24V/1
CN113
CN113
CN112
CN112
455-1 402-B7 IO_UACK1 ***-** ***-**

36-4 CV_SIZE1
FT45
ADU 402-A8 5V2 447-5-8

455-2 402-B8 ERR_OUT1 ***-** ***-** 320-1
402-A7 ADUDN_PS H 447-4-9 36-5 CV_SIZE2 H 227-A14 C.CONT C.CONT CHARGER
PS49
FT48
DECELERATION 455-3 ***-** ***-**

CV
402-A6 S_GND 402-B9 GND 36-6 CV_SIZE3 320-2

447-3-10 ***-** ***-** L 227-A13 EM(C).SIG EM(C).SIG 138- 1 NC
SENSOR 402-B10 2NDM_CLK 320-3
(OPTION)
447-2-11 36-7 CVDUP_SIG H 227-A12 TGR.CONT TGR.CONT TONER GUIDE ROLLER L 138- 2 REM/2
402-B11 REG_PS ***-** ***-** 320-4
COIN VENDOR
456-1 447-1-12 36-8 CPF0 H 227-A11 T.CONT T.CONT

HV
402-A5 5V2 ***-** ***-** L 138- 3 REM/3

TGR
ADU H 402-B12 S_GND 36-9 CPF1 320-5

456-2 ***-** ***-**
H 227-A10 S.CONT S.CONT L 138- 4 NC
402-A4 ADUEXIT_PS 320-6
PS50
PRE-REGISTRATION 456-3 36-10 P-GND H 227-A9 GP.CONT GP.CONT

402-A3 S_GND 320-7
FT47
SENSOR L 227-A8 EM(T).SIG EM(T).SIG

37-8 NC 320-8
457-1-2
L 227-A7 EM(S).SIG EM(S).SIG CN323-1
402-A1 MC24V 37-1 NC 320-9
ADU LOCK 457-2-1 227-A6 SGND
320-10
SGND GUID PLATE
SD9
402-A2 LOCK_SD L 37-2 NC

FT47
SOLENOID H 227-A5 B.CONT B.CONT

37-3 NC 320-11 CN110-A1 12V2 CN170-A1 12V2
227-A4 5V2 5V2 -A2 12V2
37-4 NC 320-12 -A2 12V2
P 227-A3 TXD TXD TRANSFER
37-5 NC 320-13 -A3 GND -A3 GND
FT50
P 227-A2 CLK CLK

37-6 NC 320-14 -A4 APR -A4 APR
P 227-A1 LATCH LATCH
37-7 NC -A5 ADRST -A5 ADRST
202-A10 S_GND SEPARATION -A6 PDWN -A6 PDWN
135-A10 S_GND
CN400-7 -5V
-A7 GND -A7 GND

CN400-2 12V
443-12-1
CN400-4 5V/2
202-A18 S_GND 135-A11 S_GND

CN400-1 24V/1
217-12 IO_DTXD P
CN400-6 SGND
CN400-5 SGND
CN401-2 PGND
443-11-2 -A8 TCK -A8 TCK

CN400-3 P_GND
CN401-1 24V-INT
217-11 IO_DCLK P 202-A18 S_GND 135-A1 S_OUT1 -A9 /TCK -A9 /TCK
443-10-3
217-10 ADU_LATCH P 202-A10 S_GND 135-A2 S_GND -A10 GND -A10 GND
443-9-4
217- 9 IO_UCLK 202-A18 S_GND 135-A3 S_IN1 -A11 RCK -A11 RCK
443-8-5
217- 8 REQ1 202-A8 S_GND 135-A4 S.GND -A12 /RCK -A12 /RCK
443-7-6
217- 7 IO_URXD 202-A7 /CTS1 135-A5 /RTS1 -A13 GND -A13 GND
443-6-7
217- 6 ACK1 202-A6 /RTS1 135-A6 /CTS1 -A14 LCLKI -A14 LCLKI
443-5-8
DIMM
217- 5 ERR_OUT1 L 202-A5 /DSR1 135-A7 /DTR1

MU-402
MU-401
443-4-9 -A15 /LCLKI -A15 /LCLKI

(OPTION)
217- 4 S.GND P 202-A4 /DTR1 135-A8 /DSR1 -A16 GND -A16 GND
443-3-10
217- 3 2NDM_CLK P 202-A3 ERR_R 135-A9 ERR_R -A17 SCLK -A17 SCLK
443-2-11
217- 2 REG_PS 202-A2 S_GND 135-A10 S_GND -A18 /SEN -A18 /SEN
443-1-12
217-1 S-GND 202-A1 S_GND 135-A11 S_GND -A19 SDI
445-9
445-8
445-7
445-6
445-5
445-4
445-3
445-2
445-1
446-2
446-1
-A19 SDI
202-B11 /PVV 135-B1 PVV -A20 SDO -A20 SDO
202-B10 /TONVV 135-B2 TONVV CN110-B1 TG CN170-B1 TG
ADB
202-B9 /B_VV 135-B3 B_VV -B2 CLAMP -B2 CLAMP

202-B8 /SVV 135-B4 S_VV -B3 ACLAMP -B3 ACLAMP
89-2
89-1
202-B7 BPSIZE_VR_0 135-B5 T_SIG -B4 BCLAMP -B4 BCLAMP

202-B6 EE_VV 135-B6 EE_VV -B5 GND -B5 GND
202-B5 RESET 135-B7 RESET -B6 DO -B6 DO
202-B4 RES_CONT 135-B8 RES CONT -B7 /DO -B7 /DO
202-B3 S.GND 135-B9 NC -B8 GND -B8 GND
202-B2 DDF_VV 135-B10 DDF_VV -B9 D1
72-1
72-2
-B9 D1
71-1
202-B1 S_GND 135-B11 S_GND -B10 /D1 -B10 /D1

MB
71-2
-B11 GND -B11 GND

344-9-1 310-3
71-3
202-1 S__GND -B12 D2 -B12 D2

344-8-2 310-2
71-4
H 229- 2 MAINEXIT_PS PAPER EXIT SENSOR -B13 /D2 -B13 /D2

PS37
344-7-3 310-1
71-5
A
229- 3 5V -B14 GND -B14 GND

71-6
B
344-4-6 342-1-3 -B15 LCLKO -B15 LCLKO

229- 4 P.GND -B16 /LCLKO
71-7
-B16 /LCLKO
MEMORY BOARD
751-5 88-5 344-5-5 342-2-2

28
27
L 229- 5 FIXFAN3_EM
FM6
344-6-4 342-3-1
PAPER EXIT FAN/F -B17 GND -B17 GND
751-6 88-6 L 229- 6 FIXFAN_D -B18 5V2 -B18 5V2
-B19 5V2 -B19 5V2
EXIT
-B20 GND -B20 GND

PRCB
750-1-10 344-1-9 343-1-3

219-1 IO_DTXD 229- 7 P.GND
750-2-9 344-2-8 343-2-2
219-2 5V2 L 229- 8 FIXFAN2_EM PAPER EXIT FAN/R
FM7
750-3-8 344-3-7 343-3-1

219-3 IO_DCLK L 229- 9 FIXFAN_D
750-4-7 219-4 S-GND CN110-B1 TG
750-5-6 219-5 LCT_LATCH 134-A1 HCLK -B2 CLAMP
750-6-5 134-A2 DFD0 -B3 ACLAMP
219-6 IO_UCLK
B
A
134-A3 DFD1
750-7-4
(1)
219-7 ERR_OUT4 134-A4 DFD2 -B4 BCLAMP

18
18
17
17
345-1-3
139-22 RI
139- 9 NC
139- 1 NC
139-25 NC
139-24 NC
139-23 NC
139-21 NC
139-19 NC
139-18 NC
139-17 NC
139-16 NC
139-15 NC
139-14 NC
139-13 NC
139-12 NC
139-11 NC
139-10 NC
750-8-3 229-10 P.GND 134-A5 DFD3

139-20 DTR
FOR KRDS
38
37
36
35
219-8 IO_URXD 345-2-2 MAIN COOLING 134-A6 DFD4

139- 7 S.GND
139- 5 CTS IN
L 229-11 FIXFAN1_EM
139- 6 DSR IN
139- 3 RXD IN
750-9-2
139- 8 DCD IN
FM8
219-9 ACK4
LAN I/F
345-3-1 134-A7 DFD5

139- 4 RTS OUT
139- 2 TXD OUT
14
14
13
13
FAN/2
16
16
15
15
750-10-1 219-10 REQ4 L 229-12 FIXFAN_D 134-A8 DFD6

Crimp
ADUDB
HV
134-A9 DFD7
134-A10 PCLK
134-B1 PBUSY
134-B2 ADREQ
58-2-1 134-B3 XFLAG
(OPTION)
FOR ISW 36PINS
229-13 MC24V_2
20
20
19
19
MODEL
134-B4 HBUSY
DRUM MOTOR
58-1-2 WEB SOLENOID

SD2
H 229-14 WEBSD_DRV 134-B5 DAVIL

[Symbol]
134-B6 /INT
L Low level
H High level
Connector
FIXING MOTOR
134-B7 AC1284
ANPHENOL CONECTOR
134-B8 GND
50-1
P Pulse signal
LT-402/LT-412
134-B9 GND
751-4 88-4
134-B10 GND
751-1 88-1
DEVELOPING MOTOR
218-4 SIN
751-3 88-3
218-6 RTS
218-3 CTS
218-1 SOUT
218-2 SGND
218-5 S-GND
751-2 88-2
Relay connector
PAPER FEED MOTOR
MODEM
RS232C I/F
Faston
100-4 SG
100-3 SG
104-2 5V2
104-1 5V2
100-2 5V1
100-1 5V1
255-1-6
255-2-5
255-3-4
255-4-3
255-5-2
255-6-1
104-3 12V1
105-3 SGND
105-2 SGND
105-1 SGND
324-1 MTXD
MANUAL
324-2 SGND
324-3 MCTS
324-4 MRXD
(OPTION)
324-5 SGND
324-6 MRTS
CB
FS-110/FS-210
Example)
(4) Signal flow
85-1
SGND
PS1
5VDC
CN1-1 24V2
85-2
CN1-2 5V2
2
85-3
CN1-3 SG
85-4
CN1-4 PG
85-5
CN1-5 PG
85-6
A-1
CN1-6 FG
signal flow
Direction of
REVISED REVISION
PS1
DATE
May.2002
A-1
PAGE
METHOD
REPLACEMENT
APPENDIX
2 [1] 7155/7165 Overall Wiring Diagram 1/4
AC220V TO 240V : INLET
MAIN POWER
POWER PLUG SWITCH
FT10
AC100V FT11 SW1
FT37 FT38
SERIES
40-1
40-2
FT35 FT1 CBR1 FT11
FT5 FT7
1-2 ACIN(L)
3-2 JH1_DRIVE
3-1 JH_DRIVE
L 31-1 FAN1
L 31-2 FAN2
31-3 FAN3
FT33 FT3 FT9 8-1 1-3 ACIN(L) MAIN
DRV
1-1 ACIN(L) POWER SUPPLY COOLING FAN
24V
RELAY FM13
POWER PLUG FT13 RL2
FT101
NF COIL2 COIL1 COIL
EUROPE ONLY
FNS ADUDB
EUROPE ONLY
15-12 TEST PIN1
15-13 TEST PIN2

EUROPE RL1 PRCB SCDB/DF OB ICB ICB
DCPS 1/2
6
MRL
12-21 P_GND ADUDB

12-12 S_GND ADUDB
12-20 P_GND ADUDB
ONLY
13-10 S_GND SCDB

12-15 S_GND PRCB
12-16 S_GND PRCB
12-17 S_GND PRCB
12-18 P_GND PRCB
13-14 P.GND SCDB

13-15 P.GND SCDB
11-14 S_GND HDD
13-13 S_GND FNS

13-18 P_GND FNS
12-11 -5V1 ADUDB

G/Y
11-13 S_GNDHDD
12-3 24V1 ADUDB

12-5 12V2 ADUDB
12-13 S_GND OB
12-14 S_GND OB
11-8 S_GND ICB

11-9 P_GND ICB
12-6 5V2 ADUDB

13-11 S_GND DF
FT14
14-3 S_GND ICB

14-4 S_GND ICB
11-10 S_GND IP
11-11 S_GND IP
11-12 S_GND IP
12-1 24V1 PRCB
12-4 12V2 PRCB
12-10 5V2 PRCB
13-1 24V1 SCDB

13-2 24V1 SCDB
13-16 P.GND DF
FT100
INLET TYPE ONLY
12-9 5V2 PRCB
13-6 5V2 SCDB
11-7 12V1 HDD

12-22 24V1 OB
13-5 24V1 FNS

14-1 12V2 ICB
11-5 5V1 HDD
13-9 5V2 FNS

13-3 24V1 DF
12-8 5V2 OB
14-2 5V2 ICB
11-1 5V1 ICB

11-2 5V1 ICB
11-6 12V1 IP
12-7 5V2 OB
13-7 5V2 DF
CBR2
11-3 5V1 IP
11-4 5V1 IP
5-2
5-1
FT34
FT10 1-5 ACIN(N)
FT1 8-2 HEATER RELAY
1-6 ACIN(N)
FT2 1-4 N.C.
FT36 FT4 FT6 FT8
FT12
EUROPE ONLY TS1 FT(PS)31
51-1 51-2 FIXING HEATER LAMP/1 L1_DRIVE
THARMOSTAT/U FT19 FT24 FT25 FT20
F/G
51-3 4-1 L1_DRIVE'
L2 TRC1
6-1 FT15 180 C FT16 4-2 LP_DRIVE'
4-3 L1_CONT'
FT26 FIXING HEATER LAMP/2 FT(PS)32
7-1 L1_CONT
7-2 6-4 FT27 FT21
51-4
L3
TRANSFORMER 2-2 L2_DRIVE 40
50-2 TS2 41
FIXING HEATER LAMP/3 42
THARMOSTAT/L 2-3 L3_DRIVE TRC3 TRC2
43
15-1 FIXHT1_CONT LAMP

50-1 50-3
9-1 L4 44
15-5 PSFAN_CONT-17
F/G FT17 FT23 45
15-4 MAINRL_CONT
110 C FT18 FT22 FT28 FT29
46
15-6 PSFAN_EM
FIXING
10-1 NOT EXIST WITH JAPAN
10-2
9-4 UNIT
F/G NOT EXIST WITH JAPAN 2-1 L_DRIVE 47
TRANSFORMER
15-7 SGND
FT(PS)30 48
LP_DRIVE 49
78-1
78-2
78-3
78-4
78-5
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
DF-316 70
69
71
72
P 620-1 U
WRITING
600-10 L.PG
600-5 24V1
600-6 24V1
600-7 24V1
(Xe_LAMP)
600-1 5V2 M11 SCANNER MOTOR
600-2 5V2
600-3 S.G
600-4 S.G
600-8 P.G
600-9 P.G
P 620-2 V
613-6 ADF_OPEN_PS
612-A11 RES_PS(SIDE2)
613-2 3.3V(SIZE_VR)
612-A8 RES_PS(SIDE1)
612-B11 ORG_SET_PS
P
615-2 I/L_24V2
620-3 W
612-B5 SKEW_PS_R
612-B2 SKEW_PS_F
613-3 SIZE_ANA
612-A5 SIZE_PS_S
612-A2 SIZE_PS_L
612-A14 READ_PS
615-1 24V2
613-1 FAN_LD
637-1 630-1
612-B14 EXIT_PS
612-B8 LAST_PS
623-1 24V
613-4 A.GND
613-5 S.GND
612-A10 S.GND
612-A13 S.GND
612-B10 S.GND
612-B13 S.GND
LDB
612-A1 S.GND
612-A4 S.GND
612-A7 S.GND
612-B1 S.GND
612-B4 S.GND
612-B7 S.GND
INDX SB
637-2 630-2
623-2 CONT L1 INVB
613-7 5V
H
612-A12 5V
612-A15 5V
612-B12 5V
612-B15 5V
612-A3 5V
612-A6 5V
612-A9 5V
612-B3 5V
612-B6 5V
612-B9 5V
637-3 630-3
L 623-3 LAMP.PG
637-4 L1
180-A1
-A10
-A11
51-1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B8
-B8
-B8
-2
-3
-4
-5
EXPOSURE LAMP
SCANNER UNIT L1
614-A1 DF_FAN_DRIVE F/G F/G
614-A2 DF_M1_A 631-3-1
H 623-4 24V DRV
614-A3 DF_M1_A
614-A4 P.GND
L 623-5 EM 631-2-2
FM9 SCANNER COOLING FAN
623-6 P.GND 631-1-3
614-A5 24V4
614-A6 24V4
614-A7 24V4
614-A8 24V4
632-3 SCANNER
186- 1-11
185-1-11
614-A9 DF_M2_B 624-13 S.GND
187-1-5
- 2-10
- 10-2
- 11-1
-2-10
-10-2
-11-1
- 3-9
- 4-8
- 5-7
- 6-6
- 7-5
- 8-4
- 9-3
- 3-9
- 4-8
- 5-7
- 6-6
- 7-5
- 8-4
- 9-3
632-2 SCANNER HP SENSOR
-2-4
-3-3
-4-2
-5-1
614-A10 DF_M2_B L 624-14 SIG
632-1 PS61
614-A11 DF_M2_A 624-15 5V
614-B1 DF_M2_A
SCDB 1/2
639-3-1 633-3
614-B2 DF_24V_OUT(CL) 624-1 S.GND
639-2-2 633-2
614-B3 DF_24V_OUT(SD1) H 624-2 APS_TIM 639-1-3 633-1 PS51 APS TIMING SENSOR
614-B4 DF_24V_OUT(SD2) 624-3 5V
-B10 GND
-B11 GND
634-3
CN132-1 5V
CN132-2 SGND
CN132-3 /IND
CN132-4 SGND
L CN132-5 INDPR
CN130-A1 GND
-A2 VIDEO2
-A3 /VIDEO2
-A4 GND
-A5 LPR5V
-A6 LD5V
-A7 LD5V
-A8 GND
-A9 VIDEO1
-A10 /VIDEO1
-A11 GND
P CN130-B1 /ENB1
-B2 /S/H1
-B3 /ALM1
-B4 GND
-B5 /ENB2
-B6 /S/H2
-B7 /ALM2
-B8 GND
-B9 GND
614-B5 DF_24V_OUT(SD3) 624-4 APS_5V
634-2
614-B6 DF_CL_DRIVE L 624-5 APS.1 634-1 PS63 APS SENSOR/1
614-B7 DF_SD2_DRIVE 624-6 S.GND
635-3
614-B8 DF_SD3_DRIVE 624-7 APS_5V
635-2
614-B9 DF_SD1_DRIVE H 624-8 APS.2 PS64 APS SENSOR/2
635-1
614-B10 DF_M1_B 624-9 S.GND
H
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
614-B11 DF_M1_B 636-3
624-10 APS_5V
636-2
APS SENSOR/3
H 624-11 APS.3 636-1 PS65
624-12 S.GND
H 625-7 APS.1_SIG
H 625-6 APS.2_SIG
137-1 APS.1_SIG
137-2 APS.2_SIG ICB 1/2
H 625-5 APS.3_SIG 137-3 APS.3_SIG
625-4 NC 137-4
L 625-3 COVER_SIG 137-5 COVER_SIG
89 625-2 APS_CONT 137-6 APS_CONT
81 88 625-1 S.GND 137-7 S.GND
80 87
79 86
78 85
77 84
74 76 83
73 75 82
2
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
13-6 26V1 LCT
64
13-8 5V2 LCT
13-12 S-GND LCT
63
LCT
13-17 P-GND LCT
62
APPENDIX
61
60
59
58
CN103-1 5V2
57
CN103-2 12V2
56
CN103-3 GND
83-1 93-1
55
CN103-4 GND 21-1 24V2
83-2 93-2
54
21-2 24V2
53
21-3 P.GND
154-14 LCD_ADJ LCD_ADJ 21-4 P.GND
52
FT40
164-A14-1 154-13 24V LCD_24V 12-2 24V1 HV
51
HV
164-A13-2 154-12 LCD_D3 LD3 12-19 P.GND H/V
P 140- 1 S_OUT2 150- 1 S_IN2 154-11 LCD_D2
164-A12-3 LD2
140- 2 S_IN2 150- 2 S_OUT2 P 154-10 LCD_D1
164-A11-4 LD1
P 140- 3 /RTS2 150- 3 CTS 154- 9 LCD_D0
164-A10-5 LD0
140- 4 /CTS2 150- 4 RTS P 154- 8 24V
MS1
164-A9-6 LCD_24V
MS/R
P 140- 5 /DTR2 150- 5 DSR P 154- 7 GND

164-A8-7 GND
140- 6 /DSR2 150- 6 DTR 154- 6 5V 5V
INTER LOCK
LCD
164-A7-8
140- 7 SHUT 150- 7 SHUT 154- 5 CP 32-1 24V1
164-A6-9 CP
140- 8 SW_SIG 150- 8 SW_SIG 154- 4 LP 32-2 P.GND
164-A5-10 LP
140- 9 WT_LED_ON 150- 9 WT_LED_ON 154- 3 FLM
SPARE
164-A4-14 FLM
140-10 SHUT_LED_ON 150-10 SHUT_LED_ON 154- 2 NC
164-A3-12 NC
FT41
140-11 5V1 150-11 5V1 154- 1 DSP_OFF

164-A2-13 DSP_OFF
164-A1-14
DCPS 2/2
164-B14-1 151- 1 LCD_D3 155- 1 X2_CONT Y1CONT

136- 1 LCD_D3
164-B13-2 155- 2 Y2_CONT X1CONT
MS2
151- 2 LCD_D2
MS/L
136- 2 LCD_D2
164-B12-3 151- 3 LCD_D1 155- 3 X1_CONT Y2CONT
136- 3 LCD_D1
[1] 7155/7165 Overall Wiring Diagram 2/4
164-B11-4 155- 4 Y1_CONT X2CONT

INTER LOCK
136- 4 LCD_D0 151- 4 LCD_D0
PAKB
164-B10-5
136- 5 GND 151- 5 GND
OB1
164-B9-6
136- 6 CP 151- 6 CP
164-B8-7
136- 7 GND 151- 7 GND
164-B7-8 153- 1 PWM 165- 1 PWM
15-9 N.C.
15-8 N.C.
136- 8 LP 151- 8 LP
164-B6-9 153- 2 GND 165- 2 GND
151- 9 GND
15-11 REM/3
15-10 REM/2
136- 9 GND
15-14 NMI ICB
164-B5-10 153- 3 5V 165- 3 5V

136-10 FLM 151-10 FLM
164-B4-11
136-11 GND 151-11 GND
164-B3-12
136-12 DSP_OFF 151-12 DSP_OFF
OB INVB
164-B2-13
136-13 5V2 151-13 5V2
164-B1-14
136-14 5V2 151-14 5V2
93-6
93-5
93-3
161-2-1 162-2-1
158- 1 SW_SIG
161-1-2 162-1-2
158- 2 GND
SW2
CN152-2 5V2
82-2
82-1
83-3
CN152-1 24V1
SUB POWER SWITCH
CN152-4 S_GND
CN152-3 S_GND
163-4-1
163-3-2
163-2-3
163-1-4
ICB 2/2
106-1 FOR IP
106-2
106-3
106-4
24
24
23
23
LAN I/F
PARALLEL
HD-105
(OPTION)
TONER BOTTLE MOTOR
IP-511
HDD I/F
(OPTION)
(OPTION)
CN113
CN113
CN112
CN112
138- 1 NC
L 138- 2 REM/2
L 138- 3 REM/3
L 138- 4 NC
CN110-A1 12V2 CN170-A1 12V2

-A2 12V2 -A2 12V2
-A3 GND -A3 GND
-A4 APR -A4 APR
-A5 ADRST -A5 ADRST
-A6 PDWN -A6 PDWN
135-A10 S_GND
-A7 GND -A7 GND
135-A11 S_GND -A8 TCK -A8 TCK
90
135-A1 S_OUT1 -A9 /TCK -A9 /TCK
91
135-A2 S_GND -A10 GND -A10 GND
92
135-A3 S_IN1 -A11 RCK -A11 RCK
93
135-A4 S.GND -A12 /RCK -A12 /RCK
94
135-A5 /RTS1 -A13 GND -A13 GND
95
135-A6 /CTS1 -A14 LCLKI -A14 LCLKI
DIMM
96
135-A7 /DTR1
MU-402
MU-401
-A15 /LCLKI -A15 /LCLKI

(OPTION)
97
135-A8 /DSR1 -A16 GND -A16 GND
98
135-A9 ERR_R -A17 SCLK -A17 SCLK
99
135-A10 S_GND -A18 /SEN -A18 /SEN
135-A11 S_GND
100
-A19 SDI -A19 SDI
135-B1 PVV
101
-A20 SDO -A20 SDO
135-B2 TONVV
102
CN110-B1 TG CN170-B1 TG
ADB
135-B3 B_VV
103
-B2 CLAMP -B2 CLAMP
135-B4 S_VV
104
-B3 ACLAMP -B3 ACLAMP
135-B5 T_SIG
105
-B4 BCLAMP -B4 BCLAMP
106 135-B6 EE_VV -B5 GND -B5 GND
135-B7 RESET
107
-B6 DO -B6 DO
135-B8 RES CONT
108
-B7 /DO -B7 /DO
109 135-B9 NC -B8 GND -B8 GND
135-B10 DDF_VV
110
-B9 D1 -B9 D1
135-B11 S_GND
111
-B10 /D1 -B10 /D1

MB
-B11 GND -B11 GND

-B12 D2 -B12 D2
-B13 /D2 -B13 /D2
-B14 GND -B14 GND
-B15 LCLKO -B15 LCLKO
-B16 /LCLKO -B16 /LCLKO
MEMORY BOARD
28
27
-B17 GND -B17 GND

-B18 5V2 -B18 5V2
-B19 5V2 -B19 5V2
-B20 GND -B20 GND
PRCB
CN110-B1 TG
134-A1 HCLK -B2 CLAMP
134-A2 DFD0 -B3 ACLAMP
B
A
134-A3 DFD1
134-A4 DFD2 -B4 BCLAMP
18
18
17
17
139-22 RI
139- 9 NC
139- 1 NC
139-25 NC
139-24 NC
139-23 NC
139-21 NC
139-19 NC
139-18 NC
139-17 NC
139-16 NC
139-15 NC
139-14 NC
139-13 NC
139-12 NC
139-11 NC
139-10 NC
134-A5 DFD3
139-20 DTR
FOR KRDS
38
37
36
35
134-A6 DFD4
139- 7 S.GND
139- 5 CTS IN
139- 6 DSR IN
139- 3 RXD IN
139- 8 DCD IN
LAN I/F
134-A7 DFD5
139- 4 RTS OUT
139- 2 TXD OUT
14
14
13
13
16
16
15
15
134-A8 DFD6
ADUDB
HV
134-A9 DFD7
134-A10 PCLK
134-B1 PBUSY
134-B2 ADREQ
134-B3 XFLAG
FOR ISW 36PINS
20
20
19
19
134-B4 HBUSY
DRUM MOTOR
134-B5 DAVIL
134-B6 /INT
FIXING MOTOR
134-B7 AC1284
ANPHENOL CONECTOR
134-B8 GND
134-B9 GND
134-B10 GND
DEVELOPING MOTOR
PAPER FEED MOTOR
MODEM
RS232C I/F
100-4 SG
100-3 SG
104-2 5V2
104-1 5V2
100-2 5V1
100-1 5V1
104-3 12V1
105-3 SGND
105-2 SGND
105-1 SGND
112
113
114
115
116
117
2
73
74
75
H 216-1 FIXHT1_CONT
76
H 216-2 FIXHT2_CONT
90-2
90-1
77
H 216-3 FIXHT3_CONT
78
216-4 MAINRL_CONT
79
216-5 PSFAN_CONT-17
80
9006/1061#22 216-6 PSFAN_EM
81
216-7 SGND
82
812-1 H CN200-1 24V/1
237-B13 T1RISEM_24V
83
812-2 CN200-2 12V/2
237-B12 T1RISEM_D
APPENDIX
M16
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/1 H
84
CN200-3 5V/2
85
CN200-4 5V/2
86
810-2-1 814-4-10 800B-7-10 237-A7 T1FEEDMC_DRV H CN200-5 S-GND
87
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/1 810-1-2 814-3-11 -6-11 237-A6 MC24V_1 CN200-6 S-GND
MC3
88
CN200-7 S-GND
CN200-8 P-GND
89
811-2-1 814-2-12 -5-12 237-A5 T1PREMC_DRV
PRE-REGISTRATION CLUTCH/1 811-1-2 814-1-13 -4-13 237-A4 MC24V_1
MC4
TRAY1
817-1 237-A19 NC
F/G
817-2
27
CN
237-A18 NC CN201-1 24V_INT
F/G
817-3
DUMMY
28
237-A17 NC CN201-2 PGND
P 208-16 SCAN_CLK 610-1 SCAN_CLK
91-1
HTR1 L 208-15 SCAN_F/R 610-2 SCAN_F/R
91-2
P 208-14 SCAN_MGN 610-3 SCAN_MGN(ENBL)
HEATER/1 P 208-13 SCAN_CUR1 610-4 SCAN_CUR1
P 208-12 SCAN_CUR2 610-5 SCAN_CUR2
832-1 236-B13 T2RISEM_24V P 208-11 SCAN_CUR3 610-6 SCAN_CUR3
H
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/2 832-2 236-B12 T2RISEM_D H P 208-10 MODE1 610-7 MODE1
M17
P 208-9 MODE2 610-8 MODE2
SCANNER I/F
SNSOR
H 208-8 MODE3 610-9 MODE3
830-2-1 834-4-10 820B-7-10 236-A7 T2FEEDMC_DRV H H 208-7 EXP_CONT 610-10 EXP_CONT
HUMIDITY
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/2 830-1-2 834-3-11 -6-11 208-6 SCANFAN_CONT-18 610-11 SCANFAN_CONT-18
236-A6 MC24V_1
MC5
208-5 SCANFAN_EM 610-12 SCANFAN_EM L
831-2-1 834-2-12 -5-12 208-4 SCANHP_PS 610-13 SCANHP_PS L
236-A5 T2PREMC_DRV H 610-14 SCN_DET(SGND)
PRE-REGISTRATION CLUTCH/2 831-1-2 834-1-13 -4-13 208-3 SCN_DET
236-A4 MC24V_1
MC6
208-2 SGND 610-15 S.G
208-1 APS_TIMING 610-16 APS_TIMING
TRAY2
F/G
882-1
236-A18 NC
F/G
CN
882-2 236-A17 NC
DUMMY
234-A20 DF_M1_CLK 611-A1 DF_M1_CLK
234-A19 DF_M1_F/R 611-A2 DF_M1_F/R
234-A18 DF_M1_EN 611-A3 DF_M1_EN

92-1
HTR2 234-A17 DF_M1_M1 611-A4 DF_M1_M1
92-2
234-A16 DF_M1_M2 611-A5 DF_M1_M2
DF_M1=FEED M
HEATER/2 234-A15 DF_M1_I1 611-A6 DF_M1_I1
852-1 234-A14 DF_M1_I2 611-A7 DF_M1_I2
235-B13 T3RISEM_24V H 234-A13 DF_M2_CLK 611-A8 DF_M2_CLK
852-2 235-B12 T3RISEM_D
M18
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/3 H 234-A12 DF_M2_F/R 611-A9 DF_M2_F/R
234-A11 DF_M2_EN 611-A10 DF_M2_EN
850-2-1 854-4-10 840B-7-10 234-A10 DF_M2_M1 611-A11 DF_M2_M1
235-A7 T3FEEDMC_DRV H 234-A9 DF_M2_M2 611-A12 DF_M2_M2
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/3 850-1-2 854-3-11 -6-11
DF_M2=REV M
235-A6 MC24V_1
MC7
234-A8 DF_M2_I1 611-A13 DF_M2_I1
SCDB 2/2
234-A7 DF_M2_I2 611-A14 DF_M2_I2

851-2-1 854-2-12 -5-12 235-A5 T3PREMC_DRV 234-A6 DF_M2_MOI 611-A15 DF_M2_MOI
PRE-REGISTRATION CLUTCH/3 H
851-1-2 854-1-13 -4-13 235-A4 MC24V_1 234-A5 DF_FAN_OCNT 611-A16 DF_FAN_CONT
MC8
TRAY3
234-A4 DF_REVSD_CONT 611-A17 DF_SD1_CONT
234-A3 DF_SEPSD_CONT 611-A18 DF_SD2_CONT
F/G
F/G
DF I/F
234-A1 DF_M1_RETURN 611-A20 DF_M1_RETURN

234-B20 DF_M2_RETURN 611-B1 DF_M2_RETURN
234-B19 DF_CL_CONT 611-B2 DF_CL_CONT
234-B18 SIZE_PS_L 611-B3 SIZE_PS_L
872-1 611-B4 SIZE_PS_S
203-B13 T4RISEM_24V H 234-B17 SIZE_PS_S
872-2 203-B12 T4RISEM_D 611-B5 RES_PS(SIZE1)
M19
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/4 H 234-B16 REG_PS(SIZE1)
234-B15 REG_PS(SIDE2) 611-B6 RES_PS(SIDE2)
234-B14 READ_PS 611-B7 READ_PS
870-2-1 874-4-10 860B-7-10 203-A7 T4FEEDMC_DRV H 234-B13 SKEW_PS_F 611-B8 SKEW_PS_F
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/4 870-1-2 874-3-11 -6-11 203-A6 MC24V_1 234-B12 SKEW_PS_R 611-B9 SKEW_PS_R
MC9
871-2-1 874-2-12 -5-12 203-A5 T4PREMC_DRV H 234-B10 SET_PS 611-B11 ORG_SET_PS
PRE-REGISTRATION CLUTCH/4 871-1-2 874-1-13 -4-13 203-A4 MC24V_1 234-B9 EXIT_PS 611-B12 EXIT_PS
ONLY)
MC10
TRAY4
234-B8 OPEN_PS 611-B13 COVER_OPEN_PS
(JAPAN
234-B7 ADF_OPEN_PS 611-B14 ADF_OPEN_PS
F/G
234-B6 FAN_LD 611-B15 FAN_LD
F/G
234-B5 RESET_OUT 611-B16 RESET_OUT
234-B4 S.GND 611-B17 S.GND
234-B3 3.3V 611-B18 3.3V
890A-1-12 214-A1 NC 234-B2 SIZE_ANA 611-B19 SIZE_ANA
898-1-2 890A-2-11 214-A2 BPUDM_A 234-B1 A.GND 611-B20 A.GND
H
UP/DOWN MOTOR/BP 898-2-1 890A-3-10 214-A3 BPUDM_B
M20
H
237-A16 5V3 800B-1-16 814-1-13 801-1
-2-15 814-2-12 -2
BY-PASS
H 237-A15 T1PRE_PS PAPER FEED SENSOR/1
PS01
237-A14 SGND -3-14 814-3-11 -3
237-A13 5V3 -4-13 814-4-10 803-1

881-1-2
236-B14 MC24V_2 -5-12 814-5-9 -2
VERTICL CONVEYANCE CLUTCH /1 881-2-1 L 237-A12 T1UP_PS TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/1
PS02
236-B15 VFMC1_DRV H -6-11 814-6-8 -3

237-A11 SGND
882-1-2 237-A10 5V3 -7-10 814-7-7 805-1
236-B16 MC24V_2 -8-9 814-8-6 -2
VERTICL CONVEYANCE CLUTCH /2 882-2-1
FEED
236-B17 VFMC2_DRV H H 237-A9 T1_0PS NO PAPER SENSOR/1
PAPER
MC11 MC12
PS03
237-A8 SGND -9-8 814-9-5 -3

-14-3 804-1
VERTICAL
237-A3 5V3
-15-2 -2
L 237-A2 T1RM_PS REMAINING PAPER SENSOR/1
PS04
302-1 237-A1 SGND -16-1 -3

5V 237-B14 5V
S.G. 302-2
237-B15 P.GND 237-B11 T1_SET_P 800A-3-12
CONT 302-3
237-B16 FEEDM_CONT H 237-B1 5V3 -13-2
CLK 302-4
237-B17 FEEDM_CLK P -1-14
CW/CCW 302-5
237-B18 FEEDM_F/R L -2-13
LD 302-6
PAPER FEED MOTOR 237-B19 FEEDM_EM H 800A-4-11 815-1-6 808-1
M1
302-7 237-B10 5V3

TRAY1
H/L -5-10 815-2-5 -2

P.G. 302-8 307-4 H 237-B9 T1SIZE_S_PS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-1
PS05
302-9 307-3 -6-9 815-3-4 -3

237-B8 SGND
20 20
P.G.
302-10 307-2 -7-8 815-4-3 807-1
24V 237-B7 5V3
302-11 307-1 -8-7 815-5-2 -2
19 19
24V L 237-B6 T1SIZE_L_PS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/2-1

PS06
-9-6 815-6-1 -3
237-B5 SGND
-10-5 809-1
237-B4 3.3V2
-11-4 -2
VR1
* -12-3 -3
237-B2 AGND
362-1(MINI CT) 360-B12-B1
206-12 G_SIG_EX
121
SIG
-2 -B11-B2 *
12V 206-11 12V
120
-3 -B10-B3
LED(Dmax) 206-10 DMLED_CONT H
-4 -B9-B4 820B-1-16 834-1-13 821-1
119
DmaxMONI 206- 9 DM_MONI_EX 236-A16 5V3
-5 -B8-B5 -2-15 834-2-12 -2
118
TONER CONTROL LED(JAM) 206- 8 DJLED_CONT *H H 236-A15 T2PRE_PS PAPER FEED SENSOR/2
PS07
-6 -B7-B6 -3-14 834-3-11 -3

DmaxSIG 206- 7 DM_SIG_EX 236-A14 SGND
SENSOR BOARD -7 -B6-B7 * -4-13 834-4-10 823-1
GND 206- 6 A.GND 236-A13 5V3
-8 -B5-B8
TCSB
JAM SIG 206- 5 DRUM_JSIG_EX L 236-A12 T2UP_PS -5-12 834-5-9 -2

-9 -B4-B9 TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/2
PS08
LED( ) 206- 4 LED_CONT *H -6-11 834-6-8 -3

-10 -B3-B10 236-A11 SGND
Vref 206- 3 TNLED_REF -7-10 834-7-7 825-1
-11 -B2-B11 236-A10 5V3
TH+ 206- 2 TEMP * -8-9 834-8-6 -2
TH- -12 -B1-B12 H 236-A9 T2_0PS NO PAPER SENSOR/2
PS09
206- 1 3.3V2 * -9-8 834-9-5 -3

363-1-2 360-A1-A10 236-A8 SGND
206-13 MC24V_2 * 236-A3 5V3 -14-3 824-1
363-2-1 -A2-A9
SD1
SEPARATION CRAW SOLENOID 206-14 SPSD_DRV H L 236-A2 T2RM_PS -15-2 -2

PS10
-16-1 -3
236-A1 SGND
DRUM
366-1-2 -A3-A8
206-15 MC24V_2 820A-3-12
366-2-1 -A4-A7 236-B11 T2_SET_P
TONER RECYCLE CLUTCH 206-16 TRCMC_DRV
MC14
-13-2
236-B1 5V3
-1-14
364-1-2 -A5-A6 -2-13
TRAY2
PRE-CHARGING EXPOSURE 206-17 MC_24V2

364-2-1 -A6-A5 820A-4-11 835-1-6 828-1
PCL
LAMP 206-18 PCL CONT H 236-B10 5V3

-5-10 835-2-5 -2
365-1-2 H 236-B9 T2SIZE_S_PS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-2
PS11
-A7-A4 206-19 CHGM_B L -6-9 835-3-4 -3

365-2-1 236-B8 SGND
CHRGE CLEANING MOTOR -A8-A3
M14
206-20 CHGM_A L -7-8 835-4-3 827-1

-A9-A2 236-B7 5V3
L 236-B6 T2SIZE_L_PS -8-7 835-5-2 -2
-A10-A1 PAPER SIZE SENSOR/2-2
PS12
-9-6 835-6-1 -3
236-B5 SGND
-10-5 829-1
236-B4 3.3V2
-11-4 -2
VR2
* -12-3 -3
236-B2 AGND
332-1-6 330-1-9 236-B18 NC
210-1 TNSM24V
332-2-5 330-2-8
210-2 TNSM24V
332-3-4 330-3-7
210-3 TNSM_A
TONNER SUPPLY MOTOR 332-4-3 330-4-6 P 840B-1-16 854-1-13 841-1
M12
210-4 TNSM_AB 235-A16 5V3

332-5-2 330-5-5 P -2-15 854-2-12 -2
210-5 TNSM_B H 235-A15 T3PRE_PS
332-6-1 330-6-4 P PAPER FEED SENSOR/3
PS13
210-6 TNSM_BB 235-A14 S.GND -3-14 854-3-11 -3

P
235-A13 5V3 -4-13 854-4-10 843-1
TONOR LEVEL 333-3 330-7-3 L 235-A12 T3UP_PS -5-12 854-5-9 -2
210-7 S.GND TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/3
PS14
333-2 330-8-2 235-A11 SGND -6-11 854-6-8 -3

TLD
DETECTION SENSOR/R 210-8 TONER_SIG H

333-1 330-9-1 -7-10 854-7-7 845-1
210-9 T_SENSE_CONT L 235-A10 5V3
-8-9 854-8-6 -2
H 235-A9 T3_0PS NO PAPER SENSOR/3
PS15
235-A8 SGND -9-8 854-9-5 -3

TONER SUPPLY
235-A3 5V3 -14-3 844-1

L 235-A2 T3RM_PS -15-2 -2
PS16
235-A1 SGND -16-1 -3
324-3 94-1-15 95-1-15 235-B11 T3_SET_P 840A-3-12

213-1 S.GND -13-2
FRONT DOOR OPEN/CLOSE 324-2 94-2-14 95-2-14 235-B1 5V3
213-2 FDOORR_PS
TRAY3
-1-14
PS38
324-1 94-3-13 95-3-13

SENSOR /R 213-3 5V2 -2-13
235-B10 5V3 840A-4-11 855-1-6 848-1

311-3 94-4-12 95-4-12 -5-10 855-2-5 -2
24V 415-2 213-4 S.GND H 235-B9 T3SIZE_S_PS
PS17
403-1 24V FRONT DOOR OPEN/CLOSE 311-2 94-5-11 95-5-11 235-B8 SGND -6-9 855-3-4 -3 PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-3
24V 415-5 213-5 FDOORL_PS
403-2 24V
PS39
311-1 94-6-10 95-6-10 -7-8 855-4-3 847-1

A 415-1 SENSOR /L 213-6 5V2 235-B7 5V3
403-3 A P -8-7 855-5-2 -2
A 415-3 L 235-B6 T3SIZE_L_PS
M8
REVERSE EXIT MOTOR 403-4 /A P PAPER SIZE SENSOR/2-3

PS18
B 415-4 235-B5 SGND -9-6 855-6-1 -3

403-5 B P 325-3 94-7-9 95-7-9
B 415-6 213-7 S.GND -10-5 849-1
403-6 /B P TONNER SUPPLY DOOR 325-2 94-8-8 95-8-8 235-B4 3.3V2
213-8 TNDOOR_PS 235-B3 T3SIZE_VR -11-4 -2
PS40
325-1 94-9-7 95-9-7

VR3
24V 416-2 417-1-6 OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR 213-9 5V2 * 235-B2 AGND -12-3 -3 PAPER SIZE VR/3
403-7 24V
24V 416-5 417-2-5 235-B17 NC
403-8 24V
A 416-4 417-3-4
ADU REVERSE MOTOR 403-9 A P 235-A17 NC
A 416-6 417-4-3 341-1-4 94-10-6 95-10-6
M9
403-10 /A P 213-10 CLNFAN_D L 235-B16 NC

B 416-3 417-5-2 341-2-3 94-11-5 95-11-5
403-11 B P 213-11 CLFAN_EM L 235-B15 NC
B 416-1 417-6-1 CLEANER COOLING 341-3-2 94-12-4 95-12-4
FM5
403-12 /B P 213-12 CLFAN_HL L 235-B14 NC

FAN 341-4-1 94-13-3 95-13-3
213-13 P_GND
ONLY FOR OLD TYPE 203-A16 5V3 860B-1-16 874-1-13 861-1
432-1 -2-15 874-2-12 -2
404-6 5V2 254-1-2 94-14-2 95-14-2 H 203-A15 T4PRE_PS PAPER FEED SENSOR/4
PS19
432-2 213-14 MC24V_3 203-A14 SGND -3-14 874-3-11 -3

254-2-1 94-15-1 95-15-1
2
TC
ADU CONVEYANCE SENSOR/1 404-5 REV_PS H TOTAL COUNTER 213-15 TC_DRV

PS41
432-3 H 203-A13 5V3 -4-13 874-4-10 863-1

404-4 S_GND -5-12 874-5-9 -2
L 203-A12 T4UP_PS
TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/4
PS20
203-A11 SGND -6-11 874-6-8 -3

430-1
404-3 5V2 -7-10 874-7-7 865-1
PRCB 1/2
430-2 203-A10 5V3

PAPER REVERSE SENSOR 404-2 DECUR_PS H -8-9 874-8-6 -2
PS42
430-3 H 203-A9 T4_0PS NO PAPER SENSOR/4

404-1 S_GND
PS21
203-A8 SGND -9-8 874-9-5 -3

ADU DB 1/2
203-A3 5V3 -14-3 864-1

475-1 203-A2 T4RM_PS -15-2 -2
407-1 24V2 REMAINING PAPER SENSOR/4
PS22
REVERSE GATE SOLENOID 203-A1 SGND -16-1 -3

475-3
SD7
407-2 GATE_DR L
203-B11 T4_SET_P 860A- 3-12
203-B1 5V3 -13-2
- 1-14
- 2-13
860A- 4-11 875-1-6 868-1
203-B10 5V3
203-B9 T4SIZE_S_PS 860A- 4-11 875-1-6 868-1 PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-4
PS23
203-B8 SGND 860A- 4-11 875-1-6 868-1

- 9-6 875-6-1 -3
203-B7 5V3
- 9-6 875-6-1 -3 PAPER SIZE SENSOR/2-4
TRAY4 (JAPAN ONLY)
203-B6 T4SIZE_L_PS
PS24
- 9-6 875-6-1 -3
203-B5 SGND
-10-5 869-1
203-B4 3.3V2
-11-4 -2
VR4
* -12-3 -3
203-B2 AGND
203-B16 NC
203-B15 NC
203-B14 NC
2
303-1
5V 212-A1 5V
303-2
S.G. 212-A2 P.GND
427-1-2 303-3
405-1 MC24V CONT 212-A3 DEVM_CONT H
ADU CONVEYANCE CLUTCH 427-2-1 303-4
405-2 ADUCR_MC L CLK 212-A4 DEVM_CLK P
MC13
303-5
CW/CCW 212-A5 DEVM_CW/CCW H
APPENDIX
DEVELOPPING 303-6
LD 212-A6 DEVM_EM H
M3
303-7
426-1-2 MOTOR (H/L) 212-A7 DEVM_GAIN L
405-3 MC24V 303-8 313-4
ADU DECELERATION CLUTCH 426-2-1 P.G.
MC2
405-4 ADUDN_MC L 303-9 313-3
303-10 313-2
303-11 313-1
16 16 16 16
425-1 420-16-1
425-1 VIDEO 405-20 DEF_VIDEO
425-2 420-15-2 *
425-2 GND 405-19 GND 212-A8 SUCTFAN_D H
425-3 420-14-3 337-2-2
425-3 +5V 405-18 5V2 DEVELOPING SUCTION 212-A9 SFAN_EM L
420-13-4
FM4
425-4 -5V
425-4 405-17 -5V 337-3-1
PAPER MIS-CENTERING 425-5 420-12-5 FAN 212-A10 P.GND
425-5 GND 405-16 GND
SENSOR 425-6 420-11-6
P 301-1
425-6 SI 405-15 DEF_SI 5V 212-B1 5V
PS70
425-7 420-10-7 301-2
425-7 GND 405-14 GND S.G. 212-B2 P.GND
425-8 420-9-8 P 301-3
425-8 CLK 405-13 DEF_CLK CONT 212-B3 DRUM_CONT H
425-9 420-8-9 301-4 880-1-15 884-1
425-9 GLED 405-12 DEF_LED P CLK 212-B4 DRUM_CLK P 205-15 5V3 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
425-10 420-7-10 301-5 880-2-14 884-2
425-10 VLED 405-11 24V1 CW/CCW 212-B5 CW/CCW H L 205-14 T1PASS_PS
PS25
301-6 880-3-13 884-3 SENSOR/1

DRUM MOTOR LD 212-B6 DRUM_EM H 205-13 S.GND
M2
424-3 420-6-11 301-7
405-10 5V2 SGND 880-4-12 885-1
424-2 420-5-12 301-8 316-4 205-12 5V3
LEADING EDGE SENSOR 405-9 EDGE_PS H P.G. 880-5-11 885-2 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
PS43
424-1 420-4-13 301-9 316-3 L 205-11 T2PASS_PS
P.G.
PS26
405-8 S_GND
18 18
880-6-10 885-3 SENSOR/2
301-10 316-2 205-10 S.GND
423-1 420-3-14 24V
405-7 5V2
REGISTRATION
420-2-15 24V 301-11 316-1 880-7-9 886-1
17 17
423-2 205-9 5V3
REGISTRATION SENSOR 405-6 2ND_PS H 880-8-8 886-2 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
PS44
423-3 420-1-16 L 205-8 T3PASS_PS
405-5 S_GND
PS27
5V 331-1 334-11-1 880-9-7 886-3 SENSOR/3

212-B7 5V 205-7 S.GND
S.G. 331-2 334-10-2
212-B8 P.GND 880-10-6 887-1
CONT 331-3 334-9-3 205-6 5V3
212-B9 TONERM_CONT H 880-11-5 887-2 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
422-1-2 331-4 334-8-4
408-12 MC24V CLK 212-B10 TONERM_CLK P L 205-5 T4PASS_PS
PS28
REGISTRATION CLUTCH 422-2-1 331-5 334-7-5 880-12-4 887-3 SENSOR/4(JAPAN ONLY)

205-T4PASS
MC1
408-13 2ND_MC H CW/CCW 212-B11 TONERM_CW/CCW H
TONER BOTTLE LD 331-6 334-6-6 205-10 S.GND
212-B12 TONERM_EM L 880-13-3 888-1
M13
331-7 205-3 5V3
MOTOR SGND 880-14-2 888-2 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
5V 421-1 331-8 334-4-8 322-4 H 205-2 VF_DOOR_PS
408-11 +5V P.G.
PS29
880-15-1 888-3
S.G 421-2 331-9 334-3-9 322-3 205-1 S_GND DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
408-10 PGND P.G.
24 24
421-3 331-10 334-2-10 322-2
VERTICAL PAPER FEED
CONT 408-9 START/STOP H 24V

CLK 421-4 331-11 334-1-11 322-1
408-8 CLK 24V
23 23
P
CW/CCW 421-5
408-7 CW/CCW H
LD 421-6
408-6 LD L
M5
CONVEYANCE MOTOR 421-7
(H/L) 408-5 H/L H 50-A4-A1 55-1
P.G. 421-8 336-1 207- 9 5V2
408-4 PGND 227-B1 MAINFAN_D L 50-A3-A2 55-2
P.G. 421-9 336-2 H 207-10 FIXEXIT_PS FIXING EXIT SENSOR
408-3 PGND
PS30
421-10
MAIN BODY 227-B2 MAINFAN_EM L 50-A2-A3 55-3
24V 408-2 +24V 336-3 207-1 1 S_GND
FM1
COOLING FAN/1 227-B3 MAINFAN_HL_20 L 50-A1-A4
24V 421-11 336-4 207-1 2 S_GND
408-1 +24V
227-B4 P.GND
338-1-4 51-A1-A10
WRITTING SECTION 227-B5 WRFAN1_D L 207- 8 S_GND
338-2-3 51-A10-A1
461-1-3 227-B6 WRFAN1_EM L 207- 1 FIX_SET_N
402-B13 SUC_FAN H 338-3-2
FM2
CONVEYANCE COOLING FAN 227-B7 WRFAN_HL L 51-A2-A9 52-1 FIXING TEMPERTURE
ADU DB 2/2
338-4-1 207- 7 TH1+ TH1
461-2-2 227-B8 P-GND 51-A3-A8 52-2 SENSOR/1
FM3
SUCTION FAN 461-3-1
402-B14 SUC_EM L * 207- 6 TH1-
402-B15 P_GND 304-1 *
FIXING
5V 227-B9 5V 51-A4-A7 53-1 FIXING TEMPERTURE

304-2 207- 5 TH2+ TH2
S.G. 227-B10 P.GND * 51-A5-A6 53-3 SENSOR/2
462-1-2 460-4-4 304-3 207- 4 TH2-
TRNSFER/SEPARATION 402-B16 SEP_CLR_M B L CONT 227-B11 MAINM_CONT H *
462-2-1 460-5-3 CLK 304-4
51-A6-A5
M10
402-B17 SEP_CLR_M A L 227-B12 MAINM_CLK P 207- 3 TH3+
CLEANING MOTOR CW/CCW 304-5
227-B13 MAINM_F/R L 51-A7-A4
2
LD 304-6
* 207- 2 TH3-
FIXING MOTOR 227-B14 MAINM_EM H
M4
TRNSFER 463-1-2 460-6-2 S.G. 304-7 *
402-B18 MC24V
463-2-1 460-7-1 304-8 314-4
TSL
SYNCHRONIZATION 402-B19 TSL_DR H P.G.
P.G. 304-9 314-3
14 14
402-B20 NC
LAMP 24V 304-10 314-2
439-1-2 460-3-5 414- 1 NC 24V 304-11 314-1 890-A1-12 899-1-9 897-1
13 13
HTR3 214-A12 5VA
439-2-1 460-2-6 414- 2 NC 890-A2-11 899-2-8 897-2
214-A11 BPSIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/BP
VR5
DRUM HEATER 414- 3 NC * 890-A3-10 899-3-7 897-3

214-A10 AGND
(OPTION) ADU F/G 414- 4 NC
890-A4-9 899-4-6 896-1
PAPER CONVEYANCE
414- 5 NC 350-1 214-A9 5V3
188-7-1 890-A5-8 899-5-5 896-2
414- 6 NC -2 189-1 211-7 24V1 L 214-A8 BPSIZE_S_PS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-BP
188-6-2
PS31
-3 -2 211-6 P.GND 890-A6-7 899-6-4 896-3

PRCB 2/2
414- 7 NC 188-5-3 214-A7 SGND

414- 8 NC -4 -3 211-5 POLM_CONT H
188-4-4 890-A7-6 899-7-3 895-1
POLYGON -5 -4 211-4 POLM_CLK P 214-A6 5V3
188-3-5 890-A8-5 899-8-2 895-2
M15
-6 -5 211-3 POLM_LOCK H L 214-A5 BPSIZE_L_PS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/2-BP
PMDB
413- 1 NC 899-9-1
PS32
MOTOR 188-4-6:TEST
214-A4 SGND 890-A9-4 895-3
413- 2 NC -7 -6 211-2 N.C.
188-3-7:TEST
413- 3 NC -8 -7 211-1 N.C. 890-B1-12 893-1
-9 214-B12 5V3
413- 4 NC 890-B2-11 893-2
-10 L 214-B11 BP_0PS NO PAPER SENSOR/BP
PS33
413- 5 NC 890-B3-10 893-3

214-B10 SGND
413- 6 NC
453-3-1 436-1-3 318-2 890-B4-9 892-1
406- 1 ADU FAN/1 H 24V 215-1 24V 214-B9 5V3
ADU REVERSE 890-B5-8 892-2 TRAY UPPLY LIMIT
BY-PASS
453-2-2 436-2-2 24V 318-5 L 214-B8 BPUP_PS

406- 2 ADUFAN_EM/1 L 215-2 24V
PS34
890-B6-7 892-3
FM10
MOTOR COOLING 453-1-3 436-3-1 A 318-1 214-B7 SGND SENSOR/BP
406- 3 P_GND LOOP ROLLER MOTOR 215-3 A P
318-3
M6
FAN A 215-4 /A P 890-B7-6 891-1

B 318-4 214-B6 5V3
450-1 451-3-1 215-5 B P 890-B8-5 891-2 TRAY LOWER LIMIT
402-A20 5V2 B 318-6 H 214-B5 BPDN_PS
PS35
ADU PAPER 450-2 451-2-2 215-6 /B P

214-B4 SGND 890-B9-4 891-3
SENSOR/BP
402-A19 ADJAM_PS H
PS45
402-A18 S_GND 890-B10-3 894-1
SENSOR 24V 305-2 315-1-6 214-B3 5V3
230-1 24V 890-B11-2 894-2
24V 305-5 315-2-5 L 214-B2 LOOP_PS LOOP SENSOR
PS36
452-1 230-2 24V 890-B12-1 894-3

402-A17 5V2 A 305-4 315-3-4 214-B1 S.GND
REVERSE/EXIT 452-2 230-3 A P
402-A16 ADURV_PS H PAPER EXIT MOTOR 305-6 315-4-3
M7
PS46
452-3 230-4 /A P
SENSOR 402-A15 S_GND B 305-3 315-5-2
230-5 B P
B 305-1 315-6-1
230-6 /B P
453-1
402-A14 5V2
ADU HANDLE 453-2
L 699- 4 699-A5
402-A13 HD_PS 35- 1 MC24V_3
PS47
SENSOR 453-3 699- 2 699-A1 321- 1
402-A12 S_GND 35- 2 KEYC_SET H
35
447-12-1 24V/2
2
402-B1 IO_DRXD 699- 1 699-A2

35-3 S-GND 321- 2 CN322-1 DEVELOPING BIAS
C(K)
36
447-11-2 24V/2
ADU
402-B2 IO_DCLK 699- 3 699-A6 321- 3
(OPTION)
454-1 35- 4 KEYC_DRV H

37
447-10-3 PGND
FT44
ADU PAPER 402-A11 5V2 402-B3 ADU_LATCH 321- 4

35-5 P-GND
KEY COUNTER
454-2
38
447-9-4 ***-** ***-** PGND

402-A10 ADUCR_PS H P 402-B4 IO_UCLK 321- 5
PS48
CONVEYANCE 454-3 447-8-5 36-1 CVM1_SIG NC
402-A9 S_GND 402-B5 IO_UREQ ***-** ***-** 321- 6
P 447-7-6 36-2 CVFEED_SIG PGND
SENSOR/2 P 402-B6 IO_UTXD ***-** ***-** 321- 7
447-6-7 36-3 CV_SIZE0 24V/1
455-1 402-B7 IO_UACK1 ***-** ***-**
36-4 CV_SIZE1
FT45
ADU 402-A8 5V2 447-5-8

455-2 402-B8 ERR_OUT1 ***-** ***-** 320-1
402-A7 ADUDN_PS H 447-4-9 36-5 CV_SIZE2 H 227-A14 C.CONT C.CONT CHARGER
PS49
FT48
DECELERATION 455-3 ***-** ***-**

CV
402-A6 S_GND 402-B9 GND 36-6 CV_SIZE3 320-2

447-3-10 ***-** ***-** L 227-A13 EM(C).SIG EM(C).SIG
SENSOR 402-B10 2NDM_CLK 320-3
(OPTION)
447-2-11 36-7 CVDUP_SIG H 227-A12 TGR.CONT TGR.CONT TONER GUIDE ROLLER

402-B11 REG_PS ***-** ***-** 320-4
COIN VENDOR
456-1 447-1-12 36-8 CPF0 H 227-A11 T.CONT T.CONT

HV
402-A5 5V2 ***-** ***-**

TGR
ADU H 402-B12 S_GND 36-9 CPF1 320-5

456-2 ***-** ***-**
H 227-A10 S.CONT S.CONT
402-A4 ADUEXIT_PS 320-6
PS50
PRE-REGISTRATION 456-3 36-10 P-GND H 227-A9 GP.CONT GP.CONT
402-A3 S_GND 320-7
FT47
SENSOR L 227-A8 EM(T).SIG EM(T).SIG

37-8 NC 320-8
457-1-2
L 227-A7 EM(S).SIG EM(S).SIG CN323-1
402-A1 MC24V 37-1 NC 320-9
ADU LOCK 457-2-1 227-A6 SGND
320-10
SGND GUID PLATE
SD9
402-A2 LOCK_SD L 37-2 NC
FT47
SOLENOID H 227-A5 B.CONT B.CONT

37-3 NC 320-11
227-A4 5V2 5V2
37-4 NC 320-12
P 227-A3 TXD TXD TRANSFER
37-5 NC 320-13
FT50
P 227-A2 CLK CLK

37-6 NC 320-14
P 227-A1 LATCH LATCH
37-7 NC
202-A10 S_GND SEPARATION
CN400-7 -5V
CN400-2 12V
443-12-1
CN400-4 5V/2
202-A18 S_GND
CN400-1 24V/1
217-12 IO_DTXD P
CN400-6 SGND
CN400-5 SGND
CN401-2 PGND
443-11-2
CN400-3 P_GND
CN401-1 24V-INT
90
217-11 IO_DCLK P 202-A18 S_GND

443-10-3
91
217-10 ADU_LATCH P 202-A10 S_GND

443-9-4
121
92
217- 9 IO_UCLK 202-A18 S_GND

443-8-5
120
93
217- 8 REQ1 202-A8 S_GND

443-7-6
94
119
217- 7 IO_URXD 202-A7 /CTS1
443-6-7
95
217- 6 ACK1 202-A6 /RTS1
118
443-5-8
96
217- 5 ERR_OUT1 L 202-A5 /DSR1

443-4-9
97
217- 4 S.GND P 202-A4 /DTR1

443-3-10
98
217- 3 2NDM_CLK P 202-A3 ERR_R

443-2-11
99
217- 2 REG_PS 202-A2 S_GND

443-1-12
217-1 S-GND 202-A1 S_GND
100
445-9
445-8
445-7
445-6
445-5
445-4
445-3
445-2
445-1
446-2
446-1
202-B11 /PVV
101
202-B10 /TONVV
102
202-B9 /B_VV
103
202-B8 /SVV
104
89-2
89-1
202-B7 BPSIZE_VR_0
105
202-B6 EE_VV
106
202-B5 RESET
107
202-B4 RES_CONT
108
202-B3 S.GND
109
202-B2 DDF_VV
110
72-1
72-2
71-1
202-B1 S_GND
111
71-2
344-9-1 310-3
71-3
202-1 S__GND
344-8-2 310-2
71-4
H 229- 2 MAINEXIT_PS PAPER EXIT SENSOR

PS37
344-7-3 310-1
71-5
A
229- 3 5V
71-6
B
344-4-6 342-1-3
229- 4 P.GND
71-7
751-5 88-5 344-5-5 342-2-2

L 229- 5 FIXFAN3_EM
FM6
344-6-4 342-3-1
PAPER EXIT FAN/F
751-6 88-6 L 229- 6 FIXFAN_D
(1)
EXIT
750-1-10 344-1-9 343-1-3

219-1 IO_DTXD 229- 7 P.GND
750-2-9 344-2-8 343-2-2
219-2 5V2 L 229- 8 FIXFAN2_EM PAPER EXIT FAN/R
FM7
Crimp
750-3-8 344-3-7 343-3-1

219-3 IO_DCLK L 229- 9 FIXFAN_D
750-4-7 219-4 S-GND
750-5-6 219-5 LCT_LATCH
750-6-5 219-6 IO_UCLK
750-7-4 219-7 ERR_OUT4
229-10 P.GND 345-1-3
[Symbol]
750-8-3 219-8 IO_URXD MAIN COOLING

345-2-2
L Low level
750-9-2 L 229-11 FIXFAN1_EM

H High level
FM8
Connector
219-9 ACK4 345-3-1 FAN/2

750-10-1 L 229-12 FIXFAN_D

50-1
P Pulse signal
219-10 REQ4
58-2-1
(OPTION)
229-13 MC24V_2
58-1-2 WEB SOLENOID
SD2
H 229-14 WEBSD_DRV
Relay connector
LT-402/LT-412
Faston
751-4 88-4
751-1 88-1
218-4 SIN
751-3 88-3
218-6 RTS
218-3 CTS
218-1 SOUT
218-2 SGND
218-5 S-GND
751-2 88-2
(OPTION)
CB
255-1-6
255-2-5
255-3-4
255-4-3
255-5-2
255-6-1
324-1 MTXD
Example)
324-2 SGND
(4) Signal flow
324-3 MCTS
FS-110/FS-210
SGND
PS1
5VDC
324-4 MRXD
324-5 SGND
324-6 MRTS 85-1
50
CN1-1 24V2
85-2
49
CN1-2 5V2
85-3
48
CN1-3 SG
85-4
47
CN1-4 PG
signal flow
85-5
Direction of
CN1-5 PG
46
85-6
CN1-6 FG
45
112
44
113
43

42
PS1
41
40
114
115
116
117
4
AC100V
H 216-10 FIXHT1_CONT
AC120/127V
90-2
90-1
H 216-9 FIXHT2_CONT
810-2-1 814-4-10 800B-7-10
PAPER FEED 203-A7 T1FEEDMC_DRV H 216-8 FIXHT3_CONT
220 240V : INLET

810-1-2 814-3-11 -6-11
POWER PLUG
POWER PLUG
POWER PLUG
H
MC3
CLUTCH/1 203-A6 MC24V_1 216-7 MAINRL_CONT
APPENDIX
216-6 PSFAN_CONT-17
811-2-1 814-2-12 -5-12 216-5 PSFAN_EM
PRE-REGISTRATION 203-A5 T1PREMC_DRV H
LT1000
811-1-2 814-1-13 -4-13 216-4 S.GND
203-A4 MC24V_1
MC4
CLUTCH/1 216-3 REM/2
TRAY1
216-2 REM/3
FT36
FT35
F/G
216-1 AC_OFF
F/G
800A-14-1
25
CN200-1 24V/3
830-2-1 834-4-10 820B-7-10 203-B7 T2FEEDMC_DRV H CN200-2 24V/1
PAPER FEED
830-1-2 834-3-11 -6-11 CN200-3 12V/2
203-B6 MC24V_1
MC5
CLUTCH/2 CN200-4 5V/2
G/Y
G/Y
831-2-1 834-2-12 -5-12 CN200-5 5V/2
FT2
FT1
PRE-REGISTRATION 203-B5 T2PREMC_DRV H CN200-6 S.GND
LT1500
831-1-2 834-1-13 -4-13
203-B4 MC24V_1
MC6
CLUTCH/2 CN200-7 S.GND
FT2
FT2
FT1
FT1
CN200-8 S.GND
TRAY2
CN200-9 S.GND
F/G
F/G
820A-14-1
27
CN201-1 24V_INT
CBR2
CBR1
28
CN201-2 S.GND
FT4
FT3
850-2-1 854-4-10 840B-7-10
X1
PAPER FEED 204-A7 T3FEEDMC_DRV H CN209-2 LP_CONT
850-1-2 854-3-11 -6-11
X2
204-A6 MC24V_1 CN209-1 5V3
MC7
CLUTCH/3
851-2-1 854-2-12 -5-12 204-A5 T3PREMC_DRV
PRE-REGISTRATION H
851-1-2 854-1-13 -4-13
204-A4 MC24V_1
MC8
CLUTCH/3 P 208-16 SCAN_CLK 610-1 SCAN_CLK
FT6
FT5
[2] 7255/7272 Overall Wiring Diagram
TRAY3
L 208-15 SCAN_FR 610-2 SCAN_FR
F/G
F/G
P 208-14 SCAN_MGN 610-3 SCAN_MGN (ENBL)
SNSOR
840A-14-1
NF
HUMIDITY
10-2
10-1
7-2
7-1
FT8
FT7
P 208-11 SCAN_CUR3 610-6 SCAN_CUR3 612-A1 S.GND

870-2-1 874-4-10 860B-7-10 P 208-10 MODE1 610-7 MODE1 612-A2 SIZE_PS_L
PAPER FEED 204-B7 T4FEEDMC_DRV H EUROPE ONLY
FT8
870-1-2 874-3-11 -6-11 P 208-9 MODE2 610-8 MODE2 612-A3 5V
614-A8 24V4
614-A7 24V4
614-A6 24V4
614-A5 24V4
204-B6 MC24V_1
MC9
CLUTCH/4 208-8 MODE3 610-9 MODE3 612-A4 S.GND
614-A4 P. GND
FT10
H
FT9
SCANNER I/F
614-B1 DF_M2_A
614-A9 DF_M2_B
614-A3 DF_M1_A
614-A2 DF_M1_A
208-7 EXP_CONT 610-10 EXP_CONT 612-A5 SIZE_PS_S
614-B11 DF_M1_B
614-B10 DF_M1_B
614-A11 DF_M2_A
614-A10 DF_M2_B
871-2-1 874-2-12 -5-12 H
PRE-REGISTRATION 204-B5 T4PREMC_DRV H 612-A6 5V
208-6 SCANFAN_CONT-18 610-11 SCANFAN_CONT-18
614-B6 DF_CL_DRIVE
871-1-2 874-1-13 -4-13
TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMER
614-B9 DF_SD1_DRIVE
614-B8 DF_SD3_DRIVE
614-B7 DF_SD2_DRIVE
614-A1 DF_FAN_DRIVE
204-B4 MC24V_1
MC10
6-4
6-1
9-4
9-1
CLUTCH/4 208-5 SCANFAN_EM 610-12 SCANFAN_EM L 612-A7 S.GND
614-B2 DF_24V_OUT (CL)

COIL2
614-B5 DF_24V_OUT (SD3)

614-B4 DF_24V_OUT (SD2)
614-B3 DF_24V_OUT (SD1)
TRAY4
208-4 SCANHP_PS 610-13 SCANHP_PS L 612-A8 RES_PS (SIDE1)
ACDB
F/G
208-3 SCN_DET 610-14 SCN_DET (S.GND) 612-A9 5V
F/G
FT12
FT11
860A-14-1 208-2 S.GND 610-15 S.G 612-A10 S.GND

208-1 APS_TIMING 610-16 APS_TIMING 612-A11 RES_PS (SIDE2) EUROPE ONLY
JAPAN ONLY
612-A12 5V
8-2
8-1
18-1 5V3
612-A13 S.GND
17-2 AC_IN
91-1 234-A20 DF_M1_CLK 611-A1 DF_M1_CLK

HTR1
17-1 AC_OUT
612-A14 READ_PS
18-2 LP_CONT
91-2 234-A19 DF_M1_F/R 611-A2 DF_M1_F/R

611-A3 DF_M1_EN 612-A15 5V
HEATER/1 234-A18 DF_M1_EN
612-B1 S.GND
DF-322
92-1 234-A17 DF_M1_M1 611-A4 DF_M1_M1
HTR2 611-A5 DF_M1_M2 612-B2 SKEW_PS_F
92-2 234-A16 DF_M1_M2
611-A6 DF_M1_I1 612-B3 5V
234-A15 DF_M1_I1
DF_M1=FEED M
x1
x2
HEATER/2 234-A14 DF_M1_I2 611-A7 DF_M1_I2 612-B4 S.GND

611-A8 DF_M2_CLK 612-B5 SKEW_PS_R
812-2 234-A13 DF_M2_CLK
237-B1 T1RISEM_D H 612-B6 5V
812-1 234-A12 DF_M2_F/R 611-A9 DF_M2_F/R 5-2 5(16)-2
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/1 237-B2 T1RISEM_24V H 612-B7 S.GND
M16
234-A11 DF_M2_EN 611-A10 DF_M2_EN 5(16)-1
5-1
COIL
612-B8 LAST_PS
ONLY
611-A11 DF_M2_M1
COIL1
832-2 234-A10 DF_M2_M1

EUROPE
237-B3 T2RISEM_D H 612-B9 5V

832-1 234-A9 DF_M2_M2 611-A12 DF_M2_M2
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/2 237-B4 T2RISEM_24V H 612-B10 S.GND
M17
234-A8 DF_M2_I1 611-A13 DF_M2_I1
DF_M2=FEED M
611-A14 DF_M2_I2 612-B11 ORG_SET_PS
852-2 234-A7 DF_M2_I2
237-B5 T3RISEM_D
FT37
H 612-B12 5V
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/3 852-1 234-A6 DF_M2_MOI 611-A15 DF_M2_MOI
237-B6 T3RISEM_24V H 612-B13 S.GND
50-2
611-A16 DF_FAN_CONT
50-1
234-A5 DF_FAN_OCNT
612-B14 EXIT_PS
SW1
872-2 234-A4 DF_REVSD_CONT 611-A17 DF_SD1_CONT

SWITCH
237-B7 T4RISEM_D H 612-B15 5V

234-A3 DF_SEPSD_CONT 611-A18 DF_SD2_CONT
FT38
872-1
MAIN POWER
51-1
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/4 237-B8 T4RISEM_24V H
M18 M19
F/G
611-A20 DF_M1_RETURN 613-1 FAN_LD

234-A1 DF_M1_RETURN
611-B1 DF_M2_RETURN 613-2 3.3V (SIZE_VR)
881-1-2
234-B20 DF_M2_RETURN
SCDB
613-3 SIZE_ANA
51-2
DF I/F
VERTICL CONVEYANCE 237-B9 MC24V_2 234-B19 DF_CL_CONT 611-B2 DF_CL_CONT
881-2-1 613-4 A.GND
237-B10 VFMC1_DRV H 234-B18 SIZE_PS_L 611-B3 SIZE_PS_L
1-4 N.C.
CLUTCH /1 613-5 S.GND

234-B17 SIZE_PS_S 611-B4 SIZE_PS_S
882-1-2
1-6 ACIN (L)
1-5 ACIN (L)
1-1 ACIN (L)
1-3 ACIN (L)
1-2 ACIN (L)
FT63
FT17
237-B11 MC24V_2 611-B5 RES_PS (SIZE1) 613-6 ADF_OPEN_PS

VERTICL CONVEYANCE 234-B16 REG_PS (SIZD1) 96-1
882-2-1 613-7 5V
FEED
MRL
PAPER
237-B12 VFMC2_DRV 234-B15 REG_PS (SIDE2) 611-B6 RES_PS (SIZE2) 96-2
MC11 MC12
TS2
CLUTCH /2
SW3
237-B13 NC
FT15
H 234-B14 READ_PS 611-B7 READ_PS
VERTICAL
TS1
615-1 24V2
FIXING UNIT
234-B13 SKEW_PS_F 611-B8 SKEW_PS_F

FT64
FT13
FT14
615-2 I/L_24V2
110 C
HEATER SWITCH
MAIN
234-B12 SKEW_PS_R 611-B9 SKEW_PS_R

180 C
RELAY
THARMOSTAT/D

890A-1-12
THARMOSTAT/U
FT16
214-A1 NC 234-B10 SET_PS 611-B11 ORG_SET_PS

898-1-2 890A-2-11
214-A2 BPUDM_A H 234-B9 EXIT_PS 611-B12 EXIT_PS
FT18
UP/DOWN MOTOR/BP 898-2-1 890A-3-10

234-B8 COVER_PS 611-B13 COVER_OPEN_PS
BY-
214-A3 BPUDM_B
M20
H 600-5 24V1
PASS
234-B7 ADF_OPEN_PS 611-B14 ADF_OPEN_PS 600-6 24V1
234-B6 FAN_LD 611-B15 FAN_LD 600-7 24V1 3-1 JH_DRIVE
234-B5 RESET_OUT 611-B16 RESET_OUT 600-1 5V2
FT22
FT19
302-1 234-B4 S.GND 611-B17 S.GND 600-2 5V2 3-2 JH1_DRIVE

5V 235-11 5V
302-2 234-B3 3.3V 611-B18 3.3V 600-3 S.G
S.G. 235-10 S.GND
302-3 234-B2 SIZE_ANA 611-B19 SIZE_ANA 600-4 S.G
FT28
FT24
FT26
CONT 235-9 FEEDM_CONT H

302-4 234-B1 S.GND 611-B20 A.GND 600-8 P.G
CLK 235-8 FEEDM_CLK H
302-5 235-7 FEEDM_F/R H 600-9 P.G
CW/CCW
HEATER RELAY
302-6 600-10 L.PG

5
6
PAPER FEED MOTOR LD 235-6 FEEDM_EM H
M1
302-7 905-1 (Xe_LAMP)
L4
L3
L2
H/L 235-5 FEEDM_HL 237-A13 5V3

302-8 307-4 -2
P.G.
yance
*
set PS
307-3 L 237-A12 HFSET_PS
302-9 -3
20 20
P.G. 237-A11 S.GND
302-10 307-2 904-1-6 907-1
24V
302-11 307-1 237-A10 5V3
904-2-5 -2
19 19
24V
FT27
FT25
FT29
PS/L
yance
H 237-A9 HFPS_L
904-3-4 -3
H
H
H
237-A8 S.GND
904-4-3 906-1
FT20
FT23
FT21
237-A7 5V3
904-5-2 -2
PS/R
yance
H 237-A6 HFPS_R P 620-2 V
P 620-1 U
904-6-1 -3 P 620-3 W
624-3 5V
625-4 NC
L 623-5 EM
237-A5 S.GND
624-15 5V
623-1 24V
L 624-14 SIG
624-8 APS.2
624-5 APS.1
H 623-2 CONT
625-1 S.GND
624-9 S.GND
624-6 S.GND
624-1 S.GND
623-6 P.GND
903-1-2
624-11 APS.3
624-12 S.GND
624-13 S.GND
624-7 APS_5V
624-4 APS_5V
237-A4 24V3
H 623-4 24V DRV
624-2 APS_TIM
55-1 50-A1-A4
624-10 APS_5V
L 623-3 LAMP.PG
903-2-1
yance
MC/L
H 625-5 APS.3_SIG
H 625-6 APS.2_SIG
H 625-7 APS.1_SIG
207-11 5V2
625-2 APS_CONT
H 237-A3 HFMC_L
L 625-3 COVER_SIG
FIXING EXIT 55-2 50-A2-A3
51-3
50-3
51-4
UNIT
207-12 FIXEXIT_PS
55-3 50-A3-A2 902-1-2
PS30
SENSOR 207-13 S.GND
Horizontal conveyance
50-A4-A1
237-A2 24V3
LOWER
902-2-1
207-14 S.GND H 237-A1 HFMC_R
PS11 PS05 PS06 MC15 MC16

yance
MC/R
conve- conve- conve- conve- conve-
Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
51-A10-A1
51-A1-A10
207-10 S.GND
207-1 FIX_SET_N 800B-1-16 814-1-13 801-1
639-1-3
639-2-2
639-3-1
203-A16 5V3
-2-15 814-2-12 -2 PAPER FEED
52-2-1 51-A9-A2 H 203-A15 T1PRE_PS
FIXING TEMPERTURE TS1 207-9 TH1+ -3-14 814-3-11 -3
F/G
52-1-2 51-A8-A3 * 203-A14 S.GND SENSOR/1

SENSOR/1 207-8 TH1- -4-13 814-4-10 803-1
* 631-1-3
631-2-2
631-3-1
203-A13 5V3
637-4
637-3
637-2
637-1
-5-12 814-5-9 -2 TRAY UPPER
UPPER UNIT
L 203-A12 T1UP_PS
FIXING UNIT
53-3-1 51-A7-A4
2-1 L_DRIVE
2-3 L3 DRIVE
-6-11 814-6-8 -3
2-2 L2_DRIVE
FIXING TEMPERTURE
4-3 L1_CONT'
TS2 207-7 TH2+
636-1
636-2
636-3
635-1
635-2
635-3
634-1
634-2
634-3
633-1
633-2
633-3
632-1
632-2
632-3
4-1 L1_DRIVE'
4-2 LP_DRIVE'
53-1-3 51-A6-A5 * 203-A11 S.GND LIMIT SENSOR/1

SENSOR/2 207-6 TH2- -7-10 814-7-7 805-1
* 203-A10 5V3
51-A5-A6 -8-9 814-8-6 -2 NO PAPER
207-5 S.GND H 203-A9 T1_0PS
51-A4-A7 -9-8 814-9-5 -3
F/G
207-4 203-A8 S.GND SENSOR/1

TRC3
51-A3-A8
630-3
630-2
630-1
-14-3 804-1
207-3 S.GND 203-A3 5V3
L1_CONT
FT (PS) 32
TRAY1 (LT1500)
51-A2-A9 -15-2 -2 REMAINING
207-2 L 203-A2 T1RM_PS
-16-1 -3
PS01 PS02 PS03 PS04

203-A1 S.GND PAPER SENSOR/1
TRC2
800A-3-12
FT (PS) 31
L1_DRIVE
235-2 T1_SET_P
362-1 (MINI CT) 360-B12-B1 -13-2
PS63 APS SENSOR/1
L1 INVB
PS64 APS SENSOR/2
PS65 APS SENSOR/3

SIG 206-12 G_SIG_EX 235-1 5V3
TRC1
-1-14 FT (PS) 30
M11 SCANNER MOTOR
-2 -B11-B2 *
12V
2-4:LV
2-1:HV
206-11 12V -2-13 LP_DRIVE

-3 -B10-B3
LED (Dmax) 206-10 DMLED_CONT H
PS51 APS TIMING SENSOR
-4 -B9-B4 -4-11 15-1 FIXHT1_CONT LAMP

Dmax MONI
PS61 SCANNER HP SENSOR
206-9 DM_MONI_EX 15-2 FIXHT2_CONT LAMP

FM9 SCANNER COOLING FAN
-5 -B8-B5
DRUM
LED (JAM) 206-8 DJLED_CONT
*H 15-3 FIXHT3_CONT LAMP
TONER CONTROL -6 -B7-B6 820B-1-16 834-1-13 821-1
Dmax SIG
SCANNER
206-7 DM_SIG_EX 203-B16 5V3 15-4 MAINRL_CONT

SENSOR BOARD -7 -B6-B7 -2-15 834-2-12 -2 PAPER FEED
GND 206-6 S.GND
* H 203-B15 T2PRE_PS 15-5 PSFAN_CONT-17
L1
-8 -3-14 834-3-11 -3
EXPOSURE
-B5-B8 SENSOR/2
LAMP
JAM SIG 206-5 DRUM_JSIG_EX 203-B14 S.GND 15-6 PSFAN_EM
TCSB
-9 -B4-B9 -4-13 834-4-10 823-1
LED ( ) 206-4 LED_CONT
*H 203-B13 5V3 15-7 S.GND
-10 -B3-B10 -5-12 834-5-9 -2 TRAY UPPER
Vref 206-3 TNLED_REF L 203-B12 T2UP_PS 15-8 5V1
-11 -B2-B11 -6-11 834-6-8 -3
TH+ 206-2 TEMP
* 203-B11 S.GND LIMIT SENSOR/2 15-9 S.GND
TH- -12 -B1-B12
206-1 3.3V2
* -7-10 834-7-7 825-1 15-10 REM/2 (24V1/12V2/5V2/-5V)
363-1-2 360-A1-A10 203-B10 5V3
206-13 MC24V_2 * -8-9 834-8-6 -2 NO PAPER 15-11 REM/3 (24V/2)
SEPARATION CRAW 363-2-1 -A2-A9 H 203-B9 T2_0PS 40-1
206-14 SPSD_DRV H -9-8 834-9-5 -3 SENSOR/2 15-12 MRL_TEST24V
SD1
203-B8 S.GND 40-2
SOLENOID -14-3 824-1 15-13 MRL_TEST_CONT
366-1-2 203-B3 5V3
-A3-A8 -15-2 -2 REMAINING 15-14 AC_OFF
TRAY2 (LT1000)
TONER RECYCLE 206-15 MC24V_2 L 203-B2 T2RM_PS
366-2-1 -A4-A7 -16-1 -3
PS07 PS08 PS09 PS10

206-16 TRCMC_DRV H PAPER SENSOR/2
MC14
203-B1 S.GND
CLUTCH
820A-3-12
235-4 T2_SET_P
PRE-CHARGING 364-1-2 -A5-A6 -13-2
206-17 MC24V_2 235-3 5V3
364-2-1 -A6-A5 -1-14
EXPOSURE LAMP 12-1 24V1 PRCB
PCL
206-18 PCL_CONT H
-2-13
12-4 12V2 PRCB
365-1-2 -A7-A4 -4-11
206-19 CHGM_B L 12-9 5V2 PRCB
CHRGE CLEANING 365-2-1 -A8-A3 12-10 5V2 PRCB
M14
206-20 CHGM_A L
MOTOR -A9-A2 840B-1-16 854-1-13 841-1 12-15 S.GND PRCB
204-A16 5V3
PRCB
-A10-A1 -2-15 854-2-12 -2 PAPER FEED 12-16 S.GND PRCB

H 204-A15 T3PRE_PS
-3-14 854-3-11 -3 SENSOR/3 12-17 S.GND PRCB
204-A14 S.GND
-4-13 854-4-10 843-1 12-18 P.GND PRCB
204-A13 5V3
-5-12 854-5-9 -2 TRAY UPPER
TRAY3
L 204-A12 T3UP_PS
-6-11 854-6-8 -3 LIMIT SENSOR/3
332-1-6 330-1-11 204-A11 S.GND
210-1 TNSM24V -7-10 854-7-7 845-1 13-1 24V1 SCDB
332-2-5 330-2-10 210-2 TNSM24V 204-A10 5V3 13-2 24V1 SCDB
-8-9 854-8-6 -2 NO PAPER
332-3-4 330-3-9 H 204-A9 T3_0PS 13-3 24V1 DF
TONNER SUPPLY 210-3 TNSM_A P -9-8 854-9-5 -3 SENSOR/3
332-4-3 330-4-8 204-A8 S.GND 13-6 5V2 SCDB
210-4 TNSM_AB
M12
MOTOR P -14-3 844-1
332-5-2 330-5-7 204-A3 5V3 13-7 5V2 DF
210-5 TNSM_B P -15-2 -2 REMAINING
332-6-1 330-6-6 L 204-A2 T3RM_PS 13-10 S.GND SCDB
210-6 TNSM_BB P -16-1 -3
PS13 PS14 PS15 PS16
204-A1 S.GND PAPER SENSOR/3 13-11 S.GND DF

SCDB/DF
333-3 330-7-5 840A-3-12 13-14 P.GND SCDB

TONOR LEVEL 210-7 S.GND 236-A11 T3_SET_P
333-2 330-8-4 -13-2 13-15 P.GND SCDB
DETECTION 210-8 TONER_SIG H 236-A1 5V3
-1-14 13-16 P.GND DF
TLD
333-1 330-9-3
137-4 IN
SENSOR/R 210-9 T_SENSE_CONT L -2-13
TONER SUPPLY
137-7 S.GND
840A-4-11 855-1-6 848-1

236-A10 5V3
137-3 APS.3_SIG
137-2 APS.2_SIG
137-1 APS.1_SIG
137-6 APS_CONT
-5-10 855-2-5 -2
137-5 COVER_SIG
H 236-A9 T3SIZE_S_PS
PAPER SIZE
-6-9 855-3-4 -3 SENSOR/1-3
324-3 94-1-15 95-1-15 236-A8 S.GND
FRONT DOOR 213-1 S.GND -7-8 855-4-3 847-1
324-2 94-2-14 95-2-14 236-A7 5V3
OPEN/CLOSE 213-2 FDOORR_PS L -8-7 855-5-2 -2 PAPER SIZE
324-1 94-3-13 95-3-13 236-A6 T3SIZE_L_PS
PS38
213-3 5V2 L
SENSOR /R -9-6 855-6-1 -3 SENSOR/2-3
236-A5 S.GND 187-1-5
-10-5 849-1 L CN132-5 5V 51-1
236-A4 3.3V2 -2-4
311-3 94-4-12 95-4-12 -11-4 -2 CN132-4 S.GND 51-2
FRONT DOOR 213-4 S.GND 236-A3 T3SIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/3 -3-3
P CN132-3 IND 51-3
PS17 PS18 VR3
311-2 94-5-11 95-5-11 * -12-3 -3 -4-2

OPEN/CLOSE 213-5 FDOORL_PS L 236-A2 S.GND CN132-2 S.GND 51-4 L 31-1 FAN1
311-1 94-6-10 95-6-10 -5-1
PS39
SENSOR /L 213-6 5V2 CN132-1 INDPR 51-5 L 31-2 FAN2
INDX SB
PRCB
860B-1-16 874-1-13 861-1
WRITING
204-B16 5V3 31-3 FAN3

325-3 94-7-9 95-7-9 -2-15 874-2-12 -2 PAPER FEED
213-7 S.GND H 204-B15 T4PRE_PS 185-A12-1
TONNER SUPPLY DOOR 325-2 94-8-8 95-8-8 -3-14 874-3-11 -3
213-8 TNDOOR_PS L 204-B14 S.GND SENSOR/4 CN130-A1 ENB 180-A12
325-1 94-9-7 95-9-7 185-A11-2
PS40
OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR 213-9 5V2 -4-13 874-4-10 863-1 P -A2 ALM1 180-A11
204-B13 5V3 185-A10-3
-5-12 874-5-9 -2 -A3 S/HB1 180-A10
FM11
TRAY UPPER P
TRAY4
L 204-B12 T4UP_PS 185-A9-4 78-1

-6-11 874-6-8 -3 LIMIT SENSOR/4 -A4 S/H1 180-A9 12-7 5V2 OB
204-B11 S.GND 185-A8-5 78-2
24V 415-2 341-1-4 94-10-6 95-10-6 -7-10 874-7-7 865-1 H -A5 GND 180-A8 12-8 5V2 OB
403-1 24V 213-10 CLNFAN_D L 204-B10 5V3 185-A7-6 78-3
24V 415-5 CLEANER 341-2-3 94-11-5 95-11-5 -8-9 874-8-6 -2 NO PAPER -A6 LD+5V 180-A7 12-13 S.GND OB
OB
403-2 24V 213-11 CLFAN_EM L H 204-B9 T4_0PS 185-A6-7 78-4

A 415-1 COOLING 341-3-2 94-12-4 95-12-4 -9-8 874-9-5 -3 -A7 LD+5V 180-A6 12-14 S.GND OB
403-3 A P 213-12 CLFAN_HL L SENSOR/4 185-A5-8 78-5
FM5
REVERSE EXIT A 415-3 341-4-1 94-13-3 95-13-3
204-B8 S.GND -A8 LPR5V 180-A5 12-22 24V1 OB
M8
403-4 /A P FAN 213-13 S.GND -14-3 864-1 185-A4-9
MOTOR B 415-4 204-B3 5V3 P -A9 GND 180-A4
403-5 B P -15-2 -2 REMAINING 185-A3-10 14-1 12V2 ICB
B 415-6 L 204-B2 T4RM_PS P -A10 -VIDEO2 180-A3
403-6 /B P -16-1 -3 185-A2-11
PS19 PS20 PS21 PS22
204-B1 S.GND PAPER SENSOR/4 -A11 +VIDEO2 180-A2 14-2 5V2 ICB
185-A1-12
ICB
254-1-2 94-14-2 95-14-2 213-14 MC24V_3 14-3 S.GND ICB

LDB
24V 416-2 417-1-6 860A-3-12 -A12 GND 180-A1

403-7 24V TOTAL COUNTER 254-2-1 94-15-1 95-15-1 236-B11 T4_SET_P 185-B12-1
TC
24V 213-15 TC_DRV H -13-2 P CN130-B1 LOAD 180-B12 14-4 S.GND ICB
416-5 417-2-5
403-8 24V 236-B1 5V3 185-B11-2
A 416-4 417-3-4 -1-14 P -B2 DACLK 180-B11 11-1 5V1 ICB
ADU REVERSE 403-9 A P 303-1 313-7-1 185-B10-3
A 416-6 417-4-3 5V 212-A7 5V -2-13 H -B3 DI 180-B10 11-2 5V1 ICB
M9
403-10 /A P 303-2 313-6-2 185-B9-4
MOTOR B 416-3 417-5-2 S.G. 212-A6 S.GND 860A-4-11 875-1-6 868-1 -B4 GND 180-B9 11-3 5V1 IP
403-11 B P 303-3 313-5-3 236-B10 5V3 185-B8-5
B 416-1 417-6-1 CONT 212-A5 DEVM_CONT H -5-10 875-2-5 -2 -B5 ALM2 180-B8 11-4 5V1 IP
403-12 /B P 303-4 313-4-4 H 236-B9 T4SIZE_S_PS
PAPER SIZE 185-B7-6
CLK 212-A4 DEVM_CLK P P -B6 S/HB2 180-B7
ICB
303-5 313-3-5 -6-9 875-3-4 -3 SENSOR/1-4 185-B6-7 11-5 5V1 HDD

CW/CCW 212-A3 DEVM_CW/CCW H 236-B8 S.GND H -B7 S/H2 180-B6
DEVELOPPING 303-6 313-2-6 -7-8 875-4-3 867-1 185-B5-8 11-6 12V1 IP
LD 212-A2 DEVM_EM H 236-B7 5V3 -B8 ALMRST 180-B5 11-7 12V1 HDD
M3
MOTOR 303-7 313-1-7 -8-7 875-5-2 -2 PAPER SIZE 185-B4-9
(H/L) 212-A1 DEVM_GAIN L L 236-B6 T4SIZE_L_PS P -B9 GND 180-B4 11-8 S.GND ICB
303-8 -9-6 875-6-1 -3 185-B3-10
PS23 PS24
430-1 404-3 5V2 P.G. 236-B5 S.GND SENSOR/2-4 P -B10 -VIDEO1 180-B3 11-9 S.GND ICB
PAPER REVERSE 303-9 212-A8 DVFAN_D -10-5 869-1 185-B2-11
16 16
430-2 404-2 DECUR_PS H P.G. 236-B4 3.3V2 P -B11 +VIDEO1 180-B2 11-10 S.GND IP
303-10 212-A9 DVFAN_EM -11-4 -2 185-B1-12
SENSOR 430-3 24V
PS42
404-1 S.GND 212-A10 DVFAN_HL 236-B3 T4SIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/4 -B12 GND 180-B1 11-11 S.GND IP
303-11 -12-3 -3
VR4
15 15
24V * 236-B2 S.GND 11-12 S.GND IP

212-A11 S.GND
11-13 S.GND HDD
337-1-3
PRCB
407-1 24V2 212-A8 DVFAN_D H 11-14 S.GND HDD

337-2-2 CN103-1 5V2
ADUDB
REVERSE GATE SOLENOID DEVELOPING SUCTION 212-A9 DVFAN_EM L
SD7
407-2 GATE_DR L
25
337-3-1 CN103-2 12V2
FM4
FAN 212-A10 S.GND
25
880 -1-18 884-1 CN103-3 GND

427-1-2 370-1-3 205-18 5V3 VERTICAL CN103-4 GND
405-1 MC24V 212-A11 BINF_D H 880 -2-17 884-2
ADU CONVEYANCE CLUTCH 427-2-1 370-2-2 L 205-17 T1PASS_PS CONVEYANCE
405-2 ADUCR_MC L 880 -3-16 884-3 83-1 93-1
MC13
DEVELOPER COOLING 212-A12 BINFF_EM L
PS25
205-16 S.GND 13-5 24V1 FNS 21-1 24V2

370-3-1 SENSOR/1 83-2 93-2
FM12
FAN 212-A13 GND 13-9 5V2 FNS 21-2 24V2
880 -4-15 885-1 VERTICAL
426-1-2 212-A14 NC 205-15 5V3 13-13 S.GND FNS 21-3 P.GND
405-3 MC24V 880 -5-14 885-2
FNS
ADU DECELERATION CLUTCH 426-2-1 301-1 316-7-1 L 205-14 T2PASS_PS CONVEYANCE 155-1 X2_CONT Y1CONT 13-18 P.GND FNS 21-4 P.GND
405-4 ADUDN_MC L 5V
MC2
212-B7 5V 880 -6-13 885-3
PS26
301-2 316-6-2 205-13 S.GND SENSOR/2 155-2 Y2_CONT X1CONT

S.G. 212-B6 S.GND
VERTICAL
301-3 316-5-3 880 -7-12 886-1 164-A13-1 155-3 X1_CONT Y2CONT

CONT H
FT40
212-B5 DRUM_CONT 205-12 5V3 VERTICAL P 140-1 S_OUT2 150-1 S_IN2

301-4 316-4-4 880 -8-11 886-2 164-A12-2 155-4 Y1_CONT X2CONT 12-3 24V1 ADUDB
PAKB
CLK 212-B4 DRUM_CLK P L 205-11 T3PASS_PS 140-2 S_IN2 150-2 S_OUT2 P

CONVEYANCE
88-1A
425-1 420-16-1 301-5 316-3-5

88-2A
880 -9-10 886-3 164-A11-3 12-5 12V2 ADUDB

PAPER FEED
425-1 VIDEO 405-20 DEF_VIDEO CW/CCW 212-B3 CW/CCW H

PS27
205-10 S.GND P 140-3 /RTS2 150-3 CTS

425-2 420-15-2 * 301-6 316-2-6 SENSOR/3 164-A10-4 12-6 5V2 ADUDB
425-2 GND 405-19 GND DRUM MOTOR LD 212-B2 DRUM_EM H 140-4 /CTS2 150-4 RTS P
M2
MS1
425-3 420-14-3 301-7 316-1-7 880 -10-9 887-1

MS/R
425-3 +5V 405-18 5V2 S.GND 212-B1 NC 205-9 5V3 164-A9-5 150-5 DSR 154-14 LCD_ADJ 12-11 -5V1 ADUDB
425-4 420-13-4 880 -11-8 887-2 P 140-5 /DTR2 P
88-1B
301-8 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE

88-2B
164-A8-6 154-13 24V 12-20 P.GND ADUDB

ADUDB
PAPER 425-4 -5V 405-17 -5V P.G. L 205-8 T4PASS_PS 140-6 /DSR2 150-6 DTR
INTER LOCK
425-5 420-12-5 301-9 880 -12-7 887-3 164-A7-7 154-12 LCD_D3

PS28
SENSOR/4 12-12 S.GND ADUDB

18 18
425-5 GND 405-16 GND P.G. 205-7 S.GND 140-7 SHUT 150-7 SHUT
MIS-CENTERING 425-6 420-11-6 301-10 164-A6-8 154-11 LCD_D2 12-21 P.GND ADUDB
PS70
425-6 SI 405-15 DEF_SI P 24V 880 -13-6 888-1 140-8 SW_SIG 150-8 SW_SIG
SENSOR 425-7 420-10-7 301-11 205-6 5V3 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE 164-A5-9 154-10 LCD_D1
17 17
425-7 GND 405-14 GND 24V 880 -14-5 888-2 140-9 WT_LED_ON 150-9 WT_LED_ON
425-8 420-9-8 H 205-5 VF_DRBPS DOOR OPEN/CLOSE 164-A4-10 154-9 LCD_D0
425-8 CLK 405-13 DEF_CLK P 880 -15-4 888-3 140-10 SHUT_LED _ON 150-10 SHUT_LED_ON
PS29
425-9 420-8-9 331-1 334-11-1 322-7-1 205-4 S.GND 154-8 24V

425-9 GLED 405-12 DEF_LED P SENSOR 140-11 5V1 164-A3-11 150-11 5V1
425-10 420-7-10 5V 212-B14 5V
425-10 VLED 405-11 24V1 331-2 334-10-2 322-6-2 880 -16-3 889-1 164-A2-12 154-7 GND 88-1
S.G. 212-B13 S.GND 205-3 5V3 150-12 S.GND 13-4 24V1 LCT
322-5-3 VERTICAL 164-A1-13
FT41
331-3 334-9-3
H 880 -17-2 889-2 150-13 SW_SIG 154-6 5V 88-2
420-6-11 CONT 212-B12 TONERM_CONT 13-8 5V2 LCT
LCD
424-1 331-4 334-8-4 322-4-4 H 205-2 VF_DRTPS CONVEYANCE DOOR 154-5 CP 88-3
LCT
405-10 S.GND CLK 212-B11 TONERM_CLK P 880 -18-1 889-3

PS12
13-12 S.GND LCT

88-2A
88-1A
424-2 420-5-12 322-3-5 205-1 S.GND OPEN/CLOSE PS/U

LEADING EDGE SENSOR 405-9 EDGE_PS H 331-5 334-7-5 154-4 LP 88-4
424-3 420-4-13 CW/CCW 212-B10 TONERM_CW/CCW H 13-17 P.GND LCT
PS43
405-8 5V2 331-6 334-6-6 322-2-6 164-B14-1 154-3 FLM
ADU DB TONER BOTTLE
MS2
LD 212-B9 TONERM_EM L
MS/L
136-1 LCD_D3 151-1 LCD_D3

M13
423-1 420-3-14 331-7 334-5-7 322-1-7 164-B13-2 154-2 NC

405-7 5V2 MOTOR S.GND 212-B8 NC 890 -A1-12 899 -1-9 897-1 136-2 LCD_D2 151-2 LCD_ D2
88-2B
88-1B
423-2 420-2-15 331-8 334-4-8 214-A12 5VA 164-B12-3 154-1 DSP_OFF

INTER LOCK
P.G. 890 -A2-11 899 -2-8 897-2 136-3 LCD_D1 151-3 LCD_D1 12-2 24V1 HV
REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION SENSOR 405-6 2ND_PS H 214-A11 BPSIZE_VR 164-B11-4
423-3 420-1-16 331-9 334-3-9 PAPER SIZE VR/BP
PS44
890 -A3-10 899 -3-7 897-3 12-19 P.GND HV
OB1
P.G.
VR5
136-4 LCD_D0 151-4 LCD_DO

HV
405-5 S.GND * 214-A10 S.GND 164-B10-5

331-10 334-2-10
24V 136-5 GND 151-5 GND
422-2-1 331-11 334-1-11 890 -A4-9 899 -4-6 896-1 164-B9-6
410-13 2ND_MC H
24 24 23 23
24V 214-A9 5V3 136-6 CP 151-6 CP

REGISTRATION CLUTCH 422-1-2 890 -A5-8 899 -5-5 896-2 164-B8-7
410-12 MC24V
MC1
L 214-A8 BPSIZE_S_PS PAPER SIZE 136-7 GND 151-7 GND
890 -A6-7 899 -6-4 896-3 164-B7-8
PS31
214-A7 S.GND 136-8 LP 151-8 LP

BY-PASS
SENSOR/1-BP 164-B6-9
421-1 136-9 GND 151-9 GND
5V 410-11 +5V2 890 -A7-6 899 -7-3 895-1 164-B5-10
421-2 214-A6 5V3 136-10 FLM 151-10 FLM
S.G 410-10 P.GND 890 -A8-5 899 -8-2 895-2 164-B4-11
165-6 NC
166-2 NC
421-3 L 214-A5 BPSIZE_L_PS PAPER SIZE 136-11 GND 151-11 GND

166-1 HV1
899 -9-1
166-4 GND
CONT 410-9 START/STOP H 890 -A9-4 895-3 164-B3-12

PS32
421-4 214-A4 S.GND 136-12 DSP_OFF 151-12 DSP_OFF

CLK 410-8 CLK P SENSOR/2-BP 164-B2-13
421-5 890 -B1-12 893-1 136-13 5V2 151-13 5V2
CW/CCW 410-7 CW_CCW (GND) H 336-1 164-B1-14
CONVEYANCE 421-6 227-B4 MAINFAN_D L 214-B12 5V3 136-14 5V2 151-14 5V2
LD 410-6 LD L 336-2 890 -B2-11 893-2
M5
421-7 MAIN BODY 227-B3 MAINFAN_EM L L 214-B11 BP_0PS NO PAPER SENSOR/BP
MOTOR (H/L) 405-5 H/L H 336-3 890 -B3-10 893-3 153-1 PWM 165-1 PWM
PS33
227-B2 MAINFAN_HL_20 L 214-B10 S.GND

FM1
421-8
93-6
93-5
93-3
COOLING FAN/1
162-1-2
162-2-1
P.G. 405-4 P.GND 336-4 153-2 GND 165-2 GND

421-9 227-B1 S.GND 890 -B4-9 892-1
P.G. 405-3 P.GND 214-B9 5V3 153-3 5V 165-3 5V
421-10 304-1 314-7-1 890 -B5-8 892-2 TRAY UPPLY LIMIT
24V 405-2 +24V 5V 227-B11 5V 214-B8 BPUP_PS
OB INVB
421-11 304-2 314-6-2 L

890 -B6-7 892-3
PS34
24V 405-1 +24V S.G. 227-B10 S.GND 214-B7 S.GND SENSOR/BP

304-3 314-5-3
CONT 227-B9 MAINM_CONT H
304-4 314-4-4 890 -B7-6 891-1
CLK 227-B8 MAINM_CLK P 214-B6 5V3
CN152-2 5V2
SW2
CN152-1 24V1
304-5 314-3-5 890 -B8-5 891-2 TRAY LOWER LIMIT

CN152-4 S.GND
CN152-3 S.GND
214-B5 BPDN_PS
82-2
82-1
83-3
CW/CCW 227-B7 MAINM_F/R L H

304-6 314-2-6 890 -B9-4 891-3
PS35
FIXING MOTOR LD 227-B6 MAINM_EM H 214-B4 S.GND SENSOR/BP

M4
304-7 314-1-7
H/L 227-B5 MAINM_HL 890 -B10-3 894-1
304-8 214-B3 5V3
P.G. 890 -B11-2 894-2
414-1 S.GND 304-9 L 214-B2 LOOP_PS LOOP SENSOR
14 14
P.G. 890 -B12-1 894-3

PS36
414-2 F_TXD 304-10 214-B1 S.GND

24V
467-3-4 414-3 F_RXD 304-11
13 13
464-1 24V
SWITCH
406-3 5V2 163-4-1

TRANSFER/ 464-2 467-2-5 414-4 F_RESET
406-2 HP_PS_F H 163-3-2
SEPARATION PS/F PS52 464-3 467-1-6 414-5 5V
406-1 S.GND 163-2-3
SUB POWER
414-6 VPP
163-1-4
465-1 467-6-1 414-7 MD 350-1
406-6 5V2 188-7-1 202-A13 S_IN1 135-A1 S_OUT1
TRANSFER/ 465-2 467-5-2 414-8 S.GND -2 351-1 211-7 24V1
406-5 HP_PS_R H 188-6-2 202-A12 GND 135-A2 S.GND
SEPARATION PS/R 465-3 467-4-3 -3 -2 211-6 GND
PS53
406-4 S.GND 202-A11 S_OUT1 135-A3 S_IN1

413-1 5V 188-5-3
-4 -3 211-5 POLM_CONT H
413-2 CLK 188-4-4 202-A10 GND 135-A4 S.GND
POLYGON -5 -4 211-4 POLM_CLK P
413-3 RXD 188-3-5 202-A9 /CTS1 135-A5 /RTS1
-6 H
M15
-5 211-3 POLM_LOCK
PMDB
TRNSFER MOTOR 202-A8 /RTS1 135-A6 /CTS1

24
24
23
23
463-1-2 460-6-2 413-4 TXD 188-2-6:TEST 106-1 FOR IP

408-6 MC24V -7 -6 211-2 N.C. 202-A7 /DSR1 135-A7 /DTR1
SYNCHRONIZATION 463-2-1 460-7-1 413-5 S.GND 188-1-7:TEST 106-2
408-7 TSL_DR -8 -7 211-1 N.C.
TSL
H 202-A6 /DTR1 135-A8 /DSR1

413-6 S.GND 106-3
PARALLEL
LAN I/F
LAMP -9
202-A5 SHUTDOWN 135-A9 ERR_R 106-4
462-1-2 460-4-4 -10 202-A4 GND 135-A10 S.GND
MOTOR
TRANSFER/ 408-4 SEP_CLR_M B L

462-2-1 460-5-3 202-A3 GND 135-A11 S.GND
408-5 SEP_CLR_M A L 24V 318-2
M10
SEPARATION 215-1 24V2 202-A2 (24VRL_CNT) 135-A12 (24VRL_CNT)

CLEANING MOTOR 24V 318-5
469-1 460-2-6 215-2 24V2 202-A1 (SC_MEM) 135-A13 (SC_MEM)
A 318-1
TONER BOTTLE
HTR2
HD-105
469-2 460-3-5 215-3 A P 202-B13 /PVV 135-B1 PVV

LOOP ROLLER MOTOR A 318-3
(OPTION)
M6
215-4 /A P 202-B12 /TONVV 135-B2 TONVV

B 318-4
215-5 B P 202-B11 /B_VV 135-B3 B_VV
B 318-6
215-6 /B P 202-B10 /SVV 135-B4 S_VV
460-1-7
202-B9 BPSIZE_VR_0 135-B5 T_SIG
24V 305-2 315-1-6
PAPER
135-B6 EE_VV
H2
230-1 24V2 202-B8 EE_VV

24V 305-5 315-2-5 135-B7 RESET
202-B7 RESET
H1
230-2 24V2
A 305-4 315-3-4 135-B8 AC_OFF
ICB
461-1-3 230-3 A P 202-B6 AC_OFF

408-1 ASUC_FAN H A 305-6 315-4-3
M7
CONVEYANCE 461-2-2 PAPER EXIT MOTOR 230-4 /A P 202-B5 SW_SIG 135-B9 SW_SIG
408-2 ASUC_EM L B 305-3 315-5-2
202-B4 DDF_VV 135-B10 DDF_VV
461-3-1 230-5 B P
FM3
SUCTION FAN
IP-511
408-3 P.GND B 305-1 315-6-1

Type-A
230-6 /B P 202-B3 GND 135-B11 S.GND

CONVEYANCE
HDD I/F
(OPTION)
202-B2 REM/2 135-B12 REM/2

(OPTION)
699-4 135-B13 REM/3

35-1 MC24V_3 202-B1 REM/3
699-2
35-2 KEYC_SET H
699-1
435-3-1 436-6-1 35-3 GND
C(K)
ADU REVERSE 402-A18 P.GND 699-3

435-2-2 436-5-2 35-4 KEYC_DRV H
(OPTION)
MOTOR COOLING 402-A17 ADUFANEM L

435-1-3 436-4-3 35-5 GND
FM10
KEY COUNTER
402-A16 ADUCFAN_D H
ADU
FAN
24V2
PGND
***-** ***-**
CN113
CN113
CN112
CN112
450-1 436-3-4
36-1 CVM1_SIG
ADU PAPER 402-A15 5V2 ***-** ***-**
450-2 436-2-5
36-2 CVFEED_SIG CN110-1 GND CN170-50 GND
402-A14 ADUREV_PS H ***-** ***-**
36-3 CV_SIZE0 CN110-2 AD_TG1 CN170-49 AD_TG1
PS45
402-A13 S.GND ***-** ***-** 344-9-1 310-3

SENSOR 36-4 CV_SIZE1 CN110-3 TGOUT CN170-48 TGOUT
***-** ***-** 229-1 GND PAPER EXIT
36-5 CV_SIZE2 344-8-2 310-2 CN110-4 AD_CLMP1 CN170-47 AD_CLMP1
H 229-2 MAINEXIT_PS
24V2
***-** ***-**
PGND
CV
402-B18 NC 36-6 CV_SIZE3 344-7-3 310-1

PS37
452-1 229-3 5V SENSOR CN110-5 AD_ACLMP1 CN170-46 AD_ACLMP1

***-** ***-**
EXIT
402-B17 5V2
(OPTION)
REVERSE/EXIT 36-7 CVDUP_SIG CN110-6 PRD_KEEP CN170-45 PRD_KEEP

452-2 H ***-** ***-** 344-6-4 342-3-1
COIN VENDOR
402-B16 REV_PS 36-8 CPF0 L 229-4 FIXFAN_D CN110-7 GND CN170-44 GND
SENSOR 452-3 342-2-2
PS46
402-B15 S.GND ***-** ***-**

36-9 CPF1 229-5 FIXFAN3_EM
344-5-5 PAPER EXIT
L CN110-8 +LCK CN170-43 +LCK
342-1-3
FM6
***-** ***-** 229-6 GND 344-4-6 FAN/F

36-10 GND CN110-9 -LCK CN170-42 -LCK
453-1 CN110-10 GND CN170-41 GND
ADU HANDLE 402-B14 5V ***-** ***-** 344-3-7 343-3-1
453-2
402-B13 HD_PS L 37-1 OP_SOUT L 229-7 FIXFAN_D CN110-11 -RCK CN170-40 -RCK
***-** ***-** 343-2-2
DIMM
SENSOR 453-3 37-2 OP_DTR 344-2-8 PAPER EXIT

PS47
402-B12 S.GND ***-** ***-** L 229-8 FIXFAN2_EM CN110-12 +RCK CN170-39 +RCK
MU-402
MU-401
343-1-3
FM7
37-3 OP_CTS 344-1-9 FAN/R

28
27
229-9 GND CN110-13 GND CN170-38 GND

(OPTION)
***-** ***-**
37-4 OP_SIN CN110-14 GND CN170-37 GND
ADU PAPER 454-1 ***-** ***-**
402-B11 5V2 37-5 OP_DSR CN110-15 +TCK CN170-36 +TCK
454-2 ***-** ***-** 345-3-1
(OPTION)
New CV
CONVEYANCE 402-B10 ADUCR_PS H 37-6 OP_RTS CN110-16 -TCK CN170-35 -TCK

PRCB
454-3 ***-** ***-** L 229-10 FIXFAN_D

PS48
402-B9.S.GND 37-7 GND 345-2-2 MAIN COOLING

SENSOR/2 ***-** ***-** L 229-11 FIXFAN1_EM CN110-17 GND CN170-34 GND
345-1-3
FM8
NEW COIN VENDOR
37-8 5V2 229-12 GND FAN/2 CN110-18 GND CN170-33 GND

ADU 455-1 447-12-1 433-12-1 CN110-19 SCLK CN170-32 SCLK
402-B8 5V2 402-A1 IO_DRXD 217-12 IO_DTXD P 338-4-1
ADB
455-2 447-11-2 433-11-2 CN110-20 SEN CN170-31 SEN

DECELERATION 402-B7 ADUDN_PS H 402-A2 IO_DCLK 217-11 IO_DCLK P L 229-13 WRFAN_D 338-3-2
455-3
PS49
402-B6 S.GND 447-10-3 433-10-3 L 229-14 WRFAN_EM WRITTING SECTION CN110-21 SDI CN170-30 SDI
SENSOR 402-A3 ADU_LATCH 217-10 ADU_LATCH P 338-2-3
B
A
38
37
36
35
14
14
13
13
447-9-4 433-9-4 CN110-22 SDO CN170-29 SDO

FM2
H 229-15 WRFAN_HL
18
18
17
17
20
20
19
19
16
16
15
15
P 402-A4 IO_UCLK 217-9 IO_UCLK 338-1-4 COOLING FAN

447-8-5 433-8-5 229-16 S.GND CN110-23 GND CN170-28 GND
ADU 456-1 402-B5 5V2 P 402-A5 UREQ 217-8 REQ1
447-7-6 433-7-6 CN110-24 -AD_D0 CN170-27 -AD_D0
HV
456-2 402-B4 ADUEX_PS P 402-A6 IO_UTXD 217-7 IO_URXD 58-2-1

PRE-REGISTRATION H 447-6-7 433-6-7 229-17 MC24V_2 CN110-25 +AD_D0 CN170-26 +AD_D0
456-3
PS50
402-B3 S.GND 402-A7 UACK1 217-6 ACK1 58-1-2 WEB SOLENOID

447-5-8 433-5-8
ADUDB
SENSOR 229-18 WEBSD_DRV CN110-26 GND CN170-25 GND

SD2
402-A8 ERR_OUT1 217-5 ERR_OUT1 L H

447-4-9 433-4-9 CN110-27 -AD_D1 CN170-24 -AD_D1
457-2-1 402-A9 GND 217-4 GND P
447-3-10 433-3-10
MB
ADU LOCK 402-B2 LOCK_SD L 217-3 2NDM_CLK P CN110-28 +AD_D1 CN170-23 +AD_D1
457-1-2 402-A10 2NDM_CLK
447-2-11 433-2-11
DRUM MOTOR
CN110-29 GND CN170-22 GND

SD9
402-B1 MC24V
FIXING MOTOR
SOLENOID 402-A11 REG_PS 217-2 REG_PS

447-1-12 433-1-12 CN110-30 -AD_D2 CN170-21 -AD_D2
H 402-A12 S.GND 217-1 GND
CN110-31 +AD_D2 CN170-20 +AD_D2
PAPER FEED MOTOR
DEVELOPING MOTOR
CN110-32 GND CN170-19 GND

CN110-33 -LVDSCLK0 CN170-18 -LVDSCLK0
MEMORY BOARD
CN110-34 +LVDSCLK0 CN170-17 +LVDSCLK0

13x-1 VBUS
13x-2 D- CN110-35 GND CN170-16 GND
321-1 CN322-1
ISW
35
USB
24V/2 13x-3 D+ CN110-36 ADRST CN170-15 ADRST

321-2 13x-4 GND
36
24V/2 DEVELOPING CN110-37 APR CN170-14 APR

CONECTOR
CN400-8 -5V
CN400-3 12V
CN400-5 5V/2
321-3 BIAS
CN400-2 24V/1
CN400-1 24V/3
37
P.GND FT44 CN110-38 LVDS_PWDN CN170-13 LVDS_PWDN

CN400-7 S.GND
CN400-6 S.GND
CN400-4 P.GND
CN401-2 P.GND
CN401-1 24V-INT
321-4
38
P.GND CN110-39 GND CN170-12 GND

321-5 134-A1 HCLK
NC CN110-40 +5V CN170-11 +5V
H2
H1
321-6 FT45 134-A2 DFD0

P.GND 134-A3 DFD1 CN110-41 +5V CN170-10 +5V
321-7 134-A4 DFD2
24V/1 CN110-42 +5V CN170-9 +5V
134-A5 DFD3
134-A6 DFD4 CN110-43 +5V CN170-8 +5V
320-1
227-A14 C.CONT C.CONT 134-A7 DFD5 CN110-44 +5V CN170-7 +5V
CHARGER
320-2 134-A8 DFD6

227-A13 EM (C).SIG EM (C).SIG FT46 CN110-45 +5V CN170-6 +5V
445-3-8
445-4-7
445-5-6
445-6-5
445-7-4
445-8-3
445-9-2
445-2-9
320-3 134-A9 DFD7

445-10-1
445-1-10
227-A12 TGR.CONT TGR.CONT 134-A10 PCLK CN110-46 GND CN170-5 GND

446-2
446-1
320-4
TGR
227-A11 T.CONT T.CONT 134-B1 PBUSY CN110-47 +12V CN170-4 +12V

HV
320-5 TONER GUIDE 134-B2 ADREQ

227-A10 S.CONT S.CONT CN110-48 +12V CN170-3 +12V
320-6 ROLLER 134-B3 XFLAG
227-A9 GP.CONT GP.CONT CN110-49 +12V CN170-2 +12V
FOR ISW 36PINS
320-7 134-B4 HBUSY

227-A8 EM (T).SIG EM (T).SIG CN323-1 134-B5 DAVIL CN110-50 GND CN170-1 GND
320-8 134-B6 /INT
227-A7 EM (S).SIG EM (S).SIG
320-9 134-B7 AC1284
S.GND
ANPHENOL CONECTOR
227-A6 S.GND 134-B8 GND

MODEL
320-10
227-A5 B.CONT B.CONT GUID PLATE 134-B9 GND
320-11 FT47 134-B10 GND
227-A4 5V2 5V2
89-1-2
89-2-1
320-12 CN110-B1 TG
227-A3 TXD TXD
320-13 -B2 CLAMP
227-A2 CLK CLK
7155/7165/7255/7272
320-14 FT48 TRANSFER -B3 ACLAMP

227-A1 LATCH LATCH
-B4 BCLAMP
10-2
10-1
139-9 RI
100-4 SG
100-3 SG
104-2 5V1
104-1 5V1
100-2 5V1
100-1 5V1
LAN I/F
139-8 CTS
139-7 RTS
139-3 TXD
139-4 DTR
104-3 12V1
139-6 DSR
139-2 RXD
SEPARATION
139-1 DCD
71-1-8
71-2-7
71-3-6
71-4-5
71-5-4
71-6-3
71-7-2
71-8-1
72-2
72-1
105-3 S.GND
105-1 S.GND
105-2 S.GND
FOR KRDS
139-5 S.GND
25
A
MANUAL
(1)
SERVICE MANUAL
Crimp
MODEM
(OPTION)
RS232C I/F
750-1-10
219-1 IO_DTXD
750-2-9
[Symbol]
219-2 5V2
L Low level
750-3-8
H High level
4
Connector
FS-111/SF-101
FS-110/FS-210
219-3 IO_DCLK
750-4-7
50-1
P Pulse signal
219-4 GND 255-6-1 85-1

750-5-6 218-1 SOUT 324-1 MTXD CN1-1 24V2
219-5 LCT_LATCH 255-5-2 85-2

750-6-5 218-2 GND 324-2 S.GND CN1-2 5V2
219-6 IO_UCLK 255-4-3 85-3
750-7-4 218-3 CTS 324-3 MCTS CN1-3 S.GND
219-7 ERR_OUT4 255-3-4 85-4
750-8-3 218-4 SIN 324-4 MRXD CN1-4 P.GND
219-8 IO_URXD 255-2-5 85-5
750-9-2
REVISED REVISION
218-5 GND 324-5 S.GND CN1-5 P.GND

Relay connector
219-9 ACK4 255-1-6 85-6

750-10-1
219-10 REQ4 218-6 RTS 324-6 MRTS CN1-6 P.GND

(OPTION)
Faston
751-1
239-1 24V/1 24V/3

751-2
DATE
239-2 5V2
LT-402/LT-412
751-3
Dec. 2003
239-3 GND
751-4
239-4 GND
751-5 88-1
751-6 88-2
A-2
PAGE
CB
Example)
(4) Signal flow
SGND
PS1
5VDC
ADDITION
METHOD
signal flow
Direction of
PS1
4
29
30
AC100V
31
AC120/127V
32
33
220 240V : INLET
POWER PLUG
POWER PLUG
POWER PLUG
34
APPENDIX
35
36
37
38
39

Konica 7155 - 7165 - 7255 - 7272-SM PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Konica 7155 - 7165 - 7255 - 7272-SM PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS U.S.A., INC.

Changes may have been made to this equipment to

Corporate Publications Department

© 2004, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS U.S.A. , INC.

IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 1. OUTLINE

MODEL MANUAL REVISED EDITION DATE PAGE METHOD

[6] M10 (Transfer/Separation Cleaning) ADU.......................................................................2-N-1

[3] M3 (Developing) Control........................ 2-G-2 [6] ADU Paper Conveyance/Feed

[4] Developing Bias Control........................ 2-G-3 Control..................................................2-N-13

MODEL MANUAL REVISED EDITION DATE PAGE METHOD

MODEL MANUAL REVISED EDITION DATE PAGE METHOD

ADU UNIT..............................................................3-N-1 [12] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing

(PS70)/Leading Edge PS (PS43) ...........3-N-2

[4] Removing and Reinstalling the

[7] Removing and Reinstalling the

[10] Removing and Reinstalling the ADU

MODEL MANUAL REVISED EDITION DATE PAGE METHOD

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND

DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

:Prohibition when using the copier.

:Direction when using the copier.

MODEL MANUAL REVISED EDITION DATE PAGE METHOD

4 [1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY

DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS

4 • Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.

• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)

4 • Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by KMBT

4 • Using parts not specified by KMBT

MODEL MANUAL REVISED EDITION DATE PAGE METHOD

[2] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

WARNING: Wall Outlet

WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

MODEL MANUAL REVISED EDITION DATE PAGE METHOD

WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.

WARNING: Ground Lead

WARNING: Ground Lead

WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place

WARNING: Nonoperational Handling

CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity

• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.

CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing

• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from

• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered

MODEL MANUAL REVISED EDITION DATE PAGE METHOD

DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered

WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

• When disconnecting connectors, grasp the connector, not the cable.

• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make

WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

DANGER: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

[3] MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

MODEL MANUAL REVISED EDITION DATE PAGE METHOD